CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
Cornell University
The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www. archive.org/details/cu31924023200748
oar
e ae
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
MONIER WILLIAMS.
London:
HENRY FROWDE,
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
7 PATERNOSTER ROW.
SOLD ALSO BY
फ. प. ALLEN AND CO.
WATERLOO PLACE,
Publishers to the India Office.
A
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR
SANSKRIT LANGUAGE
THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGES OF EUROPE,
FOR THE USE OF
ENGLISH STUDENTS.
BY
MONIER WILLIAMS, M.A, D.C.L.,
Hon, Doctor in Law of the Untversity of Calcutta;
fon, Member of the Bombay Astatic Society;
Member of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, and of the Oriental Society of Germany;
Boden Professor of Sanskrit tn the University of Oxford.
FOURTH EDITION.
ENLARGED AND IMPROVED.
Oxford:
AT THE OLARENDON PRESS.
M.DCCC.LXXVII.
[All rights reserved. ]
PREFACE
TO THE FOURTH EDITION.
NOW that this Grammar has reached a fourth edition it
may, perhaps, without presumption, be allowed to rest on
its own merits. I have, therefore, dispensed with much
of the prefatory matter which introduced the previous
editions.
Any one who compares the present Grammar with its
predecessor will see at once the difference between the
two, not indeed in its structure and arrangement, nor
even in the numbering of the rules, but in the fuller and
more complete explanation of points of detail.
It may be well, however, to draw attention to some of
the most noteworthy alterations and improvements.
A table shewing the interchange of letters in the three
sister languages, Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, has been
given at pages 18-20.
The list of suffixes at pages 57-75 has been consider-
ably enlarged, and arranged in alphabetical order under
each declension.
The subject of declension has been elucidated by a
clearer method of synopsis.
A more complete account of Sanskrit accentuation has
been given at the end of the volume.
The Reading Exercises have been slightly curtailed.
The publication by the Delegates of the Clarendon Press
of such a Class-book as the Nala, and quite recently of
the Sakuntald, sufficiently supplies what is likely to be
needed for the prosecution of the study of Sanskrit after
the elements of Grammar have been acquired.
४ 3
vi PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION,
Four indices instead of two have been appended.
In order to bring the present edition into harmony
with the Greek and Latin grammars now in use, some
of the grammatical terms have been altered, e.g. suffix
has been substituted for affiz; stem for base; special
and general tenses for conjugational and non-conjugational
tenses respectively.
Some errors which, notwithstanding all my efforts,
crept into the last edition have been corrected, and a
few other improvements effected. But I dare not even
now hope to have attained the standard of perfection.
Sanskrit is far too vast and intricate a subject to admit
of such pretensions. I can, however, with truth affirm,
that I have done what I could to bring the present
work up to the level of the scholarship of the day;
and my acknowledgments are due to Mr. E. L. Hogarth,
M.A., of Brasenose College, for his aid in conducting
the sheets through the Press.
In conclusion I may, perhaps, be permitted to express
a hope that my second visit to India will add to my
powers of improving any future edition that may be
required, as it certainly will increase my ability to pro-
mote a more general knowledge of the Sanskrit language
and literature among my own fellow-countrymen, to
whose rule a vast Eastern Empire has been committed,
and who cannot hope, except through Sanskrit, to gain
a proper acquaintance with its spoken dialects, or to
understand the mind, read the thoughts, and reach the
very heart and soul of its vast populations.
M. W.
OxrorD, October 1876.
CONTENTS.
Cuap. I.—Lerrers ‘
Pronunciation . : ४ र + : .
Classification
Interchange of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin
Method of writing .
Cuap. IT.—SanpuI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS
Sect. I. Changes of vowels
Sect. II. Changes of consonants
Cuap. ITT.—Roots, AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS
Formation of the stems of nouns by suffixes
(^. [V.—DEcLENSION OF NOUNS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
Sect. I. Inflexion of nouns whose stems end in vowels
Sect. IT. Infiexion of nouns whose stems end in consonants र
Sect. III. Adjectives
Sect. IV. Numerals.
Cuap, V.—PRonouns
Cuap. VI.—Vergs. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS .
Terminations
Summary of the ten conjugational classes
The augment
Reduplication ४ ५ ६ ‡
Formation of the stem in the four Special tenses :
Of group I. or verbs of the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth classes
Of groups II. and III.—Preliminary observations.
The new rules of Sandhi required for group IT :
Of group II. or verbs of the second, third, and seventh classes
Of group III. or verbs of the fifth, eighth, and ninth classes .
Formation of the stem in the six General tenses :
Perfect
First and Second Future ४
Rules for inserting or rejecting the vowel द .
Aorist :
Precative or Benedictive
Conditional
Infinitive .
Passive verbs
Causal verbs
Desiderative verbs
Frequentative or Intensive verbs .
Nominal verbs
95
113
118
123
133
136
144
146
147
150
155
157
160
166
168
178
180
186
193
196
196
197
203
209
213
217
viii CONTENTS.
Participles .
Participial nouns of agency .
Examples of verbs inflected at full :
Table of verbs of the ten conjugational classes inflected at full
Table of passive verbs inflected at full .
Auxiliary verbs conjugated
Group I. Verbs of the first class conjugated
Verbs of the fourth class conjugated
Verbs of the sixth class conjugated
Verbs of the tenth class conjugated 9
Group II. Verbs of the second class conjugated .
Verbs of the third class conjugated
Verbs of the seventh class conjugated .
Group ITI. Verbs of the fifth class conjugated
Verbs of the eighth class conjugated
Verbs of the ninth class conjugated
Passive verbs conjugated
Causal verbs conjugated.
Desiderative verbs conjugated .
Frequentative or Intensive verbs conjugated . ४ £ &
घ ५९. VII.—InDECLINABLE WORDS.
Adverbs
Conjunctions
Prepositions
Adverbs in government with nouns
Interjections
°
Cuap. VIII—CompounD worps.
Sect. I. Compound nouns
Tat-purusha or dependent compounds .
Dvandva or copulative (aggregative) compounds
Karma-dhéraya or descriptive (determinative) compounds
Dvigu or numeral (collective) compounds
Avyayi-bhava or adverbial (indeclinable) compounds
Bahu-vrihi or relative compounds .
Complex compounds >
Changes of certain words in certain compounds
Sect. II. Compound verbs
Sect. ITI. Compound adverbs
Cuap. [X.—Syntax ;
Cuap. X.—EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES
ACCENTUATION
Inpicrs . ९ € स
List OF COMPOUND OR CONJUNCT CONSONANTS
PAGE
219
234
235
244
249
250
266
271
276
279
287
291
296
301
304
309
311
312 `
314
317
321
322
323
324
325
327
330
333
334
335
336
341
344
347
353
354
387
392
397
401
415
CHAPTER I.
LETTERS.
1. Tue Deva-ndgari or Nagari character (or its modifications *
in which the Sanskrit language is usually written, is adapted to the
expression of nearly every gradation of sound; and almost every
letter has a fixed and invariable pronunciation (see, however, 16).
There are fourteen vowels (or without क thirteen, see 3. d) and
thirty-three simple consonants. To these may be added a nasal sign,
standing for either true or substitute Anusvdra (see 6), and a sign
for a hard breathing, called Visarga (see 8). They are here first
exhibited in the order followed in dictionaries. All the vowels,
excepting a, have two forms; the first is the initial, the second the
medial or non-initial,
‘VOWELS.
Ba M4 इ; F465 VF WD eth
ट्ट co His 3 ट rt, ए a ed ay 0, मो au.
_ Nasal sign called true or proper Anusvdra, * n. Substitute
Anusvéra, * m.
Sign for a hard breathing, called Visarga, २ h.
CONSONANTS,
Gutturals, Ak ख Wo घ Fn
Palatals, च इ Wy Wr An
Cerebrals, टट S th $d Gd श
Dentals, तः य Sd Wdh An
Labials, प फ बऽ Ath Am
Semivowels, Gy Tr mi Av
Sibilants, Ys ष As
Aspirate, Bh
‘Two characters, क्छ ¢ aoe Jh (गीला = इ d, dh), are used in the Veda.
* Such as the Bengali, Gujarati, &c. In the South of India Sanskrit is gene-
rally written, not in the Deva-nagari, but in the Telugu, Kanarese, and Malayélam
B
2 LETTERS.
The characters are written from left to right, like the Roman.
The compound or conjunct consonants (see 5) may be multi-
plied to the extent of four or five hundred. The most common
are given here. A more complete list will be found at the end of
the volume.
THE MORE COMMON CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
क्त, कः Hor क्र, क १८ क, | ksh, Bkhy, TA gn, WT,
गु gl, a ghr, Erk, F ng, च ८८ च्छ ८4४, च्य ly, TH ¢, ज्ञ jn, ज jr,
aid, न्ड १८0, ay, tt ख ५ ज्ञ %, य्य @ Cu, शठ ath, Bw vd,
Bonn, Wry, ait, त्य ८1, त्न 2, त्म 10, Aly, चण Air, त्व tv, wis
थ्य thy, द dg, द ddh, 3 dbh, च dm, a dy, दर dr, द्व dv, च्य dhy, ध्व dhv
न्त nt, end, Ann, Any, प्र pt, प्य py, प्र, W pl, ज 4, = bd, व्य by,
a br, भ्य bhy, चर bhr, Mm mbh, म्न mm, म्य my, F mil, A yy, के Tk,
मै 102, =a lp, all, avy, avr, a ८ ya Sy, Bsr, छ VG Sv, ट sht,
ट shth, व्ण shn, प्य shy, स sk, wa skh, स्त ॐ; स्य sth, @ sn, स्म sm,
स्य sy, Bsr, ख sv, स्स ss, ahm, ahy, ह hl, क्य kty, क्त ध, क्र kt,
छण kshn, एस kshm, et kshy, Ta gnij, ग्भ्य ghhy, MH gry, इ wht, Sy why,
च्छ्य dthy, - च्छ ८८0 Te ndy, wa tsn, त्य tmy, च्य 27४, | tsy, = tir,
चव 11४, = ddy, a ddhy, a dbhy, dry, न्य nty, म्न्य mby, | rdr, Bryy,
8 rvv, ¥ shir, स्य sthn, स्य sty, स्त्र str, rea tsny, wa ntry, A risy,
त्ख्य risny.
‘
characters, as well as in the Grantha (or Grantham), which is a name for the character
used for Sanskrit in the Tamil country, the Tamil alphabet being too defective to
represent all the necessary sounds. In the second edition of this Grammar I gave
a comparative table of old Inscription characters from Mr. Edward Thomas’
edition of Prinsep’s Indian Antiquities, which shows that the present form of
Deva-ndgari character is traceable to the inscriptions of Asoka, who is called
Piyadasi for Priyadarsin—a well-known Buddhist king, grandson of Candra-gupta
=Sandrakottos—and who must have reigned over nearly the whole of India, his
capital being Pétali-putra (=Pali-bothra, the modern Patna). These inscriptions
are found on rocks at Giri-nagara (Girndr) in Gujarat on the Western coast, and
at Dhauli in Kuttack on the Eastern coast (in the province of Orissa); and again
at a place called Kapurdigiri, quite N. of the Panjab, a little to the E. of Purusha-
pura (Peshdwar). It is from the Girndr rock-inscriptions that the present Deva-
ndgari is most evidently derived, and these are not yet clearly traceable to a
Phenician origin, those of Kapurdigiri being more so.
LETTERS, 3
Observe—In reading the following pages for the first time, the
attention should be confined to the large type.
Observe also—When reference is made to other parts of the
Grammar, the numbers will denote the paragraphs, not the pages.
The letters (except r, called Repha, and except the nasal sign
called Anusvdra and the sign for the hard breathing called Visarga)
have no names (like the names in the Greek alphabet), but the
consonants are enunciated with the vowel a. Native grammarians,
in designating any letter, add the word कार kdra; thus, अकार a-kdra,
‘the letter a;’ ककार ka-kdra, ‘the letter ka
NUMERICAL FIGURES.
४ ५ & 9 ४ ९ १० ११ १२ ३४५
4 5 6 7 ४ 9 10 11 72 34
THE VOWELS AND THE METHOD OF WRITING THEM.
2. The short vowel च @ is never written unless it begin a word,
because it is supposed to be inherent in every consonant. Thus,
ak is written WR, but ka is written क; so that in such words as
कनक kanaka, नगर nagara, &c., no vowel has to be written. The
mark \ under the ¢ of अक्, called Virdma (see 9), indicates a con-
sonantal stop, that is, the absence of any vowel, inherent or other-
wise, after a final consonant. It is omitted in the first tables that
the letters may be kept unencumbered by additional marks.
a. The other vowels, if written after a consonant, take the place of
the inherent a. They assume two forms, according as they are initial.
or not initial, Thus, wre dk, का kd; इक् ik, कि ki.
९. Observe here, that the short vowel fi, when initial, is written
in its right place, but when not initial, is always written before the
letter after which it is pronounced. Hence, in order to write such
a word as iti, the letters would have to be arranged thus, dit इति.
c. Perhaps the true explanation of this peculiarity is that in the earliest alphabets
the two i’s were written over the consonant to which they belonged, short é
inclining to the left, and long ¢ to the right, a perpendicular stroke having been
afterwards added.
3. The long vowels 1 é and वै £, not initial, take their proper place
after a consonant. Also the non-initial ० and au (which are formed
by placing ~ and ^ over 1 d), like 1d, take their proper place after’
B 2
4 LETTERS.
their consonants; thus, को Xo, को kau. The vowels u, ४, ri, ri, li,
not initial, are written under the consonants after which they are
pronounced; as, कु ku, कू ku, कृ kri, कृ kri, कु kiri.
a. Except when ४ or ४ follows र् 9, in which case the method of
writing is peculiar; thus, र् ru, रू ru.
£. When, however, the vowel = ri follows tr the vowel is written
in its initial form and r in the crescent shape placed over it (see 5. a);
thus, निच्छैति nirriti, ‘the goddess of destruction,’
€. The vowels ri, ri, iri and Iré are peculiar to Sanskrit (see 11. c).
% yi only occurs in the root RY Alrip, ‘to make,’ and its derivatives.
d. The long @ Ji is only used in technical grammatical ex-
planations; strictly it has no existence, and is useless except as
contributing to the completeness of the alphabetical system.
e. The vowels e and ai, not initial, are written above the consonants
after which they are pronounced ; thus, के ke, के kai.
f. In a few words initial vowels follow other vowels; e.g. सच्छृणिन् a-rinin,
‘without debt ;? 7118 go-agra, ‘a number of cows;’ WIM pra-iiga, ‘the pole of
achariot;’ तित tétaii, ‘a sieve.’
METHOD OF WRITING THE SIMPLE CONSONANTS.
4. The consonants have only one form, whether initial or not
initial, And here note that in every consonant, and in the initial
vowels, there is a perpendicular stroke or the commencement of
one, and that all have a horizontal line at the top; but in two
of the letters, y dh and न् bh, this horizontal line is broken. In
writing rapidly, the student will do well to form the perpendicular
stroke first, then the distinctive parts of the letter, and lastly the
horizontal line. The natives, however, sometimes form the horizontal
line first.
METHOD OF WRITING THE CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
5. The necessity for conjunct consonants is caused by the fact
that every consonant is supposed to have the vowel ख a inherent
in it, so that it is never necessary to write this vowel, excepting at
the begining of a word or, in a few cases, of a syllable (see 3. f).
Hence when any simple consonants stand alone in any word, the
short vowel स ¢ must always be pronounced after them; but when
they appear in conjunction with any other vowel, this other vowel
of course takes the place of short ख a. Thus such a word as
LETTERS. 5
कल्ानतया would be pronounced kaldnatayd, where long wt ठ being
written after ए and y takes the place of the inherent vowel. But
supposing that, instead of kaldnatayd, the word had to be pronounced
kléntyd, how are we to know that AJ and nty have to be uttered
without the intervention of any vowel? This occasions the necessity
for conjunct or compound consonants. KJ and nty must then be.
combined together thus, क्, न्य्, and the word is written ara.
And here we have illustrated the two methods of compounding con-
Sonants; viz. 1st, by writing them one above the other; andly, by:
placing them side by side, omitting in all, except the last, the per-
pendicular line which lies to the right.
a. Some letters, however, change their form entirely when combined
with other consonants. Thus tr, when it is the first letter of a
conjunct consonant, is written above in the form of a crescent,
as in कूमे kirma, कायै kértsnya; and when the last, is written below
in the form of a small stroke, as in the word क्रमेण kramena.
6, So again in q* ksha and ज्ञ † jna the simple elements कष् and
ज् ज् are scarcely traceable.
c. In some conjunct consonants the simple letters slightly change
their form; as, का a becomes न्न in श्च ८८ ; ट् ¢ with य ya becomes
a dya; ठ् d with धे dha becomes @ ddha; ह् d with भ bha be-
comes द dbha; qe with t ra becomes च tra or a tra; क् ¢ with त ta
becomes क्त Ata.
d. Observe, that when r comes in the middle of a conjunct consonant, it takes
the same form as at the end; thus, ग grya, ग्र gra. When conjunct consonants
commencing with = are followed by the vowels ४ 4, e, ai, 0, au, or by a nasal
symbol (see 6), then “ is for the convenience of typography written on the right
of all; thus, fat rni, UT rné, a rke, at rkau, कै rkam.
ANUSVARA AND ANUNASIKA,
6. Anusvéra (* m), i.e. ‘after-sound,’ is a nasal sound which
always belongs to a preceding vowel, and can never be used like’
a nasal consonant to begin a syllable (though like a consonant it
imparts, in conjunction with a following consonant, prosodial length
to the preceding short vowel). It is denoted by a simple dot,
* Sometimes formed thus त्ते, and pronounced kya in Bengali.
‘+ This compound is sometimes pronounced gya or nya, though it will be more’
convenient to represent it by its proper equivalent jia,
6 LETTERS.
which ought to come-either immediately over the vowel after which
the nasalization is sounded, or on the right of the vowel-mark ; thus,
कं kam, & kum, किं kim, कीं kim.
This dot serves two purposes. It marks, 1. the Anusvara
proper or True Anusvdra; 2. a short substitute for the five nasal
consonants; in which latter case it may be called Sudstitute
Anusvéra,
a, True Anusvdra denotes the nasalization of the vowel which
precedes it before ज् $ ash, स् 5 and ह् ¢ in the body of words.
It is then pronounced with the nose only (like » in the French
mon, &c.), and will in this Grammar be represented in the Indo-
Romanic type by 2, as in Wy ansa, संहति anhati.
But since the true Anusvdéra must take the place of a final म् m
when the three sibilants श ई, ष् sh, Hs, and the aspirate Rh (but see
7. ¢) follow; and also generally when र् 7 follows at the beginning
of a word (see ९. next page); it is then in this Grammar expressed
by m; thus, तम् शतम् is written तं WAR tam satrum; तम् राजानम्
becomes तं जानम् tam rdjdnam; and सम् with root € is written
संह samhri.
6. Substitute Anusvdra is sometimes used, for shortness, as a
substitute for any of the five nasal consonants ङः ४, न् 9 2, न्
म् १, which belong to the five classes of letters (see I 5); when no
vowel intervenes between these and a following consonant in the
middle of the same word (thus the syllables BR ink, इच् 2/८, wR and,
इन्त् int, इम्म् tmp may for shortness be written FH, इच्, चेद्, इत्, इप्)
In these cases’ Anusvéra must be pronounced like the nasal con-
sonant for which it has been substituted, and in this Grammar it
will always be represented in Indo-Romanic type by these nasal
consonants,
But Anusvara is more usually substituted for these nasals when
final and resulting from the euphonic adaptation of the final m of
accus. cases sing., nom, cases neut., some adverbs and persons of
the verb to a following word (see 60), It will then in this Grammar
be represented in the Indo-Romanic type by m, as in the cases
mentioned in 6. a.
c. Anusvara is even used in some printed books, though less
correctly, for the final म् m of the words specified in the last
paragraph when they stand in a pause (i.e, at the end of a
LETTERS, q
sentence or clause, or when not followed by another word). In
such cases, too, it should be represented by m.
द. But Anusvara is never admitted as a substitute for the original
final न् of a pada or inflected word (as in accus. cases plur., loc.
cases of pronominals, the 3rd pers. plur. and pres. part. of verbs, &c.,
see 54), unless the next word begin with ¢, f, ¢, or their aspirates,
when, by 53, a sibilant is interposed before the initial letter.
९. And in the case of roots ending in 42 or म् m, these final
nasals, if not dropped, pass into Anusvara before terminations or
suffixes beginning with a sibilant or h, but are not changed before
semivowels ; thus मन् + स्यते = मंस्यते mansyate, ‘he will think ;? मन् +
ये = मन्ये manye, ‘I think’ (617); यम् + स्यति = यंस्यति yansyati, ‘he will
restrain ;? गम् {य = गम्य gamya, ‘accessible’ (602); नम् + र = नख
namra, ‘bent.’ सम् followed by रज् is सम्राज् samrdj, ‘a sovereign’?
J. Hence it appears that the nasal sign Anusvara is peculiarly
the nasal of the three sibilants ण् §, ष् sh, @ s, and the aspirate ह् ¢;
and that the true Anusvara always occurs before these letters. It
is also to a certain degree the nasal of the semivowel र् 7; so that
these five consonants having a nasal sign of their own have no
relationship to the corresponding nasal consonant of their respective
classes.
7. That Anusvara is less peculiarly the nasal of the semivowels
is evident from e, above. Hence म् m final in a word (not a root)
may, before qy, % J, व् ४५ either pass into Anusvara or be repre-
sented by a, a, ४९ or assimilate itself to these letters; thus सम् + यम
= संयम or सयैथम, यम् + त्टोकम् = यं त्टोकम् or Talay.
In the latter case the nasal character of य् y and लू / is
denoted by a nasal symbol called Anundsika (i.e. ‘through the
nose,’ sometimes called Candra-vindu, ‘the dot in the crescent ;
which is also applied to mark the nasality of a final त्व् ८ deduced
from a final न् x when followed by initial % J, see 56. Of course
the word wary samyané, ‘ going conformably’ (formed from समि + अच्),
retains the m.
a. And this Anundsika = is not only the sign of the nasality of
य् y, % ¢ and व् », in the preceding cases, but also marks the nasality
of vowels, though in a less degree than Anusvara, see 11. f-
४. In the Veda Anundsika is written for a final न् छ after a long vowel before
another vowel; as, Tat इन्द्रासि for वस्यान् इन्द्रासि Rig-veda णा, 1, 6.
8 LETTERS.
९. Observe—A final म् m before hm, hn, Why, A hl, F hv, may either be
changed to Anusv4ra or undergo assimilation with the second letter; thus कि
इलयति or किम् दलयति, किं Et or किन् हूते, किं दयः or किय द्यः, &c. (see 7).
VISARGA, JIHVAMULIYA, AND UPADHMANIYA.
8. The sign Visarga, ‘emission of breath,’ (sometimes said to
derive its name from symbolizing the rejection of a letter in pro-
nunciation,) usually written thus :, but more properly in the form
of two small circles ९, is used to represent a distinctly audible and
harder aspiration than the letter ¢ A. It is reckoned under the véhya-
prayatna, and is said, like the hard consonants, to be a-ghosha, without
the soft articulation. This sign is never the representative of ह् fh.
Although conveniently represented by 4, it should be borne in mind
that Visarga (A) is a harder aspirate than ह् A, and is in fact a kind
of sibilant, being often a substitute for s and r preceded by vowels
whenever the usual consonantal sound of these letters passes into an
aspiration at the end of a sentence or through the influence of a
kh, kh, p, ph, or a sibilant commencing the next word.
And since, according to native grammarians, स् $ ought not to be
allowed at the end of a complete word, all those inflections of nouns
and verbs which end in s and stand separate from other words are,
in native Grammars, made to end in Visarga.
But in this Grammar such inflections are allowed to retain their
final स् s. We have only to bear in mind that this 5 is liable at the
end of a sentence, or when followed by certain consonants, to pass
into an audible breathing more distinct than s in the French les or
the English isle, viscount, when it is represented by ¢ (:)
In some parts of India Visarga has a slightly reverberating sound
very difficult of imitation ; thus tra: 7400144 is almost like समह् rdmaha,
wfra: agnih like wirafg agnihi, शिवैः Sivaih like शिवहि Sivaihi.
a. An Ardha-visarga, “half-visarga,’ or modification of the symbol Visarga, in
the form of two semicircles ह + is sometimes employed before k, kh, and 2, ph.
Before the two former letters this symbol is properly called Jikvdmuliya, and the
organ of its enunciation said to be the root of the tongue (jihvd-mila). Before
2 and ph its proper name is Upadhmdntya, ‘to be breathed upon,’ and its organ
of utterance is then the lips (oshtha).
The Jihviamdliya and Upadhméniya are therefore to be regarded as the sibilants
of the guttural and labial classes respectively. (See Pén. 1. 1, 9.)
४. The sign Ardha-visarga is now rarely seen in printed Sanskrit texts. In the
LETTERS. 9
Vedas the Upadhmaniya occurs, but only after an Anusvdéra or Anundsika;
thus, 74x wif or नह पाहि, and in this case also the symbol Visarga may be
used for it,
VIRAMA, AVAGRAHA, &C.
9. The Virdma, ‘pause’ or ‘stop,’ placed under a consonant (thus
क् ४), indicates the absence of the inherent wa, by help of which the
consonant is pronounced.
Observe—Virdma properly means the pause of the voice at the
end of a sentence. In some MSS. it is employed like a mark of
punctuation at the close of a sentence ending with a consonant,
while the mark | is the proper means of denoting the close of a
sentence ending in a vowel, all the preceding words being written
without separation, because supposed to be pronounced without
pause,
10, The mark ऽ (Avagraha, sometimes called Ardhdkdra, half the
letter a), placed between two words, denotes the elision (lopa) or
suppression (abhinidhdna) of an initial श्ल after @e or Bo final
preceding. It corresponds to our apostrophe in some analogous
cases. Thus, तेऽपि 1८ ’pi for ते अपि fe api.
a. In books printed in Calcutta the mark § is sometimes used to resolve a long
द resulting from the blending of a final ¢ with an initial a or द, thus तयाऽ U3 for
तया सपर्य, usually written WATTST. Sometimes a double mark ss denotes an
initial long सा. The mark s is also used in the Veda as the sign of a hiatus between
vowels, and in the pada text to separate the component parts of a compound or of
other grammatical forms.
9. The half pause | is a stop or mark of punctuation, usually placed at the end
of the first line of a couplet or stanza.
९. The whole pause ॥ 78 placed at the end of a couplet, or is used like a full stop.
d. The mark of repetition ° indicates that a word or sentence has to be repeated.
It is also used to abbreviate a word, just as in English we use a full point; thus पर
stands for पव, as chap. for chapter; so A for शुभ.
PRONUNCIATION OF SANSKRIT VOWELS.
11. The vowels in Sanskrit are pronounced for the most part as
in Italian or French, though occasional words in English may exem-
plify their sound; but every vowel is supposed to be alpa-prana,
‘ pronounced with a slight breathing’ (see 14. a).
a. Since च a is inherent in every consonant, the student should
be careful to acquire the correct pronunciation of this letter. There
८
10 LETTERS.
are many words in English which afford examples of its sound, such
as vocal, cedar, zebra, organ. But in English the vowel ४ in such
words as fun, bun, sun, more frequently represents this obscure sound
of a; and even the other vowels may occasionally be pronounced
with this sound, as in her, sir, son.
The long vowel चा द is pronounced as a in the English father,
far, cart; ड् ४ as the é in pin, lily; ई £ as the 2 in marine, police ;
च ४ 28 the u in push; क ४ 28 the wu in rude.
c. The vowel ¥ ri, peculiar to Sanskrit, is pronounced as the 77
in merrily, where the i of ri is less perceptible than in the syllable
ri, composed of the consonant 7 and the vowel i*. च. १7 is pro-
nounced nearly as the vi in chagrin, being hardly distinguishable from
the syllable सै; but in the case of the vowels १६ and 77 there is a mere
vibration of the tongue in the direction of the upper gums, whereas in
pronouncing the consonant 7, the tongue should actually touch them
(see 19, 20): श € as the € in prey, there ; Slo as in so; रे ai as ai
in aisle; st au as au in the German Haus or as ou in the English
house +. धे एद and % ए differ little in sound from the letter ल् ८
with the vowels ri and 77 annexed.
d. Hence it appears that every simple vowel in Sanskrit has a
short and a long form, and that each vowel has one invariable
sound; so that the beginner can never, as in other languages, be
in doubt as to pronunciation or prosody.
८. Note, however, that Sanskrit possesses no short टं and 6 in opposition to the
long diphthongal sounds of e and o.
f. Although for all practical purposes it is sufficient to regard vowels as either
short or long, it should be borne in mind that native grammarians give eighteen
different modifications of each of the vowels a, i, u, ri, and twelve of द्र, which are
thus explained :—Each of the first four vowels is supposed to have three prosodial
lengths or measures (mdtrd), viz. a short (Arasva), a long (dérgha), and a prolated
* That there is not, practically, much difference between the pronunciation of
the vowel ri and the syllable ft ri may be gathered from the fact that some words
beginning with चु are also found written with रि, and vice versa; thus, रिषि and
safe, रिषि and क्षि, fom and FA, Still the distinction between the definition
of a vowel and consonant at 19 and 20 should be borne in mind. There is no doubt
that in English the sound of ri in the words merrily and rich is different, and
that the former approaches nearer to the sound of a vowel.
+ Colloquially in India ai is often pronounced rather like e and aw like o.
LETTERS. 11
(pluta); the long being equal to two, and the prolated to three short vowels.
Each of these three modifications may be uttered with a high tone, or a low tone,
or a tone between high and low; or in other words, may have the acute, or the
grave, or the circumflex accent. This gives nine modifications to a, i, u, ri; and
each of these again may be regarded either as nasal or non-nasal, according as it
is pronounced with the nose and mouth, or with the mouth alone. Hence result
eighteen varieties of every vowel, excepting प्रू, e, ai, 0, au, which have only
twelve, because the first does not possess the long and the last four have not
the short prosodial time. A prolated vowel is marked with three lines underneath
or with 3 on one side, thus ST or सा ३ (see Pan. 1. 2, 27).
PRONUNCIATION OF SANSKRIT CONSONANTS.
12. Rk, TJ, Up, ब् ¢ are pronounced as in English.
a, 71g has always the sound of g in gun, give, never of g in gin.
b. च् ८ is pronounced like ch in church, or as ८ in Italian.
Observe that च् ८ is a simple consonantal sound, although repre-
sented in English words by ch. It is a modification or softening
of k, just as j is of g, the organ of utterance being in the palate,
a little in advance of the throat. Hence, in Sanskrit and its cognate
languages, the palatals ८ and j are often exchanged with the gutturals
kandg. See 25.
९. तद् dare more dental than in English, ¢ being something
like ¢ in stick, and d like th in this; thus veda ought to be pro-
nounced rather like vetha. But in real fact we have no sound
exactly equivalent to the Indian dentals ¢ and d. The sound of th
in thin, this, is really dental, but, so to speak, over-dentalized, the
tongue being forced through the teeth instead of against them.
Few Englishmen acquire the correct pronunciation of the Indian
dentals. They are said to be best pronounced by resting the end of
the tongue against the inside of the front teeth and then suddenly
removing it.
13. ट् a4. The sound of these cerebral letters is in practice
hardly to be distinguished from the sound of our English ¢ and d.
Properly, however, the Sanskrit cerebrals should be uttered with a
duller and deeper intonation, produced by keeping the tongue as far
back in the head (cerebrum) as possible, and slightly turning it
upwards, A Hindi, however, would always write any English
word or name containing ¢ and d with the cerebral letters. Thus
such words as trip, drip, London would be written feq, डिप्, करडन्.
। ५2
12 LETTERS.
In Bengal the cerebral = ¢ and द् dh have nearly the sound of a dull r; so
that viddla, ‘a cat,’ is pronounced like virdla
In some words both @f and इ क seem interchangeable with र् 7 and J; so
that WS khot, ‘to be lame,’ may be also written खोड, खोर, Wis. . In Prdkrit
cerebral letters often stand for the Sanskrit dentals. Cerebrals rarely begin words
in Sanskrit.
14. ख् kh, च् gh, द् th, ® jh, द् th, द् dh, च् th, ध् dh, क् ph,
भ् bh. These are merely aspirated forms of simple consonants.
They are not double or compound letters; A is only added to
denote a distinct aspiration. Thus ख् is pronounced like kA in
inkhorn, not like the Greek 2८; | as th in anthill, not as in think ;
ष् as ph in uphill, not as in physic, but colloquially ph is often
pronounced like f (as phala is pronounced fala); bh as in
cabhorse. Care must be taken not to interpolate a vowel before
the aspirate. Indeed it is most important to acquire the habit
of pronouncing the aspirated consonants distinctly. Dé and
dhd, prishta and prishtha, stamba and stambha, kara and khara
have very different meanings, and are pronounced very differently.
Few Englishmen pay sufficient attention to this, although the
correct sound is easily attainable. The simple rule is to breathe
hard while uttering the aspirated consonant, and then an aspirated
sound will come out with the consonant before the succeeding
vowel.
a, With regard to aspiration we may note that according to Pan. ब. 1, 9, the
letters are all either slightly aspirated (alpa-prdéna) or more strongly aspirated
(mahd-préna). To the former belong vowels, semivowels, nasals, and k, g, ¢, j, ¢,
d, t, d, p, b, which are supposed to require a slight breathing in uttering them
when they are initial. The mahd-prdna letters are kh, gh, ch, jh, th, dh, th, dh, ph,
bh, $ sh, s, h, Anusvara, Visarga, Jihvamuliya, and Upadhmantya.
15. ङ् न् # Wn, An, Rm. Each of the five classes of
consonants in Sanskrit has its own nasal sound, represented by a
separate nasal letter. In English and most other languages the
same fivefold division of nasal sounds might be made, though we
have only one nasal letter to express the guttural, palatal, cerebral,
and dental nasal sounds. The truth is, that in all languages the
nasal letters take their sound from the organ employed in uttering
the consonant that follows them. Thus in English it will be found
that guttural, palatal, cerebral, dental, and labial nasals are followed
by consonants of the same classes, as in ink, sing, inch, under, plinth,
LETTERS. 13
imp. If such words existed in Sanskrit, the distinction of nasal
sounds would be represented by distinct letters; thus, उङ्क, fax,
इच्, BW, freq, wy. Compare 6.
a. It should be observed, however, that the guttural nasal ङः », which is rarely
found by itself at the end of a word in Sanskrit, never at the beginning, probably
has, when standing alone, the sound of ng in sing, where the sound of g is almost
imperceptible. So that the English sing might be written fag. The palatal न् ष
is only found in conjunction with palatal consonants, as in #¢, Fv, च् 4, and
jn. This last may be pronounced like ny, or like gv in the French campagne.
In Bengal, however, it always has the sound of gy: thus सज्ञा is pronounced rdgyd.
The cerebral nasal ण् » is generally the result of a preceding cerebral letter, as
explained at 58. It is found in conjunction with cerebral consonants, but is not
found at the beginning of pure Sanskrit words (except when used artificially as a
substitute for roots beginning with 2). It is pronounced, as the other cerebrals,
by turning the tip of the tongue rather upwards. The dental and labial nasals
न् १ and म् m are pronounced with the same organs as the class of letters to
which they belong. See 21.
16. य् र् 7, & I, qv are pronounced as in English. Their
relationship to and interchangeableness with (samprasdrana) the
vowels i, ri, ri, u, respectively, should never be forgotten. See
22. ५,
When व् v is the last member of a conjunct consonant it is
pronounced like w, as द्वार is pronounced dwara ; but not after 7, as
aa sarva. To prevent confusion, however, व् will in all cases be
represented by v, thus द्वार dvdra. See Preface to Sanskrit-English
Dictionary, p. xix.
a. The character @% 1 is peculiar to the Veda. It appears to be a mixture of
% ए and र्», representing a liquid sound formed like the cerebrals by turning
the tip of the tongue upwards; and it is often in the Veda a substitute for the
cerebral इ क when between two vowels, as GOR Th is for द् dh.
b. The semivowels r and / are frequently interchanged, + being an old form of J.
Cf. roots rabh, rip, with the later forms १067, lip. (See examples at 2 5.)
17, 148, Ash, Hs, FA. Of these, श् § is a palatal sibilant,
and is pronounced like sh or like s in sure ; (compounded with r it
is sounded more like s in sum, but the pronunciation of ई varies in
different provinces and different words.) 4 sh is a cerebral, rather
softer than our sh. That its pronunciation is hardly to be dis-
tinguished from that of the palatal is proved by the number of
words written indiscriminately with y or ष; as, कोश or कोष. This ष्
14 LETTERS.
is often corrupted into ख् in conversation, and @ ksh is often pro-
nounced like च् ८. The dental स् s is pronounced as the common
English s. Different sibilants, of course, exist in English, though
represented by one character, as in the words sure, session, pressure,
stick, sun.
ह 4 18 pronounced as in English, and is guttural.
CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
18. In the arrangement of the alphabet at page 1, all the con-
sonants, excepting the semivowels, sibilants, and 4, were distributed
under the five heads of gutturals (kanthya), palatals (¢dlavya), cere-
brals (mdrdhanya), dentals (dantya), and labials (oshthya). We are
now to show that all the forty-seven letters, vowels, semivowels,
and consonants, may be referred to one or other of these five grand
classes, according to the organ principally concerned in their pro-
nunciation, whether the throat, the palate, the upper part of the
palate, the teeth, or the lips *
a. We have also to show that all the letters may be regarded
according to another principle of division, and may be all arranged
under the head of either HARD or sort, according as the effort
of utterance is attended with expansion (vivdra), or contraction
(samvdra), of the throat.
* q. According to some native grammars the classes (varga) of consonants are
distinguished thus: ka-varga the class of guttural letters beginning with &, in-
cluding the nasal, ¢a-varga the palatals, ta-varga the cerebrals, ta-varga the
dentals, pa-varga the labials, ya-varga the semivowels, sa-varga the sibilants and
the aspirate h.
6. In the Siva-stitras of Panini the letters are arranged in fourteen groups:
thus, a £ ४ u—ri lri k—e 0 n—ai au é—hy vr {ए n—am nnn m—jh bh A—gh
dh dh sh—j bg dd $—kh ph ch th th ét tu—k p y—S shsr—hl. By taking the
first letter of any series and joining it to the last of any other series various classes
of letters are designated; thus al is the technical name for the whole alphabet ;
hal for all the consonants; aé the vowels; ak all the simple vowels; an the vowels
a, i, u, short or long; ९८ the diphthongs; yan the semivowels; jas the soft con-
sonants g, j, @ d, b; jhag the same with their aspirates; jhash the soft aspirates
alone; yar all the consonants except h; jhal all the consonants except the nasals
and semivowels; jhar all the consonants except the aspirate, nasals, and semi-
vowels,
LETTERS, 15
8. The following tables exhibit this twofold classification, the com-
prehension of which is of the utmost importance to the study of
Sanskrit grammar.
Sub HSEees Ra wad aka wkha| nga agha| sna | sha
Palatals zi ff we Rai |ada wcha Aja भ. | ana | qya| श्च sa
Cerebrals | चु चू ट {५ stha | इ 2 ठ ८ | शा १0 | ए 7८ | ष 500
Dentals | eli श ata य 104 | द् 42 ध 4४८ | नु 20 | क 10 | स 5४
Labials उ ad sito सनो ८ | apa फ 7८ | aba भ 28८ | ama! वर्य
The first two consonants in each of the above five classes and the
sibilants, including Visarga, are hard; all the other letters, including
Anusvara, are soft, as in the following table:
न HARD OR SURD LETTERS. SOFT OR SONANT LETTERS.
क hka* wkha* अ aa ग ¢५* agha* | डः 7८ | sha
च ८८* छ ८1८ + | श 0 || इ? ई we tai |aja* क. | ana | aya
zta* stha* | षऽ || कृ १६ चु sda* ढ dha* | ण 2 | र 70
ata* utha* |स || eli eli zda* ध 0८2 * | ana | sla
upa* फ 0८ उ ऊ Bto सनौ 2 | ब 6८ wbha* | मव | वर्ण
Note— Hindi grammarians begin. with the letters pronounced by the organ
furthest from the mouth, and so take the other organs in order, ending with the
lips. This as a technical arrangement is perhaps the best, but the order of creation
would be that of the Hebrew alphabet; 1st, the labials; 2nd, the gutturals; 3rd, the
dentals.
c. Observe, that although र ९, रे ai, are more conveniently con-
nected with the palatal class, and Ft 0, ai au, with the labial, these
letters are really diphthongal, being made up of a+i, d+i,a+4,
aG+4u, respectively. Their first element is therefore guttural.
(In the Prdtisdkhyas the diphthongs e, ai, 0, aw are called
Sandhy-akshara.)
d. Note also, that it is most important to observe which hard
letters have kindred soft letters, and vice versa. The kindred hard
and soft are those in the same line marked with a star in the above
table; thus g, gh, are the corresponding soft letters to 4 kh;
J, jh, to 6, ¢h, and so with the others.
16 LETTERS.
In order that the foregoing classification may be clearly under-
stood, it is necessary to note the proper meaning of the term
vowel and consonant, and to define the relationship which the
nasals, semivowels, and sibilants, bear to the other letters.
19. A vowel is defined to be a sound (svara) or vocal emission
of breath from the lungs, modified or modulated by the play of one
or other of five organs, viz. the throat, the palate, the tongue, the
teeth, or the lips, but not interrupted or stopped by the actual
contact of any of these organs,
a. Hence चथ इ, उ u, चु ri, @ li, with their respective long
forms, are simple vowels, belonging to the guttural, palatal, labial,
cerebral, and dental classes respectively, according to the organ
principally concerned in their modulation. But we and रे ai are
half guttural, half palatal; चरो ० and st au half guttural, half labial.
See 18. €.
b. The vowels are, of course, held to be soft letters.
20. A consonant is not the modulation, but the actual stoppage,
of the vocal stream of breath by the contact of one or other of the
five organs, and cannot be enunciated without a vowel. Hence
the consonants from क to m in the table on p.1 are often designated
by the term sparga or sprishta, ‘resulting from contact ; while the
semivowels y, 7, ¢ v are called ishat-sprishta, ‘ resulting from slight
contact.’ By native grammarians they are sometimes said to be
avidyamdna-vat, ‘as if they did not exist,’ because they have no
svara (sound or accent). Another name for consonant is vyanjana,
probably so called as ‘ distinguishing’ sound.
a, All the consonants, therefore, are arranged under the five heads
of gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, and labials, according to the
organ concerned in stopping the vocal sound.
9. Again, the first two consonants in each of the five classes, and
the sibilants, are called hard or surd, i.e, non-sonant (a-ghosha),
because the vocal stream is abruptly and completely interrupted,
and no ghosha or sound allowed to escape; while all the other
letters are called soft or sonant (ghosha-vat, ‘having sound’),
because the vocal sound is less suddenly and completely arrested,
and they are articulated with a soft sound or low murmur
(ghosha).
c. Observe, that the palatal stop is only a modification of the
‘LETTERS. 17
guttural, the point of contact being moved more forward from the
throat towards the palate *.
In the same way the cerebral (miérdhanya) stop is a modification
of the dental. See 13.
d. The cerebral letters have probably been introduced into
Sanskrit through pre-existing dialects, such as the Dravidian, with
which it came in contact (see 24). As these letters are pronounced
chiefly with the help of the tongue, they are sometimes appro-
priately called linguals.
21. A nasal or narisonant letter is a soft letter, in the utterance
of which the vocal stream of breath incompletely arrested, as in all
soft letters, is forced through the nose instead of the lips. As the
soft letters are of five kinds, according to the organ which interrupts
the vocal breathing, so the nasal letters are five, viz. guttural, palatal,
cerebral, dental, and labial. See 15.
22. The semivowels y, ¢, J, v (called अन्तःस्य antahstha or antah-
sthé because they stand between the other consonants and the
sibilants) are formed by a vocal breathing, which is only half
interrupted, the several organs being only slightly touched (ishat-
sprishta) by the tongue. They are, therefore, soft or sonant
consonants, approaching nearly to the character of vowels—in
fact, half vowels, half consonants. See 16.
a. Each class of soft letters (excepting the guttural) has its own
kindred semivowel to which it is nearly related. Thus the palatal
soft letters इ i, ई £, te, रे ai, Hj, have य् ‰ for their kindred semi-
vowel. Similarly र् ¢ is the kindred semivowel of the cerebral soft
letters च ri, |] ri, and = d; so also त्त् ¢ of the dentals ट dri, & li,
and edt; and qvof su, Hw, सो ०, श्रो au, and व् ¢.
8. The guttural soft letters have no kindred semivowel in Sanskrit,
unless the aspirate ह ¢ be so regarded.
* The relationship of the palatal to the guttural letters is proved by their fre-
quent interchangeableness in Sanskrit and in other languages. See 24, 25, and 176,
and compare church with kirk, Sanskrit éatvdr with Latin quatuor, Sanskrit éa with
Latin que and Greek Kai, Sanskrit jdnu with English knee, Greek yarn, Latin genu.
Some German scholars represent the palatals च् and ज् by ‰ and $.
+ That 7 is a dental, and kindred to ठ् d, is proved by its interchangeableness
with d in cognate languages. Thus lacrima, 00२५९ Compare also दीप् with
॥ 1
7
18 LETTERS.
23. The sibilants or hissing sounds (called ऊष्मन् tishman by native
grammarians) are hard letters, which, nevertheless, strictly speaking,
have in some measure the character of vowels. The organs of
speech in uttering them, although not closed, are more contracted
and less opened (éshad-vivrita) than in vowels, and the vocal stream
of breath in passing through the teeth experiences a friction which
causes sibilation,
a. The aspirate RA, although a soft letter, is also called an ushman.
४. The palatal, cerebral, and dental classes of letters have each their own sibilant
(viz. ञ्? ष्, स्, respectively, see17). The Ardha-visarga, called Jihvdmiltya (X=),
was once the guttural sibilation, and that called Upadhmdniya (X=) the labial sibila-
tion (see 8.a); but these two latter, though called éshman, have now gone out of use.
Visarga (3) is also sometimes, though less correctly, called an éshman. The exact
labial sibilation denoted by f, and the soft sibilation z are unknown in Sanskrit.
24. That some of the consonants did not exist in the original Sanskrit alphabet,
but have been added at later periods, will be made clear by a reference to the ex-
amples. below, exhibiting the interchange of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin.
The palatals ¢, ८, j7, jh, 9 were probably developed out of the corresponding
gutturals; the cerebrals ट, th, d, dh, » are thought to be of Dravidian origin ;
the guttural nasal » is evidently for an original n or m before a guttural letter;
i is supposed to be a more modern form of 7; ई belongs to the palatal class, and
is generally for an original ¢; sh is for an original s, cf. root ush, ‘to burn,’ with
Lat. us-tu-s, from ur-o; h is for an original gh, sometimes for dh, and occasionally
for bh (e.g. root grah, “to seize,’ for the Vedic grabh).
Of the vowels probably only a, > ४ were original; ri is not origina], and seems
to have been a weakened pronunciation of the syllable ar, and at a later period
tri of al. In Prakrit ri is represented by either i or ४. The diphthongs are of
course formed by the union of simple vowels (see 29).
INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN.
25. The following is a list of examples exhibiting some of the commonest inter-
changes of letters in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin
Sanskrit a= Greek @, € ० = Latin a, e, 0, i, ४; e.g. Sk. ajra-s, ‘a plain,
Gr. aypo-s, L. ager; Sk. jan-as, ‘race,’ Gr. yev-os, L. gen-us; Sk. janas as,
gen. c., Gr. yéve(o)-05, yévous, L. gener-is; Sk nava-s, new,’ Gr. véo-¢,
1. novu-s ; Sk. apas-as, ‘of work,’ L. oper-is
Sanskrit d= Gr. a, 4, 0, = L. d, 6 6; e.g. Sk. ma-tri (stem mdtar-), “a mother.
Gr. (47940 (stem (कणत), Dor. MaTyp, Lat. miter; Sk. jn4-ta-s, ‘known,’ Gr.
yuo-To-s, L. (g)n6-tu-s; Sk. simi-, ‘half,’ Gr. nus-, L. sémi-.
Sanskrit ¢ = Gr. 4, = L. i, e; e.g. Sk. sdmi-, “half,” Gr. १५८, L. semi-.
Sanskrit ८ = Gr. 4, = L. ¢; e.g. Sk. jiv-a-s, ‘living,’ Gr. Blo-s, L. viv-u-s
Sanskrit.a = Gr. ¥, = L. u, 0; e.g. Sk. urues, ‘broad,’ Gr. €upues ; Sk. jdnu,
knee,’ Gr. youu, L. genu.
INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN. 19
Sanskrit ¢= Gr. v, = L. u; e.g. Sk. mish, mish-a-s, &c., “a mouse,’ Gr. pus,
L. mus.
Sanskrit ri, i.e. ar = Gr. p with a short vowel, = L. r with a short vowel; e.g.
Sk. myi-ta-s, ‘dead,’ Gr. Bpo-t6-s (for ॥400-7८-$ or [400-T0-s), 1. mor-tuu-s ; Sk:
médtribhyas, ‘from mothers,’ L. matribus ; Sk. mdtrishu, ‘in mothers,’ Gr. (५1704०५.
Sanskrit {६ == Gr. 6 with a vowel, = L. r with a vowel; e.g. Sk. ddtrin, acc. pl.
of détri, ‘a giver,’ Gr. 0090-9) L. da-tor-es; Sk. mdtris, L. matres.
Sanskrit e= Gr. at, €t, 04,—L. ai, 6 ot, @, @, i, Us e.g. Sk. veg-a-s, “an
abode,’ Gr. (F)cixe-s, L. vicu-s; Sk. e-mi, ‘T go,’ Gr. eft; Sk. eva-s, ‘going,
“a course,’ Gr. al-oy, L. zvu-m.
Sanskrit ai = Gr. % Y, @, = L. @ in certain inflexions; e.g. Sk. devyai, “to a
goddess,’ Gr. 660, L. dew.
Sanskrit ० = Gr. av, ev, ov, = L. au, ०, ४; e.g. Sk. gola-s, ‘a ball,’ Gr, yavro-s 3
Sk. ojas, ` power,’ L. augeo
Sanskrit au—= Gr. av, १४, == L. au; e.g. Sk. nau-s, “a ship,’ Gr. VAUS, VIS,
L. navis, nauta, ‘a sailor.’
Sanskrit k, kh, ¢ ई, = Gr. K, = L. c, 4; e.g. Sk. kravis, kravya-m, ‘yaw flesh,’
Gr. Kpeas, Kpeiov, L. cru-or, caro; Sk. khala-s, ‘a granary,’ sdid, “a hall,’ Gr.
kadsa, L. cella; Sk. éa, ‘and,’ Gr. Kal, L. que.
Sanskrit g, j, = Gr. (8), = L. 9(b); e.g. Sk. yug-a-m, ‘a yoke,’ Gr. Cuy-0-v,
L. jug-u-m; Sk. jdnu, ‘knee,’ Gr. youu, L. genu; Sk. ajra-s, ‘a plain,’ Gr. arypo-s
L. ager; Sk. gau-s, ‘a cow,’ Gr. Bov-s, L. boss Sk. guru-s, ‘heavy,’ Gr. Bapt-s,
L. grav-i-s. ;
Sanskrit gh = Gr. ¥,=L. g; e.g. Sk. rt. stigh, ‘to ascend, Gr = ०7९2८-५)
orixe-s, L. ve-stig-ium; Sk. laghu-s, ‘light,’ Gr. eAayy-
Sanskrit ¢h — Gr. oK, = L. sc; e.g. Sk. chdyd, ‘shade, Gr. ०५४० Sk, rt. chid,
to cleave,’ Gr. TX /C-, ०८1 O-y, L. scind-
Sanskrit ¢ (th) = Gr. T, = L. ठ; e.g. Sk. trayas, ‘three,’ Gr. Tpets, L. tres
Sanskrit d= Gr. 8, —L. ९; € g. Sk. dam-a-s, “a house,’ Gr. 00८०-५, L. domu-s
Sanskrit dh = Gr. 6, = L. initial f, non-initial d, ए; ९. द, Sk. da-dhd-mi, ‘I place,
Gr. Ti-6y-pt 3 Sk. dhid-ma-s, ‘smoke,’ Gr Ou-.0-s, L. fu-mu-s; Sk. ddh-ar,
udder,’ Gr. ०४0०0) L. uber; Sk. andh-as, ‘food,’ &c., Gr. av6-os, L. ad-or
Sanskrit p (ph) = Gr. 7 (%), = L. 2 (f); e.g. Sk. pitri, Gr. maT yp, L. pater ;
Sk. phulla-m, ‘a flower,’ Gr. PuAdAc-y, L. foliu-m
Sanskrit b= Gr. 6 (7), =L. b(f); e.g. Sk. rt. lamb, ‘to hang down, L. lab-i;
Sk. budh-na-s, ‘ground,’ Gr. mv6-pyv, L. fundu-s; Sk. budh, 10 know,’ Gr.
muvbavopat (7 0-).
Sanskrit bh = Gr. क, = L. initial f, non-initial 8; e.g. Sk. rt bhri, bhar-d-mz,
“I bear,’ Gr. १८५०-५, L. fer-o; Sk. nabh-as, ‘vapour,’ ‘a cloud,’ Gr. vep-055
L. nub-e-s.
Sanskrit , %,= Gr. y before gutturals, = L. ns e.g. Sk. an-ka-s, ‘2 hook,’
Gr. ८१/८८", OyK-0~5, L. ane-u-s, unc-u-s; Sk. panéan, ‘five, Gr. wevre, L.
quingue.
D2
/
20 INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS IN SANSKRIT, GREEK, AND LATIN.
Sanskrit 2, n, = Gy. ¥,== L. 2; e.g. Sk. nava-s, ‘new,’ Gr. véo-s, L. novu-s.
Sanskrit m= Gr. ¢,= L.m; e.g. Sk. md-tri, ‘a mother,’ Gr. PH-TNP, L., ma-ter.
Sanskrit y= Gr. ^ 6, =L. j; e.g. Sk. yakrit, ‘liver,’ Gr. र, L. jecur ;
Sk. yug-a-m, Gr. Cuy-d-v, L. jug-u-m.
Sanskrit r= Gr. p, A, = L. 7, 1; e.g. Sk. rdjan, ‘king,’ L. rer (stem reg-); Sk.
sara-s, ‘ whey,’ Gr. 00८५, L. seru-m; Sk. rudh-i-ra-s, ‘blood-red,’ Gr. épub-pos,
L. ruber, rufus; Sk. rt. ई fravas, Sru-ta-s, Gr. KAé-05, KAv-16-5, L. in-cly-tu-s. ,
Sanskrit 7=Gr. A, = L. 1; e.g. Sk. rt. 1४, lu-nd-mi, “I cut,’ Gr. Av-w, L. re-lu-o,
so-lv-o (for se-lu-o); Sk. lik (rik), ‘to lick,’ Gr. Aely-w, Aly-vo-s, L. ling-o,
lig-uri-o.
Sanskrit v= Gr. F (४), or disappears, = L. v (४); e.g. Sk. nava-s, ‘new,’ Gr.
véFo=c, i.e. véo-s, L. novu-s; Sk. vish-a-s, ‘poison,’ Gr. i-0-s, L. virus; Sk. dvi,
‘two,’ Gr. ४४०, L. duo.
Sanskrit ई (for an original k) = Gr. K, = 1. ०, q; e. g..Sk. dagan, ‘ten,’ Gr. ०८५०)
L. decem; Sk. ०६००-5, ‘a horse,’ Gr. inT0-s, 1८८०-५) L. equu-s; Sk. sud, ‘a dog,’
Gr. KU-wy, L. can-is.
Sanskrit s, sh, = Gr. 7, °, disappears between two vowels, = L. s, changes to r
between two vowels; e. g. Sk. asti, ‘he is,’ Gr. éoti, L. est; Sk. janas-as, ‘of a
race,’ Gr. ryéve(a)-05, ryévous, L. gener-is; Sk. vish-as, ‘poison,’ Gr. i-0,
L. vir-us; Sk. shat, ‘six,’ Gr. ४ > L. sex.
Sanskrit # (for an original gh, sometimes for dh, and occasionally for bh) = Gr.
2८, « (sometimes 6),= L. ‰ c, gs e.g. Sk. hé-ma-s, ‘ winter,’ Gr. 2८८५४, L. hiems ;
Sk. hrid-aya-m, ‘the heart,’ Gr. kapd-la, L. cor (stem cord-); Sk. han for ghan
and dhan (in ja-ghdn-a, ‘he killed ;’ ni-dhan-a, ‘death’), Gr. Oav-atos ; Sk. hita
for dhita, ‘placed’ (fr. dhd, Gr. 69), Gr. bers.
THE INDIAN METHOD OF WRITING,
26. According to Hindi grammarians every syllable ought to
end in a vowel*, except at the end of a clause or sentence, and
every final consonant ought to be attracted to the beginning of
the next syllable; so that where a word ends in a consonant, that
consonant ought to be pronounced with the imitial letter of the
next word. Hence in some Sanskrit MSS. all the syllables are
separated by slight spaces, and in others all the words are joined
together without any separation. Thus the two words आसीद् राजा
dsid rdjé would in some books be written सा सी दरा जा and in others
wratgtat. There seems little reason for considering the mere spaces
left between the words of a sentence to be incompatible with the
* Unless it end in Anusvéra or Visarga }, which in theory are the only conso-
nantal sounds allowed to close a syllable until the end of a sentence.
METHOD OF WRITING, 21
operation of euphonic laws. Therefore in some Sanskrit books
printed in Roman type every uncompounded word capable of separa-
tion is separated, e.g. pitur dhanam ddatte; which is even printed
in Deva-nagari letters (by those scholars who allow an extension of
the use of the mark called Viréma) thus, पितुर् धनम् आदत्ते, for
पितुषेनमादते.
The following words and passages in the Sanskrit and English
character, are given that the Student, before proceeding further in
the Grammar, may exercise himself in reading the letters and in
transliteration.
To be turned into English letters.
WH, WHA, AT, MA, आप, इत्ठ, इष, ईड, इर,
उख, उच, ऊह, WU, ऋज, एध, ओख, कण, कित,
कुमार, aa, सिप, qu, से, कुप, खन, खिद्, गाहः
गुज, गृध, गु, घुण, घुष, चकास, way, चित, fae,
हो, जीवा, कष, टीका, ठः, डीनं, दोक, fue, तापः,
तडागः, ट्या, THR, ट्शरथः, दुरत्रापः, देव, धूपिका,
भृतः, नटः, नील, नेम, परिदानम्, पुरुषस्, पौरः, ae
Fat, पुरोडाशः, बहुः, AHA, भोगः, भोजनम्, मुखम्,
मृगः, मेदस्, मेदिनी, यकृत्, योगः, रेणु, रेचक, रे,
रेवत, स्जा, रूपम्, रुररिषु, He, वामः, वेरम्, शक्,
शोरः, षट्, साधुः, ARS, हेमन्.
To be turned into Sanskrit letters.
Ada, asa, ali, ddi, dkhu, dgas, iti, t8ah, thd, uddéra, upanishad,
uparodha, tru, tisha, rishi, eka, kakud, katu, koshah, gaura, ghata,
éaitya, éet, thalam, jetri, jhiri, tagara, damara, dhdla, nama,
tatas, tathd, trina, tushdra, deha, daitya, dhavala, nanu, nayanam,
nidénam, pitri, bhauma, bheshajam, marus, mahat, yuga, rush, ridhis,
lauha, vivekas, gatam, shodasan, sukhin, hridaya, tatra, adya, buddhi,
arka, kratu, ansa, anka, anga, anréala, anjana, kantha, anda, anta,
manda, samptrna.
22 METHOD OF WRITING.
The following story has the Sanskrit and English letters
interlined.
अस्ति हस्तिनापुरे विलासो नाम रजकः | तस्य गदे-
asti hastindpure _vildso ndma rajakah tasya garda-
भोऽ निभारवाहनाद् FAG FAIL अभवत् । ततस् तेन
bho *tibhdravdhandd durbalo mumirshur abhavat tatas tena
THT व्याभ्रचमेणा प्रच्छाद्यारण्यसमीपे wares
rajakendsau vydghratarmand pratthddydranyasamipe |.
मोचितः । ततो We अवलोक्य BWA रसेचप-
motitak tato dirdd avalokya vydghrabuddhyd kshetrapa-
तयः सत्वरं पलायन्ते । खथ केनापि शस्यरक्षकेण धूसर-
tayah satvaram paldyante atha kendpi sasyarakshakena dhisara-
Tara FWA WA सन्जीकृत्या वनतकायेन
kambal
५५६ a dhanuhkéndam sajjtkritydvanatakdyena
एकान्ते स्थितम् । ततस् तं च EET गदेभः पुटाङ्ग
ekdnte sthitam _tatas tam éa dire drishtvd gardabhah pushténgo
गदेभीयमिति मत्वा शब्द् कुवोाणस् Tega धावितः ।
gardabhiyamiti matvd Sabdam kurvanas tadabhimukham dhdvitah
ततस् तेन शस्यरक्षकेण neisafafa ज्ञात्वा Seta
tatas tena Sasyarakshakena gardabho’yamiti jndtvd lilayaiva `
व्यापादितः ॥
vydpdaditah.
The following story is to be turned into Sanskrit letters.
Asti Sriparvatamadhye brahmapurdkhyam nagaram. Tatra Saila-
Sikhare ghantdkarno ndma rdkshasah prativasatiti janapravddah य
yate. Ekadé ghantém dddya paldyamdnah kastié éauro vydghrena
vydpdditah. Tatpdnipatitd ghanté vénaraih prdptd. Te vdnards tém
ghantém anukshanam vddayanti. Tato nagarajanair manushyah khd-
dito drishtah pratikshanam ghantdrdvaséa $riyate. Anantaram
ghantakarnak kupito manushydn khédati ghantém éa vddayatttyu-
SANDHI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS. 23
ktvd jandh sarve nagardt paldyitéh. Tatah kardlaydé ndma kuttinyd
vimrisya markatd ghantém vddayanti svayam vijhdya rdjd vijhdpitah.
Deva yadi kiyaddhanopakshayah kriyate tadéham enam ghantdkarnam
sddhaydmi. Tato rdjndé tushtena tasyai dhanam dattam. Kuttinyd
éa mandalam kritud tatra ganesddigauravam darsayitvd svayam
vdnarapriyaphaldnydddya vanam pravisya phaldnydkirndni. Tato
ghantém parityajya vdnaréh phaldsakté babhivuh. Kuttint éa
ghantdm grihitvé nagaram dgatdé sakalalokapijydbhavat.
CHAPTER II.
SANDHI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
WE are accustomed in Greek and Latin to certain euphonic
changes of letters, Thus for the perfect passive participle of reg-o
(stem reg-) we have (not reg-tu-s but) rec-tu-s, the soft g being changed
to the hard ८ before the hard ¢ (cf. rew for reg-s). In many words
a final consonant assimilates with an initial; thus कषम with yvoun
becomes cvyyveun; € with Adutw, éAddurw. Suppressus is
written for subpressus; appellatus for adpellatus; immensus for
inmensus ; affinitas for adfinitas ; offero for obfero, but in perfect
obtuli; colloquium for conloquium ; irrogo for inrogo. In English,
assimilations of the same kind take place in pronunciation, though
they are not always recognized in writing; thus cupboard is pro-
nounced as if written cub-board, and blackyuard as if written blag-
guard. These laws for the euphonic junction of letters are applied
throughout the whole range of Sanskrit grammar; and that, too,
not only in the interior of words when a stem is united with its
terminations and suffixes, but in combining words in the same
sentence. Thus, if the sentence ‘Rara avis in terris’ were Sanskrit,
it would require, by the laws of Sandhi or combination, to be written
Rardvirinsterrih. The learner is recommended, after learning the
most common rules of combination, printed in large type, to pass.
at once to the declension of nouns and conjugation of verbs,
24 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS.
There are two classes of rules of Sandhi, viz. 1. Those affecting
the junction of final and initial letters of completely formed words
in sentences as well as of the stems of words in compounds ;
2. Those which take effect in the process of forming words by the
junction of roots and of stems, whether nominal or verbal, with suffixes.
and terminations (see 74. a). As the rules which apply to one class
are generally applicable to the other, it will be convenient to consider
them together ; but some of the rules which come into operation in.
the formation of verbs, are reserved till they are wanted (see 294).
8707. I—EUPHONIC PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
OF VOWELS.
27. The changes of vowels called Guna and Vriddhi should at once
be impressed on the memory. When the vowels इ i and ई £ become
ze, this is called a Guna change, or qualification (guna meaning
‘quality’). When i and ६ become रे ai, this is called a Vyiddhi
change, or increase. Similarly, च ४ and क % are often changed to
their Guna स्रो 0, and Vriddhi al au; | ri and च्छु १६ to their Guna
र् ar, and Vriddhi st dr; and ख a, though it can have no corres-_
ponding Guna change, has a Vriddhi substitute in ‘Tt 4.
a. Native grammarians consider that क is already a Guna letter, and on that
account can have no Guna substitute. Indeed they regard a, e, ० as the only
Guna sounds, and d, ai, aw as the only Vriddhi; a and ¢ being the real Guna and
Vriddhi representatives of the vowels क्रु and @%. It is required, however, that r
should always be connected with a and द when these vowels are substituted for ri;
and J, when they are substituted for कच,
b. Observe—It will be convenient in describing the change of a vowel to its
Guna or Vriddhi substitute, to speak of that vowel as gunated or vriddhied.
28. In the formation of stems, whether nominal or verbal, the
vowels of roots cannot be gunated or vriddhied, if they are followed
by double consonants, i.e. if they are long by position; nor can a
vowel long by nature be so changed, unless it be final. The vowel
स a@ is, as we have seen, already a Guna letter. See 27. a.
a. But in secondary derivatives long vowels are sometimes vriddhied : wiz
sthaula, ‘robust,’ from स्थूल sthila ; qa graiva, “belonging to the neck,’ from
ग्रीवा orivd; मोल maula, ‘ radical,’ from मूत mila (see 80. B).
29. The Guna sounds र ९, सो ० are diphthongal, that is, composed
of two simple vowel sounds. Thus, र ९ is made up of a and 8;
WY o of a and ८; so that a final च a will naturally coalesce with an
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS. 25:
initial इ 4 into e; with an initial उ ४ into o. (Compare 18.¢.) Again,
सर् ar may be regarded as made up of a and ri; so that a final 3 a
will blend with an initial = ri into ar.
a. Similarly, the Vriddhi diphthong रे ai is made up of a and ९,
or (which is the same) é and i; and =f au of a and ०, or (which is
the same) ८ and uw. Hence, a final a will naturally blend with an
initial र ९ into ai; and with an initial सौ ० into aw. (Compare 18. ८;
and see note to table in next page.) The simple vowels in their
diphthongal unions are not very closely combined, so that e, 0, ai,
au are liable to be resolved into their constituent simple elements.
` ¢. If ai is composed of ¢ and i, it may be asked, How is it that long द as well
as short @ blends with $ into e (see 32), and not into ai? In answer to this some
scholars have maintained that a long vowel at the end of a word naturally shortens.
itself before an initial vowel (see 38.7), and that the very meaning of Guna is the
prefixing of short a, and the very meaning of Vriddhi, the prefixing of long d, to a
simple vowel. Hence the Guna of ४ is originally a i, though the two simple vowels
blend afterwards into e. Similarly, the original Guna of u is a u, blending after-
wards into o; the original Guna of ri is a ri, blending into ar. :
c. The practice of gunating vowels is not peculiar to Sanskrit. The San-
skrit @ answers to the Greek € or 0 (see 25), and Sanskrit खमि emi, ‘I go,’
which in the rst pers. plural becomes FAQ imas, “we go,’ is originally a i mi,
corresponding to the Greek clus and ५५९५ Similarly in Greek, the root pry
(e-puy-ov) is in the present Pev'y-@. Compare also the Sanskrit veda (vaida),
he knows,’ with Greek ०400} and compare Aé-Aosm-a, perfect of As7, with the
Sanskrit perfect.
30. Again, let it be borne in mind that य् y is the kindred semi-
vowel of 4, ९, and ai; qv of u, ४ 0, and au; tr of १ and ri;
and ल् / of dri and क, So that i, ४, e, ai, at the end of words, when
the next begins with a vowel, may often pass into y, Y, ay, GY,
respectively; u, ४, 0, au, into v, v, av, dv; and 7, ri, into 7.
[Observe—lri is not found as a final. |
The interchange of vowels with their own semivowels is called
by Sanskrit grammarians samprasdrana.
In English we recognize the same interchangeableness, though
not in the same way; thus we write holy, holier ; easy, easily; and
we use ow for ow in now, cow, &c.
In order to impress the above rules on the mind, the substance
of them is embodied in the following table:
26 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS.
= ~ Simple vowels, word tort work णा कृण
ees i Qasr ---
Guna substitute, e | . 1
| ; !
Vriddhi substitute, a at au ar al
| Simple vowels, 20४ wuorté riorrt lrior lri
evy— Lees guna HY _ uA
| Corresponding semivowel, y v r ८
| Guna, e :
|
Guna resolved, ati a 4 u
|
। With semivowel substitute, ay av
Vriddhi, ai au
| |
a+e at+o
| 1
Vriddhi resolved, ५ + ¢ +£ ¢ + % +- ४
|
*G+i *dé+u
|
With semivowel substitute, dy dv
The following rules will now be easily understood. They apply
generally to the junction (1) of separate words in sentences and’
compounds ; (2) of roots and stems with suffixes and terminations.
To distinguish the second class of combinations the sign ++ will be
used in the examples given. The object of most of the rules is to
prevent a hiatus between vowels +.
37. If any simple vowel (short or long) is followed by a similar
simple vowel (short or long), the two vowels blend into one long
similar vowel (Pap. vi. 1, 101); €. ९.
a सस्ति इ na asti tha becomes नास्तीह ndsttha, ‘he is not here.’
राजा सस्तु TRA: rdjd astu uttamah becomes WHT: rdjdstittamah, “let the
king be supreme.’
जीवा सन्त jtod ०८५ becomes ज्ीवान्त 7४८१९, ‘end of life.’
अधि ईश्वर adhi vara becomes WHAT adhésvara, ° supreme lord,’
च्छतु INA ritu utsava becomes YAW ritdtsava, ‘festival of the season.’
faq =Afe pitri riddhi becomes पितृदधि pitréddhi, ‘a father’s prosperity.’
* Since e=a+i and o=a-+u, therefore a+-e will equal a+a+é or d+i; and
a+o will equal a+-a+u or d+u.
t In the Vedic hymns hiatus between vowels 18 not uncommon 3 cf. note to 66.
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS. 27
32. स ¢ or सखा d, followed by the dissimilar vowels इ? उ, Wr
(short or long), blends with i or ६ into the Guna र; with u or %
into the Guna wt o*; with ri or rf into the Guna Wt ar (Pan. vi.
1, 87); e.g.
परम श्र parama {5०22 becomes चरमेश्चर paramesvara, ‘mighty lord.’
few उपदेशा hita upadeSa becomes हितोपदेश hitopadega, ‘friendly instruction.’
TIFT उद् क gangd udaka becomes गङ्गोदकं gangodaka, ‘ Ganges-water.’
तव WE tava riddhi becomes wats tavarddhi, ‘thy growth.’
Fat ऋूषि mahd rishi becomes महभि maharshi, ‘a great sage.’
Similarly, तव WAT tava 77470 becomes तव स्कार tavalkdra, ' thy letter Ji.’
33. Sa or std, followed by the diphthongs z e, W 0, ® ai, or
wt au, blends with ९ into the Vriddhi ai; with ai also into ai; with
o into the Vriddhi au; with aw also into au (६). vi. 1, 88); e.g.
पर रधित para edhita becomes परेधित paraidhita, ‘nourished by another.’
विद्या शव vidyd eva becomes विद्येव vidyaiva, ‘knowledge indeed.’
देव रेश्चये deva aigvarya becomes at devaisvarya, ‘ majesty of deity.’
अल्प स्ओोजस् alpa ojas becomes अस्पोजस् alpaujas, ‘little energy.’
THT ata gangd ogha becomes nH gangaugha, ‘ Ganges-current.’
अवर ओषध jvara aushadha becomes ्रोषध jearaushadha, ° fever-medicine.’
34. इ 2 Ju, | rt (short or long), followed by any dissimilar
vowel or diphthong, pass into their kindred semivowels; viz. ४ or £
into y; wu or % into vt; ri or ए into r (Pan. vi. 1,77); e.g.
wira aq agni astra becomes अग्न्यस्त्र agny-astra, ‘fire-arms.’
प्रति उवाच prati uvdéa becomes प्रत्युवाच praty-uvdéa, “he spoke in reply.’
ठु इदानीम् tu १८८१८१० becomes त्विदानीम् tv idénim, ‘but now.’
AT खानन्द् mdtri dnanda becomes ATATAE mdtr-dnanda, “a mother’s joy.’
मातर TT mitri autsukya becomes मातरोतसुक्य mdtr-autsukya, ‘a mother’s
anxiety.’
35. Final ze and sto, followed by an initial 4 a, if it begin
another word, remain unchanged, and the initial च a is cut off
(Pan. vt. 1. 109); e.g.
ते अपि te api becomes तेऽपि te *pi, ‘they indeed’ (see 10).
सो पि so api becomes सोऽपि so 02, “he indeed.”
* The blending of a and 2 into the sound ८ is recognized in English in such
words as sail, nail, &c.; and the blending of a and ४ into the sound 0 is exemplified
by the French faute, baume, &c.
+ Illustrated by some English words; thus we pronounce a word like
million as if written millyon ; and we write evangelist (not euangelist), saying,
playing, &c.
E2
28 § EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS—PRAGRIHYA.
a. In compounds the elision of initial a after a stem like go appears to be optional,
e.g. go-’Svdh or go-asvdh, ‘oxen and horses’ (Pan. v1.1, 122). See 38. ९.
९. But go may become gava in certain compounds, as go agram may become gavd-
gram, see 38.e; 80 go indra becomes gavendra, ‘lord of kine,’ or gav-indra by 36.
36. But followed by 4, 4, ४, u, %, ri, ri, ९, 0, ai, au, if any one of
these begin another word, final ए e and स्रो ० are changed to ay and av
respectively; and the y of ay, and more rarely the v of av, may be
dropped, leaving the @ uninfluenced by the following vowel (Pan. v1.
1, 78)s €
ते सागताः te dgatdh becomes तयागताः tay dgatdh, and then त खगाः ta dgatdh,
“they have come.’
Similarly, विष्णो इह vishno iha becomes विष्णविह vishnav iha, and then frat इर्
vishna tha, ‘O Vishnu, here!’
Observe—When go, ‘a cow,’ becomes gav in compounds, » is retained; e.g.
गो Sat go tsvara becomes WATT gav-tsvara, ‘ owner of kine.
गो MAT go okas becomes गवोकस् gav-okas, ‘abode of cattle.’
a. And in the case of ge and wo followed by any vowel or
diphthong in the same word, even though the following vowel or
diphthong be a or € or o, then. e must still be changed to ay, and
o to av, but both y and v must be retained; e. g.
जे + अ je+a becomes जय jaya, the present stem of ji, ‘to conquer’ (see 263).
अग्ने+र ०४९1-९ becomes WTA agnaye, ‘to fire’ (dative case).
भो + अ bho+a becomes भव bhava, the present stem of 80४ (see 263).
37. रे ai and @ au, followed by any vowel ‘or diphthong,
similar or dissimilar, are changed to dy and dv respectively (Pan.
vi. 1, 78); eg.
ae अपि kasmai api becomes कस्मायपि kasmdy upi, “to any one whatever.’
र + सस् rai+as becomes रायस् 74/05, ‘riches’ (nom. plur.).
ददौ WAY dadau annam becomes दृटावन्नम् daddv annam, " he gave food.’
नौ + nau-+au becomes नावौ ndvau, ‘two ships’ (nom. du.).
a. If both the words be complete words, the y and » are occasionally
dropped, but not so usually as in the case of ९ at 36; thus कस्मा सपि kasmd apt
for कस्मायपि kasmdy api, and ददा WAR dadd annam for दंदावन्नम् daddv annam.
PRAGRIHYA EXCEPTIONS.
38. There are some exceptions (usually called pragrihya, ‘to be
taken or pronounced separately’) caused by vowels which must,
under all circumstances, remain unchanged. The most noticeable
are the terminations of duals (whether of nouns, pronouns, or verbs)
EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS—PRAGRIHYA. 29
ee ae ९
in 8 ४, or e (ए). 1.1, 11). These are not acted on by following
vowels; e.g.
कवी vat kavt etau, ‘these two poets ;’ aay इमो bandhi: imau, ‘these two rela-
tions ;’ BA आसाते ‘these two sit down;’? Waa इमो “these two cook ;’
शेवहे सावान् ˆ we two lie down.’ ।
Observe—The same applies to WAT 004, nom. pl. mase. of the pronoun Wea.
a. The Vedic asme and yushme are also pragrihya according to Pan. 1. 1, 13.
b. Prolated vowels (11. Ff) remain unchanged, as APTS कृष्ण ३ सतं “Come,
Krishna, here,’ &c. (Pan. vi. 1, 1253 णा, 2, 82).
९. A vocative case in 0, when followed by the particle iti, may remain unchanged,
as विष्णो इति vishno iti, or may follow 36.
d. Particles, when simple vowels, and at o, as the final of an interjection, remain
unchanged, as = इन्द्र i indra, “O, Indra!’ ¥ उमेश uw umesa, “0, lord of Uma!’
अहो इन्द्र aho indra, “Ho, Indra!’ (Pan. 7. 1, 14, 15.)
Observe—This applies also to the exclamation WT द (but not to the ¢ which
native grammarians call STS dx, and which is used as a preposition before verbs
and before nouns with the meanings ‘to,’ ‘up to,’ ‘as far as,’ ‘until,’ ‘a little’);
e.g. सा रवम् ¢ evam, ‘Ah, indeed!’ (but द udakdt becomes odakdt, ‘as far as
water ;’ ¢ ushna becomes oshna, ‘ slightly warm’).
९ Before initial a the BY o of गो go, ‘a cow,’ remains unchanged and
optionally cuts off the as e.g. MAYA go-agram, or MAR go-’gram, “a multitude
of cows’ (cf. 35. a. 6, 36. Obs.).
Other Exceptions.
f. The final a or ¢ of a preposition blends with the initial YJ ri of a root into dr
(not into ar); e.g. ऋक् = ars “to goon;’ उप ऋक् = IT “to approach ;’
प्र चऋष् = प्राषे ‘to flow forth;’ आ ऋङ् = ह “to obtain’ (P4n. ण, 1, 91).
Compare 260- a. ।
9. The final a of a preposition is generally cut off before verbs beginning with
Ze or Mo; see 783. ¢. Obs. and 783. p. Obs. (Pan. vi. 1, 89, 94).
Observe—The particle रव when it denotes uncertainty is said to have the same
effect on a preceding final a.
h. The ऊ which takes the place of the वा of वाह् in the acc. pl. of such words
as WEaTR, ‘a steer training for the plough,’ requires Vyiddhi after a, as प्रदम्
i. The 3 u of किमु may remain or be changed to {v before a vowel, as fay उक्तम्
or किंवुक्तम् ‘ whether said.’
j. According to Sakalya, a, i, u, ri (short or long), final in a word, may option-
ally either remain unchanged (but, if long, must be shortened) before a word
beginning with 3 or follow the usual rule, thus Wa safa: (or even Fat ऋषिः
‘a Brahman who is a Rishi’) may be either ब्रह्म safa: or Wate, but in no case
can Hal WA: be allowed to remain unchanged. Similarly, वया च्पृषि may be
either यथर्षि or ययक्पृषि ‘ according to the Rishi.’
So in the case of ¢ or # or ré, final in a word, followed by dissimilar vowels, thus
30 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF VOWELS——EXCEPTIONS.
चक्री Wa is either VATA or चक्रि खतं ‘the discus armed here.’ But com-
pounded words follow the usual rule, as नदी Jes = नद्युदके ‘river-water.’ Except
before words beginning with ri, as in the example कुमारीच्छ्यः or कुमारिकृष्यः
(Benfey’s larger Gram. p. 52), and in असिक्ृद्धित ‘made prosperous by (the power
of) the sword,’ Maha-bh. xviil. 105.
k. The words ओतु ‘a cat’ and सष्ठ ‘the lip,’ when used in compounds, may
optionally cut off a preceding final a; e.g. SI wig is wag or CATE अधर
HE is SAA or अधरोष्ठ ‘the lower lip ;’ (see Pan. vi. 1, 94. Vart.); and fea स्रोकस्
may be either दिवोकस् or दिवोकस् “a deity.’
१. So also the sacred syllable ओम् and the preposition AT & may cut off a final a;
e.g. शिवाय Bi नमः = शिवायों नमः ‘Om! reverence to Siva; शिव रहि (i.e. BT with
इहि) = शिवेहि ‘O Siva, come!’
m. The following words illustrate the same irregularity: शक WY becomes
शकन्धुः करक WY becomes ककैन्धु ‘jujube;’ लाङ्गल ईषा becomes क्ाङ्घगल्टीषा
“plough-handle ;” (see Gana Sakandhv-ddi to Pan. v1.1, 94.)
n. The following compounds are also irregular (see Pan. vi. 1, 89. Vart.):
अक्षौहिणी akshauhint, " 9 complete army’ (from aksha क for vdhint).
me praudha, ‘grown up’ (from pra tdha).
प्रोह prauha, ‘reflection’ (from pra tha).
AL svaira, rita § svairin, ‘self-willed’ (from sva fra).
मुखात sukhdrta, ‘ affected by joy ’ (from sukha rita).
प्राँ prdrna, ‘ principal debt’ (from pra rina).
BTS kambaldrna, ‘debt of a blanket’ (from kambala rina).
वसनारौ vasandrna, ‘debt of a cloth’ (from vasana rina).
UME rindrna, ‘debt of a debt’ (from rina rina).
ay praisha, ‘an invitation ;’ प्रेष्य praishya, ‘a servant’ (from pra esha).
The annexed table exhibits the combinations of vowels at one
view. Supposing a word to end in ४, and the next word to begin
with au, the student must carry his eye down the first column
(headed ‘final vowels’) till he comes to %, and then along the top
horizontal line of ‘initial vowels,’ till he comes to aw. At the
junction of the perpendicular column under au and the horizontal
line beginning %, will be the required combination, viz. v aw.
+
81
TABLE OF THE COMMONEST CHANGES OF VOWELS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
INITIAL VOWELS. — ` घ a t ४ (1 rt rt ` € ai 0 au
FINAL VOWELS.
aor a a a e e 0 0 ar ar ai ai au au
3! 31 32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33
१०४६ y aly a ॥ 1 y wy uly £| | ely aily oly au
34 34 37 3! 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
u or % v a\v d\v ilv { a ध ४ ‰|४ {| ९|४ |¢ olv au
34 | 34 | 34 | 34 | ॐ उ | 34 | 34 | 34 | 34 | 34 | 34
=
os.
So
भ
oe
iy
=
ag
8
Q
8
Ss.
3
ro
3
&
8
§\
i
९०५
धि
>
=
os}
=;
&
S
i
<
8
a
&
34 34 34 34 34 34 3८ 3! 34 34 34 34
+ 3536 Je 2 la | | tla ula dja | rtla ela ala ola au
36.0. |च alay diay ijay fjay ujay धव rilay rtlay elay ailay olay au
८ 57 ~|dyt aldy d\dy ildy | uldy u\dy rildy | eldy ai\dy oldy au
0 35,36 |o* 7lavt €| क itav tla ula tla rilav | कछ ९ | कछ क| कछ olav au
&९
a
Ss
ह
11
Q
Se
कि |
[२ १
Q
i]
{| 4४ ४ | dv
a
&
eS
। 1
&
~~)
4५४ ऽ | 4४{ a| dv ९ | 4४ ५ | ४ ० | 4४ au
Observe, that in the above table, as in the examples, the final letter, in its changed state, has been printed, for greater
clearness, separate from the initial; except in those cases where the blending of the two vowels made this impossible.
* If the initial a belong to a termination, suffix, &., and not to a complete word, then a is not cut off, and 0 becomes av before it. See 36. a.
+ If both the words are complete words, the y and ¢ may be dropped throughout, but not so usually as in the case of €,
32 EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
Sect. II1.—EUPHONIC COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
39. Before proceeding to the combination of consonants, let the
letters be again regarded as divided into two grand classes of Hard
and Soft, as explained at 20. 4.
HARD 08 SURD, SOFT OR SONANT.
¢ kh g gh | ¢ | ¢ ¢
८ ८ | $ j gh n y ४ £ € ai n
t th | sh | ¢ d dh n r rt rt or
t ¢ | ॐ d dh n l tri छ m
p ph 5b bh m v ut ० au
40. The stems of nouns and the roots of verbs may end in almost any letter,
and these final letters (whether single or conjunct) are allowed to remain when the
crude words stand alone; but complete words, when they stand alene or at the
end of a sentence, can only, according to the native system, end in one of nine
consonants (or, including Visarga and the Anusvara substituted for final m, eleven),
viz. Gk, St, Tt, Lp, Fm, Wa, An, Am, ठक् ¢ Visarga (+), and Anusvara (mm);
and even stems of words not ending in one ofthe above eleven letters are liable to
undergo changes which shail make them so end, before the process of their
euphonic union with other suffixes and other words in sentences is commenced.
Panini (vir. 4, 56), however, seems to allow a word ending in one of the soft
consonants g, d, d, and 3, optionally to stand at the end of a sentence or before a
pause; e.g. वाक् or AT, &०.
41. In this Grammar the soft letters g, ¢, d, 5, the sibilant qs,
and the semivowel र् # will be admitted as possible finals of com-
plete words standing alone, as well as of stems preparing for
euphonic combinations; but the following five preliminary laws
must be enforced under any circumstances, without reference to
the initial letters of succeeding words,
FIVE PRELIMINARY LAWS.
I, A conjunct quiescent consonant (i.e. a conjunct consonant
having no vowel after it) is not generally allowed to remain at the
end of a word, but must be reduced to a simple one. As a general
rule this is done by dropping every consonant except the first;
thus éarants becomes éaran, avets becomes avet, éikérsh becomes ¢ikér
(see 166. a). । ।
GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS, 33
Observe, however, that क् ¢ ट्त ष् 8, when preceded by Tr, remain
conjunct if both elements of these conjunct letters are either radical or substitutes
for radical letters, e.g. dirk, nom. of ध strength’ (176. h); amért, 3rd sing
Impf. of rt. mrij (Pan, णा. 2, 24). But in abibhar for abibhart, t is rejected as
not being radical (see the table at 583; cf. éru@rev for € 770४7)
II. An aspirated quiescent consonant is not allowed to remain
final, but is changed to its corresponding unaspirated letter ;
e.g. faafsa ditralikh becomes éitralik (see 43); क् ch, however,
usually becomes ट् ¢ (see under IV. below).
III. The aspirate ह् Ais not allowed to remain final, but is usually
changed to द् ए (thus ih becomes lit); sometimes to क् ¢०८त् ४४
(see 182, 305, 306).
IV. Final palatals, as being of the nature of gutturals, are
generally changed to gutturals; thus च् ८ is usually changed to
, क् € e.g. vdé becomes vik (see 176); but | ¢h becomes टू ट (see
176); J is changed to म् g (or क् k) and sometimes to zd (or Z 2),
(see 176) t. [Technical grammatical expressions are excepted ; cf.
50. 6.]
V. The sibilants श् ई ष् sh, if final, are generally changed into
ट् १; sometimes, however, श् $ becomes क् ¢; and ष् sh either mk or
Visarga (see 181) t.
a. The above changes must hold good before all suffixes and terminations of
nouns and verbs beginning with strong consonants (i.e. all consonants except
nasals and semivowels), and before Taddhita suffixes beginning with nasals.
8. But before terminations of nouns and verbs beginning with vowels, and
generally before weak consonants (i.e. nasals and semivowels), the finals of roots
and stems remain unchanged (see wdé, 176; vad, 660); even in opposition to the
general rule which requires the softening of a hard letter when a soft letter follows.
GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS.
42. If two hard or two soft unaspirated letters come in contact,
there is generally no change; thus
विद्युत् प्रकाश vidyut prakdga remains विद्युप्रकाश vidyut-prakdga, ‘the brilliance
of lightning.’
* So in Arabic ४ h becomes ६ 1.
T So in cognate languages ch is often pronounced as & or passes into ¢, = Com-
pare archbishop, archangel, church, kirk, &c. Again, nature is pronounced nachure,
and g in English is often pronounced as j. ।
{ Compare parochial with parish, and nation pronounced nashun.
F
34 GENERAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS.
Sag विक्रास kumud vikdsa remains कुमुद्धिकांस kumud-vikdsa, ‘the blossoming of
the lotus.’
eit अधोगति drigad adhogati remains दूशदधोगति driad-adhogati, “the descent
of the rock.’
विद्युत् + सु vidyut 15४ remains frag vidyutsu, 170 lightnings’ (loc. case plur.).
43. If any hard letter (except a sibilant, see 64-66) ends a word
when any soft initial letter follows, the hard (unless affected by
some special rule) is changed to its own soft, which must always be
in the unaspirated form by 41. II. (but see d. below); thus
afeq रय sarit raya becomes @fCEA sarid-raya, ‘the current of a river.’
चित्रल्िक् लिखित citralik (for citralikh, 44. II.) likhita becomes farafestafera
Gitralig-likhita, ‘ painted by a painter.’
वाक् देवी odk (for vdé, 41. IV.) devé becomes वाग्देवी vdg-devt, “the goddess of
eloquence ;’ similarly, वाक् ईषा vdk ८52 becomes वागीश ८८ -&2, “the lord
of speech.’
faz भव vit (for vish, 41. V.) bhava becomes विडभव vid-bhava, ‘generated by
filth.’
a. An option is allowed before nasals, as follows: When two
words come together, the initial of the second word being a nasal,
then the final of the first word is usually (though not necessarily)
changed to the nasal of its own class (see Pan. vii. 4, 45); thus
तत् नेवम् tat netram becomes waa tan netram (or tad netram), ‘that eye.’
मप् भूतम् ap milam becomes BALSA am milam (or ab milam), “water and
roots.’
afty मुख sarit mukha becomes सरिन्सुख sarin-mukha (or सरिद्युख sarid-mukha),
“the source of a stream.”
6. Before maya and mdéra, the nasalization is not optional but
compulsory ; thus
चित् मय Git maya becomes चिन्मयं din-maya, * formed of intellect.’
वाक् मय ० (for vdé, 41. IV.) maya becomes वाङ य vdn-maya, ‘full of words.’
विद् मय vit (for vish, 41. V.) maya becomes विरमय vin-maya, ‘full of filth.’
तत् मातम् tat mdtram becomes तन्मालन् tan-mdtram, भ merely that,’ “an element.’
९. In the case of roots followed by Krit suffixes there is not usually any change;
e.g. चट् + मन् chad+man becomes FAA chadman, * disguise.’
d. It will be seen from 41. V. 4. 6. that the general rule 43 applies
to case-endings of nouns beginning with consonants, but not to
case-endings beginning with vowels. In the latter case, the final
consonant attracts the initial vowel, so as to form with it a separate
SPECIAL RULES FOR COMBINING CONSONANTS. 35
syllable; thus vdk-+ bhis becomes vdg-bhis, ‘by words ;’ but in vdé
+4, é attracts d, thus vd-éd, ‘by a speech’ (not vdj-d): sarit + bhis
= sarid-bhis, ‘by rivers ;’ but in sarit + d, ¢ attracts d, thus sari-td,
“by a river’ (not sarid-d). So also samidh + द becomes sami-dhd,
“by fuel’ (not samid-d).
e. Similarly, in the case of verbal terminations beginning with
vowels or with m, v, y, attached to roots ending in hard letters (see
pat, 597. ¢; kship, 635; vad, 650), rule 43 does not apply.
J. WA" six’ (becoming षट् by 41. V.), when followed by the augment » before the
case-ending आम् dm, becomes षणाम् shan-n-dm, because the final द् becomes श्
and cerebralizes also the inserted n coming in contact with it. Similarly, षट् नवति
becomes षवि shan-navati, ‘ninety-six,’ and षट् नगयैः becomes षरगयैः shan
nagaryah, ‘six cities.” Compare 58. 8.
44. If a soft letter ends a word or stem, when any hard initial
letter follows, the soft is changed to its own hard, which must
always be in the unaspirated form by 41. II; thus
PIR + सु Lumud+ su becomes FAM kumutsu, loc. pl. of kumud, “a lotus.’
समिद् + सु samid (for samidh, 41. 11.)+su becomes समित्सु samitsu, loc. pl. of
samidh, ‘fuel.’
Note—Similarly in Latin, 9 soft guttural or labial passes into = hard before
sand ६; thus reg-+si becomes (reksi) reai, serib-++-si=scripsi, reg +tum=(rektum)
rectum, &c.
a. With regard to palatals see 41. IV.
8. Soft letters, which have no corresponding hard, such as the nasals, semi-
vowels, and & ¢, are changed by special rules. ।
©. If the final be an aspirated soft letter, and belong to a stem whose initial is
% g or ¥ d, Fd or ब् 6, then the aspiration, which is suppressed in the final, is
transferred back to the initial letter of the stem; 98 बुध् +सु budh-+su becomes
WJ Shutsu, loc. pl. of budh, “one who knows’ (177; cf. also duh, 182). Similarly
TU + तस् dadh+ tas becomes WAX dhatias, ‘they two place;’ and see 306. a,
299. a. b, 664.
Note—Greek recognizes a similar principle in 702८५, 6०८६०५८ ; Tpud, 60८7700;
cf. also Opik, 1. 6. Opik-s from the stem 709८.
CLASSIFICATION OF SPECIAL RULES.
It is stated at 40, 41, that complete words as well as stems
preparing for combination can only end in certain consonants, Of
these the most usually occurring final consonants are q ¢ and द् ९.
the nasals न् and म् m, the dental sibilant स् s (changed to Visarga
by native grammarians), and the semivowel tr (also by them changed
F 2
36 CHANGES OF FINAL qf AND द् d,
to Visarga). It will be sufficient, therefore, for all practical purposes
to give special rules under four heads :
1st, Changes of final त् and दू.
and, Changes of the nasals, especially न् and म्.
3rd, Changes of final स्.
4th, Changes of final र्.
CHANGES OF FINAL त् र AND ह् d,
45. By the general rule (43), final q ¢ becomes ह् d before soft
consonants, and before vowels; as मरत् वाति marut vdti becomes
मरुद्वाति marud vdti, ‘the wind blows’
a. Certain exceptions are provided for by 41. V. 8, 43. d. Hence also stems
ending in ¢ followed by the suffixes vat, mat, vin, vala do not. necessarily change ;
€. g. vidyut-vat, “possessed of lightning ;’ garut-mat, “possessed of wings.”
46. And, by 44, final ह् द generally becomes त् ¢ before hard con-
sonants; as ¢W¢ पतन becomes दू शत्पतन drisat-patana, ‘the fall of
a stone.’
47. And, by 43.4, final त् ¢ or ठ् द may become 4x before n or m.
Assimilation of final त् ४ or द् d.
48. त् ४० ¢d ends a word, when an initial 4649, or BL
follows, then त् ¢ or ठू d assimilates with these letters; thus
भयात् लोभात् च bhaydt lobhdt éa becomes भयाल्लोभाच्च bhaydl lobhdé éa, “from fear
and avarice.’
तद् जीवनम् tad [कक becomes तज्जीवनम् taj jéoanam, ^ that life.’
a. A final त् ६० द् d also assimilates with a following R ch or न्ह, but by
41. IL. the result will then be ¢ ch; j jh; thus तत् दिनि becomes तच्छिनत्ति ‘he
cuts that ;’ Tq कषः = THA: ‘the fish of him.’
४. Final 7 or द् assimilates in the same way with द्, 4, and their aspirates;
thus तत् टीका becomes TEZTAT ; तट् डीनम्, तडुगीनम्; तत् ठक्कुरः, ATR.
Observe—The converse does not take place in the contact of complete words ;
thus षट् ते (not WZ) ‘those six: but ईइ + ते = §F ‘he praises,’ see 325.
Final त् ८० द् d may also assimilate with initial 3a and Wn.
49. If q ¢ or ह् द ends a word and the next begins with श् $
immediately followed by a vowel, semivowel, or nasal, then ¢ or d is
changed to च् é, and the initial श् € is usually changed to Beh; eg.
तत् श्रुत्वा tat Sruted becomes तच्छत्वा taé ८1.704, ‘ having heard that ;’ but तच्छुत्वा
10८ Srutvd is allowable.
CHANGES OF FINAL त् ४ AND ठ् d. 37
a, Similarly, the change of initial WE to क् ¢h is optional after a final क्; thus
वाक्यात् may either remain so or be written वाक्त “a hundred speeches.’ Again,
after a final टु ¢ and प् p this rule is said to be optional; but examples are not
likely to occur: though in Rig-veda 111. 33, 1, we have विपाट् हुहुद्री for विपाट्
शुतुद्री, the two rivers Vipds and Sutudri in the Panjab.
50. If त् ४ ends a word, when initial ह % follows, the final त् ४ is
changed to द् ९ (by 43), and the initial ह् # optionally to च् dh; thus
तत् हसति cat harati becomes तद्धरति tad dharati, ‘he seizes that ;? but तद् इरति
tad harati is allowable.
a. By a similar rule, and on the same principle, any consonant (except a nasal
semivowel, or sibilant) followed by हू, must be softened if hard, and its soft aspi-
rate optionally substituted for the initial ह् ; thus वाक् इर्ति vdk harati becomes
वाग्घरति vdg gharati, speech captivates
2. Similarly, सच् FE! %८ hrasvah becomes AWARE: aj jhrasvah, “a short vowel.’
Insertion of त् + changeable to च् €.
51. When @ ¢h is between two vowels (long or short) in the body
of a simple word, त् ¢ changeable by 48. a. to च् ८ must be inserted
before क् ¢h; thus root we prach followed by a vowel must be
written wes praccha (as in पप्रच्छ papractha, पृच्छामि, &c. at 631); so
also fa * + Be becomes चिच्छेद् ‘he has cut;? w*+ faaq = अच्छिनत्
“he was cutting’ (see Pan. vi. 1, 73, 75).
Observe—In the case of root mur¢h there is no insertion of ¢ in mirchana, &c.,
because ¢ is not between two vowels.
a, This insertion of ८ is obligatory when क् ¢A is initial, and when
a previous syllable of any word, either separate or compounded
ends in a short vowel; as, शेत्स्य BIA or शोलच्छाया ‘the shadow of a
rock,’
b. The same is obligatory after the preposition स्रा द and the
particle मा md; as सा Ba becomes Wrexq ‘covered ;’ so मा ददत्
becomes मा च्छिदत् md ८८११८०४, ‘let him not cut’ (Pan. vi. 1, 74).
c. In all other cases after long vowels the insertion of च् ८ is
optional; as, बद्रीद्धाया or वदरीच्छाया ‘the shade of a jujube tree ;?
सा दिनि or at faxafa ‘she cuts’ (P4n. vi. 1, 76).
९. An augment {¢ may optionally be inserted after final ट् ¢ before initial स् s;
as, षटसन्तः or षटृत्सनः ‘being six’ (Pag. ए, 4, 42 ; 3, 39):
* चि ८ is the syllable of reduplication to form the perfect of faz éhid (252), and
च a the augment to form the imperfect of all verbs (251).
38 CHANGES OF FINAL NASALS.
CHANGES OF THE NASALS, ESPECIALLY न् 2.
52. If the letter न् , preceded by a short vowel, ends a word,
when the next begins with any vowel, the ऋ is doubled; thus
Tae AA dsan atra becomes Wraaqa dsann 0४70, ` they were here.”
तस्मिन् उद्याने tasmin udydne becomes तस्मिनुद्याने tasminn udydne, “in that garden.’
a. This applies equally to final ¥ » and Wn; as WAS र्ति becomes wegfa “he
goes towards the west ;’ सुगण् अस्ति = सुगखस्ति “he is a good calculator’ (see Pan.
VIII. 3, 32); but these, especially the last, rarely occur as finals.
b. Technical terms in grammar, such as Un-Adi (i.e. “a list of suffixes beginning
with wn’), are said to be exceptions to this rule.
53. If 4” ends a word, when an initial च् ¢ or q ¢ or 2 ¢ (or their
aspirates) follows, a sibilant is inserted between the final and initial
letter, according to the class of the initial letter; and the न् % then
passes into the true Anusvara, see 6.d; e.g.
कस्मिन् + चित् kasmin+ éit becomes कस्मिंश्चित् kasminsit, “in a certain person.’
अस्मिन् तडागि asmin taddge becomes WAS asmins taddge, “in this pool.’
महान् SH: mahdn tankah becomes AER: mahdnsh tankah, ५४ large axe.’
a. The same holds good before & ch (as, तांङद्ादयनि “he covers them’), and
before च् th, द् th; but the two latter are not likely to occur.
8. If s immediately follows ¢ in a conjunct consonant, as in the word We ‘a
sword-hilt,’ there is 70 change; thus सन् TAS: remains Wass.
९. A similar euphonic s is inserted between the prepositions sam, ava, pari,
prati, and certain words which begin with k, 28 संस्कार sans-kdra, WEA sans-krita,
परिष्कार parish-kdra, प्रतिष्कार pratish-kdra, &c. (see 70); just as in Latin, between
the preposition ab and ८, &c., e.g. ab-s-condo. Also, between पुम् a male,’ and
a word beginning with a hard consonant, as airs a cuckoo,’ thus पुंस्कोकिलः 1
also when कान् is repeated, e.g. कांस्कान् or कांस्कान् ‘whom?’ ‘whom?? ‘which
of them ?’ (Pan. शा. 3, 12, but ef. Vopa-deva 11. 35.)
९. {nat the end of a root does not require an inserted s before terminations begin-
ning witht; thus हन् + ति han + ti 15 हन्ति hanti, ‘he kills’ (but see 57, 57. ८. 2).
e. Except, also, HINA 77८९९ (nom. of prasém, 179. a); 95, प्रजान्तनोति ‘the
peaceful man spreads ;’ AYMfaratfa ‘the peaceful man collects? (Pan. vit. 3, 7).
54- The only cases in which नू 2, when originally the final of a word, can pass
into Anusvara are given above at 53, 53. ८; thus in classical Sanskrit combina-
tions like तान् करोतिणः तान् ददाति must not be written तां करोति, तां ददाति.
55- If न् ? ends a word, when the next begins with श् ई, then
न् and ज् § may be combined in either of the two following ways
1st, the final qx may be changed to palatal न् %; thus महान् YT
muhdn Sirah may be written महान्शयुरः ‘a great hero.
andly, the initial a $ may be changed to Bch; thus ARIFAT:.
a. According to native authorities an augment १, changeable to ¢ (51), may be
CHANGE OF 4” (NOT FINAL) T0 श् 2. 39
inserted in both cases, thus ART: or AAT, but this is rarely done; and in
practice, both {and ञ् are sometimes erroneously left unchanged against the rule
(thus, महान् YT).
9. Final ङ् wx may optionally insert an augment क् ¢ when any sibilant begins the
next word or syllable. Hence ATS Wa may be either प्राङ्ंशत (or WTR AA by 49. a)
or may remain unchanged.
०. Similarly, final ण् श्र may insert द् {, and final न् may insert त् ¢ before स् 5;
€. £. सुगण्, “a good reckoner,’ is in loc. pl. सुगरसु or सुगरद्सु; and सन् सः; “he
being,’ may be सन्त्स; ; and some say the inserted letters may optionally be aspirated.
The insertion of @ between a final न् and initial सू is common in the Veda; but
in later Sanskrit these insertions are not usual
56. न् १ ends a word, when the next begins with % J, the n assimilates with
the J, and the Candra-vindu mark ५ is placed over the J, substituted for n, to
denote its nasality; thus TATA लुनाति becomes aarti or पकछ्षाट् लुनाति he
clips the wings;’ see 7. Similarly, € + Aaa = CAA GATTO ; con+ligo=colligo.
a. Final न् १, before Wj or WR jh, and न् %, is properly written in the palatal
form ज्, but in practice is often allowed to remain unchanged against the rule.
6. Final न्» before ड 4, dh, and M2, should be written in the cerebral form T@.
c. But final न् 2, before gutturals, labials, semivowels (except य् y), and the sibi-
lants स् 5, प् sk, remains unchanged ; as, तन् षट् “those six.’
57. न् १ as the final of nominal stems is rejected before termina-
tions and suffixes beginning with consonants; thus धनिन् + भिस्
dhanin + bhis becomes धनिभिस् dhanibhis, ‘by rich people ; ° युवन् + त्व
yuvan + tva becomes Jat yuva-tva, * youth.” Similarly svémin + vat
becomes svdmi-vat, ‘like a master.?- But राजन्वत् rdjan-vat is excepted
in the sense of ‘having a good king.’ (Raghu-v. vi. 22; Pan. णा,
2, 14; cf, also sqraq udan-vat, † the ocean,’ Raghu-v. x. 6.)
a. {nas the final of a root is rejected before those terminations beginning with
consonants (excepting nasals and semivowels) which have no indicatory P (see
307 and 323); thus F{+UiP is afar, but हन् 1८८5 is TAA, see 654.
४. Also, when a word ending in न् 7 is the first (or any but the last) member of
a compound word, even though the next member of the compound begins with a
vowel; e.g. राजन् पुरूष rdjan purusha becomes सजपुरूष rdja-purusha, the king’s
servant;’ Ut Fg rdjan indra becomes Usry rdjendra, chief of kings; सामिन्
थेम् svdmin artham becomes स्वाम्ययम् svdmy-artham, on the master’s account
c. {x not final, immediately preceded by a palatal, is changed to the palatal
form; e.g. याच् + AT= याच prayer, यन् 1 न = यज्ञ ‘a sacrifice ;’ similarly,
राज्ञी ‘a queen,’ fem. of TH ‘a king
Change of न् n (not final) to ण् ए.
58. If am (not final, and having immediately after it any vowel,
or one of the consonants {n, Am, Vy, FT v) follows any one of the
40 CHANGE OF 4” (NOT FINAL) TO ण् 2.
three cerebral letters कू ri (short or long), र् 7, ष् sh, in the same
word (samdna-pade), then न् n must be changed to the cerebral र् 2,
even though any vowel or any of the guttural or labial consonants
at page 15 (viz. k, kh, g, gh, w, h, and p, ph, b, bh, m,v), or y or
Anusvdra, either singly or combined together or with any vowel,
intervene; as in the following examples formed with suffixes or
terminations: feratfa (635); कमणा (152); मृगेण (107); Few ‘ causing
to grow fat ;? शुद्धि ‘horned ;? ब्रह्मण्य ^ devout. आचायोनी dédrydni,
‘the wife of an Aéérya,’ is an exception (Pan. rv. 1, 49. Vart.)*.
Obs. 1. 4” final (i.e. followed by Virdéma) in a word is not so
changed; e.g. दातुन् not दातृण् (see 127).
Obs. 2. In a word like @afat, ‘they do,’ ¢ immediately after १
prevents the change. Similarly, सन्ध्वस् (671).
Obs. 3. This change of a dental to a cerebral letter is called nati in the Prati-
sdkhyas.
u. The intervention of any of the palatal, cerebral, or dental consonants at
p. 15, except y (viz. ¢, ch, j, jh, 9, ङ t, th, d, dh, n, t, th, d, dh, 1, s), prevents the
operation of this rule, as in अचैना ‘worship;’ AHA ‘abandoning ;’ क्रीडन ‘playings’
वत्मौ नि ‘roads’ (nom. pl. of TH); PISA “by a jackal’ (149).
The intervention of a labial, conjunct with न् , precludes any change in the
conjugational forms of the verb FT ‘to satisfy,’ cl. 5. (तृघ्नोति &c., 618), and in
those of Wa "to shake,’ cl. 9. (apatfa &c., 694); see Pan. vii. 4,39. In the Veda,
however, guia is found. But the intervention of nasals, semivowels, or ¢, though
conjunct with the न्, do not prevent cerebralization, as in अयेम्णा (157); अगराव्णा
inst. ९. of HUTA ‘hostile ;’ ग्राज्णा of ग्रावन् “a stone.’
Observe—According to Pan. vi. 1, 16, the past pass. part. of vrasé, ‘to cut,’
and raj, ‘to break,’ should ०९ वृक्ण, Wa.
b. If two conjunct न् xs follow the letters causing the cerebralization, they each
become र् as in FATA vishanna t (540).
ce. Even in compound words where छु, ऋ. ष्, र् 816 in the first member of the
compound, and {occurs in the second member, the change to & may sometimes
take place (especially when the separate ideas inherent in each word are lost sight
of in a single object denoted), and sometimes is optional. When, however, the
* The whole rule 58 is thus expressed in the first two Sutras of Panini गा. 4,
रषाभ्यां णोनः समानपदे ॥ अट् कुष्वाङ्नुम्ब्यवायेऽपि. The vowel ri is supposed to be
included in र. We stands for the vowels, diphthongs, y, r, vr, and h; @ for the
guttural class of consonants; J for the labial; साङ्, for the preposition सा; नुम्
for Anusvara.
+ Except a word like प्राणिणत् redup. aorist of सन् ‘to breathe,’ with प्र.
CHANGE OF 4x (NOT FINAL) TO wn. 41
८
words do not, so to speak, merge their individuality in a single object, no change
is generally allowed, but even in these cases it is impossible to lay down a precise
rule. The following are a few examples: ग्रामणी ‘a village-chief,’ अग्रणी “foremost
रामायण “the Ramayana, वाध्रीणस ‘a Rhinoceros ( leather-snouted animal’),
खरणस ‘having a sharp nose,’ but Wtatfaat ‘a whip,’ and स्वेनामनन् “a pronoun,
स्वनैदौी or स्वणेदी the river of heaven वृषनाञ्चनं ४ plant’ (where FAUT might
be expected), गिरिनिदी or गिर्णिदी a mountain-stream,’ ATHIT “a mango-grove,
WACUA (acc. of TACT) “the killer of a Brdhman.’ Similarly, JAWA ace. c. of
वृत्रहन् “the slayer of Vritra,’ but JAH (where han becomes ghna) ; सवै “the
whole day;’ and in other similar compounds when the first member ends in
short a, but पराह ‘afternoon’ (if from WU हन्). See Pan. vist. 4, 3, &e.
2. In a compound, 42 is not generally changed to र् 2, if the first member ends
in Y sh, and the next word is formed with a Krit suffix containing न् 7, as निष्पान,
दष्पानः यजुष्पावन (Pan. एणा, 4, 35).
९. If the second member of a compound contain a guttural or be monosyllabic,
the change of 4» to श् १ is necessary, as in स्वगैकाभिणो, इर्कामेण (Pan. णा. 4, 13),
witta (2६. virr 4,12); but not in compounds with agni, as कायाम
59. The prepositions wat, निर् (for निस्), पण, षरि, प्र, and दुर् (for
दुस्) require the change of न् n to ण् % in most roots beginning with
न् (which in the Dhatu-patha are therefore written with cerebral ण्);
e.g. प्रणमति ‘he bows,’ खन्तणैयति ‘he leads inside,’ निगदति ‘he drives
out,’ पराणुद्ति ‘he drives away, प्रणय ^ guidance,’ प्रणायक ‘a guide,’
परिणाह * circumference.’
a. But in the following roots the न् is never changed, and these roots are there-
fore written in the Dhatu-patha with dental 72: नृत् ` to dance,’ नन्द् “to rejoice,’
ae “to roar,’ WR ‘to kill,’ नट् “to dance *,’ ATT ‘to ask,’ ATY" to ask,’ ss “to lead.’
b. In the case of नञ् ‘to destroy,’ the change of न् into ण् only takes place,
when SI is not changed to 4, as प्रणङ्यति, परिणयति, but wae, परिनष्ट (Pan.
VIII. 4, 36)
c. In the case of इन् ‘to kill,’ the change of न् to श् takes place except when हू
is changed to च्, as 70 प्रहण्यते, प्रहणन, but प्रघनन्ति (Pan. vin. 4, 24). An option is
allowed when is followed by म् or F, as in प्ररन्मि or USWA, &९. (PAn. णा. 4, 23).
क्. When the preposition fa intervenes between the above-mentioned prepositions
and the root, the change of न् into र् takes place in the following verbs, गहू? Aq,
पत्, पट्, मा, मे, सो, हन्, या, वा, द्रा, प्सा, वप्, वह्, शम्, चि, दिह्. In most other
verbs the change is optional, as प्रनिभिनचि ० प्रणिभिन्ि (Pan. vir. 4, 17, 18).
९, After prepositions containing an r, the n of certain suffixes like ana is liable
to be cerebralized, but in the case of causal stems, and in some other cases, the
* According to some the resistance of this root to cerebralization is only when
it belongs to class 10, and means ‘to drop or fall.’
G
42 CHANGES OF FINAL म् m.
change is optional (see P4n. vil. 4, 29-31); ९.४. प्रकोपन or WHIT, WATT or
WAIT, 1" प्रवेपन, प्रमद्धन, प्रकम्यन, WIAA, WTA, &०. no change to % is
allowed (P4n. vir. 4, 32, 34). In the case of root सन् ‘to breathe,’ the final
becomes Tin प्राण् and wag, making प्रारिति “he breathes,’ and aurfafa (Pan.
Vii. 4,19). The causal aorist allows two cerebral nasals, €. g. प्राणिणत्; as does
also the desid. of UUW, ९.8. qufafaeft. In this way final न् may be changed
to श् at the end of a word, as 77 प्राण्? पराण्? formed from rt. an. But this is only
true of rt. अन्. In no other case can final न् become Y. When r is separated
from the x of an by more than one letter, no change is allowed, as in पयेनिति.
Changes of final म् m,
60. If am ends a word, when: any one of the consonants ¢ kh,
g, gh; ८ h, j, jh; t, th, क dh; t, th, d, dh, n; p, ph, 0, bh, m
follows, then म् m may pass into Anusvara, or may, before any one
of those consonants, be changed to its own nasal; thus गृहम् जगाम
griham jagéma is written either Fe जगाम or Frama ‘he has gone
home ;> and nagaram prati either ant प्रति or नगसरम्प्रति ‘towards the
city;? but in these cases Anusvdra is generally used. So also डीन
preceded by prep. sam becomes either ata or सरडीन ‘flight; सम् चय
either Fag or सच्वय ‘collection;’ सम् न्यास either संन्यास or सन्यास ‘abandon-
ment ;’ but in these cases Anusvara is not so usual.
a. The final म् m of a root is changed to %{n or UW» before suffixes beginning
with any consonant except y, 7, J, s; thus 33a + fa = जङ्गन्मि (see 709). So also
चकम् + वहे = FHWA (see 58; and 7६. vist. 2, 6६).
b. Before SI, a, स्, ह्, ४ final म् is represented by Anusvara; also generally
before the semivowels, but see 6. e. f, 7-
ce. With regard to final म् before ह् when followed by m, n, y, 7, ४, see 7. €.
d. When the next word begins with a vowel, then म् m must
always be written; thus गृहम् आयाति becomes गृहमायाति ‘he comes
home’ (not गृहं आयाति).
.e, Observe—When न् # or म् m not final is preceded by & ¢h, the latter becomes
श् 5 ४ प्रह् +न प्रश्च “a question ;’ frg+ न = fora ‘lustre’ (Pan. vi. 4, 19);
पाप्रड् + fa = arafya ‘I ask frequently.’
CHANGES OF FINAL &s.
61. Many cases of nouns and many inflections of verbs end
in स् 5, which is changeable to ज् § and षू sh, and is liable to be
represented by Visarga (:, i.e. the sign for a hard breathing, see 8),
or to pass into tr (regarded as the corresponding soft letter of the
CHANGES OF FINAL स् 5. 43
hard sibilants and Visarga). As these changes will constantly meet the
student’s eye, the following five rules must be carefully studied.
Observe—In other grammars these rules are designated ‘rules for the changes
of Visarga,’ a sibilant not being allowed at the end of a complete word standing
alone (see 40).
In the following pages, however, s is preserved as a final, both in declension and
conjugation, for two reasons: 1st, because it is more easily pronounced than a
mere breathing; 2ndly, because it keeps in view the resemblance between Sanskrit
and Greek and Latin terminations.
62. First Rute. When does the final sibilant remain un-
rejected ?—Before wt, च् ८4 and द् ¢ and their aspirates, respectively ;
thus, final स् ऽ before ¢, th, remains unchanged ; before ¢, ¢h, passes
into the palatal sibilant श् €; and similarly, before { th, passes into
the cerebral sibilant ष् sh.
a. Final s is also allowed to remain unchanged before initial स् 5, and to assi-
milate with initial ज् ङ and ष् 5४, More commonly, however, it is in these cases
represented by Visarga; see 63.
®. So also, the final As of a root must always remain unchanged before the
terminations si, se; thus शास् + से = शास्से; वस् + से = वस्से; see 304. a.
९. When an initial त् £ is compounded with a sibilant, a preceding final s, instead
of remaining unchanged, may become Visarga as if before a sibilant; e.g. Zt
त्सर Teatta * Hari grasps the sword-belt.’
d. For exceptions in as, is, us, see 69.
63. Szconp Rute. When does final स् इ pass into Visarga (:)?—
Before क् k, च् p, and their aspirates, and generally (but see 62. a)
before the three sibilants स् s, ञ् §, and ष् sh +.
a. Before a pause, i.e. at the end of a sentence.
6. When an initial sibilant is compounded with another hard consonant, the
preceding final s is often dropped in MSS.; e.g. हरि स्कन्दति or हरिः न्दत
“Hari goes.’
c. Nouns ending in is or us followed by verbs beginning with k, p, or their
aspirates, and grammatically connected with these verbs, may optionally substitute
sh for Visarga; e.g. सपिष्करोति or afa: करोति “he makes ghee’ (2६. श्वा. 3, 44).
* 64. Turp Rute. When does final सत् as become o?—Before all
soft consonants.
a, Similarly, before short च @, which ¢ is then cut off.
This rule is more properly, but less simply, stated thus. When does final स् s
क The assimilation of स् with an initial ष् is rare ; but तयष्षष्टि is an example,
+ Examples before initial 4, like पछपःषष्ि, are rare.
G2
44 CHANGES OF FINAL @ 5.
blend with a preceding a into the vowel 0? Before all soft consonants final स् s is
treated as if liquefied into u*.
b. The names of the worlds (bhuvas, mahas, janas, tapas, &c.) change s to r
before soft consonants; e.g. bhuvar-loka, mahar-loka, &c. ¢
x 65. FourtH Ruiz. When does final स् 8 ०८८०११८ र् ए ?—When
preceded by any other vowel but अ a or = 4, and before all soft
letters, consonants or vowels.
a. Unless tr itself be the soft letter following, in which case, to
avoid the conjunction of two 178, final सू 5 is dropped, and the vowel
preceding it (if short) is lengthened.
The interchangeableness of s, 7, and Visarga is illustrated in some Greek and
Latin words; e.g. flos, floris; genus, generis; labor for labos ; sew =e ‡ suavis=
पि &e.
~ 66. Firra Rui. When is final स् 8 rejected ?—When preceded
by short च @, before any other vowel except short अ at. NB. The
ऋ a, which then becomes final, opens on the initial vowel without
coalition f.
a. When preceded by long wt d, before any soft letter, consonant
or vowel, NB. If the initial letter be a vowel, the आखा dé, which then
becomes final, opens on it without coalition.
6, When preceded by any other vowel but ख ठ or = d, before
the letter 7, as noticed at 65. a.
c. Native grammarians say that final s passes into Visarga, which is then
changed to y; which y is.rejected in accordance with 36, 37.
The above five rules are illustrated in the following table, in
which the nominative cases नरस् naras, ‘a man ;? नरास् nards, ‘men?
हरिस् haris, ‘the god Vishnu; प्पुस् ripus, ‘an enemy;’ and नोस् naus,
* 9 ship’—are joined with verbs.
* That is, it is first changed to r, as at 65, and r is then liquefied into a vowel;
just as ए is often changed to ४ 70 French. The plural of animal is animaux.
+ That is, it blends with a into o, as in 64; and o becoming av before any vowel
but a, the v is rejected by 36. Indian grammarians hold that final s or Visarga
here becomes y, which would also be rejected by 36.
} This is one of the three cases in which a hiatus of two vowels is admissible in
Sanskrit. The three cases are, 1. when final s is rejected from as or ds (66); 2. when
a complete word, ending in e, is followed by any other vowel but द (see 36);
3. when certain dual terminations, ई ¢, ऊ ४, ए ९, are followed by vowels (sec 38).
In the middle of a word a hiatus is very rare (see 5. 0).
45
CHANGES OF FINAL qs.
First Rute.
Seconp RuLe.
Tuirp RULE.
Fourtu RULE.
Firta Rue.
हरिश् शोचति haris éocati
करोति aT karoti narah
fey रस्ति rips rakshati
Final sibilant remains un- Final स् 5 passes into Final अघ् as becomes WH o. Final स् s becomes दू 7, Final स् 5 is rejected.
rejected. Visarga.
तरति naras tarati नरः करोति narah karoti नसे गच्छति aro gacthati इरिर् खचि harir atti नर ज्रायाति nara dydti
\ y
नस् तरन्ति nards taranti नराः कुवैन्ति १९८१ kurvanti | नृते जयति naro ऋ र अनि ripur atti नरा अदन्ति nard adanti
हरिस् तरति haris tarati zfs: करोति harih karoti । म् = naur dy ati +
ने $ नरो याति naro ydti he ts नर EAA nara tkshate
नोस् तरति naus tarati नरः खनति narah khanati हरिर् रति harir eti नस Sa त क
x : नरो cata naro rakshati रिपुर् रति ripur eti र
नरञ् चरति naras ८702 नरः खनन्ति nardh khananti नौ = 5 Ee
। र् राति naur ett नर Tua nara edhate
नाञ् चरन्ति nardé daranti ete: खनति hari. khanati : <
न Similarly, before all other | हरिर् गच्छति harir gaéchati | नस रन्ते nard edhante
र्ञ् रति harig carat नरः पचि narah pacati soft consonants. रिपुर् गच्छति ripur gacchati न्ति nord :
ए चरति श नरः पचन्ति nardh pacanti Also before ऋं ¢, which नौर् गच्छति naur gatéhati # Tea OES
इरिः पचति Aarip pacati Fa is then cut off; thus, : ; नरा यान्ति nard ydnti
Final s rarely remains un- =. vA हरिर् याति harir ydti _ i
: व च naro *tti for naro| रिपुर् याति ripur ydti नण Tala nerd rakshanti
changed before @ s, and assi- | नरः सरति narah sarati atti नोर याति १
milates with ज्ञ ई; thus, | नः सरन्ति nardh saranti \ + Similarly, final सस् as be-
४ i ४ Similarly, final 5 preceded | fore al
नस्ष् सरति naras sarati हरिः सरति harip sarati J preceded | fore all ashe vowels except
by any vowel but a or d, be- | WH a (see third rule); and
: : y any » ( 2; an
नरस् सरन्ति nards 52/47; | नर; शोचति 070} 4०८०४ fore all soft letters except r. | similarly, final IT ds before
` हरिस् सरति haris sarati नराः शोचन्ति 000८1 so¢anti Before 70191 s alsobecom- | all other soft letters, conso-
; हरिः शोचति harih So¢ati ing r is rejected, and the pre- | nants or vowels.
नरश् शोचति narag so¢ati ceding vowellengthened; e.g.
नराण् शोचन्ति 04 §oéanti Before a pause, हणी रसति hart rakshati
46 CHANGES OF FINAL स् 8.
67. There is one common exception to 62, 63,64: सस् sas, ‘he,’ and
एषस् eshas, ‘this,’ the nominative case masc, of the pronouns तद् tad
and waz etad (220, 223), drop the final $ before any consonant, hard
or soft; 28, स करोति sa karoti, ‘he does;’ स गच्छति sa gacthati, ‘he
goes ; रष पचति esha pacati, ^ this (man) cooks.” But rules 64. a, 66,
and 63. a, are observed; thus, सोऽपि so *pi, ‘he also ; स रषः sa eshah,
‘he himself? Sometimes (but only पादपूरणे to fill up a verse or suit
the metre) sa may blend with a following vowel, as सेषः for स रषः.
In poetry syas, ‘he,’ nom. masc. of tyad, may optionally follow the same rule
(६. vi. 1, 133).
Compare Greek 6 for 6s. Compare also Latin qui for quis, and ille, iste, ipse,
for illus, istus, ipsus. The reason why sa dispenses with the termination s may be
that this termination is itself derived from the pronoun sa,
68. The preceding rules are most frequently applicable to स् s, as
the final of the cases of nouns and inflexions of verbs; but they
come equally into operation in substantives or adjectives, whose stem
ends in अस् as, इस् is, and उस् us; thus, by 65, Taq Saya cakshus
tkshate becomes चक्षुरी छते ८८59009" ikshate, ‘the eye sees ;* and चशस् +
भिस् Cakshus + bhis = wafig cakshurbhis, ‘by eyes.’ Similarly, by 64,
मनस् जानाति manas jdndti becomes मनो जानाति mano jéndti, ‘the mind
knows;” and मनस् + भिस् manas + bhis = मनोनिस् manobhis, ‘by minds,’
Exceptions in खम् 28, इस् is, उस् us.
69. प्रस् as at the end of the first member of a compound word retains its ऽ
before derivatives of the roots कु and कम्, and before HA, कुम्भ, Wa, कुशा, कर्णीं
(see Pan. श्रा. 3, 46); e.g. तेजस्कर * causing light,’ अयस्कार “a blacksmith,”
नमस्कार ‘adoration,’ निर स्कार “disrespect *,” पयस्काम ‘a lover of milk.” The $ is
also retained in some other compounds, generally when the second member begins
with क्, प् ; as, दिवस्मति “lord of day,’ वाचस्पति ‘lord of speech ;’ similarly also,
भास्कर ‘the sun.’ Also before the Taddhita suffixes वत् vat, चिन् vin, and वल vala;
e.g. WHA, तेन सिन् * possessing light.’
a. Words ending in इस् is, JW us, such as हविस्, सपिस्, धनुस्; &c., and the
prefixes निस्, विस्, स्विस्, दस्, प्रदम्, when compounded with words beginning
with क्, ख्? प्? ए, change their final स् into म् (Pan. vail. 3, 41,45); 68. हविष्कृत्
* performing a sacrifice,’ सपिष्पान ‘drinking ghee,’ भनुष्कर १४ bow-maker,’ निष्कृत
* In forms of निरस the retention of स् 518 considered optional (Pay. virt. 3, 42);
९.९. तिरस्क or fata.
CHANGES OF FINAL @ s. 47
‘yemoved,’ निष्फल ‘fruitless,’ वहिष्कृत ‘excluded,’ प्माविष्कृत ‘made evident,’
GTA ‘difficult to be drunk,’ WIgtHa ‘made manifest.’
b. Nouns ending in इम् is, उस् us, before the Taddhita suffixes मत् mat, वत् vat,
विन् vin, वल vala, change the final स् ऽ to प् sh according to 70; e.g. अचिषरत्,
ज्योतिष्मत् ' possessing splendour,’ भनुष्मत् armed with a bow.’
c. Similarly before Taddhita suffixes beginning with त् # as tva, tama, tara,
taya, &c. (see 80), final ऽ of is and us is changed to sh, but the initial £ is then
cerebralized ; thus ज्योतिस् + त्व becomes ज्योतिष jyotish-tva, ‘brightness.’ So
ज्योतिष्टम jyotish-tama, ^ most brilliant.’
९. Similarly स्? liable to be changed to ष् according to 70, is retained before the
suffixes के, कल्प, पाश, and when compounded with the nominal verb काम्यति;
as, तेजस्क ‘ splendid,’ यज्ञस्क ‘glorious, पयस्कल्प ‘a little milk,’ सर्पि्कल्य ‘a little
ghee,’ यजुष्काम्यति ‘he desires sacrifice’ (Pan. शा, 3, 39).
7०. स् 5 not final, if followed by a vowel or by ¢, th, n, m, y, v,
or by certain Taddhita suffixes, such as ka, kalpa, &c. (see 69. d),
passes into ष् sh when preceded by any other vowel but अ a@ or जरा d,
and when preceded by & ¢ णर् or al; thus afta + मु agni + su
becomes wfray agnishu, ‘if fires ;? करो + fa karo + si = करोषि haroshi,
“thou doest ;? वाक् + मु vdk + su= are vdkshu, ‘in words ;’ frre + fa
bibhar + si = विभपि bibharshi, ‘thou bearest.’ See 69 and 69. a.
a, An intervening Anusvara or Visarga or sibilant does not pre-
vent this rule; e.g. हवीषि, aeifa, gfarg (or हविष्षु), wag.
४. In accordance with this rule, certain roots and their derivatives beginning
with @ change their initials to घ् after the prepositions अभि, सधि; fa, fa, परि,
ग्रति; अति, अनुः अपि ; thus, अभिषु from सभि and स्तु? परिपिच् from परि and सिच्,
निष्णा from नि and स्ना; and the change may even be preserved though the augment
ST ¢ intervenes, as in न्यषिच्वत् from सिच् with नि, अध्यष्टात् from स्था with धिः;
and though the reduplicated syllable of the perfect tense intervene, as अधित
(but not always in either case, as अन्वस्यात्, अनुतस्थो).
९. Hence roots beginning with s and followed by a vowel or a dental consonant
are written in the Dhdtu-p4tha as if beginning with sh; e.g. aw (for fay) 5
धू (for स्तु); Bt (for स्था), ष्णा (for सखा); and this applies also to the roots स्मि,
faz, खद्, TA, BW, &e.
d. Certain roots beginning with s resist all change to sh and are therefore always
written with s; e.g. सृप्, FA, स्तूः स्तु? स्ये A सेक्, सू? ORR. In certain roots the
change is optional, as 77 स्यन्द्, Gre, &c.
e. The root स्तम्भ् changes its initial to षं after सव, as अवष्टभ्राति.
f. In a few roots the change is optional, as परिस्कन्द्ति or परिष्कन्दति, विस्फुरति
or विष्फुरति $ and there are cases where s is retained quite exceptionally, e.g.
यर्सिधति, अभिसेसिच्यते, परिसोदुम्.
g. The root स्स् as, ‘to be,’ when it drops initial a, leaves the 5 liable to be
48 CHANGES OF FINAL Tr.
changed to sh if it be followed by y or ४ vowel; e.g. wirarg, अभिषनि, निषन्ति,
प्रादुःष्पात्, प्रादुःषन्ति (Pan. शा. 3, 87).
Even in compounds the initial s of the second member of the compound may be
affected by rule 70, especially if a single object is denoted, as in the names इरिषिण
hari-shena for hari-sena, युधिष्ठिर yudhi-shthira for yudhi-sthira ; and in अग्निष्ठ agni-
shtha for agni-stha, ‘a frying-pan.’ So also in अग्निष्टोम, पितुष्वसु, दुःषम; &e.
h. In compounds formed with साह (xt. AR), the initial becomes च् where ह् 18
changed to a cerebral द् %, or ट्). See 182. ९.
i. The & of the suffix सात् is not changed, as अग्निसात्कृ “to consume by fire.”
j. Observe—The preposition nis followed by the root tap does not become nish if
repeated action is denoted; e.g. निस्तप् "#0 melt (gold &c.) repeatedly’ (Pan. ण्या.
3, 102); otherwise freq.
CHANGES OF FINAL र् 1%.
71. For purposes of Sandhi nearly all words ending in t r may
be regarded as ending in qs. Most of the cases in which the
changes of final र् r differ from those of final स् ऽ will be found
below in large type.
a. Thus, by 63, WAL Tes prdtar kdla becomes प्रातः काल् prdtah-kdla, ‘the time
of morning ;’ अन्तर् पुर antar pura becomes अन्तःपुर antah-pura, “the female apart-
ments ;’ and prdtar sndna becomes व्रातः खानं prdtah-sndna, ‘morning ablution.’
6, But 7 as the final of a stem, or as a radical letter, remains
unchanged before a sibilant; thus चर् + मु= 38 (70); विभर् + सि =
विभषिं; चतुर् + सु = aga (see 203, cf. 62. ¢); and sometimes before the
hard letter प् p in compounds; as, ntafa gir-pati, ‘lord of speech’
(also written ntufa, मौष्यति); खपेति svar-pati, ‘lord of heaven’ (also
written खःपति).
c. After the analogy of 62, प्राहम् तु prdtar tu becomes प्रातस्तु prdtas tu; and
प्रातर् च prdtar éa becomes प्रातश्च prdtas éa.
The transition of r into s before ¢ is exemplified in Latin by gestum from gero,
ustum from uro, &c. On the other hand, r in the middle of words is preserved
before ¢ in Sanskrit, as in kartum, &c.
d. But in opposition to 64 and 66, final खर् ar, unlike WE as,
remains unchanged before any soft letter (consonant or vowel); thus
WAL BIT pratar dsa remains प्रातराश prdtar-désa, ‘morning meal ;’
पुनर् याति punar ydti remains ywatfa punar ydti, ‘again he goes ;’
पुनर् उक्त punar ukta remains YaRe punar-ukta, ‘repeated? (cf. nir-ukta,
‘described,’ for nis-ukta, by 65).
८, After the analogy of G65. a, final ar before initial + drops its own r, and
lengthens the preceding a; ४8 पुनर् Left punar rakskati becomes पुना रसति pund
CHANGES OF FINAL Tr. 49
rakshati, ‘again he preserves.’ Analogously, गीरय yé-ratha (i.e. गिर् र्य gir ratha),
“epithet of Brihaspati.’
f. Analogously to 69. ©, चतुर् + तय datur-+taya becomes चतुष्टय catush-taya, “the
aggregate of four.’
72. Prefixes such as nir and dur must be treated as originally ending in s; see
nis, dus, 69. a.
73- र् ¢ preceded by a vowel may optionally double a consonant immediately
following; thus निर् द्य nir daya may be written either निदैय nirdaya or निहैय
nirddaya, ‘ merciless ;’ except ह् ¢ and a sibilant followed by a vowel, as in aq
71.6; but karshyate may be written karshshyate. In doubling an aspirated letter,
the aspiration of the first is rejected, as ae (for भे) ह् ¢ is said to have the
same effect in doubling a consonant immediately following ; thus brahman may be
written brahmman; but for the sake of simplicity it is better to avoid doubling in
both cases, and write always nirdaya and brahman,
a, The doubling of consonants, when they come in contact with others, is con-
stantly allowable in Sanskrit, though not usual in practice, Thus, in any con-
junction of two (or even more) consonants preceded by any vowel, especially if a
semivowel be the last letter in the compound, the first letter, provided it be not
Tor हू? may be doubled (Pan. vist. 4, 47); thus JT may be written for Ja, AFA
for Azad, इच्याकण्मे for इाया कण्ये, but the more simple form is preferable.
b. Again, any one of the first four consonants of any class may be doubled
before the nasal of its own class, and if this takes place the middle consonant is
called the yama of the preceding; thus in kkwiti (Pan. 1. 1, 5) the second ¢ is the
yama or twin letter.
९. It should be noted that by Pan. vitt. 4, 65, there is an optional rejection of
one of two homogeneous consonants after any consonant, so that कीर्तिं may be
written कीति
The following table exhibits the more common combinations of
consonants at one view. In the top line of initial letters the
aspirated consonants have been omitted, because it is a universal
rule, that whatever change takes place before any consonant, the
same holds good before its aspirate.
TABLE OF THE COMMONEST CHANGES OF CONSONANTS.
50
1 सइ क् न् च् 6 7 द 9 10 11 12 13 र् 15 च् श् 18 19
INITIAL VOWELS a ऋ न् प्
AND CONSONANTS. ५ 4 0 9 ८ 4 q d n p BS a म् r R v 1 ष् ९
&e.
FINAL CONSONANTS,
Hhor Ay 9 aig dik kig g\k ८9 |£ tlg dim nik pig bin mig yig rig | vi k |£ siggh
श्र 2 g n ¢ m 50.a.
43.4.0; 43-4.
Hi or Fd. dajd ¢| kid gié ८ jlt ६|द din nit pld €|? mild &|द ~| 7|९ ८|८ | siddh
d i 48 | 48 छ छ 48 49 5°
a, as
43 43 [at é
An nn*alnn*d|n k\n gins élat jlns tin din njn pln dln min ya rlz tin oly n s\n h
52 | nn 2 53 53 ea ch
55
पमस् as 9० °| €| kjo giag ८|० jlast|o djo nilakp|o Blo milo ylo rjo lilo v| ak slakhsio h
64.a.;a 4) 63 64 | 62 62 63 63 63
66
ATA ds d ¢| ¢| kid ¢| ८|८६ jlds t])d द| १ || bld m\éd &|८ >| lid ४| & s\dhslé ¢
66. ¢. | & , ४ | 63 | 66.५. | 62 | 66. ५. | 62 63 63 63
66. a,
डस् ४, Ais ir ajir व| klir | €| धः jlis tlir djir mlihplir blir छ | y|¢€ r|ir | v| ih ई | 20 5 | ४ ¢.
उस् ७, ऊस ४ 65 | 685 63 | 65 | 62 65 | 62 63 65-4. 63 63
Tes, BA ais ur alur द | ¢ | क |च ¢| jlus tjurd)ur njukp|urblurmiury|é rjur | | uk 5 | प्फ 5|
स् ०५, जस् aus J &e. | &e. | &e. | &e. | &e. | &e. | &e. | &८. | &e. &c. | &e. | &e. | &e. | &८. | &e. | &e. | &ew &e. | &e.
Tr, preceded by |r alr द| | @|& lr ¢| |? dir nih pir blr mir y rir llr vl hb Sih sir h
any vowel, शरा | &e. | शग तरा 41
* nis only doubled if preceded by a short vowel.
+ A final » before & and j is often allowed to remain unchanged.
SANSKRIT ROOTS AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 51
CHAPTER III.
ON SANSKRIT ROOTS AND THE FORMATION OF
NOMINAL STEMS.
Berorz treating of the declension of Sanskrit nouns (ndman or
sanjid), it is necessary to point out the peculiar method of forming
the stem from the root
74. Every Sanskrit noun (including substantives, adjectives, pro-
nouns, and numerals) has at least two distinct states prior to the
formation of thé nominative case: viz. 1st, a root (dhdtu) ; andly,
a stem (prdtipadika or anga*) formed directly from the root or from
a modification of the root, generally by the addition of a suffix
(pratyaya); which stem becomes a complete word (pada) by the
addition of a case-ending (vibhakti) +
The root is of such importance in Sanskrit that it should be
clearly defined before another step is taken.
A root (dhétu) is to language what the primitive elements are to
chemistry ; it is that primitive part of a word which, being incapable.
of grammatical decomposition, is supposed to contain the primary
meaning antecedent to any addition or modification, ` When a root
has been developed in any way by the addition of letters or syllables
or by internal change it becomes a stem, which again is subject to
further development by the addition of letters or syllables called
case-endings or inflexions (vibhakti), whether nominal or verbal.
Thus déna and dadd are stems (the former nominal, the latter verbal)
developed out of the root dé, but ddna and dadé are not fully
* According to Pan. 1. 4, 13, the term anga is used for the stem when speaking
of some suffix (pratyaya) or termination which is required to be added to it,
whereas prdtipadika is a general term for a stem without reference to its suffix.
+ The process of forming a complete word (pada), in the case of nouns, may be
shewn, as it were algebraically, thus: Root (dhdtu) + Suffix (pratyaya)= Stem
(prdtipadika); again, Stem (prdtipadika) + Case-ending (vibhakti)=a complete
word (pada); e.g. in the word jan-a-s, ‘a person,’ jan is the root, a is the suffix,
and s is the masculine termination for the nominative case.
प्र 2
52 SANSKRIT ROOTS
developed until they have received terminations or inflexions, when
they become complete words (pada); thus ddna-m, ‘a gift ;? dadd-ti,
‘he gives’ (cf. Lat. do-nu-m, Gr. di-dw-c1).
b. There are in Sanskrit about 2000 roots, and every one of
these conveys some simple idea, conveniently expressed in English
by the sign of the infinitive ‘to,’ as in ad, ‘to eat,’ though it must
be noted that the simple root ad only denotes the idea of ‘eating,’
which appears under different modifications in its derivatives (see
76. a). The following are a few of the commonest roots, with the
leading idea conveyed by each (omitting ‘ to’):
ag ad, * eat.’
अच् aré, ‘honour,’
अस् as, ‘be.’
साप् dp, ‘ obtain.’
i, ‘go.
इष् ish, ° wish.’
कम् kam, ‘love.’
कृ kri, ‘do.’
कृष् krish, ° draw.’
क्रम् kram, * go.’
क्री kri, ‘buy.’
wy krudh, ‘be angry.’
fey kshi, * waste away.’
सिप् kship, ° throw,
ख्या khyd, ‘relate?
गम् gam, * go.’
यह् grah, † seize.’
at ghrd, ‘smell.’
चर् dar, ˆ 20.
चि ८४, ‘ collect.’
चिन्त् dint, «think,
we chad, ‘ cover.’
जन् jan, ‘ produce.’
fa ji, ‘ conquer.’
जीव् jt, ‘live.’
MT id, ‘know.’
तन् tan, * stretch,’
तप् Zap, ^ warm,’
तुट् tud, ^ strike.’
त्यज् tyaj, ˆ quit.’
दह् dah, ‘burn.’
at dd, ‘ give.’
दिव् div, ‘shine.’
fes dis, ‘ point out.’
aq dip, ‘ shine.’
ET dris, ˆ see”
द्युत् dyut, * shine.’
dru, ‘run.’
fq dvish, ‘ hate.’
धा dhd, * place.’
ae
नन्द् nand, ‘ rejoice.
नञ् nas, * perish.’
निन्द् nind, ° blame.’
ली 1, ‘lead.’
पच् pat, * cook.’
पत् pat, * fall.’
Ug pad, * go.
पा pd, * drink,’
पा pa, ^ protect.’
पू pu, ^ purify.’
प्रस् prach, ‘ask,’
बन्ध् bandh, ‘ bind.’
बुध् budh, ‘know.’
तरू Sri, * speak.’
wa bhaksh, ‘eat.’
भा bid, ^ shine.’
भिद् bhid, * split.’
भी bhi, ^ fear.’
भुज् dhuj, ` enjoy.’
wz bhi, ‘ become.’
भु bhi, ^ bear.’
मट् mad, * rejoice.’
मन् man, ° think.
मा md, ‘ measure.’
मुच् mué, ˆ liberate.’
मुह् muh, ‘be foolish.’
मू mri, * die.’
यज् yaj, ‘sacrifice.
यत् yat, * strive?
यम् yam, ‘ restrain,’
या yd, ‘go.’
यु yu, “join.”
यन् ४५, “join?
युध् yudh, ‹ fight.’
रह् rah, ^ quit.’
RE १५८१४, † grow,’
ठम् labh, ‘ obtain.’
वच् ४८८, ° speak.’
वद् vad, ‘ speak,
वस् vas, ` dwell.’
वह् vah, ‘ bear.’
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 53
fag vid, ‘know. साध् 5440, ‘ complete.’ स्मृ 5११५, * remember.’
विज् vis, ‘ enter.’ सु sri, ‘go. स्वप् svap, ^ sleep.’
वृत् ०१४४, ‘be.’ सृज् 5, ‘ create.’ @ svri, ‘sound.’
शंस् Sans, ‘ praise.’ सुप् srip, ‘creep,’ इन् Aan, ‘kill?
WR Sak, ‘be able.’ स्कन्द् skand, ° ९0." इस् has, ‘laugh.’
WI €, ‘lie down? स्तु stu, * praise,” ङा hd, ‘ quit.’
शुच् sud, * grieve.’ स्या sthd, ^ stand.’ @ Ari, ‘ seize.’
शुभ् Subh, * shine.’ wat snd, ‘ bathe.’ इष् hrish, ‘be glad’
शयु Sru, ‘hear,’ ey sprig, ‘ touch.’ ale 1८40, ‘be glad,’
सह् sah, ‘bear,’ स्मि smi, ‘ smile.’ दे hve, ‘call.’
75- A cursory glance at the above list of common roots will serve
to shew that they are all monosyllabic. In other respects they
differ. Some consist of a single vowel only ; some begin with one
or two consonants, and end in a vowel, but none end in either च a
or Saw; some begin with a vowel, and end in one or two conso-
nants; and some begin and end with one or two consonants, in-
closing a medial vowel; so that a root may sometimes consist of
only one letter, as इ 2, ‘to go;’ and sometimes of four or more, as
स्कन्द् skand, ‘to move.’ Roots consisting of simple letters, such as
कृ, 4, इ, fa, इष्, &c., are probably primitive; and those which
have compound consonants, such as स्कन्द् &c., are in all likelihood
developed out of more primitive forms*. Those with cerebral
letters, such as @@% ‘to roll,’ have some of them been formed by
adopting sounds from aboriginal dialects,
u. The few polysyllabic words recognized as roots have probably resulted from
a constant habit of joining some particular preposition with some particular mono-
syllabic root till it has at length come to be regarded as part of the root; e.g. in
सङ्गम् sangrdm, “to fight,’ अवधीर् avadhtr, ‘to despise,’ the prepositions सम् sam
and सव ava have combined thus with the root. A few other polysyllabic roots are
the result of the constant habit of reduplication; (as, after daridrd, to be poor ;?
जागृ jdgri, “to be awake ;’ चकास् cakds, “to shine ;’ वेवी vevt, ‘to go,’ ^ pervade ;’)
and a few are derived from nouns; as, कुमार् "10 play,’ from ATC kuméra, a boy.’
Most of the latter are of the roth class, and may be regarded as nominal verbs (see
288. 5).
* Thus च्युत् sdyut (also written Séut), ‘to drop,’ beginning with three conso-
nants, was probably merely developed out of rts. ¢yu, éyut, a sibilant and dental
having been added (cf. 51, 53, 84. III).
54 SANSKRIT ROOTS
b. न् १ and स् 5 at the beginning of a root are liable, according to 58 and 70, to
be changed to श् % and Wsk. Hence these roots are generally represented in
Native Grammars as beginning with Wand ¥, because the Indian system exhibits
that form which may occur under any circumstances (see 70. 0. क). But in this
Grammar, the real initials न् १ and स् s will be retained.
९. According to Indian grammarians, roots are either uddtta or anuddtta (see
explanation of accentuation at end of Grammar). Uddtta roots take the inserted
ड् i in certain tenses (see 391), anuddtta roots reject this inserted vowel (Pan. vit.
2, 10). Native grammarians attach to roots (either at the beginning or end)
certain symbolical letters or syllables indicative of peculiarities of conjugation,.
called anubandhas, ‘appendages’ (or technically त् i), which have the uddtta
accent on the vowel used as an anubandha, to shew that the verb takes the
Parasmai (243) terminations only (such verbs being then called uddttetah); or the
anudétta, to shew that it takes the Atmane only (such verbs being anuddttetah); or
the svarita, to shew that it takes both (such verbs being svaritetah). See Panini
I. 3, 12. 72. 78.
The following is a list of Panini’s anubandhas (with one or two added by Vopa-
deva):
"HT indicates that the past participle suffixes (330, 563, called mishtha in native
grammars) do not take the inserted 7, vii. 2, 16. ड् that a nasal is inserted
before the last letter of the root in all the tenses; thus nid-i shews that the
present 18 ninddmi &c., vii. 1, 58. इर् that the Aorist (or grd Pret.) is
formed in two ways, either with form I (418) or form II (435); thus ghush-ir
shews that the Aor. is either aghoshisham &c. or aghusham &c., and dris-ir that
the Aor. is either adrdksham or adargam. ई that the past participle (530,
553) is formed without 7, vir. 2, 14. उ that the indeclinable participle (555)
may optionally reject 7, while the past part. always rejects it, vil. 2, 56,
15. क that £ may optionally be inserted in the general tenses, एका. 2,
Ig. "J that in the Caus. Aor. the radical long vowel must not be shortened,
VII. 4, 2. च्छु that the vowel may be either lengthened or shortened in
the Caus. Aor. , „ द that the Aor. takes form II (435) in the Par.,
III. 7, 56. @ that Vriddhi is not admitted in the Aor. Par., vit. 2, 5.
that the past pass. part. is formed with na instead of ta, शा, 2, 45. at that
a root is anuddtta, i.e. that it rejects the inserted i. & that a root is inflected
in the Atm., 1. 3, 12. ज् that a root is inflected in the Par. and Atm.,
I. 3, 12. नि that the past part. has a present signification, 111. 2, 187. zg
that ४ noun with the suffix athu may be formed from the root; thus tu-kshu indi-
cates that kshavathu may be formed from kshu, 111. 3, 89. ¥ that a noun
with the suffix ¢rima may be formed from the root; thus du-kri shews that kri-
trima may be formed from kri, 111. 3, 88. म् that the vowel a must not be
lengthened in forming the Causal, that in the 3rd sing. Aor. pass. (technically
called din, 475) and indec. part. of repetition (567, technically named namul) the
vowel can be optionally lengthened or shortened, and that nouns of agency in @
(580) can be formed from Causal stems having short radical vowels, v1. 4, 92. 93.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS, 55
94. ष् that a noun may be formed from the root by adding the suffix ¢
(80. I), 111. 3, 104.
76. Since every word in Sanskrit, whether substantive, adjective,
verb, or adverb, stands in close filial relationship to its root, the
learner is recommended to commit to memory the commonest roots,
as given at 74.6. He will thus become master of a large family of
words, which are easily remembered when attention is directed to
the leading radical idea running through them all.
a. For example: let him take one of the foregoing roots, budh, ‘to know;’
out of it are developed, rst, a set of simple substantives ; 2ndly, of simple
adjectives ; 3rdly, of simple verbs: e.g. bodha or bodhana, ‘ knowledge ;’ buddhi,
^ intellect ;? bodhaka, “an informer ;’ bauddha, ‘a Buddhist;’ budha, ‘wise Be
buddhimat, ‘ intellectual ;? and the following verbs, bodhati, ‘he knows;’ budhyate,
“it is known ;? bodhayati, ‘he informs;’ bubhutsate or bubodhishati, ‘he wishes to
know;’ bobudhyate, “he knows well.’ And the simple idea contained in the root
may be endlessly extended by the prefixing of prepositions; as, prabodha, ‘ vigi-
lance ;’ prabudhyate, ‘he awakes,’ &c.
8४. Similarly, from the root man, ‘to think,’ a vast number of derivatives are
developed, throughout all of which the leading radical idea is traceable; e. g.
ma-ta (i.e. man-+-ta), ‘thought,’ ‘an opinion ;’ ma-ti (i.e. man-+fi), ‘mind ;? mati-
mat, ^ mind-possessing ‡? man-ana, ^ thoughtful ;? man-as, “mind ;’ manas-vin,
“intelligent ;’ mand, ‘devotion ;’ mand-yu, ‘zealous;’ man-(shd, ‘reflection ;’ mant-
shita, “desived ;’ manéshin, ‘ wise ;’ man-u, ‘man;’ man-tu, ‘an adviser ;’ man-tri,
“a thinker ;’ man-tra, ‘a sacred text ;? mantrin, ‘a counsellor ;? mantri-tva, ‘ office
of a minister उ man-man, ‘desire ;’ manyu, ‘courage;’ mdna, ‘ pride ;’ mdnana,
“honouring ;? mdnava, ‘belonging to man,’ &c.; mdnasa, ‘mental ;’ médnita,
“honoured ;? mdnin, ‘ proud ;’ mdnusha, “human ;’ méimdnsd (from the Desid.
stem), ‘investigation ;? mémdpsya, ‘to be investigated.’
Similarly, after prefixing prepositions (such as anu, abhi, ava, ni, prati, vi, sam,
&c.) to the root, the meaning may be-extended and a large number of derivatives
formed; e.g. from anu-man, “to assent :’—anu-mata, “agreed 10; anu-mati,
“assent ;’ anu-manana, ‘assenting.’? From ava-man, ‘to despise :’—ava-mata, ‘des-
pised 5 ava-mati, ‘disrespect ;? ava-mdna and ava-mdnana, ‘dishonour ;’ ava-
mdnin, “holding in contempt ;’ avamdni-td, ‘ disrespectfulness.’
77, It has been shewn at 74 that a stem (prdtipadika) is an
intermediate state between the root and nominative case—the crude
form of the noun, which serves as a kind of stock out of which its
eight cases, beginning with the nominative, are made, as it were, to
grow. In a Greek or Latin dictionary we look for the noun under
the nominative case; but in Sanskrit we look for it under its stem.
Thus, bodha, bodhana, tat, panéan, bhavat are the stems under
56 . SANSKRIT ROOTS
which the nominative cases bodhas, bodhanam, sas, panta, bhavén
are to be sought.
The stem is, in truth, no mere useless grammatical invention.
It is that form of the noun which, with occasional modifications, is
used in the formation of compound words, and in this respect may
be regarded as the most general of cases. And since every Sanskrit
sentence contains more compound words than simple, it may even
be said, that the stem is the form under which the noun most
usually appears,
Similarly, Greek and Latin grammarians might have supposed a root Aey, from
which was drawn out the nouns AéEis, 2८६८५८८५) AKT Os, KaTadoyy, य,
and the verbs dey, Kararéeyo, ९११०१८० : so also, 2, root scrib, from which was
derived the nouns seriptio, scriptum, scriptor, scriptura; and the verbs scribo,
perscribo, ascribo: or a root nau, from which would come nauta, navis, nauticus,
navalis, navigo, &. And a stem deEs and AeEsKe of A€Ei-s and AekiKe-s, and
navi of navi-s; which stem is, in fact, the form used in the formation of com-
pound words, as in Aebixo-ypao-s and navi-ger,
78. It will now be perceived that the consideration of Sanskrit
nouns must divide itself into two heads: ist, the formation of the
stem; 2ndly, the inflexion or declension of the stem; that is, the
adaptation of the stem to a common scheme of case-terminations.
a. In fact, the same system applies both to nouns and verbs. As in verbs
(see 248) the formation of a verbal stem from a root precedes the subject of verbal
inflexion or conjugation, so in nouns the method of forming the stem from the
root precedes declension.
8. Moreover, nouns, substantive and adjective, are classified into
separate declensions, according to the finals of their stems, not
according to the finals of their nominative cases. In Greek and
Latin grammars a similar system of classification is now adopted.
c. The final syllable of nominal stems may end in almost any
letter of the alphabet except ङ् m, न् 9, and q y.
Those stems that end in vowels may be conveniently separated
under four classes, each class containing masc., fem., and neuter
nouns; the rst ending in Wa, सा d, and ई; the 2nd in इ ४; the
3rd in Su; and the 4th in | ri
Those that end in consonants may also be arranged under four
classes; the ist, and, and 3rd, ending in qe and gd, Tn, and स् s,
respectively (compare 44); and the 4th comprising all other final
consonants,
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS, 57
Primary and Secondary Derivatives.
79. Nominal stems (prdtipadika), formed by means of suffixes
(pratyaya), are of two kinds: 1. Primary derivatives formed imme-
diately from a root, or from a modified form of it, by addition of
a Krit-suffix (hence called Krid-anta, ‘ending in a Krit-suffix, the
word Krit being an example of a primary derivative); under which
head are included some participles formed with anya, tavya, ya
(which with elima are sometimes called Kritya suffixes); as also
words formed with Unddi* suffixes. 2. Secondary derivatives,
formed from the stems of primary derivatives by means of Taddhita
suffixes, and therefore called secondary (for examples see 80, A. B).
Observe—It is not intended that the student should commit the following lists
of suffixes to memory, but he is recommended to note carefully the final letters of
the stem under each of the eight classes.
FORMATION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
80, First Cuass.—Stems ending in ख a (m.n,); in खा ६ and ई i (f.)
A. Primary Derivatives, formed from Roors by adding the following
Krit suffixes—
Observe—A list of adverbial suffixes will be found at 718-725, and the parti-
cipial suffixes will be more fully explained 524-582. Feminine suffixes must be
looked for under their corresponding masculine forms. In the examples which
follow, the meaning of roots will not be given when they coincide with that of
their derivatives. Thus when bheda, ‘division,’ is said to come from व, it is
implied that the root bhid means ‘to divide.’ In a few cases the meanings of
roots are omitted when doubtful, From is written fr.; Root, rt.
I. F -a, forming, 1st, abstract nouns, generally masculine, after Vriddhi of 4
medial radical a and Guna (with some exceptions) of a vowel capable of gunation ;
a final palatal ¢ or j being changed to its corresponding guttural k or gt (cf.
20. ९, 24, 25); eg. bheda, m. ‘division,’ fr. bhid; veda, m. ‘knowledge,’ fr. vid;
* A list of suffixes “beginning with the suffix up’ (i.e. ४, with the indicatory
letter ए), so called from the words kdru, vdyu, &c. in the first Stitra being formed
with this suffix. The sense of Unddi derivatives frequently does not agree with
the meaning of the root, and even when it does, usually receives a special signifi-
cation; e.g. kdru, though it involves the general idea of doing, means especially
‘an artizan.’ ५
+ Forms like pada, varja, &c. (from pad, vrij), generally found at the end of a
eompound, retain the palatal; e. g. kim-pada, rasa-varja, &c.
I
58 SANSKRIT ROOTS
bhava, bhdva, m. ‘existence,’ fr. bhi; bhara, bhdra, m. “a load,’ fr. bhri, “to
bear;’ bodha, m. ‘knowledge,’ fr. budh; jaya, m. ‘conquest,’ fr. ji; pdka, m.
“cooking,” fr. pag 3 yoga, m. * joining’ &c., yuga, 7, *a yoke,’ fr. yujs ydga, m. “a
sacrifice,’ fr. yaj.
Forming, 2ndly, other nouns, substantive and adjective, especially nouns of
agency (fem. &, sometimes £); e.g. plava, “what swims,’ fr. plu; sarpa, “what
creeps,’ fr. srip; deva, ‘a god,’ fr. div, ‘to shine ;’ dara (fem. ६), ‘one who goes,’
fr. dar; jana, ‘a man,’ fr. jan, ‘to produce ;’ subha, ‘ beautiful,’ fr. fubh; kara,
‘doing,’ fr. kri: jaya, ‘conquering,’ fr. ji; dama, ‘subduing,’ fr. dam. Cf. Gr.
forms in 0 = Sk. a; e.g. AbKo-s, Aoyo-s, 0८००-४, 0५०८-5, Cuyo-v, epys-¥, &९.:
‘Lat. sonu-s, deu-s, vivu-s, &c. Words like kara, éara, jaya, plava often occur at
the end of such compounds; as, bhayan-kara or bhaya-kara (fem. £), ‘fear-causing’
(see 580); arinsdama, ‘foestaming ;’ (cf. inxo-dapos, veri-dicus, grandi-loquus,
omni-vorus, &c.) When su, “ well,’ and dus, ‘ill,’ are prefixed to such words, they
take a Passive gense, as in Greek (576. a); e.g. su-kara (fem. generally £); * easy
to be done;’ dush-kara (fem. generally £), ‘ difficult to be done,’ &c. Cf. eU-papos,
Ovs—popes, 0४ -70/409, &e.
I -d, frequently without change of the radical vowel, forming feminine substan-
tives (P4n. पा. 3, 103-105); e. g. bhidd, ‘splitting,’ fr. bhid; kshudhd, ‘hunger,’
fr. kshudh; mudd, ‘joy,’ fr. mud, ‘to rejoice ;’ sprihd, ‘desire,’ fr. sprih; lekhd,
‘writing,’ fr. likh; jard, ‘old age,’ fr. jrt, ‘to grow old:’ often added to the
desiderative stem (Pn. 111. 3, 102); e.g. pipdsd, ‘thirst,’ fr. Desid. of pd, “to
drink ° sometimes to the intensive stem; €. g. lohiyd, ‘determination to cut,’ fr.
Intens. of hi, ‘to cut.’ Cf. Gr. forms in a, 43 e.g. pop-a, 0८), 7०५
०7४0-9 ; Lat. tog-a, 7701-0.
$+, forming a large class of feminine nouns, generally corresponding to mascu-
lines in a (see 123); e.g. gopt, ‘a herdsman’s wife’ (see Pin. rv. 1, 48); devi, ‘a
goddess ;? nadé, ‘a river ;’ vrik¢ (nom. és), ‘a she-wolf;’ sink, ‘a lioness;’ putré,
“a daughter.’ Many of such feminines in ¢ and ¢ are not strictly formed with
Krit suffixes, being rather derived from masculines, or formed with Taddhita
suffixes: some words like Indra, ‘the god Indra,’ have a fem. form for the
goddess; e.g. Indrdnt, * the wife of Indra.’
Il. अक -aka (having six technical names, Fq, वुन्, ष्वुन्; FA, Wes, Wy),
forming adjectives (fem, akd or ikd) and nouns of agency (see 582. 6), after
Vriddhi of a final vowel and generally of medial a, and Guna of any other vowel ;
e. g. tdp-aka, ‘inflammatory,’ fr. tap, ‘to burn $ kdr-aka, ‘a doer,’ fr. kri; ndy-aka,
“a leader,’ fr. nf; nart-aka, ‘a dancer,’ fr. nrit ; sddh-aka (fem. akd or ikd), ‘ effec-
tive,’ fr. sédh; khan-aka, ‘a digger,’ fr. khan.
Observe—The feminine of the agents is usually formed with ikd; e.g. kdrikd,
ndyikd.
Ill. सतं -a-tra. See -tra.
IV. सन -ana (having nine technical names, क्यु, WA, युच्, युन्, च्यु, ख्युन्?
IZ, WZ, ञ्युट्), forming, rst, a large class of chiefly neuter substantives after
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 59
Guna of the root; e g. nay-ana, n. the eye,’ fr. nt, ‘to guide;’ déna, n. ‘a gift,’
fr. dé; sthéna, n. ‘place,’ fr. sthd, “to stand ;’ darp-ana, ‘a mirror,’ fr drip, “to
make proud;’ éayzana, n collection,’ fr. 4; vad-ana, ‘the mouth,’ fr. vad, * to
speak ;* Say-ana, ‘a couch,’ fr. $ ‘to lie down
Forming, 2ndly, nouns of agency (see 582. c) and adjectives (fem. and or ant);
as, nart-ana, a dancer,’ fr. nrit; sobh ana, bright,’ fr. subh
Observe—The feminine of the agents is in ané. Cf. opyavo-v, Opémave-v,
sKavorc, 7८०0-6; &८
४. सनीय -aniyas forming future passive participles (see 570) after Guna of a
radical vowel liable to gunation ; e.g. day-antya, ‘to be collected,’ fr. 4, ‘to col-
lect.’ According to Schleicher -antya is for -ana+ya. :
VI. सा -d. See page £8
VII. आक -dka (fem. ¢ké), forming a few adjectives and nouns of agency; e. g
jalp-dka, chattering,’ fr. jalp ; bhiksh-dka, m bhikshsdki, f.'a beggar,’ fr. bhiksh
VII. सान -dna (शानच् चानञ्, शानन्, सानच्) forming, 1st, present partici-
ples Atm. (see 526; cf. -mdna +); e.g. h-dna, ‘licking,’ fr. lik; Say-dna,
lying down,’ fr. ई; Gnv-dana, collecting,’ fr. di-nu, present stem of 4
Forming, 2ndly, perfect participles Atm. (see 554. d); e.g. bubhuj-dna, ‘one
who has bent,’ fr. bu-bhuj, perfect stem of bhuj, ‘to bend ;’ dadrig-dna, ‘one who
has seen,’ fr. da-drig; perfect stem of dris.
IX. इत -i-ta, FAW -i-tavya. See -ta, -tavya.
+, इर -ira, 305 -ila. See -ra, -la.
XI. ङ - See page 58.
XII. उक -uka (कुकन्, THT; उकञ्, THA; WA), forming a few adjectives
after Guna or Vriddhi of a radical vowel; e.g. varsh-uka, ‘rainy,’ fr. vrish; kdm-
uka, “amorous,” fr. kam.
XIII. कक -vka, forming adjectives and nouns of agency from intensive stems;
€. g. vdvad-ika, ‘talkative,’ fr. Intens. of vad, ‘to speak;’ ydyaj-vka, ‘ constantly
sacrificing,’ fr. Interis. of yaj, " to sacrifice.’
XIV. रन्य -enya, forming a kind of future passive participle after either guna-
tion or weakening of the root; e.g. varsenya, ‘desirable,’ fr. vri, ‘to choose;
us-enya, to be wished,’ fr. vas, ` 10 wish.’
XV. एर -era, forming a few adjectives and substantives; e.g. pat-era, ‘ flying,’
‘a bird,’ fr. pat, ‘to fly ;? muh-era, ‘a fool,’ fr. muh.
XVI. क -ka, forming a few words; e.g. sush-ka, ‘dried up,’ fr. Sush (see 548) ;
dhd-ka, पा, ‘a receptacle,’ fr. dhd, ‘to hold.’ Cf. Gr. by-Ky: Lat. lo-cu-s,
pau-cu-s. For the Taddhita suffix -ka, see LVI.
XVII. त -ta, -i-ta, forming past passive participles (see 530 &c.); sometimes
without change of the root; sometimes with weakening of the root; sometimes
with rejection of the final nasal of a root; frequently with insertion of £ (which
takes the place of aya in Causals and verbs of the roth class); e.g. sru-ta, ‘heard,’
12
60 SANSKRIT ROOTS
fr. ru; jid-ta, ‘known,’ fr. jad; kri-ta, ‘done,’ fr. kri; sthi-ta, ‘stood,’ fr. sthd}
ga-ta, ‘gone,’ fr. gam; ta-ta, ‘stretched,’ fr. tan; pat-i-ta, ‘fallen,’ fr. pat; grih-
é-ta, ‘seized,’ fr. grah (inserted i lengthened); ved-i-ta, ‘made known,’ fr. Caus.
of vid. Cf. Gr. KAu=t6-6, yiw-T0-s, ota-té-s: Lat, da-tu-s, sta-tu-s, (g)no-
tu-s, &e.
णा, तव्य -tavya, -i-tavya, forming future passive participles from the stem
of the first future (see 569); e.g. kar-tavya, ‘to be done,’ fr. kri; dd-tavya, “to
be given,” fr. dé; sto-tavya, ‘to be praised,’ fr. stu; chetstavya (for ched-tavya),
“to be cut,’ fr. chid; yok-tavya, ‘to be joined,’ fr. yuj; pak-tavya, ‘to be cooked,’
fr. paé; bhav-i-tavya, “to be become,’ fr. bhi; bodhay-i-tavya, “to be made
known,’ fr. Caus. of bhi; grah-¢-tavya, ‘to be seized,’ fr. grah. Cf. Gr. partici-
pials in =r€0-¢ (for TéFeyo~s), as 00-7८-५, be-Té0-s.
XIX. -tya, forming future passive participles after roots ending in short
vowels (see 572); e.g. kri-tya, ‘to be done,’ fr. kriz i-tya, ‘to be gone,’ fr. i:
stu-tya, ‘to be praised,’ ‘laudable,’ fr. stu; bhri-tya, ‘to be borne,’ fr. bari. These
are occasionally used as substantives; e.g. bhrityd, £ ‘ maintenance.’
XX. @ -tra (-ird), -a-tra, -i-tra (for the adverbial suffix tra see 720), forming
{after Guna of a root capable of gunation) nouns denoting some instrument or
organ, generally neuter; e.g. gro-tra, n. ‘organ of hearing,’ ‘ear,’ fr. gru; pd-tra,
2. ‘a drinking-vessel,’ fr. pd; vas-tra, n. ‘a garment,’ fr. vas, ‘to wear;’ chat-tra,
n. ‘an umbrella,’ fr. chad, ‘to cover; gd-tra, n. ‘a limb,’ fr. gd, “to go;’ vak-tra,
n. ‘the mouth,’ fr. vad, ‘to speak ;’ ne-tra, n. “an eye,’ fr. nf, ‘to lead.”
A few are masculine and feminine; e.g. dansh-fra, m. or dansh-trd, f. “instru-
ment of biting,’ “a tooth,’ fr. dané; man-tra, m. ‘a holy text,’ : prayer,’ fr. man,
“to reflect ;’ yd-trd, ‘ provisions (for a journey),’ fr. yd, ‘to go;’ vara-trd, f. ‘in-
strument of surrounding,’ “a strap,’ fr. vri.
Sometimes 8 is inserted between the root and suffix ; e.g. khan-i-tra, n. “a spade,’
fr. khan, ‘to dig ;’ éar-i-tra, n. ‘ proceedings,’ fr. ¢ar,.“ to go :’ and sometimes the
present stem is used; e.g. krinta-tra, n.‘a plough,’ fr. krit, ‘to cleave ;’ pata-tra,
n. ‘a wing,’ fr. pat, ‘to fly ;? vadha-tra, n. ‘a weapon,’ fr. vadk, “to kill.’ Cf.
similar Gr. forms in -Tpo-v, ~9p0-v, &c.; e.g. vin-Tpo=v, apo-tpo-v, Bax-Tp6-v,
Ba-Bpo-v, py-tpa, ppd~Tpa, Kosuy=-Opa: Lat. ras-tru-m, rosetruem, ara-tru-m,
plec-tru-m, fulge-tra, &c.
XXI. त्व -tva (for secondary suffix -tva see LX VIII), forming a kind of future
passive participle (probably an abbreviated form of -tvya, -tavya) after Guna of a
radical vowel capable of gunation; e.g. kar-tva, ‘to be done,’ fr. kri; jestva, ‘to
be conquered,’ fr. ji; vak-tva, ‘to be spoken,’ fr. vaé; snd-tva, ‘fit for ablutions,’
fr. snd.
-tvd, forming indeclinable past participles (see 555), appears to be a kind of
instrumental case of a suffix 0८ (see 555. a), and is either added to the root or to
the same weakened form of the root as the -ta of the past passive participle (see
XVII); e.g. kri-tvd, “having done,’ fr. kri; sthi-tvd, “having stood,’ fr. sthd;
uk-tud, “having spoken,’ fr. va¢, ‘to speak :’ sometimes an ३ is inserted; e. g.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. „ 61
vid-i-tud, ‘having known,’ fr. vid; likheistud or lekh-i-tud, “having written,’ fr.
uikh; éorayi-tvd, “having stolen,’ fr. éur, ‘to steal.’
~tvi, a Vedic form of -tvd (e. g. kri-tvi, “having done’), appears to be for toyd
(which is thought to be for tvayd).
XXII. Ft -tvya; a Vedic abbreviated form of ~tavya (see XVIII); e.g. kri-tvya,
“able to perform,’ ‘effectual,’ fr. kri.
XXIII. @-tha or -a-tha, forming some nouns of either gender; e. ध, yudetha, 11.
“a herd,’ ‘flock,’ &c., fr. yu, ‘to unites’ uketha, n. ‘praise,’ fr. ४८ a form of ४८८
“to speak 3? tir-tha, m.n. ‘a sacred bathing-place,’ fr. éré, ‘to cross over 3? nt-tha,
पा. प, ‘guiding,’ fr. nf; gam-a-tha, m. ‘a traveller,’ fr. gam, ‘to go;’ also u¢-atha,
rav-atha, Sap-atha, svas-atha.
XXIV. न -na, forming (in place of -ta, q.v.) miany past passive participles (see
530-540); e.g. bhin-na, ‘broken,’ fr. bhid ; bhag-na, ‘broken,’ fr. bhanj ; an-na,
‘eaten,’ fr. ad; sttr-na, ‘spread,’ fr. stri.
Forming also a few nouns, generally masculine; as, yqj-ia (37. ९), m. ‘sactifice,’
fr. yoj; yat-na, m. ‘effort,’ fr. yat ; svap-na, m. ‘sleep,’ fr. svap; ush=na, mn.
“heat,’ fr. ush, ‘to burn.’
Forming also a few feminine nouns in «nd; €, छ, ush-nd, “heat;’ trish-nd,
‘thirst,’ fr. trish; ydé-nd (37. ¢), "४ request,’ fr. ydé. Cf, Gr. Um-voxs, oTUYy-vo~s,
ण 6८90-6, 074-५0-४ : Lat. 5017205, mag-nu-s, ple-nti«s, reg-nu-m.
XXV. म -ma (मक्, मन्), forming adjectives and a few masculine and neuter
substantives, generally without change of the radical towel; e.g, bhé-ma, ‘terrible,’
fr. bhé, “to fear;’ tigema, ‘sharp,’ fr. téj (cf. 80. 1)} idh-ma, पा, ‘fuel,’ fr. indh,
“to burn;’ ghar-ma, m. ‘heat,’ fr. ghri (after Guna); dhi-ma, m. ‘ smoke,’ fr. क
yugema, ए, ‘a pair,’ fr. yuj, ‘to join” Cf. Gr. 0९०4८०53 6००५८०५ 0०९-५०-$ 3
Lat. fusmu-s, an-i-mu-s.
XXVI. मर -mara (wae), forming a few adjectives and substantives; e.g.
ghas-mara, ‘voracious,’ fr. ghas, ‘to devour;’ ad-mara, “gluttonous,’ fr. ad,
“to eat.’
XXVII. मानं <mdna (liable to become mdpa), added to the stem of the present
tense of the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth classes of.verbs Primitive, and of verbs
Causal and Passive (see 526828) to form present participles Atm., and to the
stem of tlie second future tense to form future participles Atm. (see 578); e.g.
bhara-mdna, ‘bearing,’ fr. bhris kriya-mdna, ‘being made,’ fr. Pass. of kri;
bodhaya-mdna, ‘informing,’ fr. Caus. of budh; ddsya-mdna, ‘about to give,’. fr.
the stem of the second future of dd. In the Veda mdna is also added (instead of
dna) to the stem of the perfect, to form perfect participles Atm.; e.g. sasri-mdna,
(for sasrdna), fr. sri, ‘to go;’ Ga-mdna, fr. yaj, ‘to sacrifice ;? cf. suffix -dna. CF.
Gr. pepd=pevons, 9ud0-evers, Dwod-mevo-st Lat. alu-mnu-s (for alo-meno-s),
Vertu-mnu-s (for verto-meno-s).
XXVIII. य -ya (क्वप्; यक्? यत्; यः ण्यत्), forming future passive participle
(see 571-576), adjectives, and substantives, generally after Guna or Vriddhi, and
62 SANSKRIT ROOTS
sometimes other changes of the root (see 571); e.g..¢e-ya, ‘to be gathered,’ fr. diz
stav-ya or stdv-ya, ‘to be praised,’ fr. stu; yog-ya and yoj-ya, ‘to be joined,’ fr.
yujs guh-ya and goh-ya, ‘to be concealed,’ fr. guh.
Forming also many neuter abstract substantives; e.g. vdk-ya, n. ° speech,’
fr. vaé; bhog-ya, ns ‘wealth,’ ‘corn,’ bhoj-ya, n. ‘food,’ both fr. bhuj, ‘to
enjoy.’ ।
Forming also feminine substantives in yd; e.g. vid-yd, f. ‘ knowledge,’ fr. vid ;
vraj-yd, द, ‘wandering about,’ fr. vraj; say-yd, f. ‘a couch’ (for se-yd), fr. &, ‘to
lie down;’ cf. jd-yd (i.e. jan-yd), ‘a wife;’ ché-yd (i.e. chad-yd), ‘shade ;” md-yd
(1. €. man-yd), “illusion.” Cf, Gr. ay-10-s (== ydj-ya-s), orvy-to-s: Lat. gen-iu-s,
in-gen-iu-m, con-jug-iu-m.
For the indeclinable participial suffix ya (ल्यप्) see 555.
XXIX. T-ra (क्रन्; THR, रः रन्; इट्), -0-70, -2-70 (किस्च्), -u-ra, forming ad-
jectives, nouns of agency, &c.; e.g. dép-ra, ‘shining,’ fr. dip; kship-ra, 1 swift,’
fr. kship, ‘to throw ;’ vand-ra, ‘worshipping,’ fr. vand; ¢hid-ra, ‘ pierced,’ “a hole’
(neut.), fr. chid, “to cut;’ aj-ra, m. ‘a plain,’ aj-i-ra, ‘active,’ ‘an area’ (neut.),
fr. aj ; pat-a-ra, ‘flying,’ fr. pat: also with i or u inserted; e.g. ¢hid-i-ra, m. “an
axe,’ chid-u-ra, ‘cutting,’ fr. hid, ‘to cut; rudh-i-ra, ‘red ;? bhid-u-ra, ‘ splitting,’
‘fragile,’ ‘a thunderbolt’ (neut.); bhds-ura, ‘shining’ (= bhds-vara), fr. bhds.
Cf. Gr. Aapm-pé-s, ९०५0065, ay-pd=¢, pav-e-pés i Lat. rub-er (stem ru-bro),
rubra, ag-er, gna-ru-s, pu-ru-s.
XXX. त -la (a, लक्), -a-la, -i-la, -u-la, forming adjectives, &९, = -ra, & ९.
above; e.g. Suk-la (= Suk-ra), ‘white,’ fr. sud, “to shine; tar-a-la, * tremulous,’
fr. tr¢; an-i-la, ‘wind,’ fr. an, ‘to blow;’ harsh-u-la, ‘delighted,’ fr. hrish. Cf.
Gr. pey-ado-s, der-Ad-g, Tpoy=ard-s, i-Ac-v: Lat. sel-la (for sed-la), trem-
ulu-s, &c.
XXXI. व -४4 (क्रन्, वन्? व); forming participles, adjectives, and substantives ;
e.g. pak-va, ‘cooked,’ fr. pad (regarded as a past passive participle, see 548);
as-va, ‘a horse,’ fr. an assumed rt. ag, ‘to be quick ;’ e-va, ‘going,’ fr. i; pad-va,
“a road,’ fr. pad, “to go.’ Cf. Gr. {7-70- (for ik-Fo-s): Lat. eg-uu-s, ard-uu-s
(= trdh-va), ar-vu-m, @-vu-m.
XXXII. वर -vara (क्रप्, वरच्, I, &c.), forming adjectives, nouns of
agency, &c. (fem. generally £); nag-vara (fem. ¢), “ perishing,’ fr. nag, ‘to perish ;’
é$-vara, “a ruler,’ fr. 1; sthd-vara, ‘stationary,’ fr. sthd, ‘to stand.’ After roots
ending in short vowels or a nasal, ¢ is sometimes inserted; as, i-t-vara, “ going’
(fem. ६), fr. i; ji-t-vara, ‘conquering,’ fr. ji; ga-t-vara, ‘ going,’ fr. gam.
XXXIII. @-sna (क्सन), forming a few adjectives; e.g. ték-shna, ‘sharp,’ fr. tij;
$lak-shna, ‘smooth’ (said to be fr. glish).
XXXIV. Other uncommon suffixes (mostly Unddi, see 79. note) forming primary
derivatives of this class are, -angu, e.g. tar-anga (according to some rather
taran-ga), pat-anga; -anda, e.g. kar-anda, tar-anda; -ata, e.g. darg-ata, pac-ata,
yaj-ata ; -anta, ९. ९. jay-anta, tar-anta, vas-anta ; -anya, €. द. tur-anya, nabh-anya,
parj-anya; -apa, e.g. ul-apa, ush-apa, mand-apa ; -abha, e.g. rish-abha, gard-abha,
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS, 63
vrish-abha, Sar-abha; -ama, €. दु. kal-ama, rug-ama, sar-amd; -amba, e. g. kar-
amba; -asa, e.g. éam-asa, div-asa, man-asa, vaé-asa; -asdna, ‘being,’ pres. part.
of as, “to be,’ €. g. mand-asdna, vridh-aséna; -dnaka, e. g. dhav-dnaka, lav-dnaka ;
-dnaka, e.g. bhay-dnaka, Say-dnaka; -dyya, e.g. pan-dyya, panay-dyya, mah-dyya 5
-dra, e.g. ang-dra, tush-dra; -dla, e.g. kap-dla, kar-dla, éash-dla; -ika, e.g. krish-
tka, vris-é-ika; -isha (i.e. <isa), e.g. dm-isha, tav-isha, avyath-isha; -tka, e.g.
an-tka, dris-tka, éaréar-tka; -¢ta, e, g. krip-ita; tra, e.g. gabhrtra, Sar-tra, hins-
tra; ~tsha, e.g. rij-isha, pur-isha, man-tshd; -utra, e.g. tar-utra, var-utra; -una,
९ द. ar-una, arj-una, yam-und, var-una; -usha, e.g. nah-usha, pur-usha, man-usha ;
~tkha, e.g. may-tkha; -ttha, e.g. jar-ttha, var-itha; ~-dra, e.g. may-tra; ~tla,
e. g. ldyg-tila; -elima, e.g. pac-elima, bhid-elima (576. 6); -ora, e.g. kath-ora, sah-
ora; -kara, e.g. push-kara, tas-kara; -trima, €, g. kri-trima, pak-trima (Pan. 111.
ॐ 88); -thaka, e.g. gd-thaka (perhaps for gdétha-ka); -sa, e.g, drap-sa, vrik-sha,
ghran-sa.
B. Ssconpary Derivatives, formed from the NomiNAL Srems of
primary derivatives.
Preliminary Observations.
a, The final vowels of the nominal stems of primary derivatives are liable to
certain changes before Taddhita suffixes beginning with vowels or y; thus
(1) a, d, i, £ are rejected; e.g. Sud, ‘pure; Sauda, ‘purity :’ (2) u, ४ are gunated
into o, which then becomes av; e.g. fr. Manu comes Ménav-a, ‘a descendant of
Manu :’ (3) ० and au become av and dv according to the general rules of Sandhi;
e.g. from go, “a cow,’ comes gavya, “relating to cows ;’ from nau, ‘a ship,’ comes
ndvika and ndvya, ‘belonging to a ship.’
४. A final » is generally rejected before Taddhita suffixes beginning with con-
sonants; and both 2 and its preceding vowel are sometimes rejected before vowels
and y; e.g. yuvan, ‘young,’ yuva-td or yuwva-tva, ‘youth ;’ dtman, ‘self,’ dtmya
and atmtya, ‘own,’ ‘personal.’ There are, however, many exceptions to the latter
part of this rule; e.g. yauvana, ‘youth,’ fr. yuvan; rdjanya, ‘regal,’ fr. rdjan ;
dtmanina fr. ditman.
९. It will he found that Taddhita or secondary suffixes often require Vriddhi of
the first syllable of the words to which they are added, as in maula, ‘radical,’ fr.
mila, “a root;’ Sauda, ‘ purity,’ fr. sudi, ‘pure.’ Similarly, in the case of’ deriva-
tives formed from compound words; e.g. sauhrida, ‘friendship,’ fr. su-hrid, ‘a
friend :’ sometimes a double Vriddhi takes place, as in sauhdrda, ‘friendship,’ fr,
su-hrid ; saubhdgya, ‘good fortune,’ fr. su-bhaga, fortunate.’
d. When the initial consonant of a word is compounded with y or v followed
by a or d, as vydghra, ‘a tiger,’ svara, ‘sound,’ the y and v are generally resolved
into ty and uv, thus viydghra and suvara, and then vriddhied, e. g. vaiydghra,
‘relating to a tiger,’ sawvara, ‘relating to sound’ so also sva, “self, makes sauva,
“velating to self;’ sean, ‘a dog,’ Sauvana, ‘canine.’ Similarly, svasti makes
sauvastika; nydya, naiydyika; sv-asva, sauvasvi, &८.
64 SANSKRIT ROOTS
XXXV. अ -a (fem. ¢), after Vriddhi of the first syllable, forming abstract
nouns, collectives, patronymics, and adjectives expressing some relationship to
” sauhrida, n. or sau-
the primitive noun; e.g. gauéa, n. ^ purity,’ fr. Sudi, ४ pure ;
hdrda, n. ‘friendship,’ fr. su-hrid (see Preliminary Obs. c); paurusha, n. ‘manliness,’
fr. purusha, ‘a many’ gaigava, n, ‘childhood,’ fr. sigu, ‘a child {° kshaitra, n. “a col-
lection of fields,’ fr. kshetra, ‘a field ;’ Vdsishtha, ‘a descendant of Vasishtha;’
Ménava, ‘a descendant of Manu,’ fr, Manu; Vaishnava, ‘a worshipper of Vishnu,’
fr. Vishnu; paurusha, ‘manly,’ fr. purusha, “a many’ saikata, ‘sandy,’ fr. sikatd ;
dérava, ‘wooden,’ fr. déru, ‘ wood? (see Preliminary Obs. a); vaiydkarana, ‘ gram-
matical,’ fr. oydkarana, ‘grammar’ (see Preliminary Obs. d).
XXXVI. अक -aka (वुच्, वुक्, FL. TIT, वुन्), generally after Vriddhi of the
first syllable, forming adjectives (fem. generally ६) and substantives (cf. -ika, -ka);
e.g. aumaka, ‘ flaxen,’ fr. umd, ‘flax ;? Angaka, ‘coming from Anga;?
aushtraka,
1 coming from camels,’ “a quantity of camels’ (neut.), fr, ushtra, “a camel ;’
vdtsaka, n. ‘a number of calves,’ fr. vatsa, ‘a calf.’ The fem. of this suffix is
sometimes ikd, which, however, may be regarded as the fem. of ika.
XXXVII. जाद -dta, as vdddta, ‘talkative,’ fr. vdé, “speech ;’ similarly, sringdta
fr. Sringa. ५
XXXVIIL. सानी -4 forming feminines from masculine nouns like Indra,
see Indrda? under +, page 58. (Observe—Agui, ‘fire,’ has a fem. form Agndyf, ‘the
goddess of fire,’)
XXXIX. जायन -dyana (ष्फ, चन्, HR, ष्फक्, फञ्), forming patronymics, &c.,
after Vriddhi of the first syllable; e.g. Nérdyana, ‘a name of Vishnu,’ fr. zara.
XL. ‘WTS -dla, as vdddla, ‘talkative,’ fr. vdé, ‘speech.’
XLI. इक - (fem. sk¢), forming adjectives and a few collective nouns after
Vriddhi of the first syllable; e.g. dhdrmika, ‘religious,’ fr. dharma, ‘religion ;’
vainavika, ‘a flute-player,’ fr. veru; Vaidika, ‘ Vedic,’ fr. Veda; dhnika, * daily,” fr.
ahan, ‘a day ;’ naiydyika, ‘knowing the Ny4ya philosophy,’ fr. nydya; dauvdrika,
‘a porter,’ fr. dedra; kaiddrika, n. ‘a quantity of meadows,’ fr. keddra. Cf. Gr.
TOAEL=1K0-S, Bactr-iKd-¢ > Lat. bell-icu-s, naut-icu-s, &e.
XLII. इत -ita, as phalita, “having fruit,’ fr. phala (the past passive part. of
phal being phulla, 547.6); rathita, ‘furnished with a chariot,’ fr. ratha, Observe—
This may be regarded as a past passive participle suffix added to the stems of
nominal verbs, cf. -tna below.
XLII. इन -ina (इनच्), as phalina, ‘fruitful,’ fr. phala; malina, ‘dirty,’ fr.
mala; sringina, ‘horned,’ fr. gringa; rathina, “having a carriage,” fr. ratha.
XLIV. इनेय ~ineya, forming a few patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syl-
lable; e.g. saubhdgineya, ‘the son of an honoured mother,’ fr. su-bhagd.
XLV. इयं -iya (fem. द), as agriya, ‘foremost,’ ‘the best part’ (neut.), fr.
agra.
XLVI. इर -ira (fem. ठी, as medhira, ‘intelligent,’ fr. medhd, ‘intelligence ;”
rathira, ‘ going in a carriage,’ fr. ratha (cf. -ra, LXXVIII).
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS, 65
XLVII. इक् -ila (fem. द), as phenila, ‘foamy,’ fr. phena, ‘foam’ (cf. -la, LXXX).
XLVIIL इष्ट -ishtha (fem. ¢), forming superlatives, as alpishtha, ‘least,’ fr.
alpa, ‘little,’ which also uses kanishtha fr. rt. kan (see 192-194). Observe—
Perhaps this suffix is in most cases rather primary than secondary, being generally
added to the root or modified root, as uru, ‘wide,’ forms varishtha fr. vri (see
-tyas, 86. ४). Cf. Gr. €} -1070-5, ‰-0070-$ : Lat. junta for jug-(i)sta, lit. “most
joined.’
XLIX. श्न -tna (a, खञ्), forming adjectives and substantives, as grdmina,
‘rustic,’ fr. grdma, ‘a village ;’ kudina, ‘of good family,’ fr. kula; navéna, ‘new,’
fr. nava; adhvanina, ‘a traveller,’ fr. adhvan, ‘a road ;’ anupadind, f. “a boot,’ fr.
anupada; dévina, ‘being a day’s journey for a horse,’ fr. asva.
L. क्य -fya, forming adjectives, sometimes after Vriddhi of the first syllable of
the stem; e.g. sudsrfya, ‘a sister’s son,’ fr. svasri, ‘a sister ;’ bhrdtrtya, ‘ frater-
nal,’ fr. bhrdtri; pdrvattya or parvattya, ‘mountainous,’ fr. parvata; asvtya,
“relating to horses,” “a number of horses’ (neut.), fr. asva; paraktya (fem. ९),
“belonging to another,’ fr. para (in this the final of the stem apparently remains
and k is inserted); saukhfya, ‘ pleasurable,’ fr. sukha.
Forming also possessive pronouns, as madiya, tuadtya, &c. (see 231).
LI. श्र -tra, -tla, only lengthened forms of ira, ila, ११.४५४.
ना. उरः -ura, as dantura, ‘having long teeth,’ fr. danta.
ना. उक -ula, as mdtula, ‘a maternal uncle,’ fr. mdtri.
LIV. Wes -dla, as dantila, “having teeth,’ fr. danta; vdtdla, ‘rheumatic,’ ‘a
whirlwind’ (masc.), fr. vdéa.
LV. रय -eya (fem. ¢), forming adjectives and substantives after Vriddhi-of the
first syllable; e.g. paurusheya, ‘manly,’ fr. purusha; dgneya, ‘fiery,’ fr. agni;
ddseya, ‘born of a slave-girl,’ fr. dés¢; maheya, ‘earthen,’ fr. maht; jndteya, n.
‘relationship,’ fr. jadti. Cf. Gr. Aeovreso~s, Aedvreo=s: Lat. igneu-s, &c.
LVI. क -ka, forming adjectives, collective nouns, and nouns expressing diminu-
tion or depreciation; e.g. Sindhuka, “belonging to Sindh,’ fr. Sindhu; madhuka,
‘sweet,’ fr. madhu; rdjaka, प, ‘a number of kings’ or “a petty king’ (m.), fr.
rdjan; aSvaka, “a hack,’ fr. agva, ‘a horse.” Sometimes almost redundant, as
madhyamaka (fem. ikd), ‘ middlemost,’ fr. madhyama ; bhtru-ka, ‘timid,’ fr. bhéru;
putraka,‘ason;’ bdlaka (fem. ikd), ‘young.’ For the Krit suffix -ka, see 80. XVI.
Observe—Some of these may equally be regarded as formed with the suffix
aka, q.v. Cf. also -ika.
“णा. कल्पं kalpa (कल्पप्), regarded by native grammarians as a secondary
suffix (see Pan. v. 3, 67. 68, &c.), denoting ° similitude with inferiority,’ or in the
sense of ‘nearly,’ ‘about;’ as, kavi-kalpa, ‘a sort of poet; mrita-kalpa, “nearly
dead ;’ pacati-kalpam, "116 cooks fairly well.’ See Dict. kalpa.
LVIIL. तनं -tana (fem. £), forming adjectives from adverbs of time; e.g. svas-
tana, ‘future,’ fr. svas, ‘to-morrow ;’ hyas-tana, “of yesterday,’ fr. hyas; prdtas-
tana, ‘belonging to the early morning,’ ‘early morning’ (neut.), fr. prdtar, “at
K
66 SANSKRIT ROOTS
‘day-break ; ‘prdk-tana, ‘former,’ fr. prdk, ‘previously ;? other examples are prdhne-
tana, pratana, nitana, Grantana. Cf. Gr. ९८क-9€-7006-6 : Lat. eras-tinu-s, diu-tinu-s.
LIX. WA -tama (तमप्), (-tamdm), forming, 1st, the superlative degree, &९. (see
191, 195-194); e.g. punya-tama, ‘most holy’ (see 191); wé¢ais-tama, “ very lofty,’
fr. uééais. Sometimes added to pronominal stems (see 236). Cf. -tara, -ma: Lat.
‘op-timu-s, ul-timu-s, &c.
Forming, 2ndly, ordinals (तमट्); e.g. vingati-tama (fem, ¢), ‘twentieth,’ fr.
vingati, ‘twenty’ (see 211-213).
Tamdém, derived from the first, is added adverbially; e.g. u¢¢ais-tamdm, * ex-
ceedingly high ;’ vadati-tamdm, ‘he talks incessantly.’ #
LX. तव -taya, forming adjectives (fem. £) and neuter substantives from nume-
rals; e.g. tri-taya, १ consisting of three,’ ‘a collection of three’ (neut.); éatush-
taya, ‘ four-fold,’ ‘a collection of four,’ &c. (neut.), fr. éatur, ‘four’ (see 214).
LXI. W-tara (तरप्), forming the comparative degree (see 191, 195-197, 236);
e.g. punya-tara, ‘more holy ;’ uééais-tara, “higher,” fr. udéais, ‘aloft.’ Sometimes
added to pronominal stems (see 236). Cf. -tama: Gr. yauKu-TeEpe-s, peray-
7८०८-४.
Tardm, derived from -tara, is added adverbially ; ९. ए. uééais-tardm, ‘in a higher
degree’ (cf. bahu-tardm); vadati-tardm, “he speaks more (than he ought).’
LXII. ता -td (=-tva below), forming feminine abstract substantives from
stems of nouns or adjectives; e.g. bahu-td, ‘multitude,’ fr. bakw, ‘many;’
prithu-td, ‘breadth,’ fr. prithu, ‘broad;’ yuva-td, ‘youthfulness,’ ‘ youth,’ fr.
yuvan, ‘young;’ purusha-td, ‘manliness,’ fr. purusha, ‘a man;’ deva-td, ‘a
divinity.’ Cf. Lat. juven-ta, senec-ta, vindic-ta,
LXIII. तिच -titha (fem. £), forming ordinal adjectives, &c.; e.g. bahu-titha,
‘manifold,’ fr. bahu,; tdvatitha, ‘the so-manieth,’ fr. tdvat.
LXIV. तीय - (fem. ¢), forming ordinals; e.g. dvi-tiya, ‘second;’ tri-tiya,
“third? (see 208).
LXV. @-tna, forming adjectives; e.g. dira-tna, ‘old,’ ‘ancient,’ fr. dra, ‘long 5
other examples are nitna, pratna. Cf. -tana above.
LXVI. त्य -tya (त्यप्, त्यक्), forming a few adjectives; e.g. tatra-tya, ‘being
there,’ fr. tatra; iha-tya, “being here,’ fr. ika. Sometimes with Vriddhi of first
syllable; e.g. pdsédt-tya, ‘subsequent,’ fr. pasédt, ‘behind.’ Similarly, dékshind-
tya fr. dakshind ; pauras-tya fy. puras.
LXVII. ता -trd, forming a few feminine collective nouns; e.g. go-trd, ‘a herd
of cattle,’ fr. go. For the adverbial suffixes -tra, -trd, see 720.
LXVIII. त्व -tva (=-td above, q.v.), forming neuter abstract nouns; e. g.
bahu-tva, yuva-tva, prithu-tva, deva-tva, &c.
LXIX. त्वन -tvana (= -tva), Vedic, forming neuter abstract nouns; €. g. mahi-
tvana, ‘ greatness,’ fr. mahi or mahin, ‘great’ (Vedic); sakhi-tvana, ‘ friendship,’
fr. sakhi, ‘a friend;’ vasu-tvana, ‘wealth,’ fr. vasu, ‘rich.’
LXX. दध्र daghna (दघ्नच्), regarded (like dvayasa and mdtra) as a secondary
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS, 67
suffix (Pan. v. 2, 37), denoting “ height,’ ‘ measure,’ &c.; e.g. éru-daghna (fem. 7),
reaching to the thighs.’
LXXxI. देशीय degiya (देशीयर्), regarded (like kalpa, q. ४.) as a secondary suffix
(Pan. ए. 3, 67), denoting ‘about,’ ‘nearly ;’ e.g. patu-desiya, “tolerably clever.’
LXXII. इयस dvayasa (sae), denoting ‘height,’ ‘ measure,’ &c. (see daghna
above); e.g. éru-dvayasa (fem. £), “reaching to the thighs.’
LXXIII. न -na (न, नन्), forming adjectives and substantives, sometimes after
Vriddhi of the first syllable; e. g. purd-na (fem. ठ or £), ‘ old,’ fr. purd, ‘formerly ;’
pra-na, ‘old,’ fy. pra; paunsna (fem. ¢), ‘virile, ‘manhood’ (neut.), fr. puns,
‘ vA
ॐ
6 . 1
aman ;’ straina (fem. 7), womanly,’ ‘womanhood’ (neut.), fr. stré.
LXXIV. म -ma (probably an old superlative suffix, cf. -tama, -ra), forming
ordinals and other adjectives; e.g. panda-ma, ‘fifth;’ sapta-ma, ‘ seventh’ (see
209); madhya-ma, ‘middlemost,’ fr. madhya, ‘middle ;’ ava-ma, ‘undermost,’ fr.
ava, ‘away ;’ para-ma, ‘furthest,’ fr. para, “beyond.” Cf. Gr. ६69०-८०-५ : Lat.
Septi-mu-s, pri-mu-s, infi-mu-s, sum-mu-s, &c.
LXXV. मय -maya (मयद्), forming adjectives (fem. ४) denoting ‘made of,’ ‘con-
sisting of;’ e.g. loha-maya, ‘made of metal,’ ‘iron,’ fr. Joha, ‘metal ;’ tejo-maya,
* full of light,’ fr. tejas, ‘lustre ;’ buddhi-maya, ‘intellectual.’
LXXVI. मातं mdtra (ara), added to words to denote ‘measure,’ ‘height,’
&९. (cf. daghna, dvayasa); €. g. yava-mdtra (fem. £), ‘ of the size of a barleycorn ;’
tiru-mdtra, ‘up to the thighs.’ See mdtra in Sanskrit-English Dictionary.
‘ LXXVIL. 4-ya (यप्, य, SY, यस्, UF, रय, YU, WU, यक्, यत्, ख्यत्, स्यत्,
Ws, यन्, न्प्र), forming adjectives, patronymics, and neuter abstract substantives,
generally after changes similar to those required by secondary suffixes beginning
with vowels (see Prelim. Obs. a. 8. at 80. B); e.g. dhanya, ‘wealthy,’ fr. dhana,
“wealth ;? rahasya (fem. ¢), ‘secret,’ ‘a secret’ (neut.), fr. rahas, ‘ secrecy ;’ pitrya,
‘fatherly,’ fr. pitri; ritavya, “seasonable,’ fr. ritu; frequently after Vriddhi of the
first syllable, e.g. saumya (fem. ¢ or mf), ‘lunar,’ fr. soma, ‘the moon;’ mddhur-
ya, n. “ sweetness,’ fr. madhura, “ sweet ;? éaur-ya, ए. ` theft,’ fr. dora, “a, thief ;’
sauhrid-ya, n. ‘friendship,’ fr. su-hrid, ‘a friend ;’ saubhdg-ya, n. ° good fortune,’
fr. su-bhaga (see Prelim. Obs. ९); svdm-ya, ‘lordship,’ fr. sodmin; vaiydghrya, ए.
‘the state of a tiger,’ fr. vydghra. Sometimes the nasal and preceding vowel are not
rejected; e.g. brahmay-ya (fem. ¢), ‘relating to Brahman;’ rdjan-ya, ‘regal,’ fr.
rdjan (see Prelim. Obs.b.d). Cf. Gr. MATp-lo-s, marp-ia, ०८70-0 9० 07110100;
Lat. putr-iu-s, patr-ia, nefar-iu-s, &c. (cf. the primary suffix -ya, 80. XXVIII).
LXXVIII. &-ra (probably an old comparative suffix, cf. -tara, -ma), forming a
few adjectives (fem. ¢); e.g. madhu-ra, ‘sweet,’ fr. madhu; agma-ra, “stony,” fr.
` aSman; ava-ra, ‘inferior,’ fr. ava, “down;’ apa-ra, ‘posterior,’ fr. apa, ‘away.’
Cf. Lat. sup-eru-s, sup-er; inf-eru-s, inf-er.
LXXIX. रूप rapa (रूपप्), regarded as a secondary suffix giving the sense
‘composed of,’ ‘consisting of,’ ‘full of,’ &c., and sometimes almost redundant ;
e.g. satya-répam vdkyam, ‘a speech full of truth,’ or simply ‘a true speech ;’ drya-
K 2
68 SANSKRIT ROOTS
तीव, “respectable.” Sometimes giving the sense ‘good,’ ‘well,’ and even used
with verbs adverbially; e.g. patu-riépa, “very clever ;’ vaiydkarana-ripa, “a good
grammarian ;’ padati-répam, “he cooks well’ (Pan. v. 3, 66).
LXXX. -la (fem. @), forming a few adjectives (cf. -i-Ia); e.g. éré-la, ‘ fortu-
nate,’ fr. ért; pdnsu-la, ‘dusty,’ fr. pansu; phena-la, ‘foamy,’ fr. phena.
LXXXI. व -va (probably for -vat, 84. VII), as kesa-va, “hairy,” fr. kega.
LXXXIL. कठ -vala (वलच्, इतच्), forming a few adjectives (fem. ¢) and sub-
stantives; e.g. urjas-vala, ‘strong,’ fr. tirjas; sikhd-vala, crested,’ ‘a peacock’
(masc.), fr. sikhd, ‘a crest ;’ dantd-vala, m. ‘an elephant,’ fr. danta, “a tooth.’
LXXXIII. व्य -vya (व्यत्, व्यन्), as pitri-vya, ‘a paternal uncle,’ fr. pitri, ‘a
father.’ Cf. Gr. TAT p=Uib~s : Lat. patr-uu-s.
LXXXIV. QW -Sa, forming a few adjectives (fem. ¢) and substantives; ९. g.
loma-Sa, ‘hairy,’ ‘a sheep’ (masc.), “a fox’ (d, fem.), fr. loman, ‘hair.’
LXXXV. स -sa, forming a few adjectives, sometimes with Vriddhi; e. g. trina-
sa, ‘grassy,’ fr. trina; trdpusha, ‘made of tin,’ fr. trapu, ‘tin.’
81. Szconp Cuiass.—Stems ending in इ i (m. f. n.)
A. Primary Derivatives, formed from Roots by adding the following
Krit suffixes—
I. इ -i, forming abstract nouns, nouns of agency of all genders, and adjectives
(with occasional Guna or Vriddhi of the radical vowel); e.g. kavi, m. “a poet,’ fr.
ku; ahi, m. ‘a snake’ (६2८४, anguis), fr. anh; dhvani, m. ‘sound,’ fr. dhvan;
yaj-i, पा. “a worshipper,’ fr. yaj; pesh-i, m. ‘a thunderbolt,’ fr. pish, ‘to crush ;’
tvish-i, £, ‘splendour,’ fr. tvish, ‘to shine;’ saé-i, f. ‘friendship,’ fr. sa¢; krish-i, f.
‘ploughing,’ fr. krish; lip-i, f. ‘a writing,’ fr. lip, “to smear;’ ¢hid-i, f. “an axe,’
fr. chid, ‘to cut;’ vdr-i, n. ‘water,’ fr. vri, ‘to surround;’ aksh-i, n. ‘an eye,’
fr. aksh; ४८2, ‘pure,’ fr. sud, ‘to be pure;’ bodh-i, ‘knowing,’ fr. budh.
Sometimes with reduplication; e.g. jagm-i, ‘quick,’ fr. gam, ‘to go;’ jaghn-i,
‘slaying,’ fr. han. Cf, Gr. 70Al-s, Svvapi-s, ०7०८-५, Ct-s, &e.: Lat. ovi-s,
trudi-s, &c.
` Often added to dhd, ‘to hold,’ after various prepositions and prefixes, to form
masculine nouns, the final of the root being dropped; e.g. ni-dhi, m., vi-dhi, m.,
san-dhi, m.; one or two are exceptionally fem. (e. ए, oshadhi).
Il. fa -ti (cf. -ni), forming feminine abstract nouns and a few masculines, and
closely related to the -ta of the past pass. part. at 80. XVII, being added with
similar changes (except that 7 is rarely inserted); e.g. gru-ti, f. ‘hearing,’ fr. gru;
bhi-ti, £. ‘existence,’ fr. bhi; sthi-ti, £, ‘ state,’ fr. sthd; mati, f. ‘ mind,” fr. man;
uk-ti, £. ‘speech,’ fr. vad, ‘to speak ;’ ए, ‘fulness,’ fr. prf, ‘to fill;’ dat-ti, f.
“a gift,’ fr. dé; bhit-ti, f.°a fragment,’ fr. bhid, ‘to split’ (but past part. bhin-na);
chit-ti, f. ‘ splitting,’ fr. hid (but past part. chin-na); vrid-dhi (i.e. vridh + ti), f.
“increase,” fr. vridh; yati, m. ‘a sage,’ fr. yam, ‘to restrain ;’ jadti, m, ‘a relation,’
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 69
fr. jad; pati, 7. ‘a husband’ (for pdti), fr. pd, ‘to protect.’ Cf. Gr. (1-7८-5)
0-7८-5, ०-0५-9, (0-7८-4) अ0-0८-$ : Lat. ves-ti-s, mes-si-s (for met-ti-s), mor-s
(stem mor-ti), po-ti-s, com-pos (stem com-~po-ti).
III. नि -ni, forming feminine abstract nouns (in many respects analogous to
those formed with -ti, so that when the past passive participle ends in -na, q.v., a
noun may generally be formed with -ni), also a few masculines and adjectives ;
as, gld-ni, £. ‘ weariness,’ fr. 4702, “to be languid ;? li-ni, f. ‘ cutting,’ fr. li; jir-ni,
६ ‘old age,’ fr. jré, ` to grow old;’ hd-ni, f. ‘loss,’ fr. hd (but past part. hina);
agni, m. ‘ fire,’ fr. ang or aij; vah-ni, m. ‘fire,’ fr. vak, ‘to bear;’ vrish-ni,
‘raining,’ ‘a ram’ (m.), fr. vrish, Cf. Gr. (-0/-5, ond-vi-s: Lat. ig-ni-s (=:Sk.
ag-ni-s), pa-ni-s.
IV. मि -mi, as bhit-mi, £. “the earth,’ fr. Bhi, ‘to be;? dal-mi, m. ‘Indra’s
thunderbolt,’ fr. dal; का, m. f. ‘a wave’ (perhaps fr. vr); rag-mi, m. ‘a ray’
(perhaps fr. rag for Jas). Cf. Gr. क 9-6८-4 : Lat. ver-mi-s.
प्र. f&-ri, as in aph-ri, angh-ri, ag-ri, vank-ri, vadh-ri. Cf. Gr. 1-0८-५,
VI. वि -vi, as in ghrish-vi, jir-vi, fir-vi, jdgri-vi, dddhri-vi.
VIL. सि -si, as in dhd-si, pluk-shi, suk-shi.
B. Ssconpary Derivatives, formed from the Nominax Srems of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes.
(See Prelim. Obs. at 80. B.)
VIII. अकि -aki, forming a few patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syllable;
e.g. Vaiydsaki, ‘a descendant of Vyasa.’
1X. सायनि -dyani, forming patronymics; e.g. vdsindyani fr. vdsin (Pan. vi.
4, 174). ।
X. ¥-i, forming patronymics after Vriddhi of the first syllable; e.g. Daushyanti,
‘the son of Dushyanta;’ so Ddgarathi, ‘a descendant of Dasa-ratha;’ Sauvasvi
fr. Sv-asva
XI. ताति -tdti (= -td), forming Vedic abstract substantives; €, g. deva-tdti, f.
divinity,’ fr. deva; vasu-tdti, f. “wealth,” fr. vasu; sarva-tdti, f. ‘entirety,’ fr
sarva, ‘all’ Cf, Gr. ptAc-ryg (i.e. ‰८20-7 97 -6), KAKO-TNS (KAKO-TYT-65): Lat
civi-tas (stem civi-tdt- or civi-tdti-), celeri-tas (stem celeri-tdti-), vetus-tas, &c
XI. ति -ti, as in ywva-ti, ‘a young woman,’ fem. of yuvan (Pan. Iv. I, 77).
82. Tuirp Ciass.—Stems ending in उ प (m. ^ n.)
A. Primary Derivatives, formed from Roors by adding the following
Krit suffixes—
I, WY -athu (अथुच्), after Guna of a radical vowel; e.g. kshay-athu, m. ‘con-
sumption,’ fr. kshi, ‘to waste away ;’ svay-athu, m. ‘swelling,’ fr. svi; also vep-
athu, vam-athu.
Il. सातु -dtu, as jfv-dtu; m. f. 7. ‘life,’ &c., fr. j#v, ‘to live.’
70 SANSKRIT ROOTS
Ill. WTR -dru, as gar-dru, ‘hurtful,’ fr. sé, ‘to injure ;’ vand-dru, ‘ polite,’ fr.
vand, ‘to praise.’
IV, चालु -dlu (= -dru above), as Sdy-dlu, ‘sleepy,’ fr. ६ “to lie down;’ sprihay-
dlu, ‘ desirous,’ fr. sprih (10th class), “to desire.’
Vv. wa -itnu, forming adjectives &c. from verbal stems of the roth class; e. g-
gaday-itnu, ‘talkative,’ fr. gad, “to speak;’ stanay-itnu, m. ‘thunder,’ fr. stan,
“to sound.’
VI. FMT -ishnu (i.e. t-snu) = snu, as ksay-ishnu, “perishing,” fr. kshi; bhav-
ishnu = bhi-shnu, ‘becoming,’ fr. bhi.
VIL. उ -४ (कु, इ, उ, इन्, उण्? 5a), forming adjectives (fem. us or ४) and a
few nouns, the radical vowel generally undergoing change; e.g. prith-u, “ broad,’
fr. prath, “to extend ;’ myid-u, ‘mild,’ fr. mrid, ‘to crush;’ svdd-u, ‘sweet,’ fr.
svad or svdd; lagh-u, ‘light,’ fr. langh, ‘to spring;’ tan-u, ‘thin,’ fr. tan, ‘to
stretch ;? dé-u, ‘ swift ;? bandh-u, या, ‘a kinsman,’ fr. bandh, ‘to bind ;’ bhid-u, m.
“a thunderbolt,’ fr. bhid, ‘to cleave ;’ kér-u, m. ‘an artisan,’ fr. kri, “to make ;’
tan-u, £ ‘the body,’ fr. tan; ddr-u, n. ‘timber,’ fr. dré, “to split ;”? madh-u, n.
‘honey.’ Cf. Gr. OK-v-s, o-v-s, waat-v-s: Lat. ac-u-s, id-u-s, sudv-i-s (for
suddu-t-s).
Forming also desiderative adjectives (sometimes governing an accusative, see
824) from desiderative stems; e.g. jigamish-u, “desirous of going,’ fr. jigamisha,
desiderative stem of gam, ‘to go:’ similarly, didrikshu, “anxious to see ;’ jigishu,
“striving to conquer.’
VIII. वु -tu (a, तुन्), forming nouns of agency &c., generally masculine; €. g.
gan-tu, m. ‘a wayfarer,’ fr. gam, “to go;’ yd-tu, ‘a goer,’ &c., ‘time,’ fr. yd, ‘to
go;’ bhd-tu, m. ‘the sun,’ fr. bhd, “to shine’ (cf. bhd-nu); jan-tu, m. ‘a creature,’
fr. jan; ri-tu, m. ‘a season,’ fr. ri, ‘to go;’ vas-tu, n. “an object,’ also ods-tu, m.n.
‘building-ground,’ fr. vas, ‘to dwell.’ Cf. Gr. Boy-ti-s, édy-T-s, &o-Tv (for
Fao-rv): Lat. sta-tu-s, vic-tu-s, cur-su-s (for cur-tu-s).
Observe—The accusative of this suffix is used to form the infinitive; e.g. ydtum,
“to go:’ and in the Rig-veda other cases, as the dative, genitive, are used as in-
finitives; €. ¢. ydtave, ydtavai, ydtos (see 458, 459).
IX. तु -nu (कः नु), as gridh-nu, ‘eager,’ ^ greedy,’ fr. gridh, ‘to covet ;’ tras-nu,
‘timid,’ fr. tras, ‘to tremble ;’ si-nu, m. ‘a son,’ sd-nu or si-ni, f. ४ daughter,”
fr. su, ‘to bring forth ;’ bhd-nu, m. “the sun,’ fr. bhd; dhe-nu, f. ‘a milk-cow,’ fr.
dhe, ‘to suck.’ Cf. Gr. Op4-vu-s, Auy-vi-s.
X. यु -yu, as sundh-yu, “bright,” ‘fire’ (m.), fr. sundh, “to purify ;’ jan-yu, ४
creature,’ fr. jan; man-yu, ‘wrath,’ fr. man, ‘to think ;’ also bhuj-yu, das-yu,
mri-t-yu.
XI. रे -ru, as bhi-ru (nom. fem. rus or ris), ‘ timid,’ fr. ht, ‘to fear ;’ as-ri, (8
tear’ (said to be fr. as).
शा. स्तु -snu (cf. -ishnu), as sthd-snu, ‘firm,’ fr. sthd, ‘to stand ;’ ji-shau, ^ vie~
torious,’ fr. ji, ‘to conquer ;’ bhd-shuu, ‘being,’ fr. baz.
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 71
B. Srconpary Derivatives, formed from the NomInaL Stems of
primary derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes—
XII. J -yu, forming adjectives, frequently in the sense of ‘wishing for, and a
few nouns; e. g. érnd-yu, ‘woollen,’ fr. का svar-yu, ‘ desiring heaven,’ fr. svar,
9
heaven ;’ also subham-yu, kam-yu, aham-yu, asma-yu
XIV. दु -lu, as kripd-lu, dayd-lu, ‘ compassionate,’ fr. kripd, dayd.
Stems ending in $i and HU (see 123).
XV. 3 4, forming numerous feminine nouns, which will be found under their
corresponding masculine suffixes, see 80. I. &c., 123-126. Others, mostly mono-
syllabic, and often formed by taking a naked root to serve as a noun, are, bhi, f.
` strt, f.a woman;’ Lakshmé,
“fear ;? dhé, f. ‘understanding ;’ sré, £ ‘ prosperity ;
f. ‘the goddess Lakshmi;’ nf, m.f. ‘a leader’ (whence send-nf, m. ‘a general ;’
grdma-nt, m. f. ‘the chief of a village’).
XVI. क -४, forming feminine nouns, which will be found under their corres-
ponding masculine forms, as s¢-ni, bht-rdé, 82. IX. XI. (see also 125,126). Others,
sometimes monosyllabic, and formed by taking a naked root to serve as a noun,
are, 7४, 71. £. ‘a reaper ;’ bhi, f. ‘the earth ;? Svayam-bhi, m. ‘the Self-existent ;’
vadhi, f. ‘a wife.’
83. Fourra Criass.—Stems ending in = ri (m.f. n.)
Primary Derivatives, formed from Roots by adding the Krit suffix—
तु -tri, forming, 1st, nouns of agency of three genders, and a kind of future par-
ticiple, the same change of the root being required which takes place in the first
future, and the same euphonic changes of ¢ (see 386 and 581); thus kshep-tri, “a
thrower,’ fr. kship; dd-tri, ‘a giver,’ fr. dé; bhar-iri, ‘a protector,’ fr. एष, ‘to
bear ;’ boddhri, ‘a knower,’ fr. budh ; sodhri, ‘patient,’ fr. sah, “to bear ;’ bhav-i-tri,
“about to become’ (= fu-turu-s), fr. bhi, “to become’ (Raghu-v. v1. 52).
2ndly, nouns of relationship, masculine and feminine; in these the vowel of the
root is frequently modified; as, pi-tri, ‘a father,’ fr. pd, ‘to protect ;’ md-tri, ‘a
mother,’ fr. md, ‘to form,’ ‘ produce ;’ bhrd-tri, ‘a brother,’ fr. bhri, “to support.’
Cf. Gr. do-T 7p, Ba-TP, [Ay-TIp : Lat. da-tor, da-turu-s, pa-ter, ma-ter, fra-ter.
84. Firru Cuass.—Stems ending in qt and ह् १ (m.f.n.)
A. Primary Derivatives, formed from Roots by adding the following
Krit suffixes—
1. "iq -at, forming present and future participles Par. from the stems of the
present and the second future tenses respectively (see 524, 525, 578); e.g. ad-at.
eating,’ fr. ad; dinv-at, ‘collecting,’ fr. & karishy-at, ‘about to do,’ fr. kri ;
72 SANSKRIT ROOTS
dadh-at, ‘placing, fr. dhd. Cf. Gr. कक) (stem ep-crt-), 940-0v-5 (stem
0८0४7), 46-€/-¢ (stem T16-evt-): Lat. veh-ens (stem veh-ent-), i-ens (stem e-unt-).
Il. &-it, forming a few nouns and adjectives; e.g. sar-it, “a river,’ fr. sri,
“to flow ;’ har-it, ‘ green.’
III. त् -, frequently added to roots ending in a short vowel, to form nouns of
agency, substantives, and adjectives (often used at the end of compounds); e.g.
ji-t, ‘conquering,’ in sarva-jit, ‘all-conquering,’ fr. ji; kri-t, “a doer,’ in karma-
krit, ‘a doer of work,’ fr. kri.
Sometimes ¢ is substituted for a final m of a root, generally at the end of a com-
pound; as, ga-t in adhva-gat, m. “a traveller,’ fr. gam, ‘to go.’
IV. This class, besides comprehending a few nouns already ending in d, as
Sarad, f. ‘autumn ;’ drigad, f. ‘a stone;’ kumud, 7, ‘a lotus,’ includes a number
of monosyllabic nouns formed by taking roots ending in ¢ or d, and using them
in their unchanged state as substantives and nouns of agency, the technical suffix
kvip (leaving v) being theoretically added, for which a blank is substituted (see 87);
e.g. dit, f. ‘the mind ;’ mud, f.‘ joy ;’ vid, “a knower’ (in dharma-vid); ad, ‘an
eater” (in kravydd, ‘a flesh-eater’); dyut, f. ‘splendour;’ pad, m. ‘a stép.’
Some nouns falling under this class are formed by prefixing prepositions to
roots ending in ¢ or d, or ina short vowel; e.g. sam-pad, f. “success ;’ sam-vid,
^ ‘an agreement ;’ vi-dyut, f. ‘lightning ;’ upa-ni-shad, ‘a philosophical treatise ;’
sam~i-t, ‘conflict’ (fr. sam-i, “to go together’).
The practice of using roots at the end of compounds prevails also in Greek and
Latin; as in (णपु, (- 8), Bov-wArk (क), &c., arti-few (-fic-), carni-few
(-fic-), pre-ses (-sid-), &c. And there is a very remarkable agreement between
. Sanskrit and Latin in the practice of adding ¢ to roots ending in short vowels; thus,
com-it- (comes), ‘a goer with;’ equ-it- (eques), ‘a goer on horseback ;’ al-it- (ales),
“a goer with wings;’ super-stit- (superstes), ‘a stander by,’ &c. Greek adds a similar
z to roots with a long final vowel; as, -yvwT= (ayes), G-TTOT= (antes), &e.
B. Srconpary Derivatives, formed from the Nomina Stems of
primary derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes—
ए. तात् -tdt, a Vedic suffix (= -tdti, 81. XI); e.g. deva-tdt, f. ‘worship;’
satya-tdt, ‘truth.’
VI. मत् -mat (aaa, हप), forming adjectives (fem. क) signifying “possessed
of,’ ‘ full of,’ &c. = -vat below; usually added to stems ending in i, ¢, or ४; e.g.
agni-mat, ‘having fire;’ sré-mat, ‘prosperous;’ dhé-mat, ‘wise;’ ansu-mat, ‘radiant;
yava-mat, ‘abounding in barley;’ madhu-mat, ‘full of honey;? vidyun-mat=vidyut-
vat, ‘possessing lightning,’ fr. vidyut; jyotish-mat, ‘brilliant,’ fr. jyotis, ‘light ;?
dhanush-mat, ‘armed with a bow’ (see 69); ardish~mat, ‘brilliant’ (69. 5).
VII. वत् vat (वतुप्, वति), forming, 1st, adjectives (fem. ०८) signifying ‘ pos-
sessed of,’ &c.; usually added to stems ending in a, d, or m, and in some other
consonants; e.g. dhana-vat, ‘possessed of wealth;’ asva-vat, “having horses 5
vtra-vat, ‘abounding in heroes;’ sikhd-vat, ‘crested,’ fr. sikhd ; vidyd-vat, ‘learned,’
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 73
fr. vidyd, “knowledge ;’ rdja-vat or rdjan-vat (see 57), ‘having a king,’ fr. rdjan;
agni-vat—=agni-mat, ‘having fire ;’ kim-vat, ‘ possessed of what ;’ pad-vat, “having
feet,’ fr. pad, ‘a foot;’ vidyut-vat, ‘ possessing lightning,’ fr. vidyut (see under -mat) ;
tejas-vat, ‘brilliant,’ fr. tejas, ‘splendour ;’ bhds-vat, ‘ shining,’ ‘the sun’ (m.), fr.
bhds, ‘light ;’ srug-vat, ‘having a ladle,’ fr. srué. Cf. Gr. forms in -Fers (0. 6. for
^€४7-5), -Feaca (i.e. Fetya = vatt for vatyd), -Fev (for Fevt); as, 2८01-८ (stem:
Xapi-Fevt-), Sax pvd-ers (stem Sax pvo-Fevt-),
Forming, 2ndly, past active participles (see 553); e.g. krita-vat, ‘one who has
done ;’ bhagna-vat, “one who has broken.’
For the suffix -vat, in td-vat, ‘so many,’ yd-vat, &c., see 234; and for the
adverbial suffix -vat, expressing ‘similitude,’ see 724.
85. SixtH Ciass.—Stems ending in खन् an and इन् 1) (m. f. 7.)
A. Primary Derivatives, formed from Roots by adding the
following Krit suffixes—
I. सन् ९, forming several nouns, chiefly masculine; e.g. rdjan, m. ‘a king’
(fem. वकु, ‘a queen,’ 57. ¢), fr. rdj, ‘to govern;’ taksh-an, m. ‘a carpenter,’ fr.
taksh, ‘to form by cutting ; sneh-an, m. ‘a friend,’ fr. snih, ‘to love;’ uksh-an, m.
८ चः
> ag-an,m. a stone,’ fr. af; ud-an, 11. ` water,’
“a bull,’ fr. uksh, ‘to impregnate ;
fr. ud or und, ‘to wet? Cf. Gr. KAvd-w», TEKT-wY (stem TEKT-0V-), €ix-wy (stem
€८८-०५४-): Lat. hom-o (stem hom-in-), asperg-o (stem asperg-in-), pect-en ( pec-tin-).
Il. इन् -in, forming numerous substantives, adjectives, and nouns of agency
(fem. iné); e.g. math-in, m. ‘a churning-stick,’ fr. math, ‘to shake ;’ path-in, m.
“a path,’ fr. path, ‘to go’ (see 162); kér-in, m. “an agent,’ fr. kri, “to do;’ dvesh-in,
m. ‘an enemy,’ fr. dvish, ‘to hate.’ Cf. the secondary suffix -in at VI.
III. त्वन् -ivan (fem. tvarf), see under -van below.
IV. मन् -man (मनिन्, मनि; मनिण्), -iman, forming neuter and a few masculine
abstract substantives, and rarely adjectives, often after Guna of the radical vowel
(those in iman being generally masc.); e.g. kar-man, n. “a deed,’ fr. kri, ‘to १०;
jan-man or jan-iman, n. ‘birth,’ fr. jan, ‘to beget ;’ ves-man, n. ‘a house,’ fr. vis,
“to enter;’ nd-man, n. (for jad-man), ‘a name,’ fr. jad, ‘to know;’ gar-man, ए.
‘happiness,’ probably fr. sri; pre-man, m.n. ‘affection,’ fr. pri, ‘to please ;’ ush-
man, m. ‘heat,’ fr. ush, “to burn:’ also sé-man, f. ‘a boundary ;’ as-man, m. ‘a
stone ;’ sush-man, m. ‘fire,’ ‘strength’ (neut.); pdép-man, m. “sin.’
Sometimes with insertion of i (and Vedic ¢), in which case the gender is generally
masculine (cf. the secondary suffix -iman4}; e.g. sar-iman or Ved. sar-éman, m.
‘going,’ fr. sri, ‘to go;’ star-iman or Ved. star-¢man, m. “a couch,’ fr. strf, ‘to
spread ;’ dhar-iman, m. ‘form,’ fr. dhri, “to hold;’ har-iman, m. ‘time,’ fr. hri,
“to seize.’ Cf. Gr. dk-poy (stem &k-pov-), yvd-pwv (stem yre-por-), ए ४0५»
(stem mvb-pév-) ; Lat. no-men (stem no-min-), stra-men (stem stra-min-), ag-men,
teg-men, teg-t-men..
ए. वन् -van (क्रनिप्, वनिप्), forming. substantives, adjectives, and nouns of
L
74 SANSKRIT ROOTS
agency (fem. generally vard; cf. suffix -vara, with which ~can appears to be con-
nected); e.g. pad-van, m. ‘a way,’ fr. pad, ‘to go;’ mad-van (fem. varf), *in-
toxicating,’ fr. mad, ‘to gladden ;’ rik-van (fem. vart), ‘ praising,’ fr. aré (or rié);
drig-van, ‘one who has seen’ (generally at the end of a comp.), fr. drig; yaj-van
(fem. varz), ‘sacrificing,’ fr. yaj.
When a root ends in a short vowel, ¢ is inserted; e.g. kri-t-van (fem. varf),
‘effecting,’ fr. kri; ji-t-van, ‘conquering,’ fr. ji; i-t-van, ‘going,’ fr. é.
B. Ssconpary Derivatives, formed from the Nomina Stems of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffixes—
VI. इन् -in, forming numerous adjectives of possession, &c.; e.g. dhan-in,
‘wealthy,’ fr. dhana, ‘wealth;’ bal-in, ‘strong,’ fr. bala, ‘strength ;’ mdl-in,
wearing a garland,’ fr. mdld, ‘a garland;’ vrth-in, “having rice,’ fr. vrthi, “rice ;”
keg-in, ‘having hair,’ fr. kega, “hair ;’ padm-in, ‘abounding in lotuses’ (padmint, f.
“a quantity of lotuses’), fr. padma, ‘a lotus.’
VIL. इमन् -iman (इमनिच्, इमनिन्), forming masculine abstract substantives,
mostly from adjectival stems, the finals being generally rejected, and the same
changes being frequently required as before the comparative and superlative
suffixes -fyas, -ishtha (cf. the Krit suffix -man, 85. IV); e.g. kdl-iman, “blackness,”
fr. kdla, “black ;? lagh~iman, ‘lightness,’ fr. Jaghu, ‘nimble ;’ mah-iman, ‘greatness,’
fr. mahat; also gar-iman, drdgh-iman, prath-iman, &c. (cf. comparisons, 194).
VII. मिन् -min, forming adjectives of possession (cf. the suffixes -in, -vin, -mat,
-vat); e.g. vdg-min, ‘ eloquent,” fr. vdé, ‘speech ;” go-min, “possessing herds,’ fr.
00, “a cow 3° svud-min, ‘an owner,’ fr. sva, ‘self.’
IX. विन् -vin, forming adjectives, generally from stems ending in d or as; e.g.
medhd-vin, ‘intellectual ;’ tejas-vin, ‘splendid’ (69); srag-vin, ‘wearing a gar-
land,’ fr. sraj.
86. Seventa Crass,—Stems ending in सस् as, इस् is, उस् us (m.f.n.)
A. Primary Dertvatives, formed from Roots by adding the
following Krit suffixes—
I. अस् -as, forming numerous nouns, mostly neuter, and a few adjectives,
generally after Guna of the root; e.g. man-as, n. ‘the mind,’ fr. man, ‘to think :’
similarly formed are nam-as, n. ‘adoration ;’ tap-as, n. ‘penance;’ tam-as, n. ‘dark-
ness ;’ jan-as, ‘a race ;’ sar-as, n. ‘water,’ fr. sri, ‘to go;? éet-as, n. ‘ mind,’ fr. Git;
srot-as, n. ‘stream,’ fr. sru, ‘to flow’ (in this case ¢ is inserted); ush-as, f. (nom.
ds), ‘dawn,’ fr. ush (=vas), ‘to shine;’ jar-as, f. ‘old age,’ fr. jré, ‘to grow old’
(171); vedh-as (nom. m. f.n, ds, ds, as), ‘creating,’ ‘name of Brahman’ (m.) Cf.
Gr. yér-05, (५6१06) ev-yev-s (stem €U-yev=es-), Ever (—su-manas): Lat.
gen-us (stem gen-es- or gen-er-), scel-us.
II, इम् -is (= -as above), as hav-is, n. ‘ghee,’ fr. hu, ‘to offer;’ also aré-is, jyot-is,
dyot-is, ro¢-ts, §o¢-is, n. ‘light,’ ‘lustre,’ fr. aré, jyut, dyut, rud, sud, ‘to shine.’
AND THE FORMATION OF NOMINAL STEMS. 75
17. उस् -४५ (= -as, 86. 1), as daksh-us, ०. ‘an eye,’ fr. daksh, ‘to see;’ also
vap-us, 11. ‘ body ;? tanus, n. ‘ body ;’ dhan-us, 7, (m.) “a bow;’ jan-us, n. “birth;’
man-us, m. ‘man.’ ।
IV. वस् -vas, -ivas (nom. m. f. n. vdn, ushi, vat), forming perfect participles from
the stem of the reduplicated perfect (see 554); e. g. vivid-vas, ‘one who has known,’
fr. vivid (cf. vidvas, 168. ९) ; similarly, ten-ivas, jagm-ivas, &c. (see 168).
ए. Srconpary Derivatives, formed from the Nomina Srems of primary
derivatives by adding the following Taddhita suffiixes—
Vv. aq -fyas, forming the comparative degree (see 167, 193, 194); ९. £. bal-
tyas, ‘ stronger,’ fr. bala for balin or bala-vat. Observe—Perhaps this suffix is in
most cases rather primary than secondary, being generally added to the root or
modified root; as, uru, ‘wide,’ forms variyas fr. vri (cf. -ishtha, 80. XLVIII).
VI. यस् -yas (= -tyas above), as bhi-yas, ‘more,’ comparative of baku (see 194):
also jyd-yas (194); nav-yas, Ved. (comparative of nava, ‘ recent’).
87, Eigutu Cuiass.—Stems ending in any Consonant, except
qt and ed, Tn, स् 8 (m. f. n.)
Almost any root may be used alone in its naked unchanged state as a nominal
stem, no suffix of any kind being apparently added, but as it is a rule of native
grammarians that no word can be formed without a suffix, they suppose a suffix
technically called kvip (leaving v), for which a blank is then substituted. Most
naked roots so used, form nouns of agency, especially at the end of compounds.
Those roots which end in ¢ or d, or in a short vowel, having ¢ affixed, have been
already noticed as falling under the fifth class, see 84. III. IV. This eighth class
is intended to comprise all other roots, ending in any consonant; e.g. bhuj (nom.
bhuk), ‘an eater ;’ so, budh (nom. bhut), ‘a knower’ (see 44. ९) ; sprig (nom. sprik),
“one who touches ;’ vig (nom. vit), ‘one who enters,’ ‘a Vaisya’ (m.), ‘a house’ (f.);
lik (nom. lig), ‘one who licks ;’ dus (nom. dhuk), ‘one who milks.’
a. Some require modifications; as, 7440 (nom. prdt), ‘an asker,’ fr. prach.
A desiderative stem is sometimes used alone in the same way; e.g. pipaksh (nom.
pipak), ‘one who wishes to cook.’
8. Many roots are taken in this way to form substantives; e.g. yudh, f. (nom.
yut), ‘battle ;? kshudh, £ (nom. kshut), “hunger :’ some requiring modifications of
the radical vowel; e.g. vdé, £ (nom. vdk), ‘speech,’ fr. vad, ‘to speak ;’ pur, f.
(nom. pir), ‘a city,’ probably fr. pré; gir, f. (nom. gf), ‘ praise,’ fr. grt.
९. Many roots ending in nasals, when used in this way, especially at the end of
compounds, either reject the nasal, or exchange it for ¢ (see -t, 84. III): gam, ‘to
go,’ has ga or gat; jan has ja; han has ha or ghna.
d. There are also a few dissyllabic nouns formed from roots which must be made
to fall under this eighth class; as, trisknaj (nom. trishyak), ‘thirsty ;’ asrij, n.
(nom. asrik), “blood:’ also a few substantives formed by prefixing prepositions
to roots; as, sam-idh (nom. samit), ‘fuel.’
L2
76 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION ; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS,
SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
88. Havine explained how the stem of a noun is formed, we
have now to shew how it is inflected.
In the last chapter, nouns, Substantive and Adjective, were ar-
ranged under eight classes, according to the final of their stems
(the first four classes comprising those ending in vowels, the last:
four those ending in consonants). In the present chapter their
declension or inflexion will be exhibited under the same eight
classes. Moreover, as every class comprises Adjectives as well as
Substantives, so the example of masculine, feminine, and neuter
Substantives given under each class will serve as a model for the
declension of masculine, feminine, and neuter Adjectives coming
under the same class.
Gender of Nouns.
89. The noun has three genders, and its gender is, in many‘
cases, determinable from the termination of its stem. Thus, nearly
all stems in d, # and those formed with the suffix ¢ (81. II), are
feminine: most abstract nouns and those denoting an act or instru-
ment, formed with the suffixes ana, tva (80, LXVIII), ya, tra (see
under 80), as, is, us (86), and man (85. IV), are neuter; those
formed with the suffixes na (80. XXIV) and iman (85. VII) are
generally masculine; but those in a, 2, uw, and 7i are not reducible
to rule. The Nominative case is, however, in the first of these
instances a guide to the gender; as, deva-s, ‘a deity,’ is masculine ;
but phala-m, ‘fruit, neuter. And in other cases the meaning of
the word; as, pitri, ‘a father, is masculine; and mdtri, ‘a mother,’
feminine.
It may be noted also that words denoting gods, mountains, seas,
divisions of time, are generally masculine ; words denoting rivers,
the earth, and night, are usually feminine; while adjectives and
DECLENSION; OR I[NFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS. 77
participles, used as abstract nouns, the names of woods, flowers,
fruits, towns, and water, are generally neuter.
Cases of. Nouns.
go. In Sanskrit, nearly all the relations between words in a
sentence are expressed by inflexions (vibhakti, Pan. 1. 4, 104).
Many prepositions exist, but in Post-Vedic Sanskrit they are not
often used alone in government with cases, their chief use being as
prefixes to verbs and nouns. Hence the necessity for eight cases.
These, as it were, grow out of the stem, and are called, 1. Nomina-
tive (prathamd, scil. vibhakti, ‘the first case’); 2. Accusative (dvitiyd,
‘the second’); 3. Instrumental (iritiyd, ‘the third’); 4. Dative (éa-
turthé, ‘the fourth’); 5. Ablative (pandamt, ‘the fifth’); 6, Genitive
(shashthi, ‘the sixth’); 7. Locative (saptamé, ‘the seventh’) ; 8, Vo-
cative (see 92). 1. The Nominative is the kartri or ‘agent,’ but the
agent is not always in the N. case *; thus in the sentences, ‘he did
that,’ and ‘that was done by me,’ the agent in the last sentence is
in the I. case. 9. The Accusative is the karman or ‘that acted on,’
but the karman is not always in the Ac. case ; as in ‘that was done
by me,’ where ‘that’ is the karman, and is in the N. case. 3. The
Instrumental expresses karana, ‘instrumentality,’ i.e. it denotes the
instrument or agent by which or by whom a thing is done; as, tena
kritam, ‘done by him +.’ 4. The Dative is used in the sense sam-
praddna, ‘ giving,’ ‘delivering over,’ &c. 5. The Ablative generally
expresses apdddna, ‘taking away,’ and is usually translateable by
‘from,’ and not as in Latin and Greek by ‘with, ‘by,’ ‘in’ (see
812). 6. The Genitive expresses sambandha, ‘ relationship,’ ‘ con-
nexion {.’? 7. The Locative is used in the sense adhikarana, ‘location,’
and generally expresses the place or time in which anything is
done; as, Ayodhydydm, ‘in Ayodhya;’ pirva-kdle, ‘in former time ;’
bhiimau, ‘on the ground +.’ 8. The Vocative is used in the sense
sambuddhi and sambodhana, * addressing, ‘ calling to.’
* These cases will sometimes be denoted by their initial letters. Thus N. will
denote Nominative; I., Instrumental; Ac., Accusative; Ab., Ablative.
+ The Instrumental and the Locative cases denote various other relations. See
Syntax, S05, 817.
+ The Genitive in Sanskrit generally denotes ‘possession,’ but is of very exten-
sive application. See Syntax, 815, 816.
78 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
gi. According to the Indian system, each of these eight cases
has three numbers, singular (eka-va¢ana), dual (dvi-vadana), and
plural (bahu-vaéana) ; and to each belongs a termination which is
peculiarly its own, serving alike for masculine (pum-linga), feminine
(stré-linga), and neuter gender (kifva or napunsaka-linga).
Again, according to the native system, some terminations are
technically combined with servile or indicatory letters to indicate
some peculiarity, or to distinguish one from the other, or to enable
Pratydhdéras to be formed (see note below). Thus the proper
termination of the Nominative singular is q s (expressible by
Visarga : before k, kh, p, ph, and before the sibilants, or at the
end of a sentence, see 63); but the technical termination is sw,
the letter ४ being servile*. Similarly, the termination of the Nomi-
native plural is really as, but technically jas, the 7 being servile.
The two schemes of termination, with and without the servile
letters, are here exhibited. The first, or merely technical scheme,
is given in small type.
Technical Terminations with the Real Terminations without
indicatory letters in capitals. the indicatory letters.
SING. DUAL, PLURAL, SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. YsU* at au जस् Jas ड au as
Ac. सम् am az auT* We Sas am au as
I. दाव भ्याम् bhydm निस् dhis ¢ bhydm bhis
D. Ne — bhydm भ्यस् bhyas e bhydm bhyas
Ab. ङसि N.asI_ — bhyim — bhyas as bhydm bhyas
©. इत् Nas ओस् os खाम् क as 08 dm
L. fF Ni — os सुप् suP a os su
* The servile ४ may possibly indicate that final s, in certain positions, is liable
to be liquefied into. The object of the % of waz in the Ac. du. is to enable a
pratydhdra सुद् to be formed, denoting the first five inflexions, i.e. the Strong
cases of masculine and feminine nouns (see 135). The terminations for the D.
Ab. G. and L. sing. are called by Panini mitah, “having » as their ét,’ to indicate
that they are applicable to the four cases, admitting occasional substitutions; cf.
the inflexion of mati, dhenu at 112, srt, &c. at 123. The pratydhdra सुप् sup is used
to denote all the cases from the N. sing. to the L. pl. Pratyaharas are generally
formed by combining the first member of 9 series with the final consonant of the
last member, as above (cf. page 14, note 6).
DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NouNS. 79
92. The Vocative is held to be a peculiar aspect of the Nomina-
tive, and coincides with the Nom. in the dual and plural. Hence
it is not supposed to have a separate termination of its own. In
the singular it is sometimes identical with the stem, sometimes with
the Nominative. Sometimes, however, it differs from both *.
The terminations beginning with vowels will sometimes be
called vowel-terminations; and those beginning with consonants
including the Nom. sing., consonantal terminations.
Again, those cases which take the vowel-terminations will some-
times be called vowel-cuses ; and those which take the consonantal,
consonantal cases.
See also the division into Strong, Middle, and Weak cases at
135. 4.
Observe—The terminations should be read horizontally, i.e. for
each case in all three numbers; not perpendicularly, i.e. not for
all the cases of the singular before passing to the dual. Hence
the expression ‘Sas and all the remaining cases’ must be taken to
mean the Ac. pl. and all the other cases sing. du. and pl., and the
‘first five inflexions’ must be taken to denote s, au, as, am, au, or
N, sing. du. pl., Ac. sing. du.
93. Having propounded the above scheme as the general type
of the several case-suffixes in the three numbers, Indian gram-
marians proceed to adapt them to every Substantive and Adjective
in the language, as well as to Pronouns, Numerals, and Participles,
whether masculine, feminine, or neuter.
In fact, their theory is, that there is but one declension in San-
skrit, and that the stem of a noun being given, and the regular
case-terminations being given, the stem is to be joined to those
terminations according to the regular laws of euphonic combination,
as in the following examples of the two stems, नो nau, f. ‘a ship’?
(navi, vav), and हरत् harit, 7, f. ‘green,’
* In the first or commonest class of nouns the masculine stem stands alone in
the Vocative, just as the termination is dropped from the 2nd pers. sing. Impera-
tive Parasmai in the first group of classes in conjugation, see 246.
80 DECLENSION; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
94.
SINGULAR.
Nom. Voc. नौस् 10225
DUAL,
नावौ ndvau
PLURAL.
नावस् ndvas
harit + 2, 43. 4.
nau +s nau+au. See 37. | nau + as. 37.
Acc. नावम् ndvam — névau — ndvas
nau + am. 37.
Inst. नावा ndvd नोभ्याम् naubhydm नोभिस् naubhis
. nau + d. 37. nau + bhydm nau + bhis
|. Dat. नावे ndve — naubhydm | नोभ्यस् naubhyas
nau +e. 37. nau + bhyas
Abl. नावस् ndvas — naubhydm — naubhyas
nau + as. 37.
Gen. नावस् ndvas नावोस् ndvos नावाम् ndvdm
nau +as. 37. | nau-+os. 37. nau + dm. 37.
Loc. नावि 24 -- १4४८ नोषु naushu
nau + 2. 37. nau + su. 70.
95.
SINGULAR, DUAL. PLURAL.
Nom. Voe. हसि harit इरितो haritau हर्तिस् haritas
harit + ऽ. See 41.1. | harit + au. 43. d. | harit + as. 43. ठ.
Ace. इस्तिम् haritam | — haritau — _ haritas
harit + am. 43. d.
Inst. हस्ति harité हरिद्ाम् haridbhydm इहर्द्धिस् haridbhis
harit + 4. 43.d.| harit + bhydm. 43. | harit + bhis. 43.
Dat. हरिते harite — haridbhydm | efcere haridbhyas
harit + e. 43.d. 8 harit + bhyas. 43.
Abl. हरितिस् haritas | — haridbhyim| —_ haridbhyas
harit + as. 43.4.
Gen. — haritas | इस्तिस् haritos इरिताम् haritdm
harit + os. 43.d. | harit + dm. 43.d.
Loc. हरिति hariti — haritos हरित्सु haritsu
harit + su. 42.
-DECLENSION ; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS 07 NouUNS. 81
96. Unfortunately, however, नौ nau, ‘a ship,’ is nearly the only
noun, ending in a vowel, that joins its stem thus regularly with-case-
endings; and although nouns ending in consonants are numerous,
and nearly as reguldr as harit, they are far less common than nouns
in a, d, i, £, u, and ri, whose declension requires frequent changes
in the finals, both of stem and terminations.
97. Thus in cl. 1 of stems ending in a (comprising almost as
many nouns as the other seven classes together ; compare 80 with
81-87), not only is the final a of the stem liable to be lengthened
and changed to e, but also the termination ina is substituted for a,
the proper termination of the Inst. sing, masc. ; ya for ९ of the Dat. ;
é for as of the Ab. ; sya for as of the Gen.; n for as of the Ac. pl;
ais for bhis of the Inst. pl. And in other nouns changes and sub-
stitutions are required, some of which are determined by the gender.
(Compare the first group of verbal stems at 257. a.)
The annexed table repeats synoptically the terminations, with
the most usual substitutions, throughout all the classes of nouns.
पि. q(m.f), म्* (n.) = (1.7), $(f*n.) अस् (7.1), इ (n.)
Ac.3m (m.f.), म्*# (m.f.n.) स्रो (1.1), ई (*.) अस्, स् (7.1), न्+ (m.),z(n.)
I. s1(m.f.n.), इन# (m.n.) भ्याम् (m. f.n.) भिस् (m.f.n.), tq* (m.n.)
D. र (m.f.n.), य+ (m.n.) भ्याम् (m.f.n.) भ्यस् (m. f.n.)
+. सस् (70.{7.), स् (0.7), 7*(m.n.) भ्याम् (m.f.n.) भ्यस् (m.f.n.)
©. अस् (ण..1.), स् (7.६), स्य+(7..) ओस् (ण...) खम् (m.f.n.)
L. 3(m.fn.), खाम् (६), जो (१.६) सस् (7...) सु (m. fn.)
Obs. 1. Those substitutions marked * are mostly restricted to
nouns ending in a, and are therefore especially noticeable. Femi-
nines in @ are peculiar in taking the neut. substitution 7 in du. N.
Ac. V.
Obs. 2. It will be perceived that the Accusative pl. of all masc. nouns in the
first four declensions ends in , whilst that of all fem. nouns ends in the regular
termination s.
a. Comparing the above terminations with those of Latin and Greek, we may
remark that ऽ enters into the Nom. sing. masc., and m or n into the neuter, in all
‘three languages. In regard to the Sk. dual au, the original termination was d, as
found in the Vedas; and द equals the Greek a, #, and € In Nom. pl. mase.
the s appears in many Lat. and Gr. words. In Ac. sing., Sk. agrees with Lat.,
and even with Gr., final % in Gr. being changed into ४, S appears in all three _
languages in Ac. pl.; and when the Sanskrit ends in n, as in the first class of
M
82 DECLENSION ; OR INFLEXION OF THE STEMS OF NOUNS.
“nouns, this n is probably for ns, since preceding a is lengthened to compensate
for the rejection of s. Cf. some Vedic Ac. plurals; cf. also swaovs Ac. pl. in the
Cretic dialect; and Gothic forms, such as balgins, sununs; cf. likewise the r added
in the Veda after the Ac. pl., e.g हरतु व anu (Riggv. 1.49, 3). In Inst. pl.
bhis is preserved in the Lat. nobis, vobis, and Gr. ५५) for pis (५४०४-५) = naubhis).
The ais which belongs to Sk. nouns in a is probably a contraction of dbhis, since
in the Vedas ebhis for dbhis is found for ais, as vrikebhis for vrikais, &c. &c. This
ais probably answers to the Latin Dat. and Abl. plural in is, just as bhis and bhyas
answer to the Latin bus. In the Gen. sing. all three languages have preserved
the s (नावम्, nav-is, vy-0s for vaFos); and in the Gen. pl. dm=Gr. ५ and Lat.
um. (पदाम् = गर, pedum). In Loc. sing. Sanskrit 4 is preserved in Lat. and Gr.
in such words as ०८८०५ ‘at home,’ + ०९५८४ “on the Isthmus ;’ humi, domi, &c. ;
and in the Dative (निशि = ५४/7५ नावि == navi). In Loe. pl. su=Gr. ०५} e.g.
१५०१०५४), ‘at the door;’ Spaci(v), ‘at the right time’ (नौषु == ५५४०८), Sanskrit
stems in a prefix ६ to:su; so that vrikaishu (29. b) = Avkoiot. The Voc. sing. in
Gr. is frequently identical with the stem, and the Voc. du. and pl. with the Nom.,
as in Sanskrit; e.g.7oAiTy-s, stem and Voc. क 02८7 ६ pyTwp, stem and Voc. 0770 5
evyevys, stem and Voc. evyeves.
98. In the following pages no attempt will be made to explain
how or why particular nouns deviate from the general scheme of
terminations, A division of nouns into eight classes, four ending
in vowels, and four ending in consonants, will be made; and under
every one of the eight classes a model noun for the masculine,
feminine, and neuter, serving for adjectives as well as substantives,
will be declined in full.
99. But the student must understand, that this division inte
eight classes is entirely arbitrary. It does not imply that there
are eight separate declensions in Sanskrit. All that is meant is,
that the final letters of the stems of nouns may be conveniently
arranged under four general heads for vowels, and four for conso-
nants. Indeed, according to native grammarians, there is only one
declension in Sanskrit, all nouns, whatever may be the final of their
stems, being forced to adapt themselves to one common scheme of
nearly similar case-terminations,
100. It is most important to remember, that the formation of
every case in a Sanskrit noun supposes the application of a rule of
Sandhi or ‘junction ;? and that declension in Sanskrit is strictly
‘junction,’ ३, ९, not a divergence from an upright line (rectus), but
a joining together of a stem with its terminations,
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 83
101. Sometimes, however, before this joining together takes place,
the original final of the stem has to be changed to its Guna or
Vriddhi equivalent (see 27), or even to some other letter (see 41.
II-V), so that it will often be necessary to point out in what
manner the inflective stem (anga, see 135. c) varies from the original
stem (prdtipadika) ; and sometimes the original termination of the
scheme will have to be changed, as indicated at 97; thus, at 103,
under the Gen. du. Sivayos, Sive +08 denotes, that before the stem
Siva is joined to the termination os, the final letter a is to be changed
toe; and the reference 36. a, indicates the rule of Sandhi (explained
at 36. ®) which must come into operation in joining sive and os to-
gether. Similarly, when the original termination has to be modified,
the termination will be exhibited in its altered form; thus, at 103,
under the Ac. sing., Siva +m denotes, that the stem is to be joined
with m, substituted for the original termination am. See the table
at 97.
102. In declining the first model noun Siva, the stem with the sign +, and
after it the termination will be exhibited under each inflexion, and a reference
will be given to the number of the rule of Sandhi which must come into
operation. ५
In the other nouns the process of Sandhi will be explained when necessary,
along with the changes of the stem, immediately before the paradigms of declen-
sion, and in the paradigms a transliteration in Italic type will be generally given
immediately under the Sanskrit type.
Section I.—FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.
Inflexion of Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, whose stems end
in vowels.
First Cuass in स 0, std, and $7
This large class corresponds to a common class of Latin and Greek words in us
and 04) um and ov, a and @, e.g. lupu-s, AvKo-¢ (=Sk. vrika-s, Nom. of vrika)
donu-m, 0206-४ ; terra, 2८०00 (=dhard); and to adjectives like bonus. aryabos,
e.g. Sk. nava-s, navd, nava-m, ‘new,’=Lat. novu-s, nova, novu-m Gr. #€०-$ (for
veFo-s), Vea, ५६०४,
103. Masculine stems in a, like fyra Siva, m. ‘the god Siva,’ or
as an adjective, ‘ prosperous.’ `
M 2
84 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
The final of the stem is lengthened in D. Ab. sing., I. D. Ab. du., Ac. G. pl. 5
and changed to ¢ in G. L. वप्र, D. Ab. L. pl.: is euphonically affixed to the final
in G. pl. Hence the four inflective stems Siva, Sivd, Sive, Sivdn.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
- ee Sivas शिवौ Sivau शिवास् Sivds
Siva+s Swatau. See 33. Sivatas. See 31.
A | शिवम् Sivam — sivau शिवान् Sivdn
Siva+m £ Sivd-+n
1 i Sivena शिवाभ्याम् sivdbhydm = शिवेस् Sivais
Siva+ina. 32. Sind + bhydm Siva+ais. 33.
छ pee Sivdya ' — Sivdbhydm = शिवेभ्यत् sivebhyas
ˆ | Sivd+ya Sive+ bhyas
= poe Sivdt — Sivdbhyém — Sivebhyas
Sivd +t
ह | Sivasya शिवयोस् sivayos शिवानाम् 10470409
Siva sya Sive+os. 36. a. Siwvdn+dm
" ok sive — Sivayos शिवेषु Siveshu
ˆ | Swati. 32. Sive+su. 70.
pies शिवौ Sivau शिवास् Sivds
V. A ' ॐ
Siva(s dropped). 92, sivatau. 33. watas. 31.
Obs. —The Vedic I. sing. may end in @, e.g. sivd for sivena; N. Ac. du. may
end in d, e.g. Sivd for Sivau; N. pl. may end in dsas, e.g. Sivdsas for Sivds ; I. pl.
may end in ebhis, e.g. Sivebhis for fivais. Cf. ebhis, I. pl. of idam, 224.
104. Neuter stems in a, like शिव Siva, n. ‘ prosperity,’ or as an
adjective, ‘ prosperous.’
The fina] of the stem is lengthened and assumes x in N. Ac. ए. pl.
em शिवम् Sivam शिवे Sive शिवानि Sivdni
en | ण्य. 97. Siva+t. 32. Sivd-+-n+i
The Vocative is शिव Siva, शिवे Sive, शिवानि Sivdni; all the other
cases are like the masculine.
105. Feminine stems in क and £ like शिवा Sivd, £ ‘the wife of
Siva,’ or as an adjective, ‘prosperous,’ and नदी वदा, {£ ‘a river.’
Their declension is exhibited side by side that their analogy may
be more easily perceived.
In givd the final of the stem is changed to.e in I. sing., G. L. du.; yd is inserted
in D. Ab. ©. L. sing.; and ४ in G. pl. Hence the inflective stems givd, give. In
nad¢ the final is changed to y before the vowel-terminations by 34; द is in-
serted in D. Ab. G. L. sing.; and 2 in G. pl.; in V. sing. the final of the stem
is shortened.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 85
Junction of stem with termination: N. sing. $ rejected; N. du. sivd-+¢= Sive
by 32; N. pl. sivd + as = Sivds by 315 I. sing. sive + d= Sivayd by 36.a; D. sing.
Sivd-+yd+e= Sivdyai by 33; G. L. dul give +. 05 = Sivayos by 36.a. D. sing. nadé
++ e=nadyai by 34 and 33; L. pl. nadé + su=nadishu by 70.
SING. DUAL, PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
| ay शिषे शिवास् नदी नद्यौ नद्यस्
| 52४८ Sive Sivds nadt nadyau nadyas
sivdm —Sive Sivds nadim nadyau nadis
sa शिवाभ्याम् -शिवाभिस् | नद्या नदीभ्याम् नदीनिस्
Sivayd Sivdbhydm Sivdbhis nadyé nadibhyém nadibhis
4 | — शिवाभ्यस् | aa -- नदीभ्यस्
` [Sivdyat Sivdbhydm Ssivdbhyas | nadyai nadibhyém nadibhyas
ay. aT , -- is Ny = eae
"[Sivdyds Sivdbhydm Ssivdbhyas | nadyds nadibhyém nadibhyas
^ ere शिवयोस् शिवानाम् — Faq नदीनाम्
` | Sivdyds = 1४८05 11121 nadyds nadyos nadinédm
" 1 = शिवासु नद्याम् -- नदीषु
` | Sivdydm Sivayos —Sivdsu nadydm nadyos nadishu
y, (शिषे शिवे शिवास् नदि नद्यो Aaa
ˆ | Sive Sive Sivds nadi nadyau nadyas
Obs. 1. The Vedic I. sing. may be sivd for Sivayd; D. sing. sivai for sivdyai;
N. pl. sivdsas; ©. pl. Sivdm.
Obs. 2. The Vedic N. pl. of nouns in ¢ may end in 4s, e. g. nadés for nadyas.
106. Monosyllabic nouns in = £ like प्री £ ‘fortune,”it f. ‘fear,’ &c., vary from
nad¢ in the manner explained at 123.
107. In accordance with 58, such words as मृग mriga, m. ‘a deer ;’
पुरूष purusha, 71. ‘a man;’ नाये bhdryd, f. <a wife ;’ करुमासी kumdrt,
f. ‘a girl’—must be written, in the Inst. sing. m. and the Gen. pl.
m.f., with the cerebral mn; thus, मृगेण mrigena, पुरूषेण, मृगाणाम्,
पुरुषाणाम्, vraag, कुमारीणाम्. When z is final, as in the Ac. pl. m.,
it remains unchanged.
108. When a feminine noun ending in 4 forms the last member of a compound
adjective, it is declined like siva for the masc. and neut. Thus fr. vidyd, ‘learning,’
alpa-vidyas (m.), alpa-vidyd (६), alpa-vidyam (n.), ‘ possessed of little learning.’
Similarly, a masculine noun takes the fem. and neut. terminations; and a neut.
noun, the masc. and fem.
^ a. When roots ending in d, such as pd, " 10 drink’ or ‘to preserve,’ form the
last member of compound words, they assume the terminations at 91 regularly
86 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
for their masculine and feminine, rejecting, however, the final of the stem in Ac.
pl. and remaining Weak or vowel-cases; thus, सोमपा soma-pd, m.f. ‘a drinker of
Soma juice ;’ गप. ए. -पास्, -पौ, -पास्; Ac. -पाम्, -पौ, पस्; 1. -पा, -पाभ्याम्, &e.;
D.-4, &c. They form their neuter like that of ॐव, e.g. neut. N. Ac. फ सोमपम्,
-पे, -पानि, €८
Similarly, विश्पा ‘ protector of the universe,’ and शहुध्मा ‘a shell-blower.’
8. Analogously in Rig-veda rv. 9, 4,741 ‘a woman’ is in N, sing. ग्नास्.
९. Masculine nouns in ठ, like हारा hdhd, m. ‘a Gandharva,’ not derived from verbal
roots, assume the terminations with the regular euphonic changes, but the Ac. pl
ends in न्; thus, N. $. दाहास्, et, हाहास्; ^. ARTA, हारौ, हाहान् ; 1. हाहा
हाहाभ्याम्, ETNA, &९.; 7. हाहे, &०.; Ab. हाहास्, &८.; 0. ee, Tea,
हाहाम्; L. हारे, ९९.
९. The Voc. cases of HAT ambd, WR akkd, and WAT alld, all signifying ‘mother,’
are NH, WH, NA, ˆ 0 mother!’
€. दन्त m. ‘a tooth,’ ATH m. “a month,’ पाद् m. ‘a foot,’ युष m.n. ‘soup,’ स्रास्य
n. “the face,’ द्य n. ‘the heart,’ TE n. ‘water,’ WN n. ‘the head,’ मांस n. “flesh,”
fag f. ‘night,’ नासिका f. ‘the nose,’ पृतना ‘an army,’ are declined regularly,
but may substitute दत्, मास्, We, यूषन्, आसन्, इट्, उदन्, Wea, aia, निज्?
नस्, पृत् in the Ac. pl. and remaining cases (see 184). In the neut. nouns, the
Nom. pl. does not admit the same substitute as Ac. pl. Thus, उद् क will be Ac.
7. उदकानि or उदानि; 1. sing. उदकेन or उद्वा. Again, नासिका in I. du. will be
नासिकाभ्याम् or नोभ्याम्; and मांस, मां साभ्याम् or मान्भ्याम्,
109. To understand the importance of studying the declension
of this first class of nouns, the student has only to turn back to
pp. 57-68, where the formation of the stems of nouns, substantive
and adjective, which follow this declension, is explained. All mascu-
line and neuter substantives in this list are declined like Siva, and
all feminine either like Sivé or nadi, all the adjectives following the
same three examples for their three genders.
Seconp Cuass in gz Turrp Crass in उ ५.
The inflexion of the 2nd and grd classes of nouns (see 81, 82) is exhibited side
by side, that their analogy may be more readily perceived
The 2nd answers to Latin and Greek words like igni-s, turri-s, 76१८-५, व (0 व,
mare, (५६०८ ; the 3rd, to words like gradu-s, cornu, Borpu-s, mdv-s, (८६७४.
110. Masculine stems in इ ४ and उ u, like सग्नि agni, m. (ignis),
‘fire ;’ भानु bhdnu, m. ‘the sun.’
The final of the stem is gunated in D. Ab. G. V. sing., पि, pl.; lengthened in
N, Ac. V. du., Ac. ©. pl.; dropped in L. sing., or, according to Panini, changed
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 87
toa; nis inserted in I. sing., ©. pl. Hence the inflective stems agni, agnt, agne, agn;
bhanu, bhdni, bhdno, bhdn; according to some the Locative of bhdnu was originally
bhdnavi (such a form occurring in the Veda), and i being dropped, bhdnav would
become bhdndv (bhdnau).
Junction of stem with termination: V. sing., N. Ac. V. du., case-termination
rejected; N. pl. agne-+-as=agnayas by 36.a; D. sing. agne+e=agnaye, 36.4;
G. L. du. agni+os=agnyos, 34; L. pl. agni+su-agnishu, jo. Similarly, N. pl.
bhdno + as = bhdnavas, 36.a; D. sing. bhdno+e= bhdnave, 36. ¢; G. L. du.
bhdnu + os = bhdnvos, 34; L. pl. bhdnu+su=bhdnushu, 70.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
ee अग्निस् अग्नी अग्नयस् भानुस् भानू , भानवस्
agnis agni agnayas | bhdnus bhént bhénavas
a Ses
agnim agni agnin bhdnum bhant 0040110
jatar afar सग्निनिस् | भानुना भानुभ्याम् भानुभिस्
|agnind agnibhydm agnibhis | bhdnund bhdénubhydm bhdnubhis
Way a अग्निभ्यस् भानवे भानुभ्यस्
agnaye agnibhydm agnibhyas bhdnave bhanubhydm bhanubhyas
a pees ew ana भानोस् — म
agnes agnibhydm agnibhyas | 6040005 bhdnubhydm 00400060/04/48
ष 1 wag wat | — भान्वोस् भानूनाम्
041९5 agnyos agnindm | 6040105 bhdnves 1/1, 1114.
प ॥ — सग्निषु भानो — भानुषु
agnau agnyos agnishu bhdénau 00८70005 bhanushu
% अग्ने ग्नी अग्नयस् |भानो भानू भानवस्
ˆ | 442 व agnayas | 97480 = ९0 bhanavas
111. The Vedic Gen. sing. may be bhdnvas, which form may also serve for the
Nom. and Ac. pl.
112. Feminine stems in इ ४ and उ ४, like मति mati, { ‘the mind,’
and धेनु dhenu, f. ‘a milch cow.’
The final of the stem is gunated in D. Ab. G. V. sing., N. pl
N. Ac. V. du., Ac. ©. pl.
n is inserted in G. pl.
dheni, dheno, dhen.
dropped in L. sing. (unless the termination be
Hence the inflective stems mati, mati, mate, mat
lengthened in
नम्);
dhenu,
The junction of stem with termination is generally the same as in the mascu-
lines agni and bhdnu. Inst. sing. mati+d= matyd, 34; D. mate+e=mataye, 36. ५;
mati+dé+e=matyai, 33.
88
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
> मतिस् मती । मतयस् धेनुस् भतू , धेनवस्
matis mati matayas | dhenus dheni. dhenavas
मतिम् -- मतीस् धेनुम् — धेनूस्
matim mati matis dhenum dheni. dhents
मत्या मतिभ्याम् मतिभिस् | धेन्वा धेनुभ्याम् धेनुभिस्
matyd matibhydm matibhis | dhenvd dhenubhydm dhenubhis
p, { म्ये or मये -- मतिभ्यस् | धेनवे or TA -- धेनुभ्यस्
mataye or°tyai matibhydm matibhyas | dhenave or°nvai dhenubhydm dhenubhyas
ap, { मतेस् OF मत्यास् --- -- धेनोस् or ेन्वास्. -- =
mates or tyds matibhydm matibhyas | dhenos or°nvds dhenubhydm dhenubhyas
0 मत्योस् मतीनाम् = we धेनूनाम् ,
mates or °tyds matyos matindm | dhenos or °nvds dhenvos dheniindm
1 {मतौ ण मायाम् , — मतिषु धेनो ण धेन्वाम् -- धेनुषु
matauorctydm matyos matishu.70.| dhenauor°nvdm dhenvos dhenushu, 70.
= मती मतयस् धेनो धेनू धेनवस्
mate mati matayas | dheno dhent dhenavas
With the optional forms in D. Ab. G. L. sing., compare similar forms in the same
cases of धय.
113. The Vedic Nom. pl. may be dhenvas.
114. Neuter stems in इ £ and gu, like वारि véri, n. ‘water, and मधु
madhu, 7. ‘honey’ (५६6४).
The stem inserts n before the vowel-terminations, and the final is lengthened in N. Ac.
V.and G.pl. Hence the inflective stems vdri, एरक madhu, madhi.
SING, DUAL. PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL,
N. (वारि वारिणी वारीणि मधु मधुनी मधूनि
Ac. ( vdri vdrint. 58. vdrini madhu madhunt madhini
वारिणा वारिभ्याम् वारिभिस् मधुना मधुभ्याम् मधुभिस्
४८ —s vdribhydm varibhis madhund madhubhydm madhubhis
4 | चारिणे -- वारिभ्यस् मधुने — मधुभ्यस्
* | vdrine vdribhydm varibhyas | madhune madhubhydm madhubhyas
ap) वारिणिस् = = मधुनस् = =
‘lvdrinas vdribhydm vadribhyas | madhunas madhubhydm madhubhyas
01 व
१1029 vdrinos == ०८१0470. 58. | madhunas madhunos madhindm
i, {वारिणि -- वारु मधुनि = मधुषु
“ ( vdrini vdrinos == ०८११९१४. 70. | madhuni madhunos madhushu. 70.
y, {वारिण वारे वार्णी वासणि मधु or मधो मधुनी मधूनि
“ | ४८70४०८ ध vdrini madhu or madho madhunt madhint
115. The Vedic Ac. pl. may be madhi.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 89
116. Neuter nouns ini and ४ follow the analogy of nouns in in at 159, except
in G. plur. and V. sing. ॥
०. सानु प. ‘summit,’ ‘ridge,’ optionally substitutes सु in all cases except the first
five inflexions.
117. There are not many substantives declined like agni and vdri (81), but
nouns like mati are numerous (81. II). Moreover, adjectives like sudi, and com-
pound adjectives in 7, are declined like agni in masc., like mati in fem., and like
vdri in neut.
_ 118. Again, there are few substantives declined like dhenu and madhu, yet many
simple adjectives like tanu and pipdsu (82), all compound adjectives in u, are de-
clined like bhdnu in the masc., like dhenu in the fem., and like madhu in the neut.
a. Many adjectives in u, however, either optionally or necessarily follow nadé in
fem.; as, fanu, ‘thin,’ makes Nom. fem. either tanus or tanvt ; मृदुः (लाता makes
Nom. f. मृद्धी mridvt; and TR, “heavy,” गुर्वी gurvt ; and some optionally lengthen
u in the fem.; as, bhéru, ‘timid,’ makes fem. भीर् or भीरू, declinable like nouns
in ४, 125.
119. When feminine nouns in i and ४ form the last member of a compound
adjective, they must be declined like agni in masc., and vdri in neut. Thus alpa-
mati, ‘narrow-minded,’ in the Ac. plur. masc. would be alpa-matin; fem. alpa-
mats; neut. alpa-matini.
Similarly, a masc. or neut. noun, at the end of a comp., may take a fem. form.
a. Although adjectives in द and ४ are declined like vdri and madhu for the neut.,
yet in the D. Ab. G. L. sing., and in the G. L. du., they may optionally follow
the masculine form; thus sud and tanu will be, in D. sing. neut., शुषिने or शुचये,
नुने or तनवे; and so with the other cases.
120. सखि sakhi, m. ‘a friend,’ has two stems, WATT for the Strong cases (see
135.4), and सखि for the others; thus, N, सखा, सखायो, सलायस् ; Ac. सखायम्,
सखायो, सखीन् ; 1. सख्या, सखिभ्याम्, सखिभिस्; D. सख्ये, सखिभ्याम्, सखिभ्यस्;
Ab. Faq, सखिभ्याम्, सखिभ्यस् ; 0. सख्युस्, सख्योस्, सखी नाम्; L. सख्यो, सस्योस्,
सखिषु; Vv. सखे, सखायो, सखायस्. Hence it appears that sakhi in some cases
assumes the terminations at 91 more regularly than agni. In the rest it follows
agni.
Obs.—The feminine सखी, ‘a female friend,’ is declined like नदी.
121. पिं m. ‘a master,’ ‘lord’ (7८०८५), when not used in a compound word,
follows sakhi at 120 in I. D. Ab. G. L. sing. (thus, I. WaT, D. aa, Ab. G. Waa,
L. पत्यो); in the other cases, agni. But pati is more usually found at the end of
compounds, and then follows agni throughout (thus, भूपतिना ‘by the lord of the
earth ’). ।
Obs.—The feminine of पति is Wat pain, declinable like नदी.
122. A few neuter nouns, Sf n.‘a bone’ (0०7६०)), अक्ति ए. ‘an eye’ (oculus,
८८८५), सकि 0. ‘a thigh,’ दधि. ‘coagulated milk,’ drop their final ४ in I. sing. and
remaining weak or vowel-cases, and are declined in those cases as if derived from
obsolete forms in an, such as NWI, &c. (cf. mdman at 152); thus,
N
90 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
wafer ‘a bone:’ N.V. Ac. Seq, Bharat, अस्यीनि; 1. सस्या, सस्थिभ्याम्, &.;
7. FS, चस्थिभ्याम्, &.; Ab. WY, &e.; ५. AYR, WH, सस्थाम् ; L. whey
or अस्यनि, चस्थोस्, सस्थिषु.
Hence, खि, ‘an eye,’ will be in I. sing. हणा; in D. WRT, &०. (see 58).
Nouns ending in $i and क प.
123. Besides the feminines of adjectives and participles, &c.,
declined like nadé at 105 (cf. 80, XI), there are a few common
monosyllabic words in long $7 (generally roots used as substantives)
primitively feminine, i.e. not derived from masculine substantives
(see 82. XV), whose declension must be noticed separately. They
vary from the declension of नदी (105) by forming the Nom. with स्,
and using the same form for the Voc., and by changing the final 7
to iy before the vowel-terminations; thus,
प्री ‘prosperity :’ N.V. श्रीस्; श्रियो, foamy 5 Ac. foram, fora, frag ;
1. form, श्रीभ्याम्, ्रीभिस्; D. धिये or ford, whem, hag; Ab. धियस् or
धियस्, whem, श्रीभ्यस्; 0. धियस् or च्ियास्, fatty, fray or च्रीणाम्;
L. farfa or foram, च्ियोस्, ate.
a, Similarly, wif. ‘fear, Zt f. ‘shame,’ and Ut £. ‘understanding ;’ thus, N.V.
भीस्, भियो, भियस् ; 4०. FAM, &०.; 1. भिया, &८.; D. भिये or भिये, &e.
2. स्त्री £, ‘a woman’ (not being itself a root like the examples above), follows
नदी in N: ए. sing., and varies also in other respects; thus, N. सत्री, स्त्रियो, स्त्रियस्;
V. fea, स्त्रियो, स्त्रियस्; Ac. स्त्रीम् or स्त्रियम्, स्त्रियो, tata or स्त्रियस् ; 1. स्त्रिया,
स्त्रीभ्याम्, स्त्रीभिस्; 7. स्त्रिये, स्त्रीभ्याम्, स््रीभ्यस् ; Ab. स्त्रियास्, स्त्रीभ्याम्, PT;
G. स्त्रियास्, स्तरियोस्, स्त्रीणाम्; 1.. स्त्रियाम्, स्त्रियो्, स्त्रीषु.
As the last member of a compound adjective, it shortens its final, and in some of
its cases follows agni and mati; e.g.
सिस m.f.n. ‘surpassing a woman:’ N. mase. -स्त्िस्, -स्ियो, ~स्त्रयस् ; Ac.
FEAR or -स्त्रियम्, -स्तरियो, -सत्रीन् or -स्त्रियस्; 1. -स्तरिणा, -स्तिभ्याम्, &e.; 7. -स््रये,
&०.; Ab. स्त्र्, &e.; G. -सत्रेम्, -स्तरिपोस्, -सत्रीणाम्; 1.. -सतरौ, ९९.; ४. -स्त्रे, &०.
The fem. form is like the ४३९. but Ac. pl. “ATA or -स्त्ियस्; 1. -स्त्रिया; D. -स््रिये
or -स्त्रये; Ab. -स्त्ियास् or -स्त्रेस्, &c. For neut., see 126. j.
124. A few primitively feminine words not monosyllabic, such as लसी ‘the
goddess of prosperity,’ Wet ‘a lute-string,’ तरी ‘a boat,’ like Wt, take s in the
Nom. sing., but in other respects follow Wet; thus, N. लष्छीस्, BET, Sag;
Ac, BRN, &c.; V. त्ष्सि.
Obs.—Analogously in the Veda वृकी “a she-wolf? (Rig-v. I. 1 17, 18), and (accord-
ing to some authorities) सिंही “a lioness,’ make N. sing. वृकीस्, सिहीस्
But गोरी £. ‘the brilliant (goddess),’ as a derivative fem. noun, is N. sing. mt
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 91
125. Feminine nouns in long ऊ ४, not monosyllabic, are declined
like primitively feminine nouns of more than one syllable in § ¢, i.e.
like mw, they follow the analogy of nadé except in N. sing., where
$ 18 retained. In the other cases ऊ ४ becomes v, wherever $7 is
changed to y (see 34); thus,
` wyta wife’ पि. वधूस्, aeat, वध्वस्; Ac. वधूम्, Teal, वधूस् ; 1. वध्ना,
वधूभ्याम्” Tyra; D. वध्वै, वधून्याम्, वधूभ्यस् ; Ab. वध्वास्, वधूभ्याम्, TPA;
©. वध्नास्, वध्नोस्, वधूनाम् ; L. वध्वाम्, Teta, वधूषु; ए. वधु, वध्वो, वध्वस्.
Similarly, चमू f. ‘a 1081; aq f. ‘a mother-in-law.’
a, Again, monosyllabic words in % primitively feminine are de-
clined analogously to wt f. at 123; ४ being changed to wv, wherever
६ is changed to iy; thus,
wf. ‘the earth:’ N.V. aq, भुवो, भुवस्; Ac. भुवम्; भुवो, zag; 1. भुवा,
भूभ्याम्, श्रूभिस् ; 1). भुवे or भुवे, wpa, भूभ्यस्; Ab. भुवस् or Yara, भूभ्याम्,
pag; ©. श्ुवस् or Yara, शुवोस्, भुवाम् ०" भू नाम्; L. भुवि or Yay, WRG, भूषु.
Observe that the ४. is like the N.
b. Similarly, yf ‘the eye-brow’ (dps): N.V. wa, wat, भुवस्, &e.
126. Roots of one syllable ending in ६ and ४, used as 11880, or fem. nouns, follow
the declension of monosyllabic words in £ and @, such as ची at 123 and Wat 125.4;
but in the D. Ab. G. L. sing., G. pl., take only the first inflexion; thus,
क्री m. f., ‘one who buys,’ makes D. faa only for m. and f., and @ ण. f., ‘a
reaper,’ makes D. aa only for m. and f.
a. The same generally holds good if they have adjectives prefixed to them;
thus, WHAT ८.६. "the best buyer’ (N. ए. -क्रीस्, -क्रियो, -क्रियस् ; Ac. -क्रियम्, &०.)
४. And when they are compounded with another noun as a dependent term they
generally change their final ¢ and ४ to y and v, before vowel-terminations, and not
to iy and wv (unless £ and ४ are preceded by a double consonant, as in यवक्री ‘a buyer
of barley’), thus conforming more to the declension of polysyllables ; €. g.
MBA (for ASIAN) m. f., ‘a water-drinker,’ makes N. V. जल्पीस्; -प्यो, -प्यस्;
Ac. AHWR, -प्यो, -प्यस्; 1. जप्या, -पीभ्याम्, &८.; 7. जले, &०.; Ab. नलप्यस्,
&c.; ©. Way, -प्पोस्, &c.; L. जक्षि (in opposition to 31), &०.
So 8180, खेत्टपू m. f. ‘a sweeper :’ पि. ४. खंठपूस्; -प्वो, -प्वस्; Ac. THAR, &e.;
1. Baal, &.; L. Bata, &e.: Yes ‘one who cuts well;’ N.V. FSA, -स्वो, “aa.
९. Similarly, aany m. f. ‘a frog,’ End m. ‘a thunderbolt,’ करू ०१. ‘a finger-
nail,’ JAE m. f. ‘born again’ (प.प. JAGR; Ac. FIA, &o. 5 1. -भ्वी; D. FF; Ab.
G. -भ्वेस्, -भ्वि. But if the sense is limited to a distinct female object, as ‘a virgin
widow remarried,’ the D. will be a; Ab. G. -भ्वीस्; L. भ्वम्, like वधू).
d. Similarly also, सेनानी m. ‘a general,’ ग्रामणी m. f. ‘the chief of a village ;’
but these, like नंदी, take dm for the termination of the L. sing. even in masc. ;
thus, N,V. सेनानीस्, -न्यो, -न्यस् ; Ac. -न्यम्, &०.; 1-71; 1.. सेनान्याम्, सेनान्योस्,
N 2
92 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
सेनानीषु, &c. This applies also to the simple noun नी m. f. ‘a leader,’ but the
final becomes iy before vowel-terminations. ।
। e But स्वयम्बू and सन्त् 7. “gelf-existent,’ as a name of Brahma, follow J at
125. a, taking only the first inflexions; thus, D. -J4; Ab. “Wag, & ९,
` f. Masculine non-compounds in ६ and ४ of more than one syllable, like पपी m.
“who drinks’ or ‘cherishes,’ ‘the sun,’ Fz m. ‘a Gandharva,’ follow oUt and
Woy at 126.b, except in Ac. sing. and pl.; thus, N. V. पपीस्; पथ्यो, ama; Ac.
quia, पप्पो 5 पपीन्; and in L. sing: the final ¢ combines with the i of the termination
into ¢ (31), not into yi; thus, L. sing. पपी (but इद्धि from ¥¥). Again, वातप्रमी
m. ‘an antelope’ (surpassing the wind), as a compound, may follow जप ; but
Vopadeva makes Ac. sing. and pl. follow Wt. When such nouns have a feminine,
the Ac. pl. ends in s; thus ATS m. f., ४ tawny,’ makes ATS for the Ac. pl. fem.
g. A word like Wit f. ‘superior understanding’ (formed from the compound
verb प्रध्ये), when used as a fem. noun, is treated as a polysyllable, and follows
West, except in D. Ab., &c., where it takes the second inflexions (D. sing. प्रध्ये,
&c.) But when used adjectively, in the sense ‘having superior understanding,’
it follows जलपी throughout, both for masc. and fem., but may optionally for the
fem. be declined like the fem. substantive. The Voc. fem. may be प्रधीस् or प्रधि.
Two rare nouns, मुखी “one who loves pleasure’ and gat “one who wishes for a
son,’ also follow जल्पी, but in Ab. ©. sing. make सुख्युस्, Fas
h. Monosyllabic nouns primitively feminine (like भी, धी, प्री, at 123,
Wf. ‘the eye-brow’), forming the last member of a compound adjective, still follow
the declension of monosyllables, but use the first inflexions only in the D. Ab. G.
IL. cases and G. कापा, for the masc., and may optionally use them for the fem. ;
thus, N. गतभीस् 7, £, ‘fearless,’ is गतभिये only in D. sing. m., -भिये or -भिये in
D. sing. f. So also, gut m. f, ‘intelligent,’ शुद्धधी m. f. “having pure thoughts,’
gut m. f. ‘stupid,’ qat m. f. ‘having good fortune,’ Wim. f. ‘having beautiful
brows ;* thus, N. ए. सुभ्रूम्? -भुवो, -शरुवस्; Ac. WIM, &८. According to Vopadeva,
the Voc. f. may be सुश्रु, and this form occurs once in the Bhatti-kavya.
४, Words necessarily feminine (nitya-strt-linga), such as kumar, ‘a girl,’ Gaurd,
“the goddess Gauri,’ &०. (not ४९ ग्रामणी , which may be masc. and fem.), retain
their nadf character (Pan. 1. 4, 3), even though they afterwards assume another
sense which makes them masculine. This may happen in a compound, as in
बहुप्रेयसी m.‘ a man of many excellences:’ N. बहु प्रेयसी, -स्यो, -स्यस् 3 Ve -fa,
&९.; Ac. -सीम्, -स्यो, -सीन्; 1. -स्या, -सीभ्याम्, &०.; 7. -स्यै, &९.; Ab. G. -स्यास्,
&e.; L “Ba, &e.
। Or in words not compounded, as jn ATT ‘a man who acts like a girl,’ N. masc.
कुमारी. But these differ in Ac. sing. and pl. (कुमायेम्, कुमायेस्) Cf. the name
Gopdla-sarasvatt in Sanskrit-English Dictionary.
Also like bahu-Sreyast (but N. sing. will end in स्), सतिलषमी m. f. ‘one who has
surpassed Lakshm\i,’ साच्च षमी m. f.‘ deprived of fortune,’ सतिचम् m. f. ‘victorious
over hosts’ (प, SFA SAR, -म्वो, -म्बस्; ए. -पु; Ac. -मूम्,-म्बो, भून्, Ac. pl. f. AR;
I. म्वा, -मूभ्याम्, &९.; 7. -म्वे, &९.; Ab. -म्बास्, & ५.) ; but these three may follow
Vopadeva’s declension of वातप्रमी at 126. f. .
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 93
Jj. Adjectives ending in ¢ and 7 shorten the final vowel for the neuter, and follow
vdri; but in the I. D, Ab. G. and L. cases they may optionally take the masc.
terminations; thus, N. ए. sing. neut. 7aft; 1. गतनिना or गतभिया; D. गतभिने
or गतभिये, &८. प. ए. Ac. sing. THAT; 1. नलपिना or WT, &९. N.V. Ac. WHY;
-पुना or -WT. पि. ए. Ac. बहुश्रेयसि; 1. -प्रेयसिना or -च्रेयस्या ; 7. -घ्रेयसिने or
“WT, ९९. प. ४. ५५. ग्रामणि; 1. -णिना or -ण्या.
0 एषणा (11.488 in ¥ si
This class answers to dornp, TAT Hp, pater, &c.; ri being equivalent to ar: and
it is remarkable, that ddtdram, ddtdras, &c., bear the same relation to pitaram,
pitaras, &c., that Sorypa, Sorjpes, Sorigps, &c., bear to Tatépa, TaTEpEs, TaTEpi,
&c. Compare also the Latin datoris from dator with patris from pater.
127. Masculine stems in 7%, like दातु ddtri, पा, ‘a giver,’ and fag
pitri, m. ‘a father.’ The former is the model of nouns of agency
(83); the latter, of nouns of relationship.
In nouns of agency like ddtri the final ri is vriddhied (28), and in nouns of
relationship like pitri (except naptri, ‘a grandson,’ and svasri, ‘a sister’) gunated, in
the Strong cases (see 135); but the # of dr and ar is dropped in N. sing., and to
compensate in the last case a is lengthened. In both, the final ri is gunated in
L. V. sing., and wr is substituted for final ri and the initial a of as in Ab. G. sing.
In Ac. G. pl. final ri is lengthened, and assumes n in G. pl. Hence the inflective
stems datri, ddtdr, ddtar, ddirt, ddtur ; pitri, pitar, pitrt, pitur.
Junction of stem with terminations: s is elided at the end of a conjunct conso-
nant after r; hence in Ab. ©. ddturs and piturs become ddtur and pitur. See 41.1.°
SING, DUAL. PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL,
दात्रा दातासे दातारम् पिता पितरो पितरस्
ddté ddtérau ddtdras pité = pitarau _pitaras
दातारम् दातृन् पितरम् -- पितृन्
ddtéram ddtdrau — datrin pitaram pitarau _—pitrin
दावा दातुभ्याम् दातुनिस् frat पितृभ्याम् पितृभिस्
11 ddtribhydm ddtribhis pitré _pitribhydm pitribhis
p, { दावे = दातृभ्यस् पिते -- पितृभ्यस्
01८ dédtribhydm datribhyas pitre _pitribhydm pitribhyas
५). ts = न पिर = शः
0] ddtur ddtribhydm datribhyas pitur _pitribhydm pitribhyas
० ee OS ile ee
détur _ddtros ddtrindm, 58. | pitur _—_pitros pitrindm. 58.
दातरि दातुषु पितरि - पितृषु
| ddtart ddtros ddtrishu. 70. | pitari pitros pitrishu, 70.
fem aad दातारस् पितर् पितरो पितरस्
détar ddtdrau détdras pitar pitarau pitaras
94 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
128. Pitri seems to be a weakened form of pdtri, ‘a protector’ (pd, “to protect’).
The cognate languages have preserved the root in Tarp, pater, ‘father,’ &c.
The Latin Jupiter, however, is literally Dyu-pitar, or rather Dyaush-pitar, ‘ father
of heaven.’ It is clear that stems like ddtri, pitri, &c., originally ended in ar.
a, AF naptri, ‘a grandson’ (thought by some to be derived from na, ‘ not,’ and
pétri, ‘a protector’), is declined like दात ddtri.
b. There are a few nouns in ri expressing neither relationship nor agency.
नृ nri, Mm. “a man,’ is said to be declined like pitri; thus, N. नां nd, Ac. नसम्?
I. चा, 1). चे, Ab. 0. नुर्, &c. But the forms चराः चे, सुर् are seldom, if ever, used.
The following forms certainly occur: N. sing. ना, Ac. नरन्; N. Ac. du. aa,
1. 7. Ab. नृभ्याम्, G. L. नरोष्; प. pl. नरस्, Ac. नृन्, D. Ab. PAA, G. नृणाम् or
नृणाम्, L. नृषु In the I. D. ©. L. sing., the corresponding cases of नर् are gene-
rally substituted.
©, wg m., ‘a jackal,’ must form its Strong cases (except V. sing.) and may form
its Weak cases (135) from ALE N. क्रोष्टा, -ष्टारो, -ष्टारस्; Ac. -BTTA, -ष्टाये, “Eq
or टन्; 1. -षटा ० -QAT, -षटभ्याम्, &९.; D.-B or BA, &c.3 Ab. -BLor -BVA, &e.s
G. -BZ or -टोस्, -ष्टोस् or -षटोस्, -षटणाम् or -FATH; L. -्रि or ष्टो, &c.; ए. -्ो.
As the last member of a compound adjective, in the neuter, Eat alone is used.
व. Nouns like QJ m. “a charioteer,’ त्वष्ट प. “a carpenter,’ नेष m., दोतृ m., wy
m. ° different kinds of priests,’ ag m. ‘a warrior,’ of course, follow ddtri. But
wag m., ‘a charioteer,’ follows pitri.
129. Feminine stems in 7i belong to nouns of relationship,
like mdéri, ‘a mother’ (from md, ‘to create,’ ‘the producer’); and
only differ from pitri in Ac. pl., which ends in ¢ instead of n;
thus, मातृस्. Compare untnp, untépa, Voc. wirep.
a. स्वसु svasri, “a sister,’ exceptionally follows alg ddtri; but the Ac. pl. is still
WA. The lengthening of the penultimate in the Strong cases is probably caused
by the loss of the दं from tri, preserved in the English sister. So soror for sostor.
b. The feminine stem of nouns of agency is formed by adding $
to the final = i; thus, दातु + &, दात्री ddéré, f.‘a giver;? and कतत + ई,
wat f.‘a doer. Their inflexion follows nadi at 105.
130. The neuter stem is thus declined: N. Ac. दातृ, दातृणी, दातृणि; V. दातर् or
दातु. The rest may conform to vari at 114, or resemble the masc.; thus, I. दत्ता
or दातृणा, &c. But neuter stems in क्रु ri belong generally to nouns of agency or
of relationship, when used at the end of compound adjectives, such as बहुदावृ bahu-
ddtri, ‘giving much,’ or दिव्यमात divya-mdtri, agreeing with neuter words like
कुलम्; 1.९. ‘a family having a divine mother,’ or fang “having two mothers ’
(compare 01491740). Their declension may resemble that of vdri at 114, or con-
form to the masc. in all cases but the N.V.Ac.; thus, N. Ac. दातुः दातृणी, दातृणि;
४. दातृ or दातर्, &८९.; 1. दातृणा or दावा, &८.; 7. दातृणे or दाते, &०.; Ab. G. दातृणस्
or दातुर्, &९.; L. दातृणि or ATMA, &०. र. Ac. -मातृ, -मातृणी, -मातृणि; ४. -मातृ
or ~ATAT, &c.; 1. -मातृणा or -मात्रा, &c.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 95
Nouns ending in 2 ai, SY ०, @ au.
131. We may notice here a few monosyllabic nouns in रे, श्रो,
and wt, not sufficiently numerous to form separate classes.
132. X rai, m. £, ‘ substance,’ ‘wealth’ (Lat. res): वि. भ. राम्, यो, रायस्; Ac.
रायम्, &८.; 1. TAT, राभ्याम्, TNA (००५७); 7. णये, राभ्याम्, TAR; Ad. रायस्,
&९.; ७. यस्, TAY, रायाम्; 1.. रयि, wate, रामु.
133. गो go, m. £. “a cow’ or ‘ox’ (bos, Bais), ‘the earth.’ N. V. गोस्, गावौ,
गावस्; Ac. गाम्, गावो, गास्; 1. गवा, गोभ्याम्, गोभिस् ; 7. गवे, &e.; Ab. गोस्, &०.;
6. गोस्, TAA, गवाम् ; L. गवि (2०४), TATA, गोषु. Compare गाम् with yi.
a, चो dyo, ६ ‘the sky,’ follows गो; thus, N.V. द्यस्, द्यावो, ITAA; Ac. याम्,
द्यावो, द्यास्; 1. चवा, MMM, MWY; D. चे, &e. The Vedic N. du, is द्यावा.
134. नौ naw, £ ‘a ship’ (cf. navis, ४०४५), is declined at 94, taking the termina-
tions with perfect regularity. With the N. pl. ndvas, compare naves, vies (vijes).
The gen. vy0 for vatos or vaFos = ndvas.
Similarly may be declined गो m. ‘the moon:’ N. glaus, gldvau, 74005, &८.
a. The above nouns sometimes occur at the end of compounds; as, बहुरे “rich,”
N. m. f. बहुस्, &९.; बहुनो “having many ships,’ N. m. f. वडुनोस्, &c. The
neuter is बहुरि > TY; of which the Inst. cases will be बहुरिणा, बंहुतुना ; and so
with the other cases: the masc. forms being equally allowable in बहुरि throughout,
except in N, Ac. V. sing. du. pl.; e.g. बहुरिणा or FETA.
b. In the case of go, “a cow,’ the compound seems always formed with gu; e.g.
dvi-gu, us, us, u, ‘worth two cows;’ paidéa-gu, ‘bought with five cows;’ sata-gu,
“ possessing a hundred cows.’
Section II.—LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.
Inflexion of Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, whose stems end
in consonants.
135. The last four classes of nouns, though including substantives,
consist chiefly of adjectives, participles, or roots at the end of adjective
compounds. All masc. and fem. nouns under these remaining classes
regularly take the terminations at 971. Neut. nouns take the substi-
tutions at 97 in पि. Ac. du. pl.
a, The case-terminations are here repeated with Bopp’s division
into Strong, Weaker, and Weakest, as applicable especially to nouns
ending in consonants (though not to all of these even), The Strong
cases will be here denoted by the letter S; the Weaker, sometimes
called Middle, will be denoted by M; and the Weakest by w. In
those nouns which distinguish between Strong and Weak cases only,
the Weak will be marked by both M and w.
96 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
Not You: ae (S), (Neut. M) sew (8), (N: snk w) अस् ८5 (3), (N an S)
Acc. न् am (8), (Neut.M) —au(S), (Neut.w) — as(w), (Neut. 9)
Inst. स ¢ (w) भ्याम् bhydém (M) भिस् bhis (M)
Dat. ze (ण) — bhyim(M) भ्यस् bhyas (M)
Abl. अस् as (w) — bhydm (M) = — bhyas (M)
Gen. — as (w) ओस् os (ण) माम् dm (ण)
Loc. इ £ (w) — os (w) मु su (M)
The Vocative, though identical with the Nom. in the dual and
plural, has sometimes a peculiar form of its own in the singular
(see 92).
९. Panini always considers the Nom. sing. masc. as having the termination s,
which is supposed to retain its effect, though it experiences dopa (cutting off); but
in the N. Ac. Voe. sing. neut. there is luk of the terminations ऽ and am, i.e. these
terminations disappear altogether (Pan. vit. 1, 23).
c. The terms anga, pada, bha (the first two of which have also
general meanings, see 74 with note) are applied in a restricted sense
to different forms of the Pratipadika or stem as modified by the
above terminations. or by suffixes; thus, the stem is called anga
before the terminations of the so-called Strong cases or Pénini’s
sarva-ndma-sthdna (viz. the Nom. sing. du. pl., Ac. sing. and du.
of masc. and fem. nouns, and the Nom. and Ac. pl. of neuter nouns,
see the above table); pada* before the terminations of the Middle
cases (viz. bhydm, bhis, bhyas, and su), as well as before Taddhita
suffixes beginning with any consonant except y (Pan. 1. 4, 17);
bha before the terminations of the Weak cases beginning with vowels
(except of course the anga terminations mentioned above), as well
as before Taddhita suffixes beginning with vowels and y (see Pan.
1. 4, 18).
d. A stem is made strong by lengthening the vowel of the last
syllable, or by inserting a nasal, e.g. yuvan, yuvdn; dhanavat, dha-
navant: and made weak by eliminating one or more letters, €, g.
yuvan, yin; pratyand, pratté.,
€. It should be noted that the Ac. pl., and in neuter nouns the
* Probably so called because the laws of Sandhi which come into operation at
the junction of separate words (pada) in a sentence generally hold good before
the terminations of the Middle cases.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 97"
Tnst. sing., is generally the guide to the form assumed, before the
remaining vowel-terminations.
J. This division of cases has not been noticed before, because it
is of no real importance for stems ending in vowels. That it applies
to stems ending in fi is accounted for by the fact that these originally
ended in ar.
Firrn Cuass in त् and ठ् थ.
This class answers to Latin words like comes (stem comit-), eques (stem equit-),
Ferens (stem ferent-); and to Greek words like yapés (stem YapsT-), KEpas (stem
kepar~), emis (stem eAms0-), yapiers (stem Yaprert-)
136. Masculine and feminine stems in त् £ and @ d, like eftq harit,
m. f, ‘green’ (declined at 95), and सरित् sarit, f. ‘a river,” and the
compound wafae dharma-vid, m. f. ‘knowing one’s duty’ (see 84. IV)
Observe—The Nom. sing. is properly harits, dharma-vits, but s is rejected by
41.1. The same applies to all nouns ending in consonants. So aidypey for
aidypovs. Latin and Greek, when the final of the stem refuses to combine with
the s of the Nom., often prefer rejecting the final of the stem; thus, 2८24206 for
2८42476, comes for comits; and in these languages the final consonant frequently
combines with the s of the Nom., as in lew (for leks), PAGE (for PAoKs)
SING. DUAL. PLURAL SING. DUAL. PLURAL,
woe oT. eo. 2
sarit = saritau saritas -vit ~vidau -vidas
‘ 1 न= न्न , | विहन् = aa
५ (saritam saritaw saritas -vidam -vidau ~vidas
: सरिति सख््ाम् सरिद्धिस् -विदा -विद्याम् -विद्धिस्
sarité saridbhydm saridbhis -vida -—vidbhydm -vidbhis
p, {सषि -- सस््िस् -बिदे -- -विद्यस्
“ Vsarite saridbhydm saridbhyas | -vide -vidbhydm -vidbhyas,
as । = = "विदम् -- क
ˆ )saritas saridbhyém saridbhyas | -vidas -vidbhydm -vidbhyas
— सरितोस् सरिताम् — -विदोष् -षिदान्
त 1 saritas 500 saritdm -vidas -vidos -viddm.
_ (सरिति -- afc -fafe -- -वित्सु
1 1 sariti कवा saritsu vidi -vidos -vitsu:
137. Neuter stems in त् £ and ठ् ¢, like हर् harit, n. ‘green,’ wifag
dharma-vid, n. ‘knowing one’s duty,’ and कुमुद् kumud, n. ‘a lotus,’
These only differ from the masculine and feminine in the N. du. pl., Ac. sing,
du. and pl., the usual neuter terminations ८ ङ् i (see 97), being required, and,
n being inserted before the final of the stem in N. Ac. pl thus,
0
98 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
N, Ac. ४. इस्ति harit, हर्ती hariti, हरन्ति harinti ; I. हस्ति haritd,
efcamq haridbhydm, &c., like masc. and fem.
N. Ac. ४. witfaq, wifaet, wafafe; 1. धमेविद्ा, &c.
Similarly, N. Ac. V. कुमुत्, कुमुदी, कुमुन्दि ; 1. कुमुदा, &e.
138. All nouns at 84. II-IV. follow हरित् and wafag.
139. ट् hrid, n. “the heart,’ is said to be defective in the first five inflexions,
these cases being supplied from hridaya (see 108. e).
140. Possessive adjectives formed with the suffixes चत् -vat (84. VII)
and मत् ~mat (84. VI), like धनवत् dhana-vat, ‘rich,’ and धीमत् dhi-mat,
‘wise, are declined like harit for the masculine; but in the Strong
cases (see 135.a) m is inserted before the final of the stem.
InN. sing. dhanavén for dhanavants, ts is rejected by 41.1, and the final vowel
of the stem lengthened by way of compensation.
N. धनवान् dhanavdn धनवन्तो dhanavantau धनवन्तस् dhanavantas
Ac. धनवन्तम् dhanavantam = — dhanavantau = भनवतस् dhanavatas
1. भनवता dhanavatd, धनवद्याम् dhanavadbhydm, &c., like harit.
9. धनवन् dhanavan, &९.
Similarly, धीमत् ‘wise:? N. धीमान्? धीमन्तो, धीमन्तस् ; Ac. धीमन्तम्,
धीमन्तो, धीमतस्, &८.; ए. धीमन्, &. ।
a. Like dhana-vat are declined Past Active Participles, such as कृतवत् ‘one who
has done’ (553) ; thus, N. mase. कृतवान्? कृतवन्तौ, कृत्तवन्तस्, &c.
b. The feminine stems of adjectives like धनवत् and धीमत्, and Participles like
कृतवत्, are formed by adding ४ ४ tothe Weak form of the masc. stem; as, धनवती,
धीमती, कृतवती, declined like नदी at 1०5; thus, N. धनवती, WTR, धनवा्यस्, &c.
९. The neuter is like the neut. of harit: N. Ac. ए. धनवत्, धनवती, धनवन्ति.
141. Present Participles (524) like पचत् padat, ‘cooking, and
Future Participles (578) like करिष्यत् karishyat, ‘about to do,’ are
declined after dhanavat (140), excepting in the N. sing. masc., where
a is not lengthened before n; thus,
N.V. sing. पचन् pacan (for padants), and not पचान् paddin: N. du. pl. पचन्तौ,
पचन्तस् ; Ac. पचन्तम्, WHA, पचतस् ; 1. पचता, &०. Cf. Latin and Greek Par-
ticiples like ferens, ferent-is, ferent-em, &c.; pépwv, pepovt-os, pépovt-a, &e.
a. Observe, however, that all reduplicated verbs of the 3rd class and Frequen-
tatives (but not Desideratives); a few verbs from polysyllabic roots (7s. a), and
some few other verbs—such as जस् ˆ to eat,’ शास् “to rule ’—which reject the nasal
in the 3rd pl. Pres. of the Parasmai-pada, reject it also in the declension of the
Pres. Participle. Hence the Pres. Participle of such verbs is declined like harit,
the N. sing. being identical with the stem; thus, fr. dd, cl. 3, ‘to give,’ N. ए, sing.
du. pl. dadat, dadatau, dadatas; Ac. dadatam, &c.: fr. bhri, cl. 3, ‘to bear,’ N. ए,
sing. du. pl. bibhrat, bibhratau, bibhratas. So also, jdgrat, ‘ watching’ (fr. sdgri),
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 99
Sdsat, ‘ruling’ (fr. ds), jakshat, ‘eating’ (fr. jaksh). The rejection of the nasal
is doubtless owing to the encumbrance of the syllable of reduplication.
Obs. 1. Quasi-reduplicated verbs of cl. 1 and Desideratives do not reject the nasal ;
e.g. tishthat, fr. sthd, ‘to stand,’ makes N, sing. du. pl. tishthan, tishthantau, tishthan-
tas, &c. Similarly, jighrat, fr. ghrd,‘to smell;’ jighrikshat, Desid. of grah, ‘to take.’
_ Obs. 2. The reduplicated verbs of cl. 3, &c., mentioned above, optionally reject the
nasal from the N.V. Ac. pl. neut.; thus, dadati or dadanti, jakshati or jakshanti.
But jagat, 1, ‘the world,’ is only jaganti in N. Ac. pl.
_6, In Present Participles derived from verbs of cl. 1, 4, 10, a nasal is inserted
for the feminine stem; thus, पचन्ती fr. पच्, cl. 7 (declined like nadé at 105); and
this nasal is carried through all the inflexions, not merely, as in the masculine,
through the first five. So दीव्यन्ती fr. div, cl. 4; and चोर्यन्ती fr. dur, cl. 10.
Similarly with quasi-reduplicated verbs of cl. 1 and Desideratives ; e.g. tishthantt,
fr. sthd ; jighrantt, fr. ghrd ; jighrikshantt, fr. Desid. of grah (cf. Obs. 1. above).
The same conjugational classes also insert a nasal in the N. V. Ac. du. neut. as
well as the pl.; thus, पचत्, पचन्ती, पचन्ति.
In all verbs of cl. 6, in verbs ending in द of the 2nd, and in all Participles of
the 2nd Fut. Parasmai, the insertion of the nasal in the feminine is optional; thus,
tudat?¢ or tudantt, fr. tud, cl.6; ydt¢ or ydnté, fr. yd, cl.2; karishyaté or karishyantt,
fr. kri. It is also optional in the N. V. Ac. du. neut., which will resemble the Nom.
sing. fem.; thus, tudanté or tudatt, ydnt¢ or ydtt, karishyanté or karishyaté.
©. Verbs of cl. 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9 follow 140. 8. ©, and insert no nasal for feminine
nor for N. Ac. V. du. neut.; although all but cl. 3 assume a nasal in the first five
inflexions in the masculine; thus, adat (fr. ad, cl. 2); N. V. masc. adan, adantau,
adantas ; fem. adaté: juhvat (fr. hu, cl. 3); N. V. masc. juhvat, juhvatau, jukvatas ;
fem. juhvatt: rundhat (fr. rudh, cl. 7); N.V. masc. rundhan, rundhantau, rundhan-
tas; fem. rundhaté. The neut. will be N. Ac. V. adat, adati, adanti; juhvat, du.
jubvatt, but pl. juhvanti or juhvati (see 141. a).
142. The adjective महत्? ‘great,’ is properly a Pres. Part. fr. मह् mah, ‘to increase ;’
but its masculine lengthens the a of at before n in the N. Ac. sing., N. V. Ac. du.,
N. ए, pl., and neuter in N. V. Ac. pl.; thus, N. masc. महात्, महान्तो, महान्स्;
Ac. महान्तम्, महान्तौ, महतस् ; 1. महता, &९.; V. महन्, महान्तो, &९.; N. fem. महती »
&c., see 149. 2. 8 < N.V. Ac, neut. महत्? महती, महान्ति.
a. वृहत् ०. fn, ‘ great,’ जगत् 71. f.n. * moving,’ पृषत् 7.1. “a deer,’ follow Pres.
Participles; e.g. पि. ४. masc. Je, वृहन्तो, हन्तस्. Fem. वृहती Neut. eq, &e.
143. The honorific pronoun भवत् (said to be for भावत् bhd-vat) follows wea
(at 140), making the a of at long in the N. sing.; thus, भवान् “your honour,’ and
not भवन्. The ४, is भवन्. The fem. is wart, see 233.
भवत् ‘being,’ Pres. Part. of भू ‘to be,’ follows of course पचत् at 141.
144. यकृत् n. “the liver’ (nap, jecur), and शकृत् 7. “ordure,’ may optionally be
declined in Ac. pl. and remaining cases as if their stems were यकन् and शकन् ;
thus, N.V. यकृत्, THAT, यकृन्ति ; Ac. यकृत्, यकृती, यकृन्ति or यकानि; 1. यकृता or
यक्ता, यवृद्याम् or यकभ्याम्, यकृद्भिस् or WHA; 7. यकृते or WH, &e.
02%
100 iINFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
a. A defective noun दत् 18 optionally substituted for दन्त in Ac. pl. and प
cases (see 183), and is often used at the end of compounds; e.g. su-dat, having
good teeth,’ making N. masc. fem. neut. su-dan, su-datt, su-dat.
145. UTE, ‘a foot,’ at the end of compounds becomes चट् in Ac. pl. and remaining
Weakest cases; thus, qr, “having beautiful feet,’ makes in masc. N.V. सुपाद्
सुपादौ, सुपादम्; 4५. सुपादम्, सुपादो, सुषदस्; 1. सुषदा, सुपाब्याम्, FINA, ६८८.
The fem. is quet, like nadé at 105. Neut. पि. V. Ac. सुपाद्; सुपदी, मुपादि.
a. Similarly, fete, but according to P4n. 1४. 1, 9, the fem. is dvi-padd, if agreeing
with rik, ‘a verse ;’ dvi-padé, if agreeing with stré, ‘a woman.’ So also विपाट्; &e.
Sixra Cxass in अन् 47 and इन् ९८.
“This class answers to Lat. and Gr. words like sermo (stem sermon-), homo (stem
homin-), ८८५५४ (stem 0००५५०४). Latin agrees with Sanskyit in suppressing the 7
in N. masc. and fem., but not in neut.; thus homo is N. of masc. stem homin, the
stronger vowel o being substituted for i, just as £ is substituted for 7 in Sanskrit ;
but nomen is N. of the neut. stem nomin.
146, Masculine and feminine stems in चन् an, of two kinds, A
and B.
A. If an be preceded by m or v at the end of a conjunct conso-
nant, then the model is चात्मन् diman, m. ^ soul,’ ° self.’
B. But if an be preceded by m or v not conjunct, as in सीमन्
siman, f. (sometimes m.) ‘a border,’ or by any other consonant,
whether conjunct or not, than m or ४, as in waa takshan, m. ‘a
carpenter,’ राजन् rdjan, m. ‘a king, then the a of an is dropped
in the Ac, pl. and before all the other vowel-terminations, and the
remaining 7 is compounded with the preceding consonant.
Obs.—In the Loc. sing. this dropping of a is optional.
All nouns ending in an, lengthen the @ in the Strong cases (V. sing. excepted) ;
and drop the n before all the consonantal terminations (see 57). The inflective
stem will be dtman, dimdn, dtma ; siman, stmdn, stmn (see above), simu.
Junction of stem with termination: N. sing. x final of stem, and ऽ case-termina+
tion rejected by 57 and 41.1; V. sing. case-termination rejected.
Ay B.
~~ क ष (न SSS a |
ING. DUAL, PLURAL. SING. DUAL, PLURAL,
६. [आत्मा आत्मानो चखात्मानस् | सीमा सोमानो सीमानस्
ˆ | 4८/9८ dimdnau = dtmdnas | siméd अदकः —stmdnas
Ag जातान् _ -- आत्मनस् सौमानम् = aay
diménam dtmdnau == dtmanas | simdénam simdnaw — simnas
pe सात्मभ्याम् सात्मभिस् | सीम्ना सीमभ्याम् सीमनिस्
dtmand dtmabhydm dtmabhis | ज्वं 5746670 stmabhis
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING 1N CONSONANTS,
101
¢ । आत्मभ्याम् , ्ात्मभ्यस् | सीन सीमभ्याम् सीमभ्यस्
dtmane dimabhydm dtmabhyas simne simabhydm simabhyas
Qo pane ae - सीघ्नस् == —
¦ [atmanas dtmabhydm dtmabhyas | simnas simabhydm simabhyas
gio ात्मनोस् आत्मनाम् | — सीम्नस् सीघ्नाम्
dimanas 42014005 dtmandm | stmnas simnos stmndm
1. {सात्मनि — WIA wifa or सीमनि -- सीमसु
` |dtmani dtmanos 1011050 simni or simani simnos simasu
स, (areata | सीमन् सीमानो सीमान्
` |ditman dtmdnau dtmdnas | siman simdnau = 51224945
147. Like STAT are declined यन्न् yajvan, m. “a sacrificer’ (e.g. N. यज्वा,
यज्वानो, यञ्वानस्; Ac. WATT, यज्वानो यज्वनस् ; 1. WTA, &०.); पाप्मन् pdpman,
m.
road ;’ 'दूश्चन् drisvan, m. ‘a looker.’
sin; AYA asman, पा. ‘a stone ;* उष्मन् ushman, m. ‘the hot season
Sushman, 71, ‘fire ;: WA brahman, m.* the god Brahman
Wey adhvan, m. ६
yt
a
Like सीमन् are declined {WA m. ‘head? (1. YH, &८.; L. AFH or PUPA, &०.); पीवन्
m. ‘fat’ (Ac. 71.पीवुस्) ६ वेमन् m. 18 10070; otra ण ‘lightness’ (I. कथिष्ना, &c.)
148. Similarly, like सीमन्, are declined तक्षन् m. ‘a carpenter’ and
रजन् m. ‘a king.’
Obs.—In the inflexion of words like takshan, rdjan (which follow the B form séman
in combining m and छ), the dental of the stem being combined with a cerebral or
palatal is changed to the cerebral or palatal nasal respectively, See 57.c, 58.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
x [षा तक्षाणो TATU
“ | taksha takshanau takshdnas
तक्षाणम् --- तष्टणस्
takshanam ६45040८ takshnas. 58.
1, {re तछ्षभ्याम् तस्भिस्
६5014. 58, takshabhyam takshabhis
is — APA
takshne takshabhydm takshabhyas
(2 Fie
takshnas takshabhydm takshabhyas
तक्षणोस् तक्षणम्
0. | sakshnas takshnos takshndm
afer * = Tay
८ 1 takshni takshnos takshasu
तथन् तक्षाणौ तक्षाणस्
bi takshan takshdnau takshdnas
SING..
राजौ
raja
राज्ञानम्
rdjdnam
राज्ञा
24/74, 57. €.
od
राज्ञ
rdjne
राज्ञस्
74145
rdjnas
राज्ञि
rani
णजन्
rdjan
DUAL. PLURALs
राजानो राजानस्
rdjdnau rdjdnas
— राज्ञस्
rdjdnau = rdjnas.57.¢.
राजभ्याम् राजभिस्
rdjabhydm rdjabhis
— राजन्यस्
rdjabhydm rdjabhyas
réjabhydm rdjabhyas
uslq राज्ञाम्
rajnos = rdjhdm
— राजसु
rdjnos rdjasu
राजानो राजानस्
1111 नि 11
* Or TAT takshani.
+ Or रननि rdjani.
102 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
149. Masculine stems in वन्, like पीवन्, Gut, यज्वन्? generally
form their feminines in वसी (एए. 1v.1, 7); e.g. Waa, Gt, यज्व,
declined like nadi at 105.
10. When a feminine stem in $4 18 formed from words like WH, it follows
the rules at 146. A. B. for the rejection of the a of an; thus, राज्ञी rdjaé, “a queen.’
151. When rdjan occurs at the end of a compound, it may be declined like ॐव
(103); as, N. sing. masc. mahdrdjas ; Ac. mahdrdjam, &c. (cf. 778): but not neces-
sarily, as bahu-rdjan, m. f. प. ‘having many kings.’ The fem. stem of which may
be bahu-rdjan or bahu-rdjé or bahu-rdjnt.
152. Neuter stems in अन् an, like कर्मन् ‘an action’ and नामन् ‘a
name’ (nomen, dvoua*)
Obs.—The retention or rejection of a in an before the Inst. sing. and remaining
vowel-terminations, as well as optionally before the Nom. Acc. du., is determined
by the same rule as in masculines and feminines (146. A. B). They only differ
from masculine nouns in Nom. Voc. and Acc. sing. du. pl.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL, SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. (aa कमैणी कमणि नाम नान्न णः नामनी नामानि
१0. 1/1 karmdni = |ndéma mni ठाः सावां ndmani
कमणा कमेभ्याम् कमेनिस् नाघ्ना नामभ्याम् नामभिस्
* )karmand karmabhyém 41776075 |ndémndé némabhyém ndmabhis
_ (aaa, &c. ke d ata, &c. like of
४ „ 146. :
oe &e. १ ndmne, & ९. ॥ 145
कमे or कमेन्, &e. ik ara or नामन्, &e. ];
# | karma or karman, &c. ९ पि, 4८. | 17 ० ani ies ke N. Ac.
153. Like कर्मन् ०. are declined जन्मन् ‘birth,’ TAA ‘house,’ वमेन् ‘armour,’
Ware ‘ prayer,’ ‘the Supreme Spirit,” THe ‘road,’ चमन् ‘leather,’ AA‘ pretext,’
पवैन् ‘a joint.’
: “८८ नामन् n. are declined दामन् ‘string,’ सामन् ‘ conciliation,’ धामन् * mansion,”
व्योमन् “sky,” रोमन् (for cert rohman, from ruk), ‘hair,’ प्रेमन् (also m.) ‘love.’
154. When nouns in an, man, and van form the last member of adjective com-
pounds, the feminine may be declined like the masc., or its stem may end in d,
and be declined like ॐ the neuter follows the declension of neuter nouns at
152. Those in an, if they follow the declension of séman and rdjan, may also form
their feminine in f, rejecting the a of an, and be declined like nadi (Pan. tv. 1, 28).
155- There are a few anomalous nouns in an, as follow:
०. Wem. ‘a dog? (canis, ५४०४): N, शवा, शानो, श्वानस्; Ac. श्वानम्, श्वानो, YAR;
L शुना, भ्याम्, भिस्; 7. शुने, ९०; Ab. YAR, &८.; G. YAR (५५५४), Yara,
* Greek has a tendency to prefix vowels to words beginning with consonants
= त © ail 7% ‘ li ध
in Ms cognate languages. Cf. also nakha, “ nail, avs ; laghu, “light, ehayves ;
YU brow,’ oppu-s.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 103
शुनाम्; L. शुनि, शुनोस्, wy; V. We, श्वानौ, &c. See 135. 4. Fem. शुनी, &e.
(like nadf at 10x),
£. युवन् m. ‘a youth,’ ‘young.’ N. युवा, युवानो, युवानस्; Ac. युवानम्, युवानो,
यूनस्; 1. यूना, युवभ्याम्, Zaha; D. यूने, &०.; Ab. यूनस्, &०.; 0. WAR, WHA,
यूनाम्; L. यूनि, TATA, युवसु; ४. युवन्, युवानो, &०, See 136. 4. Fem. Tet (like
१०१६) or युवति (like mati). Neut. युव, Wat, युवानि, &e. ।
० मघवन् m.‘a name of Indra:’ पि, मघवा, -वानो, -वानस् ; Ac. मघवानम्, -वानो,
मधोनस्; 1. मघोना, मघवभ्याम्, -वभिस्; 7. मधोने, मघवभ्याम्, &९.; Ab. मधोनस्, &९.;
G. मधोनस्, मथोनोस्, मघोनाम्; L. मघोनि, मघोनोस्, TITY; ए. मघवन्, ९०. Fem,
मघोनी or मघवती.
The last may also be declined like a noun in vat: N. मघवान्, Tail, &e. See 140.
156. सहन् n., ‘a day,’ forms its N. Ac. V. sing. fr. अहर् ahar, and the consonantal
middle cases fr. WEA ahas; in the other cases it is like ndman ; thus,
N. Ac. ४. अहर् (41. 1), सही or अहनी, अहानि; 1. खहा, अहोभ्याम्, सहोभिस् ;
7. अहे, अहोभ्याम्, खहोभ्यस्; Ab. HFA, &०.; G. सहस्, खह्ोस्, TEA; L. wiz
or Weta, अहोस्, अहस्सु or HEY. At the beginning of compounds the form is
generally अहर्, as in ahar-nigam, ‘day and night.’ At the end of compounds it
may be declined as a masc.; thus, N. दीषोादास्, -हाणो, -हाणस्; Ac. -हाणम्, &c.5
V. -ररम्? &c., or sometimes becomes ह् or अह.
a. दिवन् m., ‘a day,’ lengthens the i in those cases where the a of an is rejected ;
thus, Ac. pl. दीवुष्; I. दीवा, &e.
b. शीषन् n., ‘the head,’ is said to be defective in N. sing. du. and pl. and Ac.
sing. du., these cases being supplied from शिरस् n., or WTF 108. ९.
९. यकन् ०.५ ‘the liver,’ and Weare ‘ordure,’ are said to be defective in the first
five inflexions, these cases being supplied from yakrit and Sakrit respectively,
see 144.
157. अ्येमन् m., ‘the sun,’ does not lengthen a of an in N. du. pl., Ac. sing. du.;
thus,
N. अर्थेमा, THAT, SHAM; Ac. अरथेमणम्, अ्थैमणो, अयैम्णस्; 1. TAT, &e. ,
५. Similarly, पूषन् “the sun:’ पि. चूषा, पूषणो, &c.; Ac. पूषणम्, &c.; but the
Ac. pl., and remaining Weakest cases, may be optionally formed from a stem पष्;
thus, Ac. pl. YAU or TAF,
b. Similarly, compounds having -हन् as the last member, such as HARA ए. ‘the
slayer of a Brahman :’ वि. तर्मह, waem, &c.; but in Ac. pl. TANG; 1. TAHT,
व्र्हभ्याम्, &c. (# becoming gh where the a of han is dropped). :
158. वेन् m. ‘a horse,’ or m. f. 7. ‘low,’ ‘vile,’ is declined like nouns in vat
at 140, excepting in N. sing.; thus, N. अवै 9 अवैन्तो, अवैन्तस् 5 Ac. अर्वन्तम्, &e.;
1. स्वैता, SARITA, अवैद्धिस् ; V. अवन्, &c. If the negative खन् precedes, BIT is
regular; thus, N. WAT, WAM, &०.; Ac, अनवैणम्, &.; 1. 7. सनैभिस्.
159. Masculine stems in इन्. 10, like धनिन् dhanin, m. ‘rich.’
In पि, sing. dhané for dhanins, n and 5 are rejected (by 57 and 41.1), and the
vowel lengthened by way of compensation.
104 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
SINGULAR. DUAL. , PLUBAL.
N. धनी dhant ufaat dhaninau धनिनस् dhaninas
Ac. धनिनम् dhaninam — dhaninau — dhaninas
I. ufaatdhanind भनिभ्याम् dhanibhydm, 57. धनिनिस् dhanibhis. 57.
D. धनिने dhanine — dhanibhyém = धनिभ्यस् dhanibhyas. 57.
Ab. धनिनस् dhaninas — dhanibhydm — dhanibhyas
G. — dhaninas धनिनोस् dhaninos धनिनाम् dhanindm
1.. धनिनि dhanini --- 70701105 धनिषु dhanishu. 70.
ए. धनिन् dhanin. 92. धनिनौ dhaninau धनिनस् dhaninas
Obs.—Many adjectives of the forms explained at 85. VI. VIII.
TX. are declined in 70286. like धनिन् ; thus, मेधाविन् medhdvin, ‘intel-
lectual;? N. मेधावी, -विनो, -विनस्, &c. Also numerous nouns of
agency, like कारिन् ‘a doer, at 85. II; thus, N. कारी, कारिणो (58),
कारिणम्, &c.
160. The feminine stem of such adjectives and nouns of agency’
is formed by adding ई £ to the masc. stem; as, fr. धनिन्, धनिनी f. ;
fr. कारिन्, कारिणी f.; declined like nadé at 105; thus, N. धनिनी, -न्यो,
~न्यस्, &८.
161. The neuter is regular, and is like vdri as far as the Gen. ए. ;
N, Ac. धनि, धनिनी, धनीनि. But the ©. pl. धनिनाम्, not धनीनाम्;
V. sing. धनि or धनिन्.
162. पथिन् m. ‘a road,’ AFG m. ‘a churning-stick,’ and Wyte ए. ‘a name
of Indra,’ are remarkable as exhibiting both suffixes, an and in, in the same word.
They form their N. ए. sing. from the stems पन्यस्, मन्यस्, WIA; their other
Strong cases, from the stems UeGe{, नन्यन्, WYWe; their Ac. pl., and remaining
Weak cases, from the stems TY, AY, YA; in their Middle cases they follow
dhanin regularly ; thus,
ए. ए. पन्यास् (163), WTA, UFUTAR; Ac. पन्थानम्, पन्थानो, पथस् ; 1. पथा,
चपिष्याम्, पपिभिस्; 1. पये, &०. Similarly, N. ए. मन्यास्, &०.; WYRE, &०.:
I. मया, &c.; WAT, &c. Observe—The V. is the same as the N.
^ @. The compound सुपथिन्, “having a good road,’ is similarly declined for the
masc.; the N. fem. is सुपयी, -ण्यो, “WT, like nadfat 105; the neut. is N.Ac. quta,
-पयी, -पन्यानि, &९.; ४. सुपथिन् or मुपप; the rest as the 10886.
Seventu (1,4.88 in Wa as, इस् is, and उस् us.
This class answers to Gr. and Lat. words like mabos, peeves, genus, scelus, &c.
163. Masculine and feminine stems in स् as, like चन्द्रमस् candra-
mas, m. ‘the moon.’
In N. sing. as is lengthened to compensate for rejection of the termination $;
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS: 105
andramas becomes ¢andramo.by 64 before the terminations bhydm, bhis, bhyas ;
in L, pl. éandramas+su becomes candramahsu by 63, or éandramassu by 62. a.
N. चन्द्रमास् dandramds चन्द्मसो dandramasau चन्द्मसस् dandramasas
Ac. चन्द्रमसम् éandramasam — - ८८11द0"2000050४ — éandramasas
1. चन्द्मसा dandramasé चन्द्रमोभ्याम् Candramobhydm चन्द्रमोभिस् éandramobhis
D. चन्द्रमसे dandramase —. éandramobhydm चन्द्रमोभ्यस् candramobhyas
Ab. चन्द्मसस् candramasas — éandramobhydm — éandramobhyas
G. — éandramasas zweaata candramasos चन्द्रमसाम् dandramasdm
1. चन्दूमसि dandramasi ` --- 'éandramasos चन्द्मःसु candramahsu 01 -स्सु
V. aera candramas. 92. चन्द्रमसो Condrimasau , चन्द्रमसस् candramasas
a. Similarly, अष्वरस् apsaras, f.‘a nymph:’ N. अष्सणस्, &c
164. Neuter stems in अस् as, like मनस् manas, 1. ‘mind’ (uévos,
mens).
These differ from the masc. and fem. in the N. Ac. ए. The a of as remains
short in N. sing. after the rejection of the case-termination s, but’ is lengthened
‘in N. Ac. $. pl. before inserted Anusvara,
N. Ac. V. मनस् manas मनसी manast मनांसि mandnsi
1. मनसा manasd, मनोभ्याम् manobhydm, &c., like the masc. and fem.
a. Obs.—Nearly all simple substantives in as are neuter like manas; but these
-neuters, when at the end of compound adjectives, are declinable also in masc. and
fem. like ¢andramas. Thus mahd-manas, ‘magnanimous,’ makes in N. (m. f. sing.
‘du. pl.) mahd-mands, ‘mahd-manasau, -mahd-manasas. Similarly, sumanas, ^ well-
intentioned ;’ -durmanas, ‘ evil-minded’ (N. m. f. sumands, durmands, &c.): of. लय~
‘pevys, 9८०८९०5, m. f., but neut. and stem ev-pevés, Suc-revés, derived from
(८८५०४.
४. Where final as is part of a toot and not a suffix, the declension will follow
पिरदग्रस् one who-devours > mouthful;’ thus, N. V. sing. m.f. पिरडग्रस्; Ac. -ग्र॑सम् .
पि. ए. Ac. du, -ग्रसो, pl. -ग्रसस्; 1. -ग्रसा, -ग्रोभ्याम्, &०. पप. ए. Ac. nent. -ग्रस्,
-ग्रसी, -ग्रंसि. When a root ends in ds, s will be rejected before bh by 66. 2; thus,
चकास्; ‘brilliant,’ makes in I. du. चकान्याम्
९. But GA (fr. GA) and भ्नस् (fr. SA), at the end of compounds, change final
स् to त् before the consonantal terminations, making N. sing. सरत् ०१ tq; e.g
vsaran, पणेथ्वत् (see Pan. पा. 2 763; णा. 1, 703 VILI. 2, 72)
165. Neuter stems in इम् is and J@us are declined analogously to मनस् manas
at 164, 7 and ४ being substituted for a throughout, sh for s (70), ér or ur for o (65);
thus,
हविस् havis, ४. ‘ghee: N. Ac. V. हविस्, हविषी, हवीषि; 1. विषा, हविभ्योम्
इविरभिस्; D. हविषे, ह विभ्याम्, विभ्येस् ; Ab. हविषस्, हविभ्यीम्, ह विभ्येस् ; 0. afar,
इहविषोस्, इ विषाम्; L. हविषि, हविषोस्, हविःषु or -ष्षु
a, TAR cakshus, n. ‘the eye’ N. Ac. ए. WAM, aya, safe; 1. wwe,
P
106 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
चषुभ्याम्, चशुरभिस्; 7. चुषे, WPA, THA; Ab. THA, sepa, THAT;
6. WHA, FAV, WAU; L. Tafa, TART, Yee or -ष्यु.
166. Nouns formed with the suffixes is and us are generally neuter. In some
nouns, however, the final sibilant is part of the root itself, and not of a suffix;
such 28 साशशिस् 485, f. “a blessing’ (£. rt. शास्), and WAX m. f. “an associate’ (fr.
जुष्). These follow the analogy of masc. and fem. nouns in as (163) in the N. Ac.
cases; and, moreover, before the consonantal terminations, where the final sibilant
is changed to r, unlike nouns formed with is and us, lengthen the £ and ४ (compare
‘nouns in r at 180); thus,
N. आशीस्, -शिषो, -शिषस्; Ac. -शिषम्, -शिषो, -शिषस्; 1. -शिषा, -शीभ्याम्,
गशीभिस्, &०.; L. pl. -शीःपषु or -शीष्पु- ' :
N. सजूस्, -नुषो, -YIT; Ac. -जुषम्, &९.; 1. -FAT, -जुभ्योम्, &e.
a. Nouns formed from Desiderative stems in 257 (497), such as जिगदिस् (for
Jigadish), ‘ desirous of speaking,’ are similarly declined; thus,
N.V. m. f. जिगदीस्, -दिषो, &०.; 1. du. -ebitq. The N.V. Ac. neut. pl. is
जिगदिषि, the nasal being omitted (cf. 181. d).
So चिकी, ‘desirous of doing,’ makes N. V. m. f. चिकीर्, -कीरषौ, &e.
b. सुतुस् ‘well-sounding,’ where us is radical, makes N. ए. sing. m. f. GTA
Ac. सुतुसम्; N.V. Ac. du. Oger, pl. FRI; 1. मुतुसा, FAM, Gata, &०.
N.V. Ac. neut. सुतूस्, मुहुसी, Fafa.
c. Obs.—When neuter nouns in is or ws are taken for the last member of com-
pound adjectives, analogy would require them to be declined in masc. and fem.
according to ¢éandramas at 163; but, according to the best authorities, the N. sing.
does not lengthen the vowel of the last syllable; thus, उत्पल चश्षुस् m. f. ०. ‘having
lotus eyes,’ N. masc. and fem. उत्पकच छयुस्, -चक्ुषो, &e.3 and शुचिरोचिस् m. f.n.
“having brilliant rays,’ N. masc. and fem. शुचिरोचिस्, शुचिरोचिषो, &e.
d. दोस् dos, m. ‘an arm,’ follows the declension of nouns in és and us; but in
Ac. pl., and remaining cases, optionally substitutes doshan for its stem (see 184) ;
thus, N.V. दोस्, -षो, -षस् ; Ac. दोषम्, -घो, -षस् or -ष्णस्; 1. दोषा or दोष्णा,
-दोभ्योम् or ara, &c. As a neuter noun it makes in N. Ac. ए, दोस्, दोषौ, दोषि.
167. Comparatives formed with the suffix ईयस् fyas (192), lengthen the a of as,
and insert 7, changeable to Anusvara before s, in N. sing. du. pl., ए, du. pl., Ac. sing.
du. 7128९. $ thus, बलीयस् m. f. n., ‘more powerful,’ makes N. masc. qatar (for
बलीयांस्, ॐ rejected by 41. A), -यांसौ, -यांसस् 3 Ac. -यांसम्, -यांसो, -यसस्; 1. -यसा,
योभ्याम्, &c., like éandramas at 163. The V. sing. is बलीयन्; du. and pl. like
the Nom.
a. The fem. TTT follows nadé at 105. The neut. बलीयस् is like manas.
168. Perfect Participles, formed with was (see 554), are similarly declined in the
Strong cases (135.4). But in Ac. pl., and remaining Weak cases, vas becomes ush,
_and in the Middle cases vat; so that there are three forms of the stem, viz. in vdzs,
ush, and vat*; thus,
* Vat is evidently connected with the Greek ot. Compare tutupvat (fr. rt. tup)
with terup-(F)or, and tutupvatsu with Tetup-o(t) ०५,
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 107
विविद्म् (Perf. Part, 8. विह् ‘to know’): N. fafaera, fafazie, विषिद्धं स्;
Ac. fafagian, वियिद्वांसो, fafagua; 1. विविटुषा, fafrzenn, विषिदद्धिस् ; D.
fafage, &c.; ए. fafaga, fafagiat, &c.
The neuter is N. Ac. fafazy, -दुषी, -डांसि; for fem. see d below.
a, When this Participle is formed with ivas instead of vas (see 554), the vowel i
is rejected in the cases where vas becomes ush + thus,
जग्मिवस् (fr. गम्“ to go’): N. 10830. जग्मिवान्, &e.; Ac. जग्मिवांसम्, ज्ञग्मिवांसौ,
WH, &०.; 1. WAU, &८.; ४, जग्मिवन्, जग्मर्वांसौ, &०.
2. Similarly, तेनिवस् (£. तन् ‘to stretch’): N. तेनिवान्, तेनिवां सौ, ९०.; Ac. तेनि+
वासम्, तेनिवां सौ, तेनुषस्, &०.; ए. तेनिवन्, -वां सो, &.
९. But not when the £ is part of the root; thus, चिचिवस् (fr. चि), निनीवस् (fr.
नी) make in the Ac. pl. चिच्युषस्, निन्युषस्, चकृवस् (fr. कु) makes, of course,
WHAT.
d. The N. fem. of these Participles is formed from ush; and the N. Ac. neut.
sing. du. pl. from vat, धऽ, and vas, respectively; thus, N. fem. चिविटुषी, &e.,
declined like nadé at 10%. Similarly, from the root तुप् ५०९ FFM (cf. rervpvia.).
Those formed with ivas do not retain i in the feminine 3 thus, tenivas makes N.
sing. masc. fem. neut. tenivdn, tenushi*, tenivat.
e. The root faz, “to know,’ has an irregular Pres. Part. विहस् vidvas, used
commonly as an adjective (‘learned’), and declined exactly like विविहस् above,
leaving out the reduplicated vi ; thus, N. 10236, विद्वान्, विद्वांसौ, विद्वांस् 5 Vis faze,
&c. With reference to 308. a, it may be observed, that as a contracted Perfect
of vid is used as a Present tense, so a contracted Participle of the Perfect is used
as a Present Participle. The fem. is fagat, and the neut. freq.
169. पुंस् m., ‘a male,’ forms its V. sing. from पुमंस्, and its other Strong cases
(135. 8) from पुमांस्; but Ac. pl., and remaining Weakest cases, from पुंस्; and I.
du., and remaining Middle cases, from पुम् ; thus,
N. पुमान्, पुमांसौ, पुमांसम् ; Ac. पुमांसम्, पुमां सौ, Jaq; 1. पुंसा, पुम्भ्याम्, पुम्निस्;
7. पुंसे, &०.; Ab. Fat, &०.; ¢. पुंस्, FAT, पुंसाम्; 1.. पुंसि, पुंसोस्, पुंसु; ४. पुमन्,
पुमांसो, & ९,
170. TWAT m., ‘a name of the regent of the planet Sukra,’ forms N. sing.
उशाना from a stem उशनन् (147). Similarly, पुरुदंशस् m. ‘a name of Indra,’ and
अनेहस् m. ‘time.? The other cases are regular; thus, N. du. उशनसौ. But
TWAT may be optionally in Voc. sing. उशनस् or TWA or उशनन्.
171. जरस् f., ‘decay’ (yipas), supplies its consonantal cases (viz. N. ए, sing., I.
D. Ab. du. pl., L. pl.) from जय Its other cases may be either from ATH or जया;
thus, N. sing. जयः; V. जरे ; Ac. नग्सम्† or जणम्; 1. जरसा and ACA, जरान्याम्,
जराभिस्, ९८०.
* There seems, however, difference of opinion as to the rejection of i; and
some grammarians make the feminine tenyushé.
† Since जरसम् certainly occurs, it may be inferred that the N. Ac. V. du. are
जरसो or जरे ; N. Ac. V. pl. जरसम् or जयाम्, These forms are given in the grammar
of I'svara-éandra Vidy4-sdgara, p. 51.
P 2
108 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
~ Kieuru Cuass.—Stems ending in any consonant except
त् q d, न् Fs.
172, This class consists principally of roots used as nouns, either
alone or at the end of compounds, or preceded by prepositions and
adverbial prefixes. Stems ending in त् ¢ or @ क, formed in this
manner, are of common occurrence ; but their declension falls under
the fifth class at 136. ,
With regard to stems ending in other consonants which we place
under the eighth class, the only difficulty in their declension arises
from theit euphonic combination with the consonantal terminations.
173. Whatever change of the final consonant takes place in Nom.
sing. is preserved before all the consonantal terminations ; provided
only, that before such terminations the rules of Sandhi come into
operation.
174. Before the vowel-terminations the final consonant of the
stem, whatever it may be, is generally preserved. If in some nouns
there is any peculiarity in the formation of the Ac. pl., the same
peculiarity runs through the remaining Weakest or vowel cases.
The terminations themselves undergo no change, but the s of the
Nom. sing. is of course cut off by 41. I (see, however, 135. 5). There
is generally but one form of declension for both masc. and fem.; the
neuter follows the analogy of other nouns ending in consonants.
175. Stems ending in क् k, ख् kh, ग् 9, ध् ¢ declined.
, ‘We m. f. ‘one who is able’ (in sarva-sak, ‘ omnipotent’).
N.V. शक् Sak शको sakau Wag Sakas
Ac. शकम् Sakam — € — sakas
I, शका Sakd शगभ्याम् Sagbhydm शग्भिस् Sagbhis
D. शके Sake — Sagbhyém शग्भ्यस् sagbhyas
Ab, शकस् Sakas — $agbhydm — Sagbhyas
©. — Sakas शकोस् Sakos शकाम् sakdm
L. शकि $ — S$akos We Sakshu
The neuter is N. Ac. ए. शक्, Yat शदिः &c.; the rest like the 78४86
a. Similarly, लिख् one who paints’ (in ¢itra-likh, ‘one who paints a picture’)
N,V. लिङ् (41.11, 41.1), लिलो (174), लिखस् ; Ac. FSA, &९.; 1. लिखा,
foram, festa, &५.; 1.. ए. fry
The neuter is N, Ac. V fom, लिखी, लि, & ९; the rest like the masc.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 109
¢. In the same way final ग् Ware changed to @, and when final च् ट्? ह्
lose their aspirate form, the aspirate must be transferred to the initial, if that
initial be Ms Zor ब् (see 44.¢)
५. YTS m.f., jumping well,’ makes N.V FAs (41.), aren &e.; Ac. FISH,
&e.; 1. सुवर्गा, सुवस्भ्याम्, &०.; 1). सुवरो, &.; Ab.G. FINA, &e.; 1. सुवर्ण, सुवत्गोस्,
YT (see yo). Neut. N. Ac. V qq, मुवस्गी qatar or (see 176. h) qafar.
176. Stems ending in च् ८ क् ८# AJ, jh declined.
Final च् is changed to क् or ग्; final छ् 15 changed to ज्, which becomes ट् or ङ्
before the consonantal terminations; final {to F (म्) णद् (इ); and final *R,
which is rare, to @ or 1, before the consonantat terminations (41. IV, 92. a)
वाच् £. ‘speech’ (fr. rt. वच्) : 1. ए. वाक् (for vdks, 41.15 vow, dp), वाचो (dre)
वाचस् (voces, 076४); Ac. वाचम् (vocem), वाचो, वाचस् (7८) ; 1. वाचा वाग्भ्याम्,
वाग्निस्; 7. वाचे, वाग्भ्याम्, WIG; Ab. वाचस्, वाग्भ्याम्, वागभ्यस् ; ७. वाचस्,
वाचोस्, वाचाम्; 1. वाचि (4८); वाचोस् वाघ. Compare Latin vox, and Greek
ow or om for For throughout.
Similarly, भुच् a 11060: N.V. मुक्? मुचो, मुच्
WA m. f. “one who eats” N.V. YR, Yat, YAR; Ac. YAR, &८.; 1. भुजा,
yang, wiry, &०
प्राङ् m. f. “an asker’ (fr. rt. WS): N.V. प्राट् प्राज्ञो. प्राश्चस्; Ac. AIA, &c.;
1. प्राज्ञा, प्राडभ्याम्, &८.; L. pl. WIZE
The root भज् becomes भान् (just as ०८८ becomes vd¢); e.g. N. ४. भाक् m. f. n
a sharer
. The neuters are thus formed: N. Ac. V. वाकः वाची, वाचि, &c. (as in yw
‘speaking well’); TF, भुनी, मुचि, &e.; प्राद्, प्राश, प्राचि, &c.
8. The root सच् and, ‘to go,’ preceded by certain prepositions and adverbial
prefixes, forms a few irregular nouns (such as प्राच् ‘eastern °)» and is found at
the end of a few compounds after words ending in a; such as सधराच् “tending
downwards,’ &c. These all reject the nasal in the Ac. pl. and remaining cases
masculine. In Nom. sing. the final च् ¢ being changed to कं ¢, causes the preceding
nasal to take the guttural form, and the @ is rejected by 41.1. In the Ac. pl.,
and remaining Weakest cases, there is a further modification of the stem in the
case of प्रत्यच्, &.
प्राच् m. ‘eastern,’ ‘going before’ `. ए. प्रार्, प्राचो, प्राचचस् ; Ac. WIA, प्राचो
प्राचस्; 1. प्राचा, प्रारभ्याम्, प्रागिस् ; 7). प्राचे, &८.; 1.. pl. WY. Similarly, अवाच्
m. southern
WAG m. ‘western’ N.V. WAS, WAN, प्रायच्चस् ; Ac. WIA, We, प्रती चस् ;
1. प्रतीचा, WaT प्रत्यग्भिस् ; 1. प्रतीचे, &० Similarly, सम्यच् “going with,’
fit,’ and even उदच् ‘northern,’ which make in Ac. pl., and remaining Weakest
cases, समीचस्, उदीचस्.
So also, विष्वच्, going everywhere,’ forms its Ac. pl., and remaining Weakest
cases, fr. a stem विषूच्, making विषूचस्, &e.
110 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
Analogously, तियैच् ‘going crookedly,’ ‘an animal,’ forms its Weakest cases fr.
2 stem तिरश्च, making Ac. pl. निरश्चस्, &e.
The feminine form and the neut. du. of these nouns follow the analogy of the
Ac. ए. ; thus, N. fem. प्राची &c., अवाची &c., प्रतीची &c., उदीची &c., समीची &.,
faxat &c., declined like नदी.
The neuter is N. Ac. V. WTR, प्राची, प्राचि, &०.; प्रत्यक्, प्रतीची, wats, &.
५. प्राच्? when it signifies ‘worshipping,’ retains the nasal, which has become
guttural, throughout ; but 4 which has become 4, is rejected before the consonantal
terminations; thus,
N.V. प्राङ्, प्रा, &०.; Ac. WTI, &०.; 1. प्राचा, प्राङ्भ्याम्, ९९.
अम्णाग्म, क्रु ‘a curlew:’ N.V. GX, FR, &e.; Ac. FW, &८.५ 1. FAM,
RAMA, &०.; L. pl. FEF or ay (55. 6).
d, WFR n., ‘blood,’ is regular; thus, N. Ac. V. WFR, असुजी, AAPA, &.;
but it may optionally take its Ac. pl. and remaining inflexions from a defective
stem, असन् asan; thus, त. $. pl. ससृच्ि; Ac. pl. HAPS or असानि; 1. HA or
WAT, समुःभ्याम् or ससभ्याम्, &८.; L. AAPA or Wate or सन्ति, &.
e. Nouns formed with the roots यज् ‘to worship,’ णन् ‘to shine,” मृज् “to rub,”
भाज् ‘to shine,’ WIA ‘to fry,’ A ‘to wander,’ सुन् “to create,’ generally change
the final ज् to द् or before the consonantal terminations; thus,
देषेज् m. ‘a worshipper of the gods’ (यज् becoming इज्) : N. V. sing. देषेद्.
Similarly, एज् m. ‘a ruler.’ N. sing. राट् ; 1. राजा, राड्भ्याम्, &c. So also, परिमृज्
“a cleanser:’ N, sing. परिमृद्. So also, विच्नाज् m. £. ‘splendid :’ N. sing. frag.
Similarly, परिव्राज् m. ‘a religious mendicant’ (aq becoming AT): N. sing.
परिव्राट्. So also, विश्वसृन् ८. ‘the creator of the world:’ N. sing. विश्वसृट्.
But विष when it precedes TIS, as in विश्चणन् m. ‘a universal ruler,’ becomes
विश्वा wherever ज् becomes ट् or इ; thus, N. विश्चाणट्, विश्वरानो, &e.
ऋत्विन् m., “a priest’ (रतु + इन् for यज्), is regular: N,V. ऋत्विक्
^ FTA m. “a kind of priest,’ ‘ part of a sacrifice,’ forms the consonantal
cases from an obsolete stem, सवयस् : पि. ४. sing. du. pl. अवयास्, -यानो, -याजस्;
Ac. -याननम्, &.; I. -याजा, -योभ्याम्, &.; L. pl. सवयस्सु or अवयःसु.
9. A, “one who fries,’ may take भृज्ज् for its stem, and make N. V. भृट्, wa,
YAY; Ac. YHA, &c. Similarly, AY, ‘one who cuts,’ makes, according to some,
वट्, &c., and not AZ, &c.; but others allow vrat.
h. कज, ‘strength,’ makes N.V. WA (41. 1. 008.), &e.; Ac. ऊर्जम्, &e.; I. Wait,
WHAT, &c. At the end of a comp. the neuter is N. Ac. V. srk, द चण, But in
these cases where a word ends in a conjunct consonant, the first member of which
is r or J, the nasal may be optionally omitted in the plural, so that trji would be
equally correct.
i, WH, ‘lame,’ makes N. खन्, WH, WHA; 1. pl. खन्निस्; L. pl. ay.
177. Stems ending in च् ¢h, ध् dh declined.
The final aspirate is changed to its unaspirated form before the consonantal
terminations (41. II, 43), but not before the vowel (43. d). कष् m. f. “one who
tells? प. ए. कत्, कथो, कस्; Ac. BUA, &०.; 1. कथा, HAM, Ke.
So also, FUE. ‘battle:” N.V. IA, YW युधस्; Ac. FR, ६८९.; 1, युधा, FRM, ke.
INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN consonants. 111
In the case of Tm. f., ‘one who knows,’ the initial व् 5 becomes भू 54 wherever
the final dh becomes ¢ or d, by 178.5. and 44.c; thus, पि, ए. शत्, बुधो, Taq;
Ac. बुधम्, &e. ; IL बुधाः yaa, &९.; L. pl. uy.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. V. कत्» कयौ, afer, &.; युत्, qui, युन्धि, &e.
178. Stems ending in प् p, % ph, ब् ¢, भ् bh declined.
गुप् य. f. ‘one who defends: N.V. गुप्, WH, WIR; Ac. TUR, &०.; 1. गुषा,
WRIA, गुन्भिस्, &c.
A m.f. ‘one who obtains? N.V. BY, Wi, BAA; Ac, लभन्, &.; 1. wt,
Baa, SA, &०.; L. pl. BY.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. ए. गुप्, गुपी, गुम्पि, &e.; BY, लभी, afar, &९.
b. सप् £. “water,” declined in the plural only, substitutes ¢ (ठ) for its final before
bh; thus, N.V. आपस्; Ac. अरपस्; 1. द्विस्; D. Ab. सन्यस् ; 0. सपाम्; L. सष्सु.
In the Veda it is sometimes singular.
179. Stems ending in म् m declined.
The final m becomes » before the corisonantal terminations. शम् sam, m. f. “one
who pacifies :’ N. ए. शन्, शमो, WAR; Ac. शमम्, &८.; 1. शमा, WHA, शन्भिस्,
&e.; L. pl. Wg.
a, Similarly, WIT m.f., ‘quiet,’ makes N.V. WHT, प्रशामो, प्रशामस् ; ^५.प्रशामम्,
&e.; 1. प्रजाना, प्रशान्भ्याम्, &. ; L, 71. प्रजान्सु ० प्रशान्त्सु. Compare 53. ९.
8. The neuter is N. Ac. ए. ङन्, शमी, शमि, &c.; प्रशान्, -शामी, -शामि, &८.
180. Stems ending in र् ? and व् v declined.
If the vowel that precedes final r be i or u, it is lengthened before the conso-
nantal terminations (compare 166); and final r, being a radical letter, does not
become Visarga before the $ of the Loc. pl. (71. 2).
_ चर्. “one who goes:’ N.V. चर्, चरो, ATA; Ac. चरन्, &५.; 1. च, Da,
afta, &०.; L. pl. Wa.
डार् f.‘adoor:’ N.V. BTR, BT, BTA, &०.
गिर् f. ‘speech:’ N.V. गीर्, गिरे, freq; Ac. गिरम्, &.; 1. गिरा, गोभ्याम्,
MAA, &c.; L. pl. गीष.
a. The neuter is N. Ac. ४. चर्, चरी, चरि, &c. 3 गीर्, गिरी, गिरि, ९९८.
So also, वार् ०. “water:’ N. Ac. वार्, बारी, वारि.
b. One irregular noun ending in व् ९, viz. दिव् “the sky,’ forms its N. V. sing.
from द्यो (133. ९), and becomes @ in the other congonantal cases; thus,
N.V. ate, दिवो, दिवस्; Ac. दिवम्, दिवो, दिवस्; 1. दिवा, BTA, &e.
Similarly, सुदिव् m. £. ‘having a good sky,’ but the neuter is N. Ac. V. FQ,
gfeat, सुदीवि.
181. Stems ending in ज् and ¥ sh declined.
। The difficulty in these is to determine which stems change their finals to क् and
which to @ (see 41. V). In the roots दिश्, gu, मृञ्, स्पृश्, and Y¥ (the last forming
112 INFLEXION OF STEMS OF NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
दधृष् ‘ impudent’) the final becomes क्? and in नशा optionally & or (नक् or AZ )
Otherwise both शू and च् at the end of stems pass into ट्
विश्. {. ‘one who enters,’ or ‘a man of the mercantile and agricultural class ae
N.V. विट् (4r.V), विशौ, विशस्; Ac. विशम्, &०.; 1. fag, विद्भ्याम्, &e. feat.
“a quarter of the sky:’ N.V. दिक् (41. ए, 24), दिशौ, दिशस्; Ac. दिशम्, &e. ;
1. दिशा, दिग्भ्याम्, &e. fed m. f. ‘one who hates:’ N.V. हद् (41. ए), feat,
द्िषस् ; Ac. द्विषम्, &e.; I. feet, द्विड्भ्याम्, &c. मृष् ए. f. ‘one who endures :’
N.V. मृद् (4. ए), मृषो, मृषस्; Ac. मृषम्, &०.; 1. मृषा, PRAM, &०. FW ‘one
who touches:’ प. ए. STR, स्पृशो, WMA, ९०.
The neuters are N. Ac. V. faz, विशी, fafa, &०.; दिक् दिङ्ञी, दिशि; &e.; fzz,
fact, fefa, &c.; मृद्, मृषी, मृषि, &.
a. पुरोडाश् “a priest,’ in the Veda, makes N. ए, sing. पुणेडास्, and forms its other
consonantal cases from an obsolete stem, पुरोडस्. Compare 176. f. ,
2. सु्हिस् १.६ ‘very injurious,’ makes N.V. fea, सुहिंसो, &ce.; Ac. सुहिंसम्, &e.;
I. सुहिंसा, सुहिन्भ्याम्, &c. But nouns ending in &, preceded by vowels, fall under 163.
, ५ MY, “a cow-keeper,’ makes N. V. गोरक् or गोरट्, गोरक्षौ, &e.
क्. Similarly, nouns from Desiderative stems, like पिप “desirous of cooking,’
and विव ‘ desirous of saying,’ make N. V. farg, पिप, &८.; frre, faze,
&c. (see 166. a).
182. Stems ending in ह / declined.
In stems beginning with € क, the final aspirate generally becomes Rk (म् 9), in
other stems टू ट (ड d), before the consonantal terminations; and in stems whose
initial is q d or 1g, the loss of the ‰ which disappears as a final, is compensated
for by aspirating the initial, which becomes dh or gh wherever final h becomes k (g)
or ¢ (d). See 44. ९, 175. 6. foe m. £ “one who licks:’ पि. V. faz (41. IID,
लिदी, fered; Ac. लिहम्, &e.; 1. लिहा, लिड्भ्याम्, &.; L. pl. FEY or fata.
दुह् m.f.‘one who milks:’ प. ए. YR, दुरो, FE; Ac. TEM, &८.; I. दहा, धुर्यम्,
धुग्भिस्, &e.; L. pl. YA.
The neuter is N. Ac. V. fez, faz, लिहि, &e.; We, get, gfe, &e.
a. But दह् पा. f., ‘injuring,’ makes N. भुक् or HE (44. ९); 1. दूदा, Weare or
भुडभ्याम्, &c.; L. pl. YY or YY. Similarly, मुह् m.f. “infatuating :’ N. FF or FZ.
The same option is allowed in fag “one who loves’ and RE “one who vomits.”
2. उष्णिह् f., ‘a kind of metre,’ changes its final tv k (g) before the consonantal
terminations, like stems beginning with d: N. उष्णिक्, उष्णिहौ, &e.
० वाह्? " bearing’ (fr. ré. वहू “to bear’), changes वा to ऊ ४ in Ac. pl. and re-
maining Weakest cases (and before the ङ ¢ of the fem.) if the word that precedes
it in the compound ends in a or दत this @ or द combining with «i into खो au (instead
of Mo, by 32); thus,
भाएवाह् m. f. “a burden-bearer:’ N. V. masc. भारवादट् भारवारो, भारवाहस् 5
Ac, भारवाहम्, भारवाह, MTC; 1. भारोहा, भारवाइभ्यम्, &९. प. fom. भाती, &e.
So प्र्टवाह् m. “a steer’ and विश्ववाह् “all-sustaining.’ Under other circumstances
ADJECTIVES. 113
the change of vdh to wh is optional; thus, wifsarg, “bearing rice,’ makes in Ac.
pl. शास्यूहस् or शालिवाहस्,.
d. श्ेतवाह् m., ‘Indra’ (“borne by white horses’), may optionally retain वा in Ac.
pl. &c.; and in consonantal cases is declined as if the stem were WATT ; thus,
N.V. शरेतवास्, श्वेतवाहौ, ATMA; Ac. AAA, श्ेतवाहौ, VATA or WATT;
1. WAIST or WATT, श्ेतवोभ्याम्, श्वेतवोभिस्, &०.
e. In Tua, “a name of Indra,’ the स् is changed to ष् wherever ह् becomes द्
or इः N. GUNZ, तुरासाहौ, GUAT; Ac. FWATRA, &०.; 1. तुरासाहा, तुत-
वार्भ्याम्, &e.
Sf. WAST m., “an ox’ (for अनोवाह् fr. नस् ‘a cart’ and वाह् “bearing ’), forms
the N.V. sing. from WAH; the other Strong cases from अनडुह्, and the Middle
cases from अनुत्; thus, N. WA, HAG, अनड़ाहस्; Ac. WAZA, WAG,
अनडुहस्; 1. WAGE, सनडुच्याम्, अनङडुद्धिस्, &५.; L. pl. WA; ४. अनङुन्.
There is a feminine form WATT, but at the end of compounds this word makes
fem. N. sing. HAZE; neut. N. ए. RAGA, अनडुही, अनडुहि.
183. नह् ‘binding,’ ‘tying,’ at the end of compounds, changes the final to त् or
दु, instead of द् or इ; thus, उपानह् f., ‘a shoe,’ makes N, V. उपानत्; उपानहोः,
उपानहम्; Ac. उपानहम्; &e.; I. उपानहा; उपानन्याम्; &०.; L. pl. उपानत्सु .
See 3०6. 8.
Defective Nouns.
184. The following nouns are said to be defective in the first five inflexions, in
which cases they make use of other nouns (see Pan. vt. 1, 63): असन् n. (176.d);
WTA n. (108. ९) ; उदन् n. (108.¢); Tm. (108.e); दोषन् n. m. (166.d); ACL.
(108. ९); निश्? (108. ९); पट् m. (108. ९); पृत् ^ (108. ९); मास् n. (708. ९); मास् प.
(108. ९); यकन् ०. (144; 166. ०); यूषन् पा. (108. ९); शकन् ०. (144, 156. ९); शीषेन् 7.
(156. 9); Yn. (126. ९); EFn. (708. ९).
185. Examples of nouns defective in other cases are Ween. (156); क्रोष्टु m.
(128.c); जरस् £ (171).
Section III.—ADJECTIVES.
186. The declension of substantives includes that of adjectives ;
and, as already seen, the three examples of substantives, given under
each class, serve as the model for the three genders of adjectives
falling under the same class, Adjectives may be grouped under
three heads, A, B, C, as follow:
A. Simple adjectives, coming immediately from roots, and not
derived from substantives. These belong chiefly to the first, second,
and third classes of nouns (see 80, A, 81. A, 82. 4, 103-115).
8. Adjectives formed from substantives by secondary or Taddhita
५
114 ADJECTIVES.
suffixes, They belong chiefly to the first, fifth, and sixth classes
of nouns (see 80. B, 84. B, 85. B, 103, 140, 159).
C. Compound adjectives, formed by using roots and substantives
at the end of compounds. These are common under every one of
the eight classes.
187. A. Examples of Simple Adjectives.
शुभ subha, ‘beautiful,’ ‘good:? masc. and neut. stem शुन Subha;
fem. stem शुभा Subhd
An example of an adjective of cl. 1 is here given in full, that the declension of
the masc., fem., and neut. forms may be seen at once and compared with that of
Latin adjectives in us, like bonus, ‘good.’ The fem. of some of these adjectives
is in £ and then follows nadf at 105. In the succeeding examples only the Nom.
cases sing. will be given.
Sincutar. ए,
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC, FEM. NEUT.
शुभस् शुभा शुभम् | पि.^० ए. शुभो शुभे शुभे
Ac. शुभम् शुभाम् — ID. Ab. शुभाभ्याम् शुभाभ्याम् शुभाभ्याम्
1. git pm शुभेन ©. 1५. शुभयोस् शुभयोष् शुभयोस्
PLURAL.
शुभाय शुभाये शुभाय NV शुभास् शुभाम् शुभानि
Ab. शुभात् शुभायास् शुभात् Ac. शुभान् — re
©. शुभस्य -- शुभस्य व. (वा ee
7. Ab. शुमेभ्यस् शुभाभ्यस् शुभेभ्यस्
= =
~ श pre शुवे ©. शुभानाम् शुभानाम् शुभानाम्
yo दतः श Ley py शुभेषु
CLASS, STEM. NOM. MASC, NOM. FEM. NOM. NEUT.
~~ ~~ “~~~ ( नन SS
[ees ‘dear’ प्रियस् प्रिया प्रियम्
सुन्दर ‘beautiful? सुन्दरम् मुन्दण ण सुन्दयौ. 105. सुन्दरम्
2. {शुचि ‘pure? शुचिम् शु्िस् शुचि
[ arag ‘pale’ पाण्डुम् THER पार
साधु ‘good’ साधुस् साधुस् or साध्वी. 105. साधु
7g ‘ tender” मृदुस् मृद्वी मृदु
भीर् ‘timid’ भीरस् भीरस् or भीरूम्. 25. भीर्
Obs.—The neuter of adjectives in i and u may in D. Ab. G. L. sing. and ©. L,
du. optionally follow the masculine form; thus, D. sing. १८१८ or Suéaye, mridune
or mridave; Ab. G. sing. Sudinas or guces, mridunas or mridos; L sing. Sudini
or Suau, myiduni or mridau; G. L. du. sudinos or Sudyos, mridunos or mridvos
See 119. a,
ADJECTIVES, 115
188. 8. Examples of Adjectives formed from Substantives.
CLASS, STEM. NOM. MASC, NOM. FEM, NOM. NEUT.
eee OO
ion “human? मानुषस् मानुषी मानुषम्
धानिक ‘religious’ भार्भिकस् धामिकी धाभिकम्
{ बत्ठवत् ‘strong’ बलवान् वक्वती. 705. बलवत्
vita ‘prosperous’ श्रीमान् परीमती. 105. श्रीमत्
6. { सुखिन् ‘happy’ मुखी सुखिनी. 105. मुखि
189. C. LHxamples of Compound Adjectives.
CLASS. STEM, NOM. MASC. NOM. FEM. NOM. NEUT.
So Ss SS ASS SSS Se
रः { बहुषिद्च ‘very learned’ बहुविद्यस् बहूविद्या बहुविद्यम्
2. 1 दवि ‘ foolish? gafeq = gafea दवि
3. { चल्तनु ‘small-bodied’ अत्पततुस् अत्पतनुस् wang
4. 1 बहुदात् ‘very liberal’ बहुदाता बहुदाती. 105. बहुदातु
5. { सवैजित् ` all-conquering ? सवैजित् स्वैजित् सवैजित्
6. { मुजन्मन् ˆ well-born ? सुनन्मा मुनन्मा सुनन्म
7. { गततचे्स् ‘deprived of sense? गत्तचेतास् गत्तचेतास् गतचेतस्
8. { मर्मस्पृश् ‘piercing the vitals? AAR ममेस्यृक् AAR
190. Examples of some other Compound Adjectives.
साह्ध्मा ‘a shell-blower’ (108. a). WAT WRT WAT
नष्टच्री ‘ruined’ (126. h). नष्टप्रीस् नष्टच्रीस् aefa
खलपू ‘a sweeper ’ (126. 8). as खत्पस् खलपु
दिव्यमातु ‘having 2 divine mother’ (130). दिव्यमाता दिव्यमाता दिव्यमातृ
बहुरे ^ rich’ (134. a). बहणस् बहुणस् बहुरि
बहनो ‘having many ships’ (124. ५). , वडुनोस् वहुनोस् बहतु
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
197. The degrees of comparison are formed in two ways:
1st, by adding to the stem तर ¢ara (= Gr. -repo-s) for the com-
parative (see 80, LXI), and wa tama ( = Lat. -timu-s, Gr. -rato-s) for
the superlative (see 80. LIX), both of which suffixes are declined in
m. f. 11, like Subha at 187; thus,
पुख्य punya, ‘holy,’ YWAT punya-tara (Nom. पा, f. n. as, d, am), ‘more holy,’
पुख्यतन punya-tama (Nom. m. f. n, as, d, am), “most holy.’ Similarly, धनवत् dha-
2
116 ADJECTIVES,
navat, ‘wealthy, धनवत्तर dhanavat-tara, ‘more wealthy,’ TATAA dhanavat-tama,
“most wealthy.’ ‘
a. A final n is rejected; as, धनिन् dhanin, ‘rich,’ धनितर dhani-tara,
‘more rich, धनितम dhani-tama, ‘ most rich”
¢. विद्वस्, ‘wise, makes farat, fagaa. Compare 168. ९.
192. andly, by adding ईयस् éyas (Nom. m. f. n. -éydn, -éyasi, -iyas,
see declension below, cf. Gr. iwv) for the comparative (see 86. V), and
इष्ठ ishtha (Nom. m. f. n. -ishthas, -ishthd, -ishtham, declined like Subha
at 187, cf. Gr. -10706) for the superlative (see 80. XLVIII).
Obs.—The difference in the use of tara, tama, and tyas, ishtha, seems to be
this—that éyas and ishtha, being of the nature of primary suffixes, are generally
added to roots or to modifications of roots (the root being sometimes weakened,’
sometimes gunated), while tara and tama are of more general application.
a. Note, that while the Sanskrit comparative suffix ends in z and s (¢yans) for
the Strong cases, the Greek has adhered to the n throughout (N. fydn= ८५४)
Voc. ¢yan=10v); and the Latin has taken the s for its neuter (¢yas=ius, neuter
of ior; s being changed to r, in the masc. and oblique cases). Cf. Sk. gartyas with
Lat. gravius.
193. Before tyas and ishtha, the stem generally disburdens itself
of a final vowel, or of the more weighty suffixes in, vin, vat, mat,
and ४; thus, बलिन् ‘strong,’ ब्छीयस् ‘more strong,’ बलिष्ठ ‘ strongest ;?
पापिन् ‘wicked, पापीयस् ‘more wicked,’ पापिष्ठ ‘most wicked ;’ ल्घु ‘light,’
लघीयस् ‘lighter, fag ‘lightest ;2 मेधाविन् ‘intelligent,’ मेधीयस् ‘more
intelligent,” मेधिष्ठ ‘most intelligent.’ Similarly, महत् ‘great, महीयस्
‘ greater,’ महिष्ठ ‘ greatest.’
a, Compare स्वादीयान् (पि. of ऽव) from svddu, ‘sweet,’ with d= tay from
dvs ; and खादिष्ठस् with 73-0706.
The declension of बलीयस् masc. is here given in full (see 167).
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLUBAL.
N. बलीयान् baliydn बलीयांसो Jaliydnsau बत्तरीयां सस् baliydnsas
Ac. वल्यां सम् baliydnsam — baltydnsau qataag baliyasas
I. बलीयसा baliyasd बली योभ्याम् baliyobhydm qararfrg baliyobhis
1. बलीयसे saliyase ` ०८०८१९१ बलीयोभ्यस् baliyobhyas
Ab. बली यसस् baliyasas — baliyobhyim — baliyobhyas
©. — baliyasas = बत्ीयसोस् baltyasos बत्टीयसाम् baliyasdém
L. qatafa baliyasi — baliyasos -बत्टीयःसु baliyahsu
V. बत्कीयन् baliyan बलीयांसौ aliydnsan बत्टीयांसस् baliydnsas
बलीयसी fem. is like nad{ (105), and बल्नीयस् neut. like manas (164).
ADJECTIVES. 117
194. Besides the rejection of the final, the stem often undergoe
change, as in Greek (cf. éxOiwv, 2xOcaros, fr. éxOpds); and its place is
sometimes supplied by a substitute (cf. BeAriwy, 667८07०५, fr. dya0ds).
The following is a list of the substitutes :
POSITIVE. SUBSTITUTE. COMPARATIVE, SUPERLATIVE,
सन्ति antika, ‘near’ नेद neda (rt. निर्) नेदीयस् नेदिष्ठ
ल्प alpa, ‘little? * कन kana (rt. कन्) कनीयस् कनिष्ठ
उर् ५४, ‘large’ (evpvs) वर vara (rt. वृ) वरीयस् वरिष
WF riju, ‘straight’ * ऋज १४० (rt. WA) ऋजीयस् ऋूजिष्ट
FT kriga, ‘thin,’ ‘lean’ क्रश kraga (५. कृश्) क्रशीयस् क्रशिष्ट
fan kshipra, ‘ quick’ aq kshepa (rt. faq) छेपीयस् afar
WE kshudra, ‘small,’ ‘mean’ wie kshoda (rt. Wg) ्षोदीयस् afer
गुरू guru, ‘heavy’ (60०४४) गर gara (rt. गृ) may गरिष्ठ
WU tripra, ‘ satisfied’ | तप trapa (rt. तृप्) तपीयस् afar
BTS dérgha, ‘long’ Ba drdgha (et. FY) द्राघीयस् ofa
RC diira, ‘distant’ द्व dava (rt. ठु) दवीयस् दविष्ठ
EE dridha, ‘firm’ FE dragha (ण. दह्) = द्रढीयस् gies
परिवृढ parivridha,‘eminent? = परसित्रढ parivradha परित्रदीयस् परित्रदिष्ठ
पृथु prithu, ‘broad’ (गरक) प्रय pratha (xt. 04) = प्रथीयस् प्रथिष्ठ
eres { Wt sa (rt. श्री) श्रेयस् wag
WW pragsasya, good’ ,
FATT jyd (rt. ज्या) ज्यायस् ज्येष्ठ
प्रिय priya, ‘ dear’ Wt pra (rt. प्री) प्रेयस् we
बहू bahu, ‘much,’ ‘frequent’ At bhai (rt. YZ) भूयस् भूयिष्ट
बहुल Lahula, ‘much’ वंह banka (rt. HE) TTA बंहिष्ठ
भृश bhrisa, ‘excessive’ WY 1०4 (+. भृज्) भ्र्ञीयस् भ्रशिष्ठ
भृद् mridu, “soft? Aq mrada (rt. AZ) खदीयस् afer
युवन् yuvan, ‘young’ (juvenis) यव yava (rt. यु) यवीयस् यविष्ठ
वाठ vddha, ‘firm,’ ‘thick’ साध sddha (rt. साध्) साधीयस् साधिष्ठ
< <
ड oriddha, ‘old? वषं pails (rt. वृष्) वर्षीयस् pia
FIT t syd (rt. ज्या) ज्यायस् ज्येष्ठ
वृन्दार vrinddra, ‘excellent’ वृन्द् vrinda वृन्दीयस् afew
स्थिर sthira, ‘firm,’ ‘stable? = स्य stha (rt. स्था) स्थेयस् स्थेष्ठ
स्यूत sthila, ‘ gross, ‘bulky’? = स्यव sthava (rt. स्थ) स्थवीयस् स्यविष्ठ
स्फिर sphira, ‘turgid’ स्फ spha (rt. BATA) स्पोयस् स्ये
दस्त ‰ 0500, ‘short’ हस hrasa (rt. FA) हसीयस् pias
* ल्यप may be also regularly अल्पीयस्, अल्पिष्ठ ; and ऋजु may be रजी यस्, &e. ।
+ In the case of चर and प्रं 6 final vowel is not rejected, but combines with fyas
and ishtha agreeably to Sandhi. In ज्या and 4, yas is affixed in place of éyas.
118 NUMERALS.
195. Tara and tama may be added to substantives; as, fr. राजन्, ‘a king,’
राजतर, &०.; fr. FH, ‘pain,’ दुः खतर, &c. If added to a word like सर्पिस्, ‘clarified
butter,’ the usual euphonic changes must take place; thus, afqzz, &c. (70).
` ‘These suffixes are also added to inseparable prepositions; as, उत् “up,” उत्तर
higher,’ waa ‘highest’ (cf. Lat. ex-timus, in-timus, &c.); also to pronominal
stems (236); and tama is added to numerals (209, 211).
196. Tard and tamdé may sometimes be added to feminine stems ending in ¢
and ४ (like tat : 2 woman,’ सती ‘a faithful wife,’ विदुषी “a wise woman’), which
may optionally be retained or shortened ; e.g. स्त्रीतय > स्त्रीतमा, or स्त्रित, स्ितमा;
सतीतरा, सतीतमा, or सतिता, सतितमा; विदुषी तमा or विदुषितमा (Pan. vi. 3, 44. 45)-
But if the feminine be the feminine of a masculine substantive, as व्रा्मणी of
‘TAU, the shortening is compulsory, as ATAfAATT (Pan. vi. 3, 42).
197. Tara and tama may even be added, in conjunction with the syllable खाम् dm,
to the inflexions of verbs; as, जल्पतितराम् ‘he talks more than he ought.’ See
80. LIX, LXI.
a. Sometimes ¢yas and tara, ishtha and tama are combined together in the same
word (just as in English we say lesser); thus, श्रेयस्तर, श्रेष्ठतम ‡ ज्ये्ठतमः; नेदिष्टतम,
&c.: and tara may be even added to ishtha ; thus, ज्येष्ठतर.
Section IV.— NUMERALS.
CARDINALS,
198. The cardinals are, रक m.f.n.1,9; द्वि 7.1. 2,2; fam.f.n.
3,3; चतुर् "1. † 2. 4,8; waqm.fin. 5,4; षष् 01. fin. 6, ६ ; wm. fin.
7,9; Seqm. fin. 8, ४; नवन् 9, ९; दशन् 10, १०; रकादशान् II, ११; इादशान्
12, १२; त्रयोदशन् 13, १३; चतुदेशन् 14, १४ ; WHEW 1.5, १५; षोडशन् 16, १६ ;
BRETT 17, १; रष्टाशन् 78, १; नवदशान् or ऊनविंशति 79, १९; विंशति 20, २०;
रुकविंशति 21; विंशति 22; तयोविंशति 23; चतुर्विशति 24; पच्चविंशति 25;
घडडशति 26; सभरविंशति 27; werfigfa 28 ; नवविंशति or ऊनविंशत् 29 ;
fama £ 30; रकतिंशत् 31; डाविंशत् 32; तयस्त्रिंशत् 33; चतुस्त्रिंशत् 34;
पच्चतिंशत् 35; षट्विंशत् 36; सप्रतिंशत् 37; अष्टातिंशत् 38; नवविंशत् or
FAIA 39 ; चत्वारिशत् 40; खकचत्वारिंशत् 41 ; दविचत्वारिशत् or ्वाचत्वा-
रशत् 42; विचत्वारिंशत् or तयश्त्वारिशित् 43; चतुश्ठत्वारिशत् 44; पच्चचत्वारिंशत्
45; षट्चत्वारिंशत् 46 ; सप्रचत्वारिशत् 47; अष्टाचत्वारिंशत् or सष्टचत्वारिशत् 48 ;
नवचत्वरिंशत् Or SATIN 49 ; पच्चाशत् 50; रकपच्वाशत् 51 ; द्वि पच्वाश॒त् or
द्वापच्चाशत् 52; ति प्वाशत् or तयःपच्वाशत् 53; चतुःपच्नाशत् 54 ; पच्चपव्वाशत् 55;
पट् पव्वाश॒त् 56 ; सप्रपच्चाशत् 57; अष्टपव्चाशत् or सष्टा पच्चाशत् 58 ; नवपच्चाश॒त् or
ऊनषषटि 59; षष्टि 60; रकषष्टि 61; द्विषष्टि or grufe 62; faufe or तयःषष्टि*
63; चतुःषष्टि * 64; waefe 65; षट्षष्टि 66; anafe 67; weute or werate
* These may also be written @atufe, चतुष्षष्टि. See 62. a. and 63.
NUMERALS. 119
68; waufe or ऊनसप्रति 69; anfa 70; waanfa 71; द्विसप्तति or granfa
72; विसप्रति or तयःसारति 73; चतुःसप्रति 74; waanfa 75; azanfa 76;
ananta 77; अष्टसप्रति or सष्टासप्रति 78; नवसप्नति or ऊनाीति 79; सज्ोति
80; रकाशीत्ति 87; शीति 82; च्यशीति 83; चतुरशीति 84; पव्वाशौति 85;
षडशीति 86 ; सप्राशीति 87; खष्टाीति 88 ; नवाशीति or ऊननवति 89; नवति
9०; र्कनवति 97; द्विनवति or इगनवति 92; faaafa or तयोनवति 93;
चतुनेवति 94; पच्चनवति 95; षणवति 96 (43./); सप्तनवति 97; अष्टनवति or
अष्टानवति 98 ; नवनवति or ऊनशञत 1. (m.) 99; Wan. (also m.*) or TH श॒तम्
100; रकशत 0. 101; द्विशत 2. 102; लित 103; चतुःशत 104; Taya 105;
BMA 106; AANA 107; अष्टशत 108; नवत 109; दशत 710; हितम्
(nom, sing. n.) or दधे श॒ते (nom, du. n.) or Wi (nom. du. n.) 200; विशतम्
(nom. sing. n.) or त्रीणि श॒तानि (nom. pl. ०.) 300; ag:yag or चत्वारि श॒तानि
(nom. pl. ०.) 400; Wayar or Ta शतानि 500; षट् शतम् or षट् शतानि 600 ;
and so on up to सहचर 1. (also m.) 1000, which is also expressed by
रकं सहम् or by दश शतानि or by दशशती †; दे सहस्रे 2000; alfa
azatfa 3000; चत्वारि सहघ्राणि 4000, &c.t
199. The intervening numbers between 100 and 1000, those be-
tween 1000 and 2000, and so on, may be expressed by compounding
the adjective अधिक adhika (or occasionally sat uttara), ‘more,’ ‘plus,’
with the cardinal numbers ; thus 101 is wayray (see above) or रकाधिकं
शतम् (or occasionally vatat श॒तम्), i.e. ‘a hundred plus one,’ or com-
pounded thus, रकाधिकशतम्, Similarly, द्यधिकं शतम् or द्यधिकशतम् 102 ;
च्यधिकं श॒तम् or च्यधिकश॒तम् 103 ; सप्राधिकं शतम् or सप्तोत्तरं श॒तम् 107; तिंशदधि-
कशतम् 130 ; पच्ाशदधिकशतम् 150 (also expressed by सारधेश॒तम् ‘one hun-
dred and a half’); षडंश॒त्यधिकद्विर॒तम् 226 ; sagtufwafagay 383 ; पच्वा-
शीत्यधिकचतुःश॒तम् 485; षसखवा्यधिकपच्चश॒तम् 596 ; षद् षश्यधिकषद्श॒ तम् 666 ;
ष्यधिकसरस्रम् or षष्युत्तरसदस्रम् 1060; षोडशशतम् or षटृशताधिकसहस्रम् 1600;
षट् षश्यधिकषोडशशतम् 1666 {.
* I have found Wa Wat: ‘a hundred hundred’ and सप्तशता; ‘seven hundred’
(agreeing with वाणाः) in the Mahd-bharata.
† चतुःसहस्म् 18 used in Rig-veda V. 30, 15 for 4000; and on the same principle
विसदघ्रम् might stand for 3000, and द्विसहस्रम् for 2000, &c.; but it is a question
-whether these might not also stand for 1004, 1003, 1002 respectively.
{ Similarly 2130 may be expressed by तिंशदधिकेकविंशतिरातम् or -जश॒तानि or by
using UZ; thus, लिंशदधिके कशतपरे 2 सहस्रे. Other forms of expressing numerals
are also found; e.g. 21,870 सहल्राण्येकविंशातिः शतान्यष्टो भूयश्च सप्ततिः ; 109,350
शतसहस्रं नव सरघ्राणि पच्चाशच्छतानि तीणि. According to Pan. vi. 3, 76, रकान्न
may be prefixed to a number in the sense “by one not,’ “less by one;’ ९. g. रकान्न-
विंशति ‘by one not twenty,’ ‘one less than twenty,’ i.e. 19.
120 NUMERALS.
In the same way the adjective wa ‘less,’ ° minus,’ is often placed
before a cardinal number, to denote one less than that number, रक
‘one’ being either expressed or understood ; thus, ऊनविंशति or खकोन-
विंशति ‘twenty minus one’ or ‘nineteen’ (cf. Lat. undeviginti, i. €, unus
de viginti). And other cardinals, besides रकं ‘one,’ are sometimes
prefixed to ऊन, to denote that they are to be subtracted from a
following number ; as, watt श॒तम् or watayaR ‘a hundred less five”
or ‘ninety-five.’
a, Again, the ordinals are sometimes joined to the cardinals to
express 111 and upwards ; thus, रकादशं शतम् or एकादश॒शतम् 311; Waey
शतम् 115; विंशं शतम् 120; विंशं श॒तम् or तिंशशतम् 130; WI WHA 150;
चतुरोवतं शतम् 194; पच्दशं द्विशतम् 215; विंशं सहस्रम् or विश॒ सहम् 1020.
b. There are single words for the highest numbers; thus, युत n. (also m.) “ten
thousand ;? Sn. or लल्ला. or नियुत १, (algo m.) “a Jac,’ ‘one hundred thousand ’
(waaze) ; WA n. (also m.) “one million ;’ कोटि £ ‘a krore,’ ‘ten millions ;
Wadd m.n. one hundred millions ;’ merge 7. n. or पद्च n. or AST 11. ` 016 thou-
sand millions ; Wa n. ‘ten thousand millions ; faa n. ‘one hundred thousand
millions ;' महापद्य n. 2 billion; शङ्कं. (or महाखवं ०.) ‘ten billions ;* Wem. ०. or
BAT m. ‘a hundred billions ;? महाह ए. n. or Wed ‘a thousand billions ;’ हाहा पण.
or मध्य ‘ten thousand billions ;’? AZTRTSt m. or परा m. ‘one hundred thousand
billions ;’ Ya 7. (धुल) ‘one million billions;’ ATYA n. (ARTY) ‘ten million
billions ;” aeifgut f. ‘one hundred million billions ;’ महाघ्ोहिणी ‘one thousand
million billions.’
_ Note—Some variation occurs in some of the above names for high numbers,
according to different authorities.
DECLENSION OF CARDINALS.
200, रक 1, द्धि 2 (duo, dio), fa 3 (tres, Tpeis, Tpia), चतुर् 4 (quatuor),
are declined in three genders,
wa eka, ‘one’ (no dual), follows the declension of the pronominals
at 237: Nom. m. रकस् ९८5; Dat. m. wwe ekasmai; Nom. f. रका ekd;
Dat. f. रकस्ये ekasyai; Nom. n, रकम् ekam; Nom pl. m. wa eke, ‘some.’
It may take the suffixes zara and tama; thus, eka-tara, ‘one of two;
eka-tama, ‘one of many ;’ which also follow the declension of pro-
nominals ; see 236, 238
201. fx dvi, ‘two’ (dual only), is declined as if the stem were
द्ध dva, like Siva; thus, प, Ac. V. m. gt dvau, f.n, 2 dve; I. 7, Ab.
प, f.n. द्वाभ्याम्; G. L. इयोस्.
202. वि tri, ‘three’ (pl. only), is declined in the masculine like
NUMERALS, 121
the plural of nouns whose stems end in Zi at 110, except in Gen. ;
thus, N. ए, masc. लयम् ; Ac. त्रीन् ; I. विभिस्; D. Ab. विभ्यस्; G. वया-
शाम् (Ved. वीणाम्); L. fag. The feminine forms its cases from a
stem faq; thus, N. Ac. ए. fem. faaa; 1. तिसृभिस् ; D. Ab. frag; G.
तिसृणाम्; L. frgy. The पि, Ac. ए. neut. is त्रीणि ; the rest like १३8०.
203. चतुर् éatur, ‘four’ (plural only), is thus declined: N. प्र, ०1४8९,
चत्वारस् (Terrapes, 7६०००/०९९) ; Ac. agra; 1. चतुभिस् ; D. Ab. चतुभ्येस् ;
©. चतुशोमन्; L. चुपँ. प. Ac. ए. fem. चतस्रस्; I. चतमुभिस्; 1). Ab. चतसृ-
भ्यस्; ५७. चतसृणाम्; L, चतसृषु. N. Ac. ४. neut. चत्वारि ; the rest like
the masculine,
a. In datur, shash, panéan, &c., an augment is inserted before dm, the termina-
tion of Gen., by Pan. vi. 1, 55.
204. पन् panéan, ‘five’ (plural only), is the same for masc., fem.,
and neut. It is declined in I. D, Ab. L. like nouns in an (146).
The Gen, lengthens the penultimate; thus, N. Ac, प्र, wa (zévre) ;
1. wafrq; D. Ab. प्चभ्यस् ; G. पच्चानाम्; L. wag.
Like waq are declined, any ‘seven’ (septem, émrd), नवन् ‘nine’
(novem), zy ‘ten’ (decem, १६८०), र काद् शन् ` eleven’ (undecim), द्वादशन्
‘twelve’ (dwodecim), and all other numerals ending in an, excepting
सष्टन् ‘eight.’
205. षष् shash, ‘six,’ is the same for masc., fem., and neut., and
is thus declined: N, Ac. V. az; I. wgfvq; D. Ab. षड्भ्यस् ; G. षणाम्
shanndm (43.f); L. azq.
a. Similarly without distinction of gender, wey ashfan, ‘eight :’
N. Ac. ए. अष्टौ or We (octo, derd); 1. अष्टाभिस् or wef; D. Ab. खष्टाभ्यस्
or am; 0. अष्टानाम्; L. werg or अष्टसु.
6, The numerals from waq ‘five’ to नवद्ङन् ‘nineteen’ have no
distinction of gender, but agree in number and case with the nouns
to which they are joined; thus, waft नारीभिः ‘by five women.’
206. All the remaining cardinal numbers, from ऊनविंशति ‘nineteen’
to ya ‘a hundred, aga ‘a thousand,’ and upwards, may be declined
‘in the singular, even when joined with masculine, feminine, or neuter
nouns in the plural, Those ending in ति ti are feminine, and declined
like मति mati at 112 ; and those in त् ४ are also feminine, and declined
like सरित् sarit at 136; thus, fagrat aan: “by twenty men;’ विरतिं
नरान् ace. pl. ‘twenty men;’ fayrat yee: ‘by thirty men;’ fet
नरान् acc, pl. ‘thirty men.’ ya ‘a hundred’ and wea ‘a thousand’
and all the higher numbers are declined according to their final
R
122 NUMERALS,
vowels, whether a, d, i, ४, or ४; thus, wat fart ‘a hundred ancestors ;’
शतात् पितृभ्यः ‘from a hundred ancestors एकाधिकरातं पितरः ‘a hundred
and one ancestors ;? सहस्रेण पितृभिः ‘with a thousand ancestors ;° प्रयु
नणः ‘a million men;’ कोट्या Bee: ‘with ten million men,’ &c.
207. Although these numerals, from Wafayfe ‘nineteen,’ when joined with
plural nouns, may be declined in the singular, yet they may take a dual or plural
when used alone and in particular constructions; as, विंशती “two twenties ;” विंशतौ
“two thirties ; fayag many thirties ; शते “two hundred ;’ ज॒तानि ‘hundreds ;’
सहस्राणि ‘thousands ;’ ‘sixty thousand sons,’ षष्टिः पुत्रसहस्राणि
The things numbered are often put in the genitive; thus, 2 WZ@ स्थानाम् two
thousand chariots ;’ WAyatfst नागानाम् seven hundred elephants ; रकविंशञति
शराणाम् ‘twenty-one arrows.’ See other examples in Syntax at 835.
ORDINALS.
208. The ordinals are, waa ‘first’* (cf. 00705, primus); fata
second’ (devrepo-s) ; gata ‘third’ (tertiu-s); which three are all
declined like Siva and Subha at 187; but the first may optionally
follow sarva at 237 in N.V. pl. m. (waa or प्रयमास् ) ; and the other
two the pronominals at 237, 238 in D. Ab. L. sing. m. f. n.; thus,
D. द्वितीयस्मे or favtara m. n., द्वितीयस्यै or द्भितीयाये f. See also 239.
209. “qa ‘fourth’ † (rérapros); waa ‘fifth;’ षष्ठ ‘sixth;? सप्तम
‘seventh’ (septimus); ea ‘eighth; नवम ‘ninth’ (nonus); दशम ‘tenth’
(decimus) ; declined like Siva and Subha for masc. and neut., and
like nadé at 105 for feminine; thus, Nom. m. चतुस्, f. चतुर्थो. (In
waa &c, the old superlative suffix ma may be noted.)
210. The ordinals from ‘eleventh’ to ‘nineteenth’ are formed from
the cardinals by rejecting the final x; thus, from wateye ‘eleven,’
रकाद्श॒ ‘eleventh’ (Nom. m. f. 1. एकादशम्, -शी, -WA, 103, 105, 104).
211, ‘Twentieth,’ ^ thirtieth,’ ‘fortieth,’ and ^ fiftieth’ are formed
either by adding the superlative suffix tama (195) to the cardinal, or
by rejecting the final syllable or letter of the cardinal; as, from
विंशति ‘twenty,’ विंशतितम or fay ‘twentieth’ (Nom. m. f. n. -मस्, -मी,
-मम्; -शस्, -Yt, -WA, 103, 105, 104). Similarly, fayraa or fay ° thir-
11617." @argraa or qaty ‘fiftieth, &c. The intermediate ordinals
are formed by prefixing the numeral, as in the cardinals; thus,
vafdgfaaa or vafdg ‘twenty-first,’ &c.
* Other adjectives may be used to express first ;’ as, साद्यत्, -द्या, दयम्; सादिमस्,
“AT, -मम्; WTA, ग्रा, ग्रम्; सथिमस्, -मा, -मम्
+ तुरीयस्, -या, -यम्; वुपेस्, -पा, -येम् are also used for ‘fourth.’
PRONOUNS, 123
212. The other ordinals, from ‘sixtieth’ to ‘ninetieth, are formed
by adding tama; also by changing ¢i to ¢a in the case of another
numeral preceding, but not otherwise; thus, from षष्टि ‘ sixty,’ षष्टितम
“sixtieth ;? but we for ‘sixtieth’ can only be used when another
numeral precedes, as रकषष्ट or रक्षष्टितिम ‘sixty-first, विषष्ट or विषष्टितम
° sixty-third > from नवति ‘ninety,’ नवतितम ‘ninetieth ;2 but waa for
“ninetieth’ can only be used when another numeral precedes (see
Pan. v. 2, 58). ।
213. ‘Hundredth’ and ^ thousandth’ are formed by adding tama
to ya and सहस्र, declinable in three genders; thus, शततम ‘hundredth’
(Nom. पा. f. ए. शुततमस्, -मी, -मम्). Similarly, सहस्रतमस्, -मी, -मम्,
^ thousandth.’
214. The aggregation of two or more numbers is expressed by modifications of
the ordinal numbers; thus, इयम् ‘a duad,’ तयम् ‘a triad,’ चतुष्टयम् ‘the aggregate
of four,’
215. There are a few adverbial numerals; as, सकृत् once,’ द्विस् ‘twice,’ faq
‘thrice,’ चतुस् ‘four times.’ कृत्वस् may be added to cardinal numbers, with a
similar signification ; as, पच्चकृत्वस् “five times.’ The neuter of the ordinals may
‘be used adverbially ; as, WAR ‘in the first place.’
For a table of the numerical symbols see page 3.
CHAPTER V.
PRONOUNS.
216. Pronouns (sarva-ndman) have no one stem ‘equally appli-
cable to all the cases. In the 1st personal pronoun, the stem of
the sing. is practically अह् ah in Nom., and in the oblique cases म ma.
In the 2nd, the stem of the sing. is practically त्व tva or तु tu, while
that of the dual and plural is यु yu. The 3rd has स sa for the stem
of the Nom. sing., and @ fa for the other cases.
217. Nevertheless the form of the pronoun used in derivative and
compound words is regarded by grammarians as expressive of its
most general and comprehensive state, and this in the pronouns of
the first and second persons, corresponds with the Ablative cases,
singular and plural, and in the other pronouns, with the Nominative
and Accusative cases singular neuter..
R 2
124 PRONOUNS.
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Obs.—In Sanskrit, as in other languages, the general and indefinite character
of the first two personal pronouns is denoted by the fact that no distinction of
gender is admitted. For the same reason, the termination of the Nom. case of
some pronouns is made to resemble the neuter, as the most general state. This
may also be the reason why the 3rd pronoun sa drops the s of the Nom. case
before all consonants. There is no Vocative case.
218, मद् mad, sing. ‘I,’ warg asmad, pl. ‘we.’
N. सरम् cham, ‘1? आवाम् dvdm, ‘we two? वयम् vayam, ‘we?
Ae. माम् mdm or मा 704, ‘me’ — dvdm or नो nau, “us two’ सस्मान् asmdn or नस् nas, ‘us’
1. मया mayd सवाभ्याम् dvdbhydm अस्माभिस् asmdbhis
70. मद्यम् 1001/2008 ०7 मे 9८ — dvdbhydmor नो nau अस्मभ्यम् asmabhyam or नस् nas
Ab. aq mat * — dudbhydm सस्मत् asmat
G. मम mama or मे me स्आवयोस् dvayos or नो naw अस्माकम् asmdkam or नस् nas
L. मयि mayi — dvayos अस्मासु asmdsu
219. त्वद् tad, sing. ‘thou,’ ye yushmad, pl. ‘you.’
N. त्वम् tvam, ‘thou’ युवान् yuvdm, ‘you two’ युयम् yiyam, ‘you’ or ‘ye?
Ac. त्वाम् ivdm or त्वा,०८ §=— yuvdm or amvdm युष्मान् yushmdn or वस् vas
I. त्वया tvayd युवाभ्याम् yuvdbhydm युष्माभिस् yushmdbhis
D. paatubhyam or tte ~— yuvdbhydm or वाम् ४६ युष्मभ्यम् yushmabhyam or वस् ८८
Ab. त्वत् ८०८४ * — yuvdbhydm युष्मत् yushmat
G. wa tava or ते te युवयोस् yuvayos or वाम् ८८६४ युष्माकम् yushmdkam or वस् vas
L. त्वयि tvayi — yuvayos युष्मासु yushmdsu
Obs.—The alternative forms md, me, nau, &c., have no accent, and cannot be
used at the beginning of sentences, nor before the particles éa,‘and;’ vd, ‘or;?
eva, ‘indeed,’ &०,
220, we tad, ‘he,’ ‘ that?
MASCULINE.
N. सस् sas (usually @ sa), ‘he’ तौ tau, ‘they two’ 7 Ze, ‘they,’ ‘those’
Ac. तम् tam — tau तान् ८4
I. तेन tena ताभ्याम् 16010400 मेस् tais
* As the stems mad and tvad are generally used in compounds, mat-tas and
tvat-tas more commonly stand for the Ablative; see 719. Similarly, the Ablative
plural may be yushmat-tas, asmat-tas ; but these very rarely occur.
t By 67, स will be the usual form,. सस् usually exists as सो, see 64. ०.
PRONOUNS. 125
D. wet tasmai ताभ्याम् tabhydm तेभ्यस् tebhyas
Ab. तस्मात् 105१0140 — tdbhydm — tebhyas
©. तस्य tasya तयोस् 1८/08 तेषाम् ९१८१४
L. तस्मिन् 1451117 — tayos तेषु teshu
FEMININE,
N. सा sd, ‘she’ ते 1९, ‘they two’ (fem.) तास् dds, ‘they’ (fem.). ,
Ac, ताम् tam —te — tds
1. wat tayd ताभ्याम् tdbhydm ताभिस्. 14045
D. wet 105} — tdbhyém ताभ्यस् tdbhyas
Ab, तस्यास् fasyds — tdbhyém — tdbhyas
७. — tasyds तयोस् 10५5 । तासाम् ८454"
1५. तस्याम् tasydm — ४८/05 तासु {45४
NEUTER,
N, Ac. तत् tat, ते te, तानि téni; the rest like the masculine.
a, Observe the resemblance of the Sanskrit personal pronouns to those of the dead
and living cognate languages. Aham or ah is the Greek eye (Holic eyav), Latin
ego, German ich, English “I;’ mdm or md (the latter being the oldest form found
in the Vedas) equals eué, me; mahyam=mihi ; mayi=mei > the mat of the Abl.
sing. and of asmat, yushmat, corresponds to the Latin met in memet, nosmet, &c. :
vayam or va is the English “we ;’ asmén=us; nas=nos; tvam=tu, ‘thou;’ todm
or tud=te, ‘thee; tubhyam=tibi; tvayimtui; yiyam= एल, English ‘you;’
vas==vos. The 3rd personal pronoun corresponds to the Greek article; thus, tau
= To; tam= TOV; tdbhydm == 702 70419, &e.
DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
221. The third personal pronoun ag tad, ‘he,’ declined above, is
constantly used in a demonstrative sense, to signify ‘that’ or ‘this.’
a. It is sometimes used emphatically with other pronouns, like ile and ipse ;
thus, Hse ‘ille ego;? ते वयम् ii noes? स त्वन् ae tu; WAR Silla tu?
ते यूयम् “ili vos <” स रषः 272 ipse ;? WE रतत् id ipsum.
222. It is also combined with the relative ya to form another demonstrative
pronoun (rarely used except in the Veda), of which the stem is fyad: N. स्यम् (67),
त्यौ, व्ये; Ac. WH, &९. Fem. स्या, वये, MIM, &०. Neut. व्यत्, a, त्यानि, &९..
223. By prefixing र ९ to तद्, another common pronoun is formed,
more proximately demonstrative ; thus,
126 PRONOUNS.
wae etad, ˆ this.’
MASCULINE.
N. waqeshas (usu.emesha).70. रतौ efau रे ete
Ac. रतम् etam or रनम् enam — etau or रनौ enau रतान् etn or रनान् endn
1. रुतेन ९1९1८ or waa enena = earaTa_etdbhydm wag etais
D. waa etasmai — etébhydm भ्यस् etebhyas
Ab. रतस्मात् etasmdt — etdébhydm — etebhyas
७. रतस्य etasya । तयोस् ctayos or TAMA enayos तेषाम् eteshdm
L. रतस्मिन् etasmin — etayosor — enayos रुतेषु eteshu
The feminine 18 N. रषा eshd, रते ete, रतास् etds; Ac. रताम् or TAM,
Be or wa, रतास् or vara; I. रतया or eam, रुताभ्याम्, ताभिस्;
D. waa, &e.
The neuter is N. एतत्, शते, रतानि; Ac. रतत् or Tay, रते or रने,
रतानि or रनानि, &c.
a, The alternative forms रनम्, waa, warm, &c. are, like those of
the 1st and 2nd person, enclitic, and ought not to be used at the
beginning of a sentence. Moreover, they can only be used with
reference to some one or something mentioned in a previous sen-
tence (see Syntax 836).
With etad cf. Lat. iste, ista, istud ; etam = istum, etasya =istius, etat =istud.
224. There is another common demonstrative pronoun, of which
इदम् tdam, ‘this,’ the N. neuter, is supposed to represent the most
general state (cf. Lat. is, ea, id), though there are really two stems—
the vowels अ a and gi (cf. a-tas, i-tas, 719). The latter serves also as
the stem of certain pronominals, such as Fat, Sey, इयत्. See 234,
234. 5, and 236.
MASCULINE.
पि. अयम् ayam, ‘this’ इमो imau, ‘these two? इमे ime, ‘these?
Ac, इमम् imam — imau इमान् iman
1. अनेन anena सभ्यान् dbhydm wig ebhis*
D. wa asmai — dbhyém wag ebhyas
Ab, सस्मात् asmat — dbhydm — ebhyas
७. सस्य asya WAM anayos रषाम् eshdm
L. सस्मिन् asmin — anayos By eshu
* This is an example of the old form for the Inst. pl. of masculine nouns of the
first class, common in the Vedas.
PRONOUNS. 127
FEMININE,
षि. इयम् iyam इमे ime इमास् imds
Ac, इमान् imdm — ime — imds
1. सनया anayd आभ्याम् dbhydm साभिस् dbhis
7. wat asyai — dbhyém भ्यस् dbhyas
Ab. खस्यास् asyds — dbhyém — dbhyas
G. — asyds अनयोस् anayos सासाम् 4540
1. सस्याम् asydm -- anayos सासु 45४
NEUTER,
N, Ac. इदम् idam इमे ime इमानि imdni
225. There is another demonstrative pronoun (rarely used, excepting in Nom.
sing.), of which अदस्, ‘this’ or ‘that,’ is supposed to represent the most general
state, though the stem is WY amu, and in N. sing. WY ०5४. It is thus declined :
Mase. N. असो, चमू , अमी ; Ac. अमुम्, WY, समून् ; 1. SAAT, अमूभ्याम्, अमीभिस् ;
7. BAR, अमूभ्याम्, HAVA; Ab. WYRM, समूम्याम्, समीभ्यस् ; ७. समुष्य, KYAT,
समीषाम्; 1, अमुष्मिन्, चमुयोस्, अमीषु. Fem. N. असो, चमू, अमूस् ; Ac. TTX, चम्,
a
अमूस्; 1. AAW, समूभ्याम्, खमूनिस् ; 7. WW, WPA, समूभ्यस्; Ab. अमुष्यास्,
&e.; ७. खमुष्पास्, अमुयोस्, अमूषाम्; L. समुष्याम्, अमुयोस्, NYY. Neut. N. Ac.
सदस्, समू, अमूनि.
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
226. The relative is formed by substituting च् y for the initial
letter of the pronoun ¢ad at 220; thus,
ag yad, ‘who,’ * which.’
MASCULINE.
N. यस् yas यो yau ये ye, ‘who’ or ‘which’
Ac. यम् yam — yau यान् yan
I. येन yena याभ्याम् ydbhydm = येस् yais
D. wa yasmai — ydbhyim wae yebhyas
Ab, यस्मात् yasmdt — ydbhyim — yebhyas
©. यस्य yasya ययोत् yayos येषाम् yeshdm
1, afer yasmin — yayos येषु yeshu
The feminine and neuter follow the fem. and neut. of tad at 2.20.
Fem. N. या yd, ये ye, यास् yds; Ac. याम् ydm, &c. &c. Neut. N, Ac,
यत् yat, ये ye, यानि ydni; the rest like the masculine,
With yas, yd, yat, &c., cf. Gr. sy (0 ४ &९,, Sk. y corresponding to spiritus asper
in Gr. (see 25).
128 PRONOUNS.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
227. The interrogative differs from the relative in substituting ¢
instead of y for the initial letter of the’ pronoun tad at 220; and in
making the N. Ac. sing. neut. किम् instead of कत् # ; thus, N. masc.
कस् kas, कौ kau, ke, ‘who?’ ‘which?’ ‘what?’ Ac. कम् kam, * whom ??
&e, N. fem. का kd, के ke, कास् kds, &c. The N. Ac, neut. are किन्
kim, के ke, कानि kdni, Although the real stem of this pronoun is ka,
yet kim is taken to represent the most general state, and occurs in
a few compounds; such as frre ‘on what account ?? ^ why ??
a. To the true stem ka may be affixed 2, to form कति kati (quot), “how many?
The same suffix is added to ¢a and ya, the proper stems of the third personal
and relative pronouns, to form tati, ‘so many’ (10४), and yati, ‘as many.’ These
are thus declined in pl. only:
N. Ac. V. कति; 1. कतिभिस्; Dat. Ab, कतिभ्यस्; ©. कतीनाम्; L. कतिषु
Note—The Latin quot and tot, which drop the final i, take it again in composi-
tion; as, guotidie, totidem, &c.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
228. The indeclinable suffixes éid, api, and éana (718), affixed (in
accordance with the rules of Sandhi) to the several cases of the
interrogative pronouns, give them an indefinite signification ; as,
कश्चित् kascid, ^ somebody,’ * some one,’ ‘any one,’ ‘a certain one,’
MASCULINE.
N, wT kaséit. 62. कोचित् ८०५८ केचित् {९६ ‘some persons’
Ac, कचित् (८८८. 59. -- ०४८ कांश्चित् ८०८८. 53.
1. केनचित् ०१०८८ काभ्याच्चित् {4014624 के श्ित् ०९५८. 62.
1. कस्मेचित् kasmaicit — 1401944४ = केभ्यश्धित् ९७१५०८८८
Ab. कस्माचित् {0574८८1 48. — kdbhydict — १९८१७०८
G. कस्यचित् kasyacit कयोश्ित् १०४०८. 62. केषाच्ित् ६९०१८१५८
L. कस्मिंश्चित् kasminstit. 53. — kayosit = केपुचिह् keshucit
Similarly, Fem. Nom. काचित्, कचित्, काश्चित्; Ac. काचित्, &c.: and
Neut, Nom. Ac. किचित् ' something,’ ‘anything,’ केचित्, कानिचित्, &c.
229. So also by affixing सपि ; as, Nom, masc. कोऽपि (64.@) ‘some one,’ ‘a
certain one,’ कावपि, HST (37, 35); Ac. कमपि, &e.; I. केनापि, &५. (31); D. कस्मा-
* Kat (or kad), however (=Latin quod), was the old form, and is, like kim, found
at the beginning of compounds; such as kaééid, “perhaps ;’ kad-artha, ‘ useless’
(‘of what use?’); kad-adhvan, ‘a bad road’ (‘what sort of a road 2).
PRONOUNS. 129
यपि, &०. (37); Ab. कस्मादपि, &.; ©. कस्यापि, &८.; L. aferafa, &. (52).
Nom. fem. कापि, &c.; Ac. कामपि, &९.; 1. कयापि, &c. &c. Nom. neut. किमपि
“something,” ‘anything,’ &c. The suffix cana is rarely found, except in Nom.
masc. कश्चन् ‘some one,’ ‘any one;’ and in Nom. neut. किचन ‘something.’
230. In the same way interrogative adverbs are made indefinite; thus, from
kati, “how many?’ katiéid, ‘afew;’ from kadd, ‘when? kaddéid or kaddéana or
kaddpi, ` at some time ;’ from katham, ‘how?’ kathanéana, ‘some how ;’ from kva,
where?’ -kvadid or kvdpi, “ somewhere
a. Whosoever,’ “ whatsoever’ are expressed by prefixing the relative to the in-
definite; thus, यः कश्चित् or यः कोऽपि whosoever, यत् कच्चित् whatsoever :’ or
sometimes to the interrogative; as, UY कन उपायेन “by any means whatsoever
or sometimes by repeating the relative; as, यो यः; यद् यत्
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
231. Possessive pronouns (Pan. rv. 3, 1-3) are mostly formed by
affixing ‰ (80. L) to those forms of the personal pronouns, ending
in क, which are used as stems ; thus, fr. मट् ‘I, मदीय madiya, ‘mine ;’
fr. Se ‘we,’ WAT asmadiya, ‘our; fr. we ‘thou,’ त्वदीय tvadiya,
‘thine ;? fr. ag ‘he,’ तदीय tadiya, ‘his.’ Similarly, waéta ‘ yours’
(Pan. rv. 2, 115) is formed from bhavad, and not from the regular
stem dbhavat (see 233). They are declined like Subha at 187; e.g.
Nom. m. adtaa, ^ मदीया, n. मदीयम्.
a. Other possessive pronouns differently formed are mdmaka (fem. ak¢, but
generally ikd) and mdmakéina (fem. द) “mine ;’ ¢dvaka (fem. aké) and tdvakéna
(fem. द), “thine ;’ dsmdka (fem. dk¢) and dsmdkina (fem. द), ‘our;’ yaushmdka
(fem. dk) and yaushmdktna (fem. द), ‘your.’ Mdmaka and those formed with the
suffix éna (80. XLIX) make their feminines in d, and are declined like Subha at
187; the others follow siva or subha for masc. and neut., and nadé (105) for fem.
Obs.—The genitive case of the personal pronouns is often used as a possessive ;
thus, तस्य पुतः “his son ;’ मम पुती “my daughter.’
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
232. The oblique cases sing. of त्मन् 4८१८१, ‘soul,’ ‘self? (declined
at 146), are used reflexively, in place of the three personal pronouns,
like the Latin ipse.
Thus, dtmdnam (me ipsum) andhdrena hanishydmi, ‘1 shall kill myself by fasting ;”
dtmdnam (te ipsum) mritavad dargaya, ‘show thyself as if dead;’ dtmdnam (se
ipsum) nindati, “he blames himself.’ It is used in the singular, even when it
refers to a plural; as, dtmdnam puntmahe, “we (will) purify ourselves ;’ abudhair
dtmé paropakarantkritah, ‘foolish people make themselves the tools of others.’
a. The indeclinable pronoun सख यम् svayam is sometimes joined,
8
130 PRONOUNS.
in the sense of ‘self? to the three personal pronouns ; thus, सहं खयम्
“I myself, &९. |
8. ख sva (suus) is used reflexively, with respect to all three
persons, and may stand for ‘my own’ (meus), ‘thy own’ (tuus), ‘his
own,’ ‘our own,’ &c. (cf. spds, नकृ, ०5४). It often occupies the first
place in a compound, ९. £. सगृहं गच्छति ‘he goes to his own house.’
The Gen. case of आत्मन् dtman, or often the simple stem, is used
with the same signification; as, आत्मनो गृहं or सात्मगृहं गच्छति. It is
used in the singular even when it refers to more than one*. In
the most modern Sanskrit, निज nija is often used in place of ख and
आत्मन्, and from it transferred to Bengali.
स्व, in the sense of ‘ own,’ is declined like sarva at 237; as a pro-
nominal the Ab. L. sing. masc. neut. and N. pl. masc. may optionally
follow subha at 187; thus, N. pl. m. sve or svds in the sense of
‘own ;’ but used substantively in the sense of ‘kinsmen’ or ‘ pro-
perty,’ sva can only follow Siva or Subha (N. pl. m. svds).
c. स्वीय (£.d), स्वकीय (^ ८), and ख क (६. akd or kd), declinable like subha,
sometimes take the place of स्व in the sense of ‘own,’ ‘one’s own.”
HONORIFIC OR RESPECTFUL PRONOUN.
233. भवत् bhavat, * your Honour,’ requiring the 3rd person of the
verb, is declined like dhanavat at 140; thus, N. masc. भवान् bhavdn,
भवन्तो bhavantau, भवन्तस् bhavantas; V. भवन् ; N. fem. भवती dhavati,
भवत्यौ bhavatyau, wana bhavatyas, &c.; ४. भवति. It is constantly
used to denote ‘respect,’ in place of the 2nd personal pronoun; thus,
भवान् गृहं गच्छतु ‘let your Honour go home’ for ‘go thou home.’ ।
PRONOUNS OF QUANTITY AND SIMILITUDE.
234. Modifications of the demonstrative, relative, and interroga-
tive pronouns may take the suffix qq vat to express * quantity,’ and
eu drisa, ea driksha or तूण् dris (Nom. masc. neut. drik, fem. द) to
express ‘similitude,’ frequently used as correlative pronouns ; thus
तावत् tdvat, TATAT etdvat, “so many,’ “go much ’ (tantus) ; मावत् (quantus) “as
many,’ as much’ (declined like dhanavat at 140); तादृश tddrisa or ATER tddriksha
or ATES tddyis, “such like’ (talis, TyAIKos) ; VATE etddrisa or VATFM etddris,
like this or that,’ following Subha (187) for masc. and neut. of those ending in
श sa and छं kska; and dig, at 181, for masc. and neut. of those in WS; and nadt,
* Lassen cites an example (Ramayana II. 64, 28) in which déman refers to the dual:
Putram dtmanak sprishtud nipetatul, ‘they two fell down after touching their son.’
PRONOUNS. 131
at 105, for the fem. of all three. Similarly, the correlatives यादृ or We or
WEN ‘as like, “how like’ (qualis, ०८८०४); FEW or STH or SEI ‘s0 11९;
arey or ate or atest “how like?’ (qualis ?)
a. Note, that ‘¢¥ is derived from the root dri, ‘to see,’ ‘appear,’ and is in fact
our English ‘like,’ d being interchangeable with 2, and ई with k.
b. कियत् ‘ how much,’ and इयत् ' so much,’ are declined like धनवत् (140).
c. A few peculiar pronouns of quantity, some of which are of the nature of
ordinals, are formed with the suffix tha (itha), thought by some to be an old
superlative, or titha (80. LXIII); e.g. ydvatitha, as, ¢ am," to whatever stage or
degree advanced,’ ‘how-manieth,’ ‘as-manieth ;’ katitha, as, £ am, ‘to whatever
degree,’ ‘how-manieth ;’ katitho divasah, ‘what day of the month is it?’ katipaya-
tha, as, £, am, ‘advanced to a certain degree.’
PRONOMINALS.
235. There are certain common adjectives, called pronominals,
which partake of the nature of pronouns, and follow the declension
of tad at 220; but may also take a vocative case.
236. These are, इतर ‘other’ (but in Veda the neut. may be itaram as well as
itarat, Pan. vit. 1, 26, cf. Latin iterum); कतर ` which of the two?’ (xorepos for
K drepos ); कतम् “which of many?’ WAT ‘that one of two;’ ततम “that one of many ;?
यतर ‘who or which of two;’ यतमं ‘who or which of many’ (formed by adding
the comparative and superlative suffixes to the various pronominal stems, 195) ;
सन्य ‘other,’ ‘another ;? सन्यत्तर ‘one of two;’ and THAA ‘one of many.’ They
are declined like T¥, and make the N. V. Ac. neut. sing. in at; thus, anyat, itarat,
anyatarat, katarat, katamat, &c.; but they have a vocative, viz. V. masc. anya,
V. fem. anye, V. neut. anyat, &c. ; the V. du. and plural is like the Nom.
a. With regard to itara, it loses its pronominal declension at the end of Dvandva
compounds, but at the end of Dvandvas (748) it may optionally follow ¢ad in the
Nom. pl.; e.g. varndsrametards (or -re), “classes, orders, and others.’
2347. There are other pronominals, which make am instead of at
in the N. Ac. neuter. The model of these is सवै sarva, ‘all ;’ thus,
MASCULINE.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. सवैस् sarvas Bal sarvau सर्वे sarve
Ac. Wa sarvam — sarvau सवान् sarvdn
I. सर्वेण sarvena wana sarvdbhydm = सेवैस् ०८1८५१७
D. स्वैस्मे sarvasmai — survdbhyim सर्वेभ्यस् sarvebhyas
Ab. सवै स्मात् sarvasmdt — sarvdbhydm — sarvebhyas
©. are sarvasya स्वैयोस् sarvayos सर्वेषाम् sarveshdm
1, सवैस्मिन् sarvasmin — sarvayos सर्वेषु sarveshu
V. सवै sarva Wat sarvau सर्वे sarve
8 2
132 PRONOUNS.
FEMININE.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. wat sarvd सर्वे sarve सवैस् sarvds
Ac. सवैम् sarvdm — sarve — sarvds
1. सवैया sarvayd wana sarvdbhydm = सवैभिस् sarvdbhis
D. सवैस्ये sarvasyai — sarvdbhydm सवैभ्यस् sarvdbhyas
Ab. सर्वैस्यास् sarvasyds — sarvdbhydm — sarvdbhyas
©. — _ sarvasyds स्वै योस् sarvayos सवै साम् sarvasdém
L. aaa sarvasydm — sarvayos wag sarvdasu
ए. सर्वे sarve सर्वे sarve सवैस् sarvds
NEUTER.
N. Ac. #44 sarvam सर्वे sarve warfu sarvdni
V. wa sarva — sarve — sarvdni
The other cases like the masculine.
238. Like sarva are declined उभय ‘both’ (properly only found in sing. and pl.,
ubha being used in du.; the fem. of ubhaya is ubhayf, like nad?) ; विश्च `अ; रकतर
“one of two’ (६८८76००५) ; अन्यत्तम ‘one of many ;’ WA meaning ‘all,’ but not when
it signifies ‘equal;’ सिम ‘the whole;’ त्व ` other;’ नेम ‘half.’ The N. Ac. sing.
neuter of these will end in am, but त्व is optionally त्वत्. In N. V. pl. masc. नेम is
नेमे or WATE.
Obs.— उभ, ‘both’ (ambo, &u@w), is declined like sarva, but only in du.; thus,
N. Ac. V. masc. चभो , fem. and neut. उभे ; 1. D. Ab. उभाभ्याम्; G. L. उभयोस्.
a, WAT ‘inferior,’ पर ‘other,’ अपर ‘other,’ WaT ‘posterior,’ ‘west,’ TAT
“ superior,’ ‘north,’ दखिण ‘south,’ ‘right,’ पूव ‘east,’ ‘prior, अन्तर meaning
either ‘outer’ or ‘inner’ (as applied to a garment), @ ‘own’ (232), follow sarva,
and optionally subha, at 187, in Abl. Loc. sing. masc. and neut., and Nom. Voc. pl.
1880, ; as, अखधरस्मात् or HUTT, &c. They can only be declined like pronominals
when they denote relative position ; hence dakshindh (not dakshine) kavayah, ‘clever
poets.’ Moreover, the pronominal inflexion is optional in certain compounds.
239. रक, ‘one,’ follows sarva, see 200; द्वितीय ‘second,’ gata ‘third,’ follow
Subha (187), and optionally sarva in certain cases, see 208; they make their fem.
in d.
240, eq ‘a few,’ TY or अद्ध ‘half, कतिपय (fem. d or £) ‘ several,’ ‘ few,’ ‘some,’
प्रयम ‘first,’ चरम ‘last,’ FI (fem. £), द्वितय (fem. ६) ‘ twofold,’ Wawa (fem. f) ‘ five-
+ fold,’ and all in -ya and -taya, properly follow Siva at 103; but may make their
Nom. V. pl. masc. in ९; as, We or सल्पास् ‘few,’ &c. (see Pan, 1. 1, 33).
a. सन्योन्य; इतरेतर, “one another,’ ‘ mutual,’ make their Nom. Ac. sing. neut.
in am, not at; and V. in a.
b. In some pronouns the syllable ka or ak is introduced, generally before the
last vowel or syllable, to denote contempt, in the same way that ka is added to
nominal stems; e.g. AAT for मया “by me,’ युष्मकाभिस् for युष्माभिस् ‘by you.”
Similarly, सवके, विश्वके, for सर्वे, fava ‘all’ (8०९ Pan. v. 3. 71).
VERBS.—GENERAL OBSERVATIONS, 133
CHAPTER VI.
VERBS.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
241. AuTHOUGH the Sanskrit verb (dkhydta, kriyd) offers many
striking and interesting analogies to the Greek, yet our explanations
of its structure are not likely to fall in with the preconceived notions
of the student of Greek grammar.
There are ten tenses and moods (dla). Seven of them are of
common occurrence; viz. 1. the Present (technically called लट् Jat,
which, with the other technical names, is applicable also to the
terminations of each tense respectively); 2. the Imperfect, some-
times called the First Preterite (कङ् Jam) ; 3. the Potential or Optative
(च्छिङ् lin) ; 4. the Imperative (लोट् lof); 5. the Perfect, sometimes called
the Second Preterite (लिट् lit); 6. the First Future (लुट् ut); 7. the
Second Future (छद् Jit). Three are not so commonly used; viz.
8. the Aorist, sometimes called the Third Preterite (लुङः lum) ; 9. the
Precative, also called the Benedictive (आशिर् लिङ् 44" lin); 10. the
Conditional (ङ् rim). There is also an Infinitive, and several Par-
ticiples. Of these, the Present, the three Past tenses, and the two
Futures belong to the Indicative mood. The Imperative, Potential,
Precative, and Conditional (see 242) are moods susceptible of
various times; but, as there is only one form for each, it can lead
to no embarrassment to call them tenses, and to arrange them indis-
criminately with the tenses of the Indicative.
The first four tenses, viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential, and
Imperative, are frequently called Special tenses*, because in these
each of the ten classes of roots has a special structure of its own (as
will be explained at 248).
a. Obs.—The ancient Sanskrit of the Veda is more rich in grammatical forms
than the later or classical Sanskrit. There is a Vedic Subjunctive mood, technically
called ठेट् det, which comprises under it a Present, Imperfect, and Aorist ; moreover,
the Vedic Potential and Imperative are thought to have distinct forms for various
tenses, The Vedic Infinitive, too, has ten or eleven different forms (see 459. a).
* In the previous editions of this Grammar these tenses were called ‘ Conjuga-
tional.’ I have thought it better to bring the present edition into harmony with
other Grammars by adopting Bopp’s designation of Special
134 VERBS.—GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
242. Although the three past tenses are used without much distinction, yet it
should be observed, that they properly express different degrees of past time.
The Imperfect (anadyatana-bhita) corresponds in form to the Imperfect of Greek .
verbs, and properly has reference to an event done at some time recently past, but
before the current day. It may denote action past and continuing, or it may be
used like the Greek Aorist. The Perfect (paroksha-bhita) is said to have reference
to an event completely done before the present day at some remote period, unper-
ceived by or out of sight of the narrator; it answers in form to the Greek Perfect,
but may also be used like the Aorist. The Aorist refers to an event done and past
at some indefinite period, whether before or during the current day ; it corresponds
in form and sense to the Greek 1st and 2nd Aorist, and sometimes to the Pluper-
fect *, Again, the two Futures properly express, the First, definite, the Second,
indefinite futurity +: the Second, however, is the most used, and answers to the
Greek Future. The Potential or Optative may generally be rendered in English
by some one of the auxiliaries ‘may,’ ‘can,’ ‘would,’ ‘should,’ ‘ought.’ It is
said to denote ‘command,’ ‘direction,’ ‘expression of wish,’ ‘ enquiry,’ ‘ condition,’
“ supposition’ (sambhdvana, Pan. 111. 3,161). See Syntax, 879. The Conditional (or
Imperfect of the Future) is occasionally used after the conjunctions yadi and éed,
‘ify’ it has an augment like the Imperfect and Aorist, and ought on that account
to be classed with the tenses of the Indicative (see 891). The Precative or Bene-
dictive is a tense sometimes used in praying and blessing (dsishi). It is a modifi-
cation of the Potential. There is no tense exactly equivalent to the Pluperfect in
Sanskrit, although the form of some Aorists (in २, few primitive verbs, and in verbs
of Cl. 10 and Causals) resembles that of the Greek Pluperfect by taking both aug-
ment and reduplication: the sense of this tense, however, may often be expressed
by the Past Indeclinable Participle or by the Past Passive Participle; as, tasminn
apakrdnte, ‘ after he had departed.’ See Syntax, 840, 899. a.
a. According to some, the form of the Imperfect and Aorist, which remains after
rejecting the augment of these tenses in the Indicative, and which is especially
used after the particles AT md and मा स्म् md sma (see 884. Obs. and 889), ought to
be called the Subjunctive Imperfect and Subjunctive Aorist.
९. The Infinitive generally has an Active, but is capable of a Passive significa-
tion (see Syntax, 867-872).
* The fact is, that the three past tenses are not very commonly used to repre-
sent the completeness of an action. This is generally done by employing the Past
Passive Participle with an inst. case; or by adding vat to the Past Pass. Part., and
combining it with the Present tense of as, ‘to be;’ as, uktavdn asmi, ‘I have said.
See Syntax, 897.
¶ The First Future (ut) is said to be an-adyatane, i.e. to be so far definite as to
denote what will happen at a future period, not in the course of the current day ;
as, श्रो गन्तास्मि ‘ to-morrow I shall go’ (Pan. 111. 3, 13); whereas the Second Future
may refer to immediate futurity ; as, WE सायंकाल्टे Wi वा गमिष्यामि ‘this very evening
or to-morrow I shall be going.’
VERBS.—GENERAL OBSERVATIONS, 135
243. Every tense has three numbers, singular, dual, and plural.
To each tense belong two sets of Active terminations; one for the
Active voice (properly so called), the other for a kind of Middle or
Reflexive voice. The former of these voices is called by Indian
grammarians Parasmai-pada (‘ word* directed to another’), because
the action is supposed to be Transitive, or to -pass parasmuai, ‘to
another (object) ;” the latter is called A’tmane-pada (‘ word* directed
to one’s self”), because the action is supposed to refer dtmane, ‘to
one’s self.’ This distinction, however, is not always observed, and we
often find both Parasmai and Atmane employed indifferently for
Transitive verbs.
Some verbs, however, are conjugated only in the Atmane-pada,
especially when they are Intransitive, or when the direct fruit of
the action accrues to the agent (see the distinction of Uddttetah and
Anuddttetah at 75.c), or when particular prepositions are used ; thus,
Mud and rué meaning " to be pleased,’ “please one’s self ;’ bhuj meaning ‘to eat’
(not ‘to protect’); dd, ‘to give,’ with d prefixed, meaning ‘to give to one’s self,’ ‘to
take,’ are restricted to the Atmane-pada. Sometimes, when a verb takes both
Padas, the Atmane, without altering the idea expressed by the root, may be used
to direct the action in some way towards the agent; thus, padcati means ‘he cooks,’
but padate, “he cooks for himself :* yajati, ‘he sacrifices ;’ yajate, “he sacrifices for
himself :’ namati, ‘he bends ;’ namate, ‘he bends himself:’ dargayati (Causal), ‘he
shews ;’ dargayate, ‘he shews himself,’ ‘appears :’ kérayati, ‘he causes to make 3?
kdrayate, ‘he causes to be made for himself :’ and ydé, ‘to ask,’ although employing
both Padas, is more commonly used in the Atmane, because the act of asking
generally tends to the advantage of the asker. (See this subject more fully ex-
plained at 786.)
a. Passive verbs are conjugated in the Atmane-pada. Indeed,
in all the tenses, excepting the first four, the Passive is generally
undistinguishable from the Atmane-pada of the primitive verb.
But in the four Special tenses, viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential,
and Imperative (unlike the Greek, which exhibits an identity between
the Middle and Passive voices in those tenses), the Sanskrit Passive,
although still employing the Atmane-pada terminations, has a special
* Pada 18 an inflected word as distinguished from an uninflected root (Pan. 1.
4,14). The term pada has here reference to the scheme of terminations only; so
that in this sense there are only two voices in Sanskrit, and they are often used
indiscriminately. Although the Atmane-pada has occasionally a kind of Middle
signification, yet it cannot be said to correspond entirely to the Greek Middle.
136 VERBS.—GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
structure of its own, common to all verbs, and distinct from the
conjugational form of the Atmane-pada in all but the fourth class*.
Thus the Greek akovw makes for both the Middle and Passive of those four
tenses, Ist sing. AKGVO/AG, ६०४८५१४१ ८०५०५१४१ AKovOU (2nd sing.) But the
Sanskrit <, ‘to hear,’ makes for the conjugational form of the Atmane, Te,
ayfa, yet, WU; while for the Passive it is W4, waza waa, wa.
244. As in nouns the formation of a nominal stem out of a root
precedes declension, the root generally requiring some change or addi-
tion before the case-terminations can be affixed, so in verbs the forma-
tion of a verbal stem out of a root must precede conjugation. Again,
as in nouns every case has its own proper termination, so in verbs
each of the three persons, in the three numbers of every tense, has
a termination (vibhakti), one for the Parasmai-pada, and one for the
Atmane-pada, which is peculiarly its own. Moreover, as in nouns,
so in verbs, some of the terminations may be combined with servile
or indicatory letters, which serve to aid the memory, by indicating
that where they occur peculiar changes are required in the root.
Thus the three terminations which belong to the ist, 2nd, and 3rd
persons of the Present tense, Parasmai-pada, respectively, are mi, si,
ti; and these are combined with the letter P (miP, siP, tiP), to
indicate that roots belonging to the second and third groups of
classes (see 2.58, 259, and 290) must be modified in a particular way,
before these terminations are affixed.
The annexed tables exhibit, 1st, the scheme of terminations for
Parasmai and Atmane-pada, with the most useful indicatory letters
(denoted by Roman capitals), in all the tenses, the four Special tenses
being placed first; andly, the same scheme with the substitutions
required by certain classes of roots (the numerical figures denoting
the classes in which these substitutions occur, see 257).
245. TERMINATIONS OF SpEcIAL TENsEs.
PARASMAI-PADA, ATMANE-PADA,
Present tense.
PERS. SING. DUAL. PLURAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
I. faq miP वस् vas मस् mas Ze वहे vahe महे mahe
2, सिप्? घस् 1#८5 Atha सेऽ WTA dthe ध्वे hve
3. तिप्? तस् 1८5 सनि anti Tite साते dte Wat ante
* For this reason we prefer to regard the Passive, not as a Voice, but as a distinct
derivative from the root. See 461. ८.
1. WAQamAP Ava
2. सिप् गए
3. feqdIP
1. याम् ydm
2. यास् yds
3. यात् yat
1. BPA ८०? सावप् dvaP
2. हि
3. वप् tuP
1. रप् NaP
2. यप् thaP
3. णप् NaP
2. तासि tdsi
3. AT td
I. सम् sam
2. सीस् sis
3. सीत् ॐ
ए प्क8.- TERMINATIONS.
187
Imperfect or First Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
Ama Ri
तम् tam त 1 यास् thas
ताम् tém न् an त ८८
Potential or Optative.
यावि ५८८ याम ydma Satya
यातम् ydtam यात् १८८ SUTRA 1/4
याताम् ydtdm युस् yus ईत ta
Imperative.
AAG dmaP | Bq aiP
तम् tam तं 10 स्व 5४८
तान् tdm अन्तु antu ताम् tam
वहि vahi
सायाम् 1140
स्ताम् dtdm
Safe teahi
ई्यायाम् fydthdm
ईयाताम् fy dtm
आवप् ८००१०६२
TATA cthdm
आताम् ८14४
TERMINATIONS OF GENERAL TENSES.
Perfect or Second Preterite (requiring reduplication, 252).
afz mahi
ध्नम् dhvam
Wel anta
Sate mahi
ईध्वम् (11०07
ईरन् tran
AST ८1701078
ध्नम् dhvam
अन्ताम् antdm
व ४८ Ama Ze वहे vahe महे mahe
NAT athus Ba से se TY dthe श्वे dhve द)
WIT atus TA us Ze साते dte x ire
First Future or Definite Future.
1. तास्मि tdsmi तास्स् 145०० तास्मस् 1457048 ताहे 1८९ ताहे tdsvahe तास्महे tdsmahe
WM tdsthas तास्थ tdstha | तासे tdse तासाये tdsithe ताध्वे tddhve
तासे tdrau तारस् 14705 ता तारौ térau तारस् 14705
Second Future or Indefinite Future.
1, BATA sydmi स्मावस् sydvas TATAR sydmas a sye स्याव sydvahe स्यामहे sydmahe
2. स्यसि syasi स्ययस् syathas स्यथ syatha स्यसे syase स्येये syethe स्यध्वे syadhve
3. स्यति syati स्मतस् syatas स्यन्ति syanti स्यति syate स्येते syete स्यनते syante
Aorist or Third Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
S&H sva स्म sma fa si ` स्वहि svahi सहि smahi
स्तम् stam स्त sta RATA sthds सायाम् ऽवा ध्वम् dhvam (दुम्)
स्ताम् stam FA sus स्त sta साताम् 54८4 सतं sata
Precative or Benedictive.
यास्म ydsma | सीय stya सीवहि stvahi सीमहि sémahi
1, यासम् ydsam यास्व ydsva
2. यास् yds
3. यात् yat
1. स्यम् syam
2. स्यस् syas
3. स्यत् syat
यास्तम् ydstam यास्त ydsta
यास्ताम् ydstdm यासुस् ydsus
स्याव sydva स्याम sydma
स्यतम् syatam स्यत syata
स्ताम् syatdm स्मन् ॐ
सीष्ट sishta
a sye
सीष्टास् sishthds सीयास्थाम् siydsthdm Wear sidhoam
सीयास्ताम् siydstdm सीरन् ०
Conditional (requiring the augment a, 251).
स्यावहि sydvahi
BAAR syathds स्येथाम् syethdm
स्यत syata
T
स्येताम् syetdm
स्यामहि sydmahi
स्यध्वम् syadhvam
Sled syanta
138 VERBS.—TERMINATIONS.
246. The same terminations, with the substitutions required in certain classes,
Terminations or SpeciAL TENSES.
PaRASMAI-PADA. ATMANE-PADA.
Present tense.
PERS. SING, DUAL. PLURAL. SING, DUAL. PLURAL.
2 > »6, ॥
I. miP vas mas | {vate mahe
€ 2,3,735.8,9-
. ithe 1, 4,6, 10.
2. siP thas tha se 1 1 | awe
athe 2, 3,73 8,8, 9.
nti 1, 4,6, I0. ae
. ८ ate 1, 4,6,10. nte 1, 4,6, 10.
3. ४ tas 4 anti2,7;5,8,9.| te छ
^ ate 2,3, 73 5» 8, 9. ate 253973 5*8,9.
att 3 (2).
An initial s, as in si, se, &c., is liable to become sh by 70.
Imperfect or First Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
1 a ११९५ 6 | व ma i vahi mahi
253973 5209+ pe
es 3973 558,9 je je (त I, 4,6, 10. 1 ae
dthdm 2,3.47; 5,8,9.
3. tP Pn i ta Pe pone i व
atdm 2, 37; 58,9. Lata 2,3,735,8,9-
US 3 (2). ।
Potential or Optative.
In 1, 4, 6, 10.
I. iyam wa ima
2. is itam = ita In all the classes.
3. ४ itdm = iyus 1. tya tvahi imahi
In 2, 3,73 5, 8,9. 2. tthds iydthdém idhvam
1. ydm ४४०५ 24014 3. ita tydtdm tran
2. yds ydtam ydta
3. ydt ydtdm yus
Imperative.
I. dniP dvaP démaP aiP dvahaiP dmahaiP
—I, 4,6, 103; 5,8.
hi 7933 5.9. क) a en 1, 4, 6, 10. | aha
adhi (dhi) 2, 3, ¶. dthém 253973 5859+
—after dna 9.
ntu 1,4, 6,10. :
: y itdm 1, 4,6, 10. ntdm 1, 4,6, 10.
3. tuP tdm + antu2,4;5,8,9.| 40 { ध 1
ats 5 (2). dtdm a, 3,73 5,8,9. Latdm 2,3,7; 5,8,9.
VERBS.—TERMINATIONS. 139
In cl. 9, # is dropped after dna, substituted for the conjugational 9 of the 2nd
sing. Impv., Parasmai, in the case of roots ending in consonants. A form तात् edt
(cf. Latin to, Greek 7) may be substituted for hi and tu, and even for ta, to imply
benediction, chiefly used in the Vedas.
TERMINATIONS OF GENERAL TENSES.
Perfect or Second Preterite (requiring reduplication, 252).
1. # *ima e *ivahe *imahe
2.ithaorthaP athus a *ishe dthe *idhveor*idhve
3.aP atus us e dte ire
* Only eight roots, viz. sru, stu, dru, sru, kri, bhri, sri, vri, reject the initial
# from the terminations marked with *; and of these eight all but vri (meaning
“to cover’) necessarily reject it also in the 2nd sing. Parasmai. See 369-372.
First Future or Definite Future.
1. fdsmi tdsvas tdsmas | ६40८ tasvahe tdsmahe
2. tdsi tdsthas tdstha | tdse tdsdthe tddhve
3.14 térau tdras ta tdérau _—tdras
Many roots prefix i to the above terminations; thus, 1, ifdsmi, 2. itdsi, &c.
ग्रह् lengthens this 25 J vi and all roots in long ré optionally do so.
Second Future or Indefinite Future.
I. sydmi sydvas sydmas | sye sydvahe sydmahe
2. syast syathas syatha | syase syethe syadhve
3. syatt syatas syanti | syate syete syante
Many roots prefix i to the above terminations; thus, 1. ishydmé (70), 2. ishyast,
&०. WR lengthens this ; वृं and all roots in long {६ optionally do so.
Aorist or Third Preterite (requiring the augment a, 251).
Form I.—Regular terminations of the scheme.
1. sam sva sma Si svahi smahi
2. sis stamortam staorta| sthdsorthds sdthém dhvam
3.sit ' stdémortdm sus sta or ta sdtdm sata
दुम् dhvam is used for dhvam after any other vowel but a or क or after इ क imme-
diately preceding.
The same terminations with ¢ prefixed, except in 2nd and 3rd sing.,
where initial s is rejected.
I. isham ishva ishma ashi ishvahi ishmahi
2. ts ishtam ishta ishthds ishathdm idhvam
3.४ ishtém ishus ishta ishdtém ishata
इद्म् श्वा may be used for idkvam when a semivowel or / immediately precedes.
ग्रह् lengthens the i throughout ; J and all roots in long ré optionally do so in Stm.
T2
140 VERBS, —TERMIN ATIONS,
Form I1.—Terminations resembling those of the Imperfect.
1.am dvaorva dmaorma|eori dvahi dmahi
2. as ors atamortam ataorta | athds ethémordthém adhvam
3.at ort atdmortdm anorus | ata etdm or dtém anta or ata
Precative or Benedictive.
1.ydsam ydsva ydsma stya _—stvahi simahi
2.yds ydstam ydsta sishthds stydstham sidhvam
3३.४८४ ydstém ydsus sishta siydstdm siran
Many roots prefix 7 to the Atmane, but not to the Parasmai, of the above ; thus,
1. ishtya, &c. WE lengthens the ¢ in this tense also, but no other root can do so.
सीदुम् sidhvam is used for सीध्वन् stdhvam after any other vowel but a or d, and
optionally after the prefixed i, when immediately preceded by a semivowel or h
(see 442).
Conditional (requiring the augment a, 251).
I.syam sydva sydma sye sydvahi sydmahi
2.syas syatam syata syathds syethém syadhvam
3. syat syatdm syan syata syetdm syanta
, Many roots prefix i to the above terminations throughout; thus, 1. ishyam, 2.
ishyas, &c. OX lengthens this i; वुं and all roots in long १६ optionally do so.
247. Those terminations which are marked with P will be called
the P terminations. They are technically designated Pit (i.e. having
P for their it), and are as follow:
Present, Parasmai, 1, 2,3 sing. Impf., Par.,1, 2, 3 sing. Impv., Par., 1, 3 sing.,
1du., 1pl.; Atm., 1 sing., 1du.,1 pl. In these, however, the P is indicatory only
with reference to certain classes of roots (see 244), but in Perf., Par., the indicatory
P in 1, 2, 3 sing. applies to all the classes.
Obs.—Instead of NaP, thaP, NaP (which are from Vopa-deva), Panini gives
NaL, thaL, NaL; and this L, like the P, has reference to accent.
a, Sometimes, however, it will be convenient to adopt Bopp’s
expression, ‘Strong forms,’ in speaking of the form assumed by the
stem before the P terminations, these terminations being themselves
called Weak.
b. In fact the P or Pit terminations are an-uddtta, ‘unaccented ;’ and when these
are added, the stem on which the accent falls is called Strong. In other cases the
accent is on the terminations, and the stem is then Weak and unaccented.
c. The terminations of the first four or Special tenses are called by Panini sdrva-
dhdtuka, ‘belonging to the full form of the verbal stem,” which name is also applied
to suffixes like édna¢ (i.e. -dna), Satri (1. ९. -at), having an indicatory ई (but not to
Vikaranas like sap, &c.) The term drdhadhdtuka, ‘belonging to the half or shorter
VERBS.—TERMINATIONS. 141
form of the verbal stem,’ is given to the terminations of the Perfect (Jit), and Pre-
cative (dSir lim), as well as to certain distinctive additions to the root before the
terminations of the remaining four tenses (such as ¢ds and sya in the Futures and
Conditional, s in the Aorist, yds and sfy in the Precative), and therefore practically
to the terminations of all the six General tenses.
d. If we examine these terminations, we shall find that they are composed of
two distinct elements, one marking person, number, and voice; the other, mood
and tense. The terminations in which the former element prevails may be called
simple, and belong to the Present, Imperfect, Imperative, Perfect, and 2nd form
of the Aorist ; those which include the second may be called compound, and are
peculiar to the other tenses. Thus the terminations of the Potential consist of i
or ¢ or yd as characterizing the mood, and of am, s, t, va, tam, tdm, &c., as marking
person, number, and voice. So, also, in the 2nd Future the syllable sya prefixed
to all the terminations, characterizes the Future tense, while the mi, si, tz, vas, thas,
tas, &c., mark person, number, and voice. If, then, such initial parts of every
termination as mark mood or tense were left out, an examination of the remaining
parts would shew that the Present and Imperfect are the prototypes of the termina-
tions of all the other tenses, that is to say, that the formation of the terminations
of every other tense may be referred back to one or other of these two. The Present
tense may in this way be connected with the two Futures. These three tenses agree
in shewing a certain fulness of form, which is wanting in most of those connected
with the Imperfect. The terminations of the Perfect, however, partake of the cha-
racter of both the Present and Imperfect. In the Atmane-pada they very closely
resemble the Present. Many of them exhibit the same fulness as that tense, while
some of the other terminations of the Perfect shew even more lightness than those
of the Imperfect *. It should be observed, too, that the terminations of the Im-
perative, though evidently connected with the Imperfect, are in some instance
even more full than those of the Present.
e. Although comparative grammarians have bestowed much labour on investi-
gating the origin of Sanskrit verbal terminations, the only point that may be
asserted with probability is, that they stand in a certain relationship to the pro-
nominal stems ma, éva, sa, ta. The m of the first persons is related to the stem ma
(mad, 218); the t, th, sv, s, of the second persons, to the stem tva of the second
personal pronoun (Gr. 7€); and the ¢, of the third person, to the stem ta. We may
also observe a community of character between the termination nti of the 3rd pl.
and the plural of neuter nouns like dhanavat (dhanaventi). But whether the v in
the dual is related to a pronominal stem va occurring in d-vdm, va-yam ; whether
the s of the dual and plural terminations is the result of blending different pro-
nominal stems (e.g. vas=va-si, mas=ma-si, ‘I and thou’); whether the termi-
nations of the Atmane-pada are formed from those of the Parasmai-pada by guna-
tion or by composition of the latter with other stems,—these are questions which
* Comparative grammar, however, has established that these terminations are
to be referred to the same source as the fuller ones.
142 VERBS.—TERMINATIONS.
cannot be determined with actual certainty. The subject, however, is fully and ably
discussed in Schleicher’s Compendium of Comparative Grammar, §§ 268-286.
f. Whatever the exact state of the case may be, the student may aid his memory
by noting that the letter m generally enters into the 1st sing. Par.; s into the 2nd
sing. Par. and Atm.; and ¢ into the 3rd sing. du. and pl. Par. and Atm. of all the
tenses. Moreover, that the letter ¢ occurs in the 1st du., m in the 1st pl. of all
the tenses, and diy in every 2nd pl. Atmane. In the Impf. and Pot. Atm., and in
the Perf. Par., th is admitted, instead of s, into the 2nd sing.; and in the 2nd pl.
of the last tense, th has been dropped, owing to the influence of the heavy redupli-
cation. For the same reason the m and ईं are dropped in the 1st and grd sing. Perf.
Observe also—When the 1st du. Par. is vas, the 2nd and 3rd end in as (except the
grd du. 1st Fut.), and the 1st pl. is mas. When the rst du. Par. is va, the 2nd
and 3rd end in ¢am, tdm (except in the Perf.), and the 1st pl. in ma. When the 1st
du. Atm. 18 vahe, the rst pl. is make, and the last letter of the remaining termina-
tions is generally e. When the rst du. Atm. is vahi, the 2nd and 3rd end in dm ;
the 1st pl. 18 mahi, and the 2nd pl. 18 dhvam.
9. The frequent occurrence of m in the 1st sing., of उ in the 2nd, of ¢ in the 3rd,
of mas and ma in the Ist pl., of ¢a in the 2nd pl., and of कथ in the 3rd pl., suggests
a comparison with the Gr. and Lat. verb. We may remark, that m, the characteristic
of the 1st per. sing., is suppressed in the Pres. Indic. Act. of all Gr. verbs except
those in (८८ (asmi= elu, Dor. ९५५८ for ९०५८) daddémi = ddopu), and also in Lat.
verbs (except sum and inquam); but ७ and o answer to the Sk. ¢ of bhardmi=pépo,
fero. In the Gr. Middle and Passive, the (4८) which originally belonged to al)
Active verbs, becomes (५०८ ; while the Sanskrit, on the other hand, here suppresses
‘the m, and has ९ for a; bhare (for bhara-me)=Pepopait, In the Impf., Gr. has ४
for Sk. and Lat. mute m, because (८ is not allowed to be final in Greek ; atarpam=
‘erEpmoy, adadém ९9/9४ astrinavam = ९०740४४0 avaham=vehebam. Gr. has (८८
in the rst sing. Opt.; and in verbs in (५८) + takes the place of the mute m of Sk.
and Lat.; thus, bhareyam=eporpt, feram ; dadydm=SBoiny, dem ; tishtheyam=
< lorainy, stem. In the Gr. First Aorist, m is suppressed, so that Sanskrit adiksham
(Aor.)=eEa; but not in the 2nd Aor., so that वद). In the Perf., Sk. a
=Gr. @, tutopa=tétupa. In the Gr. Middle and Passive Futures, m is retained,
but not in the Active ; désydmix 04०, dekshydmi=deikw, ddsye= 0४००४५०८. As
to the 1st per. pl., Sk. mas of the Pres. is (५९४ (for KES) in Gr., and mus in Lat. ;
tarpd-mas=té pre-e ; sarpd-mas=€p70-pev, serpi-mus ; dad-mas=dido-pev, da-
mus ; tishthd-mas=toTa-eY, sta-mus. The Atmane make answers to Gr. peba 3
‘dad-mahe=id0-peba, As to the other tenses, in Impf. 1st pl. abhard-ma==epépo~
“perv, fereba-mus ; avahd-ma=veheba-mus ; adad-ma=€@did0-pev; abhard-mahi =
६९०८५६00. In the Pot. rst pl. bhare-ma=epor-rev (es), fera-mus; dadydma=
ODoiner (1५66), demus ; dadt-mahi=di0oi-peba. In 274 Fut. ddsyd-mas=doo0-
‘per, dekshyd-mas=Oeito-pev. In 2nd pers. sing. Act., the characteristic s has been
preserved in all three languages; thus, in the Present, Sk. asi (for original assi)=
éoal, es; dadd-si=didws, das; bhara-si= pépets, fers ; vahasi=vehis. Yn the
Atmane, Sk. se (for sai, by 32) answers exactly to Gr. cas of verbs in (५८ (tishtha~
VERBS.—TERMINATIONS, 143
sexi Ta-ga4). In other Gr. verbs, o has been rejected, and €a contracted into 4,
something in the way of Sk. (गणी for TUmTEe-ca), In 2nd du. thas=Gr. tov,
and in and pl. tha= Te and tis; bhara-thas= pépe-rov ; tishtha-tha = lora-re,
sta-tis ; bhara-thaxépe-re, fer-tis. In 2nd pl. Atm. bhara-dhve=pepe-obe. As
to the other tenses, in the 2nd sing. Impf. atarpas=€Teptes, avahas=vehebas, &c.
So also, tam=tov, adat-tam=€0(80-rov, tate, adat-ta=edido-re. In Atm. this
is found for sds in 2nd sing. Impf. and Pot.; hence abhara-this—=epépe- 00, adat-
this = €di80-c0, dad-tthds =9i9-o1(c)o. In ond sing. Pot. tishthes= ioraine, stes ;
dadyds=.doiys, des ; vahes=vehas ; bhares=pépors, eras: in 2nd du. bhare-tam=
Pépot-Tov: in and. pl. tishthetaxlorainre, stetis; dadydta=Oidolnre, detis; bhareta
=épore, feratis. In 2nd sing. Impv. hi and dhi answer toGr. 6s. Dhiwas originally
universal in Sk. (see 291), as in Gr. verbs in ५४; e-dhi=io-O1, vid-dhi= to-6:,
००१४ ~ 9/0०-4/, Sru-dhi= KAv-6t. Many verbs drop the termination ki both in
Gr. and Sk.; as, भर == pepe, and compare de/kvu with éinu, &c. In 2nd du. Impy.
tam=Tov, and ta=re. In Impv. Atm. sva=the old form 70; bhara-sva=pepe-oo
(old form of pépou) 3 dat-sva=0100-00 ; dthdm= €०6०४, &c. In Perf. the tha of
the 2nd sing. = Latin sti; dad-itha = dedi-sti, tasthi-tha = steti-sti, tutodi-tha—=
tutudi-sti. In the Aor. adés—é0ws, avdkshés=vesisti. In the उप्ते pers. sing.
Active, Gr. has dropped the characteristic द (except in €oT/=Sk. asti, Lat. est) ;
bharati=pépe(t)s, fert ; vahati=vehit. Verbs in (4८ have changed t tos; daddti
00५०४ (for ८0५74). In Atm. bharate= १८०६००५५. In Impf. avahat = vehebat,
F ०2107014 = €क ला 0. In Pot. bharet = pépat, dadydt—d.d0iy, In Impv. bhara-tu
or bhara-tdt—pepe-ro, fer-to. In Perf. tutopa=TeTupe. In Aor. avdkshét=vewit,
adikshataxédelbato. Asto grd pl., in the above tenses, bharantix=pepover, Serunt ;
vahanti=vehunt ; bharante=qpepovtas ध् 22द0--99०४०४ ; tishthanti=stant ; bha-
reyus = péposev ; bharantu= ferunto ; abharan = ६९००४; abharanta = €¶ ००४7०;
dsan= yoay 3 atarpishus= erepWay 5 ddsyante= 0८400704;
248. The terminations exhibited in the preceding tables are sup-
posed to be applicable to all verbs, whether Primitive or Derivative :
and as in nouns, so in verbs, the theory of Indian grammarians is,
that before these terminations can be affixed, a stem must be de-
veloped out of a root, according to certain rules which vary for the
first four tenses in ten different ways, according as a root belongs
to one or other of ten classes. Accordingly, ten special rules are
propounded for forming verbal stems out of roots in the first four
tenses, which are therefore called the four Special tenses ; while all
verbs are arranged under ten classes, according to the form of the
stem required by one or other of these rules. In the other tenses
there is one general rule for forming the stem, applicable to all verbs
of whatever class, and these tenses are therefore called General.
144 VERBS.—TEN CONJUGATIONAL RULES FOR FORMING
Hence the ten classes of roots are sometimes regarded as following
one or other of ten conjugations; and the four tenses, which alone
are affected by these conjugational rules (viz. the Present, Imperfect,
Potential, and Imperative), are sometimes called the conjugational
tenses. It is evident, however, that all Sanskrit roots, of whatever
class, follow one general conjugation for the majority of the tenses
of the Primitive verb, although they require a special formation of
stem depending on the class of each root for four of the tenses.
249. We begin by giving a brief summary of the ten rules for the
forming the stem of the four Special tenses in the ten classes of roots,
according to the Indian order of the ten classes.
Obs.—Native grammarians distinguish the ten classes of verbs by the name of
the first root in their lists; e.g. cl. 1. Bho-ddi, i.e. Bhi, &c., or the class of roots
beginning with bhd. Similarly, cl. 2. Ad-ddi; cl. 3. Juhoty-ddi (i.e. the Hu class) ;
cl. 4. Div-ddi; cl. 5. Sv-ddi (i.e. the Su class); cl. 6. Tud-ddi; cl. 7. Rudh-ddi ;
cl. 8. Tan-ddi; cl. 9. Kry-ddi (i.e. the Kri class); cl. 10. Cur-ddi.
Cl. 1. Gunate the vowel of the root (unless it be Wa, or a long
vowel not final, or a short vowel followed by a double consonant,
28) before every termination of the four Special tenses, and affix
च a—lengthened to st d before initial m* and v—to the root thus
gunated.
The accent is on the vowel of the root, unless it be thrown on the augment.
Cl. 2. Gunate the vowel of the root (if capable of Guna, as in
the last) before those terminations only which are marked with P
in the scheme at 246. Before all the other terminations the original
vowel of the root must be retained.
The accent rests on the vowel of the root, but only when the P terminations are
added. In other cases it rests on the first vowel of the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 3. Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel (see 252) of
the root, and gunate the radical but not the reduplicated vowel
before the P terminations only, as in cl. 2.
The accent rests on the first syllable of the stem before the Non-P terminations,
and before the P terminations beginning with a vowel.
Cl. 4. Affix य ya—lengthened to या yd before initial m* and v—
to the root, the vowel of which is generally left unchanged.
The accent is on the vowel of the root, not on the ya (cf. 461).
* But not before m final, the termination of the 1st sing. Impf. Parasmai.
THE STEM IN THE FOUR SPECIAL TENSES. 145
Cl. 5. Affix नु nu to the root, and gunate this nu into no before
the P terminations only.
In this class, as well as in cl. 8 and 9, the accent is on the inserted Vikarana
(250. ®) before the ए terminations, and in other cases it rests on the first vowel
of the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 6. Affix अ a—lengthened to चा द before initial m* and v—to
the root, which in other respects generally remains unchanged.
The absence of gunation of the radical vowel results from the accent being on
the Vikarana a (250. 2).
Cl. 7. Insert न na between the vowel and final consonant of
the root before the P terminations, and न् before the other termi-
nations,
Observe the peculiarity of this conjugation—that the conjugational na or n is
inserted into the middie of the root, and not affixed.
The accent is on the inserted na before the P terminations; in other cases it
rests on the Non-P terminations.
Cl. 8. Affix उ u to the root, and gunate this % into ० before the
P terminations only.
Obs.—As nine out of the ten roots in this class end in 2 or १, cl. 8 will resemble
cl. 5.
Cl. 9. Affix ना nd to the root before the P terminations ; नी ni
before all the others, except those beginning with vowels, where only
7m is affixed.
(1. 70. Gunate the radical vowel (if capable of Guna) throughout
all the persons of all the tenses, and affix aq aya—lengthened to
अया ayd before initial m* and v—to the root thus gunated.
The accent rests on the first vowel of the inserted aya.
250. It will appear, from a cursory examination of the above
rules, that the object of nearly all of them is to insert either a
vowel—sometimes alone, sometimes preceded by y or n—or a letter
of some kind between the modified root and the terminations. The
ist, 4th, 6th, and 1oth agree in requiring that the vowel, which is
immediately to precede the terminations, shall be a or 4. The and,
ard, and 7th agree in inserting no vowel between the final of the
root and the terminations. The 5th, 8th, and gth agree in interposing
either uw, d, or £ after the letter n. .
a, Any letters or syllables required to be inserted by the above
* But not before m final, the termination of the rst sing. Impf. Parasmai.
U
146 VERBS.—THE AUGMENT.
ten rules, are inserted only in the four Special tenses (except only
in the case of cl. 10). In the other six tenses the stem is formed
according to one general rule for all roots of whatever class, whence
their name of General tenses. But in these also, some letter or
syllable has to be inserted (the only exception being in the Perfect).
९, This inserted conjugational vowel, consonant, or syllable is usually called the
vikarana. Pénini’s technical names for the ten insertions between the modified root
and terminations under each of the ten classes, in regular order, are Sap, Sapo luk,
Slu, Syan, §nu, $a, Sram, u, snd, nié; the last, however, does not strictly contain the
vikarana, the real insertion in cl. 10 (and in Causals) being aya (represented by
the ४ of pi¢). The above Vikaranas (with ni¢) hold good before Krit suffixes con-
taining an indicatory ई (such as Satri or Sdnad, see 247.¢). In Passives and Neuters
the insertion is technically called yak (leaving ya), to distinguish it from the Vika-
rana Syan of cl. 4. With regard to the six General tenses, the Perfect has strictly
no vikarana (the almost universally inserted 7 of i¢ being called an augment). But
in verbs belonging to cl. 10, in Derivative verbs (such as Causals), and in a few
Primitive verbs like ¢ksh, the syllable ém is added to the verbal stem. With regard
to the other General tenses the Agama ह (or inserted i) is by no means universally
interposed, but certain letters or syllables are regarded as additions to the root
distinct from the terminations; that in the rst Future is technically called 2452
(=tds) ; that in the 2nd Future and Conditional is sya; that in the Aorist is called
él (for which either si¢ or ksa or éan or an or din are always substituted) ; that
in the Precative is ydsut (= yds) for Par., and sfyut (= sty) for Atm.; that in the
Vedic Let is called sip.
THE AGAMA OR AUGMENT स a,
251. In classical Sanskrit (but not always in Vedic) the augment
स ¢ (called dgama, ‘ increase’) is prefixed to the stems of the Imper-
fect, Aorist, and Conditional tenses, and when the stem begins with
Ha or td, the augment blends with these vowels into खा द by 31.
(So in Gr. € and € become ग in #yerpov, &c.)
a. But when the augment a is prefixed to stems beginning with
the vowels इ i, उ u, and करु १ (short or long), it blends with them
into रे ai, Wt au, आर् dr (against 32, which would require the result
to be ९, 0, ar).
Thus the stem इच्छ् 2८410 (fr. rt. ish, ‘to wish’) in 3rd sing. Impf. becomes रेच्छत्
५१८41५1 ; the stem ऊह wha becomes Wet auhata (Impf. Atm.); the stem WH
ridhno becomes सात् drdhnot ; the stem WW okha becomes WT aukhat.
6, When a root is compounded with one or more prepositions,
the augment is placed between the preposition or prepositions and
VERBS.—REDUPLICATION. 147
the root, e.g. anv-atishtham (fr. anu-sthd), upa-sam-aharat (fr. upa-
sam-hri).
When & s is prefixed to the root कृ kri, after certain prepositions (see 53. ¢), the
augment is placed before the s, e.g. sam-askarot.
Obs.—The augment a is thought by some to have been originally a kind of
demonstrative particle denoting past time (probably connected with the stem # of
the demonstrative pronoun idam, see 224), while the separable particle sma (thought
to be an abbreviation of another demonstrative pronominal stem sa-ma), also de-
noting past time, and often discharging the function of the augment a (see 878),
has remained a detached particle.
REDUPLICATION.
252. After explaining the augment it will be convenient to specify
the rules of reduplication (abhydsa), as these have to be applied in
the Special tenses of Primitive verbs of cl. 3, in the Perfect tense of
all Primitive verbs, in the Aorist of a few Primitive verbs, and of
verbs of cl. 10, and of some Nominals (521), as well as in Desidera-
tives and in Frequentatives.
In reduplication the initial consonant and first vowel of a root
are doubled, as in Jilip fr. rt. lip, dadaridré fr. daridrd. There are,
however, special rules, as follow:
Ist, as to consonants, thus:
a. A corresponding unaspirated letter is substituted for an aspirate, as Rd for
Y dh, in dadhd fr. dhd. (So in Gr., 7 is repeated for 6, as 6४८, 7८60५८०, &c.)
8. The hard palatal च् ¢ is substituted for the hard gutturals क् k or ख् kh, as in
éakhan fr. khan; and the soft palatal ज् j for the soft gutturals Mg, Fgh, or Eh,
as in jagam fr. gam, jaghas fr. ghas, juhu fr. hu.
Obs.— #4 han, ‘to kill,’ and हि hi, ‘to go,’ substitute Y gh for ह् # when redu-
plicated ; as, jaghan fr. han.
९. Ifa root begin with a double consonant, the first consonant only or its sub-
stitute is repeated ; as, च् ८ for छ् ksh, in cikship fr. kship + स् s for BA sy, in sasyand
fr. syand; Wj for Rar, in jahras fr. hras.
But if with a double consonant whose first is a sibilant, and whose second is
hard, the व an its substitute is reduplicated ; as, च् ८ for स्क् sk, as in ¢éaskand
fr. skand त् £ for © sth, as in tasthd fr. sthd ; Up for स्म् sp, as in paspris fr. sprig.
andly, as to vowels, thus:
d. A short vowel is repeated for a long, and diphthongal sounds are represented
by their second element; e.g. a is reduplicated for Htd; इ?" ३६ Tri, re
Ze, and Bai; Du for He, Mo, and खो ८.
Obs.—In certain cases ¥ £ is also repeated for a and d, as being a lighter vowel,
and dyut, ‘to shine,’ makes didyut for dudyut.
UZ
148 PRIMITIVE AND DERIVATIVE VERBS.
~ e. In fact it may be observed, that when'a long vowel causes too great weight
in the radical syllable, it is generally lightened in the reduplicated syllable.
f. When a form has once been reduplicated, it is never reduplicated again in
forming other Derivatives from it (see 517. 2) 5 and when roots which have to be
reduplicated have any changed form, this modified form is taken in the redupli-
cation; thus, समु smri, “to remember,’ being changed to WT in the Desiderative,
the vowel of the root does not appear in the reduplication (सुस्मर)
VERBS PRIMITIVE, PASSIVE, CAUSAL, DESIDERATIVE, &c.
253. In conjugating a verb, then, two things have to be done:
ist, to form the stem from the root according to ten rules for four
of the tenses, and one general rule for the other six; 2ndly, to join
the stem so formed with the terminations, according to the regular
rules of Sandhi or euphonic conjugation. As yet, however, we have
only given a general explanation of the formation of the verbal stem
of the Simple or Primitive verb under the ten classes of roots.
There are four other kinds of verbs deducible from all roots,
whatever be their class.
254. In fact, every Sanskrit root serves as a kind of stock out
of which the inflective stems of five kinds of verbs may be evolved :
1. of a Primitive, Transitive or Intransitive ; 2. of a Passive; 3. of a
Causal, having often a Causal and often merely a Transitive signifi-
cation ; 4. of a Desiderative, giving a sense of wishing to the root;
and 5. of a Frequentative (or Intensive), implying repetition, or
heightening the idea contained in, the root (see, however, 507).
2.55. The first, or Primitive verb, is formed from the root, accord-
ing to the ten different rules, already given, for the formation of the
stem in the first four tenses.
The second, or Passive, is formed according to the rule for the
change of the root, required by the 4th class; viz. the addition of
ya in the first four tenses.
The third, or Causal, is formed according to the rule for the
change of the root required by the roth class; viz. the addition of
aya to the root in all the tenses excepting the Aorist.
The fourth, or Desiderative, is formed by the addition of sa: or
isha, the root also undergoing reduplication.
The fifth, or Frequentative, is formed like the Passive, according
to the rule required by cl. 4, and is, in fact, a reduplicated passive
verb. It may also be formed analogously to the rule for cl. 35
FORMATION OF THE STEM OF PRIMITIVE VERBS. 149
ˆ Thus, if we take the root शुभ् subh, conveying the idea of ‘shining ’—from this
are developed, rst, the Primitive verbal stem, sobha, ‘to shine ;’ 2ndly, the Passive,
Subhya, ‘to be bright;’ 3rdly, the Causal, éobhaya, ‘to cause to shine’ or ‘illuminate;?
4thly, the Desiderative, susobhisha, ‘to desire to shine;’ pthly, the Frequentative
or Intensive, sosubhya or Sosubh, * to shine very brightly.’
a: And as every root is the source of five different kinds of Derivative verbs, so
there are secondary Derivative verbs developed out of nouns called Nominal verbs.
An explanation of these will be found after Frequentatives at 518.
256. The subject of verbs, therefore, as of nouns, will divide itself
into two heads:
A. The formation of the stem; 1st of Primitive, 2ndly of Passive,
3grdly of Causal, 4thly of Desiderative, 5thly of Frequentative verbs ;
with their respective Participles.
B. The exhibition of the stem, united to its terminations, under
each of the five forms of verbs consecutively.
PRIMITIVE VERBS.
FORMATION OF THE STEM OF THE FIRST FOUR TENSES, IN THE
TEN CLASSES.
A brief summary of the ten rules for the formation of the stem
of the four Special tenses—viz. the Present, Imperfect, Potential,
and Imperative—in the ten classes of roots, has already been given
at 249. These ten rules may be collected into three groups, which
form three distinct general conjugations, as follow:
257. Group I. Conjugation I. This (like the declension of the
first class of nouns whose stems end in a and @) is by far the most
important, as comprising roots of the 1st, 4th, 6th, and 1oth classes,
which agree in making their stems end in a (liable to be lengthened
to d). These also resemble each other in taking substitutions for
some of the terminations, after the analogy of the stems of nouns
ending in ¢ and द at.g7. (See the substitutions indicated in the
table at 246.)
Note—Of about 2000 roots belonging to the Sanskrit language, nearly 7300
belong to this 1st conjugation. Besides which, every root in the language may
take a Passive and Causal form, and so be conjugated as if it belonged to the 4th
and roth classes.
258. Group II. Conjugation II. This comprises verbs of the 2nd,
3rd, and 7th classes, which agree in affixing the regular terminations
150 VERBS.—GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM.
(at 246) to the final letter of the root, without the intervention of a
vowel, after the analogy of the last four classes of nouns whose stems
end in consonants.
259. Group III, Conjugation III, comprising verbs of the 5th,
8th, and gth classes, also affixes the regular terminations (at 246) to
the root; but after the intervention of either u, d, or ¢, preceded by |
the consonant 2.
260. In comparing Sanskrit verbs with Greek and Latin, it might be shewn
that group I, comprising the 1st, 4th, 6th, and roth classes, answers to the Gr.
st conjugation in ५; the conjugational स a being represented in Gr. by o or €
(tarpdmas=Té proper, tarpatha 7407676); and although the Gr. 1st conjugation
contains more subdivisions than the first group in Sk., yet the inflexion of these
subdivisions is similar. As to the Sk. 10th class, however, it appears to correspond
to Gr. verbs in aw and s$w, which, like the roth, are generally found in company
with other verbs from the same root; thus, ५०९००६५, “I make pure’ (५५0०८००),
orevate, I groan’ (०7६५५), where हु corresponds to Ty, as in {६८ and यव ‘barley.’
To this class also may be referred verbs in aw, €w, ow; thus pdraydmi = 7०६०,
where the y has been dropped, and the two a’s combined. Lat. verbs in 20, like
audio &c., seem to be related to the Sk. 4th class, as well as to the roth; thus
cupio answers to kupydmi ; and the ४ of audiebam answers to the aya of the roth,
just as in Prakrit aya is contracted into &e. The second and third groups of
classes in Sk. (viz. the 2nd, 3rd, 7th, 5th, 8th, and oth) answer to Gr. verbs in (५८ ३
thus emi cl. als, daddmi cl. 3=-9८ ४०५५. Class 7, however, has no exact parallel
in Gr., but many Gr. and Lat. verbs resemble it in inserting a nasal into the middle
of the root; see 342.a. The sth and 8th classes answer to Gr. verbs like 0९८५८-५४-(५4)
Sevy-vu-pt, which agree in inserting ५४ between the root and termination; in Gr.
the vowel ४ is lengthened before certain terminations, just as wis gunated into o
in Sk.; thus strinomi = ०7८0५२५८ 5177050 = 07060५26, strinoti = 111 (for
0४४7८), strinumas = 0740४४५९ (for 074०४८५), &c. The oth class answers to
Gr. verbs in v& (vy); thus krindmi = Tépvaus (72५१1५८), krénémas = 7८०१०५९४.
Cf. also Lat. forms in ni; thus sternimus= Sk. strinémas, fr. stri, cl. 9.
GROUP I.—FORMATION OF STEM IN ROOTS OF CLASSES 7, 4, 6, 10.
261. Cuass 1 (containing about 1000 Primitive verbs)—Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except when debarred by 28) before
every termination of all the four tenses, and affix the vowel ख a to
the root so gunated. Remember, that this स @ is lengthened into
‘st ¢ before the initial m and v of a termination, but not when m is
final, as in the 1st sing, Impf.
262, Thus, fr. root चुध् budh, ‘to know,’ is formed the stem बोध bodha, lengthened
VERBS.—GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM. 151
into बोधा bodhd before m and v (Pres. 1.* bodhd-+mi = बोधामि bodhdmi, bodha+si=
बोधसि bodhasi, bodha+ द = बोधति bodhati ; एप. bodhéd+vas = बोधावस् bodhdvas,
&c.; Atm. Pres. 2०4०-१ वोधे bodhe by 32, badha+se --वबोधसे ००५१८३९, & ९.) See
table at 583.
263. Similarly, fr. fat ६, ‘to conquer’ (see 590), comes the stem W jaya (i.e.
4९10, see 36. a), liable to be lengthened into जया jayd, as explained above; fr. AT
nt, ‘to lead,’ the stems naya and nayd; fr. भू एष, ‘to be? (pvw, Lat. fu), the stems
bhava (i.e. bho+a, 36.a) and bhavd (Pres. 1. भवामि bhavdmi; 2. भवसि Bhavasi,
Pvets, &e., see 584); fr. सुप् srip, ‘to creep,’ the stems aq sarpa and sarpd (see 27);
fr. HA धक, ‘to fashion,’ the stems कल्य kalpa and kalpd.
Obs.—Bhii, ‘to be’ or "to become,’ is one of the commonest verbs in the language,
and like as, ‘to be,’ at 584, 327, is sometimes used as an auxiliary. Bhd is conjugated
in full at 585.
264. The stem of the Imperfect has the augment ख a prefixed by
251 (Impf. 1. abodha+m= अवोधम् abodham, 2. abodha+ ऽ = अवोधस्
abodhas, & ९.)
265. In the Potential the final a of the stem blends with the initial
ध of the termination into e by 32 (Pot. 1. bodha + iyam = वोभेयम् bo-
dheyam). So also in the Pres. Atm. (बोधे &c.) See table at 583.
266. In the Imperative the termination is rejected in the 2nd sing.
(Impv. 1. bodha + 49 = बोधानि bodhdni, 2. ara bodha, 3. bodha + tu
= बोधतु bodhatu).
267. Roots like TA‘ to cook,’ fire to beg,’ जीव् ‘to live’ (603), cannot change
their radical vowels (see 27. a, 28), but, as before, affix स 4, liable to be lengthened
to Std: (Pres. ब. पच्चामि &c.; Pres. Atm. 1. FET &०.; Pres. 1. जीवामि &c.)
268. Some roots ending in the Vriddhi रे ai cannot be gunated, but suffer the
usual change of Sandhi before ऋ 0 and सां ठ by 37; as, from गे ‘to sing,’ गर “to be
‘weary,’ a Atm. “to preserve क, श्ये ‘to meditate,’ a ‘to fade,’ are formed the stems
gdya, gldya, trdya, dhydya, mldya. See 595. a. 8.
269. Some roots of cl. 1 form their stems in the first four tenses by a change
peculiar to themselves, which change is of course discarded in the other tenses ;
thus, from स्था sthd, ‘to stand’ (587), Ht ghrd, ‘to smell’ (588), चा ‘to drink? ( 589),
YT ‘to blow,’ AT ‘to repeat’ or ‘think over,’ come the bases तिष्ठ tishtha, fra
jighra, पिव piva, WA dhama, मन mana, the final a being, as before, liable to be
lengthened.
a. It should be noted that स्या sthd and HT ghra are properly reduplicated verbs
of cl. 3 at 330. The reduplicated stem, by 252, would be ¢asthd, jaghrd:; but as
the reduplication is irregular, and the radical ¢ gives way to the conjugational a,
* 1, stands for 1st person singular; Du. 1. for rst dual; Pl. 1. for 1st plural, &c.
+ A form त्राहि, as well 8 तरायस्व, is found in Epic poetry for the 2nd sing.
Impv. of this root.
152 VERBS.—GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM.
grammarians place these roots under cl.1. The Greek {07८८ on the other hand,
has not shortened its radical vowel in the singular.
270, Again, दू ज् * to see,’ गन् “to go,’ यम् (10 restrain,’ J “to go,’ सद् ‘to sink,’
शद् (Atm. in Special tenses, Par. in others) “to fall,’ ‘to perish,’ form their stems
परय pasya, गच्छ 00८90, यच्छ yactha, WB riccha, सीद् sida, WA Mya: (Pres. 1.
पर्यामि pasydmi, & ५.)
a. According to Panini (एप. 3, 78), दा “to give’ may sometimes substitute the
stem यच्छ yadcha ; and सु ‘to go,’ the stem धाव dhdva.
b. गुहू “to conceal’ forms गूह ; fea’ to spit,’ हीव; मृज् ‘to cleanse,’ माज: (Pres. 1.
गृहामि &c.)
९. क्रम् ‘to step,’ करम् ‘to tire,’ चम् (with सा) ‘to rinse the mouth,’ lengthen their
medial vowels, but the first only in Parasmai: (Pres. 1. क्रामामि &e., but Atm. क्रम.)
d. दंश् ‘to bite,’ TH “to colour,’ सञ् “to adhere,” स्वनन् ‘to embrace,’ drop their
nasals: (Pres. 1. Ifa &c., TATA &c.)
९. जभ् Atm. ‘to yawn’ makes its stem: WAT, and even लम् Atm. ‘to receive’
sometimes becomes 4 in Epic poetry.
271. कम् Atm. ‘to love’ forms its stem after the analogy of cl. 10 (Pres. 1. कामये
&c.), and some other roots add dya; thus, fr. 74" to protect,’ गोपाय gopdya; fr. J
"10 fumigate,’ YUTA; fr. fag ‘to go,’ विच्छाय; fr. पण् Atm. (meaning “to praise,’
not ‘to wager’), पणाय ; fr. पन् Atm. ‘to praise,’ पनाय.
a. ge Atm. ‘to play,’ like all roots containing ir and ur compounded with
another consonant, lengthens the vowel (Pres. 1. ae &c.)
272. Cuass 4 (containing about 130 Primitive verbs).—Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Affix य ya to the root. The vowel of the root is not gunated,
and generally remains unchanged. Remember, that the inserted
aya is liable to become या yd before an initial m and v of the
terminations (but not before the m of the 1st sing. Impf. Par.), as
in cl. 1 at 261.
273. Thus, fr. सि् sidh, “to succeed,’ is formed the stem सिध्य sidhya (Pres. 1.
sidhyd+-mi = सिध्यामि sidhydmi, 2. सिध्यसि sidhyasi, &c.; Impf. asidhya+-m = खसि-
ध्यम् asidhyam, &c.; Pot. 1. sidhya+iyam= सिथ्येयम् sidhyeyam, 2. सिथ्येस् sidhyes,
&c.; Impv. 1. sidhya+dni सिध्यानि sidhydni, &९. Pres, Atm. 1. sidhya+i—fary
sidhye, sidhya+se=fawa sidhyase, &c.) See 616.
274. Similarly, fr. AT md, ‘to measure,’ the stem मायं mdya (Pres. 1. Atm. mdya
+= साये mdye, &c.); fr. सिप् kship, ‘to throw,’ सिष्य kshipya; fr. JA nrit, “to dance,”
नृत्य nritya ; fr. St dé, ‘to fly,’ ST diya (Pres. Atm. 1. इगीये).
275. Roots ending in am and iv, and one in ad, lengthen the vowel; as, fr. दिव्
div, ‘to play,’ दीव्य dfvya ; fr. चम् bhram (also cl. 1), ‘to wander,’ भ्राम्य bhrdmya ;
fr. A mad, ‘to be mad,’ ATE mddya. Similarly, क्रम् (also cl. 1) ‘to step,’ wa “to
endure,’ क्म् ‘to grow weary,’ तम् ‘to be afflicted,’ दम् ‘to be tamed ;’ but dhram
may optionally form WEY bhramya.
VERBS.—GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM. 1538
276. If a root contain a nasal it is generally rejected ; as, from भज् “to fall,’
WIA bhrasya ; from TH ‘to colour,’ रज्य ; जन् ‘to be born’ makes जाय jdya (Pres.
1. Atm. जाये), lengthening the vowel, to compensate for the loss of n.
a. Roots ending in "Yo drop this o before the conjugational ya; thus, सो so, ‘to
end,’ makes its stem sya. Similarly, B ‘to cut,’ श्यो "10 sharpen,’ दो ९० divide.’
277. The following are anomalous. From ज् ‘to grow old,’ जीये 1490; fr. OY
“to pierce,’ विध्य vidhya (cf. 472); fr. fae ‘to be viscid,’ मेद्य medya.
Obs.—Although this class includes only 130 Primitive verbs (generally Intran-
sitive in signification), yet every one of the 2000 roots in the language may have
2 Passive form which follows the Atmane-pada of this class, differing from it only
in the position of the accent, see 461.
278. Cuass 6 (containing about 140 Primitive verbs),— Rule for
the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses.
Affix the vowel स च to the root, which is not gunated, and in
other respects generally remains unchanged. Remember, that the
inserted स @ becomes स्रा द before an initial m and v of the termina-
tions of the four tenses (but not before the m of the 1st sing. Impf.),
as in cl. 7 and 4 at 261 and 272.
279. Thus, fr. सिप् kship, ‘to throw,’ comes the stem सिप kshipa (Pres. 1. kshipé
+mi—faurfa kshipdmi, 2. kshipa+si=feata kshipasi ; Pot. 1. kshipa--iyam=
feraaa kshipeyam, &c. Atm. Pres. 1. kshipa+i=fera kshipe; see 635).
Similarly, fr. तुट् tud, “to strike,’ तुद् tuda; fr. fe dig, ‘to point out,’ fet disa.
280. Roots in $i, उ ४ or क ४ च्छु ri and * {४ generally change those vowels
into इय् iy, उव् ४४, रिय् riy, and इर् ir respectively; as, fr. रि, ‘to go,’ comes the
stem स्यि riya ; fr. तु * to praise,’ नुव nuva; fr. Y‘ to agitate,’ YA dhuva; fr. 7 ‘to
die,’ विय mriya (626) ; fr. & kri, ‘to scatter,’ fart kira (627).
a. ग् ‘to swallow’ makes either गिर or गिल.
281. A considerable number of roots of the sixth class, ending in consonants,
insert a nasal before the final consonant in the four tenses ; as, 0, सुच् “to let go,’
comes the stem मुच्च munca; fr. fsa" to anoint,’ for limpa ; fr. ar to cut,’ कुन्त
krinta ; fr. faz‘ to sprinkle,’ fA ७८०; fr. Bt to break,’ (At lumpa; fr. fast
‘to form,’ fig. Similarly, faz ‘to find,’ खिट् ‘to trouble.”
282. The following are anomalous. From इष्, “to wish,’ comes the stem इच्छ ié¢ha ;
fr. WS “to ask,’ पृच्छ pridcha; fr. WS ‘to fry, HH एण; fr. व्यच् ‘to deceive,’
विच vida; fr. AA‘ to cut,’ FW vriséa. Cf. 472.
a. The roots Wg and सह् are sometimes regarded as falling under this class; see
their stems at 270.
283. 01.488 10 (containing a few Primitive verbs, all Causals, and
some Nominal verbs, see 521).—Rule for forming the stem in the
four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root throughout every person of all the
५.५
154 VERBS.—GROUP I. FORMATION OF STEM.
four tenses (except when debarred by 28), and affix wa aya to the
root so gunated, This wa aya becomes अया ayd before initial m and
v of the terminations of the four tenses, but not before m of the 1st
sing. Impf.
284. Thus, from चुर् dur, ‘to steal,’ is formed the stem चोरय doraya (Pres. 1.
corayd + 9 = चोरयामि Coraydmi, 2. ८००८ + 5 चोरयसि corayasi, &c.; Impf. 1.
adoraya + m= BNA aéorayam, &c., see 638; Pot. 1. éoraya + tyam = चोरयेयम्
éorayeyam ; Impv. 1. éoraya + dni -चोर्याणि éoraydni, &c., see 58).
285. Roots ending in vowels generally take Vriddhi instead of Guna (481) ; as, fr.
Wt ‘to 7169९, प्रायय prdyaya (cf. 485.) ; fr. Y ‘to hold,’ चास्य dhdraya. एण वृ “to
choose’ makes वर्य varaya. This last, however, is generally regarded as a Causal.
286. Roots containing the vowel च a before a single consonant generally lengthen
this vowel; as, fr. qa to swallow,’ WTA grdsaya ~ but not before a conjunct con-
sonant; as, fr. rd “to mark,’ WRI; fr. TH ‘to punish,’ दृर्डय.
u. The following, however, do not lengthen the medial a; though followed by a
‘single consonant : कथ् ‘to say’ (कयय) 5 ray to count ;’ अध् ‘to sin ;’ खच् ‘to tie ;’
TA ‘to arrange ;* पट् Atm. in the sense of ‘to surround ;’ ण्ट “to scream ;” aT ‘to
wound ;’ WY and वय् in the sense of ‘to be lax or weak ;’ रह् “to quit; पट् Atm.
“to go;? गद् ‘to sound;’ श्वन्, स्तन्, GA, ‘to sound;’ कल्ट् ‘to count’ (also
lengthened in Epic poetry) ; व्यय् ` to spend ;’ and others less common.
287. CLG “to celebrate,’ ‘to praise,’ makes कीतेय kirtaya (Pres. कीीयामि).
288. A few roots with a medial चु ri retain that vowel unchanged ; as, from स्पृह्
“to desire,’ स्पृहय; मृग् “to search,’ मृगय; मृष् “to bear, मृषय (more commonly
मेय); FX Atm. ‘to take,’ FRA (915० ग्राहय) ; कृप् ‘to pity,’ FAI; but FA ‘to
wipe’ takes Vriddhi (arsia). Some of these may be regarded as nominals.
a. The following also do not gunate their medial vowels: मुख् ` ६० make happy,’
a ‘to bind,’ स्फुट् “to become manifest,’ FT or TT “to consult.”
8. A few roots of more than one syllable (see 75. a) are said to belong to cl. 10,
viz. सभाज ‘to worship, सवधीर ‘to despise, संग्राम् ` to fight,’ कुमार् or FATS to
play,’ गवेष् “to search fazq ‘to imitate, निवास् to put on,’ सकत् to invite,’
ष्पान्दोल, हिन्दोत्द, हिल्लोल्, Wars, to swing,’ TRUS or TIS or TATS to cut off.”
These and a few monosyllabic roots of cl. 10, such as WT‘ to divide,’ सथं ‘to ask,”
fay to mix, ae to mark,’ मूत ‘to make water, सूत् to thread वीज् to fan
fxg ‘to perforate, We to sound,’ and others less common, can, according to
some grammarians, form their stems optionally with dpaya ; thus, WS may make
in Pres. 1. Satis or संश्ञयामि
289. It has been shewn that every root may have a Causal form,
which follows the rule of conjugation of cl. 10. Indeed, it may be
owing to the fact that there are a number of Active Primitive verbs
not Causal in their signification, but conjugated like Causals, that a
VERBS,—GROUPS II AND III. FORMATION oF gTEM, 155
10th class has arisen distinct from the Causal. In verbs of this class
the Causal form will generally be identical with the Primitive.
Again, as some verbs really Causal in their signification are re-
garded as belonging to cl. 10, there will often be a difficulty in
determining whether a verb be a Primitive verb of this class, or a.
Causal verb. Hence the consideration of cl. 10 must to a great
extent be mixed up with that.of the Causal form of the root. See
the special changes applicable to Causals at 483-488.
a, Observe, that all verbs, whether Primitive or Causal, which
belong to cl. 10, have this great peculiarity, viz. that the conjugational
aya is carried throughout all the tenses of the verb, General as well
as Special, except only the Aorist and the Precative, Parasmai-pada.
For this reason the formation of the stem of the General tenses of
verbs of cl. 10 will not be explained under the head of the General
tenses (at 363), but will fall under Causal verbs.
b. Many verbs of cl. 10 are also conjugated in other classes; and many may be
regarded as Nominal verbs.
‘
GROUPS II AND III.—FORMATION OF STEM IN ROOTS OF CLASSES
2, 3, 7, AND CLASSES 5, 8, 9.
Preliminary Observations.
290. The formation of the stems of verbs of groups II and IIT.
presents more difficulties than that of group I, containing the ist,
4th, 6th, and roth classes. In group I the verbal stem, although
varying slightly in each class, preserves the form assumed in the
singular before all the terminations of every Special tense; but in
the last two groups the stem is liable to variation in the various
persons and numbers of most of the tenses, such variation being
denoted by the letter P and other indicatory letters of the scheme
at 246.
a. The object of the P is to shew, that fulness or strength of form is imparted
to the root before these weak terminations (see 247. 8) 3 thus इ 2, cl. 2, “to go,’ is
in the Pres. sing. emi, eshi, ett; in du. twas, ithas, itas ; in pl. imas, &c.: just as
in Gr. elt, ei, ०५, troy, iTov, 14९, &c.: cf. also ५१८ (for Paz), Pus,
१० parey, फट paper, pire, act. So again, stri, ‘to strew,’ is in Pres.
sing. strinomi, strinoshi, strinoti; in du. striguvas, striputhas, strinutas ; in pl.
strinumas, &c.: just as in Gr. 0740५0५८, 04, 07402०५, orépvitay, oropvitov,
x2
156 VERBS.—GROUPS I] AND III. FORMATION OF STEM.
4 70०५८६१ &c. Similarly, kré, ‘to buy,’ is in Pres. sing. krindmi, kripdsi, krindti ;
in du. &c. kréptvas, krintthas, krinttas, krintmas, &e., the द being heavier than 7.
Cf. mepveunt (2६०५१८५८), mepvas, mepvart, 7000700, mépvarov, &९. The P after
the terminations of the first three persons of the Impv., Parasmai and Atmane,
indicates that even before these heavy terminations the stem must be full. When
2 root ending in a consonant is long by nature or position, no additional strength
is necessary, and no Guna is then possible (see 28); but in place of Guna, the
stem sometimes remains unmutilated before the light terminations, while mutilation
takes place before the heavy. The same holds good in roots ending in ¢; thus dé
and dhd suppress their final vowels before strong terminations, and preserve them
before weak ; see 335, 336. Similarly, as, ‘to be,’ which by 28 cannot be gunated,
drops its mitial vowel before the strong terminations, retaining it before the weak ;
see 327, and compare 324.
291. Another source of difficulty is, that in group IT (containing
the and, 3rd, and 7th classes) the verbal stem generally ends in a
consonant. This group of verbal stems, therefore, will resemble the
last four classes of nominal stems; and the combination of the final
consonant of a stem with the initial द, th, dh, or s, of a termination
in the Special tenses of these three classes requires a knowledge of
the laws of Sandhi already given, as well as of others about to be
explained.
292. With regard to the terminations, a reference to the table at
246 will shew that the last two groups take the regular terminations
of the scheme, with few substitutions. But in the 3rd pl. Present
and Imperative, Atmane-pada, the nasal is rejected in all six classes;
and in the 3rd class, owing to the burden occasioned by reduplication,
the nasal is also rejected in the 3rd pl. of the Parasmai-pada in these
two tenses; this class also takes us for an in the 3rd pl. Impf.
23. Moreover, roots ending in consonants, of the 2nd and 3rd, and all roots of
the 7th, and the root = hu of the grd class, take dhi (the Greek 4) for hi in the
2nd sing. Impv.* (see 246); and roots ending in vowels, of the 5th, and all roots
eof the 8th, and roots ending in consonants of the goth class, resemble the first
group of classes at 257, in rejecting this termination hi altogether.
294. Again, roots ending in consonants reject the terminations s and ¢ of the
2nd and grd sing. Impf. by 41.1, changing the final of the root, if a soft consonant,
to an unaspirated hard; and in other respects changing a final consonant, as indi-
cated at 41.I-IV. In roots ending in WH य्, ठ्, धू? the ऽप person rejects the
* Dhi was originally the only form. Hence in the Vedas श्रुधि (५१४५५) ; and in
the Mahé-bharata wargfy. Dhi then passed into hi, as dhita passed into hita,
and bhimi into the Latin humus.
VERBS.—RULES OF SANDHI. 157
termination ह regularly, and ends therefore in simple त् ; the 2nd person optionally
rejects either the terminatien s, and ends therefore in ४, or the final dental of the
root, and ends then in $, see 308.
295. The following new rules of Sandhi will also apply in forming the Special
tenses of the Parasmai-Frequentative (see 514), and in forming the stem of the
‘General tenses of all Primitive verbs (except those of cl. 10), and in some of the
Participles; for although in most roots ending in consonants the vowel इ i (see 391)
is inserted before the terminations of these tenses, yet a large class of common
roots reject this inserted vowel, leaving the final of the stem to coalesce with the
initial consonant of the termination. It will be convenient, therefore, to introduce
by anticipation examples from the General tenses and Participles.
EUPHONIC JUNCTION OF CERTAIN VERBAL STEMS WITH
TERMINATIONS AND SUFFIXES.
Combination of final च् €, छ् ch, ज् ), भ् jh, with qt, Eth, च् ता, स् 8.
296. Final च् and ज् Js before त्४य् th, ध् द, and स् 5, are changed
to क् ¢ (cf. 41. IV), the क् ¢ blending with स् 5 into qksh by 70, and.
becoming म् g before dh; thus, vad + ti=vakti; vaé + thas =vakthas ;
vaé + si=vakshi; moé+sydmi = mokshydmi; mué + ta = mukta ;
tyaj + ta=tyakta; tyaj + sydmi=tyakshydmi. The same applies to
final ¥ jh, but this is not likely to occur.
a. Similarly, final % ¢éh before $ ; as, prach + sydmi = prakshydmi.
297. But a final च् ¢h and ज् sometimes become ¥ sh before त् é,
qth; and त् ४, च् ६0, then become दू, द् ; thus, मान् + ti = मार्ट; T+
thas = मृष्टस् ; मृन् + 1० = सृष्ट; प्र् + {८ = प्रा.
a. Similarly, a final {jf may be changed to इ ¶ before च् dh, which
then becomes ठ् क
b. भञ्ज् ‘to fry,’ ast ‘to be immersed,’ and ay ‘to cut,’ reject
their last consonant, and the first two are treated as if ending in ज्,
the last as if ending in श्. See 632, 633, 630.
Combination of final च् dh, न् bh, with 4 ४य् th, स् 8.
298. Final ydh and म् bh, before त् ४ and qth, are changed, the one
to ठ् d, the other to ब्, and both ¢ and ¢h then become च् dh; thus,
rundh with tas or thas becomes equally erga runddhas ; labh + téhe |
= ware labdhéhe; bodh + téhe = बोद्धाहे.
A similar rule applies to final च् gh, which must be changed to गू g, but this is
not likely to occur.
a, When final च् dh is preceded by a conjunct 4”, as in rundh,
then the final dh, which has become d (before ¢ and th changed to
158 VERBS.—RULES OF SANDHI.
dh), may optionally be rejected; so that rundh + tas = Brae 07 BUG;
rundh + tam = सन्डम् or BAM (Pan. vir. 4, 6 5).
b. On the same principle TWA is written for REA from FX (674).
९. Similarly roots ending in {¢ and ट् d may reject these letters before th, ४, and
dhi, when n immediately precedes, hence भिन्ते may be written for भिन्ते, भिन्तस् for
भिन्तस्, firfar for निन्डि.
299. Final ध् dh and म् bh, before स् 5, are changed by 44, the one
to त् 2, the other to q p; thus, way runadh + fa 9 becomes water
runatsi; sedh + sydmi = setsydmi; labh + sye = lapsye (cf. 41. II).
a. If the initial of the syllable containing the final aspirate be g,
d, b, or क, then the aspirate, which has been rejected in the final, is
thrown back on the initial; as, fry bodh + स्थे sye = wre bhotsye; दध्
‘dadh + sva = dhatsva : and in the case of दध् the same applies before
t and th, against 298. See 44. ९ 336, 664. Cf. Ope yw from tpépu.
b. The aspiration is also thrown back on the initial, when final dh
is changed to d, before the terminations dive and dhvam. See 336,664.
Combinations of final श् € ष् 511, स् 8, with त् ४, य् स् 8, Ydh.
300. Final ज् $, before त् ¢ and qth, becomes च् sh; and the त् ४, qth,
take the cerebral form दू, 4; thus, इन् + ८८ = $8; रे9् + thés = tary.
gor. Similarly, final ष् sh, before qé and च् 0, requires the change
गत् ४, qth, to द्, द्; thus, डेष् + ४ = इष्टि; and द्विष् + thas = द्विष्ठस्-
302. Final ज् ई or ष् sh, before स् 5, is changed to क् ¢ by 41. ४, the
as then becoming ष् sh by 70; thus, वज् + si = वधि ; डेष् + ॐ = fy;
द्रश् + sydmi = द्रस्यामि.
a, Final ksh is also changed ४० क् k; 28, च् + से = चक्षे.
303. Final ज् ई or ष् sh, before च् dh, is changed to = d, the y dh
becoming द् क by 51; thus, fay+dhi=fegfe. Similarly, दिष् +
dhvam = दवि इदम्. A final न् 7 may also follow this rule ; see 632, 651.
a. Final सू ¢? also becomes इ क, k being dropped; as, चस् 1 ध्वे = aye.
304. Final स् ऽ is changed to त् ४ before त् ६ in the 3rd sing. Impf.
(the termination ¢ being rejected), and before ध् dh, is either dropped
or changed to @d; thus, éakds + dhi = either चकाधि dakddhi or wanfg
éakdddhi; शास् + 2/४ = शाधि ; fea + dhi = fefar or हिन्डि, see 658, 673.
a. Final स् ऽ before सू 5 is changed to त् ६; as, vas + sydmi = vat-
sydmi. So optionally in 2nd sing. Impf. of जाम्, asds + ऽ = ०८८5 =
asdt (or ads).
¢. But not in the case of final s preceded by a or द before si and se.
VERBS.—RULES OF SANDHI. 159
Combination of final ह् 1 with qt, qth, स् 8 च् dh.
305. In roots beginning with द् d, like दुह् duh, ‘to milk,’ final ह् ¢
is treated as if it were च् 4, and is changed to ग् 9 before qt and च् th,
and both ¢ and ¢h then become ध् dh; thus, a duh + tas or thas
becomes equally दुग्धम् dugdhas ; दह् dah + tésmi = dagdhdsmi,
But दह् + = दुद dridha.
Note—lIn root नह् the final ‰ is treated as if it were ध् dh, and
becomes ह् क, after which ¢ and th both become dh. See 624.
a, But if a root begin with any other letter than ¢d or न् % then
its final ह A is dropped, and both the त् ६ and च् 4 of the termination
become ठ् dh. Moreover, to compensate for the rejection of the final
h, a radical vowel (except ri), if not gunated, is lengthened, and in the
roots सह् sah and ag vah, ‘to bear,’ changed to 0; 28, मुह् + 10 == मूढ ;
रुह् + ४ = रूढ ; लेह् + ¢ = लेढि ०0; Ug + 49" = रोढास्मि ; सह् + 14 =
सोढा; वह् + 14 = बोढा.
Obs.—But तृह् + 1 = तृढ, and 9g + fa == वृढ (Pan. vi. 3, 111).
९. दह् ‘to injure,’ मुहू ‘to be foolish,’ fag ‘to love,’ सुह ‘to vomit,’
optionally follow either 305 or 305. a.
306. Final A, before स् s, follows the analogy of final ज् § and
ष् sh, and is changed to @ ¢ which blends with qs into छ् ksh;
thus, लेह् leh with si becomes लकि; रोह + sydmi = रोख्यामि. Similarly,
in Latin, final A becomes k before s; as, veksit (vewit) from veho.
a. And if the initial of the syllable ending in %/ be @d, 19, TO,
or ड् ¶ (the two latter, however, are not likely to occur), then the final
ह A is still changed to क् ¢ before s; but the initial ¢ d and म् g are
aspirated according to the analogy of 44. ८; thus, दोह doh+si=
धोलि ; दह् dah + sydmi = wana; STE aguh + sam = अथुक्षम्.
8. In root ag nah final ह ¢ is treated as if it were dh, and becomes
at before qs. Compare 183, and see 624.
| €. In roots beginning with ह् d, like दुह् duh and दिह् dih, final ह ¢
becomes ग् g before dh; i.e. before the dhi of the 2nd sing. Impera-
tive, and before the terminations dhve and dhvam (see 306. d);
thus, दुह् duh + dhi = दुगि dugdhi. And in a root beginning with n,
like नह् nah, final A becomes d before these terminations.
But if the root begin with any other letter than द् d or न् n, then
final = # is dropped, and the ¥ dh of the termination becomes द् gh,
the radical vowel (except चु ri) being lengthened ; thus, लिह् Uh + dhi
160 VERBS.—GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM.
= oife; lih+dhvam= sien. An option, however, is allowed in the
case of the roots at 305. 5.
d. And 306.a. applies before dhve and dhvam, when final हू # be-
comes ग् $ or is dropped, although not before dhi of the Imperative; thus,
duh + dhve = yrex dhugdhve ; and aguh + dhvam = अधूदुन् aghidhvam,
९. Obs.—If a root end in ह् A, this final h becomes क् ¢ in the and
and 3rd sing. Impf. of roots beginning with ह् d (the personal termina-
tions $ and ६ being dropped). In all other roots the final हू # becomes
%¢(41.III). In both cases the changed हू throws back an aspiration
on the first consonant of the root in accordance with 306. a.
GROUP II. CONJUGATION Il.
307. Cxass 2 (containing about 70 Primitive verbs).—Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except when debarred by 28) in
the strong forms, or before those terminations only which are marked
with P in the scheme at 246. Before all the other terminations the
original vowel of the root must be retained. No vowel is inter-
posed between the root and the terminations, (Cf. Gr. verbs like
eiut, (५८, &c, See 290. a.)
308. Thus, from विह् vid, ‘to know’ (Gr. ९0५, /30v, Lat. video), is formed the
stem of the singular Present ved (1. ved + miata vedmi, &c.), and the stem of
the dual and plural vid (Du. 1. vid + ००5 विद्वस् vidvas, &c.; Pl. 1. vid+ mas=
विद्रस् vidmas, &c.) So also the stem of the Impf. aved and avid (1. aved + am=
avedam, 2. aved + इ == कण or aves by 41.1. and 294); the stem of the Pot. vid
(1. vid+-ydm= विद्याम् vidydm, &c.); and the stem of the Impv. ved and vid (1. ved
+dnixvedini, 2. vid+dhi=viddhi 293, ved+-tu=vettu; Du. 1. ved+dva=veddva,
&c. *) See the table at 583.
a. A contracted form of the Perfect of vid (365) is sometimes used for the Pre-
sent; thus, Sing. veda, vettha, veda; Du. vidva, vidathus, vidatus; Pl. vidma,
vida, vidus; see 168. ९. Cf. Gr. aida (for Foida) fr. rt. Fsd (cidw), also used with
a Present signification; and Lat. vidi, vidisti, &c. Cf. also the Present vidmas
with (ev (iopev), vittha with fore, and viddhi with 1०60, Cf. also old English
‘to wit.’
309. Similarly, from द्विष्, “to €," come the stems dvesh and dvish (Pres. 1.
द्वेष्मि; Du. 1. द्विष्वस्, & ५. ; see 657).
* The Impv. of vid is optionally formed with the syllable dm and the auxiliary
verb kri (cf. 385); thus, Sing. 3. विदांकरोतु or विदाङ्करोतु (Pan. गा. 1, 41). And
this root may optionally insert 7 in the 3rd pl. Atm. of the Pres., Impf., and Impv. ;
thus, fret or fagi, सविद्त or अविरत, विदताम् or विद्रताम्,.
VERBS.—GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM. 161
310. So also, from ¥ i, ‘to go,’ come the stems e and i (Pres. 1. रमि emi (= ९८/५८);
2. रुषि by 70, 3. रति; Pl. 1. इमस्, 1५९५, see 645)
a. जागृ to awake’ makes, in the same way, jdgar and jdgri (Pres. 1. HUTA, &c. 3
Du. 1. जागृवस्; Pl. 3. जाग्रति ; Imps. 2, 3. HAM or FATT; Du. 3. अजागृताम् 5
Pl. 3. FATTER; Pot. 1 जागृयाम्; Impv. 3 Sion! ; Pl. 3. जाग्रतु)
Obs.—Roots of cl. 2, having more than one syllable (such as HTT above, दरिद्रा
to be poor,’ चकास् ˆ to shine,’ all formed by reduplication), as well as शास् ‘to rule
(perhaps contracted from a reduplicated JA), and HE “to eat” (perhaps for
WA), resemble the reduplicated verbs of cl. 3 in rejecting the nasal from the
3rd pl. Pres. and Impv. Parasmai, and taking ४७ for an in 3rd pl. Impf. Moreover,
a few roots like faz and faq above, as well as some in d, like या (० go’ and Ut
“to protect,’ optionally take us for an in Impf., before which a final d is dropped.
311. The preposition अपि adhi, ‘over,’ prefixed to the root Zi, ‘to go,’ gives
the sense of ‘to read’ (Atmane-pada only): ¥ then becomes iy (compare 123) and
blends with adhi into अधीय् adhty before the vowel-terminations of the Pres., Impf.,
and Pot. Before the consonantal terminations it becomes 3¥t adht (Hence Pres
1. WH, 2 धोषे, 3 अधीति; [८.7 अधीवहे &e.; Pl. & अधीयते Impf. 1. adhi+
a+iy+i= अध्येयि by 251. a, 2 TAME, 3. खध्येत; Du. 1. सध्येवहि, 2. सखथ्येयाथाम्
&e.; Pot. 1. सधीयीय सधीयीयास्, &c.; Impv. 1 adhi + e+ ci= Sway by 36. a,
2. अधीष्व, &.)
The preposition "ST ¢ is prefixed to the root ¥ i, according to the usual rules
of Sandhi, and gives the sense of ‘to come;’ thus, Pres fa, रेषि, रेति एवम्,
& ८.5 Impf. रायम्, VY, &०.; Pot. रयाम्, LATA, &०.; Impv. खायानि, रहि, रोतु,
&c. Again, the prep. खप apa prefixed gives the sense of ‘to go away ;’ thus, Pres
पेमि, &c.: and the prep. खव gives the sense of ‘to know;’ as, Pres वेमि
312. So also other roots in ३८ and Ju or Siz change these vowels to iy and uv
(cf. 123, 128. a) before the vowel-terminations ; as, fr. at ४४ “to go,’ come ve, vf,
and viy (Pres. 1. वेमि, &c.; Du. 1 वीवस्; Pl. 3. वियन्ति) *. Similarly, सू, ‘to bring
forth’ (Atm. only), makes in Pres. Sing. Du. Pl. 3. सूते, सुवाते, सुवते ; and in Impv
Sing. Du. Pl. ग. सुवं qaae qame Guna being suppressed
313. स्तु stuand नु nu, to praise ;’ Yyu, to join,’ to mix;’ and ह् ru, ‘to sound,’
follow 312, but take Vriddhi instead of Guna before the consonantal P termina-
tions tT. Hence the stems स्तौ stau, स्तु stu, and स्तुव् stuv + see 648. Before the
vowel P terminations both Vriddhi and Guna are generally (but not always) sup-
pressed, and wv substituted, as in Yat 312. Note, that these roots may optionally
insert an = £ before the consonantal P terminations; and before this vowel Guna,
not Vriddhi, is required. According to some authorities, however, £ is inserted
before al? the consonantal terminations; and, according to others, before all the '
consonants, except y, v, or m, not followed by an indicatory P
314. न्? ‘to speak,’ can never take Vriddhi, like the roots at 313; but inserts
* According to some the 3rd pl. Impf.“of At is अव्यन् as well as अवियन्.
+ That is, the terminations marked with P, which begin with consonants,
x
162 VERBS.—GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM.
an = ¢ after Guna in the places where those roots optionally insert it, viz. before
the consonantal P terminations. Hence the stems bravt, bri, bruv. See 649.
a. Before the vowel P terminations Guna is not suppressed, excepting in the 1st
sing. Impf., which may be either अन्रवम् or WAAA.
315. Mt, ‘to lie down’ (Atm. only), gunates the radical vowel before all the
terminations, and inserts r in the 3rd pl. Pres., Impf., and Impv., after the analogy
of the 3rd pl. Pot. See 646.
316. wy, “to cover,’ takes either Vriddhi or Guna of the final ४ before the
consonantal P terminations, except before the 2nd and 3rd sing. of the Impf.,
where Guna only is admissible. Before the vowel-terminations it follows 312, but
Guna is retained before the vowel P terminations, excepting in the ist sing. Impf.
Hence the stems कण, tirno, érnu, and urnuv (Pres. Par. 1. BUT or ऊर्णोमि 0
Du.r. ऊगुवस् ; ए. 3. कों वति, see 370. 098. ; Impf. 7, SHAR or आओीवम् by 251.4,
2. MUNG, &९.; Pot. 1. KYA; Impv. 8. 7. ऊणेवानि, 3. WAT or ऊर्णोतु.
Pres. Atm. 3. att, wa, ऊर्णुवते)
317. UT‘ to go,’ पा ‘to protect,’ खद् “to eat’ (edo), खात् ‘to sit,’ Atm., and other
roots having a or d for their vowels, cannot be changed, but are themselves the
inflective stems (Pres. 1. या yd-+-mi=ydmi, see 644; अह् ad+mixadmi, 2. ad+si
=atsi, 3. ad+tixatti; Du. 3. ad+tas=attas, &c., see 652). With atti compare
Lat. edit.
a, STF ‘to sit’ is similar; thus ds+e=dse, ds + se=dsse, ds+te=dste. The
final of ds is dropped before dh, hence Pl. 2. आध्वे ddhve, &e.
b, ट् “to eat,’ before the terminations of the 2nd and 3rd sing. Imperfect,
inserts the vowel ऋ ८ by special rule, see 652; and some other roots of this class
require peculiar changes, as follows :—
318. दस्र daridrd, ‘to be poor,’ follows 310. Obs., making its stem daridri before
the consonantal terminations not marked with P, and daridr before ati, us, atu
(Pres. 8. Du. Pl. 3. efegria, efefgaa, दरिद्रति; Impf.1. सदप्िदराम् ; Pl. 3. सद्-
प्दिस् ; Pot. 3. efefgara; Impv. ग. दस््दरणि; Du. 1. efcgra; Pl. 3. दरिद्रतु).
319. दीधी didhé, ‘to shine’ (Atm.), and वेवी ‘to go’ (Atm.), change their final to
y, and not to iy, before the vowel-terminations (compare 312) ; but in the Potential
the final ¢ coalesces with the ¢ of the terminations (Pres. Sing. 1. दीध्ये ; वेवये; ए. 3.
ahaa; Fat: Pot. 1. दीधीय, &c.)
320. AA vad, “to speak,’ changes its final palatal to a guttural before all the
hard consonantal terminations, in conformity with 176; but not before the soft
(except dh). It is defective in the grd pl. Present and Imperative, where its place
must be supplied by Wat 314, 649. Hence the stems vad and vak. See 6६०.
321. मृन् mrij, ‘to cleanse,’ is vriddhied in strong forms, and optionally before
the vowel-terminations having no P. Hence the stems mdrj and mrij. See 651.
322. इट् rud, ‘to weep,’ besides the usual Guna change before the P terminations,
inserts the vowel § 7 before all the consonantal terminations except y, and optionally
a or ¢in the 2nd and 3rd sing. Impf. Hence rodi, rudi, rud. See 653.
a, खप् ‘to sleep,’ wa and सन् ‘to breathe,’ and WA‘ to eat,’ are similar, but
VERBS.—GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM. 163
without Guna. The last conforms to 310. Obs. In the Epic poems, forms like
सखपामि are found as well as खपिमि, while in the Veda other roots (besides the
above five) insert ए (as शोचिभि, वमिति, जक्छिति, स्षृरिति, &c.) See Pan. vir. 2, 76. 34.
323. इन् han, ‘to kill,’ makes its stem ह् ha before ¢ or th (by 57.2); A ghn
before anti, an, antu; and जं 10 before हि. The last change is to avoid the
proximity of tivo aspirates. See 654, and compare 252. b. Obs.
324. वजर् vas,‘ to desire,’ “to choose,’ suppresses the a, and changes v to u before
the terminations which have no P (see 290. a); and ङ् us becomes उष् ush before
t and th by 300. See 656
325 ईड् fd, ‘to praise’ (Atm.), not gunated by 28, inserts the vowel इ i between
the root and the terminations of the 2nd person से, स्व, 8A, and ध्वम्: 1168. 1 #3,
2. ईडिषे, 3. $B (see 48. 8. Obs.); Du.1. ईडवहे ; Pl. 2. ईडिध्वे ; Impf. 3. BE, &०.;
Pot. 1. $814, &c.; Impv. 1 ईडे, 2. ईडिष्व, 3. टाम्; Pl. 2 ईडिध्वम्
a. Similarly, a 4, ‘to rule’ (Atm. only): Pres. 1 ईशे, ईशिषे, 3 ष्ट by 300 5
Impf. 3. TB, &c.; Impv. 3 श््टाम् &e.
326. AA daksh, ‘to speak’ (Atm.), drops the penultimate k before all consonantal
terminations, except those beginning with m or v (Pres. 1. TR, 2. चप् 1 a= Ve,
3 चष्टे &e., see 302. a, 3०३. ५; Impf.3. अचष्ट ; Pot. 3. चक्षत). Kétydyana con-
siders कञ्ञा the original root, whence is formed ख्या ; the latter being substituted
for च् in the General tenses.
327. सस् as, ‘to be’ (Parasmai only), a very useful auxiliary verb, follows 290. a,
and rejects its initial a, except before the P terminations. The 2nd pers. sing. Pres.
is ससि for अस्ि. The Impf. has the character of an Aor., and retains the initial
a throughout, and inserts ४ before the 5 and ¢ of the 2nd and 3rd sing.; see 584.
The 2nd sing. Impv. substitutes e for as, and takes the termination dhi. This root
is found in the Atmane-pada, with the prepositions vi and ati, when the Present
is Sing. Ufae, -से, -स्ते ; Du. -We, -पाये, -षाति, -स्महे, -28, -षते; Pot. afraty,
&c. (Pan. vitt. 3, 87). See 584.
328. शास् sds, ‘to rule,’ in Parasmai (but not in Atmane), changes its vowel to
ड् £ before the consonantal terminations having no P, except that of the 2nd sing.
Impv. Before that and all vowel-terminations, as well as in the strong forms, the
vowel of the root remains unchanged; and, after ४, स् becomes घ् by 7o. Hence
the stems शास् and शिष्. See 658.
329. AIA, “to shine,’ is Pres. 1. चकास्मि, 2. चकास्सि, 3. चकास्ति; Du. 7. चका-
स्वस्; 1.3 चकासति (310 Obs.); Impf.1. अचकासम्, 2. चकास् or अचकात् (294)
3 AAT; Du. 1. WHATS; ए अचकासुस् ; Pot. ग चकास्यम्; ~Impv. 1
चकासानि, 2. चकाधि or चकाद्धि (304), 3. चकास्तु ; Du. 1. चकासाव, 2. चकास्तम्
Pl. 3. चकासतु.
330. दुह् duh, ‘to milk,’ and लिह् lih, ‘to lick,’ form their stems as explained at
305, 3०6. They are conjugated at 660, 661.
331. 01.488 3 (containing about 20 Primitive verbs)—Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
४2
164 VERBS.—GROUP II. FORMATION OF STEM,
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the root, and
gunate the vowel of the radical syllable before the P terminations
only, as in cl. 2.
Obs.—This class resembles the 2nd in interposing no vowel be-
tween the root and terminations. It is the only class that necessarily
rejects the nasal in 3rd pl. Pres. and Impv. Parasmai (see 292), and
takes us for an in 3rd pl. Impf. Parasmai, before which us Guna is
generally required. See 292—294.
332. Thus, from ¥ bhri, “to bear’ (pepo, fero), is formed the stem of the Present
singular विभर् bibhar (1. bibhar +-mi=fanfa), and the stem of the dual and plural
विभृ एः (Du. 1. एषः+ ४45 = विभृवस्; Pl. 1. bibhrit-mas=fayRa; PI. 3. bibhri
+ati—farfa by 34 and 292). See the table at 583
a. Note, that bibharti bears the same relation to bibkrimas that fert does to
Serimus, and vult to volumus.
333- Similarly, from भी 7८ ‘to fear,’ come the two stems bibhe and bibhé; from
ड् hu, “to sacrifice,’ the two stems juho and juhku. The former of these roots may
optionally shorten the radical vowel before a consonant, when not gunated. See
666. The latter may optionally reject its final before vas and mas, and is the only
root ending in a vowel which takes dhi for hi in the 2nd sing. Impv. See 662.
a. द्री, ‘to be ashamed,’ is like भी, but changes its final ङ to इय् iy before the
vowel-terminations, in conformity with 123. See 666.a.
334- क्रु ri, ‘to go,’ is the only verb in this class that begins with a vowel.
It substitutes iy for ri in the reduplication, and makes its stems इय् iyar and
इय iyri (Pres. Sing. Du. Pl. 3. इयति, TIAA, इयति; Impf. x. CATH, 2. रेयर्,
3- रर् ; Du. 3. रेयृताम् ; Pot. 3. इयृयात् ; Impv. 1. FATT)
335. दा dd, “to give (४८४०५०५५ do), drops its final ¢ before all excepting the P
terminations. Hence the stems daddé and dad. It becomes दे de before the hi of
the Impv. See 663.
336. धा dhd, ‘to place’ (9१५८), is similar. Hence the stems dadhd and dadh ;
but dadhk becomes धत् before 2, th, and s; and dhad before dhve and dhvam by
299.u.b; and dhe before the hi of the Impv. See 664.
337- Bt hd, ‘to abandon,’ changes its final ¢ to = 2 before the consonantal
terminations not marked with P, and drops the final altogether before the vowel-
terminations, and before y of the Potential. Hence the stems jahd, jaht, jah
Before hi of the Impv. the stem is optionally jahd, jaht, or jahi. According to
some authorities, जही may be shortened into जहि in Pres., Impf., and Impv.
See 665.
338. AT md, ‘to measure’ (Atm.), and हां hd, “to go’ (Atm.), make their stems
निमी mimé and जिही jiht before the consonantal terminations not marked with ए.
Before the vowel-terminations their stems are mim and jih (Sing. Du. Pl. 3 जिहीते,
faz जिहते Impf. 3 wfaeta Impv. 3 जिहीताम्) See मा at 664. a
339. जन् jan, to produce’ (Parasmai-pada), rejects the final nasal (see 57. a),
VERBS.—GROUP IJ. FORMATION OF STEM. 165
and lengthens the radical a before ¢ and th and hi, and optionally before y. Before
consonantal terminations beginning with m or v the radical jan remains, but before
vowel-terminations not marked with P the medial a is dropped, and the nasal
combining with j becomes palatal (compare the declension of rdjan at 148).
Hence the three stems jajan, jajd, and jajn. See 666. 8.
340. भस् bhas, ‘to eat,’ “to shine,’ like jan, rejects the radical @ before the
vowel-terminations not marked with P; and bh coalescing with s becomes p by
44 (Pres. 8. Du. Pl. 3. बभस्ति, बभस्तस्; प्छ). The same contraction takes
place before terminations beginning with त, त्य, but the final s is then dropped,
and the usual rules of Sandhi applied; thus, बम् + ताम् = बयाम् by 298.
341. निज्" purify,’ विज् ‘ to shake,’ विच् ‘to separate’ (identified with vi),
and विष् ‘to pervade,’ ‘to penetrate,’ gunate the reduplicated syllable before all
the terminations, and forbid the usual Guna of the radical syllable before termina-
tions beginning with vowels, as in the 1st sing. Impf. and the 1st sing. du. pl.
Impv. (Pres. 1. नेनेग्मि, 2. Tate, 3. नेनेक्ति; Du. 1. नेनिच्स्, &e.; ?]. 7. नेनिञ्मस्
3. नेनिजति; Impf. 1. अनेनिनम्, 2; अनेनेक्, &e.; ए. 3. अनेनिनुस्, &c.; Impv.
1. नेनिजानि; Du. 1. नेनिजाव; Pl. 7. नेनिजाम).
342. Cuass 7 (containing about 24 Primitive verbs).—Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Insert न a (changeable to श na after ri &c. by 58) between the
vowel and final consonant* of the root before the P terminations,
and न् n (changeable to ¥, ज्, ण्? म्, or Anusvarat, according to the
consonant immediately succeeding) before all the other terminations.
Obs.—This class resembles the 2nd and 3rd in interposing no vowel
between the final consonant of the root and the terminations.
a. The insertion of nasals is common in other roots besides those of the 7th class
(cf. 240.d, 281, 487.0), and cf. certain Greek and Latin roots ; as, pad, (५०५४0४५ 5
RaB, 2५6६४०० ; Oy, 6/0) ; scid, scindo; fid, findo; tag, tango; lig, linquo,
&८. See 260.
343. Thus, from fag ९8८, ‘to divide,’ ‘to break,’ is formed the
stem of the Present tense singular fag 62/4९, and the stem of the
dual and plural निन्द् bhind, changeable to bhinat and bhint by 46
(x. bhinad + mi = fafa, 3. dhinad + ti= faafa; Du. 1. dhind + vas =
firey, 3. bhind + tas = भिन्त्स् or भिन्तस् (298. ९) ; Pl. 3. bhind + anti =
भिन्दन्ति). See the table at 583.
344. Similarly, from wy rudh, ‘to hinder,’ the two stems Ruy
runadh and रन्ध rundh, changeable to runat, runad, and rund (1.
* All the roots in this class end in consonants.
+ The change to Anusvéra will take place before sibilants and €. See 6.a.
166 VERBS.—GROUP II]. FORMATION OF STEM.
runadh + mi = euha, 4. runadh + si= Rute, 3. runadh + ti= Rute ;
Du. 3. rundh + tas = Hea); see 671. So also, from पिष्, ‘to grind,’
the two stems पिनष् and faq (Pres. 3. पिनष् + ति = पिनष्टि; Impv. 2.
पिष् + धि == पिर्डढि or पिरि).
, 345. Observe—Roots ending in त् ४ and द् d may reject these letters before ¢h, t,
and dhi, when 7 immediately precedes; see 298. a. 9. ९.
346. भुज् “to eat,’ JA to join,’ विच् ‘to distinguish,’ conform to 296. Hence,
from bhuj come bhunaj and bhunj, changeable to bhunak and bhunk; see
668. a.
347. भञ् ‘to break,’ wa 10 anoint,’ चन्द् “to moisten,’ इन्ध् ‘to kindle,’
हिंस् “to injure,’ तच्च् or WR ‘to contract,’ fall under this class; but the nasal be-
longing to the root takes the place of the conjugational nasal, and becomes नं na
in the strong forms. Hence, from एक्क come the two stems bhanaj and bhai,
changeable to bhanak and bhank; from und come unad and und (Pres. 3. unatti,
untas, undanti ; Impf. 1. aunadam, 2. aunas, 3. aunat; Du. 3. auntdm, &c.) See
669, 668, 673. Similarly, from इन्ध) Pres. 1. indhe, 2. intse, 3. inddhe; Pl. 3. in-
dhate ; Impf. 2. ainddhds, 3. ainddha; Impv. 1. inadhai, &c.
348. वृहू? ‘to strike,’ “to kill,’ inserts णे instead of ण before all the consonantal P
terminations (Pan. vil. 3, 92), but not before those beginning with vowels. See 674.
GROUP III. CONJUGATION III.
349. Cuass 5 (containing about 30 Primitive verbs).—Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add तु nu (changeable to सु by 58) to the root, which must be
gunated into नो 9० (changeable to णो) before the P terminations
(290. a)*. Roots ending in consonants add nwv, instead of nu, to the
root before the vowel-terminations. Roots ending in vowels may
drop the « of nu before initial v and m (not marked with P), and
always reject the termination Ai of the Imperative. See 293.
35०. Thus, from चि &, ‘to gather,’ are formed the stems dino and dinu (Pres. 1.
dino+mi =faaifa, cino+si =famfa by 70; Du. 1. dinu+vas =faqaq or चिन्वस्;
PL. Ginu+-mas=FaAqay or चिन्मस्, 3. ८०४ anti चिन्वन्ति by 34; Impv.1. dino
1४ न= चिनवानि by 36.4, 2. faq १४ by 291). See the table at 583.
351. Similarly, fr. § du, ‘to burn,’ come duno, dunu, and dunuy ; fr. FATT dp, ‘to
obtain,’ come dpno, dpnu, and dpnuv, see 681; fr. तुष् * to satisfy,’ tripno, tripne,
and tripnuv, see 618.
* The change of nu to no before the P terminations is represented in Gr. by the
lengthening of v before certain terminations, as in Cevy-v-uat, deik-vi-pat, but
Cevy-vi-jnev, Deik-vi-mwev. See 260.
VERBS.—GROUP II]. FORMATION OF STEM. 167
352. ¥ ॐ» ‘to hear’ (sometimes placed under the 1st class), substitutes J sri
for the root, and makes its stems srino and Srinu. See 676.
a. FAL ‘to deceive,’ SPT and WAL ‘to support,’ BAL ‘to stop,’ and स्तुस्न् to
astonish,’ reject their nasals in favour of the conjugational nu; thus, dabhnu,
skabhnu, &c.
" 353. Crass 8 (containing 10 Primitive verbs).—Rule for forming
the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add इ w to the root, which must be gunated into to before the
P terminations (see 290. a).
Note—Only ten roots are generally given in this class, and nine of these end
in {2 or Wx; hence the addition of uw and o will have the same apparent effect
as the addition of nu and 70 in cl. g.
354. Thus, from तन् tan, ‘to stretch,’ are formed the stems tano and tanu (Pres.
I. 1000-४ तनोमि, 2. 200 --- तनोषि by 70; प. य. 1५४ ४८5 तनुवस् or तन्वस् ;
Pl. 1. ६४ 1-0"45 == तनुमस् or AHA; Impv. 1. tano+dni -तनवानि by 36.4, 2. तनु
tanu, see 293). Cf. Gr. 7४४५५, 74५४५९५
a. The root सन् san, ‘to give,’ optionally rejects its m, and lengthens the radical
a before the y of the Potential; thus, सन्याम् sanydm or सायाम् sdydm, &c.
४, When the vowel of a root is capable of Guna, it may optionally take it; thus
the stem of रण् “to go’ may be either YY or अशँ (1. अर्णोमि or ऋूणोमि)
355 One root in this class, कु Kyi, ‘to do, ‘to make,’ is by far
the most common and useful in the language. This root gunates
the radical vowel yi, as well as the conjugational u, before the ए
terminations. Before the other terminations it changes the radical
ri to ur. The rejection of the conjugational ४ before initial m (not
marked with P) and ४, which is allowable in the 5th class, is in this
verb compulsory, and is, moreover, required before initial y. Hence
the three stems karo, kuru, and kur. See 682.
356. Cuass 9 (containing about 52 Primitive verbs),—Rule for
forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Add at nd to the root before the P terminations; नी v7 before all
the others, except those beginning with vowels, where only न् १ is
added (see 290. a).
Obs.—at, नी, and are changeable to शा, णी, and र्, by 58.
357. Thus, from J yu, “to join,’ are formed the three stems yund, yuni, and yun
(Pres. 1. yund--mi =yarta; Du.1. yunt-+vas=Jarag ; PLi. yunt-+-mas=FAt-
मस्, 3. १1 = युनन्ति. Pres. Atm. I. 9४४1-९ युने; Impv. 1, yund+dni=
युनानि, 2. yunt-+hi= युनीहि, &c.)
a, Obs.—Roots ending in consonants substitute dna for their
\
168 VERBS.—GROUP Ill. FORMATION OF STEM.
conjugational sign in 2nd sing. Impv., and reject the termination hi;
e.g. अशान ‘eat thou,’ from WY ‘to eat ;? पुषाण “ nourish thou,’ from
पुष्; wre ‘shake thou,’ from सुम् &९. See 696, 698, 694.
358 Tt ‘to go, Wt ‘to go, set ‘to go,’ “to choose,’ त्री ‘to choose,’ zt ‘to ad-
here,’ ut ‘to fear,’ “to bear,’ Wt ‘to destroy,’ Y ‘to shake,’ Y to purify’ (583), &
to cut’ (691), चछ to go,’ कृ to hurt,’ 7] to sound,’ ज्ञ् “to grow old,’ हू ‘to split,”
न्. ˆ0 lead पु to fill भू to bear,’ ‘to blame,’ मू to kill वू or चृ ‘to choose, भ्
to injure,’ सत् (40 spread,’ ख 0 स्व् or स्पृ or सु “to hurt,’ shorten the radical vowel
in forming their stems; thus, from पू to purify’ come the stems pund, punt, and
pun; see the table at 583. =,
a. क्री ‘to buy,’ प्री ‘to love,’ Wt ‘to cook,’ Hor Ft “to sound,’ ¥ ‘to hurt,’ do
not shorten their vowels. See 689, 690.
359. ग्रह् “to take,’ hecomes गृह? and makes its stems गृ हता? गृ हती, and Tea
See 699.
a. ज्या, ‘to grow old,’ becomes जि, and makes its stems jind, jint, and jin.
36०. बन्ध्, WY, AY, WY, Fra, and WAT reject the radical nasal in favour
of the conjugational ; thus, from bandh are formed the three stems badhnd, badhnt,
and badhn. See 692, 693, 695.
367. ज्ञा ‘to know,’ in the same way, rejects its nasal in favour of the conjuga-
tional, and makes its stems jdnd, jdné, and 7400. See 688.
362. Wa, “to appear as 2 spectre,’ is said to make its stems khkaund, khaun#, and
khaun.
PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST NINE CLASSES IN
THE SIX GENERAL TENSES.
363. The general rules for the formation of the stem in the Per-
fect, 1st and 2nd Futures, Aorist, Precative, and Conditional, apply
to all verbs of the first nine classes indiscriminately; see 250. a.
The 1oth class alone carries its conjugational characteristic into most
of the General tenses; for this reason the consideration of its last
tenses falls most conveniently under Causal verbs. See 289. a.
Reduplicated Perfect (Second Preterite).
Terminations repeated from 246.
PARASMAI, ATMANE.
a (au) *iva *ima | ९ *ivahe *imahe
itha or tha ४8 a *ishe 20९ *idhve or *idhve
a (au) atus us e dte ire
† &, however, may optionally shorten it.
VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 169
364. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
In the first place, with regard to reduplication, if a root begin
with a consonant, double the initial consonant, with its vowel, accord-
ing to the rules given at 252 (but a is reduplicated for a radical a,
2 ri, १६, lri, and even for radical e, ai, 0, if final; i for i, ४, e; u for
u, t, 0); eg.
From पच् pat, * to cook,’ papaé ; fr. याच् ydé, ‘to ask,’ yaydé; fr. कु kri, ‘to do,
cakri ; fr नृत् nrit, to dance,’ nanrit ; fr. तु tré, to cross,’ tatré ; fr. AA क्क, ‘to
be able,’ éaklrip ; fr मे me, ‘to change,’ mame ; fr. गे gai, to sing,’ jagai; fr. सो so,
to finish,’ saso ; fr. सिध् sidh, ‘to accomplish,’ sishidh (70); fr जीव् jf, to live,
jute ; fr. WA sev, to serve,’ sishev; fr दुगा to run,’ dudru; fr. FY pi, ˆ 40 purify,
pupi.; fr. TY budh, to know,’ bubudh ; fr. लोक् lok, ‘to see,’ 74० + fr. स्मि smi,
to smile,’ sishmi; fr. स्या sthd, ` to stand,’ tasthd.
a. And if it begin with a vowel, double the initial vowel; e.g. fr.
्मस् as, ‘to be,’ comes a as = आस् ds by 31; fr. "Tq dp, ‘to obtain,’
a dp=dp; fr. इष् ish, ‘to wish, i ish = {58 (see 31).
8. In the second place, with regard to changes of the radical
vowel, if the root end in a consonant, gunate* the vowel of the
radical syllable, if capable of Guna (see 28), in 1st, and, and 3rd
sing. Par.; but leave the vowel unchanged before all other termina-
tions, both Par, and Atm.
c. If the root end in a simple consonant, preceded by short a,
this a is lengthened optionally in 1st and necessarily in 3rd sing. ;
and before the other terminations it is either left unchanged, or is
liable to become € (see 375. a).
d. If the root end in a vowel, vriddhi the vowel of the radical
syllable in ist and 3rd sing. Par.t, and gunate it in 2nd sing.
(optionally in 1st sing.) Before all other terminations, Parasmai
and Atmane, the root must revert to its original form, but the:
terminations must be affixed according to euphonic rules व .
365. Thus, fr. TY dudh, cl. 1, comes the stem of the sing. Parasmai FIN ९५५००,
* The gunation of the vowel is indicated by the P of WY, यप्; WY, in the
singular terminations. See scheme at 245.
+ Vriddhi is indicated by the ण् of णप् एए, See scheme at 245
त Greek affords many examples of verbs which suffer a kind of Guna or Vriddhi
change in the Perfect; but this change is not confined to the singular, as in”
Sanskrit. Compare AéAosma. (fr. १९०) EAsmov), करक ०५6 (Fr. 76८64) ला (609), -
rérpopa (fr. 704५), 7८66८८० (fr. 710१144), &८.
(1
170 VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
and the stem of the rest of the tense TITY ०५०५८ (1. bubodh-+-a=bubodha, 2, bubodh
+ itha= bubodhitha, 3. bubodh + a= bubodha; Du. 1. bubudh + iva= bubudhiva,
2, bubudh + athus—=bubudhathus, &c. Atm. 1. bubudh + e=bubudhe, &c.) ;
Similarly, fr. विह vid, cl. 2, ‘to know,’ come the two stems विवेट् vived and
fafaz vivid (1. 3. viveda; Du. 1. vividiva ; Pl. 1. vividima, &c.*)
` From पच्, ‘to cook,’ the two stems पचाच् papdé and GW papad (1. papdéa or
popaca, 3. papdéa, &९.)
366. Again, fr. कु kri, ‘to do’ (see 684), comes the stem of the 1st and 3rd sing.
Par. च कार् ८०4" (252. 8), the stem of the 2nd sing. चकर् dakar (which is optionally
the stem of the rst sing. also), and the stem of the rest of the tense चकु cakri
(1. dakdr+-a=éakdra (or éakara), 2. cakar+tha=cakartha, 3. éakér+-a—¢akdra ;
Du. 1. éakri+-va=éakriva (369), 2. cakri--athus=dakrathus by 34. Atm. 1. éakri
+e=<akre; Pl. 2. éakri+ dhve= ARE. See 684). :
a. Observe—The roots enumerated at 390. a. reject Guna in the
and sing.; thus, fay makes 1. 3. विवेज्ञ, but 2. विविजिव. So | or
‘to cry’ makes 1. चुकाव or चुकव, 2. Tetra
367. We have seen at 364.a. that if a root, ending in a single
consonant, begin with a vowel, this vowel is repeated, and the two
similar vowels blend into one long one by 31, But when an initial
4 or u is gunated in the sing. Par., then the reduplicated 7 becomes
iy before ९, and the reduplicated ४ becomes wv before ०; thus, fr.
इष् ish, ‘to wish,’ come the two stems iyesh and ish (1. 3. इयेष; Du.
1. ईषिवं ; see 637); and fr. sq ukh, ‘to move,’ uwvokh and tkh (1. 3.
उवोख; Du. 1. ऊखिव).
¢. The same holds good in the root इ 2, ‘to go,’ which makes
the reduplicated syllable iy before the Vriddhi and Guna of the sing.
In the remainder of the tense the stem becomes iy (cf. 375. ९), which
is reduplicated into fy (1, 3. इयाय, 2. इययिय or इयेथ ; Du. 1. ईयिव).
But when the prep. adhi is prefixed, the Perf. is formed as if from
ga, Xtm. only (Sing. Du. Pl. 3. adhijage, jagdte, -jagire).
b. And if a root begin with स a, and end in a doudle consonant,
or begin with = 7i and end in a single consonant, the reduplicated
syllable is रान् dn; thus, fr. wa ard, ‘to worship, comes the stem
आनच dnaré (1. 3. सानचै) ; fr. ध् ridh, ‘to flourish,’ comes सनभ dnardh
(1. 3. arava; Du. 1. सानुधिव, &c.)
* One Greek root agrees very remarkably with the Sanskrit in restricting Guna
to the singular, viz. Fed (6८), ‘to know’ (= Sk. vid above); thus, ofda, ०2०6०,
olde; 10700, {07०४ ; 1०46४) {076} 1०04. Rt. vid has a contracted Perf. used for
the Present, which agrees exactly with ० @; thus, veda, vettha, &c. See 308. ध.
VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 171
०. SM Atm. ‘to pervade,’ although ending in a single consonant छं, follows the
last rule (1. 3. STFS)
368. Obs.—In the Perfect the ist and 3rd sing. Par. and Atm.
have the same termination, and are generally identical in form; but
when Vriddhi of a final vowel is required in both, then there is
optionally Guna in the first; and when a medial a is lengthened,
this @ may optionally remain unchanged in the first; thus कृ ‘to ५0? `
may be in 1st sing. either चकार or चकर, and पच् ‘to cook’ may be
पपाच or पपच in rst sing.; but in 3rd sing. they can only make
चकार and पपाच. ।
369. By referring back to the scheme at 363, 246, it will be seen
that all the terminations of this tense (except optionally the 2nd sing.
Par.) begin with vowels. Those which begin with ६ are all (except
the 3rd pl. Atm.) distinguished by the mark *, because eight roots
only in the language (viz. ‘to dot,’ भु ‘to bear,’ सु ‘to go,’ वृ ‘to
surround,’ च्च ‘to hear,’ स्तु ‘to praise,’ दू ‘to run,’ @ sru, ‘to flow ’)
necessarily reject the £ from these terminations.
` Some roots, however, optionally reject i from these terminations, see स॒म् 371.
Rejection of i from itha (2nd sing. Perfect, Parasmai).
370. The above eight roots (except वु vri when it means ‘to cover,’
and except कृ (द, ‘to do,? when compounded with the prep. samt)
also reject ४ from the and sing. Parasmai.
a. Moreover, the 2nd sing. Parasmai is formed with tha instead of
itha after roots ending in ¥ ri (except after the root ¥ ri itself, and
वृ veri and wry jdgri, which only allow itha; thus, dritha, vavaritha
jdgaritha ; and except स्व at 5);
4, and optionally with ¢ha or itha after the root ¥ suri, ‘to sound’
(sasvartha or sasvaritha)
८. and optionally with tha or itha after roots ending in स्रा ठ, र €
(except व्ये vye, which allows only itha), and after roots in रे ai, ओ 0,
zi, ई ¢ tu, and the root y‘to shake’ (except those indicated at 392,
28. necessarily inserting i in the Futures &c.; e.g. fat, which makes
Sigrayitha only, and so also most roots in & ¢) ;
छ. and optionally with tha or itha after those roots enumerated at
+ But F to do,’ if स् is inserted after a preposition, as 111 स स्क; does not reject z,
and follows 374.k; thus, 2. संचस्करिय
2 2
172 VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
400-414, which have a medial a, and which reject £ either necessarily
or optionally from the Futures &c. (e. £. शक्, éekitha or Sa8aktha ;
wy, cakshamitha or éakshantha, &e.); but not wg and घस्? which
can only make dditha, jaghasitha ;
€ and optionally with ¢ha or itha after most of the roots enume-
rated at 415, as optionally inserting i in the Futures &c. :
jf. but all other roots, which necessarily take #, and even most of
those (having no medial a) at 400-414 which necessarily reject 7 in
the Futures &c., must take itha only in the and sing. of the Perfect ;
thus तुद् is atatfa 20487 in the and sing. 1st Future, but तुतोदिष tuto-
ditha in the and sing. Perfect (Du. 1. tutudiva). Some few of these,
however, are allowed the alternative of tha, as सृज् ‘to create’ makes
wafaa or wae; gm ‘to see,’ zefgta or दद्रष्ठ; both these roots requiring
the radical ri to be changed to र ra, instead of gunated, when tha
is used.
g. मन् ‘to dip’ and नज् ‘to perish,’ which belong to 370. d, insert
a nasal when tha is used; thus, ममल्जिथ or nau, नेशिय or AE.
h. तृष् * to be satisfied? and दृष् ‘to be proud,’ which belong to
370. ९ either gunate the radical ri or change it to tra when tha
is used (ततप्यै or Wata or ततर्पिय).
Obs.—When tha is affixed to roots ending in consonants, the
rules of Sandhi (296-306) must be applied.
Optional rejection of i, in certain cases, from the dual and remaining
terminations (of the Perfect, Parasmai and Atmane, marked with *).
371. The roots enumerated at 415, as optionally rejecting or in-
serting £ in the Futures &c., may optionally reject it also. from the
dual and remaining terminations of the Perfect marked with * in
the table at 363; thus qy makes wafaa or WAT, चक्षसे or च समिषे,
चक्षमिवहे or चक्षराबहे ; but the forms with the inserted i are the most
usual, and all other roots, even those which necessarily reject ४ from
the Futures &c. (except the eight enumerated at 369), must take i in
the dual and remaining terminations of the Perfect marked with *.
Observe—The ४ is never rejected from the 3rd pl. Atmane, except
in the Veda.
Substitution of द for श्वे (2nd pl. Perfect, A’tmane).
372. ¢ १८८ is used instead of श्वे dhve by the eight roots at 369,.
VERBS.—-REDUPLICATED. PERFECT, FORMATION OF STEM. 173
also in certain cases by the roots mentioned at 371. The usual rules
of Sandhi must then be observed, as in wage from ay.
a. इदु for 38 may be optionally used by other roots when a semi-
vowel or ¢ immediately precedes, as @afaed or -fad from कू , fafafaea
or -यिदृ from क्री
Anomalies in forming the stem of the Perfect.
373. Roots ending in Ht d (as दू dd, ‘to give;’ चा dhd, ‘to place;’ UT yd, ‘to go;’
स्या sthd, ‘to stand’) drop the ¢ before all the terminations except the tha of the
2nd sing., and substitute ओ ०४ for the terminations of the 1st and 3rd sing. Parasmai
Hence, from दा dé comes the stem दृह् dad (1.3 ददौ 2. ददिथ or ata; Du. 1. ददिव
Atm. 1. 3 ददे, 2. ददिषे & ५. See 663)
a. दस्रा to be poor’ makes 1. 3. waft; Du. 3. ददस्द्रतुस्; ग. 3. ददष््स् ;
or more properly takes the periphrastic form of Perfect. See 386.
6. ज्या ‘ to grow old’ has a reduplicated stem जिज्या (r. 3. fax, 2. FARIA or
जिज्यिय 9 Du. 7. जिन्यिव). Similarly, an uncommon root ज्यो Atm. ‘to instruct?
makes 1. 3. जिज्ये.
८. मि ‘to throw,’ मी ‘to destroy,’ ‘to perish,’ must be treated in the sing. as if
they ended in ¢; and @¥ cl. 9, ‘to obtain,’ may optionally be so treated; thus,
Sing. 1. ममो, 2. WAT or ममिय;, 3. ममो; Du. 7. fafa. But St is 7. Bat or
FSSA, 2. SBA or Bess or FSSA or लिलयिथ; Du. 1. किल्यिव.
d. Most roots ending in the diphthongs ए e (except देः दे, व्ये, वे, &c., see e. f),
रे ai, प्रो ०, follow 373, and form their Perfect as if they ended in ¢; thus, Wl. I,
“to drink,’ 1st and 3rd sing. दधो, 2. दधिष or द्धाय, Du. 1. धिव; गैन. 7, ‘to sing,’
1.3 ज्ञगो 2. जगिथ or WITT; 3 cl. 1, ‘to fade,” 1. 3. ag; शो cl. 4, ‘to sharpen,’
1. 3. शशौ
९. But & ‘to call’ forms its stem as if from हू; see 595 (1. 3. जुहाव, &c.)
f. हे Atm. ‘to pity,’ “to protect,’ makes its stem digi (1. 3 दिग्पे, 2 दिग्धिषे &c.)
9. व्ये ‘to cover’ makes vivydy, vivyay, and vivy (1.3. विव्याय, 2. विव्ययियः; Du.r.
विव्ययिव or fafara, &.)
h. वे ‘to weave’ forms its stems as if from vd or vav or vay (1. 3 ववो or उवाय,
2. वविध or ववाथ or FIAT; Du. 1. वविव or ऊविव or अयिव, &९. Atm. 1, 3. चवे
or ऊवे or WA, &० )
a प्ये Atm. to be fat’ makes regularly 4, पप्पिषे &९.$ but the root प्याय्
meaning the same, and often identified with a makes faut, पिष्िषे, &
374. Ifa root end in इ or $ 4, this vowel does not blend with the initial é of
the terminations in du. pl. Parasmai, sing. du. pl. Atmane, but is changed to y, in
opposition to 31; thus, from fa _G, cl. g, ‘to collect,’ come the stems idai, éide,
and did, changeable to Giddy, diday, and didy (1. 3. diddya, 2. Gdayitha or कदत ;
Du. 1. चिच्िव Gdyiva, 2. didyathus by 34. Atm. ए, 3. didye. See the table at 583).
Obs.—fa may also substitute चिकाय for चिचाय and चिक्ये for चिच्ये
174 VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
a. Similarly, नी né, ‘to lead’ (1. 3. nindya ; Du. 1. ninyiva, Atm. 1. ninye, &e.) ;
and tif (Du. 1. lilyiva; Atm. 1. lilye).
b. fat ji, ‘to conquer,’ makes its stem जिगि, as if from gi (1. 3. जिगाय; Du. ग.
जिग्धिव, &c. See 59०).
९. fz hi, ‘to go,’ ‘to send,’ makes fatfa, as if from ghi (1. 3. जिधाय).
९. दी Atm. ‘to sink,’ ‘to decay,’ makes its stem दिदीय् throughout; thus, 1. 3.
दिदीये, 2. दिदीयिषे, &०. `
९ But roots ending in इद or ई ¢ and having a double initial consonant, change
४ or ¢ to इय् ty before all terminations, except those of the sing. Parasmai; hence,
from चिल्, 1, ‘to resort to,’ come the three stems sisrai, Sigre, and Sifriy (1. 3.
शिश्राय, 2. शिच्रयिय; Du. 1. fafafaa, &०.) So क्री ०. 9, ‘to buy? (1. 3. चिक्राय,
2. चिक्रयिथ or चिक्रेयः; Du. 1. चिक्रियिवं, &०. See 689).
f. शि, "10 swell,’ like ददे at 373. ९ forms its stem as if from Jf, but only op-
tionally ; thus, 1. 3. शिश्वाय or शुशाव, 2. शिश्वेय or शिश्ठयिथ or शुशोय or शुशविथ.
9. And all roots ending in इ ४ or ऊ change wu or ४10 उव् ४४ before the termina-
tions of the du. and pl. Parasmai and the whole Atmane (except of course शयुः स्तु,
दरः @> in the persons marked with + at 246; and except YW ‘to be,’ see ४. below) ;
thus, fr. चू द, ‘to shake,’ come the stems dudhau, dudho, and dudhuv (1.3. दुधावः
2. gufra or gure 3 Du. x. दुधुषिव. Atm. 1. 3. दुधुषे) Similarly, Ju, Atm. ‘to
sound,’ makes I. 3. ऊवे, 2. ऊविषे.
h, But शु makes 1. 3. YI, 2. शु्रोय; Du. 7. शुश्रुव, 2. ATTA. Atm. 2. 3.
Ta and similarly, स्तु, दुः and @ sru.
2. WZ‘to be’ is anomalous, and makes its stem नभ् throughout; see 585, 586.
So सू ‘to bring forth’ makes in the Veda waa.
4. ay “to cover’ (although properly requiring the periphrastic form of Perfect,
see 385) is reduplicated into wig In the 2nd sing. it may reject Guna;
thus, ऊरौनविय or ऊगुनुषिय, 3१ sing. WHAT; Du. 1. WHY, 3. WGI;
Pl. 3. ऊगुँनुवुस्.
k. Roots ending in कू ri, preceded by a double consonant, and most roots in long
ऋ, 7४ instead of retaining this vowel and changing it to r by 364. ठ, gunate it into
ar in the 2nd sing., and throughout the whole tense, except the 1st and 3rd sing.
(and even in the 1st there may be optionally Guna by 368); e. &. FH smri, ‘to re-
member,’ 1. sasmdra or sasmara, 2. sasmartha, 3- sasmdra ; Du. 1. sasmariva, &c.
Atm. 1. 3. sasmare.
1, But चु dhri, ‘to hold,’ not being preceded by a double consonant, makes regu-
larly 1. Sing. Du, Pl. दधार, efira, after.
m. पु ‘to fill,” St‘ to injure,’ and दृ “to rend,’ may optionally retain ré, changeable
tor; thus, Du. पपरिव or Ufa.
n. ri, ‘to go,’ takes Vriddhi, and makes its stem सार् dr throughout; thus,
1.3. सार, 2. HCI; Du. 1. राणि. ।
0. मू Atm. ‘to die,’ although properly Atmane, is Parasmai in Perfect; thus,
1. 3. ममार, 2. ममये. ..
VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM. 175
p. ATT ‘to awake,’ which properly takes the periphrastic form of Perfect
(जागराचकार, see 385), may also take the reduplicated form, and may optionally
drop the reduplicated syllable; thus, 1. 3. जजागार or जागार, 2. WANTS or
जागरिय (370. a).
१. गू ‘to swallow’ may optionally change र् to त्त् ; thus, WATT or जगाल.
r. तु ‘to pass’ follows 375.0, as if it were AT; thus, 1. 3. ततार, 2. Afra ;
Du. 1. तेसिवि
जु ‘to grow old’ optionally follows 378. ० (3. जजार, 2. AAT or जेरिथ;
Du. 3. WATER or HCPA).
` 375. We have already seen, at 364, that roots beginning with any consonant
and ending with a single consonant, and enclosing short a, lengthen this vowel
in the grd sing. and optionally in the 1st; as, fr. पच् pad, “to cook,’ पपाच् papdé ;
fr. tyaj, “to quit,’ tatydj (1. 3. tatydja, 2. tatyajitha or tatyaktha; Du. 1. tatya-
jiva, &c.)
a. Moreover, before itha and in du. and pl. Parasmai, and all persons of the
Atmane, if the initial as well as the final consonant of the root be single, and if
the root does not begin with व् v, and does not require a substituted consonant in
the reduplication, the reduplication is suppressed, and, to compensate for this, the
a ais changed to @e*; thus, from pad come the stems WTA papdé, papad, and
पच् ped (1. papdéa or papata, 2. pecitha or papaktha by 296, 3. papdéa; Du. 1. pediva.
Atm. 1. 3. pede, &९.) Similarly, from ठम् 2087, cl. 1, Atm. ‘to obtain’ (cf. Aap-
(64५५, ६१८५९०४), the stem लेभ् lebh throughout (Jebhe, lebhishe, lebhe, lebhivahe, & ९.)
So नह् nah, " 10 bind,’ makes 1. nandha or nanaha, 2. nehitha or nanaddha by 305,
3. nandha; Du. 1. nehiva, &c. Atm. nehe, &९.
Similarly, नञ् nas, " to perish,’ 1. nandga or nanaga, 2. nesitha or nananshtha
(AB), 3. nandga, &c.: see 620, 370. 9.
8, Roots that require a substituted consonant in the reduplication are excepted
from 378. ¢ (but not भन् bhaj and Wes phal, see $. below); thus, भण् ‘to speak ”
makes 1. 3. बभाण; Du. 1. Tafa.
` ९. FA ‘to speak,’ वह् ‘to say,’ वप् * to sow,’ IN ‘to wish,’ वस् ‘to dwell,’ वहू
‘to carry,’ beginning with v, are also excepted. These require that the redupli-
cated syllable be उ ४, or the corresponding vowel of the semivowel, and also change
va of the root to J u before every termination, except those of he sing. Parasmai,
the two u’s blending into one long क ४ thus, fr. वच् vad, “to speak,’ come the
two stems उवाच् wvdé and WA ४८ (1. uvdéa or uvada, 2. uvaditha or uvaktha, 3. uvdéa ;
Du. 3. ४८६४5 ; Pl. 3. tidus).
.Obs.—This change of a semivowel to its corresponding vowel is called Sampra-
sdrana by native grammarians (Pan. 1.1, 45).
@. AR vah, “to carry,’ changes the radical vowel to HY o before tha (see 305. a),
optionally substituted for 202 (1. 3. उवाह, 2. उवहिथ or TAS). Compare 424.
Obs.—4A vam, ‘to vomit,” is excepted from 375. ९ (thus, 3. vavdma, vavamatus,
* Bopp deduces forms like pedtva, from papaciva, by supposing that the second
2 18 suppressed, the two a’s combined into d, and ¢ weakened into ९.
176 VERBS.—REDUPLICATED PERFECT. FORMATION OF STEM.
vavamus, Pan. vi. 4,126); it may also, according to Vopadeva, follow 375. 4 (3. va-
vdma, vematus, vemus).
९ यज् yaj, ‘to sacrifice,’ is excepted from 375.4, and follows the analogy of
375.¢ (1. 3. iydja; Du. 3. Gatus; Pl. 3. Gus): the 2nd sing. is इयजिथ or U8 by
297; Atmane 7. 3. ईने, 2. ईजिषे, see 597. Yej is allowed optionally in the weak
forms, and optionally in 2nd sing., especially in the Veda.
¢ शस् ‘to injure’ and दह् Atm. ‘to give’ are excepted from 375. द (शशास,
waa, दददिवहे).
9. भन् ‘to honour,’ प्रथ् ‘to loosen,’ तप् ‘to be ashamed,’ Wes ‘to bear fruit,’
necessarily conform to 375.4, although properly excepted (thus, मेजिय, भेजिव,
&c.) The following conform to 375.4. optionally : फण् “to go,’ खन् “to sound,’
(according to some) स्तन् ‘to sound,’ श्रम् “to wander,’ वम् “to vomit,’ and (accord-
ing to some) स्तम् and स्यम् ‘to sound,’ AX ‘to tremble’ (thus, पफ़णिय or फेणिय,
UU or HEMT, &c.)
h. The following also conform optionally to 375.4: 2-4 ‘to tie,’ Arq “to
loosen,’ द्मम् “to deceive ;’ and, when they do so, drop their nasals (thus, ज्ञग्रन्यिय
or Rive, जश्रन्युस् or aya)
i. The following, although their radical vowel is long, also conform optionally
to 375.4: रान् BIT Atm., TST, and YTS, all meaning ‘to shine’ (tafsta or
`रेजिव, &e.)
j. राध्, when it signifies “to injure,’ necessarily conforms to 375. 4 (2. रेथियः
Du. 1. रेधिव, 3. रेधतुस्; Pl. 3. THA).
k. ‘to pass’ follows 375.a, and ज् ‘to grow old’ may do so. See 374.7. s.
376. गम् gam, ‘to go,’ जन् jan, ‘to be born,’ खन् khan, “to dig,’ and इन् han,
‘to kill’ (which last forms its Perfect as if from चन् ghan), drop the medial a
before all the terminations, except those of the sing. Par. (cf. the declension of
rdjan at 148). Hence, gam makes in sing. du. pl. 3. jagdma, jagmatus, jagmus ;
jan makes jajdna, jajnatus, jajnus ; khan makes éakhdna, cakhnatus, ¢akhnus ; and
han makes 1. 3. jaghdna, jaghnatus, jaghnus, 2. jaghanitha or jaghantha.
377- घस् ghas, ‘to eat,’ is analogous, making jaghdsa, jakshatus, jakshus; Du. 1.
jakshiva. See 44 and 7o. And in the Veda some other roots follow this analogy ;
thus, पत् ‘to fall’ (पञ्चिव &c.); A‘ to stretch’ (तल्लिषे &c.); भस् ‘to cat? (बष्सिव &८.)
378. WA to adpere,’ @® ‘to embrace,’ and दंश् ‘to bite,’ can optionally drop
their nasals in du. pl. Parasmai and all the Atmane; thus, ससनिव or ससन्िव,
सस्ते or सस्वजे.
379. रध् ‘to perish’ and जम् Atm. ‘to yawn’ may insert a nasal before vowel-
terminations (ररन्ध, ररन्धिय or we; Dut. ररन्धिव or U8, see 371: I. 3. जजम्भे).
38०. FT‘ to clean’ makes its stem समाजे in sing. Parasmai, and may do so be~
fore the remaining terminations (1. 3. FATS, 2. AAAS or ममाषठे; Du. 1. ममानिव
or ममृजिव or Aqsa, see 651).
381. WH prach, “to ask,’ makes its stem WH * (becoming WAS before a vowel
* This rests on Siddhénta-kaum. 134. Some grammarians make the stem in
du. and pl. &c. पपृच्छ
\
VERBS.—PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT, 177
by 51) throughout; see 631. WH bhrajj, cl. 6, ‘to fry,’ makes either a or
TAH throughout. See 632.
a, TR “to go’ gunates the radical vowel throughout; thus, 1. 3. सान्ते,
2. STASI; Du. 1. आानक्तिव.
382. स्वप् svap, ‘to sleep,’ makes its bases सुष्वाप् and FIT. See 655
a. व् or BTA ‘to spit’ may substitute त् ६ for दू ट in the reduplication; thus,
1. 3. दिष्टेव or fava, feta or तिष्व.
383. व्यध् ‘to pierce,’ A ‘to encompass,’ “to deceive,’ व्यय् Atm, " to be pained,’
make their reduplicated syllable vi; and the first two roots change vya to vi before
all the terminations, except the sing. Parasmai; thus, from vyadh comes sing.
du. pl. 3. विव्याध; विविधतुस्, fafaya; Atm. विविधे, &c.: from vyad, विव्याच,
fafaagy, fafaaq: from vyath, विव्यथे, विव्यथाते, विव्ययिरे. See 615 and 629.
a. द्युत् cl. 1. Atm., ` 10 shine,’ makes its reduplicated syllable di (1. 3. didyute).
384. ग्रह् grah, cl. 9, “to take,’ makes its stem WANE and WR (S. Du. Pl. 3.
FATS, ATRIA, ATSA)- But sing. 2. जग्रहिय. See 699
a. गहू to conceal’ lengthens its radical vowel instead of gunating it in the sing
Parasmai, जुगूह, जुगृहिय &९
b. AE ah, ‘to say” (only used in Perf.), is defective in sing. du. pl. 1. and pl. 2,
and forms 2nd sing. from AT (2. ANA, 3. Ht; Du. 2. साह युस्, 3. साहदुस्;
Pl. 3. आहम्).
८. चरू to say’ has no Perfect of its own, but substitutes either that of वच् (375. ९)
or the above forms from WE. Again, ट् "to eat’ has a Perfect of its own, but
may substitute that of चत् 377. Similarly, AH ‘to drive’ (ago) may substitute
that of at.
Periphrastic Perfect.
385. Roots which begin with a vowel, long by nature or position
(except the vowel खा, as in WIG‘ to obtain,’ 364. ९ and in आनज्छ् ‘to
stretch ;? and roots having an initial च before two consonants, 367. 6),
and all roots of more than one syllable (except ऊरौ ‘to cover, 374.7;
and except optionally ary ‘to awake, 374.p, and दरिद्रा ‘to be poor,
373.4), form their Perfects by adding खाम् dm to the root or stem
(which generally gunates its last vowel if ending in ‰ u, १४ short or
long), and affixing the Perfect of one of the auxiliary verbs, अस् as,
‘to be;’ w bhi, ‘to be ;’ कृ Ari, ‘to do.’
a. This dm may be regarded as the ace. case of a feminine abstract
noun formed from the verbal stem. With चकार it becomes साच्रकार
or आंचकार by 59. Thus, $3, ‘to rule,’ makes 1st and 3rd sing
ईशामास or ईशास्नभरव or Syraat; the ‘last might be translated ‘he
made ruling,’ and in the former cases the acc. may be taken ad-
verbially. So also, चकास्, ‘to shine,” makes wararaatt ‘he made
shining.’ Re ue
Aa
178 VERBS.—FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM.
Obs.—The stem with dm may sometimes be separated from the auxiliary verb ;
e.g. तं पातयां प्रथमम् सास ‘first he caused him to fall’ (Raghu-v. rx. 61), and
प्रधंशयां यो नधुषं चकार (Raghu-v. x111. 36).
8. When the Atmane inflexion has to be employed, कृ only is
used; thus, ईद् Atm., ‘to praise,’ makes 1st and 3rd sing. $sTam
“he made praising or praised.’
c. Roots of cl. 10 2180 form their Perfect in this way, the syllable
dm blending with the final a of the stem; thus, from चुर् ¢ur, cl. 10,
१८६० steal,’ éoraydmdsa, ‘I have or he has stolen.’
. @, Also all Derivative verbs, such as Causals, Desideratives, and
‘Frequentatives. See 490, 504, 513, 516.
९. Also the roots WY ay, ‘to go;’ दय् day, Atm. ‘to pity ;” ATA ds, Atm. “to
sit 3 कास् kas, “to cough,’ ‘to shine’ (कासाच्चक्र &८.) ; see Pan. 11. 1, 37. 35.
And optionally the roots भी bhé, cl. 3, ‘to fear’ (fare or विभयाचचकार); द्री ४४,
cl. 3, ‘to be ashamed’ (जिटराय or जिया कार) ; भृ dhri, cl. 3, ‘to bear’ (बभार or
विभरच्चकार) ; ह् hu, cl. 3, ‘to sacrifice’ (जुहाव ० जुहवाच्कार); विद् vid, cl. 2, ‘to
know’ (विवेद् or बिदाकार) ; उष् ush, cl. य, "to burn’? (उवोष or HATTA).
J. The roots कम् Atm., गुप्, धूपः चिक्, पण्, पन्» whose peculiarity of conjuga-
tional form is explained at 271, and "WT Atm. ‘to blame,’ may optionally employ a
Periphrastic Perfect, not derived from the root, but from the conjugational stem ;
thus, चकमे or कामयाच्चक्रे, जुगोप or गोपायाच्रकार, दुभूप or धूपायाचकार, विविच्छण०ः
विच्छायाच्चकार, पेणे or पणायाचचकार (according to Vopa-deva WTO), WA or
पनायाच्रकार, SAA or Rtas.
9. Observe—Stems ending in i, u, or ri, short or long, are generally gunated
before dm; but दीधी ‘to shine’ and at ‘to go’ make द्ीध्याचक्रे, वेव्याखक्रे, &०.
386 First and Second Future.
Terminations of First Future repeated from 246.
PaRASMAI, ATMANE,
tdsmi tdsvas tdsmas {4८ tdsvahe tdsmahe
tdsi tdsthas tdstha tdse tdsdthe tddhve
ta térau: téras ta térau tdras
Terminations of Second Future repeated from 246.
sydmi sydvas sydmas | sye sydvahe —_ sydmahe
syasi syathas syatha | syase syethe syadhve
syati syatas syanti syate syete syante
Obs.—The First Future results from the union of the Nom. case of the noun
of agency (formed with the suffix तु ध see 83) with the Present tense of the verb
सस् as, ‘to be;’ thus, taking tq ddtri, “a giver’ (declined at 127), and combining
‘
VERBS,—FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM. 179
its Nom. case with अस्ति asmi and हे he, we have ddtdsmi and ddtdhe, ‘I am a giver,’
identical with the 1st pers. sing. Par. and Atm. of the rst Fut., ‘I will give.’ So
also ddtdsi and ddtdse, ‘thou art a giver,’ or ‘thou wilt give.’ In the rst and 2nd
persons du, and pl. the sing. of the noun is jomed with the du. and pl. of the
auxiliary. In the 3rd pers. the auxiliary is omitted, and the 3rd sing. du. and pl
of the rst Fut. in both voices is then identical with the Nom. case sing. du. and
pl. of the noun of agency; thus, ddtd, ‘a giver,’ or he will give;’ ddtdrau, two
givers,’ or ` they two will give,’ &. *
Hence this tense is sometimes called the Periphrastic Future.
387. The terminations of the Second Future appear also to be derived from the
verb सस् joined, as in forming the Passive and 4th class, with the y of root या ‘to
go,’ just as in English we often express the Future tense by the phrase ‘Iam going.’
388. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
Gunate the vowel of the root (except as debarred at 28, and
except in certain roots of cl. 6, noted at 390, 390. a) throughout
all the persons of both First and Second Future ; and in all roots
ending in consonants (except those enumerated at 400-414), and in
a few ending in vowels (enumerated at 392), insert the vowel इ £
between the root so gunated, and the terminations.
389. Thus, from जि ji, cl. 1, ‘to conquer,’ comes the stem जे je (1st Fut. je+
tésmi— जेतास्मि, &c 3 Atm. je+itdhe Ware 2nd Fut je-+sydmi— जेष्यामि &e
Atm. 7९159 ९ = जेष्ये, by 70). Similarly, from चं sru, cl. 5, to hear,’ comes the stem
BN sro (1st Fut. sro+tdsmi=Aratter, &c.; 2nd Fut. sro+syémi=ararta, &c.)
a. So also, from FY budh, cl. 1, to know,’ comes the stem बोधि Bodhi (1st Fut.
bodhi+tdsmi == बोधितास्मि, &c.; Atm. 2027; 1140९ = बोधितताहे. 2nd Fut. bodhi+
कणं = बोधिष्यामि, &c.; Atm. bodhi+sye = बोधिष्ये).
390. The roots ending in Ju and Siz of cl. 6, forbidding Guna, are F or H “to
call out,’ गुण ग् to void excrement,’ ¥ or भरू to be firm,’ नु or नू to praise,” धू to
shake.” These generally change their final ४ to wv; thus, @faare &e. from कू»
but GATE &c. from F; गुवितास्मि &c. from 7, but गुतास्मि &c. from गु
The roots ending in consonants of cl. 6, not gunated, are JA to contract,’
TH to sound, कुद् to make crooked, धुट् to resist,’ चुट् or Be to cut,’ तुट् to
quarrel,’ तुट् “to break,’ पुद् “to embrace,’ मुट् or FF or TE “to pound,’ स्यद् ‘to burst
in pieces,’ लुठ् ‘to roll,’ कुड् ‘to play,’ WS or FS ‘to be immersed,’ @¥, YF, FF,
FS, FS, TE, WT, WT, BE, FAS, all meaning “to cover,’ Te “to guard,’ a “to
hinder,’ FF “to bind,’ नुड् ‘to strike,’ पुड् “to emit,’ oF “to adhere,’ इड “to collect,’
डिप् to throw,’ गुर् Atm. ‘to make effort,’ HT ‘to cut,’ BR or Tes “to vibrate,’
HA ‘to be firm,’ “to go,’ Fz ` 10 eat,’—nearly all uncommon as verbs. To these.
must be added ft cl. 7, ‘to tremble
* The future signification inherent in the noun of agency ddéd, seems implied
in Latin by the relation of dator to daturus.
Aaz
180 YERBS.—FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. FORMATION OF STEM.
ˆ ®. कग “to cover’ may either gunate its final or change it to uv (ऊणेवितास्मि or
wmifamfe, ऊणंविष्यामि or ऊं विष्यामि).
© दीधी Atm. ‘to shine,’ Tat Atm. ‘to go,’ drop their finals before the inserted i
(दीधिताहे &०.) Similarly, दरिद्रा ‘to be poor’ (efefgaTfa &., द्रिद्िष्यामि &c.)
d. Roots in Ze, रे ai, St ०, change their finals to ¢; thus, दे ‘to call’ (दातास्मि,
द्हास्याभि).
९. मि ‘to throw,’ Ht‘ to perish,’ and et Atm. ‘to decay,’ must change, and त्ती
‘to obtain’ may optionally change their finals to ¢ (मातास्मि, मास्यामि, &. ; amie,
&९. 3 Datta or त्छातास्मि, &e. ; Surly or ल्ास्यामि, &.) Compare 373. c.
Jf. Roots containing the vowel ri, as सृप् ‘to creep,’ YU “to handle,’ a “to
touch,’ कृष् “to draw,’ are generally gunated, but may optionally change the vowel
rito Lra; thus, सास्मि or घरप्नास्मि &e., सप्स्यीमि or ATRITAA Ke.
9. Reversing this principle, W33{ ' to fry’ may make either श्रष्टास्मि or ABTA &८. ;
भ्रषस्यामि or WEATIA &०.
h. The alternative is not allowed when 2 is inserted ; thus, तृप् to be satisfied ”
makes WAIST or ARIF, but only afaatfar. Similarly, au to be proud.’
१ FF‘ to let go,’ “to create,’ and ES ‘to see,’ necessarily change ri to ra; thus,
स्र्टस्सि, aenfa, &०.; द्रशास्मि, द्रस्याभि, &c.
j. मृज् ‘to rub,’ ‘to clean,’ takes Vriddhi instead of Guna (Aatfatatfe or माटास्मि).
[2 मनन् ‘to be immersed,’ and नञ् ‘to perish’ when it rejects 7, insert a nasal ;
thus, मंक्तास्मि, dene, &५.; नेशस्मि, नेछ्यामि, &c.; but नशितास्मि &८., नशिष्यामि &०.
2. कम् Atm., गुप्, धूप्; fag, पण्, पन्, Wi, at 385.7, may optionally carry
their peculiar conjugational form into the Futures (कमिताहे or कामयिताहे, Taf
or गोपितास्मि or गोपायितास्मि, विच्छितास्मि or विच्डायितास्मि, WhtaTS or चूतीयि-
ताहे, &c.)
Mm. गुहू “to conceal’ lengthens its vowel when ६ is inserted. See 415. m.
n, अस् “to be,’ A and Wa ‘to speak,’ have no Futures of their own, and sub-
stitute those of भू, वच्, and ख्या respectively ; AE “to eat” may optionally substitute
the Futures of घस्, and अन् to drive’ of वी (सनितास्मि णः वेतास्मि &c.) Cf. 384. ९.
0. The rules at 296-306 must, of course, be applied to the two Futures; thus,
नह् ` ४० tie’ makes WANA &९. See 306. b.
Observe—The above rules apply generally to the Aorist, Precative (Atmane),
and Conditional, as well as to the two Futures.
RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF इ £ IN THE LAST
FIVE TENSES AND DESIDERATIVE.
391. These rules do not apply to form II of the Aorist at 435, nor
to the Parasmai of the Precative at 442, which can never insert i
a, The insertion of the vowel ४ (called an dgama or ‘ augment,’
and technically styled if) before the terminations of the General
tenses constitutes one of the most important and intricate subjects
VERBS.—RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION 07 इ. 181
of Sanskrit Grammar. The manifest object of this inserted i—which
can never be gunated or vriddhied, but may occasionally be lengthened
into i—is to take the place of the conjugational vowel, and prevent
the coalition of consonants. Hence it is evident that roots ending
in vowels do not properly require the inserted i. Nevertheless, even
these roots often insert it; and if it were always inserted after roots
ending in consonants, there would be no difficulty in forming the
last five tenses of the Sanskrit verb.
Unfortunately, however, its insertion is forbidden in about one
hundred roots ending in consonants, and the combination of the
final radical consonant with the initial ¢ and s of the terminations will
require a knowledge of the rules already laid down at 296-306.
We now proceed to enumerate, ist, with regard to roots ending
in vowels; 2ndly, with regard to roots ending in consonants: A. those
inserting ६; B. those rejecting i; ©. those optionally inserting or
rejecting 7. As, however, it is more important to direct attention
to those roots (whether ending in vowels or consonants) which reject
i, the paragraphs under B. will be printed in large type.
Obs.—In the following lists of roots the 3rd sing. will sometimes be given
between brackets, and the roots will be arranged generally in the order of their
Jinal vowels and consonants.
Note that if the 1st Future reject % i, it is generally rejected in form I of Aorist,
in Atmane-pada of Precative, in Conditional, Infinitive, Past Passive Participle,
Indeclinable Past Participle, Future Participle formed with the suffix tavya, and
noun of agency formed with the suffix tri; and often (though not invariably)
decides the formation of the Desiderative form of the root by s instead of ish.
So that the learner may always look to the 1st Future as his guide. For example,
taking the root kship, “to throw,’ and finding the 1st Fut. to be ksheptdsmi, he
knows that i is rejected. Therefore he understands why it is that the 2nd Fut. is
kshepsydmi; Aor. akshaipsam ; Atmane of Precative, kshipstya ; Cond. akshepsyam ;
Infin. ksheptum ; Past Pass. Part. kshipta; Indecl. Part. kshiptud ; Fut. Part.
kskeptavya ; noun of agency, ksheptri; Desid. cikshipsdmi. On the other hand,
taking root ydé,‘to ask,’ and finding the 1st Fut. to be ydditd, he knows that 7
is inserted, and therefore the same parts of the verb will be ydéishydmi, ayddi-
Sham, yddshtya, ayddishyam, ydditum, ydcita, ^. ydditavya, ydditri, 111.
respectively.
A. Roots ending in Vowels inserting = i (ewcept as indicated at 391).
392. Five in $i and ४ viz. पि ‘to resort to’ (श्रयिता, प्रयिष्यि), fer‘ to swell,’
St ‘to fly,’ Wt ‘to lie down,’ स्मि ‘to smile’ (in Desid. alone).
a. Six in उ ४, viz. @ ‘to sneeze,’ WY ‘to sharpen,’ J “to praise,’ J “to. join,”
182 VERBS—RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF इ £.
इ ‘to sound,’ सनु snu, ‘to drip’ (the last only when Parasmai; when inflected in Atm.;
it may reject 7)
Obs.—¥ ‘to praise,’ and ‘to pour out,’ in the Aorist Parasmai.
b. Allin ऊ ४, as भू (0 be’ (भविता, भविष्यति), except सू and चू (which optionally
reject 7), and except in the Desiderative. See 395, 395. ०.
९. All in short "Wri, in the 2nd Future and Conditional, &c., but not in the
1st Future, as कुं “to do’ (करिष्यति, but कते)
d. Two in short ¥ ri (viz. वृं ‘to choose’ and जागृ “to awake’) also in 1st Future
(वस्ति, afcata, जागरिता, &c.)
९. All in long चु. 1%, as तू ‘to pass’ (तस्ता, तरिष्यति).
393. Observe—¥J “to choose,’ and all roots in long चु 7८, may optionally lengthen
the inserted i, except in Aorist Parasmai and Precative Atmane (वस्ति or वरीता,
वरिष्यति or वरीष्यति, तरिता or WHAT, &c.) See 627, note *.
B. Roots ending in Vowels rejecting = i.
394. All in =n d, as दा ‘to give’ (दाता, 'दास्यति).
a, Nearly all in इ १ and ई £ as जि ‘to conquer,’ नी ०४० lead’ (जेता,
जेष्यति, &c.)
b. Nearly all in short उ ४, as शु ‘to hear’ (च्रोता, च्रोष्यति).
€. Those in long ऊ ४ generally in the Desiderative only.
d. All in short च ri (except वृ) in the 1st Future only, as कु ‘to
do’ (wat, but कर्प्यिति). See 392. ¢.
e, Allin ve, @ai, Wo. See 390.4.
C. Roots ending in Vowels optionally inserting or rejecting & i, either
in all the last five tenses and Desiderative, or in certain of these
forms only.
395- Lor सु cl. 2, 4, Atm. “to bring forth’ (सोता or सविता, सोष्यते or सविष्यते).
a. Y‘to shake’ (धविता or धोता, धविष्पति or धोष्यति, &०., but i must be inserted
in Aor. Par., see 430), पू "10 purify,’ optionally in Desid. only (3a, पिपविष् Atm.)
6. प्ये Atm. “to grow fat’ (प्याता and wIfaAT, WAT and WIfTMR; but neces-
sarily inserts 7 in Desid.)
c. FY ‘to go,’ Yor ‘to spread,” ‘to cover,’ and ¥ ‘to sound,’ all in rst Fut.,
and the latter two optionally in Desid. also (खी, असितिण (2) अरीता; स्ततो,
स्तरिता or UAT; स्वत or खस्ता; तिस्तीषैति or तिस्तरिषति or तिस्त रीषति ; सिस्व-
रिषति or Fafa).
396. दर्दर “to be poor’ optionally in Desid. (दिदस्द्रास् or दिदरिद्विष्).
` 397. All roots in long चरु, ré optionally in Desid., as तु. makes तितरिषति or
तितीपेति.
398. धि, यु, भृ, वृ» optionally in Desiderative. Compare 392.
VERBS.—RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF इ. 188
A. Roots ending in Consonants inserting i.
399. As a general rule, all roots ending in ख् kh, yg, Loh, Aik, St, Tth, Sd.
Gh, Un, Tt Gth, W ph, Ub, Vy, Tr, BL Tv; thus, लिख् ‘to write’ makes
ठेखितता, लेखिष्यति, &८.; वर्ण् ‘to leap’ makes वर्णिता, afarafa.
^. ग्रह to take’ lengthens the inserted £ in all the last five tenses, except Prec.
Parasmai (ग्रता, ग्रदीष्यति), see 699. It rejects i in Desid.
B. Roots ending in Consonants rejecting इ i.
Obs.—The rules at 296-306 must in all cases be applied. When a number is
given after a root, it indicates that the root only rejects i if conjugated in the class
to which the number refers. When a number is given between brackets, this refers
to the rule under which the root is conjugated.
400. One in क् k.— gq 5. ‘to be able’ (शक्ता, श्यति 679)
401. Six in च् ८.--पच् ‘to cook’ (पक्ता, पश्यति); वच् ‘to speak’ (650)
fea 7. ‘to make empty’ (vat, रेष्यति); विच् 7. 3. ‘to separate ; सिच्
‘to sprinkle ;’ मुच् ‘to loosen’ (628)
402. One in & ¢h,—we* ‘to ask’ (प्रष्टा, प्रस्यति 631).
403. Fifteen in ज् j.— चन् ‘to quit’ (596); भज् ‘to honour ;’ यज् ‘to
sacrifice’ (597) ; wat 6. ‘to fry’ (632) ; wag ‘to be immersed? (633) ;
wa ‘to break’ (669) ; wR ‘to colour,’ ‘to be attached ;” सन्न् ‘to adhere
(597. ०); खञ् ‘to embrace ;? fax ‘to cleanse’ (नेक्ता, Wafa); fart 3
tremble’ (a1, &c.); भुज् 6. ‘to bend,’ 7. ‘to enjoy’ (668.4); युज् ‘to join
(670) ; BH “to break? (रोक्ता, &c.) ; सृज् ‘to create,’ ‘to let go’ (625).
404. One in त् ¢.—¥q ‘to be,’ ‘to turn, but only in and Fut.
Par., Cond. Par., Aor. Par., Desid. Par. (This root is generally
Atm. and inserts i, 598.)
‘405. Fourteen in हू d.— 3g ‘to eat? (652); पट् ‘to go’ (wat, पद्यते) ;
शद् ‘to perish ;? ag ‘to sink ;? स्कन्द् 1. Parasmai, ‘to leap; gg ‘to
void excrement ;’ खिट् ‘to be troubled’ (@ar &c ) fae ‘to cut?
(667) ; भिह् ‘to break’ (583); faz 7. ‘to reason,’ 4. ‘to be,’ ‘to exist,’
‘to find ;? fare 4. ‘to sweat ;? चुद् ‘to pound’ (qrat, wef); तुद्
‘to strike’ (634); नुद् ‘to impel’
406. Thirteen in च् dh,—avy ‘to bind’ (692); व्यध् ‘to pierce’ (615) ;
राध् ‘to accomplish’ (सद्धा, tretfa) ; ary 5. ‘to accomplish ;” सिध् 4. ‘to be
accomplished’(616); क्रुध् ८० be angry’ (rat, क्रोत्यति); सुध् 10 be hungry ;?
* WS inserts £ in the Desiderative.
+ UR optionally inserts 7 in the Desiderative.
{ When चिन् belongs to cl. 7, it takes i; as, विजिता, विजिष्यति. See 390. a.
184 VERBS.—RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF इ ४.
बुध् 4. Atm. ‘to be aware’ (614)*; Jy Atm. ‘to fight ;* Sx ‘to obstruct’
(671); शुध् ‘to be pure; वृध् ‘to increase,’ only in and Fut. Par., Cond.
Par., Aor. Par.; yy ‘to break wind, only in and Fut. Par., Cond.
Par., Aor. Par, (both these last insert £ throughout the Atmane),
407. Two in न् मन् 4. Atm. ‘to think’ (617); इन् ‘to kill’ (654),
but the last takes £ in and Fut.-and Conditional.
408. Eleven in प् p.—1q ‘to burn’ (तक्ता, तप्स्यति); वप् ८0 sow ;? शप्
‘to curse ;’ खप् ‘to sleep’ (655) ; चाप् ४० obtain’ (681); faq‘ to throw’
(635); faa Atm. ‘to distil;? लिप् ‘to anoint ;’ $4 ‘to touch’ (atm,
द्ोष्स्यति) ; दुष् 6. ‘to break’ (star, लोप्स्यति) ; YA‘ to creep’ (390. /)
409. Three in म् 04.--यन् ‘to lie with carnally’ (aan, qeafa) ; एन्
Atm. ‘to desire’ (with wt ‘to begin,’ 601. a) ; लम् Atm. ‘to obtain’
(601).
410, Five in म् m.—nq ‘to go’ (602), but takes i in 2nd Fut. and
Cond. ; नम् ‘to bend’ (नन्ता, नंस्यति) ; यम् ‘to restrain ;’ w Atm. ‘to
sport ;? क्रम् ‘to walk’ in the Atmane (grat, क्रस्यते).
411. Ten in ज् §.—@xq ‘to bite’ (दंशा, दंच्यति) ; fest 6. ‘to point out?
(583) ; fam ‘to enter’ (वेष्टा, वेष्यति); fem ‘to hurt; fest‘ to become
small ;” क्रुश् ‘to cry out? (क्रोशा, क्रोछ्यति) ; Bm 6. ‘to hurt ;’ $M 1. ‘to
see’ (390. i, 604, द्रष्टा, द्रष्यति); मृज् ‘to handle? (390. ^); स्पृश् 6. ‘to
touch’ (390. f, 636, स्वश, स्प्यैति). ~
412. Eleven in 4 sh.—fray ‘to shine’ (वेष्ट, व्वेष्यति) ; द्विष् ‘to hate’
(657); पिष् 7. ‘to pound ;? विष् ‘to pervade ;’ शिष् 7. ‘to distinguish’
(672) ; fay 4. ‘to embrace’ (301, 302); TF 4. ‘to be satisfied? (ater,
mizafa) ; दुष् 4. ‘to be sinful ;’ पुष् 4. ‘to be nourished +? (ater, wiearfa) ;
शुष् 4. ‘to become dry’ (qter, शोषयति) ; कृष् ‘to draw’ (390.f, 606).
413. Two in स् 5.--घस् ‘to eat? (wen, wef) ; वस् 7. ‘to dwell?
(607) ‡.
414. Eight in ह 4.—eg ‘to burn’ (610) ; नह् ‘to tie? (624); वह्
‘to carry’ (611); दिह् ‘to anoint? (659) ; fag ‘to make water? (मेढा
3०5. a, मेष्यति) ; लिह् 2. ‘to lick? (661) ; दह् 2. ‘to milk’ (660) ||; रुह्
to ascend’ (रोढा, ोच्यनि).
* When बुध् belongs to cl. 1, it inserts ४,
t When पुष् belongs to cl. 9, it takes i (पोषिदुम्, पोषिष्यति).
} Except in the Past Pass. and Indecl. Participles उषित and उषित्वा (607). बस्
cl. 2. Atm. ‘to put on,’ ‘to wear,’ inserts i (वसितुम्, वसिष्यते).
॥ दुह् cl. x, “to afflict,’ inserts i (दोहिता, &९.)
VERBS.—RULES FOR INSERTION OR REJECTION OF इ 185
C. Roots ending in Consonants optionally inserting or rejecting ् i,
either in all the last five tenses and Desiderative, or in certain
of these forms only.
Obs.— When no tenses or forms are specified, the option applies to all except
to form II of the Aorist and the Precative Parasmai, which can never insert 2,
415. Two in च् ८.--तच्च् or TA 7. ‘to contract ;’ AW ‘to cut’ (630).
a. Three 7 ज् j.— सन्न् 7. “to anoint’ (668, but necessarily inserts 7 in Desid.) ;
मृज् ‘to clean’ (390. j, 651); WH “to fry’ (optionally in Desid. only, necessarily
rejects ¢ in other forms).
6. Four in त् t.— UT ‘to fall’ (optionally in Desid. only; necessarily inserts £ in
Futures and Cond., and rejects it in Aor.) ; कृत् 6. ‘to cut? (optionally in 2nd Fut.,
Cond., and Desid.; necessarily inserts 2 in 1st Fut. and Aor.) ; चृत् ‘to kill’ (op-
tionally in 2nd Fut., Cond., and Desid.; necessarily inserts 2 in 1st Fut. and Aor.) ;
नृत् to dance’ (optionally in 2nd Fut. and Desid., necessarily inserts £ in rst Fut.
and Aor.)
ce. Four in द् छ स्यन्द् “to flow’ (optionally in all forms except 2nd Fut. and
Cond. Par., and Desid. Par., where 7 is necessarily rejected) ; fag “to be wet,’
a “to shine,’ and Js | to injure’ (the last two optionally in all forms except 1st
Fut., which necessarily inserts 2).
d. Three in ध् रध् to perish ;? fay 1.‘ to restrain ;’ AT ‘to prosper ’ (the
last optionally in Desid. only, necessarily inserts £ in other forms, see 680).
e. Two in न् n.— | to stretch’ and सन् ‘to honour’ (both optionally in Desid.
only, necessarily insert i in other forms, see 583).
f. Five in % .- तप् to be ashamed ;’ गुप् 1. ‘to defend;’ तृप् 4. ‘to be satisfied ’
(618); 'दूप् 4. “to be proud ;’ कुष् ‘to be capable’ (when it rejects i, it is Parasmai
only).
9. Two in भ् bh.—@r 4. ‘to desire’ (optionally in 1st Fut., necessarily inserts 7
in other forms *) ; @4 “to deceive’ (optionally in Desid. only, feefarata or धिष्सति
or धीप्सति, necessarily inserts £ in other forms).
h. One in % m.—®A 2. 4. "to bear? (कमिता or BAT, Bhawan, -ति, or संस्यते, -fA).
४, All in इव् iv (but only optionally in Desid.); as, दिव् to play,’ fez‘ to spit,’
faq" to sew.’
j. Two in Qy— ary’ to honour ;' प्याय् or BAY ` to be fat’ (but both necessarily
insert i in Desid., compare 395. 8).
‰. Three in 91 अज् 5. Atm. “to pervade ` (but necessarily inserts 2 in Desid.,
8९6 681.a); AM 4. ‘to perish’ (see 390. k, and 620) ; FAST 9. ‘to tormerit’ (697).
7. Seven in ष् sh.— WW ‘to pervade ;’ WB" to form by cutting,’ ‘to carve’ (aferat
or तष्टा; तसिष्यति or तस्यति, &९.); त्व् ‘to create ;’ QW with निर् “to extract’
(otherwise necessarily inserts ४) ; इष् 6." to wish’ (637); fra‘ to injure ;? BX 1.‘ to
* Except the Aorist, following form II at 435.
† अश् ०. 9, ‘to eat,’ inserts i.
Bb
186 VERBS.—AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
injure’ (the last three optionally in 1st Fut., but necessarily insert i in other
forms),
m. Twelve in हू h.—® Atm. ‘to bear’ (optionally in 1st Fut. only, necessarily
inserts £ in other forms, see 611.4); ग्रह ‘to gamble’ (गुहिता or गाढा, &c.); गाह्
‘to penetrate ;° ATE ‘to measure’ (AIfEAt or मादा, &c.); fag snih, ‘to love’
(ज्ेहिता or QUT or at, &c.); aE snuh, ‘to love,’ ‘to vomit ;” aK “to be per-
plexed’ (612); गुहू ‘to conceal’ (गूहता or गोटा, गृहिष्यति or चोघछ्यति, see 306. a,
390. m) ; दह् “to seek to injure’ (623) ; a 6. 7. or तृह् 6. " to kill’ (674) ; वृहू or बृह्
‘to raise 5” स्तृह् or स्तृह् 6. to kill.’
Aorist (Third Preterite).
This complex and multiform tense, the most troublesome and
intricate in the whole Sanskrit verb, but fortunately less used in
classical Sanskrit than the other past tenses, is not so much one
tense, as an aggregation of several, all more or less allied to each
other, and all bearing a manifest resemblance to the Imperfect.
416. Grammarians assert that there are seven different varieties
of the Sanskrit Aorist, four of which correspond more or less to the
Greek 1st Aorist, and three to the 2nd Aorist, but we shall endeavour
to shew that all these varieties may be included under two distinct
forms of terminations given in the table at 246, and again below,
and at 435.
417. Form I is subdivided like the terminations of all the last
five tenses into (A) those which reject i, and (B) those which assume
it; A belongs to many of those roots at 394, 400-414, which
reject i; B to most of those at 392, 399, which insert it: but in the
latter case the initial s becomes sh by 70, and in the 2nd and 3rd sing.
the initial s is rejected, the ४ blending with the ¢, which then becomes
the initial of those terminations. Moreover, in the case of roots
which insert 7 the stem is formed according to rules different from
those which apply in the case of roots which reject ४.
a. Form II at 435 resembles the terminations of the Imperfect,
and belongs, in the first place, to some of those roots rejecting ४,
whose stems in the Imperfect present some important variation from
the root (see 436); in the second, to certain of the roots rejecting i,
which end in 3 8, ष् sh, or ह् # and which have i, ५, or ri, for
their radical vowel (see 439); in the third, to verbs of cl. 10 and
Causals.
VERBS.—AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM. 187
Form I.
418. The terminations are here repeated from 246.
A. Terminations without ड् i.
PARASMAI. ATMANE.
I. sam sva sma si svahi = smahi
2. sis stam [tam] sta [ta] | sthds [thds] sdthém dhvam or dhvam
3. sit stdém [tém] sus sta [ta] 54८0 sata
B. Terminations with = i.
PARASMAIL, ATMANE.
I.isham ishva ishma | ishi ishvahi ishmahi
2. ts ishtam ishta | ishthds ishdthém idhvam or idhvam
3. tt ishtém ishus | ishta ishdtém ishata
419. Observe—The brackets in the A terminations indicate the rejection of initial
ॐ from those terminations in which it is compounded with ¢ and th, if the stem ends
in any consonant except a nasal or semivowel, or in any short vowel such as 4, i, u,
or ri. Observe also, that initial s is liable to become sh by 70, in which case a
following ¢ or th is cerebralized. The substitution’ of dhvam for dhvam and
idhoam for idhvam, in certain cases, is explained in the table at 246.
420. General rule for forming the stem for those verbs of the
first nine classes which reject इ £ and so take the A terminations.
Obs. 1. The augment a must always be prefixed, as in the Imperfect; but it
will be shewn in the Syntax at 889, that when the Aorist is used as a prohibitive
Imperative, after the particle md or md sma, the augment is then rejected. See
242. a.
Obs. 2. When a root begins with the vowels ¥ i, Su, or ¥ ri, short or long, the
augment is prefixed in accordance with 251. a.
In Parasmai, if a root end in either a vowel or a consonant,
vriddhi the radical vowel before ail the terminations.
In Atmane, if a root end in इ, $7, उ ५, or ऊ ४ gunate the
radical vowel ; if in = ६ or any consonant, leave the vowel unchanged
before ali the terminations, Final consonants must be joined to the
A terminations according to the rules propounded at 296-306.
a. Thus, from At ‘to lead’ come the two stems anai for Parasmai and ane for
Atmane (anai+sam = अनेषम् by qo; Atm. ane+si --अनेषि, 0१९1-9 =-अनेष्टास्,
&c.)
b. From F cl. 8, ‘to make,’ come the two stems akdr for Parasmai and akri for
Atmane (akdr + sam == सअकाषेम् by 70, &c.; Atm. akri+si -=-सकृषि by 70, akri +
thés =SFA by 419, akritta=— AHA, &c.) See 682.
Similarly, ¥ cl. 3, ‘to bear.’ See the table at 583.
Bb2
188 VERBS.—AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
९. So, from युज् ‘to join’ come the two stems ayauj for Parasmai and ayuj for
Atmane (Par. ayauj+sam = सयोखषम् by 296, ayauj +sva TAR, ayauj +-tam=
अयोक्तम् by 419; Atm. षष + अयुषि by 296, ०४ -45 = सयुक्यास्› ayuj+ta
== सयुक्त).
d, From &¥ cl. 7, " to hinder,’ the stems araudh and arudh (Par. araudh-+sam=
अरोत्सम् by 299, Du. araudh+sva = wre, araudh+tam = सगेदम्; Atm. arudh+
ॐ सर ्सि, ५४८०/॥ ¬- 045 == अ रूास्, & ९.)
९. Similarly, from पच् ‘to cook’ come the stems apd¢ and apaé (apdé-+-som=
अपाक्षम् by 296; Atm. 0०८1-9 = अपि, apac+ thés == खपक्यास्, &c.)
f. From दुह् “to burn’ (610), the stems adéh and adah (addh+sam=WUTqA by
306. a, addh+tam=AeETUA by 305; Atm. adah+si == सधि by 3०6. ०, adah+
thds = सअद्ग्धास्, &c.)
421. By referring to 391. 2. it will be easy to understand that most roots in 2, £
short u, and short ri, take the A terminations. Most of those in d, ९, ai, 0, do so
in the Atmane, and a few of those in 4 also in the Parasmai.
a. & or F “to spread’ takes either A or B; and in Atmane when it takes A,
changes {८ 10 fr. See 678.
b. For “to choose,’ ‘to cover,’ changes its vowel to dr, under the same circum-
stances. See 675.
ce. Roots in e, ai, 0, change these vowels to ¢ as in the other General tenses ;
thus, from व्ये ‘to cover,’ अव्यासिषम् &c. (see 433), सव्यासि &e. Similarly, मि, मी,
दी, and optionally st, see 390. ९ (खमासिषम् &e., अमासि &c.)
d. दा ‘to give’ (see 663), धां ‘to place’ (see 664), स्था ‘to stand’ (see 87), दे
“to protect,’ घे ‘to drink’ (if in Atm.), दो or BT ‘ to cut’ (if in Atm.), change their
finals in the Atmane to é (afefa, सदिधास् 419, अदित, सदिष्वहि; ond pl. अदिदुम्)
In Parasmai they follow 438.
९ गा used for इ् ‘to go,’ with चपि prefixed, signifying ‘to go over,’ ‘to read?
(Atmane only), changes its final to £ (सथ्यगीषि, -गीष्टास्? -गीष्ट, &c.)
¢ F Atm. “to cry out,’ गु (6 void excrement,’ and भ्रुं ‘to be firm,’ all cl. 6,
preserve their vowels unchanged (wate, &c.; WHA, AHA, Kc. ATA, &९.);
HY may also make अभ्रोषम्, and गु may also make अगुविषम्, but the latter root is
then generally regarded as गू
422. The following roots of those rejecting i, enumerated at 400-414, take the
A terminations only, both for Par. or Atm. : पच्; WR; UA, भन्, भञ्; wa,
मञ्न्, यज्, TH, FH, TH Atm, YA, TA, सृज्; पट् Atm, हद् Atm, fae, तुट्,
नुद्; बन्ध्, व्यध्, राध्, साध्, बुध् 4. Atm., युध्; मन् 4. Atm.; तप्, चप्, शप्, AY,
सिप्, तिप् Aim., FU यम् रम्, BY; दंश्; वस्; दह्, नह्, वह्.
a. The following take in Par. either the A terminations of form I or optionally
form II; but in Atm. usually the A form of I, sometimes form II: रिच्, विच् 3;
निज्” विन् 5, सन्द, fang, भिद् YE, रध्, दभ्, मृ, स्पृश्, FT.
8. The following take in Par. only form II; but in Atm. the A form of I, or
sometimes the ए form of I: शक् (Atm. doubtful), fax, मुच्? fag 6. ‘to find’ (Atm.
doubtful), 4. 7. (only Atm.), शद्, Fz, faz, faz 4, TY, fay 4, BY, BY, हन् (see
VERBS.—AORIST, FORMATION OF STEM. 189
424.6; वध् with the B terminations is generally used for Par., but अहनत् occurs
in Epic poetry), आप्, किप्, BA, सृप्, गम्, WA.
423. The following of those inserting or rejecting i, enumerated at 415, take either
the A or B terminations: तच्च् or तन्न् AQ, मृज्, Ws generally Atm. only, सिध्,
तप् ^ध्य., गुप्, FY Atm., FI, EW (the last three in Par, take also form II), ay
generally Atm. (may also follow form II in Par.), प्पाय् (or a) Atm., अश्, FA,
गरहः ME, AE, तृह्.
424. The rules at 296-306 must in all cases be applied, as well as the special
rules applicable to certain roots in forming the Futures at 390 and 390. a-o ; thus,
AA makes WATAA by 297. b (see 630) ; Wal makes WATYA by 390. ¢ (see 633) ;
AT in Atm., FAR or अनशिषि; र्न्, HATA or सभाम्, Tey or APE by
390.9: FH, ATE by 390.7 (also अमाजिंषम्); AR, सनात्सम् by 306. ४.
a, पठ् Atm. ‘to go,’ बुध् Atm. ‘to awake,’ जन् Atm. “to be born,’ may form
their 3rd sing. as if they were Passive verbs (see 475); thus, पादि, Du. 3. सप-
त्साताम् ; अबोधि (or optionally बुद्ध), Du. 3. अभुत्साताम्; सजञनि (or optionally
अजनिष्ट).
6. Roots ending in न् and म् must change these letters to Anusvara before s, and
म् becomes न् before £4; thus, मन् makes मंसि, समंस्थास्, अमंस्त (or if in cl. 8.
समनिष्ट, or by c. below खमत) ; Wa makes WUT &c., Du. 2. WEAR.
इन् (generally Par.) drops its nasal before the Atmane terminations (सहसि,
WUT, &c.; initial ऽ being rejected according to 419).
गम् does so optionally (सगंसि or सगसि, अगंस्यास् or अगयोास्, &c.)
e. Roots in न् and र् of cl. 8, which properly take the B terminations, are allowed
an option of dropping the nasal in 2nd and 3rd sing. Atm., in which case initial s
is rejected (419); e.g. HA makes 3. अतनिष्ट or WAM (72६. 11. 4, 79).
d. Similarly, छण् makes 3. WATE or HAA; and WA, WT or साति.
९. सन् ‘to give’ is allowed the option of lengthening the a, when n is dropped ;
thus, Sing. 2. ससायास् or असनिष्टास्, 3. ससात or असनिष्ट. Compare 354. ५, 339
(Pan. 11. 4, 79).
f. The nasal of दंश् ‘to bite’ becomes ङ् before क् and W before इ; thus,
अद्ाद्ुम्, Du. 2. अदाष्टम्; Atm. 1. maf, Du. 2. अद्र्द्दुम्. See 303.
425. वह् “to carry’ (see 611) changes its radical vowel to SMI 0 before those
terminations which reject an initial s by 305. a; thus, avdksham, avdkshis, avdkshtt
(Lat. vewit), avdkshva, avodham, &c.; Atm. avakshi (Lat. vexi), avodhds, avodha.
a. सह् Atm., ‘to bear,’ generally takes the B terminations (asahishi, &c.), though
the form असोढ is also given for the 3rd sing.
426. AR “to tie,’ ‘to fasten,’ makes andtsam, andtsts, andtstt, andtsva, andddham,
&c.; and Atm. anatsi, anaddhds, &c., by 306.5 (compare 183).
a. वस् “to dwell’ (see 607) makes avdtsam, &c., by 304. a.
427. General rule for forming the stem for those verbs of the
first nine classes which assume i, and so take the B terminations
at 418.
190 VERBS.——AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
a. If a root end in the vowels gi, $4, 3u, HU, ri, Bré, vriddhi
those vowels in the Parasmai before a// the terminations, and gunate
them in the Atmane.
Thus, from पू ‘to purify’ come the two stems apau for Parasmai and apo for
Atmane (00 1-21-50 = सपाविषनम् by 375 ००४2-6 = अपावीस्, apau+i+it=
अपावीत्, &e.; Atm. ०-1-25 = अपविषि, &c., by 36), see 583.
From तु cl. 1, ‘to cross,’ comes the stem atdér for Parasmal (atdr +i+sam=
अतारिषम्, &c.)
So, from Wt ‘to lie down’ comes अशयिषि, अशयिष्ठास्, &९. ; but roots ending
in any other vowel than द and long ré more frequently take the A terminations, as
they generally reject ४.
b. Ifa root end in a single consonant, gunate the radical vowel
in both Parasmai and Atmane (except as debarred at 28, and except
in the roots enumerated at 390. a).
Thus, बुध् budh, cl. 1, 0 know,” makes its stem abodh (abodhisham, &c.) See 583.
वृत् ण “to be,’ makes avart (avartishi, &c.)
रध् edh, “to increase,’ makes aidh (aidhishi, &c., 251.6). See 600.
428. A medial a in roots ending in र् and @ is lengthened in
Parasmai, but not in Atmane.
Thus, चर् “to go’ makes अचारिषम्; Wes ‘to blaze,’ अज्वालिषम् . The roots
वह् ‘to speak’ and A ‘to go’ also lengthen the a in Parasmai (अवादिषम्; but
not in Atmane वदिषि &c.)
a. But those in म्? य्? ह् never lengthen the a in Parasmai; "पड, स्यम् “to
sound’ makes सअस्यमिषम्,. The following roots also are debarred from lengthening
thea: HA, कग्, Vl, लग्, VW, स्यग्, हग्, A, कट्, AT, चत्, HY, पथ्, मथ्,
चट्, बध्, WA, हस्. One or two do so optionally; as, कण् and नद् “to sound.’
429. Observe, that as the majority of Sanskrit verbs assume 2,
it follows that rule 427. a. 5. will be more universally applicable than
rule 420, especially as the former applies to the Aorist of Intensives,
Desideratives, and Nominals, as well as to that of simple verbs,
430. The special rules for the two Futures at 390. a—o will of course hold good
for the Aorist; thus the roots enumerated at 390 and 39०. 2 (कुच् &c.) forbid
Guna; and 7, चू, WH, नू generally change their finals to uv (खकुचिषम् &e.,
अगुविषम् &c.) ; but when गू is written गु it makes अगुषम् &c., see 421. f, and +
may also make अधाविषम्, and नू सअनाविषम्.
a, कण makes STAT AR or HATTA or सश विषम् &c., and in Atmane सौरीविषि
or सोगौविषि.
b. According to 9०. ९. दीधी, वेवी, and दरिद्रा drop their finals (Wetfufa,
सद्रिद्दिषम्, &c.; see also 433).
431. In the Atmane, चृ ‘to choose,’ ‘to cover,’ and all roots in long "rv, such
VERBS.—AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM. 191
as q to spread,’ may optionally lengthen the inserted i; thus, अखवरिषि or Wattfa
&e., WATT or HATHA; but in Parasmai only अवारिषम्, अस्तारिषम्,.
432. Ta ‘to swell’ and जागृ “to awake’ take Guna instead of Vriddhi (अश्चयिषम्
&c., see also 440. ¢< सजागर्षिम् &c.)
a. WR according to 399. a. makes अग्रहीषम्; and by 390. m. गुहू makes अगूहिषम्.
The latter also conforms to 439 and 439.6. See 609.
9. FT “to kill’ forms its Aorist from बध् (सबधिषम् &c.), but see 422. 6.
433. Many roots in WT d, ए ९ Wo, and रे ai, with three in 4m, viz. Wyam,
रम् ram, AA nam, assume i, but in the Parasmai insert s before it; final e, 0, and
ai, being changed to खा ¢; thus, from UT ‘to go’ comes सयासिषम्, &९. (see 644) ;
from षो ‘to sharpen,’ अशासिषम्, &c.; from यम् * to restrain,’ अयंसिषम्, &e.
दरिद्रा ` ८० be poor’ makes adaridrisham or adaridrdsisham, &c.
434. In the Atmane these roots reject the i and the s which precedes it, and
follow 418; thus, from AT‘ to measure’ comes अमासि, &c. (see 664.a); from a
“to cover,’ व्यासि (see 421.c); from रम् ‘to sport,’ सरसि, अरस्थास्, Wi, Ke.
Form II.
435. Resembling the Imperfect.
PaRASMAI. ATMANE.
I.am dva[va] dma[ma]| ९ [६] dvahi dmahi
2. as [5] atam [tam] ata [ta] athds ethdém[dthém] adhvam
3. at [t] atdém [tdém] an [us] ata etdm [dtdém] anta
436. No confusion arises from the similarity which this form bears to the Im-
perfect, as in all cases where the above terminations are used for the Aorist, the
Imperfect presents some difference in the form of its stem; thus, गम् “to go” makes
agaécham for its Impf., agamam for its Aor. (see 602) ; भिर् “to break’ makes abhi-
nadam for its Impf., abhidam for its Aor. (see 583). So again, cl. 6, which alone
can shew a perfect identity of root and stem, never makes use of this form for its
Aorist, unless by some special rule the stem of its Imperfect is made to differ from
the root; thus, fq ‘to smear’ (cf. adeipw), which makes alipam in Aor., is
alimpam in its Impf.; see 281. (So in Gr., ef. Impf. éAeimov with 2nd Aor.
८7०४; Ad Bavov with ६२०४ ; edapvyy with 0०५०४) &c.)
Obs.—This form of the Sanskrit Aorist corresponds to Gr. 2nd Aor. (cf. asthdm,
asthds, asthdt, with éoryy, éorys, €or), and the first form is more or less analo-
gous to the 1st Aor. The substitution of i for e, and dthdm, dtdm, for ethdm, etdm,
in Atm. of form II, is confined to a class of roots mentioned at 439.
437. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
Prefix the augment, and as a general rule attach the terminations
directly to the root.
Thus, in agamam &c., abhidam &c., see 436. So also, नज् ‘to perish’ makes
AVA (also अनेशम्, see 441, 424).
a. Observe, however, that most of the roots which follow this form in Par.,
192 VERBS.—AORIST. FORMATION OF STEM.
follow form I at 418 in Atm.; thus, भिद् ‘to break’ makes abhitsi, &c., in Atm.;
see the table at 583: similarly, fae ‘to cut,’ see 667. And a few roots, which are
properly restricted to Atm., have a Parasmai Aorist of this 2nd form; thus, wr
Atm. ‘to shine,’ ‘to be pleasing,’ makes Par. arucam, as well as Atm. arodishi.
b. One or two roots in HT dé, इ 2, and ए € reject their finals; and one or two in
WI ri and "J १८ gunate these vowels before the above terminations; thus, S{T ‘to
tell’ makes सख्यम् &c., सख्ये &c.; श्चि ‘to swell, WIA; दहे ‘to call’ makes HRA
(see 595); सु ‘to go,’ HATA; ऋ to go,’ WW; जु to grow old,” AAR
c. G3 ‘to see’ gunates its vowel (खदम्, see 604).
d. Penultimate nasals are generally dropped ; thus, war’ to stop’ makes अस्तम् ;
स्यन्द् ‘to distil,’ WAG; स्कन्द् ‘to mount, सस्कद्म् ; UIT ‘to fall,” WTA.
९. A form द्यम् occurs in the Veda, from WA ‘to eat,’ the medial a being dropped.
438. In the Parasmai certain roots ending in long चा ठ and ए ८ con-
form still more closely to the terminations of the Imperfect, rejecting
the initial vowel, as indicated by the brackets in the table at 435.
In the 3rd pl. they take us for an.
Thus, दा cl. 3, ‘to give,’ makes addm, adds, addt, addva, &c.; ard pl. adus, see
663. So also, धा cl. 3, ‘to place,’ makes adhdm, &c., 664; and स्वा cl. 1, ‘to stand,’
makes asthdém, &c., 587.
a. Similarly, भू cl. 1, ‘to be,’ except rst sing. and 3rd pl. (अभूवम्; WIT, अभरत्
भूव, &c.; but 310 pl. सभ्रू वन्, see 585).
b. Observe, however, that some roots in d, like yd, ‘to go,’ follow 433
0. And some roots in ₹ € and स्रो 0, which follow 433; optionally follow 438; in
which case € and o are changed as before to ¢; thus, Udhe, cl. 1, ‘to drink,’ makes
either adhdsisham &c., or adhdém &c., also adadham, see 440.4; a so, cl. 4, to
come to an end,’ makes either asdsisham or asdm, see 613.
d. In the Atmane-pada, roots like दा, धा, स्या, दे ५ भे, दो follow 421. ९.
९. इ "10 go’ makes its Aorist from a root मा ; thus, agdm, agds, &c.
Note—Adaddm, Impf. of dd, “to give,’ bears the same relation to its Aor. addm
that €0/dev does to €dwv. So also the relation of adhdm (Aor. of dhd, “to place’)
to adadhém (Impf.) corresponds to that of env to 412 Cf. also abhavas and
abliis with épves and epus.
439- Certain roots ending in ज् $ ष् sh, ह् A, enclosing a medial 2,
u, or ri, form their Aorists according to form II at 435; but
whenever confusion is likely to arise between the Imperfect and
Aorist, s is prefixed to the terminations, before which sibilant the
final of the root becomes ¢ by 302 and 306
Thus, fet ‘to point out,’ the Impf. of which is WEYA, makes सदिष्षम् &c. in
Aor. (cf. Gr. 1st Aor, esEa) Similarly, द्विष् cl. 2, to hate,’ makes adviksham
&e., 6573 दुह् cl. 2, to milk,’ makes WYBR adhuksham &c., by 306.4. See 660,
a, This class of roots substitutes i for e, and dthdm, dtdm, for ethdm, etdm, in -
VERBS.—PRECATIVE. FORMATION OF STEM. 198
Atmane terminations; thus, adikshi, adikshathds, adikshata, adikshdvahi, adikshd-
thdm, &c. $ grd pl. adikshanta,
0. A few roots in ह h (viz. लिहू, दिह् › गुह् FX) optionally in the Atmane reject
the initial a from the terminations of the 2nd and 3rd sing., 1st du., and 2nd pl. ;
thus, लिह् may make अकि, WHET, WHE; Du. 1. सलिद्धहि; Pl. 2. WHER,
661: and दुह् *to milk,’ anyfey, अटुगधास्, &c. See 661, 659, 609, 660.
०. According to some authorities, a few roots (e.g. JU, eu सुप्) which gene-
rally follow form I, A, in Atmane, may optionally conform to form II, taking the
terminations 2, dthdm, dtdm, rejecting initial a and ¢ from the other terminations,
and taking ata for anta ; thus, atripi, atripthds, atripta, atripvahi, &c.
440. Causal verbs and verbs of cl. 10 make use of form II, but
the stem assumes both reduplication and augment (as in the Greek
Pluperfect); thus, बुध् cl. 1, ‘to know,’ makes in the Causal Aorist
सवृवुधम्, &c. This will be explained at 492.
a. A few Primitive verbs besides those of cl. 10 take a reduplicated
stem, analogous to Causals (see 492).
Thus, चि ‘to resort to’ makes अश्जिश्चियम् &c.; for ‘to swell’ makes सशिश्चियम्
(also AYIA and अश्चयिषम्, see 432, 437. 9) दरू 0]. 7, torun,’ अदुद्ूवम्; @ to flow,
असुस्नुवम्; भे “to drink,’ अट्धम्; कम् to love,’ MAHA, &c. This last is defective
when it belongs to cl. 1, having no Special tenses; but when it belongs to cl. 10
(Pres. कामये, &c.) its Aorist is सअचीकमे.
The following Primitive verbs take a contracted form of reduplicated stem :
वच् cl. 2, to speak,’ makes अवोचम् avocam (from SITAR for सवव चम् 650) 5 पत्
cl. 1, ‘to fall,” HANA (from सपपतम् ; compare Gr, 6५7 70); शास् cl. 2, to rule,
अशिषम् (from अशिश्चसम्, but the Atmane follows 427; see 658); WA cl. 4, ‘to
throw,’ SISA (from TAHA, contracted into WTeaAA for ATA 304. ध, whence by
transposition आस्यम्) ; AWM cl. 4, to perish, खनं शम् (from नंडषम् for सअननिश्म्
See 620, 436.
Precative or Benedictive.
Terminations of Precative repeated from 246.
PARASMAIL. ATMANE.
ydsam ydsva == ydsma_ | stya sivahi simahi
yas ydstam ydsta | stshthds siydsthém sidhvam or sidhvam
yat ydstdm ydsus | sishta stydstém र
442. The terminations of this tense resemble those of the Potential in the scheme
at 24s. In 2nd and 3rd sing. they are identical. In the other persons of the
Parasmai a sibilant is inserted, and in some of the Atmane, both prefixed and
inserted. In 2nd pl. Atm. sédhvam is used for sédhvam when immediately preceded
by any other vowel but a or क and optionally ishédhvam for ishidhvam when imme-
diately preceded by a semivowel ork. The only difference between the Potential
cc
194 VERBS.—PRECATIVE. FORMATION OF STEM.
and Precative of verbs of the 2nd and 3rd groups, at 290, will often be that the
Potential will have the conjugational characteristic; thus, bhid, cl. 7, “to break,’
will be bhindydt in Pot., and bhidydt in Prec. (Compare the Optative of the Gr.
Aor. 0०40 with Optative of the Present 0८00८9५.)
443. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the first nine classes.
In Parasmai, as a general rule, either leave the root unchanged
before the y of the terminations, or make such changes as are
required in the Passive (see 465-472), or by the conjugational rule
of the 4th class, and never insert 7.
In Atmane, as a general rule, prefix i to the terminations in those
roots ending in consonants or vowels which take i in the Futures
(see 392, 399), and before this i gunate the radical vowel. Gunate it
also in the Atmane in some roots ending in vowels which reject 7:
but if a root end in a consonant, and reject i, the radical vowel is
generally left unchanged in the Atmane, as well as Parasmai.
444. Thus, from 4% cl. 1, ‘to be,’ come the stem of the Parasmai b/d, and the
stem of the Atmane bhavi, by 36.4 (bhi + ydsam = भूयासम् &c., bhavi + siya=
भविषीय by 70).
445. Frequently, as already observed, before the y of the
Parasmai terminations, the root is liable to changes analogous to
those which take place before the y of cl. 4 at 272, and the y of
Passive verbs at 465; and not unfrequently it undergoes changes
similar to those of the Perfect at 373, &c., as follows :—
446. A final ST ¢ is changed to ए € in Par., but remains unchanged in Atm.,
as before the ऽ of the 2nd Future terminations; thus, दा cl. 3, ‘to give,’ makes
देयासम् &c. for Par., but दासीय &c. for Atm.; पा ‘to drink’ makes पेयासम् &e.
a. But FIT ‘to become old’ makes जीयासम् &c., and eftgr “to be poor’ drops
its final even in Parasmai (afcaraa, द्रिद्विषीय, &c.) Compare 390. ९.
447. Final $i and Ju are lengthened in Par., as before the y of Passives, and
gunated in Atm., as before the s of the 2nd Future; thus, चि ‘to gather’ makes
चीयासम् &९.; sala &c.; and ह् “to sacrifice’ makes हयान् &९.; रोषोय &e.
a. When ड् ‘to go’ is preceded by a preposition, it is not lengthened (इयासम्
&c.; otherwise ई्यासम्).
2. दीधी and वेवी drop their finals as at 390. ० (दीधिषीय & ०.)
448. Final ¥ ri is changed to ft ri in Parasmai, but retained in Atmane; thus,
६1 ‘to do’ makes क्रियासम् &c., and कृषीय &९, After a double consonant ri is
gunated in Parasmai, as well as before inserted i; thus, स्त “to spread’ makes
स्तयीसम् ९८. स्तृपीय &., ० स्तरिषीय &.
a. It is also gunated in ¥ ri, ‘to go,’ and जागृ ‘to awake’ (WaTaR, जागयेोसम्, &c.)
४. वुं “to cover,’ ‘to choose,’ makes त्रिपासम् or वूयौसम्, वृषोय or चरिषीयणः वूर्षीय
VERBS.—PRECATIVE, FORMATION OF STEM. | 195
449. Final चु. 7८ is changed to ईर् # in both voices, but is gunated before
inserted 2 in Atmane; thus, Wcl. 1, to cross,’ makes तीयोसम् &c., ATTA &o., or
तरिषीय &०., or ATTATA &८
a. One root, Tel. 10, ‘ to fill,’ makes qaraq &c. Compare 448. a.
450. Of roots in ए ९, धे ‘to drink’ makes धेयासम् ९८. (which is also the Precative
of UT ‘to hold’); दे ‘to protect,’ TATRA.
a. But दे “to call’? makes garam &c., and RENT &०.; व्ये ‘to cover’ makes
बीयासम् &c., and व्यासीय &०. ; and वें ‘to weave’ makes HATAA &९., and वासीय &e.
Compare 465. ५.
451. Final रे ai and स्रो ० are often treated like final d at 446; thus गे ‘to sing”
makes गेयासम् &e.3 rf to waste’ and सो ‘to destroy’ make सेयासम्; दो ‘to cut,’
like ST to give 8० दे to protect,’ makes देयासम् But sometimes they are changed
to d; thus, @ ‘to preserve’ makes @TATH &c.; द ‘to purify’ makes दायासम् ध्यै
to think’ either ध्यायासम् or ध्ययासम् ग to be weary’ either गुयासम् or गरुयासम्
452. As already stated, if a root end in a consonant, there is no change in
Parasmai, except the usual changes before y; moreover, unlike the 2nd Future,
there is no Guna in Atmane, unless the roct takei; the other changes in Atmane
are similar to those applicable before the s of the 2nd Future terminations (390. 0);
thus, दुह् “to milk’ makes दुद्यासम् &०., and धुरीय &e., by 306.4; दिप्" hate’
makes द्विष्यासम् &९., and frata &e., by 302; and वुभ् to know’ makes वुध्यासम्
&९., and बोधिषीय &c. See 443.
a. Roots of the 10th class, however, retain Guna in Par., as well as in Atm.,
rejecting the conjugational aya in Par. only ; see under Causals (495).
453. According to the usual changes in cl. 4 and in Passives, roots ending in a
double consonant, of which the first member is a nasal, generally reject the nasal ;
thus, भच bhanj, cl. 7, makes bhajydsam, &c. Compare 469.
' a. So again, according to 472, WR ४ to take’ makes in 721. गृद्यासन् &c.; WR “to
ask,’ पृच्छ्पासम् &०.; WHT ‘to fry,’ भूजञ्ज्यासम् (632); AWA" to cut,’ वृश्चयासम् (636) ;
व्यध् ‘to pierce,’ विध्यासम् ; व्यच् “to deceive,’ विच्यासम् ; WTA ‘to teach,’ शिष्पासम्
&c. In the Atmane they are regular.
b. So again, इ ¢ and Jw before r and v are lengthened ; thus, कुर् ‘to sound’
makes कूयौसम्; and दिव् ‘to play,’ दीव्यासम्. Compare 466.
454. वच् ` to speak,’ वट् “to say,’ वप् ‘to sow,’ ATI ‘to wish,’ वस् “to dwell,’ वह्
‘to carry,’ and @ ‘to sleep,’ substitute Ju for व va in Par., and यज् ' to sacrifice’
substitutes ifor ya; thus, SUTAA, सुप्पासम्, इज्यासम्, &c.; cf. 471. In the Atmane
they are regular; as, Tat from वहू; यदीय from यन्.
a, जन्, खन्, and सन् conform to 470; thus, जन्यासम् or जायासम् &e. 3 cf. 424. €
Observe—In addition to these rules, the other special changes
which take place before the s of the 2nd Future terminations,
noted at 390 and 390. a-o, will apply to the Atmane of the Preca~
tive; thus, कुणः कू at 390 makes कुषीय or कुविषीय; wat at 390. y.
५९६2
196 VERBS.— INFINITIVE. FORMATION OF STEM.
makes waty or भय; कम् at 390. ¢. makes कामयिषीय or कमिषीय ; and
गुप् पथ be गुप्पासम् or गोपाय्यासम् even in Parasmai.
Conditional.
Terminations of Conditional repeated from 246.
PaRAsmal. ATMANE.
syam sydva sydma sye sydvahi — sydmahi
syas syatam syata syathds syethém syadhvam
syat syatdm syan syata syetdm syanta
458. Observe, that this tense bears the same relation to the 2nd Future that the
Imperfect does to the Present. In its form it is half an Imperfect, half a 2nd
Future. It resembles the Imperfect in prefixing the augment a to the stem
(see 251), and in the latter part of its terminations: it resembles the 2nd Future
in the first part of its terminations in gunating the radical vowel, in inserting
i in exactly those roots in which the Future inserts i, and in the other changes
of the stem.
456. The Conditional is most easily formed from the 2nd Future
(388-415) by prefixing the augment a and changing sydmi (shydmi)
into syam (shyam); e.g. karishydmi, akarishyam.
457- Thus, बुध् cl. 1, ‘to know,’ makes अबोधिष्यन् ९८. ३ दह् “to milk’ makes
TEAR &c. (see 414 and 306. a); द्विष् ‘to hate,’ अद्वेषट्यम् &c. (see 412); गुहू “to
conceal,’ अगूहिष्यम् or watery (415. m); मनन् to be immersed,’ सअमंश्यम् (390. k).
a, The augment will be prefixed to roots beginning with vowels according to the
rules given at 251; thus, ऊगौ “to cover’ makes आगौविष्यम् or गौ विष्यम्, ef. 390. ९.
8. इ ‘to go,’ with सधि prefixed (meaning ‘to read’), may optionally form its
Conditional from the root IT (अथ्येष्ये or MANTA, see 421. ९).
Infinitive.
458. The termination of the Infinitive 18 तुम् tum (=the tum of the
Latin Supine). It is used as a verbal noun with the force of
the accusative or dative case.
Obs.—The suffix tum is probably the accusative of the suffix tu (see 82. VIII),
of which other cases are used as Infinitives in the Veda.
459. Rule for forming the stem in verbs of the ten classes.
The stem of the Infinitive is identical with the stem of the First
Future, and where one inserts इ i, the other does also; thus, dudh,
cl. 1, ‘to know,’ makes बोधितुम् bodhitum ; fer kship, cl. 6, ‘to throw,
makes War ksheptum. Moreover, all the rules for the change of the
root before the ¢ of the Future terminations apply equally before the
PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 197
t of the Infinitive. Hence, by substituting wm for the final d of the
3rd pers. sing. of the 1st Future, the Infinitive is at once obtained.
Thus, शक्ता, WHA; Wet, WEA; सोढा, सोदुम् ; Baraat, कययितुम्. So also, FF
makes दोग्धुम् ; |. FSA or FIBA or FET; कुच्, कु चितम्. See 388-415.
a. In the Veda, Infinitives are also formed by the suffixes तवे, तवे, me, स्ये, से,
से, ध्ये १ म्, रः रे, अस्, which are really cases of verbal nouns (see 867. a. 6).
४. The following examples will shew how remarkably the Sanskrit Infinitive
answers to the Latin Supine. 8. स्याहुम् “to stand,’ L. statum; S. दातुम् ‘to give,’
L. datum ; 8. पातुम् to drink,’ L. potum; S. तुम् ‘to go,’ L. itum; 8. स्तम् ‘to
strew,’ L. stratum; S. WHA “to anoint,’ L. unctum; S. जनितुम् “to beget,’
L. genitum; 8. स्वनितुम् ‘to sound,’ L. sonitum; S. स्तम् “to go,’ L. serptum ;
Ss. वभितुम् “to vomit,’ L. vomitum.
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
460. Having explained the formation of the verbal stem in the ten
classes of Primitive verbs, we come next to the four kinds of Deriva-
tive verbs, viz. Passives, Causals, Desideratives, and Frequentatives.
PASSIVE VERBS.
461. Every root in every one of the ten classes may take a Passive
form, conjugated as an Atmane-pada verb of cl. 4, the only difference
being in the accent, which in Passives falls on the inserted ya, whereas
in the Atmane of Primitive verbs of cl. 4, it falls on the radical
syllable.
a. It has already been remarked, that the Passive may be regarded as a distinct
derivative from the root, formed on one invariable principle, without any necessary
community with the conjugational structure of the Active verb. Thus the root
bhid, cl. 7, ‘to divide,’ makes bhinatti or bhintte, “he divides ;’ dvish, cl: 2, ‘to
hate,’ makes dveshti or dvishte, ‘he hates;’? but the Passive of both is formed
according to one invariable rule, by the simple insertion of ya, without reference
to the conjugational form of the Active; thus, bhidyate, “he is divided ;? dvishyate,
“he is hated.’ See 243. a.
b. In fact, a Passive verb is really nothing but a root conjugated according to
the rule for cl. 4 restricted to the Atmane-pada: and to say that every root may
take a Passive form, is to say that roots of classes 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10
may all belong to cl. 4, when they receive a Passive sense: so that if a root be
already of cl. 4, its Passive is frequently identical in form with its own Atmane-
pada (the only difference being in the accent).
c. It might even be suspected, that the occasional assumption of an Intransitive
signification and a Parasmai-pada inflexion by a Passive verb, was the cause which
gave rise to a 4th class of Primitive verbs as distinct from the Passive. Instances
198 PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
are certainly found of Passive verbs taking Parasmai-pada terminations, and some.
Passive verbs (e. g. jdyate, “he is born,’ fr. rt. jan ; piryate, ‘he is filled,’ fr. pré;
and tapyate, ‘he is heated,’ fr. tap) are regarded by native grammarians as Atmane
verbs of cl. 4*. Again, many roots appear in class 4 as Intransitive verbs, which
also appear in some one of the other nine as Transitive. For example, इषु, “to
join,’ when used in a Transitive sense, is conjugated either in cl. 7, or in the
Causal; when in an Intransitive, in cl. 4. So also, push, ‘to nourish;’ kshubh,
"10 agitate ;? klis, ‘to vex;’ sidk, ‘to accomplish t.’
क. There are said to be three kinds of Passive verbs.
I. The Passive, properly so called (karman); as, from तुट्, तुद्यते “he is struck ’
(i.e. ‘by another’), where the verb implies that the person or thing spoken of
suffers some action from another person or thing; e.g. Mea: पच्यते मया "rice is
cooked by me.’
II. An Impersonal Passive (bhdva), generally formed from an Intransitive verb,
and only occurring in the 3rd singular; गम्यते it is gone ;’ नृत्यते “it is danced ;”
पच्यते “it is cooked’ or ‘cooking goes on,’ where the verb itself implies neither person
nor thing as either acting or suffering, but simply expresses a state or condition.
III. A Reflexive Passive (karma-kartri, ‘object-agent’ or ‘ object-containing-
agent’), where there is no object as distinct from the subject of the verb, or, in
other words, where the subject is both agent and object, as in मोदनः पच्यते ‘rice
is cooked ° स जायते ‘he is born,’ &c, In these latter, if a vowel immediately
precedes the characteristic y, the accent may fall on the radical syllable, as in cl. 4.
They may also, in some cases, make use of the Atmane-pada of the Active, and
drop the y altogether; thus to express “he is adorned by himself,’ it would be
right to use zat “he adorns himself.’
Obs.—According to Panini the Passive verb is merely an Atmane verb with the
Vikarana yak in the four tenses, and karman merely expresses one idea of the
Passive. The object is expressed by the termination of the Passive in such a case
as ‘the house is built by me,’ where the object of the agent me, viz. house, is
expressed by the terminations of the Passive. But no agent might be mentioned,
as simply ‘the house is built,” in which case it would be a bhdva, not a karman.
462. Passive verbs take the regular Atmane-pada terminations at
246, making use of the substitutions required in cl, 4.
In the Aorist they take either the A or B terminations of form I at 418, according
as the root may admit the inserted इ ह or not; but they require that in 3rd sing.
of both forms the termination be इ i in place of sta and ishta (see 475).
* The Passive not unfrequently takes the terminations of the Parasmai-pada in
Epic poetry ; e.g. chidyet for chidyeta, ‘it may be cut;’ mokshyasi for mokshyase,
‘thou shalt be liberated ;? adrigyat, “he was seen.’
t The forms given for the Aorists of such verbs as pad, ‘to go,’ budh, ‘to
know’ (which are said to be Atmane verbs of cl. 4), could only helong to Passive
verbs. The forms given by Westergaard are, apddi, ubodhi. See 475.
PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 199
Special Tenses
463. Rule for the formation of the stem in the four Special tenses,
Atmane-pada, of roots of the first nine classes
Affix य ya*—lengthened to at yd before initial m and v—to the
root, the vowel of which is not gunated, and often remains unchanged
(Compare the rule for cl. 4 at 249 and 272.)
464. Thus, from ‘cl. 1, "10 be,’ comes the stem WA bhiya (Pres. bhitya+i=ya
0/2 +-5८ = भू यस, &c.; [फर abhiya-+i= MIU, &c.; Pot. bhiya+ ya= Ya, &c.;
Impv. bhiya+ai=W4, &c.); from तुह् cl. 6, ‘to strike,’ comes tudya (Pres. tudya
+i=7a, &c.) \
465. The root, however, often undergoes changes, which are generally analogous
‘to those of cl. 4 and the Precative Parasmai-pada (see 275 and 445); but a final ¢
is not changed to ९ as in the Precative
Six roots in Td, and one or two in ह e, रे ai, and स्मो o, change their final
vowels to ई ६; thus, दा ‘to give, दे to protect,’ and दो ‘to cut,’ make Pres दीये
दीयसे, दीयते, &०. So also, धा "10 place’ (3rd sing. धीयते) ; EAT to stand,’ मा ‘to
measure,’ QT to drink,’ and @T ‘to quit ;’ धृ “to drink’ (3rd sing भधीयते, &e )
गे ‘to sing’ (गीयते); सो ‘to destroy (सीयते)
Obs. 7. दा cl. 2, ‘to bind,’ makes दायते, as it is not a 9¢ and does not come
under Pan. v1. 4, 66.
Obs. 2. हा ‘to go’ (ohdm) makes hdyate, though हा ‘to quit’ (ohdk) makes htyate.
a. But other roots in "AT ¢ remain unchanged; and most others in ai and ० are
changed to ¢; thus, ख्या ‘to tell’ makes व sing. ख्यायते ; and ज्ञा ‘to know,’
ज्ञायते ; पा ‘to protect,’ पायते; W ‘to meditate,’ ध्यायत; शो ‘to sharpen,’ yaa.
8. दर्दर, दीधी, and वेवी drop their final vowels as at 390. ८ (efegqa, दीष्यते,
&c.); and ज्या ‘to become old’ makes 1. जीयते. Ce. 446. a.
८. z ‘to call,’ वे “to weave,’ a “to cover,’ make their stems इयः अय, and ata
(grd sing. हूयते). Compare 450. a.
466. Final इ 2 or Ju are lengthened, as also a medial i or ४ before v or r; thus,
from जि, इ, दिव्, FL, come जीय, हूय, दीव्य, RF. See 447 and 453. ¢
a. But fea ‘to swell’ makes 3rd sing शूयते; and शी ‘to lie down,’ Wat
467. Final YJ rt becomes रि ri, but if preceded by a double consonant is gunated ;
thus, कुं makes 3. क्रियते ; वृ? faut ; but स्मः स्मयते. Ce. 448.
a. The roots क्रु (3rd sing. अयते) and जागृ are also gunated. Cf. 448. a.
468. Final च्छु. {४ becomes at & ; thus, कृ “to scatter’ makes 3. कीति ; but J‘ to
fill,’ पू येते See 449 and 449. a.
* This ya is probably derived from yd, ‘to go,’ just as the Causal aya is derived
from i, ‘to go.’ It is certain that in Bengali and Hindi the Passive is formed
with the root yd. Cf. Latin amatum iri, &c. See 481.
200 PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
469. Roots ending in a double consonant, of which the first is a nasal, usually
reject the nasal; as, from FAL, WAY, सन्न् come the stems वेध्य, &c. (TM, &c.)
a, The roots at 390. J. carry their peculiarities into the Passive (कम्यते or काम्यते,
मुष्यते or गोपाय्यते, विच्छयते or विच्छाय्यते, Wat or Wat).
470. जन् ‘to produce, खन् ‘to dig,’ तन् ‘to stretch,’ सन् ‘to give,’ optionally
reject the final nasal, and lengthen the preceding a; thus, जायते or नन्यते, &e.
471. वच् ‘to speak,’ वद् “to say,’ वप् ‘to sow,’ TH ‘to wish,’ TA ‘to dwell,’ वह्
“to bear,’ ‘to sleep,’ यन् “to sacrifice,’ change the semivowels 4, यं into their
corresponding vowels and accordingly make their stems JY, उद्य, IH, TF,
उष्य, उद्य, YA, इज्य respectively, (उच्यते, &८.)
Obs.—This change of a semivowel into its corresponding vowel is technically
called Samprasdrana.
472. Similarly, 7 “to take,’ WS “to ask,’ Ut “to fry,’ व्यच् ' to deceive,’ व्यध् ‘to
pierce,’ A" ‘to cut,’ make their stems JA, aM, भूज्ज्यः विच्य, विध्य, वृष्य respec-
tively, (गृद्यते, &c.)
a, FR ‘to reason’ shortens its vowel after prepositions (उद्यते; otherwise wea)
४. अज् forms its Passive from वीः घस् from खद्; अस् from YX; A from वन्;
and “Qj from ख्या.
५. MA “to rule’ makes its Passive stem frre
General Tenses—Perfect of Passives.
473. The stem of this tense in the Passive verb is identical with that of all
Primitive verbs, in all ten classes. The stems, therefore, as formed at 364-384,
will serve equally well for the Perfect of the Passive, provided only that they
be restricted to the Atmane-pada inflexion; thus, Tw, पेचे, &e.
a. When the Periphrastic Perfect has to be employed (see 385) the auxiliaries
अस and 4 may be used in the Atmane, as well as कु, Compare 385. 6.
First and Second Future of Passives.
474. In these and the remaining tenses no variation generally occurs from the
stems of the same tenses in the Primitive, Atmane, unless the root end in a vowel.
In that case the insertion of $i may take place in the Passive, although prohibited
in the Primitive, provided the final vowel of the root be first vriddhied ; thus, from
चि, cl. 5, ‘to gather,’ may come the stem of the 1st and 2nd Fut. Pass. édys
(ddyitdhe &c., édyishye &c.), although the stem of the same tenses in the Primitive
is de (detdhe &c., ceshye &c.) Similarly, from ह् hu and kri may come Advi and
kdri (hdvitdhe, kdritdhe), although the stems in the Primitive are ho and kar.
a, In like manner इ £ may be inserted when the root ends in long "td, or in ए ९,
रे, Wo, changeable to जा द provided that, instead of Vriddhi (which is impossible),
y be interposed between the final दं and inserted i; thus, from दा dd, ‘to give,’ may
come the stem of the Fut. Pass. ddyi (ddyitdhe &c.), although the stem of the same
tenses in the Primitive is dd (ddtdhe &c.); from = hve, ‘to call,’ may come hudyi
PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 201
(द्ायिताहे &c.), although the stem in the Primitive is hud. But in all these cases
the stem of the Primitive may be taken for that of the Passive, so that éetdhe or
édyitdéhe may equally stand for the 1st Fut. Pass. ; and similarly with the others.
8. In the case of roots ending in consonants, the stem of the two Futures in the
Passive will be identical with that of the same tenses in the Primitive verb, the in-
flexion being that of the Atmane. FH ‘to see,” however, in the Passive, may be
दशिता, दशिष्ये, as well as were क द्रष्य; and rc to kill’ may be चानिताहे, घानिष्ये,
as well as इहन्ताहे, इनिष्ये; and ग्रह “to take’ may be ग्राहितारे, ग्राहिषे, as well as
Terns, ग्रहीष्ये.
c. In verbs of cl. 10 and Causals, deviation from the Atmane form of the Primi-
tive may take place in these and the succeeding tenses. See 496.
Aorist of Passives.
475. In this tense, also, variation from the Primitive may occur when the root
ends in a vowel. For in that case the insertion of इ ह may take place, although
forbidden in the Primitive verb, provided the final of the root be vriddhied ; thus,
from चि ¢i may come the stem of the Aor. Pass. addyi (addyishi &c., 427), although
the stem in the Atmane of the Primitive is ade (८८९80 &c., 420). So also, from
इ hu and कु kri may come akdvi and akdri (ahdvishi, akdrishi, 427), although the
stems in the Atmane of the Primitive are aho and akri (ahoshi, akrishi, 420). Again,
2 may be inserted when the root ends in long सा 4, or in ए ९, रे ai, रो ०, changeable
.to स्रा d, provided that y be interposed between final ¢ and insertedi; thus, from ठू
“to give,’ दे “to protect,’ दे “to purify,’ दो ‘to cut,’ may come addyi (addyishi &c.),
although the stems in the Atmane of the Primitives are different (as adisht &c.)
But in all these cases it is permitted to take the stem of the Primitive for that of
the Passive (so that the Passive of € may be either addyishi or adeshi), except in the
3rd pers. sing., where the terminations ishta and sta being rejected, the stem, as
formed by Vriddhi and the inserted i, must stand alone; thus, addyi, “it was
gathered ;’ ahdvi, “it was sacrificed ;’ akdri, ‘it was done;’ addyi, “it was given,’
^ protected,’ ‘purified,’ ‘cut.’
a. Sometimes the usual form of the Aorist Atmane is employed throughout (see
461.111). This is the case whenever the sense is that of a Reflexive Passive, not of
the real Passive; thus, SAT" to tell’ in the grd sing. Aor. Pass. is अख्यायि, but in
the sense of a Reflexive Passive SEQH; चि ‘to resort to” makes 1st sing. Aor. Pass.
सश्रयिषि, but Reflexive अशिष्ये; and कम् “to love’ makes grd sing. Aor, Pass.
कमि or अकामि, but Reflexive VARA.
b. If the root end in a consonant, the stem of the Aorist Passive will always be
identical with that of the Atmane of the Primitive, except in the ऽत sing., where,
ङ् i being substituted for the terminations ishta and sta of form I at 418, generally
requires before it the lengthening of a medial ‘a (if not already long by position),
and the Guna of any other short medial vowel*, Hence, from ¢an, “to stretch,’
* A medial vowel, long by nature ‘or position, remains unchanged (by 28), and
in one or two cases even a short vowel; as, asami for asdmi.
pd
202 PASSIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEN.
1st, 2nd, and 3rd sing. atanishi, atanishthds, aténi ; from kship, ‘to throw,’ akshipsi,
akshipthds, akshepi; from vid, ‘to know,’ avedishi, avedishthds, avedi, &c
The lengthening of a medial a, however, is by no means universal; and there
are other exceptions in the 3rd sing., as follows;
Nearly all roots ending in am forbid the lengthening of the vowel in the grd sing.;
thus, सक्रमि from क्रम् ‘to walk ;’ सक्षम from WA ‘to bear; MA from WA ‘to
be calm’ (but in the sense of ‘to observe,’ WYIfA)
d. Similarly, अवधि from बध् and अजनि from जन्. The former may optionally
substitute अघानि from इन्.
e. भृज् and गुहू lengthen their vowels (खमाज, खगहि)
Ff. The roots at 390. 2, will have two forms, अकमि or अकामि, Wits or BATT,
सविच्छि or सविच्छायि, &
9. TI ‘to perish,’ जम् ‘to yawn,’ T “to desire,’ insert nasals (ग्न्धं अजम्भ
अरम्भि) Similarly, त्म् ‘to receive,’ when it has a preposition (e.g प्राल्छम्मि),
and optionally when it has none (सलम्भिणः अलाभि, Pan. vir. 1, 69)
h, WA ‘to break’ may drop its nasal, in which case the medial a is lengthened
(अभन्ि or खभानि).
a. 3g “to clothe’ may either retain the e or change it to ¢ or a (wefs or ufefs
or अहीडि)
2. ङ "0 go’ substitutes गा, and optionally does so when adhi is prefixed in the
sense of ‘to read’ (सभ्यगायि or Wearfa).
‰ चृत् “to blame’ makes ससार्तीयि or सर्ति.
Precative (or Benedictive) and Conditional of Passives.
476. In these tenses the same variation is permitted in the case of roots ending
in vowels as in the Aorist; that is, the insertion of इ ६ is allowed, provided that,
before it, Vriddhi take place in a final vowel capable of such a change, and y be
interposed after final ¢; thus, from चि क may come the stems ddyi and addyi (édyishtya,
addyishye) ; from हु hu, hdvi and ahdvi ; from & ki, kdri and akdri ; from दा dd,
ddyi and addyi. But deshtya, adeshye, hoshtya, ahoshye, &c., the forms belonging
to the Atmane of the Primitive verb, are equally admissible in the Passive.
Passive Infinitive.
477. There is no Passive Infinitive in Sanskrit distinct in form from the Active.
The suffix tum, however, is capable of a Passive sense, when joined with certain
verbs, especially with the Passive of WR sak, ‘to be able.’ It is also used passively,
in connection with the Participles drabdha, niripita, yukta, &c. See Syntax, 869.
Passive verbs from roots of the 1010 class.
478. In forming ४ Passive verb from roots of cl. 10, although the conjugational
सय is rejected in the first four tenses, yet the other conjugational changes of the
root are retained before the suffix ya; thus, from चुर् cl. 10, ‘to steal,’ comes the
CAUSAL VERBS,—FORMATION OF STEM. 203
stem dcorya (चोयेते) In the Perfect चय is retained (see 473. a), and in the other
General tenses the stem may deviate from the Atmane form of the Primitive by
the optional rejection or assumption of सय, especially in the Aorist. See Causal
Passives at 496.
CAUSAL VERBS.
479. Every root in every one of the ten classes may take a Causal
form, which is conjugated as a verb of the roth class; and which is
not only employed to give a Causal sense to a Primitive verb, but
also a Transitive sense to an Intransitive verb; see 289.
Thus, the Primitive verb bodhati, ‘he knows’ (from root budh, cl. 1), becomes in
the Causal बोधयति bodhayati, ‘he causes to know,’ ‘he informs ;’ and the Intransi-
tive verb kshubhyati, " 116 shakes,’ ‘is shaken’ (from kshubh, cl. 4), 0९०००९8 पकलोभयति
“he shakes’ (transitively).
a. This form may sometimes imply other analogous senses.
Thus, hérayati, ‘he allows to take ;’ ndgayati, “he suffers to perish ;’ abhisheda-
yati, “he permits himself to be inaugurated ;? kshamayati, “he asks to be forgiven ;’
सभिषेचय आत्मानम् “allow yourself to be inaugurated.’
Obs.—To say that every root may take a Causal form, is equivalent to saying
that roots of the first nine classes may all belong to the roth, when they take a
Causal sense; and that if a root be originally of the roth class, no distinct form
for its Causal is necessary, the Primitive verb and the Causal being in that case
identical (see 289). Possibly the occasional employment of a Causal verb in a
Transitive, rather than a Causal sense, was the reason for creating a 1oth class of
Primitive verbs. Certainly the subject of conjugation would be simplified if the
addition of aya to the root were considered in all cases as the mark of a Causal
verb; especially as aya is not the sign of a separate conjugation, in the way of any
other conjugational Vikarana (see 250.5); for it is retained in most of the other
tenses of the verb, not only in the first four, just as the Desiderative zsh is retained.
480. As to the terminations of Causal verbs, they are the same as
those of the scheme at 246; and the same substitutions are required
in the first four tenses as in classes 1, 4, 6, and Io.
Special Tenses.
481. General rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses
of roots of the ten classes.
If a root end in a vowel, vriddhi that vowel; if in a consonant,
gunate the radical vowel before ai/ the terminations, and affix खय aya*
* This may be derived from root ¥ i, “to go,’ just as the Passive ya is supposed
to be derived from root yd. See 463, note *.
pda
204 CAUSAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
(changeable to ayd before initial m and v, but not before simple m)
to the root so vriddhied or gunated.
482. Thus, from At ‘to lead’ comes the stem नायय by 37 (Pres. ndyayé-+-mi =
नाययामि, १६/०० + ऽ नाययसि &c.; Impf. andyaya+m=AATTAA &c.; Pot.
ndyaya--iyam =a &e.; Impv. ndyaya+éni=araatta &c. Atm. Pres.
१८००-5 नायये &c. In Epic poetry a doubtful form नापयामि is found). Simi-
larly, from श्यी ‘to lie down’ comes ज्ञायय sdyaya (ज्ञाययामि &c.); from भू bhi, ‘to
be,’ comes भावय bhdvaya (भावयामि &c.); and from कृ “to do’ and कृ “to scatter’
the stem कारय kdraya.
But from Tt to know’ comes the gunated बोधय bodhaya (बोधयामि) ; and from
सुप् 0. 1, ‘to creep,’ the gunated सपेय sarpaya.
Obs.— FT‘ to celebrate,’ and other verbs of the roth class, will take the changes
already explained at 285-289.
483. Roots ending in सा d, or in Te, 2 ai, Bo, changeable to सा d, cannot be
vriddhied, but frequently insert Wp between the root and the suffix aya; thus, दा
“to give,’ दे “to love,’ and दौ ‘to cut,’ all make दापयामि dépaydmi, &c.; भे ‘to drink,’
धापयामि dhdpaydmi, &e, ; ‘to sing,’ गापयामि gdpaydmi, &c. See 484.
a. So also other roots in ¢ insert p, except पा cl. 1, “to drink,’ which inserts य् y
(पाययामि &c.); and पा cl. 2, ‘to preserve,” which inserts ल् 7 (पालयामि &c.); and
A cl. 2, in the sense of ‘to agitate,’ which inserts ज (वाजयामि &०.)
b. So also other roots in ai insert p, but most others in e and ० insert y; thus,
= “to call’? makes RT@aTfA &c. Similarly, वे ‘to weave,’ व्ये ‘to put on.’ Wt ‘to
sharpen’ makes WTaatfA &c. Similarly, Bi ‘to cut,’ सो ‘to destroy.”
484. ज्ञा ‘to know,’ श्रा or B ‘to stew,’ खा ‘to bathe,’ and गे “to languish,’ may
optionally shorten the d, the last two only when not joined with prepositions ;
17४5, ज्ञापयामि &., ० ज्ञपयामि &०.; गरापयामि &c., or गुपयामि &c. (but with परि
only, परिगुपयामि). a ‘to waste away’ makes only Wuatfa.
485. Some roots in 4, ¢ ri, also insert p, after changing the final vowel to ¢;
thus, जि ‘to conquer’ makes जापयामि &c. Similarly, मि ‘to throw,’ AT ‘to
perish,’ क्री ‘to buy’ (मापयाभि, क्रापयामि, &.)
a. fat ‘to smile’ makes स्मा यामि &c., and स्मापये &०.
b. चि ‘to collect’ has four forms; 1, चापयामि &०., 2. चपयामि &c., 3. चाययाभि
&e., 4. चवययाभि &.
९. भी ल्. 3, ‘to fear,’ has three forms; 1. भाययाभि &e., 2. भाषये &c., Atm. only,
3. भीषये &c., Atm. only.
छ. इ cl. 2, ‘to go,” makes सापयामि &., especially with the preposition खि
‘over,’ अध्यापयामि ‘I cause to go over,’ ‘I teach.’
e. Three roots insert n; tcl. 4, ‘to embrace,’ ‘to adhere,’ making (with prep.
fa in the sense of ‘to dissolve’) -त्छी नयामि &c., as well as -त्ापयामि, -त्ाययाभि,
and -लाल् यामि &९. ; in some senses, however, त्ापयामि only can be used: प्री ल्. 9
‘to please,’ makes प्रीरायामि (४8० प्राययाभि); and Ycl. 5 and 9, ‘to shake,’ धूनयामि.
486. #¥ cl. 3, ‘to be ashamed,’ रौ ‘to flow,’ At ‘to choose,’ and ¥ el. 1, ‘to go,”
insert p after gunation; thus, हेपयामि &०., सपेयामि &०.
CAUSAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 205
४. दीधी and वेवी and ZfTET (see 39०. c) drop their finals (दीधयामि, वेवयामि,
द्स्द्रियामि, &c.)
8. AVY ‘to awake,’ स्मृ in the sense of ‘to long for,’ F cl. 4, “to grow old,’ @ in the
sense of ‘to fear, नृ to lead,’ take Guna (जागस्यामि). But द् to tear,’ दारयामि
०. गू “to swallow’ makes गास्यामि or गालयानि.
487. Roots ending in single consonants, enclosing a medial ® a, generally
lengthen the a; thus, पच् 0.7, “to cook,’ makes पाचयामि &०. There are, however,
many exceptions; thus, ज्वर् ‘to be sick,’ त्वर् ‘to hasten,’ &c., do not lengthen
the vowel. In अबत्ट् ‘to blaze,’ and some others, the lengthening is optional.
a. Roots in ऋ generally do not lengthen the ¢ ; thus, गम् cl. 1, to go,” makes
गमयामि &०.; क्तम् “to be weary,’ कमयामि &c. Some, however, optionally do so;
as, नम् ‘to bend,’ &c. One or two always lengthen the a; as, कम् ‘to love’ makes
कामयामि.
The roots TY, जभ्, रभ्, and eA (see 475.9) insert nasals (रन्धयानि &.)
488. Other anomalies रह् to grow’ makes रोदयामि or रोपयामि HI or x
to sound,’ क्वो पयामि ; FE‘ to be corrupt,’ हूषयामि ; हन् * to kill” घातयामि; शट्
to fall,’ ‘to perish,’ ज्ञातयामि; स्फुर् ‘to quiver,” स्फारयामि or स्फोर्यामि; स्फाय्
to increase,’ स्फावयामि WTT to shake’ as the earth छमापयामि &e. ; ज् to
rub,” ATHATE (390. 7) ; गुह “to conceal,’ गृहयामि (390. m).
a. The roots गुप्? विक्, YI, पण्, पन्, Ye, at 390. ¢ will have two forms
(गोपयामि or गोपाययामि &c., see 390. 2)
® सिध् to be finished’ makes its Causal either साधयामि or, with reference to
sacred ४९, सेधयामि WS to fry’ either भ्रज्नयामि or HATA; but the last form
may be from भूज्,
९. aE" to clothe’ makes हिडियामिः THin the sense of ‘to hunt,’ रजयानि.
Obs.—The Causal of verbs of cl. 10 will be identical with the Primitive ; see 289.
The Causals of Causals will also be identical with the Causals themselves.
General Tenses.
489. The changes of the root required to form the stem of the
Special tenses are continued in the General. Moreover, aya is re-
tained in all these tenses, except the Aorist and except the Precative,
Parasmai; but the last a of aya is dropped before the inserted इ 2,
which is invariably assumed in all other General tenses.
Perfect of Causais.
490. This tense must be of the Periphrastic form, as explained at
385; that is, खाम् dm added to the Causal stem is prefixed to the
Perfect of one of the three auxiliary verbs, अस् ‘to be,’ 4 ‘to be,’ or कु
“to do ;” thus, Fy ‘to know’ makes in Causal Perfect बोधयाचकार or
206. CAUSAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
बोधयामास or बोधयास्नभरूव. शम् makes in Caus. Perf. 3rd pl. शमयाच्रभूवुः
‘they extinguished’ (Raghu-v. vii. 45).
First and Second Future of Causals.
491. In these tenses the inserted इ £ is invariably assumed between
the stem, as formed in the Special tenses, and the usual terminatiotis ;
thus, gy makes बोधयितास्मि &c., बोधयिष्यामि &.
Aorist of Causals and verbs of cl. 10.
492. The terminations are those of form II at 435. In the
formation of the stem of this tense, the suffix ay is rejected; but any
other change that may take place in the Special tenses, such as the
insertion of p or y, is preserved. The stem is a reduplicated form
of this change, and to this reduplication the augment ऋ a is prefixed.
Thus, taking the stems bodhay and jdpay (Causal stems of budh, ‘to know,’ and
ji, ‘to conquer’), and rejecting ay, we have bodh and jdp; and from these are
formed the stems of the Aorist abdbudh and कुक (STFA abibudham &c.,
अवृवुधे abtbudhe &c., पजौजपम् ajgjapam & ९.) अजीजपे ९ &c., cf. the Greek
Pluperfect).
493. The rule for this reduplication is as follows:—The initial
consonant of the root, with its vowel, is reduplicated, and the redu-
plicated consonant follows the rules given at 252; but the redupli-
cation of the vowel is peculiar.
Reduplication of the vowel of the initial consonant in the Causal Aorist.
a, Causal stems, after rejecting ay, will generally end in dy, dv, dr, or a consonant
preceded by a, d, e, 0, or ar. The usual reduplicated vowel for all these, except ०,
is §z. But Jw is reduplicated for o, and sometimes also for dv. The rule is, that
either the reduplicated or stem syllable must be long either by nature or position ;
and in general the reduplicated vowel i or u is made long, and, to compensate for
this, the long vowel of the Causal stem shortened, or, if it be Guna, changed to its
corresponding short vowel; thus, the Causal stem ndy (from नीः rejecting ay) makes
the stem of the Aorist antnay (खनीनयम् aninayam &c.); the Causal stem bhav
(from 4%) makes abdbhav (सबीभवम् & ९.) ; the Causal stem kdr (from कृ), adtkar ;
gam (from गम्), ajfgam ; pdé (from प्), apipad; pal (from पा), apipal; ved (from
faz), avévid. But bodh (from JY), abibudh; and sdv (from सु), asishav.
b. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel is only long by position before two conso-
nants, the radical vowel being still made short; as, srdv (from शु) makes asigrav or
asugrav; drdv (from दु) adudrav or adidrav ; WIS, abibhraj (also ababhrdj).
c. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel remains short, whilst the vowel of the
Causal stem, which must be long either by nature or position, remains unchanged;
CAUSAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 207
thus, the Causal stem jév (from जीव्) may make अजिनीव् (also अजीजिव्); 19
aéidint ; kalp, ०८०. In such cases a is generally reduplicated for a or d; as;
laksh makes alalaksh ; ydé, ayaydé; vart (from vrit), avavart, &e.
d. Obs.—If the stem has ar, dr, tr, al (from radical 7i, {४ or Tri), these are either
left, unchanged or ar, dr, ४ may be changed to क्रु ri, and al to % lri; thus, vart
(from वृत्) may make avivrit as well as avavart ; kirt (from कृत्) either adikért or
actkrit, &e. |
e. The following are other examples, some of which are anomalous: from pdy
(Caus. of pd, ‘to drink’), अपीप्यम् &c.; from sthdp (Caus. of sthd, ‘to stand’), प्रि-
ष्पम् &c.; from ghrdp (Caus. of ghrd, ‘to smell’), अनिधिपम् &e., and अनजिष्रपम् &c.;
from adhydp (Caus. of i, “to go,’ with adhi), ध्यजीगपम् &९.३ from ८९50 (Caus. of
éesht, ‘to make effort’), अचचेष्टम् or अचिचेष्टम् ; from hudy (Caus. of hve, ‘to call’),
सगुहावम् or HAAR; from tvar (Caus. of tvar, “to hasten’), सअतत्वरम् ; from stdr
(Caus. of stri or stré, ‘to spread’), SAWTA or सतिस्तरम् ; from dér (Caus. of drt,
“to tear’), खद्द्रम् ; from dyot (Caus, of dyut, ‘to shine’), अदिद्युतम्; from svdy
(Caus. of ॐ, “to swell’), TYNAA or अशिश्चयम् ; from smdr (Caus. of smri, ‘to
remember’), NWT ; from svdp (Caus, of स्वप् ‘to sleep’), TIGA ; from kath
(cl. 10, ‘to tell’), अचकयम् or NATHAA ; from गण् (cl. 10, ‘to count’), सज्ञगणम्
or सजी गणम्; from prath (Caus. of WY ‘to spread’), अपप्रथम्,
Reduplication of an initial vowel in the Causal Aorist.
494. Roots beginning with vowels, and ending with single consonants, form their
Causal Aorists by a peculiar reduplication of the root (after rejecting सय). The
rule is that not only the initial vowel, as in the Perfect at 364. a, but the final
consonant also be reduplicated. In fact, the whole root is doubled, as it would
be if it began with a consonant, and ended with a vowel; the consonant is redu-
plicated according to the rules at 252, but the second vowel is generally ¥ i.
This 2 (which probably results from a weakening of a) takes the place of the stem
vowel, which then becomes the initial of the reduplicated syllable, and combines
with the augment स a, according to 251.4; thus, FR “to infer’ makes the stem of
its Causal Aorist ऊजिह् य; and with च prefixed, आओनिह् (खोनिहम् “I caused to
infer’). So also, 814 cl. 5, ‘to obtain,’ makes सपिपम् ‘1 caused to obtain ;’ ड्
cl. 2, ‘to praise,’ makes रेडिडम् “I caused to praise.’ Cf. Gr. 2nd Aor. nyayay
from oye, and ९५००४ from 2०४४७५५.
a. If a root end in a conjunct consonant, the first member of which is a nasal
or 7, this nasal or r is rejected from the final, but not from the reduplicated letter ;
thus, अहै ‘to be worthy’ makes आनिंहम् “T caused to be worthy,’ ‘I honoured ;’
80 अधे, Causal stem from WA ‘to prosper,’ makes आदिधम् “I caused to prosper ;’
and उन्द् ‘to moisten’ makes सखोन्दिदम् “I caused to moisten.’
6. But when the first member of the compound is any other letter, then the cor-
responding consonant to this first member of the compound is reduplicated by
252. 0; thus, $8 ‘to see’ makes रेचिष्म् aidiksham, ‘1 caused to see ;’? भर् ' to go’
makes सावि्चम् ‘I caused to go.’
208 CAUSAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
९. Roots consisting of a single vowel, form their Causal Aorists from the Causal
stem (after rejecting aya); thus, the root "J ‘to go’ makes its Causal stem arp, ‘to
deliver over ;’ and its Causal Aorist आपिषम् “I caused to deliver.’
d. wat ‘to cover’ makes its Causal Aorist आओगौनुवम् ; अन्ध् cl. 70, “to be blind,”
ान्द्धम् ; and Sf cl. ro, ‘to diminish,’ आ्ओोननम्.
९. When the consonant which follows the initial vowel has another vowel after
it, this vowel must appear in the reduplication; thus, from अवधीर् cl. 10, ‘to des-
pise,’ comes the Aorist आववधीरम्,
Precative (or Benedictive) and Conditional of Causals.
495. The stem of the Causal Precative Atmane, and of the
Causal Conditional in both voices, does not differ from that of the
General tenses ; but the last ¢ of aya is dropped before the inserted
ङ् 2, which is always assumed. In the Precative Parasmai both
aya and 2 are rejected, but any other change of the root is retained ;
thus, बुध् ‘to know’ makes in Caus. Prec. bodhydsam &c., bodha-
yishiya &c.; in Cond., abodhayishyam &c., abodhayishye &c.
Infinitive of Causals.
a, The Infinitive may be most easily formed from the 3rd sing.
ist Future, as explained at 459; thus, from बुध् comes बोधयिता ‘he
will cause to know,’ बोधयितुम् 10 cause to know.’
Passive of Causals.
496. In forming a Passive verb from a Causal stem, the Causal
suffix wa is rejected, but the other Causal changes of the root are
retained before the Passive suffix ya.
Thus, from Caus. stem पातय pdtaya (from पत् ‘to fall’) comes the Pass. पाप्य
pdtya, making Ist sing. Ura ‘Iam made to fall,’ 3rd sing. पात्यते ‘he is made to
fall.’ Similarly, SIT ‘to stand’ makes स्थापयति ‘he causes to stand,’ स्याप्यते ‘he
is caused to stand ;’ and ज्ञा “to know’ makes ज्ञपयति ‘he causes to know,’ and
ज्ञप्यते “he is caused to know,’ ‘he is informed.’
a. In the General tenses, the stem of all the tenses, excepting the
Perfect, may vary from the Atmane form by the optional rejection
of the conjugational wa. But in. the Perfect, the Atmane of the
usual form with dm and the auxiliaries (490, 385) is admitted for
the Passive. In the Aorist, the usual reduplicated form (492) gives
place to the Atmane form which belongs to those verbs of the first
nine classes which assume £,
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM, 209
Thus, from भावय, the Causal stem of YW ‘to be,’ come the Passive Perfect
ATTA or भावयामासे or ATAAGAT ; rst Fut. भावयिता or भाविताहे ; ond Fut,
भावयिष्ये ० भाषिष्ये; Aor. सभावयिषि or सअभाविषि, 5१ sing. खभावि; Prec. भाव-
यिषीय or भाविषीय; Cond. सभावयिप्ये or खभाविषये
४. Similarly, from aug, Causal stem of TY "to know,’ come Passive Perfect
योधयाच्करे &c. “I have been caused to know;’ 1st Fut. बोधयिता or बोधिता &e
I shall be caused to know;’ 2nd Fat. बोधयिष्ये or बोधिष्ये &c.; Aor. अबोधयिषि
or अबोधिषि ‘I have been caused to know,’ 2 WaT or सवोधिष्टास्,
3 अबोधि &e.
९. So also, from YAW, Causal stem of जुम् ‘to cease,’ come the Passive Perfect
शमयाच्वक्रे or शमयामासे &c. I have been caused to cease,’ &c.; 1st Fut. शमयिताहे
or शमितताहे ; 2nd Fut. श॒मयिष्ये or WTA; Aor. Aare or सशमिषि, 3rd sing.
सशमि; Prec waradty &c.: and the radical a may be optionally lengthened ;
thus, 1st Fut. Wafaaté or Wrafaate &c
2. So also, WATT or अक्षापि, 3rd sing. Aor., from Causal of a
Obs.—Even TA, We, Arg, and some other roots which end in a double conso-
nant, may optionally lengthen the medial a; thus, Aor. 3rd sing. सरचिं or सरन्न.
Desiderative of Causals.
497. When Causals and verbs of cl. 10 take a Desiderative form,
(see 498), they retain ay, and are all formed with isha; thus, पातयामि
“I cause to fall’ makes faurafaatfa ‘I desire to cause to fall ;’
स्वापयामि ‘I cause to sleep’ makes सुष्वापयिषामि ‘I desire to cause to
sleep ;’ चुर् cl. 10, ‘to steal,’ makes चुचोरयिषामि ‘I wish to steal.’
a. The Desiderative stem of the Causal of अधौ, “to go over,’ is either सध्यापि-
पयिष or पधिजिगापयिषः; of the Causal of 2 “to call,’ जुहावयिष (as if from हावय);
of the Causal of NT‘ to know,’ Ht (or regularly जिज्ञापयिष or fagufaa) 3 of ‘the,
Causal of शि ‘to swell,’ शुशावयिष (or regularly शिश्चाययिष).
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
498. Every root in the ten classes may take a Desiderative form,
a. Although this form of the root is not often used, in classical composition, in-
its character of a verb, yet nouns and participles derived from the Desiderative stem
are not uncommon (see 80. I, and 82.VII).. Moreover, there are certain Primitive
roots which take a Desiderative form, without yielding a Desiderative sense; and
these, as equivalent to Primitive verbs (amongst which they are generally classed),
may occur in classical Sanskrit; e.g. jugups, ‘to blame,’ from गुप् gup; ¢ikits, ‘to,
ure,’ from कित् titiksh, ` to bear,’ from तिज् ti; सीमास् mimdns, tg reason,
from मन् man ; bibhats, to abhor,’ from बाध् or बध्.
Ee
210 DESIDERATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
499. Desideratives take the terminations at 246, with the substi-
tutions required in classes 1, 4, 6, and 10; and their inflexion,
either in Parasmai or Atmane, is generally determined by the practice
of the Primitive verb.
Thus, root बुध् budh, cl. 1, ‘to know,’ taking both inflexions in the Primitive,
may take both in the Desiderative (bubodhishdmi &c., or bubodhishe &c., “I desire
to know’); and लन् Jabh, ‘to obtain,’ taking only the Atmane in the Primitive,
may take only the Atmane in the Desiderative (lipse &c., “I desire to obtain’).
500. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the root, and gene-
rally, though not invariably, if the Primitive verb inserts z 4 (see
392-415), affix इष् ish or in a few roots ईष् (see 393); if it rejects 3,
then simply स् $, changeable to ष् sh (by 70; see, however, ^), to the
root so reduplicated. The vowel ¢ is then added, as in classes 1, 4,
6, and 10; and, agreeably to the rule in those classes, this a becomes &
before terminations beginning with m and v (but not before simple m)
a. Thus, from fe kship, ‘to throw,’ comes the stem cikshipsa (Gikshipsd-+mi=
चिध्िष्वामि Gikshipsémi & ९.) ‘I desire to throw’); but from fag vid, ‘to know,’
taking inserted 7, comes vividisha (vividishd+mi—fafafearfa vividishdmi &९. In
Atm. the stem is vivitsa).
b. Some roots, however, which reject the inserted in other forms,
assume it in the Desiderative, and vice versa. Some, again, allow an
option ; thus, qq ‘to be’ makes faafa¥ &c. or faqratfa & ८. See the
lists at 392—415.
e. The reduplication of the consonant is in conformity with the rules at 252;
that of the vowel belonging to the initial consonant follows the analogy of Causal
Aorists at 493; that is, the vowel $i is reduplicated for a, 4, i, ¢, ri, ré, Iri, e, or ai;
but the vowel J ४ for ४, #, and o; and also for the a of av or dv-preceded by any
consonant except j, a labial or a semivowel; thus, fr. U4 ‘to cook’ comes Desid
stem pipaksha by 296; fr. याच् “to ask,’ yiydéisha; fr जीव् to live,’ [एद
fr. “FI ` ४० see,” didriksha ; fr सेव् to serve,’ sisevisha ; fr. जै ‘to sing,’ jigdsa ;
fr. NT “to know,’ jijndsa (१८4५०८८४) ; but fr युज् to join’ comes yuyuksha; fr.
षू to purify,’ pupisha; fr. बुध् cl. 4, “to know,’ YR bubhutsa, see 299. a
fr. ATAG, Causal stem of नु ‘to praise,’ nundvayisha; fr. पावय, Causal stem of प्रू
to purify,’ pipdvayisha
d, And if the root begin with 8 vowel the reduplication still follows the analogy
of the same tense at 494; thus, from सज् comes WAYS; and with isha added
afgfgr. Similarly, from we comes arjihisha; from ऊह्, wihisha ; from =u,
tikshisha + from उन्द्, undidisha ; see 494.
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.——-FORMATION OF STEM. 211
Obs.—In reduplication the vowel i takes the place of a, as being lighter; see
252.d. Obs. It is probably the result of a weakening of a
e. In Desiderative stems formed from the Causals of च्छु ५५ fall,’ ¥ “to run,’ J
to go,’ H ‘to leap, शु ` 10 hear,’ @ ‘to distil,’ and @ to flow,’ a or ¢ may be repre-
sented by either % or i; thus, the Causal of च्यु makes चिच्यावयिषणः चुच्यावयिष.
J. Observe—When the inserted s becomes sh by 70, the initial स् of a root will
not be affected by the vowel of the reduplicated syllable; thus, si¢ makes sisiksha,
not sishiksha ; and sev makes sisevisha. Except, however, स्तु? which makes तुषटूष
and except the Desid. of Causals, as सिषेधयिष fr. Caus. of सिध्
501. When a root takes the inserted i or ६ (393), and forms its
Desiderative with isha or isha, then the final र. ré is gunated
Thus to cross’ makes tttarisha or titartsha (also tittrsha, see 502)
a. Moreover, initial and medial é, u, ri are often, but not always,
gunated if followed by a single consonant.
Thus, TH ‘to go’ makes odikhisha ; aa “to wish,’ eshishisha ; दिव् ‘to play,’
didevisha ; नृत् to dance,’ ninartisha: but fag “to know,’ vividisha.
b. An option, as to Guna, is however generally allowed to medial ठ and ४५ thus,
श् ‘to rejoice’ makes either mumodisha or mumudisha ; fart “to become moist’
either &klidisha or ¢ikledisha ; but roots in iv (e.g. siv) are peculiar, see 502. 8,
c. इ ‘to go’ and उ ‘to sound,’ having no consonant, reduplicate
the characteristic letter of the Desiderative with i; thus, ईषिष (used
with the prepositions adhi and prati), so afaq.
502. When a root rejects 2 and forms its Desiderative with
स sa, this sa, if affixed to roots ending in vowels, has the effect of
lengthening a final zi or ४; of changing र e, रे Sto, to BIG;
Bri or Bre to ईर् fr, or after a labial to ST dr.
Thus, from चि comes ८८८ ; from श्नुः SuSrisha ; from कृ, éikirsha; from गे,
` figdsa; from तू titérsha; from प्, pupirsha; from मु? bubhirsha ; from मु? mumirsha.
a. When it is affixed to roots ending in consonants, the radical
vowel generally remains unchanged, but the final consonant combines
with the initial sibilant, in accordance with the rules at 296.
As, from युध् comes yuyutsa (299); from FF comes didhaksha (306. a); from FX,
dudhuksha ; from YA, bubhuksha.
b. A medial long १४ becomes ¢ and final iv becomes yz or is gunated; thus,
from कत् comes dikértayisha ; from सिव्, 550४510 or sisevisha.
c. Many of the special rules for forming the stem in the last five tenses at
390. a-o apply to the Desiderative; thus the roots at 390. a. generally forbid
Guna (éukudsha &c.)
_ d. So FS makes bibhraksha or bibharksha or bibhrajjisha or bibharjisha (390. 9);
मज्जन् and नञ्; mimanksha and ninanksha (390. ¢); नह्? ninatsa (290. 0); aftgt,
Ee2
2192 , —- DESIDERATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
didaridrisha (390. c, but makes also didaridrdsa); कम् cikamisha or Gkdémayisha ;
गुप्, jugopisha or jugopdyisha or jugupsa (390. 2).
503. The following is an alphabetical list of other Desiderative stems, some of
them anomalous: ऋदिटिष fr. HZ ‘to wander ;’ ufgiza fr. AZ “to transgress ;
अरिरिषि fr. AT ‘to go; sa fr. ATT’ to obtain ; at (or regularly अदिधिष) fr
"IY ‘to prosper;’ Sfafaa or ईष्पियिष fr श्य् to envy ;’ FF or ऊणौनविष or
ऊगौनुविष (390. 6) fr. Bt ‘to cover ;’ चिकीष (or regularly चिचीष) fr. चि ‘to col-
lect; जिगांस (or regularly जिगमिष) fr. गम् to go;’ जिगक्िष (or regularly जिगरिषि)
fr. ग् ‘to swallow’ (cf. 375. 0); जिगीष fr. जि ‘to conquer ; जिधत्स fr. धस् ‘to eat’
(used as Desid. of अद्); जिघांस fr. इन् “४० kill;’ जिघीष fr. हि ‘to send;’ Frye
fr. TE ‘to take ;’ YEN fr. दे ‘to call;’ तितांस (or regularly तितनिष) fr. तन् ‘to
stretch faye fr. TE to kill,’ दित्स fr. दा ‘to give, दे to love,’ and a to cut
दिदरिष दू #० respect दिदर्षि or दिद्रीष or दिदीषै fr दृ to tear; दिद्यनिषणग
दिद्योतिष fr द्युत् to shine ; दिधरिष fr. Y to hold ;’ Fay (or regularly दिदेविष) fr
दिव् to play ; धित्स fr. धा (10 place’ and धं ‘to drink Fre or धीष्स (or दिदम्मिष)
fr. TAT “to deceive ;’ fara (or पिपतिष) £. पत् to fall’ and पट् ‘to go; पिपविष
or पुपूष fr. पू ‘to एप्ण फ़; पिपृच्छिष fr. WH ‘to ask;’ विभर्षिणः बुभूषे fr. भु ‘to
bear ;’ मित्स fr. AT ‘to measure,’ fa ‘to throw,’ मी ‘to perish,’ and मे ‘to change ;’
भिमार्जिष or निमृ fr. FA to rub;’ मोक fr. JA (in the sense of “desiring release
from mundane existence,’ otherwise FY); faafas or युयूष fr. J ‘to join;’ fora
fr. TY ‘to accomplish ;’ FUR fr. रम् ‘to take;’ FSW fr. BA ‘to obtain, विवरिष
or विवेष or वुवृषे fr. वुं " to choose ;’ frag fr. AW ‘to cut; Fyre fr. W ‘to be
able;’ शिच्रयिष (or शिच्रीष) fr. fq ‘to have recourse to;’ FATA (or सिसनिष) fr.
सन् ‘to obtain,’ ‘to give;’ सिस्मयिष fr. स्मि ‘to smile;’ सिखरिष (or FAR) fr. |
“to sound ;’ GFE fr. स्वप् “to sleep.’
General Tenses of Desideratives.
504. The Perfect must be of the Periphrastic form as explained at 385; that is,
"ATA dm added to the Desiderative stem, as already formed, with sa, isha, or isha
(500), is prefixed to the Perfect of one of the auxiliaries kri, as, or bhi (see 385) 5
thus, from pipaksha (root pad, to cook’) comes the Perfect pipakshdndcakdra, ‘I
wished to cook ;’ from bubodhisha (root budh, ‘to know’) comes bubodhishdndakdra,
bubodhishdmdsa, bubodhishdmbabhiva, ‘1 wished to know.’
a. In all the remaining tenses it is a universal rule, that inserted i be assumed
after the Desiderative stem, whether formed by sa or isha, except in the Precative
Parasmai; thus, from pa¢ comes 1st Fut. pipakshitdsmi &c.; 2nd Fut. pipakshi-
shydmi &c.; Aor. apipakshisham &c. (form I, B, at 418); Prec. Par. pipakshydsam
&c.; Atm. pipakshishtya &c.; Cond. apipakshishyam &e. So also, taking vividish
(formed with isha from vid, ‘to know’), the 1st Fut. is vividishitdsmi; 2nd Fut.
vividishishydmi; Aor. avividishisham &c. Similarly, from bubodhisha, 1st Fut.
bubodhishitdsmi &c.; 2nd Fut. bubodhishishydmi; Aor. abubodhishisham &c.
^
FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 213
: -b. The Infinitive may be formed regularly from the 1st Future; thus, from
bubodhishitd, ‘he will wish to know,’ comes bubodhishitum, ‘to wish to know.’
Passive of Desideratives.
` 505. Desideratives may take a Passive form by adding ya to the Desiderative
stem after rejecting final a; thus, from bubodhisha comes bubodhishye, ‘I am wished
to know,’ &c, The General tenses will not vary from the Active Atmane-pada
form of Desiderative except in the Aor. 3rd sing., which will be abubodhishi instead
of abubodhishishta.
Causal of Desideratives.
506. Desiderative verbs may take a Causal form; thus, dudyshdmi, “I desire to
play’ (from div), makes in Caus. dudydshaydmi, ‘I cause to desire to play,’ &c,
FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
507. Most roots may take a Frequentative form, except poly-
syllabic roots, and except those of cl. 10, and except certain roots
beginning with vowels.
०४९ जगौ “to cover,’ however, has forms ऊर्णोनूय and ऊर्णोतु Some few roots
also beginning with vowels take the Atmane form of Frequentative ; see examples
at 511.4. b, 681. a.
a. The Frequentative form is even less common in classical composition than
the Desiderative. In the Pres. Part., however, and in nouns, it not unfrequently
appears (see 80. VI). It either expresses repetition or gives intensity to the radical
idea; thus, fr. €T ‘to shine’ comes the Frequent. stem dedfpya (Pres. 3rd sing.
dedipyate, “it shines brightly’), and the Pres. Part. dedfpyamdna, ‘shining brightly :’
so also, fr. शुभ् ‘to be beautiful,’ sosubhya and Sosubhyamdna; fr. BR “to weep,’
rorudya and rorudyamdna.
508. There are two kinds of Frequentative verb, the one a redu-
plicated Atmane-pada verb, with ya affixed, conforming, like Intran-
sitive and Passive verbs, to the conjugation of cl. 4, and usually,
though not always, yielding an Intransitive signification ; the other
a reduplicated Parasmai-pada verb, following the conjugation of cl. 3.
The latter is less common in classical Sanskrit than the former, and
will therefore be considered last *.
a, The terminations for the first form of Frequentative will be
those of the Atmane at 246, with the usual substitutions required
for the 4th class of verbs. For the second form they will be the
regular Parasmai-pada terminations of the scheme at 246.
a 3 त प्र a
* Intensive or Frequentative forms are found in Greek, such as taimaAdw,
YA , ee > / ५
0५४८६०५.) (८५५५ or (५०५५५) व्र ०८०५५, १५१.
214 FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
ATMANE-PADA FREQUENTATIVES, FORMED BY REDUPLICATION AND
ADDING ya.
509. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses.
Reduplicate the initial consonant and vowel of the Passive stem
according to the rules for reduplicating consonants at 252, and
gunate the reduplicated vowel (if capable of Guna), whether it be
a long or short vowel.
Thus, from the Passive stem दीय (of dd, to give’) comes the Frequent. stem
dedtya (Pres. 1. dedfya+im®eva, 2. ०९242 5९ == देदी यसे &c.); fr. हीय (Pass. of
hd, ‘ to quit’) comes jehtya (jehtye &c.); fr. MTU (of स्तु ‘to spread’) comes testérya
(also tdstarya); fr. JA (of Y to purify’), popiya; fr. विद्य (of विद् to know’),
vevidya; 7, बुध्य (of FY to know’), bobudhya (Pres ary, बोवुध्यसे, STI, &c.)
The conjugation of all four tenses corresponds exactly to that of the Passive.
510. As to the reduplication of the vowel, if the Passive stem contain a medial
Ha, long & 18 substituted; thus, pdpacya from pacya; sdsmarya from smarya.
a. If it contain a medial खा d, F e, or aT o, the same are reduplicated ; as, yd-
yd¢ya from ydéya; seshevya from sevya; lolo¢ya from lo¢ya.
b. If it contain a medial ¥ ri, then अरो aré* is substituted in the reduplication ;
as, दरीदूश्य from drigya; परोस्पृश्य from sprigya, &c. ; AUTH from AA; वसेभृज्ज्य
from USI. Similarly, ०८18 substituted for च ए, in FA making चत्तीक्ुष्य.
git. If a Passive stem has ft ri before ya, this रि ri becomes Tt rf in the Fre-
quentative stem ; as, चेक्रीय from क्रिय (Passive of कुं “to do’).
a. If the stem begin with ¥ a, as in Wey atya (from सद् “to wander’), the initial
af is repeated, and the radical a lengthened; thus, W2Tegf atdtya (3rd sing
अटाट्यते) Similarly, अश्चर्यं from अश् ‘to pervade
b. Wri, ‘to go,’ makes its stem गायै ardrya.
512. Ifthe Passive stem contain a nasal after short a, this nasal generally appears
in the reduplicated syllable, and is treated as final Xm; thus, fr. गन् ‘to go’ comes
जद्धम्य “to walk crookedly ;’ fr. भरम् ˆ to wander,’ TAIFY; fr. WA‘ to kill,” TR.
a. The Passive stems जप्य, जन्य, TA, and some others formed from roots con-
taining nasals (as JM, भज्य), may insert nasals, instead of lengthening the vowel
in the reduplication ; thus, TAG, WHI, Taal, & ५.
2. Anomalous forms.—Qg ‘to go’ (making पद्य) inserts नी 7४; thus, पनोपद्य.
Similarly, पत् to fall,” कस् or RY ‘to go,’ भण् to शा, स्स् ‘to drop, sq to
fall,’ HE ‘to go,’ TY ‘to deceive’ (पनीपत्य, चनी कस्य, बनीधङ्य, सनीघस्यः
दनीध्वस्य, चनी स्कद्य, &५.) चर् “10 go’ makes TIT
९. हन् ‘to kill’ makes WATT; घ्रा ‘to smell,’ AHIA; MT ‘to blow,’ देभ्मीयं
(देध्मीये &९.) ; 4 to swallow,’ Hfireq
* This seems to support the idea that the original Guna of ri is ari. See 29.5.
FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 215
General Tenses of Atmane-pada Frequentatives.
513. In these tenses Frequentatives follow the analogy of Passives, and reject the
suffix य॒ ya. Since, however, the stem of the Perfect is formed by affixing ATA dim (as
usual in all polyayllabic forms, see 383), and since, in all the other tenses, inserted i
is assumed, a coalition of vowels might arise were it not allowed to retain y in all
cases in which a vowel immediately precedes that letter*; thus, from zeta is
formed the Perfect 1st sing. दे दीपाच्वक्रे &e., rejecting ya; but from देदीय comes
देदी याचकरे &c., retaining y. Similarly in the other tenses: 1st Fut. dedépitdhe,
dedtyitdhe, &c.; 2nd Fut. dedépishye, dedtyishye, &c.; Aor. adedipishi, adedtyishi,
&c.; Prec. dedipishiya, dedtyishtya, &c.; Cond. adedipishye, adedtyishye, &०, In
the grd sing. of the Aor. ड् ४ is not allowed to take the place of the regular termina-
tions, as in the Passive form.
a. The Infinitive, as formed in the usual manner (459), will be dedépitum, &c.
PARASMAI-PADA FREQUENTATIVES.
514. Rule for forming the stem in the four Special tenses. The stem is here
also formed by a reduplication similar to that of Atmane-pada Frequentatives ;
not, however, from the Passive, but from the root; thus, from root पच् paé comes
2५८; fr. fag vid comes vevid; fr. E31 comes dartdrig; fr. F comes cartkri.
a. But in the Parasmai form of Frequentative, अरि ari and TL ar as well as अणी
art may be reduplicated for the vowel J ri; so that ‘go may make atten or
aftgn or ददश्; and कु, चरीकृ or चरिकृ or चकँ (Pan. vit. 4, 92).
Similarly, FY may make चलतीकरुप् or चल्िकरुप् or चल्क्रप्.
8४. Again, in roots ending in long चु, {४ ¢ is reduplicated for क्तु ६, and this d is
retained even when rf becomes ir; thus, कृ kré, ‘to scatter,’ makes 1. द्व
Pl. 3. éékirati. Similarly, from तू “to cross’ come édtarmi and tdtirati.
९. In the Special tenses Parasmai, these Frequentatives follow the conjugation of
cl. 3, and in accordance with the rules for the 2nd and 3rd class (307, 331), the
radical vowel is gunated before the P terminations of the scheme at 246. Hence,
from vid come the two stems veved and vevid (Pres. vevedmi, vevetsi, vevetti; du.
vevidvas, &c.; Impf. avevedam, avevet, avevet, avevidva, &c.; 3rd pl. avevidus ;
Pot. vevidydm, &e.; Impv. veveddni, veviddhi, vevettu, veveddva, vevittam, &c.)
क. Again, the stem will vary in accordance with the rules of combination at 296-
306, as in FY budh (Pres. bobodhmi, bobhotsi, boboddhi, bobudhvas, &c.; see 298).
So also, TE ८ makes in grd sing. aTarfe vdvodhi (see 305-4); FX makes दोदोग्धि
(305) ; नह् makes नानद्धि (305 note) ; दुह् makes दोद्रोदि or atgifry; and far,
सेष्णेढि or सेष्णोग्धि (305. 4).
e, And in further analogy to cl. 2 (313, 314) long ¢ is often optionally inserted
. * In Passives this coalition of vowels is avoided by the change of a final vowel
to Vriddhi, as of di to édy, of hu to hdv, and of kri to kér; and by the change of
final d to dy, as of da to day; see 474.
216 FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM.
before the consonantal P terminations (Pres. vevedimi, vevedtshi, vevedtti; du.
vevidvas, &c.; Impf. avevedam, avevedts, avevedtt, avevidva, &c.; Impv. veveddni,
veviddhi, veveditu).
515. Lastly, when the root ends in a vowel, the usual changes take place of i
and ¢ to y or iy; of u and ¢ to wv; and of ri to 7 (see 312): as in the roots भी bhé,
W bhi, F kri (Pres. 1st sing. bebhemi, bobhomi, darkarmi; 3rd pl. bebhyati, bobhu-
vati, carkrati).
a, Observe—Many of the anomalous formations explained under Atmane-pada
Frequentatives must be understood as belonging also to the Parasmai-pada; thus,
ug (512.5) makes in Parasmai पनीप्ि, watafre, पनी पलि, &c.; and so with
the other roots at 512.5.
४. इन् †#० kill,’ गु “to swallow’ (512. ९), and some others have a separate
Parasmai-pada form (Wat, जागभिं; the last identical with Pres. of जागृ).
General Tenses of Parasmai-pada Frequentatives.
516. The Perfect follows the usual rule for polysyllabic roots (385), and affixes
aT dm with the auxiliaries; thus, from बुध् budh, “to know,’ comes bobudhdmdsa,
bobudhdmbabhiva, bobudhdnéakdra; from fag vid, ‘to know,’ comes veviddémdsa.
Guna of a final and sometimes of a penultimate vowel is required before dm; thus,
8०6१४ (from J) becomes bobhavdmdsa. So also, वृत् makes vdvartdmdsa. In the
other tenses, excepting the Precative, inserted i is invariably assumed ; and before
this inserted £ some roots are said to forbid the usual Guna change of the radical
vowel in the 1st Fut. &c.; thus, budh is said to make bobudhitdsmi; bhi, ‘to fear,’
bebhyitdsmi, &c. (374); 2nd Fut. bobudhishydmi, bebhyishydmi, &c.; Aor. abobu-
dhisham, abebhdyisham, &c.; Prec. bobudhydsam, bebhtydsam, &c.; Cond. abobu-
dhishyam, abebhyishyam, &c. The rejection of Guna from the radical syllable,
however, admits of question; thus, bhz, ‘to be,’ makes, according to the best
authorities, bobhavitdsmi, &c.
a. The Infinitive will be formed in the usual way from the 1st Fut., see 513. a.
Passive, Causal, Desiderative, and Desiderative Causal form
of Frequentatives.
517. Frequentatives are capable of all these forms. The Passive, when the root
ends in a consonant, will be identical with the Atmane-pada Frequentative formed
by reduplication and the suffix ya; thus, fr. Frequent. stem totuda, “to strike often,”
comes totudye, ‘I am struck often ;’ but fr. loliya (hi, "to cut’), loliyye, &c. Again,
fr. totuda comes totudaydmi, ‘I cause to strike often ;’ totudishdmi, ‘I desire to
strike often ;* totudayishdmi, ‘I desire to cause to strike often.’
a. The ya of the Atmane-pada Frequentative if preceded by a consonant is
rejected ; but not if preceded by a vowel; thus, loliya, Frequentative stem of ii,
“to cut,’ makes loliyishdmi, ‘1 desire to cut often.” See 252.f.
NOMINAL VERBS.—FORMATION OF STEM. 217
NOMINAL VERBS, OR VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS.
518. These are formed by adding certain suffixes to the stem of
nouns. They are not in very common use, but, theoretically, there
is no limit to their formation. They might be classed according to
their meaning ; viz. 1st, Transitive Nominals, yielding the sense of
performing, practising, making or using the thing or quality expressed
by the noun ; 2nd, Intransitive Nominals, giving a sense of behaving
like, becoming like, acting like the person or thing expressed by the
noun; 3rd, Desiderative Nominals, yielding the sense of wishing
for the thing expressed by the noun. It will be more convenient,
however, to arrange them under five heads, according to the suffixes
by which they are formed, as follows :—
519. 1st, Those formed by affixing a (changeable to द before
a syllable beginning with m and v) to a nominal stem, after Guna
of its final vowel (if capable of Guna). When the stem ends in a, this
vowel takes the place of the suffix a. A final @ absorbs the suffix.
Obs.—The terminations of Nominals will be those of the scheme at 246, both for
Par. and Atm., requiring the substitutions of the 1st, 4th, 6th, and roth classes.
८. Thus, from कषा ‘Krishna,’ Pres. 1. कृष्णामि “ act like Krishna,’ 2. कृष्णसि,
3. कृष्णति, &०. So, from कवि ‘a poet,’ Pres. 1. कवयामि ‘I act the poet,’ 2. कवयसि,
&c.; and from fag “a father,’ Pres. 1. पितसामि ‘I act like a father,’ 2. पितरसि,
3. पितरति; Atm. Pres. 7. पितरे, &c.; from माला ‘a garland,’ Pres. 1. मालाभि,
2. मालासि; 3. मालातिः; Impf. 1. सखमालाम्, 2. HATA, &c.; Pot. मालेयम्, &९. :
from स्व ‘own,’ Pres. 3. स्व ति ‘he acts like himself.’ Sometimes a final i or u is
not gunated; as, from कवि ‘a poet,’ Pres. कव्यामि, कव्यसि, &c. (Pan. vir. 4 39).
Words ending in nasals preserve the nasals, and lengthen the preceding vowels ;
as, राजानति ‘he acts like a king, Watafa ‘it serves as a road,’ इदामति “he acts
like this.’
520. 2ndly, Those formed by affixing च ya to a nominal stem.
a. If a word end in a consonant, ya is generally affixed without change; as,
from ara‘ a word,’ aTaifa ‘he wishes for words ;’ from दिव् ‘heaven,’ दिव्यति ‘he
wishes for heaven’ (or, according to some, दीव्यति); from तपस् * penance,’ तपस्यति
“he does penance ;’ from नमस् “reverence,” नमस्यति ‘he does reverence.’ Final
nm is dropped, and the next rule then applied; thus, from राजन् ‘a king,’ Pres.
रजीयामि, Pot. राजीयेयम् ; from धनिन् ‘rich? धनीयामि, &८.
b. A final च ¢ or 14 is generally changed to ई ¢; final इ £ or tu
lengthened ; final = ri changed to ttré; Sto to av; wl au to dv.
Thus, from पुतं “a son,’ Pres. 1, yatarfa “I desire a son,’ 2. yatafa, &९.;
from पति ‘a husband,’ Pres. 1. चतीयामि ‘I desire a husband,’ &c. So also, from.
मातु “a mother’ comes मातीयामि, &e,
Ff
218 NOMINAL VERBS.—-FORMATION OF STEM.
©. This form of Nominal has not always a Desiderative meaning. The following
are examples of other meanings, some of which properly belong to the next form:
प्रासादीयति “he fancies himself in a palace ;’ कवी यति ‘he acts like a poet ;’ करडूयति
or -ते ‘he scratches 3 मन्तूयति or -ते ‘he sins’ or ‘he is angry ;’ मितीयति ‘he acts
the part of a friend ;’ पुत्रीयति चालनम् “he treats the pupil as a son ;’ विष्णूयति डिजम्
“he treats the Brahman as if he were Vishnu;’ तिरस्यति ‘he vanishes ;’ गव्यति ‘he
seeks cows’ (from गो ‘a cow’).
d. In the sense of ‘behaving like,’ ‘acting like,’ ‘doing like,’ a final ख a is
generally lengthened, a final स्रा द retained, and a final {n, @s, or त् dropped ;
thus, from पंशिडित ‘a wise man,’ Pres. 1 परिडताये *T act the part of a wise man,’
2. परिडतायसे, 3. परिडतायते, &०.; from GA ‘a tree,’ Pres. 1. GAH, &९.; from
Wee ‘a noise,’ Pres. WRT ‘Iam noisy ;’ from Tit “a king,’ Pres. 1. राजाय; &९.;
from उन्मनस् sorrowful,’ Pres. उन्मनाये, &९.; from वृहत् great, Pres. वृहाये, &e.
९. This Nominal is sometimes found with a Transitive sense, especially when
derived from nouns expressive of colour ; as, from कृषा ‘black,’ कृष्णायते or -fa ‘he
blackens;’ and sometimes in the Parasmai with an Intransitive sense; as, from fara
‘crooked,’ जिद्यायति ‘it is crooked ;’ from दास ‘a slave,’ दासायति ‘he is a slave.’
It corresponds to Greek Desiderative Denominatives in saw, as bavariaw &e.
521. 3rdly, Those formed by affixing wa aya to a nominal stem.
This form is similar to that of Causals and verbs of the ioth class,
with which it is sometimes confounded. Like them it has generally
an Active sense. A final vowel must be dropped before aya ; and if
the nominal stem have more than one syllable, and end in a consonant,
both the consonant and its preceding vowel must be dropped.
a. Thus, from वस्र ‘cloth,’ Pres. 1. FATA ‘I clothe,’ 2. वस््रयसि, 3. वस्त्र पति,
&९. ; from वमेन् ` armour,’ Pres. 1. qaatfa ‘1 put on armour,’ &c.; from प्रमाणं
‘authority,’ WATWaATfa ‘I propose as authority ;’ from खज् ‘a garland,’ सखजयामि
“Icrown;’ from चट ‘a jar,’ चटयामिं ‘I make a jar’ or ‘I call it ajar,’ &e.
४. In further analogy to Causals, प् # is sometimes inserted between the stem
and aya, especially if the noun be monosyllabic, and end in a. Before this प् p,
Vriddhi is required; thus, from स्व ‘own,’ Pres. warqatfa ‘I make my own.’
There are one or two examples of dissyllabic nouns; thus, from सत्य ‘true,’
स्यापयामि, &c.; and from थे. substance,’ सथापयामि, &e.
९, If the stem be monosyllabic, and end in a consonant, Guna may take place;
as, from @Y ‘hunger,’ सोधयामि.
d, Whatever modifications adjectives undergo before the suffixes fyas and ishtha
at 194, the same generally take place before aya; thus, from ata “long,” graafa
‘I lengthen ‡ from Ware ‘near,’ नेदयामि “I make near,’ &c.
This form of Nominal is sometimes Intransitive, as चिरयति ‘he delays’ (from
fat ‘long’). According to Bopp, Greek Denominatives in a, €W, ow, (६४ cor-
respond to this form; as, 7oAep-0w, yuvark=iSeo,
PRESENT PARTICIPLES; PARASMAI-PADA, 219.
522. 4thly, Those formed by affixing स्य sya or सस्य asya to a
nominal stem, giving it the form of a Future tense, generally with the
sense of ‘desiring,’ ‘ longing for.’
a. Thus, fr. QTC‘ milk,’ Pres. 1. Wtcearfa ‘I desire milk,’ 2, Qtveara, &e. ;
fr. वृष ‘a bull, वृषस्यति ‘(the cow) desires the एणा; fr. द्धि ‘curds, दध्यस्यामि
“I desire curds,’ &c. Cf. Greek Desideratives in ces.
523. 5thly, Those formed by affixing काम्य kdmya (derived from
kam, ‘to desire’) to a nominal stem; as, from Ja ‘a son,’ Pres, 1.
पुतरकाम्यामि ‘I desire a son,’ 2. yaarrafa, 3. पु काम्यति, &c.; from यशस्
‘fame,’ यज्ञस्काम्यामि ‘I desire fame.’
a, The General tenses of these Nominals will be formed analogously
to those of other verbs; thus, from सवामि ‘I act like self? comes
Perf, went; from कुमारयामि ‘I play like a boy’ comes Aor. सचुकुमारम्,
&c. A long vowel in the stem generally remains unchanged, and is
not shortened ; thus, मालयामि (from नाला ‘a garland’) makes सममालम्.
So also, afaftaat ‘he will wish for fuel’ (Guna being omitted),
युतकाम्यिता ‘he will wish for a son.’
9. Nominal verbs may take Passive, Causal, Desiderative, and
Frequentative forms. The Causal of those formed with aya will be
identical with the Primitive Nominal ; thus, वमेयामि ‘I put on armour’
or ‘I cause to put on armour.’ In reduplicating for the Desiderative
or Frequentative, sometimes the last syllable is repeated, sometimes
the first ; thus, करय ‘to scratch’ makes its Desiderative stem waRfa-
fax, and yaa ‘to treat as a son’ makes पुपुत्लीयिष or पुल्लीयियिष. Accord-
ing to some, the middle syllable may be reduplicated ; thus, yfafafau.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES; PARASMAI-PADA.—FORMATION OF STEM.
524. Present Participles are the only Participles the formation of
which is connected with the conjugational class of the verb. The
stem in the Parasmai may be most easily formed by dropping the
final £ of the 3rd pers, pl. Pres. Par, and rejecting the nasal in certain
cases (see 141. a, 84.1); e.g.
From Wafer padanti, ‘they cook’ (3rd pl. Pres. of पच्, cl. 1), comes WAH pacat,
‘cooking ;’ fr. घ्रन्ति ghnanti, ‘they kill’ (3rd pl. of han, cl. 2), comes Ba ghnat,
“killing ;’ fr. सन्ति sani, “they are’ (3rd pl. of as, cl. 2, ‘to be’), comes Bi sat,
‘being ;’ fr. यन्ति yanti, ‘they go’ (3rd pl. of इ, cl. 2), यत् yat, ‘going ;’ fr. यान्ति
Ff
220. PRESENT PARTICIPLES; ATMANE-PADA.
y
ydnti, ‘they go’ (3rd pl. of या, cl. 2), यात् ydt; fr. Wala jubvati, ˆ they sacrifice
(grd pl. of hu, cl. 3), जुद्धत् jukvat; fr. नृत्यन्ति nrityanti, “they dance,’ cl. 4,
नृत्यत् १०४५८. fr. चिन्वन्ति काणा, ‘they gather,’ cl. 5, Farag Ginvat ; fr. आघ्रुवन्ति
dpnuvanti, ‘they obtain,’ cl. 5, STTIA dpnuvat ; fr. तुदन्ति tudanti, they strike,’ cl. 6,
tudat; fr. न्धन्ति rundhanti, ‘they hinder,’ cl. 7, rundhat ; fr. qatar kurvanti,
‘they do,’ cl. 8, kurvat; fr. पुनन्ति punanti, ‘they purify,’ cl. 9, punat.
525. The same holds good in Derivative and Nominal verbs; e. g.
From Caus. बोधयन्ति “they cause to know’ (479) comes बोधयत् ‘causing to
know;;’ fr. Desid. बुबोधिषन्ति (499) comes बुबोधिषत् “ desiring to know;;’ fr. दित्सन्ति
(&०8) comes दित्सत् ' desiring to give ;* fr. Frequent. aferafa comes चेक्षिपत् ‘throw-
ing frequently ;’ from the Nominal कृष्णन्ति “they act like Krishna,’ कष्णत् “acting
like Krishna;’ ९. तपस्यन्ति ‘they do penance,’ तपस्यत् “doing penance.”
a. In corroboration of the remark made at 461. ५, that the Passive verb appears
in a few rare instances to assume a Parasmai-pada inflexion, and that many of the
Intransitive verbs placed under cl. 4 might be regarded (except for the accent) as
examples of this form of the Passive, it is certain that a Parasmai-pada Present
Participle derivable from a Passive stem is occasionally found ; thus, ¢Jaq “being
seen,’ from the Passive stem दूरय drigya; चीयत् ˆ being gathered,’ from चौय diya
(Passive stem of ¢).
¢. The inflexion of Parasmai-pada Present Participles is explained
at 141. The first five or strong inflexions (see 135. a) of this parti-
ciple in nine conjugational classes retain the nasal, shewing that the
stem in all the classes, except the third, and a few other verbs (141. a),
ends in ant as well as in at, The Parasmai-pada Frequentative, as
conforming to the conjugational rule for cl. 3, also rejects the nasal.
Obs.—In the cognate languages the 7 is preserved throughout. Cf. Sk. bharan,
bharantam (fr. bhri), with pepwy, peporta,, Serentem ; also, bharantau (Ved. bha-
rantd) with pépovre 3 bharantas with 0८००५76५ ferentes ; bharatas with pepovtas ;
Gen. sing. bharatas with 0८000705, ferentis. So also, Sk. vahan, vahantam, with
Lat. vehens, vehentem ; and san, santam (fr. as, ‘to be’), with Lat. -sens of ab-sens,
pre-sens. Cf. also the strong stem strinvant- with oTopyuyT-.
PRESENT PARTICIPLES ; ATMANE-PADA.—FORMATION OF STEM.
526. The stem is formed by substituting ara ména for न्ते née, the
termination of the 3rd pl. Pres. Atm. of verbs of the ist, 4th, 6th, and
toth classes, and Derivative verbs (see 527, 528, below); and by
substituting आन dna for सति ate, the termination of the 3rd pl. Pres.
Atm. of verbs of the other classes (see 246); e.g.
From पचन्ते pacante(cl.1) comes WAATA pacamdna, ‘ cooking ;’ fr. तिष्ठन्ते (७१८, chr),
x
तिष्ठमान ‘standing ;’ fr. FRAT (cl. 4), नृत्यमान; fr, त्िम्यन्ते (10, cl. 6), क्िम्पमान.
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 221
a. But from war bruvate (ब्रू cl. 2), FATT bruvdna (58); fr. निद्रे (हन् with नि
५.2), FARIA; fr. दधते (०१८ cl. 3), TATA; fr. चिन्वते (cl. 5), चिन्वान; fr. FHA (cl. 7),
युञ्जान; £. FIR (cl. 8), FATT; fr. JAR (cl. 9), पुनान. Root HT cl. 2, ‘to sit,”
makes Wate for STATA; and जी cl. 2 is WIA in grd pl. (see 315), but ate in
Pres. Part.
Obs.—The real suffix for the Pres. Part. Atm. is mdna, of which dna is probably
an abbreviation. Cf. Gr. -evo~ in Pe pé-weve-s=bhara-mdna (58).
527. Verbs of class 10 and Causals substitute मान mdna; as, fr.
arma odhayante comes बोधयमान bodhayamdna: but occasionally
wra dna; as, fr. agra, दशीयान ; fr. वेदयन्ते, वेदयान ; ‘fr. चिन्तयन्त, चिन्तयान ;
#. पूजयन्ते, पूनयान.
528. Passives, Desideratives, Frequentatives, &c. substitute मान
mdna for the Atmane; thus, from क्रियन्ते ‘they are made’ comes
क्रियमाण ‘being made’ (58); from दीयन्ते ‘they are given, दीयमान ‘being
given ;’ from the Desiderative दित्सन्ते ‘they desire to give” दित्समान
‘desiring to give;’ from निधांसन्ते ‘they desire to kill,’ निधांसमान
‘desiring to ता; from the Frequentative वोवुध्यन्ते ‘they know
repeatedly,’ बोवुध्यमान ‘knowing repeatedly.’
529. The inflexion of Pres. Participles Atmane follows that of
adjectives at 187; as, N. sing. m. fin. पचमानस्, पचमाना, पचमानम्.
PAST PARTICIPLES.
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.—FORMATION OF STEM.
530. This is the most common and useful of all Participles. In
general the stem is formed by adding त ¢a directly to roots ending
in vowels, and to most roots ending in consonants ; as, fr. या yd, ‘to
go,’ यात ydta, ‘gone ; fr. नि ‘to conquer,’ जित ‘conquered ;’ fr. at
‘to lead,’ ata ‘led ;’ fr. लिप् kship, ‘to throw,’ fern kshipta, ‘ thrown ;’
fr. कृ ‘to do,’ कृत ‘done’ (see 80. XVII).
a. But if the root end in = ri, by adding न na, changeable to ण na
(58); as, fr. क् kri, ‘to scatter,’ ait kirna, ‘scattered,’ see 534.
531. Some roots in wd, ई ¢, and क %, some in रे ai preceded by
two consonants, with some of those in @d, Ur, HJ, one in 7 ¢ (लग्),
and one or two in च् ८ & ¢h (see 541, 544), also take na instead of
ta; see 80. XXIV, 532, 536, 540, &e.
532. Roots ending in vowels do not generally admit inserted इ i
in this Participle, even when they admit it in the Futures (392,
395, &c.), but attach ¢a or na directly to the root; as, fr. पा ‘to
222 PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES,
protect,’ ura; fr. fet ‘to resort to,’ fam; fr. घु ‘to hear, ya; भू ‘to
become, yn; कृ ‘to do, कृत; HT ‘to smell,” घ्राण (58); डी ‘to fly,’
डीन; et ‘to decay,’ दीन; मी ‘to perish, मीन ; Bt ‘to embrace,’ लीन ;
ह्री ‘to be ashamed,’ #ta; @ ‘to cut,’ wa; g ‘to be afflicted,’ दून;
fra ‘to swell, शून.
a, But when they do retain i, gunation of the final vowel is
required as in the Future; thus, yf ‘to lie down’ makes शयित ; and
y ‘to purify,’ पवित (also yt); and जागु ‘to awake,’ Infra.
533. In certain cases.the final vowel of the root is changed; thus, some roots in
Il d change d to £ before ta; as, from स्या sthd, “to stand,’ स्थित sthita „+ from AT
“to measure,’ मितः; from दरिद्रा “to be poor,’ aftfgn.
a. धा ‘to place’ becomes हिति ; दा ‘to give,’ दत्त.
Obs.— When prepositions are prefixed to datta, the initial da may be rejected ;
thus, dtta for ddatta, ‘taken ;’ pratta for pradatta, ‘bestowed ;’ vydtta for vyddatta,
“expanded ;’ nétta for nidatta, ‘given away ;’ parétta for paridatta, ‘delivered
over ;’ siitta for sudatta, ‘well given,’ the i and ४ being lengthened.
b. पां ‘to drink’ makes Ut#; but हा ‘to quit,’ 2t4; and ज्या ‘to grow old,’
जीन; हा ४० go, दान.
९. Some roots in d take both na and ta; as, 7. ध्रा "10 smell,’ HTW and प्रात; fr. वा
“to blow,’ with prep. निर् › निवैण and निवत; fr. BT (or 3) “to cook,’ ATW or fara.
534. Roots in SL १८ change ré to é before na, which passes into W na by 58; as,
from त् ‘to pass,’ Wet “passed.” But when a labial precedes, {४ becomes dr; as,
from q or YT, पूति or qt ‘full,’ ` filled.’
535- The root भे dhe, ‘to suck,’ forms धीत ; दे hve, ‘to call,’ दूत; चे ve, ‘to
weave,’ उत् ; व्ये vye, ‘to cover,’ वीत ; A ‘to barter,” मित.
536. Roots in 2 ai generally change ai to ¢ before na or ta; as, from म्ले mlai,
‘to fade, FTA midna ; from श्यै ‘to meditate,’ ध्यात (in the Veda धीत); from दै “to
purify,’ दात ; from a ‘to rescue,’ वाण or तात ; from प्ये ‘to grow fat,’ WT4, &c.
a. But fr. गे "+ sing,’ गीत; fr. से ‘to waste,’ सीत ; fr. से “to waste,’ @TA, see
548; fr. श्ये “to coagulate,’ सीत or डीन or सयान; fr. mw “to accumulate,’ स्यान,
(with प्र) स्तीत or स्तीम.
537. Of the four or five roots in सरो ०, सो ‘to destroy’ makes सित (as also
सि ‘to bind’); ज्ञो ‘to sharpen,’ शित्त or शात; eto tie,’ दिति; BM ‘to cut,’
Blt and दित ; ज्यो ‘to instruct,’ जी त.
538. Those roots ending in consonants which take the inserted $
in the last five tenses (399), generally take this vowel also in the
Past Pass. Part., but not invariably (see 542); and when é is assumed,
ta is generally affixed, and not na; as, from पत् pat, ‘to fall,’ पतित
patita, ‘ fallen,’
a, %%, Fu, or | १८ preceding the final consonant of a root may
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 223
occasionally take Guna, especially if the Participle be used imper-
sonally ; as, fr. fare ‘to sweat,’ wafer or faq; fr. fre ‘to be
unctuous,’ wafer or fara; fr. ay ‘to shine,’ द्योतित or द्युतित ; fr. 7a‘ to
bear,’ afaa; fr. मृष् ‘to sprinkle,’ मृष्ट. See Syntax, 895.
8. ag ‘to take’ lengthens the inserted i, making गृहीत. See
399. &
539. Roots ending in consonants which reject the inserted ४ in
the last five tenses (400-415), generally reject it in the Past Pass.
Part. They must be combined with ६, agreeably to the rules
of Sandhi at 296, &c. Whatever change, therefore, the final con-
sonant undergoes before the termination ¢é of the ist Fut. (see
400-415), the same will often be preserved before the ta of the
Past Part.; so that, in many cases, the form of this Participle
resembles that of the 3rd sing. 1st Fut. provided the final ¢ be
shortened, and the vowel of the root preserved unaltered; thus,
taking some of the roots at 400-415; Wa (शक्ता), शक्त; सिच् (am),
fea; मुच् (मोक्ता), मुक्त; त्यज्, वक्त; युज्, युक्त; सुन्, सृष्ट; मृज् and yy, मृष्ट;
सिध्, सिद्ध; बुधः वुदध; TY युध; सिप्, धिप; लुप्, लुपः YL. सृप्र; FL. करम;
OY, लय; दभः |X; fam, विट; दृश् दृष्ट; रभ्, ges fay, हिष्ट; दुष्?
दुष्ट; कृष्, कृष्ट ; इष्, इष्ट; दह्, दग्ध; सह्, सोढ (415. m); नह्, नद्ध (414);
गाह्, गाढ (415. m); fax, wie; दिह्, दिग्ध; fag, fary; रुह्, रूढ ; FE,
मूढ or मुग्ध (475. १); दुह्, दुग्धः; गुह्, We (415. m).
540. Most roots ending in § d, forbidding the inserted ¥ £ (405), take na instead
of ta, and are combined with na, agreeably to 47; as, fr. पट् ‘to go,” WH; fr. fag
‘to find, विन्न (also वित्त); fr. नुट् “to impel,’ qa (also नुत्त); fr. भिह् “to break,’ भिन्न ;
fr. WE “to sit,’ ‘to sink,’ Wa, with fa, विषसख (70, 58); fr. ag “to pound,’ We;
fr. BY "10 play,’ ‘to vomit,’ Ba; fr. Ae “to eat,’ Wa (unless जग्ध be substituted).
Ble “to rejoice’ makes AA.
541. Roots ending ० च् ८ or Wj of course change these letters to ¢ before ta;
see examples at 539. Similarly, those which take na, change é and j to g before
na; as, fr. TH ‘to be ashamed,’ नग्न ‘naked ;’ fr. विन् ‘to tremble,’ विग्न; fr.
रुज् ` to break,’ BW; fr. BFA ‘to thunder,’ BRT ; fr. WA "10 move’ (in pone
senses), Mai. So, fr. मनन् ` to be immersed,’ rejecting one j, मग्न ; from 3 to
be ashamed,’ 74 (as well as कन्जित). क्क् ‘to adhere’ also makes 74. But
PAR ‘to forget,’ स्फूणे; इक “to be crooked,’ ga
642. Some roots which admit £ necessarily or optionally in one or both of the
Futures, reject it in this participle; thus, 4 “to be bold’ makes YB. According
to Pan. शा. 2.24, we ‘to move’ makes असे arnna after the prepositions sam, nz, ae
vi, and in every other case अदित ardita, so that after ¢ prefixed, it becomes अदिति
224 PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
(आत ‘ pained’ is thought by some to be rita, fr. rt. ri, with prep. द prefixed, and,
by others is regarded as an anomalous form of rt. ard; by native grammarians a
form BW artta is referred to rt ऋत्) ; GF to make firm,’ दृढ ; FE to extol,’ वृद;
Az ‘to be mad,’ HA; रीप् ‘to shine,’ दत्र ; AB ‘to perish, नष्ट; FR‘ to faint,’ Fa
as well as मूदधित सेद् to speak barbarously, fz as well as afer नृत् to
dance,’ JA; Wi to strive, यत्त
543. If in forming the Passive stem (471), the » or y contained in a root is
changed to its semivowel u or i, the same change takes place in the Past Pass.
Part.; as, fr. वच् vad, “to say,’ उक्तं ukta; fr. Ag ‘to speak,’ उदित; fr. am to wish,’
उशित; fr. TA ‘to dwell? उषित; £. वप् ‘to sow,’ TN; fr. TE ‘to carry,’ ऊद (with
प्र, WE, 28. ४); fr. स्वप् ‘to sleep,” YR; fr. यज् ‘to sacrifice,’ इष्ट,
Obs.—This change of a semivowel to its corresponding vowel is called Sampra-
sdrana by native grammarians (Pan. 1. 1, 45).
a. Some roots change च् with a preceding or following vowel into ऊ; as, Wo
“to be feverish,’ aa; त्वर् ‘to hasten,’ तृणे; faz ‘to dry,’ Aa; अव् ‘to protect,”
ऊत; मव् ‘to bind,’ मूत.
४, Some roots ending in {also substitute Si for व्; as, दिव् “to play,’ द्यूत and
Wa (the former only in the sense of ‘to gamble’); सिव् ‘to sew, स्यूत; सिव् or
ATA ‘to spit,’ RIA; व् or व् “to spit, Ft
544. Some other changes which take place in forming the Passive stem (472)
are preserved before ta; thus, 7, कास् “to rule,’ शिष्ट; fr. व्यध् “to pierce,” विद्ध;
fr. AA‘ to deceive, विचित; fr. THT ‘to fry,’ भृष्ट; fr. WA ‘to ask,’ पृष्ट; fr. A‘ to
cut,’ वृक्ण (58).
a. When a root ends in a conjunct consonant, of which the first is a nasal, this.
nasal is generally rejected before ta; as, fr. बन्ध् ‘to bind, FZ; fr. AN “to fall,’
BE; fr. AA “to fall,’ aeT; fr. अच्त् " to move’ and न्न् “to anoint,’ mH; fr. सन् to
adhere,’ सक्त ; fr. र्च् to colour,’ स्क; fr. FAL ‘to kindle,’ इद्ध; fr. उन्द् “to be wet,’
उन्न ण Ta; fr. BS “to flow,’ Sats fr. ae ‘to ascend,’ स्कन्न ; fr. स्कम्भ् to stop,’
WHA; fr. WAT “to stop,’ Mat; fr. TAY ‘to deceive,’ TH; fr. WH ‘to break,’ भग्न;
fr. दश् ‘to bite,’ दष्ट; fr. WA‘ to contract,’ TR.
४. But not if इ ‡ is inserted; as, fr. WAZ ‘to break,’ WHA; ?. क्रन्द्, क्रन्दित
(except मन्य् ‘to churn, making मयित; and ग्रन्य् ‘to tie,” Ifa).
545- Many roots ending in म् 7, 2, or Wn reject these nasals before ta if i is
not inserted ; as, गम् gam, ‘to go,’ गत् gata; यम् yam, “to restrain,’ यत yata ; रम् to
sport,’ रत ; तन्. to stretch, तत ; इन् ‘to kill,” हत ; नम् ‘to bend, नत; मन् ‘to
think,’ मतः; qq to hurt,’ छत : but सन् “to breathe’ and WA ` 1० go’ make खान्त
(the latter also समित); and स्वन् ‘to sound,’ सनित (also खान्त with prep.)
a. जन् ‘to be born’ makes जात; and खन् ‘to dig,’ खात ; सन् ‘to give,” सात;
medial a being lengthened.
546. Those roots ending in म् m, of the 4th class, which lengthen a medial a
before the conjugational suffix ya, also lengthen it before za, changing m to n as
in the Futures; thus, fr. क्रम् ‘to step,’ क्रान्त ; fr. TL “to wander,” भ्रान्त ; fr. Wr ‘to
PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 225
be appeased,” शान्त ; fy. दम् ‘to tame,’ दन्त (also दमित); fr. WA ‘to be patient,’
सान्त; fr. HT “to be sad,’ क्रान्त.
a. Similarly, वम् ‘to vomit, वान्त ; कम् ‘to love,’ कान्त; AA‘ to eat,’ चान्त.
547. From स्फाय् ‘to swell’ is formed स्फीत ; fr. WIT ‘to shake,’ BATH; fr. YA‘ to
be putrid, पूत ; from ऊय् ` to weave,’ ऊत; fr. WTF ‘to be fat,’ पीन (with सा and
प्र, -प्पान); fr EL “to stink eu
a. गर् or WL ‘to make effort’ forms 71 Gt to kill,’ like त्वर् ‘to hasten,’ TW;
at to bind or tie”? makes मृशं धाव् to wash wit.
6. Wicg to open’ makes WA (Pan. vin. 2, 55); and YA ‘to eat,” जग्ध (fr. जस्).
Obs.—From the above examples it appears that sometimes several roots have
the same form of Past Pass. Part. The following may also be noted: YY ‘to stink’
and Y ‘to purify’ make पूत; AT‘ to measure’ and मे ‘to barter, fam मृज् to wipe,
मृज् to touch,’ and FT to sprinkle,’ all make मृष्ट (मृष् to bear’ making स्मित by
Pan. 1. 2, 20); शस् “to recite’ and शस् to kill,” Wet; We ‘to rule’ and fara ‘to
distinguish,’ शिष्ठ; सो ‘to destroy’ and fa ‘to tie,’ fam. On the other hand,
WF ‘to enjoy’ makes YR; but YH "10 bend, भुग्न.
548. The following, though regarded as Participles by native grammarians, are
more properly adjectives : पक्वैः fr. पच् pad, ‘to cook ;’ YP, fr. YX “to dry ; ata,
fr wiz to be drunk ;’ कुश्च, fr. FI “to grow thin ;’ छाम, fr. @ ‘to waste
549. In forming the Past Pass. Part. of Causals, the Causal suffix
अय aya is rejected, but the inserted इ £ is always assumed ; as, fr.
कार्य, Causal of कुं ‘to make,’ comes कारित kdrita, ‘caused to be made ?
0. स्यापय, Causal of स्या ‘to stand,’ स्थापित sthdpita, ` placed ;’ fr. आप्याय
(षये with आ), आप्यायित ‘increased,’ ‘refreshed,
550. In adding त्त ¢a to a Desiderative or Frequentative stem, the
inserted इ £ is assumed, final a of the stem being dropped; and in
the case of roots ending in consonants, final ya being dropped; as,
fr. पिपास ‘to desire to drink’ comes पिपासित ; fr. faat& ‘to desire
to do,’ चिकीर्षित ; fr. ईष् ‘to desire to obtain,’ $ftrm, &c.; fr. लोलूय
‘to cut often” लोटूयित ; fr. Sfwa ‘to break frequently,’ वेभिदित.
551. ata with ‡ is added to nominal stems, final ¢ being dropped ;
as, fr. fytfacs ‘loose,’ शिथिलित ‘loosened ;’ fr. fara ‘crooked,’ fafaa
‘curved.’ These may be regarded as Past Passive Participles of the
Transitive Nominal verbs fafawafa, faraafa (521). So again, from
नमस्य ‘to do reverence’ comes नमस्यित or नमसित.
Obs.—Moreover, as na sometimes takes the place of fa, so ina is added to some
nouns instead of ita; e.g. सक्छिन ` soiled,” fr. Aes ^ dirt ;” शृद्धिःण (58) ‘ horned,”
from शुङ्ग ‘a horn.’ See 80. XLII.
a. Corresponding forms in Latin are barbatus, alatus, cordatus, turritus, &c. ;
and in Greek, 11/10 KpOKOTOS, 1, & ९,
ag
226 PAST ACTIVE PARTICIPLES.
552. The inflexion of Past Passive Participles follows that of
adjectives at 187; thus exhibiting a perfect similarity to the
declension of Latin participles in tus; thus, कृत kita, Nom. sing.
11880. fem, neut. कृतस्, FAT, कृतम्.
a. The resemblance between Sanskrit Past Passive Participles in ta, Latin Par-
ticiples in tu-s, and Greek verbals in To-s, may be seen in the following examples :
Sk. jadta-s = Lat. (g)notu-s (ignotus), 2176-6 ; Sk. datta-s= Lat. datus, 00766;
Sruta-s=clutus, ८076-५; bhita-s=Gure-s ; yukta-s=junetu-s, Cevxté-s; labdha-
7474-6 ( 2110-5 7470-४ 5 bhrita-s=pepto-s 5 dishta-s—=dictu-s, d€:KTO-$. And,
like Sanskrit, Latin often inserts an i, as in domitu-s (=Sk. damita-s), monstu-s, &e.
This is uot the case in Greek, but € is inserted in forms like (८€॥/670-5> EpmeETO-S.
There are also examples of Latin and Greek formations in nu-s and ¥-s, corres-
ponding to the Sanskrit participle in na; thus, plenu-s (=piirna-s), magnu-s (cf. Sk.
rt. mak), dignu-s (cf. Sk. dig, dik, Gr. deck); and orvyve-s, oreyve-s, 1 &e.
PAST ACTIVE PARTICIPLES.
These are of two kinds: A. those derived from the Past Passive
Participle; B. those belonging to the Reduplicated Perfect. The
former frequently supply the place of a Perfect tense Active (see 897).
553. A. The stem of these Participles is formed by adding aq vat
to that of the Past Passive Participle; e.g.
From कुत् “made,” कृतवत् ` having made,’ “who or what has made ;' fr. @74" burnt,’
quar having burnt ;’ fr. उक्तं ‘said,’ उक्तवत् ‘having said;’ fr. भिन्न ‘broken,’ भिन्नवत्
“having broken;’ fr. स्यापित ‘ placed,’ स्यापितवत् ‘having placed,’ &c.
a. For the declension of these Participles see 140. a. 6. c.
554. B. In these Participles, either वस् vas or TIA ivas is generally added to the
stem of the Reduplicated Perfect, as formed in the dual and plural. Vas is added
when the stem in the dual and plural (as it appears in its unchanged form before
the terminations are added) consists of more than one syllable; thus, from ¢akri
(root kri, ‘to do’), dakrivas; from did (374), Gdvas; from nanrit (364, compare
45. ५), nanritvas; from sasmar (374.k), sasmarvas.
a. And was is added when the stem in the dual and plural consists of one
syllable only; as, from ten (375.@), tenivas; from ghas (377), jakshivas.
Obs.—Certain roots are said optionally to form this Perf. Part. with ivas or vas,
whether the stem in dual and plural consists of one syllable or two (see Pan. vit.
2, 68); e.g. fr. gam (376), jagmivas or jaganvas; fr. han, jaghnivas or jaghanvas ;
fr. vid, cl. 6, ‘to find,’ vividvas or vividivas; fr. vis, vivisvas or vivisivas ; fr. dris,
dadrisvas or dadrisivas.
b. When vas is affixed, it will be necessary to restore to its original state the
final of a root ending in 2, ¢ u, ४ or ri, if changed before the terminations of the
du. and pl. to y, v, 7, ty, uv, or ४४; thus, fer sri, changed by 374. ८. to Sisriy,
becomes far foray ; क्री, changed to dikriy, becomes चिक्रीवस् Gkrtvas ; Y, changed
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. 227
by 374.9. to dudhuv, becomes दुधूवस् ८८०१४०९७; Y, changed by 374.4. to babhiv,
becomes PLFA 6८60४४०७, In declension, the 3rd pers. pl. with its termination us
is the form of the stem in the weakest cases (135.a), and in the fem. final s becoming
sh by 70; e.g. 3rd pl. jagmus, I. jagmushd; 3rd pl. tenus, I. tenushd, &c. See 168.
c. Roots which take the Periphrastic Perfect (see 385) form the Participles of
this tense by adding the Perfect Participles of kri, bhi, and as, to dm; thus, from
cur, cl. 10, éoraydm-babhivas, coraydn-cakrivas, coraydém-dsivas.
d. There is an Atmane-pada Participle of the Reduplicated Perfect most easily
formed by changing ire, the termination of the 3rd pl., into dna; thus, vividdna,
éidydna, jagmdna. See 526. 4; and cf. Greek Perf. Part. in evo (reTvppévos =
tutupdna).
e. The Parasmai-pada form of these Participles is inflected at 168. Those of the
Atmane-pada follow the inflexion of adjectives like subha at 187.
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
555. These are of the nature of Gerunds, as ‘carrying on the
action of the एल. They fall under two heads: ist, as formed by
affixing त्वा fvd to uncompounded roots; as, fr. भू bhi, ‘to be,’ भूत्वा
bhitud, ‘having been’ (see 80. XXI): andly, as formed by affixing
य ya to roots compounded with prepositions or other adverbial pre-
fixes ; thus, fr. अनुभू anubhi, ‘to perceive, अनुभूय anubhiya, ‘having
perceived ;’ fr, सज्जीभू sajjibhi, ‘to become ready,’ सन्नीभूय sayibhiya,
‘having become ready.’ The sense involved in them is generally
expressed by the English ^ when,’ ‘after,’ ‘having,’ or ‘by ;’ thus,
तत् कृत्वा tat kritvd, “when he had done that,’ ‘after he had done
that,’ ‘having done that,’ ‘by doing that.? See Syntax, 898.
a. The suffix tvd of this participle is thought by some to be the instrumental
case of a suffix tva (see 80. XXI). The Indeclinable Participle has certainly much
of the character of an instrumental case (see Syntax, gor).
Obs.—In the Veda FATT, त्वानम्; त्वीनम् or त्वी are sometimes used for त्वा .
‘Indeclinable Participles formed with tva from uncompounded roots,
556. When the root stands alone and uncompounded, the Inde-
clinable Participle is formed with rat évd.
This suffix is closely allied to the त ¢a of the Past Passive Parti-
ciple at 531, so that the rules for the affixing of ¢a to the root
generally apply also to the Indeclinable suffix त्वा ¢vd, and the forma~
tion of one Participle then involves that of the other.
Thus, सित kshipta, ‘thrown,’ सिप्रा kshiptvd, ‘having thrown;’ कतं ‘done’ (rt. कृ ),
कृत्वा ‘having done;’ स्थित (rt, स्या), स्थित्वा; दृष (५. YH), FETs TA (५. BN), TAT
Gg2
228 PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES,
पीत (rt. पा), पीत्वा; क्रान्त (xt. क्रम्), BIT; गृहीत (rt. TE), गृहीत्वा ; उषित (५. वस्),
उधित्वा; उक्त (rt. वच्), TH; TF (rt. बुध्), बुद्धा ; ऊढ (ct. TE), TT हित (rt. धा),
हित्वा; जग्ध (rt. घस्), जग्ध्वा; गत (rt. गम् 545), गत्वा.
a, Where é is inserted, there is generally gunation of final i, é, ४
a, and of final = 7é and of medial ¥ ri; and optional gunation of
medial 2, w (except as debarred by 28).
Thus, शयित्वा fr. शी ; पवित्वा (915० पूत्वा) fr. Ys AGA or नीत्वा fr. जू; लिखित्वा
or लेखित्वा fr. लिख्; Bharat or द्योतित्वा £ द्युत्; मृषित्वा or मित्वा fr. मृष्.
2. But from दिव्, देवित्वा and eat; from सिव्, सेवित्वा and war.
So छव् &c. The root ary makes जागरित्वा (532. a); and initial ४, w,
before single consonants, must be gunated ; as, इष् makes एषित्वा.
९. The roots in the list at 390.a. do not admit Guna; thus, विन्
can make only विजित्वा.
d. When there are two forms of the Passive Participle, there is often only one of
the Indeclinable; thus, नृत् makes नृत्त and नित, but only afarat; SM, OT
and लज्जित, but only कज्जित्वा; and, vice versa, वस् (543) only उषित, but उषित्वा
and उष्टा; सह्, सोढ, but सहित्वा and Wet; FA, मृष्ट, but arfatrat and FBT. So,
some roots in nasals optionally insert 2; WA, तत्वा or afarat; सर, सत्वा or
कणित्वा; कम्, कानवा or कमित्वा; क्रम्, क्रान्त्वा or AAT or क्रमित्वा; खन्, खात्वा
or खनित्वा.
९. The penultimate nasal, which is rejected before ta (544.4), is optionally so
rejected before tvd in TH, WH, GA, TH or तच्? and Wa; thus, from TH comes
TH, but Tal or रक्ता; from WH, WHAT, संक्रा or Wal.
f. मनन् and नञ् optionally insert 1298818 ; मक्ता or मक्ता, WET or नेष्ट, 390. k.
9. Some few roots necessarily retain their nasals; thus, स्कन्द् makes स्कन्तवा ; and
स्यन्द्, WAT or स्यन्दित्वा.
557- The only important variation from the Past Passive Participle occurs in
those roots, at 31.a, which take na for ta. The change of १४ to é and dr ( 534)
is preserved (unless i be inserted), but tvd never becomes nvd; thus, ज्? जीरो,
but जणिविा (or HUT); from त्, तीर > but wat; from पृः पूणो, but Wat ; from
faz, छिन्न, but FRAT; from WH, ATA, but HAT or भक्ता (556. ९); from FA, VT,
but Tal; from हा, ata, but हित्वा ‘ having quitted’ (not distinguishable in form
from हित्वा ‘having placed,’ root धा).
558. Observe, moreover, that verbs of cl. 10 and Causals, which reject the
characteristic aya before the ita of the Past Pass. Part., retain ay before itvd; thus,
स्यापित ‘made to stand’ (fr. Caus. stem स्यापय), but स्थापयित्वा ‘having made to stand ;”
चिन्तित“ thought’ (fr. चिन्त् cl. 10, ‘to think’), but चिन पित्वा ‘ having thought.’
a. All Derivative verbs of course assume i, and form their Indeclinable Participles
analogously to Causals; thus, बुबोधिषित्वा (fr. Desid. of बुध्), and बोबुधित्वा (fr.
Freq. of चुध्). In regard to the Atmane Frequentatives, लोकठूयित्वा is formed fr.
लोलूय, and देदीपित्वा fr, देदीष्य (ya in the latter being preceded by a consonant).
PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. 229
` ४. There are one or two instances of compounded roots formed with tvd; thus,
अनुध्यात्वा (fr. ध्ये), पिव, 1. 2, 20; also WUT, Ramay. 1. 74, 23. Especially in
the case of Causals; as, निवतेयित्वा.
c. When ¥ a, ‘not,’ is prefixed, tvd is always used; as, अकृत्वा ‘not having
done,’ ‘without having done ;? अद्च्वा ‘not having given.’
Indeclinable Participles formed with ya from compounded roots.
559. When a root is compounded with a preposition or any
indeclinable prefix (except ¥ a, ‘not,’ see 558.c), the Indeclinable
Participle is formed by affixing 4 ya, and the rules for annexing it to
the root are some of them analogous to those which prevail in other
cases in which ya is affixed; see the rules for forming the Special
tenses in cl. 4 (272), for Passives (461), and for the Precative (443).
560. But if a root end in a short vowel, instead of lengthening
this vowel, त् ४ is interposed ; as, fr. आचि déri, ‘to take refuge’ (rt. far
with सा), आधित्य déritya, ‘having taken refuge ;? fr. faf (rt. चि with
निस्), निश्चित्य; fr. st, saya; from संस्कृ (rt. कृ with सम्), wena ; fr. निःसु,
निःसृत्य. The lengthening of the radical vowel by coalition does not
prevent this rule ; as, fr. सती 01८ (rt. = with अति), site atitya.
a. जागृ ‘to awake’ gunates its final as in उज्जागयें; and fe ‘to
destroy,’ ‘to waste,’ lengthens its final as in wata, उपक्षीय.
561. Ifa root end in long चा ठ, ई ¢ or क ४ no change generally
takes place ; as, fr. fret, विहाय; fr. saat, उपक्रीय; fr. fay, विधूय.
a. If it end in long चु 7४, this vowel becomes £ and after labial
letters a; thus, fr. अवक्, सवकीयै ‘having scattered ; fr. खपु (root
पु ‘to fill’), आपूय (compare 534).
562. Final diphthongs pass into ST द; as, fr. uftal, परिव्याय (also परिवीय);
fr. अभिष्य, अभिध्याय; £. सवसो, अवसाय.
a. But = with सा makes साहूय. In Epic poetry, सो with व्यव makes WAST.
b. मि ‘to throw,’ At ‘to kill,’ AT ‘to measure,’ and मे ‘to barter,’ all make -माय.
Similarly, @t ‘to decay,’ -दाय; but st ‘to adhere,’ -लाय or -त्कीय (see 390. ९).
fox and की conform to the rule for the Passive (-शूय, -षाय्य); पधिजञय्य “having
reclined upon,’ Kirat. 1, 38.
563. A penultimate nasal is generally rejected, as in Passives (see 469); as, fr.
समासन् samdsanj, समासज्य samdsajya ; fr, WAY, प्रमथ्य (used adverbially in the
sense ˆ violently’).
a. Some few roots retain the nasal; thus, ATE makes अज्य ; and आलिङ्क,
आलिद्खघय.
8. लन् ‘to acquire’ may insert a nasal after the prepositions AT and JW; thus,
WIBAY &c. (otherwise -लन्य).
564. If a root end in a consonant the general rule is, that no change takes place ;
230 PAST INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES,
as, from faferq nikship, निकष्य nikshipya; from प्राप् (root आप् with प्र), प्राय;
-from are (root aa with वि), area.
a, But roots in र् or व्, preceded by $ or u, lengthen these vowels, as in प्रिदीव्य
from दिव्, विस्मये from स्फुर्.
6, Four roots in म् (गम्, नम्» यम्; रम्) optionally reject the nasal, and interpose
t between the final a and ya; as, from fai, निगैत्य or निमैम्य. The roots इन्»
मन्, तन्, वन्, AT, fer, WU, घृण्, FT, TT always reject the nasal; as, from
निहन्, निदाय.
९. खन्, जन्, and सन् optionally reject the न्; but instead of interposing ¢,
lengthen the final a, as in Passives (see 470); thus, from उत्खन्, उत्वाय (or उत्खन्य).
. 565. The changes which take place in certain roots before the ya of the Passive
(471, 472) are preserved before ya; as, from निवप्, न्युप्य; from विवस्; व्युष्य ; from
प्रवस्, प्रोष्य; from अनुवद्, अनूद्य ; from विग्रह्, FATS; from MWS, आपृच्छय ; from
TTY, watfaea ; and so with all the roots at 471, 472.
a. The roots at 390. 1. have two forms; thus, from गुप् comes -गोपाय्य and -71q, &९.
8. There are one or two instances in which an uncompounded root takes 4; as,
सच्यै ‘having reverenced,’ Manu 1, 4; शा. 145: Mahé-bh. iii. 8017. उष्य ‘having
resided,’ Nala v. 41 (from वस्); Ta 1 having taken,’ Astra-siksha 21.
566. In affixing य ya to the stems of Causal verbs of cl. 10, and the 3rd class of
Nominals (521), the characteristic खय is generally rejected ; as, fr. प्रबोधय prabo-
dhaya, ATA prabodhya ; fr. WAITY, HATA; fr. सन्द् रीय, सन्द् इय ; fr. विचारय, विचाये.
। a. It is, however, retained when the root ends in a single consonant and encloses
short a; thus, विगणय्य ‘having calculated’ (गर् with fa); आकलय्य ‘having
imagined’ (wes with आ); WFAA ‘having narrated’ (कथ् with BA): and also
sometimes in other cases; e.g. ATTA “having conducted,’ Raghu-v. xiv. 45.
` ¢ The final a of Frequentative stems is of course dropped, and the final ya of
both Frequentatives and Nominals, if preceded by a consonant; as, from BISA
comes -ल्ोठू्य ; from APA, -बोवुध्य ; from तपस्य, -तपस्य,
Adverbial Indeclinable Participle.
567. There is another Indeclinable Participle yielding the same sense as those
formed with tvd and ya, but of rare occurrence. It is equivalent to the accusative
case of a noun derived from a root, used adverbially; and is formed by adding
अम् am to the root, before which suffix changes of the radical vowel take place,
similar to those required before the Causal suffix खयं (481) or before the 3rd sing.
Aorist Passive (see 475); thus, from At nz, " to lead,’ नायम् ndyam, “having led ;’
from पा ` to drink,’ पायम् “having drunk ;’ from दे, RTA; from पच्, पाचम् ; from
सिप्; छेपम्; from इन् ‘to kill,’ ‘ATA. It often occupies the last place in a com-
pound ; as in the expression समूलघातम् “having totally exterminated ;’ and in the
following passage from Bhatti-k. ii, 11:
लतानुपातं कुसुमान्यगृ SA स नद्यवस्कन्दमुपास्पृशच् |
कुतूहलाच्चारूशिलोपवेशं ages ईषत्सयमान आस्त ॥
‘The descendant of Kakutstha, smiling softly, repeatedly bending down the
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 231
creepers, would pluck the blossoms; descending to the streams, would sip (the
waters); seating himself on some variegated rock, would recline in admiration (of
the scene)” Compare also Sakuntalé, Act V, verse 131, argrerg क्रन्दितुं प्रवृत्ता
“ repeatedly throwing up her arms she began to weep.’ Other examples are
नामग्राहम् ‘mentioning by name,’ and जीवग्राहम् ‘taking alive.’
५. These Participles generally imply repetition of the action, as above, and in this
sense are themselves often repeated ; as, ddyam, ddyam, ‘having repeatedly given.’
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
568. These are gerundive in their character, and may be called
verbal adjectives. They may be classed under three heads: 1st, as
formed with the suffix wa tavya (80. XVIII); 2ndly, as formed with
अनीय aniya (80. V); 3rdly, as formed with य ya (80. XXVIII).
These suffixes yield a sense corresponding to the Latin Fut. Pass.
Part. in dus, and the English 060८ and ible, and most commonly
denote ‘obligation’ or ‘ propriety’ and ‘fitness.’
a. In some of the Latin formations with tivus, the Passive sense is preserved, as
in captivus, nativus, coctivus. Cf. Sk. ddtavya with dativus (dandus), doréos ;
yoktavya with (con)junctivus (jungendus); janitavya with genitivus (gignendus);
dhdtavya with beréos, &c. |
Future Passive Participles formed with तव्य (80. XVIII).
569. These may be formed by substituting तव्य ¢avya for ता éd,
the termination of the 3rd pers. sing. of the ist Future; e.g.
From Wat ksheptd, ‘he will throw,’ ary ksheptavya, ‘to be thrown 5 कतो ‘he
will do,’ कव्य ‘to be done;’ fr. भविता “he will be,’ भवितव्य ‘about to be;’ fr.
कुचित, कुचितव्य (see 39०. a); fr. विजिता, विजितव्य.
Obs.—In the case of those roots ending in consonants which
reject i, whatever changes take place before ¢d, the same take place
before ६५९४८, and the special rules at 390. a—o will equally apply to
this suffix.
Thus, त्यक्ता, त्यक्तव्य (relinquendus); Wel, WEA; Yl, GIA; बोद्धा, बोद्धव्य;
दग्धा, दग्धव्य ; सोढा, सोढव्य ; कमिता or कामयिता, कमितव्य or कामयितव्य ; दीधिता,
दीधितव्य; ATET or माजिता, माव्य or माजिंतव्य ; and from Causal कारयिता, कारयितव्य;
from Desid. बुबोधिषिता, बुबोधिषितव्य ; from Frequentative वोबुधिता, वोवुधितव्य ;
from बोभविता, बोभवितव्य. See the rules at 388, 390, 491, 505, 513, 516.
Future Passive Participles formed with अनीय (80. V).
570. This suffix is added directly to the root, and generally with-
out other change than gunation (if Guna is admissible).
232 FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
Thus, fr. चि di, ‘to gather,’ चयनी य cayantya, ‘to be gathered ;’ fr. Y, ATATT;
fr. कृ, करणीय (58); fr. लिख्, SAAT; £. YY, शोधनीय; fr. |W, ergata;
fr. कृष्, BATT ; fr. चुर् (cl. 10), ACMA: but मृज्, मानय; गुह् गूहनीय ; दीधी,
दीध्यनीय; कम्, कमनीय and कामनीय; गुप्, गोपनीय and गोपायनीय, &०. See
390. 4. 1. m.
a. A final diphthong is changed to चा 4, which blends with the
initial @ of anfya; as, from W, wrata; from गे, गानीय.
b, The roots at 390, 390. a. of course forbid Guna; thus, कुचनीय
from कुच्; गुवनीय from 7, &c.
८. As to Derivative verbs, aya is rejected from a Causal stem, and
a from the stems of other Derivative verbs, and ya, if a consonant
precedes.
“Thus, बोधनीय from the Causal stem बोधय ; बुबोधिषणीय from the Desid.
बुबोधिष; also बोभ्रूयनीय _ ~afguaiz, fr. the Frequentatives बोभूय, चल्िष्यः; and
तपस्यनीय or तपसनीय fr. the Nominal तपस्य.
Future Passive Participles formed with य (80. XXVIII).
571. Before this suffix, as before all others beginning with y,
certain changes of final vowels become necessary.
a. If a root end in चा 4, or in Be, @ ai, Bo, changeable to wt d,
this vowel becomes र e (compare 446); e. g.
. From मा md, ‘to measure,’ मेय meya, ‘to be measured,’ ‘measurable ;? fr. हा hd,
“to quit,’ हेय heya; fr. ध्ये dhyai, ‘to meditate,’ ध्येय dhyeya ; fr. गे “to be weary,’
गेयः; fr. दा ‘to give,’ द ‘to pity,’ and दो ‘to cut,’ देय.
8. If in gi, इ £ उ ४, or ऊ ४, these vowels are gunated; e.g.
From चिक, चेय éeya (in the Veda चाय्य with उप); but At with उट्, -नीय.
But the Guna Wi ० is changed to av, and sometimes ट e to ay,
before ya (as if before a vowel); thus, from चू, भव्य; from जि ‘to
conquer, जय ; from क्री ‘to buy, क्रष्य ; from fe ‘to destroy,’ War.
And the Guna स्रो 0 passes into dv before y, especially when it is
intended to lay emphasis on the meaning; as, from च्यु, ura; from
सु, आव्य; from श्रू, भाव्य. But धू ‘to shake’ makes yq.
€. If in & ri or च्छु, १४, these vowels are vriddhied; €. g.
From कृ ‘to do,’ काये; from भृ ‘to support,’ AT (also भत्यः, see 572); fr. वृ ‘to
choose,’ वाये (also वृत्य).
d. The roots at 390. ९. drop their finals (द्ध्य, दसद).
872. Sometimes if a root end in a short vowel no change takes place, but ¢ is
interposed, after the analogy of the Indeclinable Participle formed with ya at 560;
FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES, 233
so that the stem of the Future Participle is often not distinguishable from the
Indeclinable; thus, from जि, ‘ to conquer,’ जित्य jitya (also jeya), ‘ conquerable ;
from स्तु stu, to praise,’ स्तुत्य stutya, ‘laudable ;’ from कृ kri, “to do, कृत्य kritya
(as well as काये), “practicable ;’ from ¥ ‘to go,’ इत्य ‘to be gone;’ from आदू to
honour, खा दूत्य to be honoured.’
573+ If a root end in a single consonant with a medial a, the latter may be
vriddhied ; as, fr. ग्रह् grah, “to take,’ QT@l grdhya; fr. तप् to be ashamed,’ ताप्य ;
fr. कम् ‘to love,’ काम्य : but not always; as, fr. WR, WH; fr. सह्, सद्य ; fr. TY,
TU; fr. यत्+ AM: and not if the final is a labial (except AY, रप्, HA); as, fr
गम्, गम्य; fr. शप्, WA; fr. लम् ‘to receive,’ HA (and BAA). The root Ag ‘to
be mad’ makes ATS after prepositions, but otherwise मद्य Similarly, गह् and चर्,
The root भन् to serve’ makes WT and भाग्य (see 574)
९. If with a medial इं 2 or Jw, these are generally gunated; as, from भुन्, भोज्य;
from faz, Sa; but FX, FA: and sometimes only optionally ; as, गहू makes Ta
as well as गोद्य > and दुह्? द्द and aa
6. If with a medial Y ri, no change generally takes place; as, # स्पृश्, स्पृश्य;
fr, EM, EIA; fr. FA, सुज्य (after अव and सम्, WA); fr. मृज्, मृज्य (also माग्यै) :
but †. वृष्, JH or aa
c. The roots at 390, 390. a. are, as usual, debarred from Guna; thus, #4, &c.
574. A final च् € may sometimes be changed to & k, and final ज् 7 to ग् 9, when
the Past Passive Participle rejects 7; as, from पच् pad, पाक्व pdkya and UTA pdcya;
from युज्? योग्यणः युग्य. When the final is unchanged, as in pd¢ya, the obligation
implied is said+o be more absolute; but the two forms may have distinct meanings;
thus, bhojya (fr. bhuj) means ‘to be eaten,’ but bhogya, ‘to be enjoyed ;’ vdcya (fr.
vaé) means ‘proper to be said,” but vdkya, ‘that which is actually to be said.’
a, Again, त्याज्य (fr. MS) is used after the prepositions fa and प्र, otherwise MPa.
Similarly, योज्य (8. युज्) after नि and प्र, and यज्य or याज्य (fr. यज्) after the same
prepositions.
2. Other anomalous changes may take place, some of which are similar to those
before the ya of Passives; thus, fr. 7, Ta as well as ATA (472); fr. वद्, उद्य
(471, also वद्य); fr यज्, इज्य (471); fr. शास्, शिष्य (472. ०); fr. खन् to dig, खेय; fr
म् ‘to praise,’ शस्य or शस्य; fr WHT to fry,’ भज्ज्यं or WITT; fr. TT, वध्यं or ATT.
c. The roots beginning with गुप् at 390. J. have two forms; thus, गाप or गोपाय्य.
575. Many of these Participles are used as substantives; thus, वाक्य n. ` speech ;’
भोज्य 2. ‘food;’ भोग्या f. ‘a harlot ;? इज्या £. “sacrifice ;’ खेय n. ‘a ditch;’ भायो +.
‘a wife,’ fr. भू ‘to support,’ &c.
576. The suffix ya may be added to Desiderative, Frequentative, and Nominal
stems in the same way as anfya (570); thus, बुबोधिष्य, aha, fear, तपस्य. So
also, from Fae “a pestle,’ मुसस्य “to be pounded with a pestle.’
a. अ ¢ added to a root after gunation (if Guna is possible) gives
the sense of a Future Passive Participle when in composition with
nh
234 PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE.
मु, दुस्, and ईषत् ; as, मुकर ‘easy to be done,’ दुष्कर ‘difficult to be
done,’ दुस्तर ‘ difficult to be crossed.’ See 80. I.
8. Again, a suffix wfasa added to a few roots has the same force
as the suffixes of the Future Passive Participle; ९. £. पचेलिम ‘fit to
ripen’ or ‘to be cooked,’ fatfesa ‘to be broken.’
577. The inflexion of Future Passive Participles follows that of
adjectives at 187; thus, कतव्य ‘to be done;’ N. sing. m.f.n. karta-
vyas, -d, -am, Similarly, karaniyas, -d, -am; and kdryas, ~d, -am.
PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE.—FORMATION OF STEM.
578. These are not common. They are of two kinds, either Parasmai-pada or
Atmane-pada; and, like Present Participles, are most easily formed by changing
शपन्ति anti, the termination of the 3rd pl. of the 2nd Fut., into त् at, for the
Par.; and by changing Wt ante into MATA amdna, for the Atm.; thus, from करि-
ष्यन्ति karishyanti and कर्प्यिने karishyante, ‘they will do,’ come करिष्यत् karishyat
and करिष्यमाण karishyamdna (58), ‘about to do;’ from the Passive 2nd Fut. वयन्ते
“they will be said’ comes वद्यमाणां ‘about to be said’ (see 84. I. and 80. XXVII).
a. In their inflexion (see 141), as well as in their formation, they resemble
Present Participles; see 524 and 526.
Obs.—Cf. Greek in Sa0=j,€v0-5 = ddsya-mdna-s.
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY.
579. These have been already incidentally noticed at 80, 83, 84, 85,
87. As, however, they partake of the nature of Participles, and are
often used as Participles (see Syntax, gog—911), a fuller explanation
of them is here given. They may be classed under three heads: ist,
as formed from the root; 2ndly, as formed from the same stem as
the 1st Future; 3rdly, as formed from the root by changes similar
to those which form the Causal stem.
580, The stem of the first class is often identical with the root
itself; that is, the unchanged root is frequently used at the end of
compounds as a noun of agency, ¢ being added if it ends in a short
vowel; see examples at 84. III. and 87.
a, Another common noun of agency is formed from the root by
affixing wa (as in the first group of conjugational classes at 2.57),
before which a, Guna, and rarely Vriddhi, of a final vowel is required ;
as, from जि ji, ‘td conquer,’ जय jaya, ‘conquering.’ Medial vowels
are generally unchanged ; as, from aq vad, ‘to say,’ वद् vada, ‘saying ;’
from तुट् tud, ‘to vex,’ तुद् tuda, ` vexing’ (see 80. 1),
6, And final सा ¢ सम् am, or खन् an are dropped ; as, from दा
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY. 235
dd, ‘to give,’ द् da, ‘giving ;? from गम् gam, ‘to go, ग ga, * going +
from जन् jan, ‘to be born, ज ja, ‘being born.’ Their declension
follows that of adjectives at 187.
581. The stem of the second class (see 83) may be always inferred
from the 3rd pers. sing. of the 1st Fut. of Primitive verbs, the vowel
छ 7i being substituted for the final vowel d, the nominative case being
therefore identical with the 3rd pers. sing. of that tense (see 386).
Thus, भोक्ता bhoktd, “he will eat,’ a bhoktri, ‘an eater ;’ योद्धा ‘he will fight,”
ag “a fighter ;” याचिता ‘he will ask,’ याचितु “an asker ;’ सोढा ‘he will bear,’
ag “a bearer,’ &c. They are inflected at 127.
582. The stem of the third class is formed in three ways.
a. By adding इन् in to the root (see 85. II), before which suffix
changes take place similar to those required before the Causal suffix
aya (481, 482, 483); as, from कृ, कारिन् kdrin, ‘a doer ;? from eq (488),
घातिन् ghdtin, ‘a killer ;? from yi, शायिन् ‘a sleeper :’ y being inserted
after roots in d (483); as, from at, पायिन् ‘a drinker ;’ from et,
दायिन् ddyin, ‘a giver” They are inflected at 159. ।
४. By adding अक aka to the root (see 80. II), before which suffix
changes take place analogous to those before the Causal aya (481,
482, 483); as, fr. कृ, कारक kdraka, ‘a doer, ‘doing ;’ fr. नी, नायक
ndyaka, ° 2 leader,’ ‘leading;’ fr. 7, ग्राहक grahaka; fr. fay, साधक; fr.
इन्, धातक ; fr. दुष्, दूषक; fr. AA, क्रमक; fr. नन्द्, नन्दक; ¢. स्था, स्यापक.
९. By adding Wa ana to some few roots ending in consonants
(see 80. IV), after changes similar to those required in forming the
Causal stem; as, fr. नन्द्, नन्दन nandana, ‘ rejoicing ;* fr. दुष्, gaa
‘ vitiating ;? fr. शुध्, शोधन ‘cleansing.’
The inflexion of the last two follows that of adjectives at 187.
EXAMPLES OF INFLECTED VERBS.
583. The following tables give a synopsis of the inflexion of the
Primitive forms of the ten roots: बुध् dudh, cl. 1, ‘to know ;” नृत् ११४६,
cl. 4, ‘to dance ; दिश् dig, cl. 6, ‘to point out ;? युज् yy, cl. 10, ‘to
unite ;?, fag vid, cl, 2, ‘to know ;? भु bhri, cl. 3, ‘to bear ;? fae bhid,
cl. 7, ‘to break ;? चि di, cl. 5, ‘to gather ;” तन् tan, cl. 8, ‘to stretch ;”
षू pu, cl. 9, ‘to purify :* classes I, 4, 6, and 10; 2, 3, and 7; and 5,
गर, and 9, being grouped together as at 257-259. Then the Passive
forms of these ten roots are given, followed by the Present tense of the
Causal, Desiderative, and Frequentative forms, and the Participles,
प्र 12
236
‘OPE 938 ‘nun? pus nuty Jo n oy} Jo Buiddorp Teuondo oy} ०} 8y ‘our, aaddn भपप pooed ore fouy ‘s1ay 40 BY} JO asoy} WOT बशर? sasseyo पूता pur “439
सपुरः कडा oY4 JO SUOTJRUTULIA, OY} LaADUAY AA 029 ‘aspypog=as-+-nypog ‘aypog=1-+ ny pag ‘oueulyy
“ong ‘snapypog==sna+ pypog वृषण]? एश 27240०4 =
== + ०104
"प्ऽ ६ “svypog=ws+ nypog "णह pe ‘upypog—wu--pypog ‘reuisereg "भव् “Puls १87 (भाप : इप्णृष्पप्य्थै O44 पुपरा+ popuN -aq 0} ग पह अपृत--०५ 3४0)
ayo > ठ ays a 1४ 18 { 6g SL fz
9042 = ०१४९५ ०4/20 a} : ४12 = SoU 52 8०११ spa ५ + ऋण
०१४ | % ap ay १४|| 9 ४ { ‘Ol'g ‘F'I
und| gund| gund| द| und} jzund द| gund) und und. yund| gund| yund| yund| yund| pund| ,pund| pund ng ‘6
aun | ऋण | कणठ | कथा | aun?| कषण | nung| 7४ | aung 0४ | 908 | 70 | nunz| ऋ | ऋषा | ounz ०४४7 | oun} ४, “8
ang 09 | muy! amp) auip| ऋष | ऋष | mop! -aurp 409 | muy) 2४2 | 9702 | 900 muy ०४9 | = 0४2 | our 22) *¢
१५१११ | 2१44 | ०4१ | ०४०4१ | puryg| ०५१4१ | १५०५१ |x २०५११ | puryg|| pusyg| २१५११ | puryq| २४०५१ | २५०११ | 2५244 | २०५११ 2०५११ pomyg| = 24 "८
yng | १११०१ | migra | 4१4 | 4११ | signa | १११५ | ११११ | 41929 |),.0492 | ९५११ | ९०१११ | १११०१ | ११११ | oyqrg | ८०१११ | ०१११ |.०११११ | ing “€
pm pia) pw) = 2 | pa pia HO) 4 HQ) pra 224. २२९ | pia 1 ya pi faa | ऋ 22 | 20 PIA "ट
४०८2 | vholoh 1) vholoh vhvlok \phnlok |nivloh |००(2/॥ \nhnfos |\vhinlok [०९०८० 101 vholok \ninlok [10/06 | 20206 | 29/24 | 22/०0 {nx "छा
| पर| 0 | | क| psip) msi) | sip) क| 90|| ऋ | 90 | 0 | | | 20 | psp sd 9
260 | ofigein | phigeiu | ofgeiu | छ | कद | ०0 | ०११४ | ० || ०११ ०६११५ | ९८ | ०१८ | 21. | pfigeiu| ०४71 | ०0 | 92.20 गरल *¥
०१००१ | ०१००१ | PYPOG | ०५००१ | ०१००१ | १०१ | ०१००१ | ०१०१ | ०५४०4 || ०१००१ | ०१¶०¶ | pYpog| ०१०१ | ०१००१ | 40०4 | vypog| ०१००4 .। ०4४०१ | Ypng "7
“TVaOTd “Ivaa “SNIS ‘| "र्षवत् "शरत "छरा "700
*vVaVd-3NVWLY *vavd-IVWSVuvg
10908 12801
‘SNOILVONLNOD WO SASSVIO NAL AHL AO SETA HALLINIUd JO WHLS AHL AO NOIXWIANI
37
"OPE 998 ‘nunzn pus 21042
n अपृ Jo Buiddorp yeuoydo 24 03 sy "ट Aq a कण् पण्टणुप्तय छ Jo 2 [रप् OY} YIM PUTA वा dnoa¥ 4s1 917} Jo syoor oy} Jo surays छप JO ० [eUy oy} ouvulyy
oq} Ul “eoueygn ‘unyqugn “aan “Furs p€ pue pz ‘snyy : P62 Aq suoweutuise, 943 १००[अ dnosd Pz 94} JO Spoor ony ‘TeuseIeg “duIs [६ pue pz oy प-- ०५49840
। ` Sty ~
277 ‘upp = 41 ४ UD uD : "6-89-८. द
wupayp = siyou । eypa D2 spy 2 21 pu wp wn} pa 2 ड
[
nu mp. 0108 u ५1 ‘org Fr
undo| yundo| jundn| undo| undo) ऋष्क gyundn| gundp| undo undo| yundn| zundy| zundn| zundo undo) -pundy| -pund»| pundn ng 6
कक ऋ] च| (| ००2 mud») अठ nunzo| auvzo|| aunzo| nunzo| कण| nunzo| nunzo| nunzn| ounzo| ounzo| कण्ण ४४, 8
aun] mungn) muro} aun) ayn) nutgo| nasgo| nuypn| auspo auyo| nugo) nuyn| nusyo| mgo) murpn| oun) ompn| anugn 20 °S
punyqn| puryqn| puryqn| puryqn| purygn| purygn Funyqn) puryqn) 01440 puygn unyqn| puryqn| २५८१४१४ urygn| purygn| JoUyQn| 7०५१११० ०९१११०| pryg "८
4१९० २१५१९५० eiygqngn| 0०|| क| aiygegn| niygrgn) तदक | कव्व niygeqn| शवक ११० riygrgn| siqrgn| ८०१९० | ०११५० wygrqn| —aiyge *€
pian, 202 pian Pian) pian pun yan quan) = pian > 0200 quan pup 2208 २४|| = 208 joan jaav| {549 Pia *%
ohn toho\n holo kn phn fo hn |०/02/0102 (60000 (02/00 |०0०/069|०00200| ००/29 || »fnlofn|nkolohn|phinlohn\nhvlofn|nhvlokn pin fokn| nhivlo hn ००/०४ | fax 01
कण| पठ् पत कत् क| psipD|. vsypo| छत् षण् nsypo| शण पषण vsipo| शठ psipo| सण् छण कण| त 9
2040 ० वण| ० | ०1040 | वण| ०00 | ०0.1४9 | ०0000 एव| ०८० ०0 | छ छथ क| ० छण vipdun| pin *P
DYPOgD| ०47004४ | PYpogn| HYpogn) ०१७०९१० | YYPogD| DYypogD| nYpogn| ०१७० || ०१[००¶४ DYPOQD) 74०१४ | ०७०१४ | ०७०१४ pYpogn| ०170०40 | DYpogn| vypogn| = भण "7
“Ivana i "प्ररत i “DNIS “IVaOTd "TIVO “ONIS १००
*VaVd-ENVALY *‘VdVd-IVNSVAV
“GLIUGLaAdd LSUld "० LOAAAAMWI
238
*vhaypog = vhy+nypog ‘ousuyy {+029 ‘saypog = 5! + vypog ८०091004 = unhr + vypog
-fenyy : ८६ Aq a भण pusyq [TIAA १०५०५ omg osoyy 4 ILM पा$०त् SUOIYBUTUIIE, GY} PUB % UT Spue 86988४२ Jo तात्य 491 OY} UI पथश 94} 8ष- 2428460)
[|| sak nh कथ | चण woh ऋष | wh sph wh {6-gSL-€-e
unas wnayps syouy|upyphy wpysphy tynas| 9 अषप ०8
(|| safe 2 21 | धवः 2 at it 8४ woke { 019"
॥
und) und! und) wnd| und) und} und) und} कष्ठ || णद | yund| gund| gund| yund| yund| gund| zund| कषक nq 6
५०३ | = ०7 | ५५४7 | = व | 4४20 | aunjz| कथा | कण्ण | aunz|| nunz) nung) nung| पणा | ऋआ | ऋष | ऋण | 2४0 | nunjz| ny, ह
au} क| क| auy| autp| क| aus! क| auy|| ऋ | व| mm) कण| nuy| थ| nuy| nuy| nuy 19 °S
१५१५१ | pusyg| ०५२११ | puryg| ०५०११ | puryq) puryg| puryq| puryq|| pusyq| puryq| puryq| ०१4१ | ०५०4१ | ०44 | puryg| ०५4१ | ०५044 | pug -८
५११4 | “५१६१ | 4999) “4१५ | «५११ | 44929] “११६५ | 4११ | 4११ || 1444 | २-१५ | 14424 | 14404 | 4१04 | ११५ | 24404 | २.44:4 | २०५११ | =: “E
pra] pia) pia] 20 | = 28 | = 220 | 222 | = 210 | pt || = 244 | = 0 | = 24 | = 20 | = 224 | = 0० | = 274 | = 220 | = 790 | pt "ट
vholok |॥०(०/॥ |2/०(2/ \ohnlok [००/०6 |\phvlohk 20०20 vhnlok [42/06 || ००० [००/०6 [००८2 | ००८26 (०0/०0 pholoh ohvlok |pinloh|nfivfoh| xX or
0 | 200 | | 200 | | wsip| 2 | | vsip|| wsyp| 90 | vsip| | 290 | | 090 | 0 | vip ॐत -9
| ०४ | ०६६१४ | ००४ | ०2 | ohzeiu | छद | छ्य | णय | ०00 || ०070 | ०0 | 29 | ०४ | ofigeiu| ० | ०४ | ० | 20४ | श्प “>
०४०१ | ०१४०१ | ०११०१ | ०१४०१ | DYPOG | ०५४०१ | DYpOg | ०4९०१ | DYpO || ०4०१ | ०१००१ | ०७०१ | ०१००¶ | ०१४०१ | ०१००¶ | ०१०१ | ०५४०१ | ०१००१ | YprE ˆ
“"IVaotd “Ivo “DNIS “Ivwoatd “Ivana “DNIS “LOOD
‘vaVd-INVALY “vVdVd-1VWSV4Vg
"IVILNGLOd
239
"ट (व् ५५१०१००१ = wpyn + vypog ६£ (प् wund=1 + pund pue १०१५१०१ == १० + ०१४०१
‘ouvmpy oy णा = *26z Aq गत p& ur ष्व soy णव soxeut riyg पष् कषत अण्ण pus हर Lq 2y 10g श्र exe} WAL PUR Pe OU, “UO
-एप्य० a4} ऊप, ‘nwnz ‘nuzg ayeuI pus ‘dnosd १87 944 Jo ssoy} जज भ्र 858० पू pus 44S O44 JO 84०० जप} ‘TeUIseIE “Suis pe ayy Uj—eadesqa
ity प्फ पष ००५७ १ MPL {689८-8
८८०४८ 2०40000 २०६८ Up} 29 D2 pup up} [1 pap ny ति DD) me
0 (८ -wpys ०48 ४४८ । अ { ‘org "br
und| gund| pund| wnd| und| pund| gund} gund| pund|) und} gund| pund| yund| yund|) pund pund| gund| pund ng ‘6
०४2 | nunz| anuvz| = ०४०7 | aunj| कथ | nung) nunz| ००४०7 || = कछ | = कथ | कछ | = का | = ऋ | apupz| OUDZ) # १४८ | 4०४ ४४, *8
amy} nuy| ००0 | auy| ०४ | 00४ | थ | ऋ | वव || auy|- पव | avuyp| कष | ऋष | avuip| ० | कप | कण 22 °S
००११ | ००१५ [००५११ | puryg| ००११ (०००११ | २०५११ |+२०११ [2०५११ || ००११ | २०५११ (2०१५ | २०११ | sueyg [pouryg | २००११ (12१ pomyg| pryg “6
१९०१ | २1404 | ८०१११ | 444 | १4०१ | ०१५०१ | ५११९१ | २१५११ | ०१4२4 || 444929 | २-११५-१५ | २-4१4 | ६११९१ | ८०५११ | “०११०९ | १-५१०१ | ८०१११ | ug "८
pra| pi! paa| = 770 | = 74 | 294 | pal +| 2०|| 770 | pa) 790 | yaa | | pan} पण्य | pia) 292 | PA "ट
vhvlohi (०0०06 [००/26 |०00/2/ (०0०८6 |vfinlof |०१०/2/ |vhnlok |०६2/26 || ००/20 | ०6०26 |००(०॥ | ०26 (02/06 (०0०4० ००/24 | ०0/26 | ००/24 | fax or
क| क| फ | क| | | | vey) vey) vp) क| क| | 0 | क| vsip| | | शत 9
० | ०0 | ०0 | ofgeiu | 24४ | 270 | ०६ | ० | ० || ०९ | ० | ० 2 | ०९१४ | ० | ० | ० | ०४ | शष् "+ `
४१०१ | vypog| ०११०१ | ०११०१ | ०१७०१ | ०१४०१ | ०१४०१ | ०७०१ | ०१०१ || nypog | ०१००१ | ०११०१ | ०१०१ | ०५०१ | ०१७०१ | ०११०१ | ०५००१ | ०१०१ | YPM “I
१८.14 514 “Tvod “ONIS “Ivaold “Ivad “ONIS “LOOw
‘vdVd-dNVALY *“VdVd-1VNSV4Vq
WAILVUaId WI
240
|
D ८८६ 998 ‘aaype ०१ sy "898 998 “Burs 481 yo इप्यञ8 oy} ut वकद व्यथ ‘Angi oaryeuroyye oy, ०१ sy दा एषठ 6£1 ‘dd 9०७ ‘nfzsnyqnq दृण saxo |
२११ तव् + णस 10 ०१06 ‘snyy {Burs pz oy} ण् ०2 8 ०4५ 8B DY? गृण Ayeuorydo few 2) = -०.-98६ 008 / n+ spynguphnlol so o+anyququpfhnfok 10 0+-spuphnloh
“Burs १8 (शापुर १५696 :
OF एरर oq काप्य “ly to ‘nyg ‘sp Jo soyttojord puooss oy Jo प्र O43 एण fqnoySnoryy Anfof ०१ poppe oq ysnut mp aqeycs ayy, 4
aayp, aYDUb | ayDay aYS DU DA नै (८0
aus ००40४ २१०८५ agp ०41 ००० a ०१5 a sn 2 ५ 8/४ == 51041 par 2 217 2
andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd| andnd\| andnd| andndl andnd| andnd, andnd} andnd| apdnd| andnd| apdnd ng 6
wap ua} ४० uaz way) ५9 way} = wag] चम way) wag way uaq ४०१ way) णण waz} 79|| चण, °g
४४] ‰| ‰४| ‰| itp! = ‰| &| र| = & || | pap fig! ‰| figtp) | | त श 19 5
४११५११| ¢१4\4| ०,५११| 2:44०4| ००4११ ०4१०५ | P74 2१५११| १५११|| 2१५११ 24929) P2499) 2०१०¶| 22144 ००५११|| 0०१११ 2०१५१०१| ००११०१| 2 -८
१०१११९०१ २१५०१ $1909) 44०१११०१ ०१५०१ syqQuq\| -4१०९्| = 4१०१८९११०१्|। -44०१| 4० + iyqng| spyqng|ysoygng| wpyqng| 4 ring -£
Pina Playa praray, = 20० = ००|| praia) praza; = एव| 2909|| prara| praia) prasa}. —praza) = 2099 Pen) =—pamal = pama) = ०040 PIA "ट
4 Alok | holo) | 6०८०6 4 fnfoh) | &०26| | 6०८26 {.6०८2॥| 4 6०24 0०/26 {00/20 {.60/24| Lfnlof| 6०/20 | {6०/26 4. 60/26 | 4 62८24 4 4/24| {6०८24 fnx "छा
र| र| Syprp| SPP) SP) अ र| र| || | simp) sypyp| र| ऋ र| 50|| र| 509 Sa 9
2४४०४ | 26४09 | 2100४ | plunu| goiunu) 20४0४ | priwou २१.५०४, 14४59 || वण| goiunu! geiunu| poiuou| = 22४9४ qiunu| 2.८०४०४| 1८०0४0४ | {4०४09 श्च +
५० कक कद कषक | हत् क्ष ककत ऋष | ypngng|| कष्य कण| ypngng| Ypngng| ypngng| ypngngl ypogng| ypogng| ypogng| ypng “1
श्वर0तव “vad "छ्य “Ivana “Ivana ‘DNIS "00
*‘VaVd-ANVNLY “‘VaVd-IVWSVUVg
ALIVELAYT GNOOGS ५० LOTMA
241
‘o7g 2८065 aq
TE शप्णषपप्तत) उप् 7949
woe yey} pue £ 9 fq
"प्क Ut 029 afiszoyg SUMAOY
ose ypng FEN} “BION = (sand ng 6
2100445 3002048 2४7 unt, °8
aaypohys 2110045 ap 22 9
21०4005 sowphys
१०११ | 2046 ‘b
2०645 50705 | २८०११ | धकृत "£
ayjahys pee, ० PIA "ट
aypaphys 5०00045
2०/०८ क्ष्व गा
aqohys 20045 yop ed *9
asphiys asohys 2.400 nin *# |
afiys suphys ( + 2ypoqg ypng "व
‘HELY "00
“Wah “ALY "प्रत्य avd
‘oof fq 7 9प०००् [LM
SUOLYEULMAID} BY} JO 7 94}
ysap गश ‘gob Aq ‘uy
Ul "O29 BYPYppog SUAALOF
osye ypng 7B} “OJON x [ sand ng 6
SDLD} SDLD} 2127 Unt, "8
ग्व +| a 49 *9
ayousp. SDWSD}
२०४१ | pyg cl
20.49 NDLD} L0YQ alyg "£
०१5 ००१४१ ,. PLA "ट
००517 52510}
2/2 fax ‘or
र pL) x 4sep श्व 9
aspy wp. | apy | ping +
०१ susp; | ५20०4 | ypng "7
"प्र्त्र "पण “WUaL "चर्व ‘WLS *LOOU
अप्र 01014 ANOOAS
पप्र 0प.0ष पपात
242
‘a ‘bed dq “029 ‘spyjysiunzD 9४ [०५
98 2210 ९574102 अग feu धथ,
०१४४ up ( ,. व; ‘uy 1
( हया hq “org शप ‘spyznyqn | + UA r rq °6
१४०0007 DID 4 1apdo -xeg
०२५१० SoyeuL pus पप्र Ur ULI -
` अणक प ग् ULIOF SITY Soros ^० प्१८ ‘pryg "०९.44४ २५० "पक 1 unl, -8
५८
` | श्ण ण्य || ‘spyzeiygn sexpaur ping yeyy ममत 4१५० “med |
898 { गाषप्ा nyoys भ 4290 "प्क | 2.
ii ea ध “WY प 900 || प्क » 10 ९०० +^ + ५
qnq ‘teuser +
थप ० 0 q 1०८१8 ४८४5 2 "प्रा ] :
PUI ‘DY. ५०१ शा २१०५५१ ५ | + "प्ण † | sing £
syvap van = १० “reg |
: 1 गृप्१ SMOTTOS ५१5 ५0715
ay (aaa 2२५१४ pug -८ १ ५४११४ {० PLA "ट
१००१४ nays
yp qo ४ ~
01/10/02 (nx "गा ० 0 viys 4 a0 pys 4. 21.402 ` श्त *P
८. a spy 10 spyiys | 30 spys
9, 0 $ wp ( 16400 शध *9 +^ ५५८०5 र | 4
8 ys | 4 २४०१
“Wa "ऋण ` "धरता, ‘ava “REL “LOOW “Waa “WLy “WUGL ‘UVa “NaLs *LOOW
गा Nu0g न् ष्ण
धवपरप्रपव्रप्ित तश्रा प्रप, ४० LSIYOV
243
"867 "व 988 "००40045
"02 unis ४
(4 aq [LM suoreuruntey on} [ sandy! शव °6 ०१ श्त “org ०65 ०१५ [ sand [ शक | ng 6
one : श्ण OT} 7249 ।
म् ०४02 बु yeuy “AJON, + oe 20 1८07 | up,
2५४; | ४४, *g २०४१४ पञदढ ey “AION + uo) UDI, ह न 2 1, 8
ap 22 °S ४४०१४ uohys apo} 49 °S ap snsph » 7) 9
^ “0 ४0.045
woaypohys 21045 01510
, ५०११5
‘oof hq | १०१९ | Pry “८ २१०५६१७ === ०४405 | १०११० | pryg "८ #219 | ०6 | 2१4१ | pug *h
व २4०५४ & ;
ysap वश | 4049) siyg £ २,८०११०| wing "£ २५१ २५५१ | ning *£
, 4 wpjahys २५१०६१5 4 fh 4 00015706 -
wnj, 30 | 290 | 21 "ट ० | pra "ट ५4७ | naa pm) pia "ट
ति si wojzohys mpyrsphigys wojysnh
| (aes 24०20045 vaphys thoboo| fax "ग rynazys | 2०/06 pasph 46 | fing "ग
*१‰5०% | sid -9 91248 २०0१8 yep! 50 9 2745045 YP wh sp | sa ‘9
२५.८०४ | grin *P spyzohys 52045 | wsoun| point *¥ spyiysyys | २१.८०४ sph 204४ | going "४
+ २४०१ | yYpng "ग afiys ५८०९१ ( 2170०40 | ypng "ग ०४१७ ( wypog | wosph ( ypnq | ypng *1
‘Waa "प्रत्र "100४ पत्रय, Niy पत्रय -धष्व त्रा "700४ मध्य "प्प ‘WEIS 'प्रधत्यधरव ‘WEIS 7008
“MATLINIANT "TV NOILIGNOO
WALLOIGUNGE ५० AALLVORUd
244
( „2 ] ( yphind)|
(|| 24 । | Bd 6 णः {| श्व 6 lind [| शव 6
प्ण ४०. ४1८ J ०४ J
०५०१ | uny, 8 ०6५0; | ung -g ee | Lr +9 oie
af wi’
wunayp unaypy ५५ ५००१0 20012 J aayp | ०४०) | 1 ‘8
100 fig ]
vf} 2) °S | 19 -9 HPP । | 30 +
१०१०८५५) ‘ ११०५५ ध १० + ०४४ ie ०५५५ # ० | %
Serer 2१०९११० | + Plipryg |
—— | rfp | pug ` ८ ` णण | ० "८ 11 | ग्ण | | एकव ८ ०१ | pig "८
1 8141
mpyr eae wpyn fy bond wp || 2041४ | | , an | ११ | |
०९९११ | १ `£ | | ०९. | viyg "£ | ण | rig £ ध | श्च £
। fi wpyn |). 7
4 | ०00१0 | pia‘ ee) | कण| 212 +. at PIA ` | 4 | pia "ट
। phipran | 2010 J .
१०१० ११०० 200 » |' 4 philotn ०००५ | 2/6]
०26 | कव् "ग ०६2४ | fax -o1 | ¢ fax ‘or क filo af ८ or
; + pisipo | : 26 |
up) | ०९ | शव 9 oy | PAs) sag ण श शव 9 ` [0
2140 | तु > $ ०0 fre 2 sya वां | ध् > os | *” ४५५४ | ning -#
vas | ण | ain ४४४ | ०९५५ | a | ४४ | | + भ f | PN
० ( ofiypng | "` of | wfiypng | ypng “1 १ | भ्ण | | a ४ | स ong 1
( vhypngo J + 21874 |
"र्रर ८.01 1 *7.00ध् "पशव्यः "पष, "पच्छषः {८11 "प्रप "00 ८.11 "एताहि "700
0.900.111: 111 "IVILNGLOd ‘LOUAAAI WI 01.004 11811
‘SLOOU NHL ANVS AHL WOUA SHUAA AAISSVd JO WALS AHL 40 NOIXATANI
245
Ee ( tandiorapd| nq ‘6
०१४८०४१७
४४१ | way 8
aaypohys
ap 0299 | 22 9
०१०८0645 £
१०११ | ४४१ ८
1.
१८०११ ०० ११११ | १८१६ "£
2412045 -
०4 | 24 "ट
ayoaphys
woh x0 rhvloh| nx ‘or
२०७१४ (८०६) 1 | se ‘9
asphys 2४.८०४ | guint "#
ahys ( 2ypog | ypng "7
"प्रधमः प्रचण्ड "1008
‘aalssvg शरश्च 07.01 01२0208
( sandiorpd| ng 6
52.40
४४ | भण्, 8
०१1
१०१९ | 20 9
०4527 ‘
२०१¶ | pryg "८
NDLD}
04g 40 २५११ | ११ "£
2१ 9
०८ | १1 '८
०१०५७}
१८26 10 thofoh| fx "0
Pp (००६) ysap| ॐत "9
+. ४८०४ | शपि *b
०११ | १४०१ | ypngy "7
“RUAL “NaS ००१
ay
“a el’ uaz | ५४, *g
०217 #
‰ | 2 ४
०१०५१ न :
4१4 | pug "८
a |, 4१४१ )
^| sug "£
१०९ |
1
ayy
01024 | 2241 "ट
2० x
5400026 | (त् -o1
५ 200 | sia -9
०6४ नै २१०४ | ging “P
> ५ ypngna | ypng ‘i
"्रंधत्ण 'त्रफड “LOO
“HAISSVd शश्च (1711 LSU
‘GAIssvg ‘LOWAWad
246
( sandy 10 1andn| ng ‘6 ( 209९ 0 &गक | nq 6 4. Crt ons apdn (^ 2andn 40 1apdp ng 6
। 928 “029 44०05794¶9
०१४०७१४ ४0.445 1 a 21215
10247 | भण, *g ‘fered १४४1 | uny, 8 ०११० = upyn २४212 | ४८, -8
९१११० ०§ = "००4
८४०१645 ५००१११8 ध ८440
apo ०० ११० | 22 °S ॐ ००१ | 0 9 | [UDP १2 | 0 ०0१2 | 19 °S
: : ०५५०00० “wpypys :
syouphys ००८५5 र २4०५८१४
, ४ 4१49102 र
१०५१० | pryg "८ २१५१ | pry ८ ‘ynaysyypo —‘agopo | १० + 24१० | pyg
6 cf 7 4
_ wpjahys 0-34 wpjyspisys | , । २411402 == (24502 1.1 (SLr) neste
२८०११००० १५५१० | wiyg *E yg 10 2१4१ | २.५६ -£ पपू :woayp asoyaq | ११० 2iygn 30 244 | Mya "^
१५१०6१5 ५759645 | । ११4१० pue 67 aur0o ^ ) २4404 1 ,
५ ४०५० | 1 ट ०९ | pig "ट -9 pur ‘spyjys प्ण 2900 + PIA ट
२१००१६१5 : २4०४5 (कि Wales २१०५८५४ 2० २० |
2८०० 10 22०0 | x -01 woh 70 2/2 | mx "गा 22442 ए प 200 गणाचल loin २ 1 fax 01
५ °. : - : (0°96) thvlofn |
"४०७०१ SULMOTIOF O44 :
११०१5 yep, sia -9 ११९१४ YP) sa -9 एप भूप ut + uTL0J 0... * 1102 रष्व -9
: eyuep 943 Saxe}
१०05 ८०५४० | उ ४ श ८०४ | श "7 |, | पणप्रढपाप्यय० ey} Jo | 7 spyjys ५०४८ | pin +
ys [शप् भुत 22490
ahys | 40०42 | ypng *1 ०‰¶ | 2ypoq | ypng "प परदफ-94798वृ(0 + | {०4 245 ( २०4 |च "7
“Waa “TELS "2००६ "पतय ‘WEIS 200 "प्रत, pone घ्य यड "008
"अ^158ण्त् ‘TWNOILIGNOO
“HAISSVG श^तषत्रश्चव
“aalssvd “LSIUOV
247
( »phndod || did) ५ ( 4phvapd ] ।
-uLIOF अपथ Beene || शरवत ( १5०० {| श्रव 6 ¢ ‘Sgr ००8 ध | श्च 6
-uanbayy ou sey ^ न ‘029 करण Pe
» Dhuoqun, १ # 2452091 ] ; soyeu osye x Dhoun ( es
Ssefo IOI भप, un, "8 ‘Tuo भटक णु r| ण्ण, "8 ०0०९ 41
०५०४० ०१5४०0१ | 20--२१०।् ad
eee: phagap त aa 2458029 ] a x 200 क |
4 PY ह 6. ^+ ‘ 7 an 0
au sna ५ 8 न ८ ४ [1 1 | "9 2 au ४ ohndpg | ‰
aayp | १९०१११०१ | pug ८ | | Ateatjoodser Lom ० vy 2०११११५१ ॥ mee ie - bs | pg ८
०४०११०१ | pia pue १14 क ०७12११4 | | ' ` र ; Paya त
२४०४४ > | = pfpsygag ] ane एण : reusereg aYOU न $ x + ‰१०५.८०११२१ | व YOU x. नैः phospyq । धभ £
०४.4१० | | ` pue गप ०७१८०११५ | | ` } ००.११ J
aft » 71094 | 22 "ट qyoq ul— vysnd an aot ०१ i! pia "ट 011 | 2241 `ट
2101490 : nd ‘nd < णषु ०१९०९०० | $ ०0194 |
# 28 so ० 5०
४ -४ ०० कथन OU + pystivlofink ] + 26006 |
TPE त | | न रणम 9 ` pysthofotink [ | श्व "य | | ०००५ sua ०६6 {| MAO
००० 2, 570 520 | nysthvloink | * * : 4 ॥
] ° ०१७.१११०१ “ig त न |
«PSD r sd ‘9 fospiuu ways 1 ॐत "9 pei | sd 9
भ नी sour osye ५ Gis a ध 1
Pe A 1 sq ४ 7 ०१८०४ ;
५ [| Mar + | | प्-२५००40 ‘cnet | 4, 2 |" [^
as | whgeiuzsou | | `" “ as 2 ७११८००१४ | ४ ०९०१८०० |
2524०474 } ५ phoypog 1
॥ * 24101400 ig es Sk # २2१००११५ । कण्व “1 t my ee 004 । ypng 1
ˆ २०4०१ ( ०१००१००९" | ~ ०५०५००१ |
श्रा ध्यः : ‘HEEL (रध्य, > ;
“WHEL “NOLS “1008 = iy ‘ay a ‘NSLS २००६ iy aes WEES 700४
ANVWLY पद्प्प्रप्त ‘ASN पक्प्श्पिश्चिव ASNGL LNASATd
WaiOd ZAILVINGNOAT ‘Waod CAILVAACISaa WadOd TVSNVO
248
‘ouBIayY Joazied ay} Jo yeu} मभु ०४299 pus ‘reusEIEg yooysod ayy Jo a[droysed ayy गणु uphinfoh 04 pappe st svariyo) 4
oipuvhysand| zohyssand| vfand नात ohavpnand| paynd| vupandnd| svandnd| yoanjnd| vynd| oupunind| nupund| yound) na 6
oinuphyssung| 2064500 | vhupz| vizununz| vhavjunj| paz} pupuaj| sparuaz ००४१४ 27|| ०0000002 ०४१४2॥| ३०५४४१| ध्य्, -8
11111) २०४१९] olay) ०000 [1.4 >| ०४|| snare 20002 20|| vupwohzy) वण| joausp ^ *9
10 |. 018 1111 1 18 1.8.
piipumlysrinyg| gohysrsoyq| vispyq|ofyimsny9| vhavjsvyq| तम्| viipsyqng| svariygng| gvavpeiyg) ०९ ०४५८०९११ ०११4 | २०.१११्| ving "£
vipuphysipaa| yohysipaa| vhkpaa| whyunpaa| vhanjypaal pazypsa oe ००८११०८ qoanypial = ०2०१०| ०0060014 Duppia|) opr) 22८1 "ट
०२0५०१6० |2०01581/0006| vhloh| ०४००५००० ०6 ००१००॥| | 10000 Luphvfoh| yoavpfoh| opfoh| ००2 | ००0०426 2०0०/| ix "ग
pipunkysyep| yohysyap| vhsap| vfzunsap| vhanjysap| pajysip| ० अश्क qoanjysip| vjyssp| vupwohsep| oupunsyp| zosip| sx -9
qoapppuou | ®
nipuniysysou\ 1 11 111 8.101.011 1 1 0. 1. | 1 1.0,
०००१७०4० | ywhysrypoq|nhypog|vhyunypog| गवर payppng|vupypngng|svaypngng| yoanyppng| सूत् ० | vupwmypog) yoypog) ypng ` इ
‘aatssva go | ‘IvNsvava |‘€-ssva| -८ ‘seva | ‘r‘ssva | शवतत | "वद्य |‘IVNSVuVd] ‘Maloy |‘HAISSVd| “HAISSVd | "वप |-ग्डष्चषय| ,
UNVALY “Lad ae “End दट |WAALAd) अरघ qaoLoat पर्षत् Loaded frectence परञष्व पणव “saad ‘Saad ‘sxad 1008
‘SATAHIOILUVd
PERS.
CONJUGATION OF THE VERB स् as, ‘TO BE.’ 249
PARASMAI-PADA (see 327).
584, Although this root belongs to cl. 2, its inflexion is exhibited here, both
because it is sometimes used as an auxiliary, and because it is desirable to study
its inflexion together with that of the other substantive verb मू bhi, ‘to be’ (58),
which supplies many of the tenses in which स्स्. 18 defective. Two other roots are
sometimes employed as substantive verbs, with the sense ‘to be,’ viz. स्या cl. 1, ‘to
stand’ (see 269, 587), and ATE cl. 2, ‘to sit’ (see 317.@). Indeed, the root अस् as,
here inflected, is probably only an abbreviation of मास् ds
The cognate languages have two roots similar to the Sanskrit for the substantive
verb ‘to be.’ Cf. कप and eo in Greek, es (sum) and fu (fui) in Latin; and observe
how the different parts of the Sanskrit verbs correspond to the Greek and Latin ;
thus, asmi, asi, asti eupl, éooi, €oti; sum, es, est. Cf. also santi with sunt
astam, dstém, with YoTov, yoTHY; dsma, dsta, dsan, with NPE, NOTE, Yoav, &e
Present, ‘1 am, Potential, ‘I may be,’ &c.
SING. DUAL, PLURAL, SING. DUAL. PLURAL,
ist, SPR asmi स्वस् svas स्मस् smas स्याम् sydm स्याव sydva स्याम sydma
and, fe asi = स्यत् sthas == स्व stha स्यास् syds स्यातम् sydtam स्यात sydta
3rd, सस्ति asti स्तस् stas सन्ति santi स्यात् sydt स्याताम् sydtém स्युस् syus
Imperfect, ‘I was. Imperative, ‘ Let me be,’
TAA dsam सास dsva सास्म dsma | ससानि ८०4४४ HATA asdva असाम् asdma
सासीस् 45 STAR dstam सस्त dsta एधि edhi स्तम् stam स्तं sta
सासीत् € WTA dstdm BTA dsan | WH ८८५ स्ताम् stim = सनतु santu
Perfect *, ‘I have been, &c.
PARASMAIL. ATMANE.
मास dsa सासिव dsiva आसिम ८5०५० | सासे dse अासिवहे dsivahe असिम dsimahe
आसि ८८ सासथुस् ८०८११०५ खास ८७८ = | WPA ०४९ TATA ८५८१८ आसिध्वे dsidhve
FATA dsa TATA dsatus ATTA dsus असि ८८ आसाते ८८८ सआासिरे ८४१८
Obs.—The root as, ‘to be,’ has no Derivative forms, and only two Participles,
viz. सत् sat, Pres. Par., सानं sdna, Pres. Atm. (see 524, 526). The Special tenses
have an Atmane-pada, which is not used unless the root is compounded with
prepositions. In this Pada ह् ¢ is substituted for the root in 1st sing. Pres., and
स् 5 is dropped before dh in 2nd pl.; thus, Pres. he, se, ste; svahe, sdthe, sdte ;
smahe, dhve, sate: Impf. dsi, dsthds, dsta; dsvahi, dsdtham, dsdtdm; dsmahi, ddhvam,
dsata: Pot. stya, stthds, sita; stvahi, siydthdm, stydtdm; stmahi, stdhvam, stran:
Impv. asai, sva, stém; asdvahai, sdthdm, sdtém; asémahai, dhvam, satdm: see 327.
* The Perfect of as is not used by itself, but is employed in forming the Perfect
of Causals and some other verbs, see 385, 490; in which case the Atmane may be
used. The other tenses of as are wanting, and are supplied from bhi at 585.
Kk
250 INFLEXION OF THE STEM OF VERBS,
Grove I. Cuass I.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 261.
585. Root चू bhi. Infin. भवितुम् Shavitum, ‘to be’ or ‘become.’
Parasmar-papas. Present Tense,‘1 am’ or ‘I become.’
PERS, SING. DUAL, PLURAL.
ist, भवामि bhavdmi भवावस् ०१००८०८ भवामस् bhavdmas
and, भवसि 00०97 WITT bhavathas भवय bhavatha
grd, भवति bhavati भवतस् bhavatas भवन्ति bhavanti
Imperfect, ‘I was,’
सभवम् abhavam MTA abhavdva अभवाम abhavdma
WHAT abhavas सभवतम् abhavatam अभवत् abhavata
सनवत् abhavat अभवताम् abhavatém अभवन् abhavan
Potential, ‘I may be.’
भवेयम् bhaveyam भवेव ९१००८९८ भवेम bhavema
wag bhaves भवेतम् bhavetam भवेत bhaveta
भवेत् bhavet भवेताम् bhavetdm भवेयुस् bhaveyus
Imperative, ‘Let me be.’
भवानि bhavdni भवाव bhavdva भवाम bhavdma
भव bhava भवतम् Shavatam भवतं bhavata
भवतु bhavatu भवताम् Lhavatdm भवन्तु bhavantu
Perfect, ‘I have been,’ ‘I was?
बभूव babhiva बभू विव babhiviva बभूविम babhivima
PITA 027४2714 DITA babhivathus WI babhiiva
TIT babhiva WATT babhivatus WIT babhiivus
First Future, ‘I shall or will be.’
भवितास्मि bhavitdésmi भवितासखस् bhavitdsvas भवितास्मस् bhavitdsmas
भवितासि biavitdsi भवितास्यस् bhavitdsthas भवितास्थ bhavitdstha
भविता bhavitd भवितारो bhavitdrau भवितारस् bhavitdras
Second Future, ‘I shall or will be? ।
भविष्यामि dhavishydmi = भविष्यावस् dhavishydoas = भविष्यामस् bhavishydmas
भविष्पसि dhavishyasi = भविष्पयस् dhavishyathas = भविष्यथ bhavishyatha
भविष्यति bhavishyati भविष्यतस् bhavishyatas भविष्यन्ति dhavishyanti
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
Aorist, ‘I was’ or ‘had been,’ &c.
WIAA abhivam WIT abhiva WIA abhiima
WIR ०८7४5 MAA abhitam भूत 070४८६0
अभूत् चक अभूताम् पाताः अभूवन् 02120
Precative or Benedictive, ‘ May I be.’
भूयासम् bheiydsam WATE bhiydsva WAH Shiiydsma
WATT bhiiyds श्वेयास्तम् bhiydstam WAT bhiiydsta
भूयात् छु भूयास्ताम् bhniydstdm WATYR २१८४५
Conditional, (If) ‘I should be.’
251
सभविष्यम् abhavishyam अभविष्याव abhavishydva भविष्याम abhavishydma
अभविष्यस् abhavishyas अभविष्यतम् abhavishyatam सभविष्यत abhavishyata
अभविष्यत् abhavishyat अभविष्यताम् abhavishyatém अभविष्यन् abhavishyan
586. ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense,‘I am,’ &c.
भवे dhave भवावहे bhavdvahe भवामहे bhavdmahe
भवसे bhavase NTT Bhavethe WAA bhavadhve
भवते bhavate WAM Lhavete भवन्ते bhavante
Imperfect, ‘I was.’
अभवे abhave अभवावहि abhavdvahi सभवामहि abhavdmahi
SATA abhavathds अभवेयाम् 000४7 सभवध्वम् abhavadhvam
पनभवत abhavata अभवेताम् abhavetdm भवन्त abhavanta
Potential, ‘I may be,’ &c.
भवेय bhaveya भवेवहि ९१००९००१ भवेमहि ९८0९0704
भवेथास् bhavethds भवेयायाम् bhaveydthdm wasay bhavedhvam
भवेत 8100९10 भवेयाताम् bhaveydtdm भवेरन् bhaveran
Imperative, ^ Let me be.’
भवै bhavai भवावहे bhavdvahat भवामहे bhavdmahai
भवस्व bhavasva WaT bhavethdm WIAA bhavadhvam
भवताम् dhavatdm भवेताम् bhavetém भवन्ताम् bhavantdm
Perfect, ‘I have been,” ‘I was,’ &c.
बभूवे babhive बभरूविवहे babheivivahe बभूविम babhivimahe
वभूविपे babhivishe बभूवाये 407४४८८0 बभूविध्वे (2) babhividhve
बभूवे ९०८१४०८ बभू वाति babhiivdte बभूविरे bablivire
Kk2
252 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
First Future, ‘I shall or will be,’ &c.
भवितार bhavitdhe भवितास्हे bhavitdsvahe भवितास्महे bhavitdsmahe
भवितासे bhavitdse भवितासाये bhavitdsdthe भविताध्वे bhavitddhve
भविता bhavitd भवित्तारो bhavitérau भवितारस् bhavitdras
Second Future, ‘I shall or will be,’ &c.
भविष्ये bhavishye भविष्यावहे bhavishydvahe भविष्याम bhavishydmahe
भविष्यसे bhavishyase भविष्ये bhavishyethe भविष्यथ्ने bhavishyadhve
भविष्यते bhavishyate भविष्येते bhavishyete भविष्यने bhavishyante
Aorist, ‘I was’ or ‘had been,’ &c.
सखभविषि abhavishi सभविष्वहि abhavishvahi भविष्महि abhavishmahi
अभविष्टास् abhavishthds सभषिषायाम् [1.111.114 अभविध्वम् (दम्) abhavidhvam
WTAE abhavishta अभविषाताम् abhavishdtém = सभविषत abhavishata
Precative or Benedictive, ‘1 wish I may be.’
भविषीय bhavishtya ufatitafe bhavishtvahi afantate bhavishtmahi
भविषीष्ठास् bhavishtshthds = भविषीयास्याम् bhavishtydsthdm भविषीध्वम् (दुम्) bhavishtdhoam
भविषीष्ट bhavishtshta भविषीयास्ताम् bhavishtydstim भविषीरन् 210०1578
Conditional, (If) ‘I should be,’ &c.
भविष्ये abhavishye अभविष्याव abhavishydvahi सभविष्यामहि abhavishydmahi
सभविष्ययास् abhavishyathds अभविष्येयाम् 41.11.111. 1 सभविष्यध्वम् abhavishyadhvam
सभविष्यत्त abhavishyata अभविष्यताम् abhivishyetém सभविष्यन्त abhavishyanta
Passive (461), Pres. ya, भूयसे, &c.; Aor. 3rd sing. (475) warta.
Causal (479), Pres. भावयामि, भावयसि, &c.; Aor. (492) अबौभवम्, &c.
Desiderative form of Causal (497) विभावयिषाभि, &c. Desiderative
(498), Pres. बुभूषामि, बुभूषसि, &c. Frequentative (507), Pres. anya,
anifa or बोभवीमि+* Participles, Pres. भवत् (524); Past Pass. भूत
(531); Past Indecl. rat (556), -भूय (559); Fut. Pass. भवित्तव्य (569),
भवनीय (570), भाव्य or भव्य (571).
Obs.—The following examples are given in the order of their final letters.
587. Root em (special stem तिष्ठ, 269, 269. 2). Inf. स्वातुम् ‘to
stand.’ Par. and Atm. Pres. तिष्ठाभि, तिष्ठसि, तिष्ठति ; तिष्ठावस्, तिष्टयस्,
लिष्ठतस् ; तिष्टामस्, तिष्ठथ, तिष्टम्ति. Atm. तिषठ, तिष्ठसे, तिष्ठते ; निष्ठावहे, fave,
तिष्ठेते; frome, freed, तिष्ठन्ते. Impf. अतिष्ठम्, अतिष्ठम्, &c. Atm. अतिष्े, & ५.
Pot. तिष्ठेयम्, fava, fran; fava, ९८. Atm. fava, तिषटेयास्, तिष्ठेत; तिष्ठेह,
favarary, &c. Impv. faurfa, fre, freq; तिष्ठाव, &c. Atm. fad, तिष्ठस्व,
तिष्टताम् ; तिष्टावहै, &c. Perf. तस्यो (373), where or WATE, तस्यो ; afera,
* These Derivative verbs will be inflected at full at 703, 70s, 706, 707.
.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS 1, 253
तस्वपुस्, Teg; तस्यिम, तस्य, तस्थुस्. Atm. तस्थे, तस्थिषे, wa; तस्विवहे,
Weare, Ted; तस््थिमरे, तस्ये, तस्थिरे. rst Fut. स्यातास्मि, स्यातासि, &c.
Atm. स्याताहे, स्थातासे, ९८. and Fut, स्थास्यामि, स्थास्यसि, स्थास्यति, &c.
Atm. स्थास्ये, स्यास्यसे, स्यास्यते, &e. Aor. (438) Feary, अस्यास्, सस्यात् ;
WEA, स्यातम्, सस्याताम् ; अस्याम, सस्या, सस्युस्. Atm. (48. 4, 421. 0)
सस्थिषि, अस्थियास्, अस्थित; अस्थिष्वहि, अस्विषायाम्, -षाताम् ; अस्यिष्मटि,
अस्थिदुम्, अस्विषत. Prec. स्येयासम्, स्थेयस्, &९. Atm. स्यासीय, स्यासीष्टास्,
&e. Cond, चस्यास्यम्, चस्यास्यस्, &९. Atm. were, अस्यास्यथास्, &c.
Pass., Pres. witt (465); Aor. 3rd sing, अस्थायि, Caus., Pres. स्याप-
यामि, -ये; Aor, afafay, afafey. Des. तिष्टासामि, &c. Freq. तेष्ठीये or
तास्येमि or तास्थामि, ‘Part., Pres, तिष्ठत् (141. Obs. 1); Past Pass, स्थित ;
Past Indecl. fear, -स्थाय, -era; Fut. Pass, स्वातव्य, स्थानीय, स्येय,
588. Root wt (special stem जिघ्र, 269). Inf. wp ‘to smell.’
Par. Pres. farnfa, ferafa, &c. Impf. foram, अजिघ्रस्, ९०८. Pot.
जिपरेयम्, frig, &c. Impv. जिघ्राणि (58), जिघ्र, &०. Perf. aid (373),
way or जघ्राय, aut; जघ्निव, जघ्रयुस्, THGA; sina, aH, wR. rst Fut,
घ्रातास्मि, प्रातासि, &e. and Fut. wreatfa, च्रास्यसि, &c. Aor. (438) ETA,
WHY, HHT; TH, अघ्रातम्, सघ्राताम् ; THA, घ्रात, wR. Or by 433,
सप्रासिषम्, सप्रासीस्, अध्रासीत्; अघ्रासिष्व, सघ्रासिष्टम्, -सिष्टाम् ; अघ्रासिष्म, -सिष्ट,
~fagy. 2९८. प्रायासम्, भ्रायास्, ८८. Or प्रयासम्, &c. Cond, WHET,
अधास्यस्, &c. Pass., Pres. wa (465. a); Aor. 3rd sing. wufa, Caus.,
Pres. श्रापयामि ; dor, अजिघ्रम् or अजिग्रिपम्. 12०8. जिघ्रासाभि. Freq.
जेघ्रीये, जाघ्रामि or जाप्रेमि. Part., Pres. जिप्रत्; Past Pass. ara or प्राश ;
Past Indecl. art, प्राय ; Fut. Pass. च्रातव्य, प्रणीय, मेय.
589. Root पा (special stem पिव, 269). Inf. पातुम् ‘to drink.’ Par,
Pres. पिवामि, पिवसि, &c. ^ अपिवम्, अपिवस्, &e. Pot. fata,
पिवेस्, &c. Impr. पिवानि, पिव, &e. Perf. (373) wat, पपिथ or पपाय,
wal; पपिव, पपयुम्, पपतुस् ; पपिम, पप, पुस्. 15 Fut. पातास्मि, पातासि, &.
and Fut. पास्मामि, पास्यसि, &c. Aor. (438) अपाम्, अपास्, अपात्; अपाव,
अपात्, अपाताम् ; अपाम, अपात, अपुस्. Prec. पेयासम्, पेयास्, ९८. Cond.
अपास्यम्, अपास्यस्, &c. Pass., Pres. पीये (465); Aor. 3rd sing. पायि
(475). Caus., Pres, पाययामि, -ये ; Aor. अपौीष्यम् (493. ९). Des. पिपासामि,
Freq. पेपीये, पापेमि or पापामि. Part., Pres. पिवत् ; Past Pass. पीत (533.0);
Past Indecl. पीत्वा, -पाय ; Fut. Pass. पातव्य, पानीय, पेय.
59०. Root जि (special stem जय, 263). Inf. जेतुम् ‘to conquer.’ Par.*
* जि is not generally used in the Atmane, excepting with the prepositions vi or
pard. See 786.
254 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
Pres. जयामि, जयसि, जयति ; जयावस्, जययस्, जयतस् ; जयामस्? WIG,
जयन्ति. 7/८ सज्यम्, अजयस्, अजयत्; सजयाव, HATA, अजयताम् ; सनयाम,
अजयत, अजयन्. Pot. जयेयम्, जयेस्, जयेत्; जयेव, TIAA, जयेताम् ; जयेम,
जयेत, जयेयुस्. Impv. जयानि, जय, जयतु ; AWA, जयतम्, जयताम् ; जयाम, जयत,
जयन्तु. Perf, जिगाय (368, 374..8), जिगयिथ or जिगेथ, जिगाय; जिग्यिव (374),
जिग्ययुस्, जिग्यतुस् ; निग्यिम, जिग्य, जिग्युस्. ist Fut. जेतास्मि, जेतासि, जेता ;
जेताखम्, जेतास्यस्, Had; जेतास्मस्, Hater, जेतारस्. 2/2 Fut. जेष्यामि,
aufe, जेष्यति ; नेष्यावस्, जेष्ययस्, जेष्यतस्; जेष्यामस्, जेष्यथ, जेष्यन्ति. Aor.
waaq (420), अजेषीस्, HANIA; SNA, THEA, TeV; FAW, अजेष्ट,
अनेषुस्. Prec, जीयासम्, जीयास्, जीयात्; stare, जीयास्तम्, जोयास्ताम्; ज्ीयास्म,
जीयास्त, जीयासुस्. Cond. aA, SHAY, अजेष्यत्; अजेष्याव, सजेष्यतम्,
अनेष्यताम् ; अजेष्याम, WA, अजेष्यन्. Pass., Pres. जीये, & ८. ; Aor.
ard sing. खजायि. Caus., Pres. जापयामि ; Aor. अजीजपम्. Des. जिगीषामि.
Freq. जेजीये, जेजेमि or जेजयीमि. Part., Pres. जयत् ; Past Pass. faa;
Past Indecl. जित्वा, -जिग्य ; Fut. Pass. जेतव्य, जयनीय, जेय or जित्य or जय्य
(571, 572)-
a. Like fa may be conjugated at. Inf. नेतुम् ‘to lead.” But the
Causal is नाययामि ; Caus., dor. अनीनयम् ; Des. निनीषामि. In Epic
poetry the Perfect is sometimes नयामास for निनाय, and the 2nd Fut.
नयिष्यामि for नेष्यामि (especially when preceded by the prep. आ).
591. Root स्मि (special stem स्मय). Inf. सेतुम् ‘to smile’? Atm.
Pres. स्मये, स्यसे, ०. Impf. sa, अस्मययास्, &c. Pot. WAI, स्मयेयास्,
&e. Impv. स्मये, waa, &c. Perf. (374. ९) fafara*, सिष्मियिषे, सिष्मिये;
सिष्मियिवहे, सिष्मियाये, सिष्मियाते ; सिष्मियिमहे, fafarfasd or -fad, सिष्मियिरे .
ist Fut. wae, स्मेतासे, &e. 242 Fut. Wa, wera, &c. Aor. सस्मेषि,
अस्मेष्ठास्, SHE; सस्मेष्वहि, NATE, -षाताम् ; Fale, सस्मेदुम्, सस्मेषत .
Prec. स्मेषीय, &c. Cond. wera, & ९. Pass., Pres. ata; Aor. 3rd sing.
अस्मायि. Caus., Pres, स्माययामि or स्मापयामि ; Aor. ससिष्मयम् or खसिष्मपम्.
Des. सिस्मयिषे. Freq. सेष्मीये, सेम्मेमि ०" सेष्मयीमि. Part., Pres. स्मयमान ;
Past Pass. feat; Past Indecl. स्मित्वा, -स्मित्य ; Fut. Pass. स्मेतव्य,
स्मयनीय, स्मेय.
592. Root ह (special stem ga). Inf. द्रोतुम् ‘to run” Par. Pres.
gata, gata, gafa; Farag, द्वयस्, द्रवतस् ; amy, gay, afar. 1"
WEIR, द्रवस्, &c. Pot. दूवेयम्, Fay, &c. Impv. दूवाणि (58), Fa, &c.
Perf. $314, दुद्रोय, दुद्राव; FT (369), हुदुव पुस् (374. 9), दुदुबहुस्; FER,
दुदरुव, दुदुवुस्. 19 Fut. दरोतास्मि. and Fut. दरोष्यामि, द्रोष्पसि, &c. Aor.
* When वि is prefixed, the Perfect is विसिस्मिये against 70,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I, CLASS I. 255.
घदु दवम् (440.0), EFI, VFFIWs WYN, खटुदूवतम्, खटुदरवताम् ; अहुदरुवाम,
खदु दवत, WEFT. Prec. दूयासम्, Gara, &c. Cond. सद्रोष्यम्. Pass.,
Pres. 4; Aor. 3rd sing. खद्रावि Caus., Pres. grrarfa; Aor. खटुदरवम्
or wfegay. Des. दुदूषामि- Freq. etga, दोद्रोमि or etgatfa. Part,
Pres. द्ूवत् ; Past Pass. दुत ; Past Indecl. दत्वा, दत्य ; Fut. Pass. द्रोतव्य,
द्रवणीय, द्राव्य or दव्य.
a. Like दु may be conjugated सु (sometimes written 4). Inf.
स्रोतुम् ‘to. flow.
593. Root ह् (special stem इर). Inf. हौम् ‘to seize,’ ‘to take.’
Par. and Atm. Pres. हणमि. Atm. हरे, eta, हरते ; हरावहे, &. Impf.
WA, WR, अहरत्; अह राव, &c. Atm. wet, अहर्थास्, अहरत; अहणवहि,
& ९. Pot. gag. Atm, हरेय, हरेथास्, ९०. Impw. हृणि (58), हर, ९९.
Atm. &, हरस्व, &e. Perf. जहार, AFG (370. a), जहार; HET, AEWA,
WEEGs ATER, जह, WEG. Atm. wR, जह्िषे, नटे ; EAR, जद्राये, जहाते;
aifgaz, afgea or जहि, aifge. ist Fut. हीरसि. Atm. हीरे, Zita, & ९५.
ond Fut, हरिष्यामि. Atm. हरिष्ये, हसिष्यसे, &c. Aor. अहा्षेम्, खहारपीस्,
अहार्षीत्; अहाप्वै, WEA, सहाशेम् ; Were, werd, wergy. Atm. wefa,
अह यास्, अहत; अहृष्वहि, सहषायाम्, Nema; Newfie, सहदुम्, EI.
Prec, fgaraq. Atm. षीय, हषीषास्, &c. Cond. अहरिष्यम्. Atm.
हरिष्ये, अहरिष्ययास्, &c. Pass., Pres. fga; Aor. 3rd sing. अहारि.
Caus., Pres. हास्यामि, -ये ; Aor. सजीहण्. Des. farztitfa, -f. Freq.
afga, जरैणीमि or wctectfa or जरिहरीमि or actefa or जरि- or जहैमि.
Part., Pres. हसत्; Pass. हयमा ; Past Pass. हूत ; Past Indecl. eat,
-ea; Fut. Pass. ear, हरणीय, हाये.
594. Root स्मृ (special stem सर). Inf. स्मम् ‘to remember.’ Par.
and Atm. Pres. wufa. Atm. ar. Impf. अस्मरम्, Wary, &c.
Atm, war. Pot. स्मरेयम्. Atm, स्मरेय, &c. 10४. सराणि (58). Atm.
wit, स्मरस्व, &८. Perf. सस्मार, सस्ये (370. 2), सस्मार; Tata, सस्मग्थुस्,
सस्मरहुस् ; सस्मरिम, सस्मर, सस्मरस्. Atm. सस्मरे, सस्मरिषे, wat; सस्मरिवहे,
सस्मणये, TATA; सस्मरिमरे, सस्मरिथ्वे or -र्दि, सस्मणिरि. 15 Fu. स्मतीस्मि.
Atm. ware. 2nd Fut. स्मरिष्यामि. Atm. स्मरिष्ये. Aor. अस्माषेम्, &c.
(see ह at 593). Atm. अस्मृषि, सस्मृयास् (see gat 593). Prec. waray.
Atm, स्मृषीय or स्मरिषीय, Cond. सस्मरिष्यम्. Atm, खस्मरिष्ये. Pass., Pres.
स्मर्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. weatfe. Caus., Pres. स्मारयामि, -ये ; Aor. WMATA.
Des. gad. Freq. सास्मर्य, arenfa or areatifa. Part., Pres. mq; Past
Pass. wa; Past 20९८1. स्मृत्वा, -स्मृतय ; Fut. Pass, waa, स्मरणीय, स्माये.
595. Root दे (special stem दय). Inf. दातुम् ‘to call’ Par. and
Atm. Pres, gafa. Atm. Fa. Impf. अद्धयम्, &c. Atm. खद्हये,
256 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
Pot. येयम्. Atm. Raa. Impv. Rafa. Atm. इये. Perf. (373. ९)
जुहाव, जुहविथ or जुहो, जुहाव ; जुहुविव, नुहुवधुस्, TIGA; जुहुविम, Wea,
Wega. Atm. जुहुवे, जुहुविषे, aga; जुहुविरे, शुटवाथे, जुहवाति ; agfarz,
जुहुषिध्वे or -fad, लुहूविरे. ist Fut. दातास्मि. Atm, grave. 2nd Fut.
द्धास्यामि. Atm. gta. Aor. (438. ८) द्धम्, TSA, HAT; सद्धाव, अद्हतम्,
BRIA; TAM, WET, सद्धन्. Atm. we, सद्धवास्, Hea; अद्धा वहि, BRIA,
warm; warafe, खद्ध्वम्, wat. Or अद्धासि (434), खद्धास्यास्, BATT;
अद्धाखहि, अद्धासायाम्, अद्धासाताम् ; sareafe, अद्दाश्वम्, सअद्धासत. Prec.
यासम्. Atm. द्ासीय. Cond. खद्धास्यम्. Atm. अद्धास्ये. Pass. दूयते
(465. ८); Aor. 3rd sing. sata or खद्धायिष्ट or अद्भत or BATA. 204 Fut,
द्दास्यते ० द्हायिष्यते (474.2). Caus., Pres. graatia (483.6); Aor. अनूहवम्.
Des. yguifa, जुहूषे. Freq. नोहूये, जोहोमि or जोहवीमि. Part, Pres.
द्दयत्; Pass. gaara; Past Pass. ga; Past Indecl. gat, -¥4; Fut.
Pass. दातव्य, RAM, देय.
a, ने (special stem गाय, 268), Inf. गातुम् ‘to sing,’ follows the analogy
of द, the final diphthong being changed to द before all terminations
beginning with ¢ ors. Pres. गायामि. Imp. सगायम्, &c. Pot. गायेयम्.
Impv. गायानि. Perf. (373.4) जगो, जगिय or जगाय, जगौ ; जगिव, नगयुस्,
जगतुस् ; नगिम, जग, जगुस्. ist Fut. गातास्मि. 2nd Fut. गास्यामि. Aor.
(433) सखगासिषम्, खगासीस्, सगासीत् ; सगासिष्व, अगासिषटम्, अगासिष्टाम् ;
अगासिष्म, सगासिष्ट, सगासिपुस्. Prec. गेयासम् (451). Cond. सगास्यम्.
Pass. गीयते (465); Aor. 3rd sing. सगायि. Caus., Pres. गापयामि (483);
Aor. ्जीगपम्. Des. fanrarfa. Freq, sta, जागेमि or जागामि. एथ.
Pres. गायत्; Pass. गीयमान ; Past Pass. गीत ; Past Indecl. गीत्वा, -गाय;
Fut. Pass. गातव्य, गानीय, गेय.
8. Like जे may be conjugated ग ‘to be weary ;’ ध्यै ‘to meditate ;
# ‘to fade ;’ and all other roots in ai (see 268).
९. Root पच् (special stem पच). Inf. TRA ‘to cook.’ Par. and Atm.
Pres, पचामि. Atm. पचे. प; अपचम्, अपचस्, &c. Atm. wae.
Pot, waa, waa, &८. Atm. पचेय. 17४. पचानि, पच, &०. Atm. पचे.
Perf. पपाच or पपच, पपक्य or पेचिथ (370. d), पपाच ; पेचिव, पेचधुस्,
wage; पेचिम, पेच, पेचुस्. Atm. पेचे, पेचिषे, पेचे; पेचिवहे, पेचाथे, पेचाते ;
पेचिमरे, पेचिध्वे, पेचिरे. ist Fut. पक्तास्मि, Atm. पक्ताहे, 2nd Fut. wearfa.
Atm. wei. Aor. (420. ९) सपाक्षम्, Wag, अपाक्षीत्; FMW, सपाक्तम्,
सपाक्ताम् ; WWM, चपाक्त, अपास्. Atm. wufy, सपक्यास्, ws; सपष्वहि,
अपल्ायाम्, SAA; अप्स, sures, wae. Prec. पच्यासम्. Atm.
पक्षीय. Cond. wom. Atm. wom. Pass., Pres. vQ; Impf. सपय्ये ;
Aor. 3rd sing, सपाचि. Caus., Pres. पाचयामि, पाचये ; Aor. अपी पचम्.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I. 257
Des. faqenfa, fave. Freq. aval, पापव्मि or पापचीमि. Part., Pres.
पचत् ; Atm. पचमान ; Pass. पच्यमान ; Past Pass. पक्त (548); Past Indecl.
पक्ता, -पच्य ; Fut. Poss. waa, पचनीय, पाच्य or पाक्य (574).
d. Root याच् (special stem याच). Inf. याचितुम् ‘to ask.’ Par. and
Atm. Pres. याचामि. Atm. याचे. Impf. waren, अयाचस्, &c. Atm.
अयाचे. Pot. याचेयम्, याचेस्, &०. Atm. याचेय. Impv. याचानि, याच, &c.
4४20. याचे. Perf. ययाच, ययाचिथ, ययाच ; ययाचिव, ययाचथुस्, ययाचतुस् ;
ययाचिम, ययाच, ययाचुस्. Atm. ययाचे, ययाचिषे, ययाचे; ययाचिवहे, ययाचाये,
ययाचाते; ययाचिमहे, ययाचिश्वे, ययाचिरे. .15 Fut. याचित्ास्मि. Atm.
याचिताहे. ond Fut. याचिष्याभि. 4. याचिष्ये. dor. (427) wa
चिषम्, सयाचीस्, warstq; अयाचिष्व, सयाचिष्टम्, -्टाम् ; सयाचिष्म, -चिष्ट,
-चिषुस्. Atm. अयाचिषि, अयाचिष्टास्, अयाचिष्ट ; अयाचिष्वहि, खयाचिषायाम्,
-षाताम्; अयाचिष्महि, अयाविध्वम्, अयाचिषत. Prec. याच्यासम्. Atm. याचि-
षीय. Cond. अयाचिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. ara}. Caus., Pres. याचयामि;
Aor, खययाचम्. Des. यियाचिषामि, -पे. Freq. यायाच्ये, यायाच्ि (3rd sing.
यायाक्ति). Part., Pres, याचत् ; Atm. याचमान ; Past Pass. याचित ; Past
Indecl, याचित्वा ; Fut. Pass. याचितव्य, याचनीय, याच्य.
९. Root शुच् (special stem शोच). Inf. शोचितुम् ‘to grieve” Par.
(Ep. rarely Atm.) Pres. शोचामि. Impf. syraq, सशोचस्, &c. Pot.
शोचेयम्, शोचेस्, &c. Impv. शोचानि, शोच, &c. Perf. ya, शुशोचिथ,
शुशोच 5 शुशुचिव, शुशुचयुस्, शुणुचतुस् ; शुशुशिम, शुशुच, शुशुचुस्. 75 Fut.
शोचितास्मि. and Fut. शोचिष्याभि. Aor. (427. 6) सशोचिषम्, अशोचीस्,
अशोचीत्; अशोचिष्व, अशोचिष्टम्, अशोचिष्टाम् ; अशोचिष्म, अशोचिष्ट, सशोचिषुस्.
Prec. शुच्यासम्. Cond. अशोचिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. ys Aor. 3rd sing.
ayifa. Caus., Pres. श्ोचयामि ; Aor. aygay. Des. शुशुचिषामि or
शुशोचिषामि. Freq. शोशुच्ये, शोशोच्मि (37d sing. wigifa). Part., Pres.
शोचत्; Pass. yaar; Past Pass. शुचित and शोचित ; Past Indecl.
शुचित्वा or शोचित्वा, -शुच्य ; Fu. Pass. शोचितव्य, शोचनीय, शोच्य.
596. Root चन्. Inf. व्यक्कुम् ‘to abandon,’ ‘to quit” Par. Pres.
त्यजामि. Inpf. sana, अत्यजस्, &c. 7202. त्यजेयम्. Impv. त्यानि, wa,
&e. Perf. तत्याज, wafsra or ware (370. ¢), त्याज ; wafaa, तत्यजयुस्,
ता्यजतुस् ; तायजिम, तायज, ता्यजुस्. 75 Fut. wafer. and Fut. wenfa.
Aor, (422, 296) सव्याक्षम्, ख्या छस्, WAT; NAT, MATH, WATS ;
अत्यासस, HATH, MATAR. Prec. व्यज्यासम्- Cond. srry, &c. Pass.,
Pres. wa; Aor. 3rd sing. sanfa. Caus., Pres. त्याजयामि ; Aor. खति-
way. Des. तित्यक्षामि. Freq. ताव्यज्ये, तात्यज्मि or तात्यजीमि. Part., Pres,
त्यजत् ; Past Pass. wa; Past Indecl. त्यक्ता, -त्यज्य ; Fut. Pass. त्यक्तव्य,
त्जनीय, MIST (573).
Ll
258 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
597. Root यज्. Inf. wey ‘to sacrifice” ‘to worship’ Par. and
Atm. Pres. यज्ञानि, Atm. यजे. Impf. चयनम्, अयजस्, &e. Atm. जयने.
Pot, यजेयम्. Atm. यजेय. Impv. warfa, यज, &८०, Atm. यजे. Perf.
(375. ¢) इ्यान, इयजिथ or afsra or इयषट (297), इयाज ; ईजिव, STAT, agg ;
ईजिम, ईन, Sqq. Atm. ईजे, ईजिम, ईजे; ईजिरे, नाये, Sad; ईनिमरे,
ईजिध्वे, ईनिरे, 19४ Fut. यष्टास्मि (403). Atm. were. and Fut. wean
(403). Atm. wat. Aor. (422) अयाक्षम्, खयाक्षीस्, अयाघीव्; Ware,
अयाष्टम्, WE; ware, अयाष्ट, अयास्. Atm. अयकि, अयष्टास्, अयष्ट ;
Was, अयश्षायाम्, WIAA; अयष्ट, Arey, अयक्षत. Prec. ITAA.
Atm, wata. Cond, सयस्यम्. Atm. wot. Pass., Pres. इज्ये (471);
Impf.. Bt (251. a); Aor. 3rd sing. warfa. Caus., Pres. याजयामि -ये;
Aor, ऋअयीयजम्. Des. यियश्षामि, -स्षे. Freq. यायज्ये, यायज्मि or यायजीमि.
Part., Pres. यजत् ; Atm. यजमान ; Pass. इन्यमान ; Past Pass. इष्ट; Past
Indecl. इष्टा, -इ्ज्य ; Fut. Pass, यष्टव्य, यजनीय, याज्य or TH.
a, Root सन्न् (special stem सज, 270. 2). Inf. FHA (० adhere.’ Par.
Pres. amfa*, Impf. असनम्. Pot. way. 179४. सजानि. Perf. wea,
ससञ्चिय or ससं क्य, ससन्न ; WaT, ससञ्चयुस्, ससन्नतुस् ; ससच्िम, WAH, FAST.
ist Fut. संक्तास्मि, &c. 2nd Fut. संच्यामि, &c. Aor. असांसम्, -छीम्, -सीत्;
wai, ससांक्तम्, -क्ताम्; water, sain, ससां स्. Prec. सज्यासम्, &e.
Cond. संख्यम्, &c. Pass., Pres. a. Caus., Pres. सञ्चयाभि ; Aor.
अससन्नम्. Des. fadatfa, &c. Freq. सासज्ये, arafen. Part., Pres.
waq; Pass, सज्यमान ; Past Pass. सक्त ; Past Indecl. सक्ता or TH, -सज्य ;
Fut. 7055. संक्रव्य, THA, संग्ध or Ts.
8. Root gq (special stem ata). Inf. द्योतितुम् ‘to shine.’ Atm. (and
Par,in Aor.) Pres. att. Impf. खद्योते. Pot. area. Impo. ait. Perf.
दिद्युते (383. a), -fat, -ते ; दिदयुतिवहे, -ताये, -ताते ; दिच्ुतिमहे, -frea, -far.
ist Fut. tfame. 2nd Fut. nfra. Aor. खद्योतिषि, खद्योतिष्टास्, wertfae ;
wulfatatz, -तिषायाम्, -तिषाताम् ; -तिष्महि› -तिथ्वम्, -तिषत- Par. सच्युतम्,
-तस्, -तत्; -तावे, -ततम्, तताम् ; -ताम, -तत, -तन्. Prec. द्योतिषीय. Cond.
सद्योनिष्ये. २०७8. Pres. qa; dor. 3rd sing. watfa. Caus., Pres.
द्ोत्तयामि ; Aor. सदिदयुतम्. Des. fegfa® or feetfat. Freq. देद्य, देद्योत्मि
or देदयुतीमि. Part., Pres. aimata; Past Pass. द्युतित or द्योतित ; Past
Indecl, द्युतित्वा or द्योतित्वा, -qa; Fut. Pass. द्योतितव्य, द्योतनीय, द्योत्य.
¢. Root aq. Inf. पतितुम् ˆ" fall’ Par. Pres. पतामि. Impf. अपतम्.
Pot. away. Impv. पतानि. Perf. पपात्त or पपत (368), पेतिथ, पपात;
* The final j is sometimes incorrectly doubled (Pres. सज्नामि, सज्जसि, सन्नति,
&c.); but the root must not, therefore, be confounded with an uncommon root
सज्न् or सस्ज्, meaning ‘to go,’ ‘to move,’ also cl. 1, and making सज्जाभि; &c.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS ए, 259
पेतिव, पेतथुस्, पेततुस् ; पेतिम, पेत, पेतुस्. 152 Fut. पतितास्मि. and Fut.
पत्तिष्यामि. dor, wong (441), अपत्रस्, HINT; HII, अपपरतम्, सपप्रताम्;
WORT, अपप्नत, Han. Prec, waraq. Cond. अपतिष्यम्. Pass., Pres.
wa; Impf. wat; Aor. 3rd sing. अपाति. Caus. Pres. पतयाभि, पतये
and पातयामि, पातये; Aor. सपीपतम्. Des. पिपतिषामि or faratfa. Freq.
पनीपये, पनीपत्मि or पनीपतीमि. Part., Pres. यतत् ; Pass. पत्यमान ; Past
Pass. पतित ; Past Indecl. पतित्वा, -प्य ; Fut. Pass. पतितव्य, पतनी य,
पात्य or पत्य.
598. Root वृत् (special stem वतै). . Inf. वतितुम् ‘to be,’ ‘to exist.’
Atm, (and optionally Par. in 2nd Fut., Aor., and Cond., when it
rejects 2). Pres. aa. Impf. wai. Pot. वर्तेय. Impv. कतै. Perf.
ववृते, ववृत्तिषे, aga; agfaas, ववृताये, ववृताते; ववृतिमरे, ववृनिभ्वे, ववृतिरे.
1st Fut. afame. ond Fut. afaa. Aor. wafafa, अवरिष्टास्, अवरिष्ट;
अवतिष्वहि, -frarna, -तिषात्ताम्; -तिष्महि, -पिथ्वम्, -पिंषत. Par. वृतम्,
-तस्, -तत्; -ताव, -ततम्, -तताम्; -ताम, -तत, -तन्. Prec, वपिंषीय. Cond.
wafaa or waray. Pass., Pres. gm. (19118. Pres. वैयामि ; Aor.
अवीवृतम् or अववरतम्. Des. faaf#a or विवृत्छामि. Freq. aya, वरीवत्मि
or वरीवृतीमि. Part., Pres. atara; Past Pass. ya; Past Indecl. वित्वा
or Jat, -वृत्य ; Fut. Pass. वतितव्य, aida, वृत्य.
599. Root ag. Inf. वदितुम् ‘to speak.’ Par. Pres. वेदानि. Impf.
अवदम्, अवदस्, &c. Pot. वदेयम्. Impv. वदानि. Perf. (375. ९) Tare,
उवदिथ, saa; ऊदिव, ऊदयुस्, ऊदतुस् ; कदिम, wz, ऊदुस्. 1st Fut. वदितास्मि,
वदितासि, &c. and Fut. वदिष्यामि, वदिष्यसि, &c, Aor. (428) अवादिषम्,
Mag, अवादीत्; अवादिष्व, अवादिषम्, अवादिष्टाम्; अवादिष्म, अवादिष्ट, अवा-
दिषुस्. Prec, उद्यासम्, उदयास्, ९८. Cond. अवदिष्यम्, अवदिष्यस् , &c. Pass.,
Pres. wa (471); Aor. 3rd sing. अवादि. Caus., Pres. वाद्यामि ; Aor.
अवीवदम्. Des. faafearfa, -8. Freq. arzet, arafa or araqtfa. Part.
Pres. वदत् ; Pass. उद्यमान ; Past Pass, उदित (543); Past Indecl. उदित्वा,
-उद्य; Fut. Pass. वदितव्य, वद्नीय, वाद्य or उद्य.
a. Root सद् (special stem सीद्, 270). Inf. सततुम् ‘to sink. | Par.
Pres, सीदामि. 7 असीदम्, Pot. सीदेयम्, Imp. सीदानि. Perf. ware,
सेदिय (375. a) or ससत्य, ससाद ; सेदिव, ATYA, सेदुस् ; सेदिम, सेद, -सेदुस्,
ist Fut. सत्तास्मि. 2nd Fut. स्यामि. Aor. saan (436, 437), असद्स्›
असदत्; असदाव, असदतम्, HATA ; सदाम, असदत, Hae. Prec. सन्ना सम्;
Cond. असत्यम्. Pass., Pres. wat; Aor. 3rd sing. असादि" Caus., Pres.
सादयामि; Aor. असी षद्म्. Des. सिषत्सामि. Freq. सास्य, arafa or सास-
zitfa. Part., Pres. सीदत् ; Past Pass. सन्न (540); Past Indecl. wat,
-सद्य ; Fut. 055. स्तव्य, सदनीय, साद्य.
। nile
260 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
8. Root वृध् (special stem वधै). Inf. वर्धितुम् ‘to increase.’ Atm,
(and Par. in Fut., Cond.,and Aor.) Pres. &. Impf. सवर्थे, सवधेयास्,
-&०. Pot. वर्धय. Impv. Ti, ate, &०. Perf. ववृधे, ववृधिषे, ववृधे;
ववृधिवहे, ववृधाये, ववृधाते ; ववृधिमहे, agfued, ववृधिरे. ref Fut. वधिताहे-
Par. वधितास्मि. and Fut. afta. Par. वत्छौमि. Aor. wafifa, अवधिष्टास्,
wafte; अवर्धिष्वहि, सवपिषायाम्, अवधिंषाताम्; wafirafe, सवर्धिध्वम्, सअवर्धिंषत,
Par, अवृधम्, AWG, अवृधत्; BWI, BWA, अवृधताम् ; AWA, FAUT,
अवृधन्, Prec. वर्पिषीय. Cond. waft. Par. सव्यम्, Wag, &e.
2०88. Pres. pa; Impf. apa; Aor. 3rd sing. waft. Caus., Pres.
वधेयामि ; . dor. सवीवृधम् and svaiq. Des. विवर्धिषे, विवृत्सामि. Freq.
weg, वीवध or वरीवृधीमि. एव. Pres. वधमान ; 7055. वृध्यमान ; Past
2055. वृद्ध ; Past Indecl. वधित्वा, वृद्धा, -वृध्य ; Fut. Pass. aida, वधिंतव्य, yu.
6oo. Root wy. Inf. रधितुम् ‘to increase, ‘to flourish? Atm.
Pres. रुभे, wie, &c. Impf. रेषे (251), रेधयास्, &c. Pot. wa. Imp.
WY, रथस, &e. Perf. (385) रधाचक्र, रधाच्चकृषे, TS; TITER,
-र्धाचक्राये, रधाचक्राते ; रधाचकृमरे, खधाच्चकृदे, रधाचक्रिरे. 757 Fut. रधिताहे -
and Fut, रपिषये. Aor. रेधिषि (427. ९, 251), रेधिष्टास्, रेधिष्ट; रेधिष्वहि,
रेधिषायाम्, रेधिषाताम् ; रेधिष्महि, रेधिध्वम्, रेधिषत. Prec. रधिषीय, Cond.
रेधिष्ये (251). Pass. wat; Aor. 3rd sing. रेधि. Caus., Pres. रखधयामि ;
Aor. रेदिधम् (494). Des. रदिषिषे (500. 4). Part., Pres. रथनान ; Past
Pass. रधित ; Past Indecl. रचित्वा, -wa; Fut. Pass. रयितव्य, खधनीय, रध्य.
a, Root तप्. Inf. wR ‘to burn” Par. and Atm. Pres. तपामि.
Atm. तपे. Impf खत्तपम्. Atm. At. Pot. तपेयम्. Atm. arta. Impv.
-तपानि, तप, &c. Atm. तपे. Perf. wara or ततप, ततप्य or तेपिय, तताप ;
तेपिव, तेपथुस्, Taga; तेपिम, तेष, तेपुस्. Atm. तेपे, तेपिषे, तेपे; नेपिवहे, तेपाये,
तेपाते; तेपिमरे, तेपिध्वे, तेपिरे. 15४ Fut. त्नास्मि, &८. Atm. ware, &९. 2nd
Fut. तप्स्यामि (Ep. also तपिष्यामि). Atm. तप्स्ये. dor. अताप्सम्, खताष्सीस्,
raved]; NAA, अताप्रम्, अताप्नाम् ; WATE, अतपर, HATHA. Atm. सतप्सि,
अतप्यास्, HAR; अतप्लहि, CATIA, RAAT; सतपि, सतम्, अतष्सत.
Prec. तप्यासम्. Atm. तपसी य. Cond. तप्स्यम्. Atm. ware. Pass,,
Pres. wa; Impf. wat; Aor. 3rd sing. अतापि. Caus., Pres. तापयामि,
तापये; dor. अक्तीतपम्, खतीतपे. Des. त्ितप्यामि, fare. Freq. mara, mata
or armatfa. Part., Pres. तपत्; Atm. तपमान ; Pass. तप्यमान ; Past
Pass. an; Past Indecl. ay, -तष्य ; Fut. Pass. ara, तपनीय, तष्य.
601, Root लम् (270. ९). Inf. लसुम् ‘to take? Atm. Pres, a,
लभसे, GAT; लभावहे, BAY, लभेते; लभामहे, mua, लभन्ते. Imp. सलमे,
सलभयास्, Tot; सभाव, सलभेथाम्, अलभेताम् ; अलभामहि, सत्कभभ्नम्,
wort. Pot. लभेय, लभेषास्, लभेत; लभेवहि, लमेयायाम्, Bram; लभेमहि,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I. 261
way, sia. 1/४. wd, wre, लभताम् ; लभावहे, BVA, लभेताम्;
`लभामरै, लभध्नम्, त्भन्ताम्. Perf. BI (375. a), SY, BY; Shiraz, Swe,
Baad; लेभिमरे, लेभिध्वे, केभिरे. 1st Fut. wane (409), ward, लया, &९.
and Fut. लप्स्ये (299), लप्स्यसे, &e. Aor. खकष्ि (420, 299), अलभास् (298),
Ws; अलष्लहि, WAI, सलष्साताम्; अप्स, अलगुन्, saa. Prec
ल्ष्सीय, कष्सीष्टास्, wate, &०. Cond. अलष्स्ये, &c. 2988. Pres. BA;
Aor, wate, सलमास्, खल्ताभि (475) or खलम्नि, &c. Caus., Pres. लम्भ-
यामि, &९.; dor. waaem. Des. fst (503). Freq. ara, लालम्भीनि-
Part., Pres. लनमान ; Past Pass. लय ; Past Indecl. wan, -कभ्य ; Fut.
Pass, SAN, WANT, HA
a, Like लम् is conjugated रम् (with prep. आ), सारसुम् ‘to begin.’
602. Root गम् (special stem गच्छ, 270). Inf. गन्तुम् ‘to &० Par.
Pres. गच्छामि, गच्छसि, गच्छति ; गच्छावस्, गच्छयस्, गच्छतस् ; गच्छामस्, गच्छय,
गच्छन्ति. Impf. अगच्छम्, WIA, &c. Pot. गच्छेयम्, गच्चेस्, &c. Impv.
गच्छानि, गच्छ, &c. Perf. (376) जगाम, जगमिथ or जगन्य, जगाम ; जग्मिव,
जग्मथुस्, जग्मतुस्; जग्मिम, wa, जग्मुस्. ist Fut. गन्तास्मि. and Fut.
गमिष्यामि, गमिष्यसि, गमिष्यति, &c. Aor. (436) अगमम्, WIAA, WT;
अगमाव, VATA, WAT; अगमाम, सगमत, अगमन्. Prec. गम्यासम् .
Cond. सगमिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. गम्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अगामि. Caus.,
Pres. गमयामि ; Aor. अजीगमम्. Des. जिगमिषामि. Freq. जङ्धभ्ये, WHEAT
or जङ्गमीभि ; see 709. Part., Pres. गच्छत् ; Past Pass. गत ; Past
` Indecl. गत्वा, -गम्य, -गात्य (563. थ, 560); Fut. Pass. गन्तव्य, गमनीय, गम्य.
a, Root नम्. Inf. नन्तुम् ‘to bend’ Par. and Atm. (‘to bow one’s
self’). Pres, नमामि. Atm. नमे. Impf. अनमम्. Atm. अनमे. Pot.
ननेयम्. Atm. नमेय. Impv. नमानि. Atm. नमे. Perf. (375.0) ननाम
or ननम, ननन्य or नेमिथ, ननाम; नेमिव, नेमथुस्, नेमतुस् ; नेमिम, नेम, नेमुस्
Atm. नेमे, नेमिपे, नेमे; नेभिवरे, Fava, नेमाते; नेमिमहे, नेमिध्वे, नेमिरे
ist Fut. wafer. Atm. wate. 2nd Fut. नंस्यामि, Atm. नस्ये. Aor
अनंसिषम्, अनंसीस्, अनंसीत्; wifes, अनंसिष्टम्, अनंसिषटाम् ; wifes
अनंसिष्ट, wifagg. Atm. wife, अनंस्यास्, सनंस्त ; अनंस्हि, सनंसायाम्,
छनं साताम्; Saute, सनन्ध्वम्, अनंसत. Prec. नम्यासम् Atm. नं सीय. Cond
aay. Atm. wi@. Pass., Pres. नम्ये; Impf. सनम्ये; Aor. 3rd sing
नमि or अनामि. Caus. नमयामि or नामयामि ; dor, सननमम् or अनीनमम्
Des. निनंसामि. Freq. ward, नन्रमीमि or wafer. Part., Pres. नमत्;
Atm. नममान ; Pass. नम्यमान ; Past Pass. aa; Past Indecl. नत्वा, -नम्य
or -नव्य ; Fut. Pass. नन्तव्य, नमनीय, नाम्य or नम्य.
2. Root +. Inf. चलितुम् ‘to move.’ Par. Pres. चलामि. Impf.
सचतम्. Pot. waaay. Impv. चलानि, as, &e. Perf, ANS or TTS,
262 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP उ. CLASS h
चेतिय, sears; चेलिव, चेलथुस्, चेतस्; चेलिम, चेल, चेत्ुष्. ist Fut.
चत्ठितास्मि. ond Fut. चक्िष्पामि. Aor. सचाल्ठिषम्, अचात्परीस्, अचालीत्;
wast, सचालिष्टम्, -षटाम्; चचालिष्, -लिष्ट, -foqq. Prec. चस्यासम्.
Cond. wafesaq. Pass., Pres. vat. Caus., Pres. चल्यामि or चालयामि.
Des, faafemfa. Freq. चाचयस्ये, चाचल्मि. Part., Pres. चत्ठत् ; Past
Pass, afsa; Past Indecl. afern, -चत्य ; Fut. Pass. चत्तितव्य, चलनीय,
चाल्य, ।
603. Root जीच्. Inf. जीवितुम् ‘to live” Par. Pres, जीवामि. Impf.
अजीवम्, Pot. जीवेयम्, Impv. जीवानि, जीव, &c. Perf. जिजीव, निजीविय,
जिजीव; जिजीविव, निजीवधुस्, निजीवतुस् ; निजीधिम, जिजीव, जिजीवुस्. 14८
Fut. जीवितास्मि. and Fut. जीविष्यामि. dor. अजीविषम्, खजीवीस्, चजीवीत्;
अनी विष्व, सजीविष्टम्, अजीविष्टाम्; अजीविष्म, अजीविष्ट, अजीविषुस्. Prec.
जीव्यासम्. Cond. खजीविष्यम् . Pass., Pres. जीवये ; Aor. 3rd sing. खजीवि.
Caus., Pres. जी वयामि ; Aor, सनजिजीचम् or अजीजिवम्. Des. जिजी विषामि.
ए९व. जेजीव्ये. Part., Pres. जीवत् ; Past Pass. afta; Past Indeci.
जीवित्वा, -जीव्य ; Fut. Pass. जी वितव्य, जीवनीय, sta.
a. Root धाव्. Inf. धावितुम् ‘to run,’ ‘to wash. Par. and Atm.
Pres. धावाभि. Atm. धावे. Impf. अधावम्. Atm. अधावे, Pot. धावेयम्-
Atm. wag. Impv. धावानि, Atm. धावै. Perf. दधाव, दधाविथ, दधाव;
दधाविव, दधावथुस्, -वतुस्; दधाविम, दधाव, दधावुस्. 34 Fut. धावितास्मि.
Atm. धाविताहे. 2nd Fut. धाविष्यामि. Atm. धाविष्े. Aor. अधाविषम्,
अथधावीस्, खधावीत्; अधाविष्व, -faen, -विष्टाम्; सधाविष्म, -विष्ट, -विषुस्. Atm.
अधाविषि, -विष्ठास्, -विष्ट; अधाविष्वहि, &८. 7८८. धाव्यासम्. Atm. धाविषीय.
Cond. अधाविष्यम्, Atm. सखधाविष्ये. Pass., Pres. धाव्य. Caus., Pres,
धावयामि ; Aor. खदीधवम्. Des. दिधाविषामि, -मे. Freq. दाधाव्ये. Part.,
Pres, धावत्, धावमान ; Past Pass. धावित, wit (‘washed’) ; Past Indecl,
धावित्वा or Wat; Fut. Pass. धावितव्य, waata, धाव्य.
604. Root ¢s (special stem ayy, 270). Inf. दरष्टुम ‘to see’ Par.
Pres. पश्यामि, पश्यसि, परयति; पर्यावस्, WAI, पर्यतस् ; पश्यामस्, पर्यय,
पश्यन्ति. Impf. सपश्यम्, सप्यस्, सपश्यत् ; sugars, &८. Pot. पश्येयम्,
पश्येस्, पश्येत्; पश्येव, &c. Impv. पड्यानि, पश्य, पश्यतु ; पश्याव, &.
Perf. ददशः ददशिय or दद्र (370..)› TER; ददु शिव, TEWIA, द दूशतुस् ;
agar, ददुश, ददुशुस्. 19 Fut. दृष्टासि. and Fut. yanfa. dor,
(437. ¢) WENA, WANA, WEI; WEI, खद रतम्, अदशेताम् ; अद शम, wes,
wey. Or सद्राक्षम् (420, 390./), सद्रा्ौस्, सद्रा्ीत् ; सद्राष्व, सद्राष्टम्,
ARE; सखद्राष्मः सद्रा्टः सद्राकषुस्, Prec. दृश्यासम्. Cond. wey.
Pass., 72/९8. दूष्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अदि. Caus., Pres. दशेवामि ; Aor.
दी दृशम् or अददशेम् ; see 703. Des, fega. Freq. attgya, ददेरिमि.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS 1. 263
Part., Pres. पश्यत् ; Past Pass. qe; Past Indecl. दृष्टा, -gya; Put.
Pass. द्ष्टव्य, दशेनीय, दृश्य.
605. Root &y. Inf. ईशितुम् ^६0 see” Atm. Pres. ईक्षे. Impf.
रेते (251). Pot. Saya. Imp. ईक्षे. Perf. ईसाचक्रे, &c. (385, शात्
compare. ty at 600). 1st Fut. $faare. 2nd Fut. ईसिष्ये, Aor. रेचिषि
(251), रेषिष्टास्, रेकिष्ट; रेधिष्वहि, रेधिषायाम्, रेकिषाताम्; रेकिष्महि,
रे्िध्वम्, रेकषिषत. Prec. रछिषीय, &८. , Cond. Ufa. Pass. Set;
Aor. 3rd sing. रेक. Caus., Pres. Saarfa; Aor. रेचिक्षम् (494). Des.
Sfafea (500. ¢). Part., Pres. ईमा ; Past Pass. ईशित; Past
Indecl. ईषित्वा, -$ea; Fut. Pass. sfawa, Squats, Sa.
606. Root कृष् * (special stem कै). Inf. कम्. or MEA ‘to draw,
‘to drag.” Par, and Atm, Pres. कषीमि. Atm. at. Imp. सकवेम्,
Atm, wat. Pot, कर्वेयम्. Atm. aia. Impv. atifa. Atm. केष.
Perf. waa, wafta, wat; wafer, चकृषथुस्, चकृषतुस् ; चकृषिम, चकृष,
चकृपुस्. Atm. चकुषे, चकृषिषे, चकृषे ; चकृषिवहे, चकृप्राये, चकृषाते ; चकृषिमहे,
चकृषिध्वे, चकृषिरे. rst Fut. कस्मि. Atm. कहे or क्रष्टादे. 2nd Fu.
कष्योमि or क्रष्यामि, Atm. कर्ये or met. dor, wardy, wareia, अकारीत्;
Wa, सकाषटेम्, काष्ठाम् ; Wares, अका, Waray. Or ware, Taree,
&e. Or अकृषम्, BHAT, सकृत्; WHETA, अकृतम्, अकृषताम् ; WHER,
अकृक्षत, EAA. Atm. wae, अकृष्षथास् or WHY, BHAA or WHE;
अकृष्षावहि or wai, WAI, WHAM; BRaAfe or अकृष्महि,
WFMAA or BFA, WHAT or WHAT. Prec. कृष्यासम्. Atm. Hefty,
Cond. अकष्येम् or सक्रछ्यम्. Atm. weed or अ क्रये. Pass., Pres. Fa;
Aor. 3rd sing. waft. Caus., Pres. कर्षेयामि ; dor, waaay or सचौीकृषम्.
Des. चिकृ्षामि, -क्षे. Freq. चसीकृष्पे, aviafdt or चरीक्रष्मि. Part.,
Pres, कषेत् ; Past Pass. कृष्ट ; Past Indecl. कृष्टा, -कृष्य ; Fut. Pass,
weal or AEA, कषेणीय, कृष्य.
a. Root भाष्. Inf. भाषितुम् ‘to speak’ Atm, Pres. wre. Impf.
mara. Pot. भाषेय. 17009. मापे. Perf. वभाषे, वभाषिषे, ara; बभाषिवहे,
-षाये, -षाति; बभाषिमरे, -षिश्वे, -षिरे. ist 7४६, भाषिताहे. 2nd: Put.
भाषिष्ये. dor, अभाषिषि, -षिष्टास्, -पिष्ट ; अभाषिष्वहि, -पिषाथाम्, -पिषाताम् ;
अभाषिष्महि, -पिभ्नम्, -पिषत. Prec. भाषिषीय. Cond. अभाषिष्ये. Pass.,
Pres. भाष्ये; Aor. 3rd sing, समाषि. Caus. भाषयामि; Aor. अवभाषम्
and चवीभषम्. Des. विभाषिषे. Freq. ania, बाभाष्मि (3rd sing. वाभा).
Part., Pres. भाषमाण ; Past Pass. भाषित ; Past. Indecl, भाषित्वा, -भाष्य;
Fut. Pass. भाषितव्य, भाषणीय, नाष्य.
* This root is also conjugated in cl. 6 ;. Pres. कृषामि; &c.; Pot. कृषेयम्, &e..
264 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I.
8. Root wy. Inf. रुम् ‘to preserve,’ ‘to defend.’ Par. Pres. रक्षामि.
Impf. acaq. Pot. रलेयम्. Impv. carta (58), ca, &e. Perf. wa,
ररक्िथ, ररक्ष; ररव, ररश्युस्, aga; एम, wa, wag. ist Ful.
cfeyatfer. 2nd Fut. रक्षिष्यामि. Aor. सरखिषम्, arate, चरछीत् ; अरशिष्व,
wacfeer, अरदिष्टाम् ; wefan, arfee, सरधिाषुस्. Prec. र्या सम्. Cond.
अरसिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. wat. Caus., Pres. camfa, &c.; Aor. TAA.
Des. ferfeyarfa, &c. Freq. रर्ये, रारि. Part., Pres. wa;
Past Pass. tfaa; Past Indecl. tfarn, -र्य ; Fut. Pass. tara,
रछ्षणीय, TA.
607. Root वस्. Inf. वस्तुम् ‘to dwell.’ Par. Pres. वसामि. Impf.
waey. Pot. वसेयम्. 1४. वसानि, वस, & ८. Perf. उवास (368), उवसिथ
or उवस्य, उवास ; ऊषिव, BAYA, Baga; ऊषिम, ऊष, ऊषुस्. 1st Fut. वस्तास्मि.
and Fut. वयामि (304. ¢) Aor. खवात्सम् (304. a, 426. 2}, areata,
अवात्सीत्; WIAA, सवात्तम्, अवात्ताम्; WAH, अवात्त, अवात्सुस्. Prec, उष्यासम्-
Cond. सवल्यम् (3०4. ५). Pass., Pres. उष्ये (471) ; Aor. 3rd sing. अवासि.
Caus., Pres. वासयामि, -ये ; Aor. वीवसम्. Des. विवत्सामि (304. a).
Freq. बावस्ये, वावस्मि or वावसीमि, - Part., Pres. वसत् ; Past Pass. sfaa
(with वि, se); Past Indecl. उषित्वा, -उष्य (565); Fut. Pass. वस्तव्य,
वसनीय, वास्य.
608. Root we. Inf. अर्हितुम् ‘to deserve.” Par. Pres. सहामि.
Impf. साम्. 201. चर्यम्. Impv. warfa (58). Perf. (367. 9) सानरै,
आनरहिंय, Brae; Brae, अनरैयुस्, HAST; अआनरिम, अनह, आनहैस्.
ist Fut. अहितास्मि. 2nd Fut. सहिष्यामि. Aor. wifey, साम्, आहीत् ;
wifes, wifey, आहिं्टाम् ; ` wifen, आर्ट, आर्हिषुस्. Prec. waren.
Cond. खाहिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. अर्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. wife. Caus., Pres.
wearta, -ये ; Aor. सा्जिंहम् (494). Des. सजिहिषामि, &c. (500.d). Part.,
Pres. सहैत् ; Past Pass. अहित ; Past Indecl. सहित्वा, -w&; Fut. Pass.
अहितव्य, सरेणीय, Wel.
609. Root गुह् (special stem गूह, 270.4). Inf. गूहिुम् or गोदुम् ‘to
hide? Par. and Atm, Pres, गूहामि Atm. me. Imp. wen.
Atm. wig. Pot. गृहेयम् Atm. गृहेय- Impv. गृहानि. Atm. गूहे
Perf. जुगूह (384.4), नुगूहिथ or जुगोढ (305.4), जुगूह ; जुगुहिव or जुगु
(37), नुगुहयुस्, नुगुहस् ; नुगुहिम or Ya, We, नुगुहुस्. Atm. जुगुरे,
जुगृहिषे or wget, &c. 1st Fut. (415. m) nfgatfet or गोटास्मि (305. a).
Atm. गूहिताहे or गोढाहे- 2nd Fut. गृहिष्यामि or dranfa. Atm. गृहिष्ये
or urea. Aor. WAT, WI, सगूहीत्; सगृूहिष्व, wifeer, सगूहिष्टाम्;
खगुहिष्म, सगृहिष्ट, अगूहिषुस्. Or सपुसम् (3०6. a), WIT, BATT; WRT,
WIAAA, सथुधताम्; WHR, अधुक्षत, सथुघन्. Atm. सगूहिषि, सगूहिष्ठास्,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS I. 265
wife, &c. Or agfer (439. 8), yey or अगूढास्, अधृत or WE;
syarafe or अगुद्हि, WERT, अधुश्षाताम् ; अपुघामहि, WAM or HUTA,
gaa. Prec. गुद्यासम्. Atm. गूहिषीय or gata (3०6. 2}. Cond. गूहिष्यम्
or अघोच्यम्. Atm. afew or ware. Pass., Pres Ta; Aor. 3rd sing
anfg. Caus., Pres. गृहयामि ; Aor अनुगुहम्. ०8. जुधुश्षामि, -छे- Freq
जोगे, जोगोदि (3rd sing. जोगोढि) or जोगुहीमि. Part., Pres neq; Past
Pass, गूढ (305. %) ; Past Indecl. nfgrat or met or गृहित्वा, -गद्य ; Fut
Pass. गृहितव्य or गोढव्य, गहनीय, गद्य or We (573. ५)
610. Root ay. Inf. दग्धुम् ‘to burn” Par. Pres. दहामि. Impf.
अदहम्. Pot. दहेयम्, &c. Impr. दहानि, दह, &c. Perf. ददाह, देहिय
(375. ०) or ददग्ध (305), ददाह ; देहिव, दे पुस्, Pega; दे हिम, देह, Bey
ist Fut. द्ग्धास्मि, 2nd Fut, wearfa (3०6. a). Aor. अधाृम् (422)
WUE, अधासीत्; AM, अदाग्धम्, अदाग्धाम् ; UTM, अदाग्ध, ANAT.
Pree. दद्यासम्. Cond. अधस्यम्. Pass., Pres. ca; Aor. 3rd sing. अदाहि.
Caus., Pres. दाहयामि, -ये; Aor. अद्ैद्हम्. Des. fewerft (502. a).
Freq. weet, tefa or दन्दहीमि (3rd sing. दन्दग्धि or दन्दहीति). ए,
Pres. दहत्; Past Pass, era; Past Indecl. aa, -दद्य ; Fut. Pass.
दग्धव्य, TAT, दाद.
611. Root ag. Inf. वोढुम् ‘to व्वा. Par. and Atm. Pres.
वहाभि. Atm. वहे. Impf.. अवहम्. Atm. wae. Pot. वहेयम्. Atm.
वहेय. Impv. वहानि, az, &. Atm. वहे. Perf. (375. c) उवाह (368),
उवहिय or उवोढ, उवाह ; ऊहिव, ऊहथुस्, ऊहदुस् ; ऊहिम, ऊह, ऊहुस्. Atm.
Be, Bee, we; ऊहिवहे, ward, wed; ऊहिमहे, ऊटिध्ने or ऊहित, ऊदिरे.
ist Fut. वोढास्मि. Atm. वोटाहे. 2nd Fut. वयामि. Atm. वषये. Aor.
(425) WAAR, सवाक्षीस्, अवाक्षीत् ; अवा, HANSA, अवोढाम् ; अवाम, अवोढ,
wary. Atm. अवधि, अवोढास्, अवोढ ; सव्व, AQUA, सव्षाताम्;
अवष्महि, सवोदृम्, wrAW. Prec. उद्यासम्. Atm. वक्षी य. Cond. अवछ्यम्.
Atm. wae. Pass., Pres. (471) ta; Impf. sta (251. ५); Aor. 3rd
sing. सवाह Caus., Pres. वाहयामि, -ये; Aor. अवौवहम्. Des. fazenfa,
-¥. Freq. वावद्ये, arafa (3rd sing. ariife; cf. 425). Part., Pres,
वहत्; Atm. azara; Pass. उद्यमान ; Past Pass. ऊढ ; Past Indecl. ऊद,
-उद्य (565); Fut. Pass. वोढव्य, वहनीय, वाद्य.
a, सह्, Inf. सोदुम् or सहिहुम् ‘to bear,’ is Atm. only, and, like vah, makes
सोढाहे &c. in 1st Fut.: but in this tense optionally, and in the other
General tenses necessarily inserts 2; thus, 1st Fut. afgate; 2nd Fut.
सहिष्ये; Aor. wafefa; Prec. afedta; Cond. ससटिष्ये. The Perf. is सेहे
(375. a), सेहिषे, &c. Part., Fut. Pass, सोढव्य or सहितव्य, सहनीय, सद्य (573).
The other tenses are like the Atm. of vah; thus, Pres. सहे, &c.
M m
266 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP 1, CLASS IV.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 272.
612. Root gg muh. Infin. मोहितम् mohitum, ‘to be troubled.’
Parasmar-papa. Present Tense, ‘I am troubled.’
garfa muhydmi भुद्यावस् muhydvas HAAG muhydmas
भुद्यसि muhyasi FATT muhyathas Faq muhyatha
gafa muhyati FACT muhyatas gata muhyanti
Imperfect, <I was troubled.’
समुदयम् amuhyam MPAA amuhydva TATA amuhydma
` समुद्यस् amuhyas समुद्यतम् amuhyatam ऋअमुद्यत amuhyata
समुद्यत् amuhyat समुद्यताम् amuhyatdém WAT amuhyan
Potential, ‘I may be troubled.’
मुखेयम् muhyeyam yaa muhyeva qaa muhyema
Taq muhyes मुदेतम् muhyetam मुदेत muhyeta
~ Fat muhyet मुदेताम् muhyetdm qaqa muhyeyus
Imperative, ‘Let me be troubled.’
भुद्यानि muhydni भुद्याव muhydva FAA muhydma
Fa muhya भुद्यतम् muhyatam Fea muhyata
FAG muhyatu भमुदखताम् muhyatdm सुद्यन्तु muhyantu
Perfect, ‘I have been troubled.’
मुमोह mumoha मुमुहिव mumuhiva gyfer mumuhima
भुमोहिय mumohitha * मुमुह युम् mumuhathus FTE mumuha
मुमोह mumoha मुमुटवुस् mumuhatus मुमुहुस् mumuhus
First Future t+, ‘I shall or will be troubled.’
मोहितास्मि mohitdsmi मोहितासखस् mohitdsvas मोहितास्मस् mohitdsmas
Mfeatfa mohitdsi मोहितास्यस् mohitdsthas मोहितास्व mohitdstha
मोहिता mohitd मोहितासो mohitdrau मोहितारस् mohitdras
Second Future t, ‘1 shall or will be troubled.’
मोरहिष्यामि mohishydmi मोरिष्यावस् mohishydvas MATT mohishydmas
मोरिष्यसि mohishyasi मोहिष्ययस् mohishyathas मोरिष्यय mohishyatha
मोरिष्पति mohishyati मोहिष्यतस् mohishyatas मोदिष्यन्ति mohishyanti
* Or मुमोढ (303. a) or मुमोग्ध (305).
+ The 1st and 2nd Futures may optionally reject the inserted 8; see 415. m.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS IV. 267
Aorist (435), ‘I became troubled.’
IITA amuham अमुहाव amuhdva WFAA amuhdma
अमुहस् amuhas NAFTA amuhatam अमुत amuhata
NTE amuhat NACA amuhatam WATT amuhan
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May I be troubled?
मुद्यासम् muhydsam FATS muhydsva FAK muhydsma
FANT muhyds मुद्यास्तम् muhydstam FAT muhydsta
Far muhydt मुद्यास्ताम् muhydstdm मुद्यासुस् muhydsus
Conditional, ‘I should be troubled.’
अभमोरहिष्यम् amohishyam समोहिष्याव amohishydva समोहिष्पाम amohishydma
समोहिष्यस् amohishyas अमोरिष्यतम् amohishyatam अमोहिष्यत amohishyata
अमोहिष्यत् amohishyat अमोरहिष्यताम् amohishyatdm समोहिष्यन् 21011504,
Pass., Pres. ga; Aor. 3rd sing. मोहि, Caus., Pres. मोहयामि ; Aor.
अमूमुहम्. Des. मुमोहिषामि or मुमुहिषामि ० सुमुक्षामि. Freq. arya, aif
-(3rd sing. aratfe or मोमोग्धि, 305). Part., Pres. मुद्यत् ; Past Pass, मूढ
(305. a) ण मुग्ध; Past Indecl. मोहित्वा or मुहित्वा or मुगध्वा or मूढा, -सुद्य;
Fut, Pass. मोहितव्य or मोग्धव्य, मोहनीय, मोद्य.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 4 IN THE,ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
613. Root सो (special stem स्य, 276. a). Inf. सातुम् ‘to finish’
(with prepositions vi and ava, ‘to determine,’ ‘to strive’). Par,
Pres. स्यामि. Impf. अस्यम्. Pot. way. Impv.enta. Perf. (373. d)
ससौ, ससिथ or ससाय, ससो; ससिव, ससथुस्, ससतुस् ; ससिम, सस, समुस्.
ist Fut. सातास्मि- and Fut. सास्यामि. Aor. (438. ¢) असाम्, ware,
असात्; असाव, असातम्, HAMA; असाम, असात, असुस्. Or ससासिषम् (433),
असासीस्, असासीत्; असासिष्व, ससासिष्टम्, ससासिष्टाम्; ससासिष्म, असासिष्ट,
असासिपुस्. Prec. सेयासम्. Cond. असास्यम्. Pass., Pres. Wa; Aor,
3rd sing. असायि. Caus., Pres. साययामि ; dor, असी षयम्. Des. fam-
सामि. Freq. सेषीये, ससेमि, सासामि, Part., Pres. aq; Past Pass. सित ;
Past Indecl. fart, -साय ; Fut. Pass. सातव्य, सानीय, सेय.
614. Root बुध् (special stem बुध्य). Inf. बोद्धुम् ‘to perceive*. Atm,
Pres. pa. ^ अवुध्ये. Pot. pHa. Impv. PA. Perf. FAA; see
the tables at 583. 1st Fut. बोद्धारे. and Fut. Wa (299. 0). Aor,
(420, 299. 2) MAT, WIS, अबुद्ध or अबोधि (424.0); wyRafe, सशुत्सायाम्,
अभुत्साताम् ; सभु, अशुद्धम् (299. ¢), अभुत्सत. Prec. yrata. Cond,
sitet. For the other forms, see FY at 583.
* बुध् is also conjugated in the 1st class. See the tables at 583.
Mm 2
` 268 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS IY.
615. Root व्यध् (special stem विध्य, 277). Inf. व्यङ्खम् ‘to pierce
Par. Pres. विध्यामि. Impf. wfaaq. Pot. विध्येयम्. Impv. विध्यानि
Perf. (383) विव्याध, विव्यधिथ or विव्यद्ध, विव्याध ; विविधिव, fafarga, fafa-
uga; fafafua, विविध, विविधुस्. ist Fut. व्यद्धास्मि (298). 2nd Fut.
व्यद्यामि (299). dor. (420) अव्यात्सम्, warty, सव्यात्सीत् ; Ware,
Waray (419, 298), अव्याद्वाम् ; अव्यात्स, सव्याद्ध, aga. Prec, विध्यासम्
Cond. wary. Pass., Pres. विध्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अव्याधि Caus.,
Pres. व्याधयामि; Aor. अविव्यधम्. Des. विव्यत्सामि. Freq, वेविध्ये, वाव्यभ्नि
Part., Pres. विध्यत् ; Past Pass. विद्ध ; Past Indecl. विद्धा; -विध्य; Fut
7055. व्यद्धव्य , व्यधनीय, वेध्य or ANA.
616. Root fay (special stem सिध्य, 273). Inf. सेदुम् ‘to succeed.’
Par. Pres. fearfa. Impf. असिध्यम्. Pot. सिथ्येयम्. Impv. faunfa.
Perf. सिषेध, सिषेधिय or fats, सिषेध ; सिषिधिव, सिषिधयुस्, सिषिधतुस्;
सिथिधिम, सिषिध, fafayg. 1st Fut. warfer(298)*. and Fut. से्यामि
(299)*. dor, असिधम् *, असिधस्, असिधत्; असिधाव, असिथतम्, असिथताम्;
असिधाम, असिधत, असिधन्. Prec. सिध्यासम्. Cond. खतेत्यम्. Pass., Pres.
सिध्ये; Aor. 3rd sing. सेधि. Caus., Pres. @vatfa or साधयामि ; Aor.
असीषिधम्. Des. सिषित्सामि. Freq. सेषिध्ये, सेषेध्मि, Part., Pres. सिध्यत् ;
Past Pass. सिद्ध ; Past Indecl. सिद्धा or सेधित्वा or सिधित्वा, -सिध्य; Fut
Pass. सेडव्य, सेधनीय, सेध्य.
617. Root wat (special stem मन्य). Inf. मन्तुम् ‘to think, ‘to
‘imagine’ Atm. Pres. wa. Impf. अमन्ये. Pot. मन्येय. Impv. मन्ये,
Perf, मेने (375. %), मेनिषे, मेने ; मेनिवहे, Aaa, मेनाते; मेनिमहे, मेनिश्वे,
मेनिरे. ist Fut. wane. ond Fut. ta. Aor. (424. 0) अमंसि†, समंस्यास्,
अमंस्त ; अमं खि, अमं सायाम्, sda; अमंस्महि, समन्ध्वम्, अमंसत. Prec.
data. Cond. sata. Pass., Pres. मन्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. समानि. Caus.,
Pres, मानयामि ; Aor. अमीमनम्. Des. fata or मीमांसे or भिमनिषे. Freq.
मन्मन्ये, मन्मन्मि. Part., Pres. मन्यमान ; Past Pass. मत् ; Past Indecl.
मत्वा, -मत्य ; Fut. Pass. मन्तव्य, मननीय, मान्य.
a. जन्, Inf. जनितुम् ‘to be born,’ makes Pres. जाये ; Impf. अजाये,
&९.; 7. जायेय ; Impv. जाये. But these may be regarded as coming
from Passive of jan, cl. 3. See 667.
618. Root gut (special stem तृष्य). Inf. त्म् or AHR or तपिुम्
* When fay belongs to cl. 1, it optionally inserts इ ४ सेद्धास्मि or सेधितास्मि,
Breaths or सेधिष्यामि, असेधिषम् or ससेत्सम्
+ The root मन् is rarely conjugated in cl. 8, Atmane (see 684), when the Aorist
is समनिषि, समनिष्टास् or WAU, समनिष्ट or अमत, &c. See 424. ¢.
{ Also conjugated in cl. 5, Par. Tafa, &e.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS IV. 269
‘to be satisfied.” Par. Pres, तुष्यामि. Impf. अतृष्यम्. Pot. तृष्पेयम्.
Impy. qaufu. Perf. ततपै, तततपिंय or तत्य or FATA, TAT; ततृपिव or WIA,
ततुपथुस्, ततुपहुस् ; ततुपिम or APH, तुप, ततुपुस्. 1st Fut. (390.,/) witfe or
` तपरास्मि or तपितास्मि (390.4). 2nd Fut. wearin or तप्स्यामि or त्पिष्यामि, &c.
Aor. (420) अताप्सेम्, अताप्सीस्, अताप्ीत् ; अताप्सै, SANNA, WATT] ; BATA,
watt, सताप्सुस्. Or warTey, अतापसस्, अताष्सीत्, &c. Or अतर्पिषम्,
-सतर्पीस्, अतर्पीत्, &c. Or अतृपम्, ATW, WI; सतृपाव, अतृपतम्, सतृपताम् ;
WTA, WIT, Aga. Prec. Farag. Cond. सतष्स्येम् or VaR or
‘wafamy. Pass., Pres. ya; Aor. 3rd sing. safe. Caus., Pres. तपै-
यामि; dor, अती तृपम् or सततपेम्. Des. faqrarfa or तितष्सामि or तिततपिषाभि.
Freq, तसीतृष्ये, तरी तषि or attafer Part., Pres. yaa; Past Pass. qn;
Past Indecl. qat, -तृष्य ; Fut. Pass, via, त्ैणीय, तुष्य.
619. Root शम् (special stem शाम्य, 275). Inf. शमितुम् ‘to be
‘appeased.’ Par. Pres. शाम्यामि. = Impf. अश्ाम्यम्. = Pot. शाम्येयम्.
Impo. शाम्यानि. Perf. शशाम (368), रोमिय (375.4), शज्ञाम ; शेभिव, रोमथुस्,
WATT; शेभिम, शेम, शेमुस्. rst Fut. शञमितास्मि. and Fut. शामिष्यामि,
Aor, खजञमम्, HVAT, सशमत् ; अशमाव, STAC, अशमताम् ; अशमाम, अशमत,
अशमन्. Or अशमिषम्, अशमीस्, अशमीत् ; अशमिष्व, &८. Prec. शम्यासम्.
Cond, अशमिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. शम्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. सशमि or अज्ञाभि.
Caus., Pres. शञमयामि ; Aor. अशीशमम्. Des. शिशमिषामि. Freq. शं शम्ये,
शंरान्मि (3rd sing. शं शन्ति). Part., 2. शाम्यत् ; Past Pass. शान्त ; Past
Indecl. शञान्वा or शमित्वा, -शम्य ; Fut. Pass. शमितव्य, शमनीय, शम्य.
620. Root न् (special stem नश्य). Inf. नशितुम् or yA ‘to perish.’
Par. Pres. नश्यामि. Impf. अनश्यम्. Pot. नश्येयम्. Impv. नश्यानि.
Perf. (375. ०) Way or ननश्ञ, Afwa or ननं (375.4), ननाशं ; नेशिव or
नेश्व, नेश थुस्, नेशहस्; नेशिम or नेश्म, Ay, नेशुस् 15 Fut. नशितास्मि or
नं्टास्मि (390. k). and Fut. नशिष्यामि or नंछ्यामि. Aor. (437) WANA,
FAVA, अनशत्; अनशाव, अनशतम्, HAYA; अनशाम, AYA, wage. Or
अनेशम्, &c. (437, 441). Prec. ayaraq. Cond. सनशिष्यम् &c. or THA.
Pass., Pres. aya; Aor. 3rd sing. sanfg. Caus., Pres. aryrnfa; Aor.
अनीनशम्. Des. निनशिषामि, निनंसषाभि. Freq. नानश्ये, arafgn (3rd sing.
नानि or नानं). ` Part., Pres. ayaq; Past Pass. नष्ट ; Past Indecl.
agi or नष्टा, -नश्य; Fut. 055. नशितव्य, areata, नाश्य.
621. Root पुष् > (special stem पुष्य). Inf. पोषम् ‘to be nourished,’
‘to grow fat’ Par. Pres. yarfa. Impf. syaq. Pot. पुष्पेयम्.
Impv. yarfa. Perf. पुपोष, पुपोषिय, पुपोष; पुपुषिव, पुपुषयुस्, पुपुषहुस् ;
पुपुषिम, पुपुष, पुपुषुस्. st Fut. Werf. and Fut. पोषयामि. Aor. (436)
* This root is also conjugated in the oth class. See 698.
270 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS IV.
AYA, अपुषस्, अपुषत्; आपुषाव, अपुषतम्, अपुषताम्; अपुषाम, AAA, अपुषन्.
226. पुष्यासम्. Cond. अपोष्यम्. Pass., Pres. ya; Aor. 3rd sing, पोषि.
Caus., Pres. पोषयामि ; Aor. अपूपुषम्. Des. पुपोषिषामि or पुपुषिषामि or
yyatfa. Freq. aga, पोपोष्मि. Part., Pres. yarq; Past Pass. पुष्ट ;
Past Indecl. पुष्टा, -पुष्य ; Fut. Pass. dea, पोषशीय, पोष्य.
622. Root wa (special stem wen). Inf. असितुम् ‘to throw.’ Par.
Pres. wenfa, &c. Impf. आस्यम्. 702. अस्येयम्. Imp. सस्यानि. Perf.
WA, VAG, सास; Was, WATE, आसुस्; सासिम, खास, आसुस्. 19 Fut.
असिततास्मि. ond Fut. ससिष्यामि. Aor. (441) खास्यम्, MAR, WM; BMA,
सआस्यतम्, आस्यताम्; SIA, आस्यत्, आस्यन्. Prec. खस्यासम् . Cond. आसिष्यम्,
Pass., Pres. खस्थे ; Aor. 3rd sing. सासि. Caus., Pres. सासयामि ; Aor.
आसिसम्. Des. असिसिषामि. Part., Pres. अस्यत् ; Past Pass. सस्त ; Past
Indecl. ज्सित्वा or सस्वा, -खस्य ; Fut. Pass. ससितव्य, seats, आस्य.
623. Root $x (special stem दद्य). Inf. gry or द्रोहितुम् ‘ to injure,’
“to bear malice.” Par. Pres. ganfa. Impf. wgan. Pot. दुद्येयम्.
Impv. gata. Perf. दुद्रोह, दुद्रोहिष or दुद्रोग्ध or दुद्रोढ, दुद्रोह; Fees,
ददुदथुम्, दददस् ; इदरुहिम, दुदर, TERA. 19 Pat. (475. m) द्रोग्धास्मि or
द्रोढास्मि or द्रोहितास्मि, &. and Fut. अोष्यामि (306. a) or द्रोहिष्यामि.
Aor, सदम्, अदुस्, चदुहत्; AYE, अदुहतम्, सदुहताम्; खदुहाम, WEE,
अदुहन्. Prec. दुद्यासम्, & ८. Cond. अधोश्यम् (306. a) or खदरोहिष्यम्. Pass.,
Pres. ya ; Aor. 3rd sing. खदरोहि. Caus., Pres. greatfa; Aor. अदुदूहम्.
Des. दुद्रोहिषामि or दुदुहिषामि or दुशुक्लामि (3०6. ५). Freq. दोदर, दोद्रोचि
(37rd sing. दोद्रोग्ि or दोद्रोदि, 514- ¶). Part., Pres. gaa; Past Pass.
दुग्ध; Past Indecl. grea or दहित्वा or रोहिता, -ga; Fut. Pass. gra,
द्रोहणीय, gle.
624. Root नह् (special stem नद्य). Inf. नद्धम् ‘to tie,’ ‘to bind,’ ‘to
fasten.’ Par. and Atm, Pres. wanfa. Atm. wa. Impf. wae.
Atm. sa. Pot. नदयेयम्. 9 Atm. waa. Impv. wenfa. Atm. नये.
Perf. ननाह or Tag, नेहिय or Tag, ननाह ; नेहिव, Ay, नेरहुस् ; नेहिम,
नेद, Agq. Atm. नेहे, fed, AB; नेहिवरे, Tere, नेहाते ; नेहिमहे, नेहिषध्वे
or -@, नेदिरे. ist Fut. नद्धास्मि. Atm. were. 2nd Fut. (306. 2) नयामि.
Atm. wet. dor. (426) खनात्सम्, TTT, AAT; Waa, अनाडम्,
WAS; WARK, Nate, सनात्सुस्. Atm. सनत्सि, Wasa, सनद्ध ; सनत्सहि,
अनत्साथाम्, सनत्साताम् ; सनास्महि, सनद्खम्, सनत्सत. Prec. waray. Atm.
नत्सीय. Cond. सनव्यम्. Atm. samt. Pass. Pres. wa; Aor. 3rd sing.
अनाहि. Caus., Pres. aremfa; dor. खनी नहम्. Des. निनत्साभि, -त्से.
Freq, नान्ये, नानि (3rd sing. नानद्धि). Part., Pres. नयत् ; Past Pass.
wa; Past Indecl. नद्धा, -नद्य ; Fut. Pass. नव्य, नहनीय, नाद्य.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS VI. 271
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SIXTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 278.
625. Root सृज् sri. Infin. खदम् srashtum, ‘to create,’ ‘to let go.?
PARASMAI-PADA only.
Present Tense, ‘I create.’
FAV भषणं YAAT srijdvas सुनामस् srijdmas
सृजसि srijasi सुजयस् srijathas FAI srijatha
सुजति srijati सृजतस् srijatas सृजन्ति srijanti
Imperfect, ‘I was creating,’ or ‘I created.’
असुजम् asrijam असुजाव asrijdva SYA asrijdma
ससुजस् asrijas मुजतम् asrijatam RYAA asrijata
AYA asrijat WYAAA asrijatém WAT asrijan
Potential, ‘I may create.’
सुजेयम् srijeyam gaz srijeva सुजेम srijema
सृजेस् Srijes सृजेतम् srijetam सृजेत 1.11.
सृजेत् ५१५८ सृजेताम् srijetdm FAIA srijeyus
Imperative, ‘Let me create.’
सूजानि शकण सुजाव srijdva सुजाम srijdma
सूज srija सृजतम् srijatam FAA srijata
FAT srijatu FAA srijatém सुनन्तु srijantu
Perfect, ‘1 created,’ or ‘I have created,’
wast sasarja agraa sasrijiva ससुजिम sasrijima
ससजि sasarjitha or सच्रष्ट * AYAYA ०००१०८५ AFH sasrija
AWA sasarja ससुजतुस् sasrijatus AYA sasrijus
First Future, ‘I shall or will create.’
खष्टास्सि srashtdsmi (399. ४) ETAT srashtdsvas BETA srashtdsmas
खष्टासि srashtdsi स्र्टास्यस् srashtdsthas WTR srashtdstha
ष्टा srashtd स्रष्टारौ srashtdrau BRITA srashtdras
Second Future, ‘I shall or will create?
खस्यामि srakshydmi , स्रस्या वस् ७५४७१४४० WRMAG srakshydmas
सघछ्यसि srakshyasi ARIAT srakshyathas WR srakshyatha
स्यति srakshyati PRAY srakshyatas weater srakshyanti
* As to sasrashtha, 866 370. f.
272 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS VI.
Aorist, ‘I created,’
अस्रास्म् asrdksham Walet asrdkshva NETRA asrdkshma
Waray asrdkshis Watery asrdshtam घ्ना asrdshta
अघ्राक्षीत् asrdkshit WATETH asrdshtdm अस्राक् ००८०४५४
Precative or Benedictive, ‘ May I create.’
सृज्यासम् srijydsam सृज्यास् srijydsva सृज्यास्म srijydsma
FIA srijyds सुज्यास्तम् srijydstam FRU srijydsta
सृज्यात् srijyat FTA srijydstdm सुज्यासुस् srijydsus
Conditional, ‘I should create.’
AeA asrakshyam WARM asrakshydva WARM asrakshydma
NARA asrakshyas अस्रछ्यतम् asrakshyatam स्रह्यत asrakshyata
ART asrakshyat NARA asrakshyatdm WARN asrakshyan
Pass., Pres. सृज्ये; Aor. 3rd sing. wafs. Caus., Pres. सजैयामि ;
Aor, waaay or असीमृनम्. Des. fagerfa, -g. Freq. सरीसुज्ये. Part.,
Pres. सृजत्; Past Pass. ye; Past Indecl. सृष्टा, -सृज्य ; Fut. Pass. ava,
सनेनीय, Fz.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 6 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
626. Root मृ (special stem faa, 280). Inf. मतम् ‘to die.? Atm. in
Special tenses, also in Aor. and Prec.; Par..in others. Pres. faa. Impf.
सधिये. Pot. faaa. Impv. धिये. Perf. ममार, ara, ममार; afaa, मखथुस्,
wage; मिम, मख, मुस्. Atm. मघे, मधिषे, wa; afaae, Tard, मखाति ;
afaad, afaed or -¢, afat. ist Fut. मस्मि. nd Fut. मरिष्यामि. Aor.
waa, अमृथास्, अमृत ; अमृष्वहिः अमृषाथाम्, अमृषाताम् ; समृष्महि, समृदुम्, समृषत.
72/९0. मृषीय. Cond, खमरिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. faa; Aor. 3rd sing. समारि.
Caus., Pres. मारयामि ; Aor. अमीमरम्. Des. मुमूषामि (502). Freq.
Hata, मरि- or aci- or ममेम. Part., Pres. fawara; Past Pass. मृत;
Past Indecl, मृत्वा, -मृत्य ; Fut. Pass. ata, मरणीय, मायै.
627. Root कृ (special stem fart, 280). Inf. करितुम् or करीतुम् ‘to
scatter.’ Par. Pres. किणमि, Impf. सकिरम्. Pot. करेयम्, Impv.
किराणि. Perf. (374. ¢) चकार, चकरिथ, चकार; चकरिव, TaTYY, चकरतुस् ;
waft, चकर, चकरूस्. 15 Fut. (393) afemfe or करीतास्मि. and Fut.
(393) करिष्यामि or करौष्पामि, &c. dor, सकारिषम्, खकारौस्, सकारीत् ; सका-
for, अकारिष्टम्, after; सकारिष्म, warfte, सकारिषुस्. Prec. कौयासम् .
Cond. अकरिष्यम् or सकरीष्यम्. 2988. Pres. कीरये ; Aor. 3rd sing, सकारि,
Caus., Pres, कारयामि ; ` Aor. सची करम्. Des. चिकरिषामि * Freq. चेकीरये,
* With regard to 393, 501, कृ and 7 are not allowed the option of कद.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS VI. 273
चाकि. Part., Pres. किरत्; Past Pass. att (530. a); Past Indecl.
att, -कीयै; Fut. Pass. करितव्य or करीतव्य, करणीय, काये.
628. Root मुच् (special stem qa, 281). Inf. मोक्तु म् ‘to loose,’ ‘to
let go” Par. and Atm. Pres. garfa. Atm. Fa. Impf. समुचम् .
Atm. wat. Pot. qaaq. Atm. मुच्ेय. Impv. qanfa. Atm. FR.
Perf. मुमोच, gifaa, मुमोच ; मुमुचिव, मुमुचथुस्, मुमुचठुस् ; मुमु चिम, मुमुच,
मुमुचुस्. Atm. मुमुचे, सुमुचिषे, मुमुचे ; मुमु चिषहे, मुमुचाये, मुमुचाते ; मुमुचिमरे,
gars, मुमुचिरे. 19 Fut. मोक्तास्मि. Atm. मोक्ताहे. 24 Fut. मोचयामि.
Atm, ara. Aor. (436) समुचम्, अमुचस्, अमुचत्; खमुचाव, अमुचतम्, अमुचताम्;
BAW, अमुचत, समुचन्. Atm. समुषि, अमुक्यास्, अमुक्त; BPs, समुक्षायाम्,
अमुक्षाताम् ; we, समुगध्वम्, अमुक्त. Prec. Farag. Atm. gata (452).
Cond, ware. Atm. wate. Pass., Pres. Fa; Aor. 3rd sing. अमोचि.
Caus., Pres. मोचयामि ; Aor. अमूमुचम्. Des. मुमुक्षामि, -से, Ae (503).
Freq. मोमुच्ये, मोमोच्ि (3rd sing. मोमोक्ति). Part., Pres. मुष्वत् ; Past Pass.
मुक्त; Past Indecl. gat, -मुच्य ; Fut. Pass, मोक्तव्य, मोचनीय, ara.
, 629. Root व्यच् (special stem विच, 282). Inf. व्वचितुम् ‘to deceive.’
Par. Pres. faatfa. Impf. सविचम्. Pot. विचेयम्. Impv. विचानि.
Perf. (383) विव्याच, frafay, विव्याच; विविचिव, विषिचथुस्, विविचतुस्;
fafafaa, विषिच, विविचुस्. ist Fut. व्यचित्तास्मि. ond Fut. व्यचिष्यामि.
Aor, (428) सव्यचिषम्, खव्यचीस्, &c., or सखव्याचिषम्, &c. Prec, विच्यासम्.
Cond, सव्यचिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. frat; Aor. 3rd sing. सव्याचि. Caus.,
Pres, qraatfa; Aor. अविव्यचम्. Des. विव्यचिषामि. Freq. वेविच्ये, वाव्यच्मि
or वाव्यचीमि- Part., Pres. विचत् ; Past Pass. fafaa; Past Indecl.
विचित्वा, -विच्य; Fut. 055. व्यचितव्य, विचनीय, व्याच्य.
630. Root व्रश्च् (special stem वृश्च, 282). Inf. ब्रश्ितुम् ‘to cut.’ Par.
Pres. Fata. Impf. अवृच्म्. 704. वृश्चेयम्. Impv.zafa. Perf. 2304,
qafaa or वत्र, aa; वव्रश्चिव or वनव्रश्च (371), FABIA, वत्र्चतुस् ; वव्रिम
or FARA, Wa, TAA. 15 Fut. (415) त्रश्ितास्मि or ब्रष्टास्मि. and Fut.
afgunfa or wear. dor. सव्रश्चिषम्, सत्र श्ठीस्, wawiq; wafer, &c.,
see 427. Or Waray (423), WATE, सव्राछीत् ; NA, WATER (297),
अव्राशम् ; Waren, ware, warga. Prec. Faaq. Cond. wafaay or
wae. Pass. Pres. gat (472); Aor. 3rd sing. अत्रि (475. 4).
Caus., Pres. wgurfa; Aor. सवित्रश्ठम्. Des. faafanfa or farrarfa.
Freq. aga, aaqutfa. Part., Pres. yaq; Past Pass. वृक्ण (544,
58); Past Indecl. afwrn, -वृश्य (565); Fut. Pass. afar or त्रष्टव्यः
awa, ब्रश.
a. Root सिच् (special stem fra, 281). Inf. aA ‘to sprinkle” Par,
and Atm. Pres. feratfa. Atm. faa. Impf. असिच्वम्. Atm. असिच्े.
Nn
274 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP 1. CLASS VI.
Pot. faxay. Atm. सिच्रेय, Impv. सिच्वानि. Atm. fas. Perf. सिषेच,
सिषेचिण, fata; सिधिचिव, सिषिचथुस्, -चतुस्; fafafaa, सिषिच, सिषिचुस्.
Atm. सिषिचे, सिषिचिषे, सिपिचे ; सिषिचिवहे, &c. 15 Fut. wate, safe,
&e. Atm. Bare. 2nd Fut. wenfa. Atm. सेये. Aor. असिचम्, -चस्,
-चत्; असिचाव, -चतम्, -चताम्; असिचाम, -चतत, -चन्. Atm. असिचे, -चथास्,
-चत; असिचावहि, -चेथाम्, -चेताम्; ससिचामहि, -चध्वम्, चन्त, or असिधिः
असिक्यास्, असिक्त; weet, -छायाम्, -छाताम् ; ससिष्सहि, ससिग्ध्वम्, असिक्त.
Prec. सिच्यासम् . Atm, सिक्षीय. Cond. ससेश्यम्. Atm. waa. Pass.,
Pres. faq. Caus., Pres. सेचयामि ; Aor. ससी षिचम्. Des. सिसिछलामि,
-q. Freq, afaa, wafer. Part., Pres. सिच्छत्, सि्मान ; Past Pass.
सिक्त; Past Indecl. सिक्ता, -सिच्य ; Fut. Pass. ax, सेचनीय, सेचय.
631. Root we (special stem पृच्छ, 282). Inf. प्रम् ‘to ask.’ Par.
Pres, पृच्छामि (51). Impf. खपृच्छम्. Pot. gexaq. Impr. gatfa. Perf.
(381) पप्रच्छ, पप्रच्छिय or WHE, पप्रच्छ; पप्रच्छिव, पप्रच्छयुस्, पप्रच्छतुस् ; पप्रच्छिम,
पप्रच्छ, way. ist Fut. wef. and Fut. wanfa. Aor. स्प्राक्षम्, सप्रा-
सोम्, अप्राक्षीत्; WMT, अप्रा्टम्, खप्रा्टाम् ; WHER, WHE, सप्रास्ुस्. Prec.
पृच्छयासम्. Cond. सप्रच्यम्. Pass., Pres. yaa (472); Aor. 3rd sing.
अप्राच्छि. Caus., Pres. wesatfa; Aor. सपप्रच्छम्. Des. पिपृच्छिषामि.
Freq. attyaa, पाप्रिमि. Part., Pres. पृच्छत् ; Past Pass. पृष्ट ; Past
Indecl. पृष्टा, -पृच्छ (565) ; Fut. 70585. प्रष्टव्य, प्रच्छनी य, प्रच्छ .
632. Root धच or Haq (special stem भृज्ज). Inf. wR or WEA ‘to fry.
Par. and Atm. Pres. ganfa. Atm. gst. Impf सभृज्जम्. Atm. ways.
Pot. भृज्जेयम्. Atm. yaa. Impv. yarfa. Atm. yet. Perf. (381)
wi, बभज्जिथ or que, TR; वथज्जिव, वथज्जयुस्, वध्रज्जतुस् ; sats,
wa, वभ्रज्जुस्. Or prt, wea or we, pret; वभच्जिव, &c. Atm.
wrt, वभ्रज्निषे, &c. Or grat, बभन्जनिषे, &c. 15; Fut. werfer or भसि.
Atm. were or भषटाहे, 2nd Fut. wenfa or wearfa. Atm. wed or भ्ये.
Aor, BHAA, PTA, WAHT ; WATS, WATE, TATE; WAT, We,
sargg. Or अभा्ंम्. Atm. wafg, sera, sue; wreafz, सधक्षायाम्,
अधरक्षाताम् ; सधरष्लहि, सघरद्दुम्, waa. Or सभि, सभषठास्, wis; wreafz,
WIAA, सभक्षाताम् ; अनस्लेहि, सभड्दम्, सभक्त. 77/८0. मृञन्या सम्. Atm,
ध्रक्षीय or weffa. Cond. सधरछ्यम् or सभघ्येम्. Atm. सध्ये or सभ्ये.
Pass., Pres. भृन्ज्ये (472). Caus., Pres. च्जयामि ; Aor. WRIA or
sara. Des. frrenfa, -g, or विभक्षौीमि, -खषे ; or विभन्जिषामि, -पे, or
fanfstarfa, -पे, &c. Freq. वरीभृज्ज्ये, arafem (3rd sing. arate). Part.,
Pres. भृज्जत् ; Past Pass. ye; Past Indecl. yg, -भृज्ज्य ; Fut. 72455. भ्रष्टव्य
or Wea, भन्ैनीय or WATT, भज्ज्यै or UFR.
633. Root मन्नू or मस्न् (special stem Hm). Inf. HAR ‘to be
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS VI. 275
immersed,’ ‘to sink.” Par. Pres. wsatfa. Impf. अमन्जम्. Pot.
मन्नेयम्, 172. मज्नानि. Perf. ममन्न, ममज्जिय or ममं क्य, ममज्ज ; ममज्जिव,
RASA, ममज्नतुस् ; ममन्जिम, ममज्ज, ममनज्जुस्. rst Fut. taf. and Fut.
मंछ्यामि. dor. (424) अमां छम्, समांकषीस्, wae; sales, अमांक्तम्, समां काम् ;
अमांस, अमांक्त, अमां शस्. Prec. मच्ज्यासम्. Cond. sway. Pass., Pres.
wary. Caus., Pres. मज्जयामि ; Aor. अममन्जम्. Des. मिमं लामि. Freq.
मामज्ज्ये, मामञ्ज्मि (3rd sing. मामंक्ति). Part., Pres. मज्जत्; Past Pass. मग्न ;
Past Indecl, Wal, Wat, -मञ्ज्य ; Fut. Pass. Aaa, मज्ननी य, AIR.
634. Root द्. Inf. waa ‘to strike” ‘to hurt” Par. and Atm.
Pres. तुदामि. Atm. gg. Impf. अतुदम्. Atm. age. 701. तुदेयम्. Atm.
qa. Impv. तुदानि. Atm. 92. Perf. तुतोद, हुतोदिय, तुतोद ; gates, तुतु-
TIA, दुस् ; Toler, age, gage. Atm. तुतुदे, दुतुदिषे, तुतुदे ; तुहुदिवहे,
TATA, तुतुदाते; ततुदिमरे, ठुतुदिश्वे, तुतुदिरे. 75 Fut. तोच्चास्मि. Atm. ara.
and Fut. तोत्याभि. Atm. wre. Aor. सरोत्सम्, अतो त्सीस्, HAT; अतो,
सतोचम्, THAR; अतो, अतौत्त, सतौत्सुस्. Atm. अतुत्सि, अतुत्यास्, HTT;
agate, अतुत्सायाम्, खतुत्साताम् ; सतुहि, अतुद्धुम्, खतुत्स त. Prec. तुद्यासम्.
Atm. grit (452). Cond. खतोह्यम्. Atm. sate. Pass., Pres. qa; Aor.
3rd sing. satfe. Caus., Pres. ततोद्यामि ; Aor. अतूतुदम्. Des. qgrafa,
-त्से. Freq. wtgat, तोतोच्नि (3rd sing. atitfa). Part., Pres. yea; Past
Pass. ga; Past Indecl. gar, -qa; Fut. Pass, तोत्तव्य, तोद नीय, तोद्य.
635. Root faq. Inf. @qx‘to throw.’ Par. and Atm. Pres. ferarfa.
Atm. fat. Impf. sfaaq. Atm. afer. Pot. feytaq. Atm. feds.
Impv. क्िपाणि. Atm. fed. Perf. fagu, चिक्षेपिय, चिक्षेप; fafefor,
चिधिपथुस्, चिधिपतुस्; चिशिपिम, fafa, चिधिपुस्. Atm. fafat, fafq-
पिषे, fafa; fafafaaz, चिशिपाये, faferot; fafefaae, fafafasd,
fafefat. 15 Fut. earfer. Atm. सेप्राहे. and Fut. सेष्त्यामि. Atm.
awa. dor, wey, TARY, YT; अघेप्ल, TaAA, TANT; WelTH,
wen, wag. Atm. afafa, अक्ठिप्वास्, wien; wfgvete, सधिष्सायाम्,
अकिष्साताम्; सकिप्सहि, सणिभुम्, afar. Prec. शिप्यासम्, &c. Atm.
ferata. Cond. सकषेष्स्यम्, Atm. sara. Pass., Pres. faa; Aor. 3rd
sing. wafa. Caus., Pres. quatfa; Aor. sfafeyaq. Des. faferanfa,
-ष्से. Freq. sfaa, चेक्षेष्मि (710, 43. ९) Part., Pres. feraq; Past Pass.
fern; Past Indecl. सिप्रा, -faa; Fut. Poss. Gra, ruta, लेप्य.
a. Root fas. Inf. tga ‘to enter.? Par. Pres. faynfa, विशसि,
&e. Impf. afaya, अपिशस्, &८, Pot. विशोयम्, विशेस्, &८. Impv. विज्ञानि,
विशा, &c. Perf. विवेश, विवेशिथ, विवेश; विविशिव, विविशयुस्, विषिशतुस्;
पिविशिम, विविश, विविशुस्. 14४ Fut. वेशस्मि. 2nd Fut. वेष्यामि. Aor.
अवि्म्, -छस्, -दत्; अविक्षाव, -खतम्, - सताम् ; Whey, -छत › -छन्- Prec.
Nn 2
276 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS X.
विश्यासम्. Cond. steam, Pass., Pres. विष्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. watt.
Caus., Pres. ayrarfa; Aor. अवी विशम्. Des. विविक्षामि. Freq. वेवि्ये,
वेवेश्मि (3rd sing. वेवेष्टि). Part., Pres. विशत्; Past Pass. fae; Past
Indecl. विष्ट, -विश्य ; Fut. Pass. वेष्टव्य, वेशनीय, वेश्य.
636. Root wy, Inf. erga or स्प्टुम् ‘to touch.’ Par. Pres. agra.
Impf. weqqy. Pot. स्यृशेयम्. § Impv. स्युशानि. Perf. पस्य, पस्यशिय,
wert; पस्युशिव, पस्यृशयुस्, पस्मृशतुस् ; पस्मृशिम, wey, पस्मृशुस्. 152 Fut.
स्पष्टीस्मि or सखप्टास्मि. 2nd Fut. erearfa or arenta. Aor. weargy, अस्यास्,
अस्मासीत्; WAS, WATER, WATE; Wears, ware, warga. Or
FETA, सम्प्रा छस्, &c. Or चस्मृक्षम्, ITY, FATA; अस्यृक्षाव, स्पृतम्?
सस्युखताम् ; सस्पृल्ाम, KYA, WTI. Prec. स्युश्यासम्, Cond. WaT or
wereq. Pass. Pres. aya; Aor. 3rd sing. सस्यं Caus., Pres.
eagratfa ; Aor. अपस्पशेम् or सपिस्युशम्. Des. frerarfa. Freq. परीस्पृश्ये,
ucterfgt or परीसप्रसिमि. एथ, Pres. eqyq; Past Pass. ee; Past
Indecl, eqgt, -eqya; Fut. Pass. ea or Wea, स्पशेनीय, BW.
637. Root इष् (special stem इच्छ, 282). Inf. efaqy or wg ‘to wish.’
Par. Pres. इच्छामि. Impf. tay. 701. इच्छेयम्. Impv. इच्छानि. Perf.
(367) येष, इयेषिय, इयेष; ईथिव, ईषथुस्, ईषतुस् ; ईषिम, ईष, qq. rt Put.
रषितास्मि or wef. and Fut. रषिष्यामि. Aor. रेषिषम्, रेषीस्, रेषीत्; रेषिष्व,
रेषिष्टम् रेषिष्टान् ; Ufa, रेषिष्ट, रेषिषुस्. Prec. इष्यासम्. Cond. रेषिष्यम्.
Pass., Pres. xa; Aor. 3rd sing. रषि, Caus., Pres. रषयामि ; Aor.
रेषिषम्. Des, रषिषिषामि. Part., Pres. इच्छत् ; Past Pass. इष्ट ; Past
Indecl. eg or इषित्वा, -इष्य ; Fut. Pass. tem or रषितव्य, रषणीय, rq.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE TENTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 283.
638. Root चुर् ८४. Infin. चोरयितुम् dorayitum, ‘to steal.”
PARASMAI-PADA. ATMANE-PADA,
Present Tense, ‘I steal.
चो्यामि चोरयावस् चोरयामस् | Sa चोरयावहे चोरयामहे
चोग्यसि. shaq dee [dice aay read
चोर्यत्ति चोरयतस् चोग्यन्ति | चोरयते चोरयेते चोरयनते
Imperfect, ‘I was stealing,’ or ‘I stole.’
अचोरयम् अचोरयाव STA | सचोरये सलोरयावहि सचोरयामरि
water अचोरयतम् अचोरयत | सचोरयथास् सचोरयेथाम् सचोरयथ्वम्
अचोरयत् चोरयताम् चोरयन् | अचोरयत अचोरयेताम् खचोरयन्त
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP 1, CLASS X. 277
Potential, ‘I may steal.’
चोरयेयम् चोरयेव चोग्येम चोरयेय चोरयेवहि चोग्येमहि
चोरयेस् चोरयेतम् चोर्येत चोग्येयास् चोरयेयाथाम् चोरयेध्वम्
चोरयेत् चोरयेताम् saga | चोरयेत चोरयेयाताम् WATT
Imperative, ‘ Let me steal.’
चोर्याणि चोग्याव चोर्याम | चोरे चोग्यावहे चोग्यामहे
चोरय चोरयतम् चोरयत चोरय चोग्येयाम् चोरयध्नम्
चोरयतु चोरयताम् चोप्यन्तु | चोरयत्ताम् चोरयेताम् चोग्यन्ताम्
Perfect, ‘I stole,’ or ‘I have stolen.’
चोरयामास चोग्यामासिव चोरयामासिम | Sitaram -चकृवहे -चकृमरे
चोरयामासिथ चोरयामासथुस् चो्यामास | चोरया्चकृपे -चक्राये -चकृद
चोरयामास चोरयामासतुस् चोरयामामुस् | चोरया्क्रे -चक्राते -चक्िरे
First Future, ‘1 shall or will steal.’
ष्नोरयितास्मि चोरयितासखस् चोरयितास्मस् | चोरयिताहे चोरयिताखरे चोर्यितास्मरे
चोरयितासि चोरयितास्यस् चोरयितास्य | चोरयितासे चोरयितासाये चोरयिताध्ये
चोरयिता चोरयिता चोरयितारस् | चोरयिता चोरयितारो चोरयितारस्
Second Future, ‘I shall or will steal.’
चोरयिष्यामि चोरथिष्यावस् चोरयिष्यामस् | चोरयिष्ये चोरथिष्यावहे चोरयिष्यामरे
चोरयिष्यसि चोरयिष्ययस् चोरयिष्यय | चोगरयिष्यसे चोरपिष्येये चोरयिष्यश्वे
चोरयिष्यति चोरयिष्यतस् चोरयिष्यन्ति | चोरयिष्यते चोरयिष्येते चोरयिष्यने
Aorist, <I stole.’
अचूचुरम् सअचूचुराव सचूचुराम अचूचुरे सचूचुरावहि खचूचुरामरि
अचूचुरत् Sy wy WIT अचूचुरेयाम् अचु चुरध्यम्
TG Sy अनुत् wy WM अचूचुरन्त
Precative or Benedictive, ‘ May I steal.’
चोयोसम् चोयोस् चोरू चोरयिषीय -पिषीवहि -यिषीमहि
चोयास् चोयोस्तम् चोयोस्त चोरयिषीष्टास् -यिषीयास्थाम् -यिषीभ्वम्
चोयेत् चोयोस्ताम् चोयीमुत् | चोरयिषीष्ट -यिषीयास्ताम् -यिषीणन्
Conditional, ‘I should steal.’
अचोरयिष्यम् सचोरयिष्याव अचोरयिष्याम | खचोरयिष्ये -यिष्यावहि = -frenafe
अचोरपिष्यस् अचोरयिष्यतम् अचोरपिष्यत | अचोरयिष्ययास् -यिष्येथाम् -पिष्पभ्नम्
सचोरयिष्यत् जचोरयिष्यताम् अचोरयिष्यन् | रचोरयिष्यत -यिष्येताम् -पिष्यन्त
278 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP I. CLASS X.
639. Pass., Pres. ali; Aor. 3rd sing. waifc. Caus. same as the
Primitive verb. Des. qatcfasrfa. Part., Pres. चोरयत् ; Past Pass. aftr
or चोरित ; Past Indecl. चोरयित्वा ; Fut. Pass. चोर यितव्य, चोरणीय, चोयै.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL.10 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
640. Root पृ or yx (stem पूरय). 7. पूरयितुम् ‘to 01 ^“ Par. Pres.
पूरयामि. ^ अपूप्यम्. 701. पूरयेयम्. Impr. पूर्याणि. Perf. ara.
ist Fut. पूरयितास्मि. ond Fut. पूरयिष्यामि. Aor. सपूषुरम् . Prec. पूयीसम्.
Cond. अपूरयिष्यम्. Pass. Pres. yi; Aor. 3rd sing. अपूरि or अपूरिष्ट.
Caus. like the Primitive. Des. पुपूरयिषामि. Part., Pres. पूरयत् ; Past
Pass. पूरौ or पूरित or Yt; Past Indecl. पूरयित्वा or पूत्वा, -ya; Fut. Pass.
पूरयितव्य, पूरणीयः, पथे.
641. Root चिन्त् (stem चिन्तय). Inf. चिन्तयितुम् ‘to think” Par.
Pres. चिन्तयामि. Impf. अचिन्तयम्. Pot. चिन्तयेयम्. Impv. चिन्तयानि.
Perf. चिन्तयामास. ist Fut. चिन्लयित्तास्मि- 2nd Fut. चिन्तयिष्यामि. Aor.
अचिचिन्तम्,. Prec. चिन््यासम्. Cond. अचिन्यिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. fart.
Caus, like the Primitive. Des. चिचिन्तयिषाभि. Part., Pres. चिन्तयत् ;
Atm, चिन्तयान (527); Past Pass. चिन्तित ; Past Indecl. चिन्तयित्वा, -चिन्य ;
Fat. Pass. चिन्तयितव्य, चिन्तनीय, चिन्तय.
642. Root अथै (stem waa). Inf wefagy (with prep. प्र, urd, प्रायेयितुम्)
‘to ask, ‘to seek? Atm. Pres. waa. Impf. vay. Pot. अथेयेय.
. 70४. अथेये. Perf. weara®. 1st Fut. अथैयिताहे. and Fut. अथैयिष्य.
Aor. चत्तिये, खापिथिथास्, &c. Prec. अधैयिषीय. Cond. wrafaet. Pass.,
Pres. aj. Caus. like the Primitive. Des. अकिथियिषाभि, -¥. Part.,
Pres. waara (527); Past Pass, afta; Past Indecl. अ्थेयित्वा, -खथ्यै ;
Fut. Pass. अथैयितव्य, सथेनीय, aa.
643. Root कथ् (stem कथय). Inf. कथयितुम् ‘to say,’ ‘to tell? Par.
Pres. कथयामि. Impf. अकथयम्. Pot. कथयेयम्, Impv. कथयानि. Perf.
कथयामास. ist Fut. wafantie. and Fut. कथयिष्यामि. dor, अचकयम्
or अचीकयम्. Prec. कय्यासम्. Cond. अकथयिष्यम्. Pass. कथ्ये, &c, Caus.
like the Primitive. Des. चिकथयिषामि. Part., Pres. कथययत् ; Past
Pass. कयित ; Past Indecl. कथयित्वा, -कथय्य (566. 0) ; Fut. Pass. कथयितव्य,
कयनीय, कथ्य.
a, Root चुष् (stem घोषय). Inf. घोषयितुम् ‘to proclaim.’ Par. Pres.
योषयामि. Impf. सघोषयम्. Pot. घोषयेयम्. Impv. wtearfa (58). Perf.
* This root forms its stem पारय pdraya from पृ, and Fa priraya from Yt; but
the meaning of urcarfa is rather ‘to fulfil,’ ‘to accomplish,’ ‘to get through.’
The Caus. of Y pri, cl. 3, is also पारयामि ‘to carry over,’ ‘to accomplish.’
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS IT. 279
योषयाचकार. ist Fut. घोषयितास्मि. and Fut. चोषपिष्पामि. dor. अनूधुषम्.
Prec, चोष्यासम्. Cond. खघोषयिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. घोष्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing.
wyifa. (णऽ. like the Primitive. Des. जुघोषयिषामि. Part. Pres.
चोषयत् ; Past Pass. atfaa; Past Indecl. चोषयित्वा, -ata; Fut. Pass.
चोषयितव्य, घोषणीय, घोष्य.
8. Root way (stem भक्षय). Inf, भक्षयितुम् ‘to eat,’ ‘to devour.’ Par.
Pres, भक्षयामि. Impf. सभस्षयम् Pot, नक्षयेयम्. Impv. भष्ष्याणि. Perf.
wqaara. ist Fut. wafamfe. ond Fut. wafaarfa. Aor. सवभम्.
Pree. भस्यासम्. Cond. अभक्षयिष्यन्. Pass., Pres. wea. Des. farafaarfa.
Part., Pres. भक्षयत् ; Past Pass, भित ; Past Indecl. भक्षयित्वा, -भच्य ;
Fut. Pass, wafara, भकछ्षणीय, wet.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SECOND CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 307.
644. Root atyd. Infin. यातुम् ydtum,
‘to g0.’
PaRASMAI-PADA only.
Present, ‘I go.’
यामि ydmi यावस् ydvas यामस् ydmas
यासि ४८ यायस् ydthas याय ydtha
याति 4 यातस् ydtas यान्ति ydnti
Imperfect, ‘I was going,’ or ‘I went,’
सयाम् aydm सयाव aydva अयाम aydma
सयात् ayds सयातम् aydtam WAT aydta
अयात् aydt सखयाताम् 094 स यान् 0४८८ *
Potential, ‘I may go.’
यायाम् ydydm यायाव ydydva यायाम ydydma
यायास् ydyds यायातम् ydydtam यायात ydydta
यायात् ydydt यायाताम् ydydtdm AYA ydyus
Imperative, ‘ Let me go.’
यानि 94४ याव ydva यान ydma
याहि ४4 यातम् ydtam यात ydta
यातु ४८४ याताम् ydidm यानु ydintu
645. Root इ £ (310).
etum, ‘to go.’
Infin, way
For इ with adhi, d, &c., see 311.
Present, ‘1 go.’
रमि emit Raq was इमस् umas
रषि eshi PAI ithas Aitha
रति eti इतस् ४८5 यन्ति yanti(34)
Imperfect, ‘1 was going,’ or ‘I went.’
~ =
ATAA dyam (37) CA aiva(251.a) रम aima
रेस् ais (33) रतम् aitam = रेत aita
रेत् ait रेताम् 44 सापयन् dyant
Potential, ‘I may go.’
इयाम् iydm FAA iydva इयाम iydma
इयाम् iyds FATA iydiam इयात iydta
FATA iydt इयाताम् iydtdm FAT iyus
Imperative, ‘ Let me go.’
सयानि ०४८४ WAT aydva सयाम aydma
afe ini इतम् itam इत ita
रतु etu इताम् ४4८72 यन्तु yantu
* Or युस् ayus (see 310. Obs.)
+ This root is also of the 1st class, making यामि, सयसि, &c., in Pres. tense.
t Foster gives सयन्. See Panini (vi. 4. 81), and compare Laghu-kaum. 608.
280
Perf, ययौ (373), WATE or BATA, ययो;
ययिव, ययुस्, ययतुस् ; ययम, यय, ययुस्;
ist Fut. यातास्मि, यातासि, याता, &०. and
Fut. यास्यामि, यास्यसि, यास्यति; यास्या-
वस्, &०. Aor. अयासिषम् (433), खयासीस्,
अयासीत्; अयासिष्व, खयासिष्टम्, खया-
सिष्टाम्; अयासिष्म, अयासिष्ट, सयासिषुस्.
Pree. यायासम्, WAG, यायात्; याया,
&e. Cond, चयास्यम्, सर्यास्यस्, HATA,
&c. Pass., Pres. याये, &c.; Aor. 3rd sing.
अयायि. Caus., Pres. यापयाभि, &c.;
Aor, ARIAT, &०.
Freq. यायाये, यायामि or यायेमि (3rd
sing. यायाति or atafi). Part., Pres.
यात् (Nom. case यान् ); Past Pass. यातः;
Past Indecl. याचा; -याय; Fut. Pass.
यातव्य, यानीय, येय.
Des. यियासामि. |
GONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS II.
Perf. इयाय (367.a), इययिथ or इयेथ,
इयाय; faa, Saga, Sagas ईयिम,
क्य, 89a. 1st Fut. रतास्मि, &e. 2nd Fut.
रष्यामि, &०. Aor. (438. ९) NTA, WTA,
WATT; ANT; सगातम्? अगाताम्; अगाम,
अगात, WTA. Prec. ईैयासम्, &८. (see
447. 2). Cond. रेष्यम् Pass., Pres.
sa 3 ist Fut. wate or aifaate (414);
and Fut. za or सायिष्ये; Aor. grd sing.
अगायि or अगासत or आयिषत,
Pres, गमयामि (from गन् at 602) or चखाय-
यामि or खपयामि; Aor, अजीगमम् or
्रयियम् or सापिपम् (with adhi prefixed,
सध्यजीगपम् 493. ९). Des. जिगमिषामि
(from गम् at 602) or ईषिषामि, -षे. Part.,
Pres, यत् (Nom. यन् ); Past Pass. Fa;
Past Indecl. इत्वा, -इत्य ; Fut. Pass.
रतव्य, AAAIA, इत्य or VT.
Caus.,
a. Like या may be conjugated भा ‘to shine:’ Pres. भामि; Perf. wa; 1st Fut.
भातास्मि; Aor, सभासिषम्, &c.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 2 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
646. Root yt (special stem हो, 315). Inf. शयितुम् ‘to lie down,’
<to sleep.” Atm. Pres. शये, रोषे, रोते (८९2०५) ; Was, शयाथे, शयाते; WAS
(celueOa), शेभ्वे, शेरते. Impf. अशयि, खशेथास्, अशेत; अशेवहि, अशयाथाम्,
अशयात्; BRAS, WHEY, wre. Pot. शयीय, शयीथास्, शयीत; शयीवहि,
शयीयायाम्, शयीयातताम् ; शयीमहि, शयीश्वम्, शयीरन्. Impv. शये, शोष्व, शेताम् ;
WAS, WAI, शयाताम् ; शयामहे, शेध्वम्, शेरताम्. Perf. शिश्ये, शिश्यषे,
शिश्ये; शिश्यिवहे, शिश्याथे, शिश्याते ; शिश्यिमहे, ferfyaed or -श्यिदे, शिशियरे.
ist Fut. श॒यितारे. and Fut. शयिष्ये. Aor. syfafa, खशायिष्टास्, अशयिष्ट;
अशयिष्वहि, अशयिषाथाम्, व अशयिष्महि, सशयिध्वम् or -यिदम्, सज्ञ-
यिषत. Prec. श॒यिषीय. Cond. ‘am. Pass., Pres. ya; Aor. 3rd
sing. wqifa. Caus., Pres. शाययामि ; dor. सशीशयम्. Des. शिशयिषे.
Freq. ITT, शेशेमि or शेशयीभि. Part., Pres. शयान (526. a); Past Pass.
शयित ; Past Indecl. शयित्वा, -श॒य्य ; Fut. Pass. yfara, शयनीय, शेय.
647. Root सू or सु (special stems सू and सुव्, see 312). Inf. WER
or सविहुम् ‘to bring forth.” Atm. Pres. सुवे, a8, सूते; TI, Fara,
Aut; FAR, yea, सुवते. Imp/f. समुवि, असूयास्, waa; waafe, समुवायाम्,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS 77; 28f
खसुवाताम्; wate, असूध्वम्, अमुवत. Pot. gata. Impv. सुवे (Pan. vir. 3,88);
सूष्व, सूताम्; Faas, सुवायाम्, FATA; सुवामहे, सृध्वम्, सुवताम्. 2८ सुपुवे;
Uae, सुषुवे; सुपुधिवहे, Fara, सुषुवाते ; सुषुविमहे, सुषुधिध्वे or -पिदे, सुषुषिरे.
ist Fut, सोताहे or सवितारे. 2nd Fut. aa or सविष्ये; Aor. wafafa, wafa-
Brg, असविष्ट; ससविष्वहि, खसविषायाम्, ससविषाताम् ; ससविष्महि, ससविध्वम् or
-दृम्, ससविषत. Or ्रसोषि, ससोष्टास्, असोष्ट; असोष्वहि, असोषायाम्, सरसोषाताम्;
warafz, असोदृम्, water. Prec, arity or सविपीय. Cond, ara or सस-
विष्ये. Pass. Pres: qa; Aor. 3rd sing. watfa. Caus., Pres, सावयामि ;
Aor. ससूषवम्. Des. मुसूषाभि, -पे. Freq. सोषूये, सोषोमि or सोषवीमि.
Part., Pres. सुवान ; Past Pass. मुत or सूत or सून ; Past Indecl, सूत्वा or
मुत्वा, -सूय; Fut. Pass. सोतव्य or सवितव्य, सवनीय, साव्य or सव्य
648. Root स्तु (special stems स्तौ or Wat, स्तु 20 WA, see 313). Inf.
स्तोहुम् ‘to praise.” Par. and Atm; Pres, स्तौमि or स्तवीमि, स्तौषि or स्तवीषि,
स्तोति or स्तवीति ; स्तुवस् or Batag*, स्तुयस् or स्तुवीयस् ४, qag or Baa”;
AAG or स्तुवीमस् +, स्तुय or स्तुवीय ५, स्तुवन्ति. Atm. HI, स्तुषे or TATa*; स्तुते
or स्तुवीत *; ae ०" स्तुवीवहे *, स्तुवाये, स्तुवाते ; स्तुमहे or स्तुवीमरे + ea or
स्तुवी्वे , स्तुवते. Impf. चस्तुवम् or सस्तवम्, सस्तोस् or सस्तवीस्, wen or Wet-
aty; wes or सस्तुवीव +, अस्तुतम् or सस्तुवी तम्, अस्तुताम् or सस्तुवीताम् ; AYA
or चस्तुवीम +, अस्तुत or अस्तुवी त, AYIA. Atm. सस्तुचि, wag or wearer,
स्तुत 0" सस्तुवीत ; सस्तुवहि or सस्तुवीवहि * खस्तुवायाम्, अस्तुवाताम् ; सस्तुमहि dr
अस्तुवीमहि +, अस्तुश्म् or सस्तुवीध्वम् +, अस्तुवत. -720. स्तुयाम् or स्तुवीयाम् ^.
Atm, स्तुवीय. Impv. स्तुवानि or स्तवानि, स्तुहि or स्तुवीहि * स्तोतु or स्तवीतु;
स्तवाव, स्तुतम् or स्तुवीतम्, स्तुताम् or स्तुवीताम् ; स्तवाम, स्तुत or स्तुवीत, स्तुवन्तु.
Atm, स्तवे, स्तुष्व or स्तुवीष्व +, स्तुताम् 0" स्तुवी ताम् ; Waray, स्तुवाथाम्, IIMA;
स्तवामरे, स्तुध्वम् or स्तुवध्वम्, सुवताम्, Perf. (369) तुष्टाव, Geta, Gera; तुष्टव,
ष्टवधुस्, TTT; हुम, TEI TTY. Atm. ष्टवे, तुष, I; TA, तटवाये,
AeA; TAS, Ges (372), gefar. 15 Fut, स्तोतास्मि. Atm. wae.
and Fut. स्तोष्यामि. Atm. स्तोष्ये. Aor. (427. ५) अस्ताविषन्, अस्तावीस्,
अस्तावीत् ; सस्ताविष्व, अस्ताविष्टम्, खस्ताविष्टाम् ; शस्ताविष्, अस्ताविष्ट, चस्ताविपुस्-
Atm. अस्तोषि, weer, सस्तो्ट ; अस्तोष्वहि, अस्तोषायाम्, सस्तोषाताम् ; उस्तो-
wife, चस्तोदुम्, अस्तोषत, Prec. qaray. Atm. स्तोषीयः Cond. सस्तौष्यम्
Atm, wera. Pass:, Pres. wa; Aor. 3rd sing. सस्तावि. Caus., Pres
स्तावयामि ; Aor, wqzaa. Des. qgarfa, -पे. Freq. aga, तोष्टोमि Part
Pres. qaq; Past Pass. स्तुत; Past 14८८, स्तुत्वा, -स्तु्य ; Fut. Pass
स्तोतव्य, स्तवनीय, स्तुत्य or स्ताव्य or स्तव्य । ।
, 649. Root @ (special stems wat, चरू, A, see 314). Inf. वकम्
5 <
* Some authorities reject these forms.
09
282 CONJUGATION. OF VERBS.—GROUP. II. CLASS Il.
(borrowed from वच् at 650) ‘to say,’ ‘to speak.” Par. and Atm. Pres.
जवीभि, waite”, waifa”; ava, qee™, त्रूतस् ४; gaa, qa, जुवन्ति *;
Atm. qa, Ga, At; ब्रूवे, FA, FUR; ब्रूमहे, WA, Gat. Impf. सन्रवम् or
अत्ुवम् (314. a), अत्रवीस्, खत्रवीत्; WAT, WHA, अत्रूताम् ; WAR, AAA,
खनुवन्. Atm. सतुवि, wae, WAR; WATE, अनुवाथाम्, WAITATY; अनरूमहि”
may, SEIT. Pot. ब्रूयाम्, ब्रूयास्, &e. Atm, gata, Farag,
Impv. वाणि (58), नहि, जवीतु ; ATA, ब्रूतम्, AAA; नवाम, Aa, TY
Atm. तरवै, A, ब्रूताम् ; HAAS, FNMA, FATA; त्रवामहे, वरश्वम्, FIT
The other tenses and forms are borrowed from 74; 28; Perf. उवाच,
&e.; 1st Fut. varfer, &c.; see वच् at 650. But the Pres. participles
are जुवत् and garg
650. Root वच् (320). Inf. THA‘ to say,’ ‘to speak” Par. In the
General tenses Atm. also. Pres. वच्मि, वकि, वक्ति; वचस्, वक्यस्, TRA;
बच्मस्, , वक्य, नुवन्ति. (borrowed from | at 649). Impf. Wray, अवक्
(294), सवक् (294); WTS, TINH, सवक्ताम् ; अवच्म, अवक्त, Brat.
Pot. वच्याम्,. वच्यास्, वच्यात्, &c. Impv. वचानि, aha, वक्तु; वचाव, THA,
Ta; वचाम, वक्त, TTY (borrowed from q). Perf. (375. ९) उवाच, उवचिथ
or उवक्थ, उवाच ; Baa, BAYA, ऊचतुस् ; Blea, ऊच, ऊचुस्. Atm. कचे,
ऊषिषे, ऊवे ; ऊधिवरे, ऊचाये, ऊचाते ; ऊचिमरे, ahaa, ऊचिरे. 152 Fut. वक्ता-
स्मि. Atm. var. 2nd Fut. वघ्याभि. Atm. वध्ये. Aor. (447) खवोचम्,
अवोचस्, WAI; सअवोचाव, वोचतम्, सवोचताम् ; सवोचाम, अवोचत, अवोचन् .
Atm. अवोचे, सवोचयास्, अवोचत; सवोचावहि, सवोचेधाम्, अवोचताम्; खवोचामहिः
सअवोचश्वम्, अवोचन. 7/८. उच्यासम्. Atm. वक्षीय.. Cond. चव्यम्. Atm.
war. 12288. 72/05. उच्ये (471); Aor. 3rd sing. खवाचि. Caus., Pres. वाच
गामि; dor, सवीवचम्. Des. विवसाभि, -क्षे. Freq. area, वावच्मि. Part.,
Pres. Fa; Atm. नुवाण (borrowed from q at 649); Past Pass. उक्त;
Past Indecl. उक्ता, -उच्य ; Fut. Pass. वक्तव्य, वचनोय, वाच्य or वाक्य.
651. Root मृज् (special stems माज and मृज्, 321). Inf. ATEA or माजितुम्
“to wipe,’ ‘to rub,’ ‘to clean.’ Par. Pres. arfsa, माकिं (296), मारि (297);
AIA, FFA, मृष्टस्; मृज्मस्, मृष्ट, माजेनि or मृजन्ति, Impf. समाजम्, wae
(294), FAIS; WS, WARY, WET; WHA, समृष्ट, Warsi or मृजन्. Pot.
मृज्याम्, मृज्यास्, &c. Impv. माजोनि, मृदि (303), AT; माजाव, FEA, मृष्टाम्;
साज्ञाम, मृष्ट, माजन्तु or मृजन्तु. Perf. ममाजै, ममाजिय or ममार (370. ९), ममान;
ममृजिव or ममाजिव, समृजयुस् or WATAYA, ममृजठुस् or HATHA; ममृजिम or
* For these forms are sometimes substituted 2nd sing. ात्य, 3rd sing. साह ;
and du. साहयुस्, gard du. साहतुस् ; 3rd 71. साहुस् 3 all from the Perfect of a
defective root WX, with a Present signification.
+ According to some, the 3rd pl. of the Imperfect is also wanting,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS Il. 283
ममाजिम, ममृज or HATH, ATYR or WAAR. 15 72. मास्म or माजितास्मि
(415-0). 2nd Fut. arearfa or माजिष्यामि. Aor, wanda, अमाषीस्, अमात्
WATS, HEA, WHET; ATER, WATE, Bar. Or समार्जिंषम्, marae,
warsitq; समार्जिंष्व, &c. Prec मृज्यासम्. Cond. BaTeay or समार्जिष्यम्
Pass., Pres. qt; Aor. 3rd sing. समानि, Caus., Pres. माजेयामि ; Aor.
अममाजम् or अमीमूनम्. Des. मिमा्षौमि or भिमृष्लामि or मिमाजिंषामि. Freq
मरमृज्ये, मरी- or AFL or मनोभि (3rd sing. -माि). Part., Pres माजेत्; Past
Pass. मृष्ट; Past Indecl. yet or माजित्वा, -मृज्य; Fut. Pass. meq or
माजितव्य, माजंनीय, ATA or मृज्य.
652. Root अद् (317). Inf. wqq ‘to eat.’ Par. Pres. अनि, ससि,
पत्ति; WEA, सत्यम्, WAT; FAY, सत्य, सदन्ति. Linp/, सदम्, सादस् (317.5),
‘Taq (317. 6); आद, सात्तम्, ATA ; ATA, BIA, Atay. Por. खद्याम्. Impv.
अदानि, अद्धि, अलु; अदाव, सत्तम्, WAIN; अदाम, अत्त, Gag. Perf. आद्, wire,
wg; सदिव, दुस्, सादतुस् ; आदिम, आद्, दुस्. 19८ Fut. सत्तास्मि. and
Fut. स्यामि. Aor, अघसन् (borrowed from root घस्), अधसस्, AAT; WA
साव, NIAAA, सघसताम् ; NIA, Wear, Waa. Prec. सद्यासम्. - Cond.
आलम्. Pass., Pres. सदये ; Aor. 3rd sing. wife. Caus., Pres. द्यामि
Aor. sfgeq. ` 1265. जिघत्सामि (borrowed from च्) Part., Pres. अदत्;
Past Pass. a7; Past Indecl. जग्ध्वा ; Fut. Pass. waa, sexta, साद्य.
653. Root रह् (special stems Ue, रोदि» रूदि, Be, see 322). Inf.
रोदितुन् ‘to weep.” Par. Pres, dfefa, रोदिषि, रोदिति ; रदिवस्, रूदियस्,
रदितस् ; रूदिमस्, रुदिथ, रुदन्ति. Imp/. aden, ्षरोदस् or BOA, अरोदत् ण
सरोदौत् (Pin. vit. 3, 98, 99); अरूदिव, अरूदितम्, अरुदिताम्; अरूदिम, चरू-
दित, अरदन्. Pot. रुद्याम्. Impv. रोदानि, रुदिहि, रोदितु; Tera, रुदितम्,
रूदिताम् ; रोदान, रदित, Reg. Perf रुरोद, रुरोदिष, रुरोद ; रुरदिव, TTT,
रुरूदुस्; ₹ररदिम, Tar, Taga. rst Fut. रोदितास्मि- and Fut. रोदिष्पामि.
Aor. FRA, AREY, अरुदत्; WRIA, WRIA, अरूदताम् ; अरूदाम, अरूदत,
अदन्. Or wofeay, सरोदीस्, अषरोदीत्; अगोदिष्व, खणेदिष्टम्, अरोदिष्टम्;
wifes, अरोदिष्ट, अगोदिषुस्.. Prec. waray. Cond. अशेदिष्यम्. Pass.;
Pres. Ba; Aor. 3rd sing. wufe. Caus., Pres. dearfa; Aor. TERRA.
Des. हरूदिषाभि. Freq. trea, रोरोन्नि (3rd sing. रोसेल्नि) or Teetfa
Part., Pres. Raq; Past Pass. रदित ; Past Indecl. eigen, -रुदय ; . Fut:
Pass. रोदितव्य, रोदनीय, रोच.
654. Root eq* (special stems इन्, ह, प्न, and ज, see 323). Inf. हन्तुम्
‘to strike, ‘to kill’, Par. Pres. हन्मि, हंसि, efa*; इन्वस्, हयस्, हतस् ;
* It must be borne in mind (with reference to 323) that han only loses its nasal
before ¢ and th, if not marked with P. When the prep. ‘St ¢ is prefixed, this root
may take the Atmane, in which case the 3rd sing. Pres. will be Wea.
0०02
284 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS IE.
हन्मस्, हथ, Aft. 11 अहनम्, अहन्, अहन् (294); EA, अहतम्, FEMA;
अहन्म, अहत, अघ्नन्. Pot. हत्याम्, &c. Impv. हनानि, जहि, दनु *; हनाव, हतम्”
हताम्; हनाम, ea, WY. Perf. नघान (376), नघनिय or जघन्यः जघान; लघ्व,
WAY, जघ्तुस् ; AAA, जघ्न, TYR. 74८ Hud. हन्तास्मि. 2nd Fut. हनिष्यामि .
Aor, (432. 6) अवधिषम्, अवधीस्, अवधीत्; wafer, wafren, अवधिष्टम् ;
सव्रभिष्म, सवधिष्, खवधिषुस्, Prec. बध्यासम्. Cond. अहनिष्यम्. Pass., Pres.
za; Perf. an (473); Aor. 3rd sing. धानि (or अवधि, borrowed from
ay); 1st Put, gave or चानिताहे ; 2nd Fut. हनिष्ये or धानिष्ये. Caus.,
Pres. चातयाभि ; Aor. सजीयतम्, Des. जिघांसामि. Freq. जेघ्नीये or जद्घन्ये,
sige or जं हन्मि or जद्धनीमि ; see 708. Part., Pres. aq; Past Pass. हत ;
Past Indecl. wat, -हत्य ; Fut. Poss. हन्तव्य, हननीय, aa.
655. Root खप् (special stems खप् and खयपि, 322.a). Inf. ayy ‘to
sleep’ Par. Pres, wfafa, afafa, afafa; स्वपिव्रस्, afraq, ख पितस् ;
स्लपिमस्, सखपिथ, खपन्ति. Impf. ससखपम्, Way or WAVY, अस्वपत् or
असखपीत्; wafaa, &c. (see रूद् at 653). Pot, wary. Lmpv. aura,
स्वपिहि, स्वपितु; सखपाव, सख पितम्, सखपिताम् ; warm, afar, arg. Perf.
(382) सुष्वाप, सुष्वपिथ or ara, सुष्वाप; मुषुपिव, ITY, सुषुपतुस् ; FHA,
सुषुप, मुपुपुस्, ist Fut. स्वप्नास्मि. and Fut. खप्स्यामि. dor. waren,
अखवाष्सीस्, TAT; FATS, FAA, FA; WAH, HAH, अस्वाप्सुस्
Prec. सुष्यासम्. Cond, अखप्स्यम्. Pass., Pres. yet (471); Aor. 3rd sing.
सस्वापि. Caus., Pres. स्वापयामि ; Aor. असूपुषम्, &८, Des. सुपुष्लामि.
Freq. aya, साखप्मि or साखपीमि. Part., Pres, खपत् ; Past Pass. qx;
Past Indecl. am, -qu; Fut. Pass. awa, सख पनीय, aa.
656. Root वज् (special stems वज् and उञ्, 324). Inf. वशितुम् ‘to
wish.” Par. Pres. afga, वलि (302),.afe (300); Swe, TWA, उष्टस् $
SWAY, उष, उशन्ति, 17६ way, सवद् (294), BAZ; Bhs (257. a),
BER, साम्; चोऽन, ओ, सोशन्. Pot, उश्याम्+ उश्यास्, &e. 1१०८.
प्रशानि, उडदि (303), वष्ट; INA, TER, उष्टाम् ; IY, Fe, उशन्तु. . Perf,
(35. ०) Tam, उवशिथ, उवाश ; ऊशिव, ऊशथुस्,. ऊशातुस् ; ऊशिम, AT, ऊशुस्.
ist Fut. वशितास्मि. 2nd Fut. वशिष्ामि. dor. सवाशिषम्; सवाजशीस्, खवा-
शीत्, &c.; or सवशिषम्, -शीस्, -शीत्, &e.; see 427. Prec. उश्यासम्.
Cond. वशिष्यम्, Pass., Pres, sya (471); Aor. 3rd sing. warty or
सवशि. Caus., Pres. वाश यामि ; Aor. witaga. Des. विवशिषामि. Freq.
वावश्ये, avafga or atagitfa. Part., Pres. sym; Past Pass. उशित; Past
Indecl, afgeat, -334; Fut. Pass. बशितव्य, वशनी य, aya. ;
_ * It must be borne in mind (with reference to 323) that han only loses its nasal
before ¢ and. th, if not marked with P.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS II. 285
657. Root द्विष् (special stems fey and 34, 309). Inf. 28H ‘to hate.’
Par. and Atm. Pres. afar, दि (302), दि (301); द्विष्वस्, fava, freq;
द्विष्मस्, fav, द्विषन्ति. Atm. fet, fra, fed; द्विष्वहे, द्विषाये, द्विषाते; few,
दद्द, fant. Impf. चदेषम्, अदधेद् (294), HEE; चष्धिष्व, wise, सद्िष्ाम्;
wesw, सद्धिष्ट, सद्धिषन् or ufsyy. Atm. सद्धिषि, सद्विष्टास्, wie; wfecafe,
सद्धिषाघाम्, सछिषाताम् ; सद्धिष्महि, सदिद्दुम्, अदिषत. Pot. हिष्याम्. Atm.
fasta. Impv. देषाणि, दविर्दि, दष्ट; Sara, दिष्टम्, दिष्टम् ; Fame, fae, चविषनतु.
Atm. द्वेषे, few, द्विष्टाम्; द्वेषावहै, द्विषाथाम्, द्विषाताम् ; Sue, दिइदुम्, fea.
Perf. fea, दिद्वेषिय, दिद्ेष; दिद्धिषिव, दिद्धिषधुस्, दिद्धिषतुस्; दिद्धिषिम, दिहिष,
दिष्िषुस्. Atm. दिद्धिषे, दिद्धिषिषे, दिद्धिषे; दिद्धिषिवहे, दिद्धिषाये, दिद्धिषाते;
दिद्धिषिमहे, दिद्धिषिश्मे, दिद्धिषिरे. 1st 7. द्वेष्टास्मि, Atm. Bere. 2nd Fut.
देष्यामि. Atm: ष्ये. Aor. (439) सद्धिक्षम्, -छस्, -घत्; -छाव, -छतम्,
“WAT; -साम, -कछषत, -चन्. Atm. (439. a) सद्विकि, -सयास्, -छत ; -arafe,
सायाम्, -साताम् ; -सामहि, -घथ्वम्, -स्न्त. 7९८. द्विष्पासम्. Atm. द्विक्षीय.
Cond. खद्धेद्यम्, Atm. weet. Pass., Pres. fxd, &c.; Aor. 3rd sing.
ऋद्धेषि Caus., Pres. देषयामि ; Aor. अदिद्धिषम्. Des. दिद्धिक्षामि, -घे.
Freq. द्विषे, देद्धेष्मि or देदिषीमि. Part., Pres. faq; Past Pass. fav;
Past Indecl. fagt, दिष्य; Fut. Pass. 2ea, दवेषरीेय, 34.
a,. Root वस्. Inf. वसितुम् ‘to wear,’ ‘to put on (as clothes, &c.)?
Atm. Pres. वसे, वस्से (62. ९), चस्ते ; FAS, वसाथे, वसाते ; TW, वद्ध or वध्वे
(304), वसते. Impf. अवसि, सत्रस्थास्, अवस्त ; अवसर हि, सवसायाम्, अवसाताम्;
सअवस्महि, अवद्धम् or अवथ्वम्, वसत. Pot. वसीय. Impv. वसे. Perf. ववसे,
ववसिषे, &e. ist Fut. वसिताहे. and Fut. वसिष्ये. Aor. सवसिषि, अवसि-
wg, खवसिष्ट ; अवसिष्वहि, अवसिषायाम्, सवसिषाताम्, &c. Prec. वसिषीय.
Cond. सवसिष्ये. Pass., Pres. वस्मे. Caus., Pres. वासयामि or -%. Des,
विवसिषे. Freq. वावस्ये, वावस्मि. Part., Pres. वसान ; Past Pass. वसित $
Past Indecl, वसित्वा, -वस्य ; Fut. Pass. वसितव्य, वसनीय, वास्य.
658. Root शास् (special stems शास् and शिष्, see 328). Inf. शासितुम्
“to rule, ‘to punish.’ Par, (With =1‘to bless, Atm.) Pres. शास्मि,
शास्सि, शास्ति; शिष्वस्, forza, farsa; शिष्मस्, शिष्ट, शसति (310.Obs.) Atm.
शासे, WIA (62. 8), शास्ते; WAS, WAI, शासाते; शास्महे, YS or Wed (304),
शासते. Impf. चज्ञासम्, अशात् or WMA (294, 304. a), अशात् (2०4);
wfgea, अशिष्टम्, अशिष्टाम्; अशिष्म, अशिष्ट, अशामुस्. Atm. अशासि, &.
Pot. लिष्याम्. Atm. grata. 1". qrarfa, शाधि (304), शास्तु ; शासाव,
शिष्टम्, शिष्टम्; शासाम, शिष्ट, शासतु. Atm. शासे. Perf. शशास, शशासिय,
WHA; Wiss, शशासयुस्, शशासठस्; शशासिमः, शशास, शशामुस्. Atm.
gma, शशासिषे, ९०८. ist Fut. शासितास्मि. Atm. qrfame. and Fut.
शासिश्यामि. Atm. शासिष्ये. dor. (441) सशिषम्, अशिषस्, अशिषत्; सशिषाव,
286 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS II.
wigaay, अशिषताम्; अशिषाम, अशिषत, अशिषन्. Atm. अश्ञासिषि, चशञासिष्ठास्,
अशासिष्ट; सशासिष्वहि, अश्ञासिषायाम्, अशासिषाताम् ; अशासिष्महि, चशासिथ्वम्,
अशासिषत. Pree, शिष्यासम्. 4४. शासिषीय. Cond. अशासिष्पम्. Atm,
अशासिष्ये,. Pass., Pres. शिष्ये (472. ८) ; Aor. 3rd sing. सज्ञासि, Caus.,
Pres. शासयामि ; , Aor, सशशासम्. Des. शिज्ञासिषामि. Freq. शेशिष्ये;
शाशास्मि or शाश्ञासीभि.. Part., Pres. शासत् (747. a); Past Pass. tye;
Past Indecl, ज्ञासित्वा or शिष्टा, -शिष्य; Fut. Pass. शासितव्य, शासनीय, शिष्य.
. 659. Root feg (special stems feg and देह्). Inf. दग्धुम् ‘to anoint,”
‘to smear. Par. and Atm. Pres. fa, wfey (306. a), देग्धि (305);
दिद्धस्, दिग्धस्, दिग्धस् ; दिव्यम्, दिग्ध, दिहन्ति. Atm. दिदे, धि, दिग्धे; fea,
दिहाये, दिहाते ; दिदे, fared (306. 4), दिते. -7 देहम्, WIR (294),
Bug; अरदिद्ध, अदिग्धम्, अदिग्धाम्; afea, दिग्ध, wfeeq. Atm. afefe,
अदिग्धास्,खदिग्ध; sfeate, अदिहायाम्, सदिहाताम्; weafe, अधिगश्वम्, चदि-
इत. Pot.fearm, दिद्यास्, &c. Atm. दिहीय. Impv. देहानि, दिग्ध, ey;
देहाव, दिग्धम्, दग्धाम्; दे हाम, दिग्ध, freq. Atm. देहे, fees, दिग्धाम् ; देहावहै,
दिहाथाम्, दिहात्ाम् ; दे हमे, fursay, दिहताम्. Perf. दिदेह , दिदेहिष, fetes
दिदिहिव, दिदिहथुस्, दिदिहहुस्; fefefen, दिदिह, दिदिहुस्. Atm. दिदि,
दिदिहिषे, दिदि; दिदिहिवहे, दिदिहाथे, दिदिहाते; दिदिहिमहे, दिदिदिध्वे or -दर,
fefefet. ist 7४. देग्धास्मि. 2. रेग्धारे. 2nd Fut. tenfa. Atm.
wea. Aor. (439) अधिकम्, सधिष्स्, सधिष्त्; सधि्ाव, whey, why-
छताम्; अधिलाम, अधिसृत, सधिष्न्. Atm. (439. 9) afufa, सधिक्षयास् or
Siow, सधिक्षत or अदिग्ध; whrarafe or सदिद्धहि, अधिस्ायाम्, सधि-
साताम्; अधिस्ामहि, सधिसश्वम् or सधिग्ध्वम्, सथिसन्त. Prec. दिद्यासम्.
Atm. धिक्षीय. Cond. सधेस्यम्. Atm. wit. Pass., Pres. fea; Aor.
3rd sing. wefg. Caus., 7८8. देहयामि ; Aor. अदीदिहम्. Des. दिधिषामि,
-छे. Freq. feat, देदेचि (3rd sing. देदेग्धि). Part., Pres. दिहत् ; Atm.
दिहान; Past Pass. दिग्ध ; Past Indecl. fare, -दिद्य ; Fut. Pass. tra,
देदनीय, देख.
, 660, Root दुह् (special stems gg and Ag). Inf. दोग्धुम् ‘to milk.”
Par. and Atm. Pres. dfa, धोछि (306. a), दोग्धि (305); sxe, दुग्धस्,
इग्धस् ; FHM, दुग्ध, दुहन्ति Atm. दुहे, we, दुग्धे; Fae, Tere, दुहाते ; Fa,
yrea (3०6. 2), दुहते. Impf. waren, अधोक् (294), WHR; TER, खटुग्धम्,
अदुग्धाम् ; Bea, अदुग्ध, wgeq. Atm. ugfe, खदुग्धास्, wu; खटुद्धहि,
सदुहायाम्, WRT; Weare, wy, सुरत. Pot. Fam, garg, &c.
Atm, ggta. Impv. दोहानि, दुगि (306. ¢), दोग्धु ; दोहाव, दुग्धम्, दुग्धाम् ;
dem, दुग्ध, geq. Atm. दोहे, yx, दुग्धाम् ; eters’, दुहाथाम्, दुहाताम् ;
दोहामर, yrs (806. d), दुहताम्. Perf. दुदोह, इुदोहिष, दुदोह ; ggfes,
SIT, FETA; ददुहिम, दुदर" दुस्. Atm. दुह, दुदहिषे, दु ; हदुहिबरे,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP IL. CLASS It. ` 287
Bgere, दुदृदाते ; eens, sefeed or -दे, ददुषि. rst Fut. दोग्धास्मि. Atm.
दोग्धारे. and Fut. wranfa. Atm. धो्ये. Aor. (439) SYA, SYA,
अथुस्; खथुस्ाव, उधुखतम्, सथधुरताम् ; By, we, wa. Atm.
(439.8) eater, अधरुषथास् or दुग्धास्, धुत or चटुग्ध ; चशरु्ावहि or चदु,
खधुलायाम्, सधुलाताम् ; सधुक्षामहि, wy or खधुग्ध्नम्, WyEPA. Prec
दद्यासम्. Atm. gata. Cond. सधोच्यम्. Atm. wate. Pass., Pres.
ga; Aor. 3rd sing. safe. Caus., Pres. दोहयामि ; Aor. अहुदृहम्, Des.
दुधुक्षाभि, -a. Freq. gga, ctetfa (3rd sing. दोदोग्धि). Part., Pres. gem,
gett; Past Pass. दुग्ध; Past Indecl. gmt, -ga; Fut. Pass, दोग्धव्य,
दोहनीय, eta or va (573. a).
661. Root लिहू (special stems लिह् and लेह्). Inf. eA ‘to lick?
Par. and Atm. Pres. (329) afa, केकि (306), केढि (305.0); fare,
कीढस् (305. a), Bey; लिबमस्, wie, लिहन्ति. Atm. fod, faa, wiz;
faut, लिदाये, ल्ठिहाते ; faut, लीद, fort. Imp. चलेन्, अलेट् (294),
अलेट् ; अलिद्ध, Wier, wate; अलि, wate, सलििहन्. Atm. अलिह
अत्ठीढास्, wale; wise, सक्िहायाम्, wise; सलिब्महि, सल्गीदुम्,
अल्ििहत. Pot. foam, लिद्यास्, &c. Atm. foeta. Impv. serfa, त्ीदि
(306. 0), ठेदु ; Bera, क्रीम्, लीढाम्; sem, ste, foeq. Atm. SP,
far, ater; लेदावरे, ल्ििहाचाम्, लिटाताम्; केदामरे, लीदृम् (306.c), लिहताम्.
Perf. लिलेह, ल्िकेहिय, fase; fafates, किलिदहयथुस्, लिल्िदतुस्; छकिलिहिम,
लिलि, लिलिहुस्. Atm. किले, लिलििषे, &c. 1st Fut. cathe. Atm.
were. and Fut. Senta. Atm. owe. Aor. (439) सलिघम्, -घस्,
HW; -छाव, -घृतम्, -छताम् ; -साम, -दत, -घन्. Atm. (439. ९) अकि,
अलिक्षथास् or खत्कोटास्, अलिक्षतं or wate; अलिक्षावहि or सलिद्दहि, -साधाम्,
-साताम्; अलिक्षामहि, अलिषषध्वम् or walgy, wfowa. Prec. लिद्यासम्
Atm. fasta, &c. Cond. अलेच्यम्. Atm. wae, & ८. Pass., Pres,
fa; Aor. 3rd sing. safe. Caus., Pres. wzara; Aor. अलीलिहम्.
Des. लिलिक्षामि, -क्षे. Freq. Sfaa, Safa (3rd sing. Safe). ` ए.
Pres. लिहत् ; Atm. लिहान ; Past Pass. लीढ ; Past Indecl. कीदृ, -लिद ;
Fut. Pass. sea, ठेहनीय, WA.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE THIRD CLASS, .
EXPLAINED AT 331.
, 662. Root हु hu (333). Infin. दोतुम् 1०८५१, ‘to sacrifice.’
ParasMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ‘1 sacrifice.’
qzifa juhomi FEIT juhuvas or FRA EAT juhumas or FAT
Gata juhoshi जुडुयस् juhuthas YEA juhutha
जुटोति juhoti__ जुहु तस् juhutas Bata jubvati
288 ° CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II, CLASS IIL,
Imperfect, ‘I was sacrificing.’
WIACIA ajuhavam खनुहू व ajuhuva HATA ajuhuma
WY ९४१०४ अनुहतम् ajuhutam AYER १५/५१
WEN ajuhot SAYA ९५१५८८४ अजुहवुस् ajuhavus (331. Obs.)'
Potential, ‘1 may sacrifice.’
FEA jiuhuydin नुहुयावं juhinydva शुहुयाम jubuydma
जुहु यास् ५0045 शुहुयातम् 7५५04 जुहू यात juhuydta
YEA juhuyde RATA juhuydtdm जुहुयुस् juhuyus
Imperative, ‘ Let me sacrifice.’
जुहवानि juhavdni जु रवाव ५१८०८०० जुहवाम juhkavdma
gh jubudhi (293) AAA १५१५१८०४ EA juhuta
Wetg juhotu जुहुताम् १८१५८८४ YG १५४००४४
Perf: (374.9) Gert, जुहषिय or Yate, जुहाव; जुहुविव, WIA,
शुहुवहुस् ;. जुहुविम, जुहुवः; YxTE. Or जुहवाष्चकार, &c.; see 385. €. 15८
Fut. date. and Fut. रोष्यामि, Aor. सहौषम्, सहोषीस्, चहोषीत्; sete,
agen, सटोष्टाम्; सोष्म, Bele, welgy. Prec. garam. Cond. खहोष्यम्;
Pass., Pres. हुये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अहावि. Caus., Pres. हावयामि ; Aor:
wagaq. Des. जुहूषामि. Freq. जोहये, sitetfa or जोहवीमि. Part,
Pres. qaq; Past Pass. 3a; Past Indecl. इत्वा, -3a; Fut. Pass. होतव्य,
हवनीय, TA or VN.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 3 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS. ॥
663. Root दा (special stems ददा, दद्, see 335). Inf. दातुम् ‘to give.’
Par, and Atm. Pres. ददामि, ददासि, ददाति; दस्, दत्यस्, TAY; TAA,,
दत्य, ददति. Atm. ददे, दत्से, दन्ते; TSR, ददाथे, ददाते; Tae, TS, ददते.
Impf, अददाम्, अददास्, अददात्; WES, ATA, अदाम्; BTA, अदत, TH
(331. Obs.) Atm. खददि, खदन्यास्, wea; खदद्रहि, खददायाम्, अददातान्;
छदद्रहि, सदद्धुम्, ददत. Pot. दद्याम्. Atm, eeta. Impv. ददानि, देहिः
ददातु; ददाव, TAH, TAM; ददाम, दत्त, ददतु. Atm. ददे, दग, TAM; TTA,
ददाथाम्, ददाताम् ; ददामहे, THA, ददताम्. Perf. (373) ददो, ददि or ददाथ,
ददौ; ददिव, eye, ददहुस्; ददिम, दद, दुस्. Atm. ददे, ददिषे, ददे ; ददिवहे,
ददाये, ददाति; ददिमहे, ददिश्वे, ददिरे. ist Fut. दातास्मि. Atm. ene.
and Fut. दास्यामि. Atm. दास्ये. Aor. (438) खदाम्, खदास्, अदात्; ` Bera,
दातम्, सदात्ताम् ; अदाम, खदात, सटुस्, Atm. (438. 2) सदिषि, सदिथास्,
सदित; अदिष्वहिः चदिषायाम्, सदिषाताम् ; खदिष्महि, खदिदुम्, सदिषत, Prec.
देयासम्. Atm, दासीय. Cond. खदास्यम्. Atm. खदास्ये. Pass., Pres, दये;
Aor. 3rd sing. wetfa, see 700. Caus., Pres. दापयामि (483); Aor.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS,—GROUP IJ. CLASS III, 289
सदीद् पम्. Des. (503) दित्सामि, fart. 7०५, 2213, दादामि or erfa.
Part., Pres, ददत् (141. ०); Atm. ददान; Past Pass. ga; Past Indecl.
Tar, -दाय; Fut. Pass. दातव्य, दानीय, देय.
664. Root धा (special stems द्धा, दभ्, see 336). Inf. धातुम् ‘to place.’
Par, and Atm. Pres. दधानि, दधासि, दधाति; TAA, WA (299. a), VAT
(299. a); दश्मस्, धत्य, दधति. Atm. दधे, धत्से, WR; zeae, दधाये, दधाति ;
दध्महे, WE (299. 8), दधते. Impf. सदधाम्, अद्धास्, HEMT; सदश्व, धत्तम्,
अधत्ताम्; WHA, WE, अदधुस्. Atm. सदधि, अधत्यास्, wa; Aazafe,
अदधाधाम्, अदधाताम् ; अदभ्महि, सधद्ुम् (299. 4), सदधत. Pot. ew. Atm.
दधीय. Impv. दधानि, भेहि, Tag; दधाव, धत्तम्, धच्चाम् ;. दधाम, धत्त, दधतु.
Atm. दधे, we, धत्ताम् ; दधावहै, दधाथाम्, दधताम् ; दधामहै, धुम्, दधताम् .
Perf. (373) दधो, दधिय or दधाथ, द्धो; दधिव, away, दधतुस् ; दधिम, दध, दुस्.
Atm. द्धे, दधिषे, &०. 15 Fut. धातासि. Atm. धाताहे, &c. and Fut.
भास्यामि. Atm. mat. dor. (438) अभाम्, अधास्, अधात्; सधाव, सधातम्,
अधाताम् ; सधाम, सधात, अथुस्. Atm. (438. ¢) अधिषि, अधियात्, अधित;
अधिष्वहि, सधिषायाम्, सधिषाताम्; सधिष्महि, अधिकम्, अधिषत. Prec. धेयासम्.
Atm. धासीय. Cond. अधास्यम्. Atm. अधास्ये. Pass., Pres, Wa; 79
Fut. धायिताहे or धाताहे ; Aor. 3rd sing. धायि. Caus., Pres. धापयामि ;
Aor, सदीभपम्. Des. furarfia (503). Freq. देधीये, दाधामि or दाधेमि.
Part., Pres, दधत् (141. a); Atm. दधान ; Past Pass. fen; Past Indecl.
हित्वा, -धाय; Fut. Pass. धातव्य, धानीय, धेय.
a. Root मा (special stems मिमी, मिम्? see 338). Inf. मातुम् ‘to
measure. Atm. Pres. मिमे, भिमीषे, मिमीते; मिमीवहे, मिमाये, मिमाति ;
मिमीमहे, farted, मिमते. 17/00 अनिमि, अमिमीयास्, अमिमीत; अभिमीवहि,
समिमाथाम्, समिमाताम् ; अमिमीमहि, समिमीध्वम्, समिमत. Pod. मिमीय, मिनीयास्,
मिमीत, &c. Imp. मिमे, मिमीष्व, मिमीताम् ; भिमावरै, मिमाथाम्, मिमाताम्;
भिमामरै, . मिमीध्वम्, मिमताम्. Perf. ममे, ममिषे, ममे; ममिवहे, ममाये, ममाते;
ममिमहे, ममिश्वे, ममिरे. ist Fut. माताहे. and Fut. मास्ये. Aor. (434)
समासि, खमास्यास्, SATA ; अमासि" SAAIA, अमासाताम् ; समासहि, समाध्वम्,
समासत. Prec. मासी य. Cond. sara. Pass., Pres. मीये; Aor. 3rd sing.
अमायि. Caus., Pres. मापयामि ; Aor. खमीमपम्. Des. favarfa, -7 (503).
Freq. मेमोये, मामामि or मामेमि. Part., Pres. मिमान ; Past Pass. fat;
Past Indecl. मित्वा, -माय ; Fut. Pass. मातव्य, मानीय, मेय.
665. Root हा (special stems जहा, नही, जह्, see 337). Inf. हातुम् ‘to
quit.’ Par. Pres. जहामि, जहासि, जहाति; जही वस् (or जहिवस्, see Pan.
VL. 4, 116), नहौयस् (or Head), जहीतस् (or जितस्); जहीमस् (or जहिमस्),
weta (or wfea), जहति. Jnpf. अजहाम्, WA, WAR; सनहीव (or
aafga), सजहीतम् (or watery), सजही ताम् (or सजहिताम्); Wats (or सज-
Pp
290 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II, CLASS III.
हिम), अजीत (or wafer), सजहुस्. Pot. द्याम्, Tara, &c. Impv. जहानि,
wetfe (or जहिहि) or नारि, जहातु ; Hera, WetAA (or नटितम्), जहीताम् (or
afgaty); जहाम, जहीत (or जनहित), Teg. Perf. wel, जिय or जहाय, जहौ;
जिव, जहथुस्, जहतुस् ; जहिम, नह, Weg. rst Fut. दातास्मि. and Fut.
हास्यामि. dor. (433) खहासिषम्, अहासीस्, अहासीत् ; सहासिष्व, हासिष्टम्,
अहासिष्टाम् ; अहासिष्म, सहासिष्ट, सहासिषुस्. Prec. हेयासम्. Cond. खहास्यम्.
Pass., Pres. हीये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अहायि. Caus., Pres. हापयामि ; Aor.
अजीटपम्. Des. जिहासामि. Freq. 321%, जाहामि or नाहेमि- Part., Pres.
हत् (141. a); Past Pass. हीन ; Past Indecl. हित्वा, -हाय ; Fut. Pass.
हातव्य, हानीय, हेय.
666. Root भी (special stems far, विभी, विभि, see 333). Inf. मतुम् ‘to
fear’ Par. Pres, fifa, विभेषि, fifa; विभीवस् or विभिवस्, विभीयस्
or fafrag, विभीतस् or बिभितस्; विभीमस् or विभिमम्, faite or fafa,
विभ्यति (34). Impf. अविभयम्, अविभेस्, अविभेत्; अविभीव or अयिभिव, अवि-
wy or सविभितम्, सविभीताम् or अविभिताम् ; सविभौम or सविभिम, अविभीत
or अविभित, अबिभयुस् (337. 008.) Pot. विभीयाम् or विभियाम्, &c. Impv.
विभयानि, विभीहि or fatefe, frig; गिभयाव, विभीतम् or विभितम्, विभी-
ताम् or विभिताम्; बिभयाम्, विभीत or विभित, विभ्यतु (34). Perf. (374)
विभाय, विभयिय or विभेय, विभाय; विभ्यिव, किभ्यथुस्, विभ्यतुस् ; विभ्विम, चिभ्य,
fgg. Or विभयाचकार (385. ९). ist Fut. tafe. 2nd Fut. मेष्यामि-
4or, ain, ig, अभेषीत् ; Whey, wey, we; Wha, wie, उभेषुस् .
Prec. भीयासम्. Cond. अभेष्यम्. Pass., Pres. भीये ; Aor. 3rd sing. wafa.
Caus., Pres. भाययामि or -ये, or भापये or भीषये ; Aor. सवीभियम् or खवीभपम् or
watiray. Des. विभीषामि. Freq. वेनीये or Tifa or rdtfa. एथ,
Pres, favaq (141.4); Past Pass. भीत्त; Past Indecl. मीत्वा, -भीय; Fut.
Pass. भेतव्य, भयनीय, भेय.
a. Root ह्री (special stems fag, fargt, fafza, see 333. a). Inf.
तुम् ‘to be ashamed,’ Par. Pres. fagfa, fafa, fazfa; fasta,
जिहीयस्, जिहीतस् ; जिहीमस्, foreta, fafgata (143. ०). Imp. सजिहयम्,
प्रजस्, सनिहेत् ; wigs, सजिट्रीतम्, अजिट्रीताम् ; सनिहीम, अनिहीत, सजि-
#94 (331. 008.) Pot. जिहीयाम्. Impv. जिहयाणि, जिहीहि, fag; जिहयाव,
fagtay, निहीताम् ; जिहयाम, जिहीत, निहियतु- Perf. निहाय, निहयिथ
or निहेय, जिह्राय; जिहियिव (374. ९)› faferga, जिहियतुस्; जिहिपिन,
जिहिय, निह्िपुस्. ist Fut. हेतास्ि. and Fut. हेष्यामि. Aor.
अदैषम्, चहेषीस्, सहेषीत्; WRT, -षएम्, -ष्टाम् ; सहैक, -z, -षुस्. Pree.
हीयासम्. Cond. सहेष्यम्. Pass., Pres. ह्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. WeIfa.
Caus., Pres, देपयामि ; Aor. सनजिहिपम्. Des. जिहीषामि. Freq.
जेद्रीये, नेहेमि or जेहयीमि. Part., Pres. जिहियत् (141. a); Past
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS VII. 291
Pass. #tu or #ta; Past Indecl. Piet; Fut. Pass. 27a, दय-
णीय, हेय.
4. Root जन् (special stems WHA, नजा, AA, see 339). Inf. जनिहुम् “to
produce.” Par, Pres. जजन्मि, जजंसि, जजन्ति ; SHIT, जजायस्, जजातस्;
wre, जजाघ, जज्ञति. Impf. सजननम्, अजजन् (294); TAAL; सनजन्व,
WAAAY, FAINT; HATH, WAR, TAY. Pot. WATT or जजायाम् .
Inpy. जजनानि, जजाहि, WAY; जजनाव, जजातम्, जजाताम् ; AAA, जजात,
wag. Perf. जजान or जजन, जजनिय, जजान ; Aiea, जज्ञयुस्, नज्ञतुस्; जक्षिम,
जज्ञ, AYR. ist Fut. जनितास्मि. and Fut. जनिष्यामि. Aor. सजानिषम्,
अजानीस्, सजानीत् ; सजानिष्व, &c. Or सजनिषम्, &c.; see 418. 8. Prec.
जन्यासम् or जायासम्. Cond. अजञनिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. जाये (cf. 617. a) or
जन्ये; Aor. 3rd sing. wafa. Caus., Pres. जनयामि ; Aor. अनीजनम्,.
Des. जिजनिषे. Freq. जानाये or waa, afm. Part., Pres. waa (141. 4);
Past Pass. जात, जनित ; Past Indecl. जनित्वा, -जन्य, -जाय; Fut. Pass.
जनितव्य, नननीय, जन्य.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 342.
667. Root fae ¢hid. Infin. देुम् ८7९10000, ‘to cut.
PaRAsMAI-PADA. Present Tense, ‘I cut.’
faafa chinadmi farry chindvas चिन्यस् chindmas
Faire chinatsi Farag chinthas (345) सिन्य chintha (345)
दिनि chinatti चिन्त् chintas (345) किन्द्नि chindanti
Imperfect, ‘I was cutting,’ or ‘TI cut.’
अच्छिनदम् adchinadam (57) APSF adchindva अच्छिन्द्र adchindma
सच्छिनत् 0440004४ (294) अच्छिन्तम् atchintam (348) सच्छिन्त adchinta (345)
अच्छिनत् 0८८04 (294) अच्छिन्ताम् adchintdm (345) aire aéthindan
Potential, ‘I may cut.’
चिन््ाम् chindydm farara chindydva च्िन्द्याम Chindydma
चिन््ास् chindyds दिन्द्यातम् chindydtam FRA Chindydta
FRAT chindydt FRATATA chindydtdm दिन्दुस् chindyus
Imperative, ‘Let me cut.’
दिनदानि chinaddni दिनदाव chinaddva FRAETR chinadéma
Fafts chinddhi (or chindhi, 345) THAA chintam (345) किन chinta (348)
FAY chinattn दिन्ताम् chintdém (345) चिन्दन्तु chindanty
Pp2
292 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. CLASS VII.
Perf. चिच्छेद (51), चिच्छेदिय, चिच्छेद ; चिच्छिदिव, चिच्छिदयुस्, चिच्छिदतुस्;
चिच्छिदिम, चिच्छिद्, चिच्छिदुस्. 15: Fut. wafe. 2nd 702. देद्यामि. Aor.
wraea, अच्छिदस्, अच्छिदत्; सच्छिदाव, अच्छिदतम्, अच्छिदताम्; सच्छिदाम;
सच्छिदत, अच्छिदन्. Or wae, ware, war; Fars, अच्छेतम्,
Waar; wane, wae, wargy. Prec. चिदयासम्, Cond. Waker.
ATMANE-PADA. Present Tense, ‘I cut.’
छिन्दे chinde दिन्द्र हे chindvahe छिन्द्रहे chindmahe
चिन्त्से chintse चिन्दाये chinddthe चिन्धे chinddhve
fart chinte (348) farata chinddte fara chindate
Imperfect, ‘I was cutting,’ or ‘I cut.’
अच्छिन्दि adchindi (य) च्छिन्द्धि acthindvahi सच्छिन््रहि ८८८00401}
सच्छिन्यास् 044071045 (345) अच्िन्दायाम् adchinddthdm = सच्छिन्डुम् ०८८21220 ८077
अच्छिनत 0८407710 (345) अच्छिन्दाताम् ८८८५0८04 = सच्छिन्द्त ०८८०००८०
Potential, ‘I may cut.’
दिन्दी य chindtya faretafe ८077007 लिन्दीमहिि chindimahi
किन्दीयास् chindithds -दिन्दीयायाम् chindtydthim चिन्दीध्वम् chindidhvam
चिन्दीत ८070042 चन्द याताम् chindiydtdm = चिन्दी रन् chindéran
Imperative, ‘Let me cut.’
fae chinadat दिनदावहे chinaddvahai चिनदामरे ¢hinaddmahai
Farrar chintsva चिन्दायाम् chinddthdm चिन्डुम् chinddhvam
चिन्ताम् chintdm (345) क्िन्दाताम् chinddtdém छिन्द्ताम् chindatdém
Perf. चिच्छिदे, fafafet, चिच्छिदे; चिच्छिदिवरे, चिच्छिदाये, चिच्छिदाते;
चिच्छिदिमहे, चिच्छिदिश्वे, चिच्छिदिरे. 15 7⁄7. देचाहे. 2nd Fut. व्ये. Aor.
अच्छित्सि, afar, sha; अच्छिप्वहि, अच्छित्सायाम्, अच्छित्साताम् ; सच्छितस्महि,
अच्छिङ्खम्, अच्छित्सत. Prec. farata. Cond. wait. Pass., Pres. fet;
Aor. 3rd sing. watfe. Caus., 79९5. चेद् यामि ; Aor. अचिच्छिदम्. Des.
चिच्छित्साभि, -त्से. Freq. चेच्छये, चेच्छेदि. Part., Pres. fareq; Atm.
fareta; Past Pass. fea; Past Indecl. दिला, -faa; Fut. Pass. tz,
Beata, we.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 7 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
668. Root wx (special stems WAH, WH, see 347). Inf. WEA ‘to
anoint,’ ‘to make clear.” Par. Pres, wafsa, wafey (296), सनक्ति;
स्स्, संक्यस्, HQ; WAY, संक्य, अन्नन्ति. Impf. सानजम्, sag (294),
आनक्; Wie, wary, wa; सभम, सांक्त, WHA. Pot. संज्याम्. 219४.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II. ‘CLASS VII. 293
अनजानि, SHY, TAQ; अनजाव, THA, Wa; सनजाम, संक्त, सञ्चनु. Perf.
STATS, सानन्चिय or HFT, सानच्न; ATA, सानन्नयुस्, सानच्नतुस् ; सानल्िम,
सान्न, सानन्ुस्. ist Fut. संक्तास्मि or अलितास्मि. 2nd Fut. संछ्यामि or
सअञिष्यामि. dor. साञ्चिषम्, साञ्नीस्, wrata; wher, ९९. see 418.B, Prec.
सन्यासम् (453). Cond. संचयम् or आचिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. अज्ये (469);
Aor. 3rd sing. सालि. Caus., Pres. सन्नयाभि ; Aor. आचिनम्, Des. खच्ि-
faatfa. Part., Pres. wan; Past Pass. सक्त ; Past Indecl. sfarat or
stat or Wat, -सज्य ; Fut. Pass. संक्तव्य or सच्ितव्य, Werata, Wat or संग्ध.
a, Root yx (special stems YAR, YH, 346). . Inf. भोक्तुम् ‘to eat,’
‘to enjoy.’ Par. and Atm. Pres. yafa, भुनसि, yafa; bay, भुक्यस्,
भुक्तस् ; भुंज्मस्, भुंक्य, wah. Atm. ws, He, भुके; ae, Pare, भुञ्जाते;
सुञ्महे, wea, yar. Imps. अभुनजम्, अभुनक् (294), MAR; WY, WHA,
सभुंक्ताम् ; WEA, अभुक्त, wha. Atm. wife, सभं क्यास्, win; whats,
WAI, WANT; wysafe, wjzsaq, अभुञ्चत. Pot. सुज्याम्. ` Atm.
भु्रीय. Impo. भुनजानि, gira, भुनक्तु; भुनजाव, YHA, भक्ताम् ; WAM, भुक्त,
yaq. Atm. yaad, he, GT; भुनजावरे, भुञ्चाथाम्, Yara; भुनजामहै,
wea, gary. Perf. बुभोज, वुभोजिय, pia; वुशुजिव, बुभुजयुस्, वुभुनहुस्;
बुुजिम, TIA, TYR. Atm. वुभुजे, वुश्रुजिषे, वुभुजे ; -जिवहे, -जाये, -जाते;
-जिमहे, -जिध्वे, -जिरे. 15 Fut. भोक्तास्मि. Atm. भोक्तारे. 2nd Fut. भोष्यामि.
Atm, wha. dor. अभोकषम्, -सीस्, -सीत्; Wits, way, -क्ताम् ; सभो षस,
भोक्त, सभो सस्. Atm. wyfe, अभुक्यास्, अभुक्त; अभुषि, MIATA,
Mya; अभुष्सहि, सभुग्ध्वम्, wy. Prec. भुज्यासम्. Atm. भुक्लीय.
Cond. sate. Atm. site. Pass., Pres. ast; Aor. 3rd sing. अनोजि.
Caus., Pres. भोजयामि, -ये ; Aor. wayyy. Des. वुभरुल्लामि, से. Freq.
बोभुज्ये, बोभोन्मि. Part., Pres. FAT Atm. yara; Past Pass. भुक्त;
Past Indecl. gant, -भुज्य ; Fut. Pass, भोक्तव्य, भोजनीय, भोज्य or भोग्य (574).
669. Root भनन् (special stems WAH, 7H, 347). Inf. HA ‘to break.’
Par. Pres. भनज्मि, भनि, भनक्ि; aE, भंक्यस्, भक्तम्; भज्मस्, भ॑क्य, भञ्जन्ति.
श सभनजम्, WITH (294), WAR; अभ्व, सभंक्तम्, भक्ताम्; सभंञ्म, wig,
aera. Pot. भज्याम्. 20४. भनजानि, sie, भनक्त ; भनजाव, भक्तम्, भक्ताम् ;
भनजाम, भक्त, weg. Perf. ara, बभल्िय or बभंक्य, wr; auf,
TAY, Praga; waa, बभञ्च, praq. 15: Fut. भक्तास्मि. and Fut.
varia. dor. wate, -ate, -qiq; whe, अभा क्तम्, -क्ताम् ; Wie,
अभांक्त, अभा छस्. Prec. भज्यासम् (453). Cond. अभंछ्यम्. Pass., Pres. भज्ये
(469); Aor. 3rd sing. अभाजि. Caus., -7/65. भञ्चयामि ; dor. wary.
Des. friqrfa. Freq. बंभनज्ये, बंभन्मि. Part., Pres. waa; Past Pass. भग्न;
Past Indecl. want or भक्ता, -भज्य ; Fut. Pass. waa, भञ्लनीय, a7.
` 670. Root yx (special stems JAH, FH, see 346). Inf. योक्तुम् ‘to
294 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP 71, CLASS VII.
join, ‘to unite” Par.and Atm. Pres. युनज्मि, युनधि, &. ; like भुज्,
668.a. Atm. ya, Fa, &c. Impf. चरयुनजम्, अयुनक् (294), अयुनक् ;
अयुज, &c. Atm, अयुचखि, चयुंक्थास्, &c. Pot. qm, Atm. gat.
1/9. बुनजानि, fe, ARs युनजाव, &c. Atm. Fat, ger, युक्ताम्, &c.
Perf. gaa, युयोजिथ, युयोज ; युयुजिव? &c.; like भुज्, 668. ५. Atm. युयुजे.
ist Fut. योक्तास्मि. Atm. ata’. 2nd Fut. arenfa. Atm. are.
Aor, युजम्, -जस्, -जत्; -जाव, “HAA, -जताम् ; -जामः -जत, -जन्. Or
wate, -घीस्, -wiq; sates, &c. Atm. अयु, चयुक्यास्, युक्त ; ayes,
&e. Prec. युज्यासम्. Atm. gata. Cond. warm. Atm. अयोध्ये.
Pass., Pres. युज्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अयोजि, see 702. Caus., Pres. योज-
यामि; dor. अयूयुनम्. Des. युयुक्षामि, -q. Freq. योयुज्ये, योयोज्मि- Part.,
Pres. yaq; Atm. art; Past Pass. ya; Past Indecl. युक्ता, -युज्य ;
Fut. Pass. योक्रव्य, योजनीय, योग्य or योज्य (574, 574. ५). 5
671. Root रूष् (special stems FAY, TY, 344). Inf. Trax ‘to hinder.’
Par, and Atm. Pres, इण्न, रुणत्सि, रुणद्धि ; weag, waq*, रन्डस् * ;
Bang, सन्द *, सन्धन्ति. Atm. Ta, Eee, न्ड *; रुन्ध्वहे, रुन्धाये, रुन्धाते;
Baas, TS, रुन्धते. Impf. अरुणधम्, अरुणत् or अरूणस् (294), चरुणत्
(294); अरुन्ध्व, अरुन्डम् *› सरु्डाम् *; सरन्ध्म, चरुन्ड *› ARAM. Atm,
खरन्थि, अरुन्डास् *, were*; सरुन्ध्नहि, अरन्धायाम्, अरन्धाताम् ; अर्न्ध्महि?
wage, weet. Pot. gummy. Atm. रुन्धीय, Impv. रुणधानि, रन्डि,
रणड; रुणधाव, रम् *, TEM; रुणधाम, रन्ड *, Taq. Atm. eat,
रूमसख, रभ्डधाम् *; रुणधाव, रुन्धाधाम्, रुन्धाताम् ; रुणधामहै, GEA, TAME.
Perf. wou, हपेधिय, रूरोध; ररूधिव, रुरुधयुस्, रुरूधतस्; THM, TRY,
eeyq. Atm. रुरुधे, रुरुधिषे, ERY; ररूधिवहे, रुरूुधाये, रुरुधाते; ररूधिमहे,
रहथिध्वे, हरधिरे. 1४ Fut. योद्धासि, Atm. Der. 2nd Fut. रोद्यामि.
Atm. रोये. Aor. सहूधम्, -धस्, -धत्; -धाव, -धतम्, -धताम् ; -धाम, -धत, -धन्.
Or way, अरौत्सीस्, अयोत्सीत्; whe, चरोदधम्, ste; wire, wile,
wig. Atm, अरूत्सि, REE, FES; सरत्ख हि, सरत्सायाम्, सहत्साताम् ;
weraig, सहम्, अरुत्सत. Prec. TUTE. Atm. हत्सी य. Cond. schery.
Atm. woe. Part., Pres. ea; Aor. 3rd sing. सेधि. Caus., Pres.
auafa; dor. अरूहधम्. Des. ररत्सामि, -त्से. Freq. Tew, रोगेभ्मि.
Part., Pres, eam; Atm. waa; Past Pass. eg; Past Indecl. eat,
-eu; Fut. Pass. रोडव्य, Urata, रोध्य.
672. Root शिष् (special stems शिनष्, शिष्). Inf. शेषम् ‘to distinguish,’
‘to separate,’ ‘to leave remaining.” Par. Pres. fyrafe, शिनकि, fyrafe;
शिंष्वस्, five, freq; शिंष्मस्, fe, शिंषन्ति. Imps खशिनषम्, सशिनट् (294),
„ * इन्धस् may be written for SFA. Similarly, रन्धं for Fs, &c. See 2y8.a.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP II, CLASS VII. 295
सशिनट्; सरशिंष्व, सशिं्टम्, अशिं्टाम् ; अशिं ष्म, सशि, सशिंषन्. Por. fart.
Impv. शिनषाणि, fyrgfe or शिरिढ (303, compare 345), frag; शिनषाव, शिष्टम्,
faery; शिनषाम, शिष्ट, शिंषन्तु. Per/. शि शेष, शिशेषिय, शिशोष; शिशिषिव,
शिशिषधुस्, शिशिषतुस्; शिशिषिम, शिशिष, शिशिप॒स्. ist Fut. शेशस्ि.
and Fut. शेच्यामि. Aor, अशिषम्, -षस्, -षत्; -षाव, -षतम्, -षताम् ; -षाम,
-षत, -षन्. Prec. शिष्यासम्. Cond. ATA. Pass., Pres. शिष्ये; Aor.
3rd sing. agifa. Caus., Pres. सोषयामि ; Aor. अशीशिषम्. Des. fafgranfa.
Freq. शेशिषये, शेशेष्मि. Part., Pres. शिंषत् ; Past Pass. शिष्ट; Past
Indecl. शिष्टा, -शिष्य ; Fut. Pass. Gea, yauta, शेष्य.
673. Root हिंस् (special stems हिनस्, हिंस्). Inf. हिंसितुम् ‘to injure.
Par. Pres. हिनस्मि, feafe*, हिनस्ति; faa, free, हितस्; fea,
fee, हिंसन्ति. Impf. अहिनसम्, सहिनत् or अहिनस् (294, 304.0), अहिनत्;
wig, सरहिंस्तम्, wide; afew, अर्हिस्त, अहिंसन्. Pot. हिंस्याम्. Impv.
हिनसानि, fetta or हिन्धि (304), हिनस्तु ; हिनसाव, fee, हिंस्ताम् ; हिनसाम,
हिस्त, हिंसन्तु. Perf. जिदिंस, fafefan, fafta; faféfas, जिहिंसपुस्, जिहिंसतुस्;
जिहिंसिम, जि्हिंस, निर्हिमम्. ist Fut. हिंसितास्मि. 2nd Fut. हिंसिष्यामि.
4or, स्िंसिषम्, सहिंसीस्, अहसीत्; सहिंसिष्व, सहिंसिष्टम्, सर्हिंसिष्टम्; सहिं-
fan, सहिंसिष्ट, स्हिंसिषुस्. Prec. हिंस्यासम्. Cond. सर्हिंसिष्यम्. ?288.,
Pres. हिंस्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. अहिंसि. Caus., Pres. हिंसयामि; Aor. अनि-
feaq. Des. जिहिंसिषामि. Freq. afga, Afefar. Part., Pres. féaq;
Past Pass. हिंसित ; Past Indecl. हिंसित्वा, -féea; Fut. Pass. féfara,
feaata, fea.
674. Root वृहू (special stems FUR, FUE, FR, see 348). Inf. तरितुम् or
WEA ‘to injure,’ ‘to kill’ Par. Pres. qafa, gate (306), तृणेढि (305. a) ;
FRA, THR, FRR (298. 2); Gag, TE, Fett. Imps. अतृणहम्, अतृणेट्
(294), अतृणेट् ; AFR, WER, WEN; ATA, BPW, सतृंहन्. Pot.
gam. Impv. quatfa, gfe (see 306.c), FE; तृणाव, FHA, PIA;
quem, qe, fey. ¢ waz, aafea or ane, ate; agfea, ततृह युस्,
ततृहतुस्; waren, aye, ततृहुस्. 15 2. तहिंतास्मि or werfer. and Fut.
तरिष्यामि or wanfa. dor. अतहिंषम्, -dtq, -dtq; -हिष्व, -feen, -feem;
-हिष्म, -fae, -हिषुस्. Or खतृम्, -घस्, -घत्; -साव, -छतम्, -सताम्; -घाम,
-छ्त, -छन्. Prec. तृद्यासम्. Cond. सतरिष्यम् or waeay. Pass., Pres. Ta;
Aor, 3rd sing. safe. Caus., Pres, तहैयामि ; Aor. सततरेम् or BATRA.
Des. faafeurfa or तितुक्षामि. Freq. तरते, तरी (3rd sing. actafa).
Part., Pres. fea; Past Pass. (3०5. 4) Je; Past Indecl. तर्हित्वा or तुदा,
-तुद्य ; Fut. Pass. तरितव्य or तदैव्य, TeUTT, Ta.
-* Final स् 3 preceded by a or द remains unchanged before the terminations ॐ
and se; see 62. 6.
296: CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III, CLASS ४.
EXAMPLES. OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIFTH CLASS,
: EXPLAINED AT 349.
675. Root बृ णू. Infin, वरितुम् varitum or वरीतुम् varitum, “to cover,”
“to enclose,’ ‘to surround,’ ‘to choose *.’
Note, that the conjugational नु nu becomes शु nu after वु vri by 58.
Parasmal-paDa. Present Tense, ‘I cover.’
वृंणोनि ४1210009 FYI ००१४४०५ वृशुमस् vrinumas t
वृंणोषि 113 वृणुचस् vrinuthas वृणु vrinutha
वृणोति vrinote वृशुतस् vrinutas वृरवन्ति vrinvanti
Imperfect, ‘1 was covering, or ‘I covered.’
सवृणावम् avrinavam अवृणुव ८०११५०८ § अवृगुम avrinuma ||
अवृणोत् avrinos WIYAA avrinutam WIA avrinuta
अवृणोत् avrinot छवृणुताम् avrigutdm WW avrinvan
Potential, ‘I may cover.’
वृशुयाम् orinuydm वृणुयाव vrinuydva वृणुयाम vrinuydma
वृगुयास् vrinuyds वृणुयातम् vrinuydtam वृणुयात् vrinuydta
वृणुयात् ०१५१५५५ वृशुयाताम् vrinuydtém वृणुयुष् crinuyus
Imperative, ‘ Let me cover.’
वृणवानि vrinavdni वृणवाच vrinavdva वृण वाम vrinavdma
वृणु vrinu वृणुतम् vrinutam वृणुत ०१११०८८
वृणोतु vrinotu वृणुतताम् ण्णः FWY vrinvantu
Perf. (369) ववार, TTY (Vedic) or ववरिथ (see 370), ववार; ववृव, TAY,
वत्रतुस् ; ववृम, वत्र, WAR or TARRY. ist Fut. (392. d) वरितास्मि or
वरौतास्िि (393). 2nd Fut. afvanfa or attanfa (393). dor. सवारिषम्,
अवारौस्, warty; सवारिष्व, सवारिष्टम्, सवारिष्टान् ; खवारिष्मि, सवार, खवा-
रिषस्. Prec. नियासम् or वृूयोसम् (448. ¢). Cond. सवप्प्यम् or सवरीष्यम्.
_Avmane-papa. Present Tense, ‘1 cover.’
TH णम aya vrinuvahe ** वृणुमहे vrinumahe tt
वृणुषे vrinushe वृरबाये vrinvdthe Twa vrinudhve
वृणुते vrinute वृरवातं vrinvdte FWA vrinvate
* In the sense of to choose,’ this root generally follows cl. 9; thus, Pres
वृणामि, वृणासि, वृणाति; Futaq, &c. See 686
† Or FWA vrinvas ‡ Or JWR vrinmas. § Or SAW avrinva.
॥ Or WALA avrinma
{| Yvri is sometimes written with long rf, in which case 374. k may be applied
** Or FUE ४१११४०४८ Tt Or वृरमहं vrigmahe
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS V. 297
Imperfect, <1 was covering,’ or ‘I covered.’
wafer avrinvt सवृणुवहि avrinuvahi * अवृणुमहि [1141141
वृणुयात् avrinuthds सवृरावायाम् avrinvdthém अवृगुभ्नम् avrinudhoam
सवृणुत avrinuta सवृरवाताम् avrinvdidm WIV avrinvata
Potential, ‘I may cover.’
WHT vrinvtya वृरबी वहि vrinvivahi वृणवीमहि vrinvimahi
वृरबीयास् vrinvithds वृरबीयायाम् vrinvtydthdm वृरबीध्वम् 11111111
Fata vrinvita वृरबोयाताम् 11111140 वृणवीरन् vrinviran
Imperative, ‘ Let me cover.’
qua vrinavat वृणवावहे vrinavdvahat quae vrinavdmahai
वृगुष्व vrinushva वृरवायाम् vrinvdthdm वृगुध्वम् vrinudhvam
वृणुताम् vrinutém FUTAT vrinvdtdém वृरवताम् vrinvatém
Perf. +2 (369) or wart, ववृषे, qa or ववरे बवृवहे, TAY, IATA
ववृमहे, ववृ, afat. ist Fut. afcare or वरीताहे. 2nd Fut. afcat or
ata. dor. wafefa, wafterg, अवरिष्ट ; अवरिष्वहि, सवरिषायाम्, सवरिषा-
ताम् ; अवरिम्महि, wafteay or -fteq, अवरिषत. Or सवरीषि, wadtera, &c.
Or अवृषि, खवृ्ास्, wat; अवृष्वहि, सवृषायाम्, खवृषाताम् ; अवृष्मटि, अवदम्,
wget. Or अवृषि, अवृषटोस्, we; अवृष्वैहि, अवृषायाम्, सवृूषीताम् ; we,
way, सवृर्त. Prec. वरिषीय or Fata or qty (448. 8). Cond. अवरिष्ये
or watta. Pass., Pres. faa; Aor. grd sing. सवारि. Caus., Pres.
वरयामि or -%, or वारयामि or -ये; dor. अवीवरम्. Des. विवरिषामि or -षे,
पिवरीषामि or -8, वुवूषौमि or -% (503). Freq. वेत्रीये (511) or aq, वभि.
Part., Pres. ywaq; Atm. वृशवान ; Past Pass. ya; Past Indecl. वृत्वा,
वृत्य ; Fut. Pass, वरितिव्य or वरीतव्य, वरणीय, वायै.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. 5 IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
676. Root 9 (special stems शृणो, शुणु, see 352). Inf. तुम् ‘to
hear” Par. Pres. शृणोमि, शृणोषि, शृणोति; शृणुवस् or शुखस्, YO,
WUT; शृगुमस् or YUAG, YY, YU. एध अशृणवम्, अशृणोस्, अशृणोत्;
अशृणुव or अशुर, अशृणुतम्, अशृणुताम् ; अशृणुम or WY, अशृणुत, अशुरवन्
Pot. शृणुयाम्. Impv. शृणवानि, शृणु, शृणोतु ; शृणवाव, शृणुतम्, शृणुताम् ;
शृणवाम, शृणुत, शृरवन्तु. Perf. (369) शुश्राव, शुश्रोथ, शुच्रावः; Yas, ४५७४५
YAW; शुश्रुम, शुश्रुव, JIA. 25 Fut. श्रोतास्मि. and Fut. श्रोष्यामि.
Aor ae ita seat: खश्रोष्व, WHEN, -शटाम्; Wale, WHE
* Or aqaafe avrinvahi. + Or खवृश्महि avrinmahi.
t J is sometimes written with long १४ in which case 374. k may be applied. .
§ This root is placed by Indian grammarians under the 1st class.
aq
298 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS V.
wag. Prec. aren. Cond. चश्रोष्यम्. Pass. Pres. ya; Aor.
3rd sing. warfa. Caus., Pres. श्रावयामि ; Aor. अशिश्रवम् or WYATT.
Des. शुश्रूषे. Freq. Waa, Wratfa or शोच्रवीमि. Part., Pres. शृणवत् ;
Past Pass. qa; Past Indecl. शरुत्वा, -qu; Fut. Pass. श्रोतव्यः wauia,
श्राव्य.
677. Root y* (special stems yt, Yq). Inf. ufagy or भोतुम् ‘to
shake, ‘to agitate’ Par. and Atm. Pres. धूनोमि, yatta, धूनोति;
VATA or WI, WIT, धूनुतस् ; भूनुमस् or धून्मस्, YIU, yrafer. Atm Wt
शूनुषे, WAR; धू नुवहे or Was, भून्वाथे, धून्वाते ; Y_AS or ue, WA, Wat
श्र WEAR, TAA, चधूनोत्; अधूनुव or ML, HGH, FGA; चभरूनुम
or WY, अधूनुत, अभून्वन्. Atm. अभून्वि, सधूनुयास्, सभूनुत ; अभूनुवहि or
अभून्वहि, BETTI, खथून्वातम्; धूनुहि, सधूनुश््रम्, अधून्वत. Pot. धूनु याम्.
Atm, धून्वीय. 1702. भूनवानि, Yq, भूनोतु; भूनवाव, भूनुतम्, धूनुताम् ; भूनवाम,
wat, धन्वन्तु. Atm. धूनवे, YAM, YAMA; भूनवावरे, भून्वाथाम्, yaaa;
शरूनवामरे, भूनुध्वम्, धून्वताम्. Perf. (374. 9) दुधाव, gufaa or gure, दुधाव;
दुधुषिव, दुधुवयुस्, दुधुवहस् ; दुधुविम, दुधुव, दुधुवुस्. Atm. दुधुवे, gure. दुधुव ;
दुधुविवहे, दुधुवाये, yaa; दुधुविमहे, दुधुषिध्वे or -द, दुधुषिरे. 15८ Fut. धवि-
atfer or धोतास्मि. Atm. धविताहे or Ware. and Fut. विष्यामि or धोष्यामि
Atm, धविष्ये or धोष्ये. 407.* अखधाविषम्, सधावीस्, खधावीत् ; अखधाविष्व, अधा-
विषटम्, अधाविषटाम्; अधाविष्म, सधाविष्ट, अधाविपुस्. Or अधोषम्, -षीस्, -षीत्;
अधोष्व, अधो्टम्, -ष्टाम्; सधक, अधोष्ट, अधोषुस्. Atm. अधविषि, अधविष्टास्,
अधविष्ट; सथविष्वहि, अधविषायाम्, -पाताम् ; खधविप्महि, अथधविध्नम् (-दुम्), अध-
विषत. Or witfa, अधोषटास्, अधोष्ट; अधोष्वहि, सधोषायाम्, -षाताम् ; खधोष्महिः
wuiga, अधोषत. Prec. भूयासम्, 4४). धविषीय or धोषीय. Cond. खध-
विष्यन् or अधोष्यम्. Atm, सधविष्ये or wa. 12988. Pres. yi; Aor.
3rd sing. अधावि. Caus., Pres. धूनयामि or धावयामि ; dor. सटूधुनम् or
अट्धवम्. Des. दुधूषामि, -षे. Freq. दोधूये, दोधोमि or दोधवीमि. Part.,
Pres. भून्वत् ; Atm. भून्वान ; Past Pass. ya or ya; Past Indecl. yen,
-ya; Fut. Pass, भवितव्य or धोतव्य, धवनीय, धाव्य or भव्य.
a. Like y may be conjugated सु ‘to press out Soma juice,’ which
in native grammars is the model of the 5th class; thus, Pres. सुनोमि,
&c. The two Futures reject i; 1s¢ Fut. atatfa, &c.
678. Root स्तु or At (special stems स्तृणो, FY). Inf. स्तस्तुम् or
* This root may also be yatta &c., and also in the th class; Pres. yatta,
yafa, धुनाति; धुनीवस्, &c.; see 686: and in the 6th (धुवामि 280). In the
latter case the Aor. is धुविषम्, &९. ; see 430.
+ This root may also be conjugated as a verb of the oth class; thus, Pres.
स्तृणामि, स्तृणासि, स्तृणाति ; स्तृणीवस्, &०, See 686.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS फ, 299
स्तरीतुम् or WAR ‘to spread, ‘to cover” Par. and Atm. Pres. स्तृणोमि,
&९. ; like वृ at 675. Atm. YW, FIR, &c. 1/9 अस्तुणवम्. Atm.
wafe. -720/. स्तृशुयाम्. Atm. स्तृरीय. Impv. quanta. Atm. qua.
Perf. (252. ¢, 374. ९) तस्तार, Were, तस्तार ; तस्तरिव, WATTR, WATT;
तस्त रिम, तस्तर, तस्तरम्. Atm. तस्तरे, तस्तरिषे, तस्तरे ; तस्तरिवहे, तस्त राये, TATA;
तस्तरिमहे, तस्तरिध्ने or -द, तस्तरिरे. 1; Fut. स्तरितास्मि ० स्तरोतास्मि or written.
Atm. स्तरिताहे or स्तरी ताहे or wine. 20 Fut. स्तरिष्यामि or स्तरीष्याभि.
Atm, स्तरिप्ये or wire. Aor. अस्तारिषम्, -रीस्, -रीत्; अस्तारिष्व, &९. ; see
675. Or warty, -षीस्, -षीत्; werd, -8q, -शम् ; ward, -8, -पृस्.
Atm. अस्तरिपि or watifa or अस्तृषि or अस्ति. Prec. स्तथोसम् or स्ती यासम्.
Atm. स्तृषीय or स्तरिषीय or स्तीर्ीय. Cond. सस्तरिष्यम् or सस्तरीष्यम्. Atm.
अस्तर्प्पि or water. Pass., Pres. (467) सत्ये; Aor. 3rd sing. werrfe.
Caus., Pres. wrcatfa; Aor. खतिस्तरम् or अतस्तरम्. Des. तिस्तरिषामि, -2;
or तिस्तरीषामि, -षे; or frattirfa, -¥. Freq. area or तेस्तीर्ये, तास्ति or
atterfa. Part., Pres. स्तृरवत् ; Atm, स्तृरवान ; Past Pass. qa or स्तीशे
(534) ; Past Indecl. WaT, -स्ती ये, -स्तुत्य ; Fut. Pass. स्तस्तिव्य or स्तरीतव्य
or WAT, WUT, Wry.
679. Root श॒ क् * (special stems Wat, WH, WHI). Inf. war ‘to be
able.” Par. Pres. wanfa, शक्रोषि, शक्रोति; WHAT, WRIA, WHAT;
शक्र मस्, WH, WRAP. 1/१ अशक्रवम्, TUR, अशक्तोत्; SWI, अशक्तु-
तम्, अशक्तम् ; अशक्ुम, VHT, TWA. Pot. wear. mp. शक्तवानि,
शक्कुहि, WHT; शक्तवाव, WHA, WHT WHAM, शक्त, way. Perf.
शशाक, शेकिथ or WHIT, शशाक; शेकिव, शेकथुस्, शेकतुस् ; शेकिम, रोक, रोकुस्.
ist Fut. शक्तास्मि. and Fut. श्यामि. Aor, शकम्, -कस्, -कत्; -काव,
“HAA, -कताम्; -काम, -कत, -कन्. Or अशकिषम्, -कौस्, -कीत्; सशकिष्व,
-क्िष्टम्, -्टाम्; अशकिष्म, -क्िष्ट, -किषुस्. Prec. शक्यासम्. Cond. सश्यम् .
Pass., Pres. gaa; Aor. 3rd sing. अशाकि, Caus., Pres. शाकयामि; Aor.
अशीशकम्. Des. शिशञकिषामि or शिक्षामि, -at (503). Freq. जञाशञकमे,
शाशकि or शाशकीमि. Part., Pres. शङ्खुवत् ; Atm. शङ्कुवान ; Past Pass.
wa; Past Indecl. शक्ता, -शक्य ; Fut. Pass. you, श॒ कनीय, we.
680. Root ऋध् (special stems =yt, WH, WH). Inf. सधिहुम् ‘to
prosper,’ ‘to flourish” ‘to increase.” Par. Pres. च्ध्ोमि, ऋध्ोषि,
apifa; WIG, WNIT, WHAT; yA, YY, ऋ्ुवन्ति. -117^ (251. a)
* J is also conjugated in the 4th class, Parasmai and Atmane (Pres. शक्यामि
&९., शाक्ये) ; but it may then be regarded as a Passive verb. See 461. 5.
+ This form of the Des. generally means ‘to learn,’ and is said by some to come
from a root शिष्.
९१2
300 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS V.
wry, सार्धम्, enity; ays, ay, आताम् ; सीन, aya, स्तुवन्
Pot. yay. Impv. sprafa, अधि, Wg; WATA, WANA, -ताम्;
ara, aya, अष्ुवनु. Perf. चने, WTA, ATTY; आनुधिवः, चानुधयुस्?
सानृधतुस् ; Bafa, argu, ary. 19४ Fud. स्थितास्मि. and Fut. wft-
ष्यामि. dor. आपिषम्, anifq, arifq; साधिष्व, साधिष्म्, -टाम्; प्रार्पिष्म,
wifig, आर्धिषुस्. Or आपम्, -पैस्, -ेत्; -पाव, &८. Prec. ऋध्यासम्.
Cond. चार्पि्यम्. Pass., Pres. =u; Aor. 3rd sing. धिं. Caus., Pres.
शषपेयामि ; dor. arfeuy. Des. अदिधिषामि or ङत्सौमि (503). Part., Pres.
sryan; Past Pass. ऋद्ध ; Past Indecl. after or ऋद्धा, -ऋृध्य ; Fut. Pass.
सअर्पितव्य, सर्धनीय, कृष्य.
681. Root चाप् (special stems साम्नो, arg, WIA). Inf. आापतुम् ‘to
obtain.? Par. Pres. sratfa, आप्नोषि, आप्नोति; STAIT, AIT, AAA;
सराप्रुमत्, Bra, आघ्रुवन्ति. Imps. Way, WANG, WAM; BY, AAT,
-ताम् ; WIAA, WAH, WATT. Pot. साघ्रुयाम्. Impv. साभ्रवानि, arafz,
SY; ANAT, YAR, -ताम् ; आप्रवाम, Bran, wT. Perf. साप,
आपिथ, आप; आपिव, आपयुस्, आपतुस् ; आपिम, खाप, खापुस्. ist Fut.
खाप्रास्मि. 2nd Fut. साप्स्यामि. Aor. सापम्, सापस्, आपत्; आआपाव, सापतम्,
“ATU; आपाम, सापत, आपन्. Prec. आ्राप्यासम्. Cond. साप्स्यम्. Pass.,
Pres. चाप्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. आपि. Caus., Pres. खापयामि ; Aor. सापिषम्.
Des. (503) Safa. Part., Pres. साप्रुवत् ; Past Pass. sa; Past Indecl.
arg, ara; Fut. Pass. स्राप्नव्य, प्रापनीय, साप्य.
a. Root अज् (special stems wat, WA, WAI). Inf. अशितुम् or अष्टम्
‘to obtain,’ ‘to enjoy,’ ‘to pervade.’ Atm. Pres. Wqa, WAR, WAT;
WAI, HPA, अश्रुवाते; WHA, waa, अश्ुवते. Imp/. srafa, साश्रुयास्,
Saran; आश्रुवहि, आश्रुवायाम्, आश्रुवाताम् ; साश्रुमहि, साश्रुध्वम्, साश्रुवत. Pod.
अश्रुवीय. 100४. Wal, WTA, TY; खश्नवावरे, चश्ुवायाम्, अश्रुवाताम् ;
wae, सश्ुध्यम्, अश्रुवताम्. Perf. (367. c) आनशे, आनशिषे or सानक्षे,
आनशे; wsrafyae or खानश्वरे (371), सानशाये, Taya; सानशषिमहे or
आनरमहे, आनशिध्वे or अनद्दे, आनशिरे. 15 Fut. whgare or were.
ond Fut, सशिष्य or wet. Aor. साधि, साष्टास्, Ste; Sreafe, wrerany,
आसाताम्; साष्महि, साग्ध्वम्, area. Or आशिषि, साशिष्टास्, साशिष्ट;
आशिष्वहि, सशि पायाम्, आशिषाताम् ; साशिष्महि, साशिध्वम्, साशिषत. Prec.
अशिषीय or wefta. Cond. srfgrat or चाये. Pass., Pres. wya; Aor.
grd sing. आशि" Caus., Pres. साशयामि ; dor. साशिशम्. Des. सशिशिषे
Freq. अज्ञाश्ये (511. ०). Part., Pres. wyatt; Past Pass. अशित्त or
wv; Past Indecl. afqrat or wet, -wya; Fut. Pass. सशितव्य or सष्टव्य,
waa, सार्य.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS VIII. 301
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE EIGHTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 353.
682. Root कृ Avi. Infin. aga kartum, ‘to do’ (355).
ParasMAl-paDA. Present Tense, ‘1 do?
करोमि karomi कु्वैस् * kurvas कुमेस् * kurmas
करोषि karoshi कुहू यस् kuruthas FRA ५४100
करोति karoti ‘FRAT kurutas water * kurvanti
Imperfect, ‘I was doing,’ or ‘I did.’
WATAA akaravam waa akurva (73) wea akurma (73)
अकरोस् akaros WHRAA akurutam WHA akuruta
अकरोत् akarot WHRATA akurutdm BRIT akurvan
Potential, ‘1 may do,’ &c.
कुथान् * kurydm waa kurydva war kurydma
कुयेोस् kuryds कुयोतम् kurydtam कुयोत kurydta
कुयात् kurydt कुयोताम् kurydtdm waa kuryus
Imperative, ‘Let me do,’ &c.
करवाणि karavéni करवाव karavdva करवाम karavdma
FS kuru करुरूतम् kurutam FRA kuruta
करोतु karotu FRA kurutdm कुवैनु * kurvantu
Perfect, ‘1 did, or ‘I have done’
WAIL ८८/40 (368) चकुव dakriva AHR cakrima
WHE dakartha AYA dakrathus चक्र ८०६१८
चकार ८४40 चक्रतुस् cakratus TAT dakrus
First Future, ‘I will do.’
BATA kartdsmi कतेसवस् 11111111 किस्मस् kartdsmas
Raa kartdsi करीष्यस् kartésthas करस्य hartdstha
कते kartd ware kartdrau कारस् kartdras
Second Future, ‘T shall १०.
करिष्यामि karishydmi करिष्यावस् karishydvas करिष्यामस् karishydmas
करिष्यसि karishyasi करिष्ययस् karishyathas करिष्यथ karishyatha
करिष्यति karishyati करिष्यतस् karishyatas करिष्यन्ति karishyanti
* waa, कुम्मैस्, FAIA, &c., would be equally correct ; see 73. An obsolete form
कमि for कणेमि.15 found in Epic poetry.
302 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS VIII.
अकार्षम् akdérsham
अकार्षीस् akdrshts
अकार्षीत् akdrshtt
Aorist, ‘I did.’
wares akdrshva
aE akdrshtam
अकाशम् akdrshtém
Wart akdrshma
Wale akdrshta
अकाधस् akdrshus
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May 1 do.’
क्रियासम् kriydésam TRATES kriydsva क्रियास्म kriydsma
क्रियास् kriyds क्रियास्तम् kriydstam क्रियास्त kriydsta
क्रियात् kriydt क्रियास्ताम् kriydstdém क्रियासुस् kriydsus
Conditional, ‘I should do.’
अकरिष्यम् akarishyam अकरिष्यावं akarishydva करिष्याम akarishydma
अकरिष्यस् akarishyas अकरिष्यतम् akarishyatam अकरिष्यत् akarishyata
अकरिष्यत् akarishyat अकरिष्यताम् akarishyatdm अकरिष्यन् akarishyan
683. ArMANE-PADA, Present Tense, ‘I do.’
कुर्वे kurve (73) gaz kurvahe gre kurmahe
FSA kurushe कुवैये kurvdthe FRA kurudhve
war kurute कुवैत kurvdte gat kurvate
- Imperfect, ‘I was doing,’ or ^ 1 did.’
wate akurvi (73) अकुवैहि akurvahi waafe akurmahi
अकुरूयास् ०४५५1८5 RITA akurvdthdm WHRAA akurudhvam
WFR akuruta अकुवैताम् [11/11 wear akurvata
Potential, ‘I may do.’
कुर्वीय kurviya कुवीविहि kurvtoahi कुर्वीमहि kurvimahi
कुर्वीयास् kurvithds कुर्वीयायाम् kurvtydthdm कुवीध्वम् kurvidhvam
कुर्वीति kurotta कुर्वीयाताम् kurvtydtdm कुर्वाणन् kurviran
Imperative, ‘Let me १०.
करवै karavai करवावहे karavdvahai करवाम karavdmahat
FRA kurushva कुवैथाम् kurvdthém FRA kurudhvam
FMF kurutdm eae kurvdtém कुवेताम् kurvatdm
Perfect, ‘T did,’ or ‘I have done.
चक्रे ८८१९ चकृवहे éakrivahe चकृमहे éakrimahe
चकृषे éakrishe WARTS dakrdthe IHS cakridhve
चक्रे dakre WRIT éakrdte क्रिरे cakrire
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III, CLASS VIII. 303
First Future, ‘I will do.
कीरे kartdhe कखे kartdsvahe. ATS kartdsmahe
कसे kartdse कासाय hartdsdthe कीश्वे kartddhve
कौ kartd कीरो kartdrau RAT kartdras
Second Future, ‘1 shall do,’
करिष्ये karishye करिष्यावहे karishydvahe करिष्यामहे karishydmahe
करिष्यसे karishyase करिष्ये karishyethe करिष्यध्वे karishyadhve
करिष्यते karishyate करिष्येते karishyete करिष्यन्ते karishyante
Aorist, ‘I did?
अकृषि akrishi | अकृष्वहि akrishvahi wR akrishmahi
सकृ यात् akrithds सकृषायाम् akrishdthdm WHA akridhvam
अकुत akrita अकुषातान् akrishdtdm WRIA akrishata
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May I do,’
कृषीय krishiya कृषी वहि krishtoahi कृषीमटि krishimahi
FAVA krishéshthds कृषीयास्थाम् krishiydsthém कुषीश्यम् krishédhvam
कृषीष्ट krishishta कृषीयास्ताम् krishtydstdm कृषीरन् krishéran
Conditional, ‘1 should do,’
सकरिष्ये akarishye अक्ररिष्यावहि akarishydévahi अकरिष्यामहि akarishydmahi
अकरिष्ययास् akarishyathds सकरिप्पेयाम् akarishyethdm अकरिष्यध्वम् akarishyadhvam
अ करिष्यत akarishyata अकरिप्येताम् akarishyetdm सकरिष्यन्त akarishyanta
Pass., Pres. क्रिये; Aor. 3rd sing. सकारि (yor). Caus., Pres.
कारयामि; Aor. अचीकरम्. Des. faatitfx, -षे (502). Freq. चेक्रीये,
चकैर्मिं or चरिकनिं or चरीकमिं or wattfa or aftattin or चरीकरीमि (Pan.
vil. 4, 92). Part., Pres. gaq; Atm. garg; Past Pass. कृत ; Past
Indecl. कृचा, -Fa; Fut. Pass. ata, करणीय, काये.
684. Only nine other roots are generally given in this class. Of these the
commonest is W ‘to stretch,’ conjugated at 583. The others are, FW “to go,’
छण् and Fea ‘to kill’ or ‘to hurt,’ YM ‘to shine,’ FM ‘to eat grass,’ मन् ‘to
imagine,’ Atm.; चन् ‘to ask,’ सत् ‘to give.” As these end in nasals, their
conjugation resembles that of verbs of cl. 5 at 675; thus—
685. Root wm (special stems क्णो, AY). Inf. afugqy ‘to kill?
‘to hurt.” Par. and Atm. Pres. quifa, सणोषि, सणोति; छषणुवस्, &c.
Atm. सरवे, WY, &c. Impf. waaay, अक्षणोस्, &c. Atm. safe.
Pot. स्षणुयाम्. Atm. सृरीय, Impv. सृणवानि. Atm. qua. Perf.
चकछषाण, wT, चकछ्षाण; चक्षणिव, चक्षणथुस्, चकछणतुस् ; चक्षणिम, चण, च्ष-
qe. Atm. चक्षे, चक्षणिषे, TAT; चघिवहे, WRITE, चक्षणाते; च्छणिमहे,
304 ‘CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS IX.
wafaa, wafut. ist Fut. afamfe. Atm. श्रणिताहे. and Fut.
afoufa. Atm. afaa. dor. अक्षणिषम्, -णीस्, -wiq; weafarr, -णिष्टम्?
-्टाम्; अक्षणिष्म, -शिष्ट, -णिषुस्. Atm. wafofa, अश्षणिष्टास् or WATT
(424. ९), सक्षणिष्ट or wea; अक्षणिष्वहि, -णिषायाम्, -णिषाताम् ; सक्षणिष्महि,
-fasay, -णिषत. Prec. शण्यासम्. Atm. चछ्णिषीय. Cond. सघणिष्म्,.
Atm. सल्लणिष्ये. Pass., Pres. ywt; Aor. 3rd sing. सक्षणि. Caus., Pres.
araara; Aor. सचिक्षणम्. Des. चिक्षणिषामि, -षे. Freq. vam, taf.
Part., Pres. सरवत् ; Atm. quara; Past Pass. qa; Past Indecl. सत्वा
or ऽक्षणित्वा, -qa; Fut. Poss. afura, सणनीय, aw.
EXAMPLES OF PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE NINTH CLASS,
EXPLAINED AT 356.
686. Root यु yu. Infin. यवितुम् yavitum, ‘to join, ‘to mix.’
Parasmai-papa. Present Tense, ‘I join.’
युनामि yundmi युनी वस् yuntvas युनीमस् yuntmas
युनासि yundsi युनीयस् yuntthas युनीथं yunttha
युनाति 1) युनीतस् yunttas युनन्ति yunanti
Imperfect, ‘I was joining,’ or ‘I joined.’
यु नाम् ayundm अयुनीव ayuntoa सयुनीम ayunima
अयुनास् ayunds सयुनीतम् ayunttam सयुनीत ayunita
सयुनात् ayundt अयुनीताम् ayunttdm अयुनन् ayunan
Potential, ‘I may join.’
gata yuntydm युनीयाव yuntydva युनीयाम yuntyéma
गुनीयास् yuntyds युनी यातम् yuntydtam युनीयात yuntydta
युनीयात् yuntydt युनीयाताम् yuntydtdm युनीयुस् yuntyus
Imperative, ‘ Let me join,’
युनानि yundni युनाव yundva, युनाम yundma
gutta yuntht युनीतम् yunttam युनीते / / 11
FAG yundtu युनीताम् yunttdm युनन्तु yunantu
Perf. युयाव, gufra or युयोध, युयाव ; युयुषिव, युयुवणुस्, -वतुस् ; युयुषिम,
युयुव, युुवुस्. ist Fut. यवितास्मि or योतास्मि +. and Fut. यविष्यामि. Aor.
अयाविषम्, -नीस्, -वीत्; अयाविष्व, -विष्टम्, -विषम् ; सयाषिष्म, -विषट, -पिषृस्.
Prec, यूयासम्. Cond. सयविष्यम्.
* Some authorities give योत्ास्मि &०, as the only form. See Laghu-kaum. 724.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III, CLASS 1X, 305
6847. Armane-papa. Present Tense, ‘I join.’
युने yune gataz ४५१६४८१९ युनीमहे yuntmahe
युनीषे yunishe युनाये yundthe gaia yunidhve
युनीते yuntte युनाते yundte yaa yunate
Imperfect, ‘I was joining,’ or ‘I joined.’
अयुनि ayuni अयुनीवहि ayuntoahi अयुनीमटि ayunimahi
अयुनीयास् ०५०१५ अयुनायाम् ayundthdm — अयुनीश्वम् ayuntdhvam
अयुनीत ayuntta । सगुनाताम् ayundidm यु नत ayunata
Potential, ‘I may join”
युनीय yuntya युनीवहि yuntoahi युनीमहि yuntmahi
भुनी यास् yuntthds युंनीयायाम् yuntydthdm युनीध्वम् yuntdhoam
युनीत णय युनीयाताम् yuntydtdm युनीरन् yuntran
Imperative, ‘ Let me join.’
युने (1) युनावहे 1 1.11 qame yundmahai
युनीष्व yuntshoa युनाचाम् yundthim युनीश्वम् yuntdhvam
युनीताम् yunttdm युनाताम् yundtdm ` युनताम् yunatdém
Perf. aq%, युयुषिषे, Waa; युयुविवहे, युयु वाये, gam; युयुविमहे, युयुषिश्वे
णय द, ygfat. rst 7४. यविताहे. and 72. यविष्ये. Aor. अयविषि, -विष्टास्,
-विष्ट; अयविष्वहि, सयविषायाम्, -पाताम् ; अयविष्महि, -विध्म् or -fagn, -विषत.
Prec. यविषीय. Cond, अयविष्ये. Pass., Pres. qa; 1st Fut. याविताहे ;
Aor. 3rd sing. अयावि. Caus., Pres. यावयामि ; Aor. अयीयवम्. Des.
युयूषामि or यियविषाभि. Freq. aaa, योयोमि or योयवीमि. Part., Pres,
युनत्; Atm, gata; Past Pass. ga; Past Indecl. युत्वा, -यु्य ; Fut. Pass.
यवितव्य, यवनीय, याव्य or यव्य.
OTHER EXAMPLES OF CL. ¢ IN THE ORDER OF THEIR FINAL LETTERS.
688. Root ज्ञा (special stems जाना, जानी, जान्, 361). Inf. ज्ञातुम् ‘to
know.’ Par. and Atm. Pres. जानामि, जानासि, जानाति; जानीवस्, जानीयस्,
जानीतस्; . जानीमस्, जानीथ, जानन्ति. Atm. जाने, जानीषे, जानीते; जानी वहे,
RATS, जानाते; जानीम, नान्वे, जानते. 1/9. सनानाम्, अजानास्, अजानात्;
SAAT, अनानीतम्, अनानीताम् ; अनानीम, सनानीत, खनानन्. Atm. सनानि,
अनानीयास्, अजानीत ; सजानी वहि, SAAT, जानाताम् ; सनानीमहि, सना-
नीध्वम्, अजानत. Pot. जानीयाम्. Atm. जानीय. Impv. जानानि, जानीहि;
जानातु; जानाव, जानीतम्, जानीताम्; जानाम, जानीत, जानन्तु. Atm. जाने,
जानीष्व, जानीताम्; ATATAS, जानायाम्, जानाताम्; जानामहे, जानीध्वम्, जानताम् .
Perf. (373) जज्ञौ, जक्ञिय or WIT, AN; जक्षिव, ATYA, जज्तुस् ; जक्षिम, जज्ञ,
age. Atm. जज्ञे क्षिपे, जज्ञे; TANTS, TATE, जज्ञाते; जक्षिमरे, TNA, जिरि.
ist Fut. ज्ञातास्मि. and Fut. ज्ञास्यामि. Aor. (433) अज्ञासिषम्, सज्ञासीस्,
RY “
306 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS IX.
अज्ञासीत्; सन्ञासिष्व, सन्ञासिष्टम्, -्टाम्; अज्ञासिष्म, -fae, -सिषुस्. Atm, अत्ञासि,
SHAN, ANA; अन्ञाखटि, AAAI, -साताम्; WATS, AAA, ATA.
Prec. जञेयासम् or ज्ञायासम्. Atm. ज्ञासीय. Cond. सज्ञास्यम्. Atm. अज्ञास्ये,
Pass., Pres. (465. ¢) ज्ञाये ; Perf. जज्ञे (473); 1st Fut. ज्ञाताहे or ज्ञायिताहे
(474); and Fut. ara or ज्ञायिष्ये ; Aor. 3rd sing. चज्ञायि. Caus., Pres.
ज्ञापयामि or ज्ञपयामि ; Aor. अजिज्ञपम्, Des. जिज्ञासे (-सामि, Epic). Freq.
जाज्ञाये, जाज्ञामि or जाज्ञेमि. Part., Pres. जानत्; Atm. जानान ; Past Pass.
ज्ञात ; Past Indecl. ज्ञात्वा, -ज्ञाय ; Fut. Pass. ज्ञातव्य, जानीय, ज्ञेय.
689. Root क्री (special stems क्रीणा, AUT, AIT, 358. ०). Inf. क्रेतुम् ‘to
buy.” Par. and Atm. Pres. क्रीणामि, क्रीणासि, क्रीराति; त्रीणी वस्, क्रीणीयस्,
क्रीणीतस् ; क्रीणीमस्, क्रीणीच, क्रीणन्ति. Atm. क्रीणे, क्रीणीषे, क्रीणीते; क्रीणीवहे,
क्रीणाथे, क्रीणाते; क्रीणीमहे, क्रीणीध्वे, क्रीणते. 1 सक्रीणाम्, सक्रीणास्,
सक्रीणात्; Batata, सक्रीणीतम्, सक्रीणीताम्; सक्रीणीम, क्रीणीत, अक्रीणन्.
Atm. watfu, अक्रीणीयास्, सक्रीणीत; सक्रीणीवहि, सक्रीणायाम्, अक्रीणाताम्;
खक्रीणीमहि, सक्रीणीश्वम्, क्रीत. Pot. क्रीणीयाम्. Atm. क्रीणीय. Impv.
क्रीणानि, क्रीणीहि, क्रीणातु; क्रीणाव, क्रीणीतम्, क्रीणीताम्; क्रीणाम, क्रीणीत, क्रीणन्तु
Atm. ata, क्रीणीष्व, क्रीणीताम् ; क्रीणाव, storm, ator; क्रीणामहे,
क्रीणीध्वम्, क्रीणताम्. Perf. (374. ९) चिक्राय, चिक्रयिथ or faa, चिक्राय;
चिक्रियिव, चिक्रियथुस्, चिक्रियदुस् ; चिक्रियिम, चिक्रिय, चिक्रिुस्. Atm. चिक्रिये,
चिक्रियिषे, चिक्रिये; चिक्रियिवरे, चिक्रियाये, -याते; चिक्रियिमहे, चिक्रियिश्वे or -2,
चिक्रियिरे. ist Fut. Rafe. Atm. क्रेतारे. ond Fut. क्ष्यामि. Atm.
Ba. Aor. सक्रेषम्, -षीस्, -षीत्; FET, -षटम्, -ष्टाम् ; WAH, -ट, -षुस्.
Atm. wate, -ष्टास्, -एट; warafe, -षाणाम्, -षाताम् ; अक्रेष्महिः सक्रेदुम्, सक्रेषत.
Prec. क्री यासम्. Atm. क्रेषीय. Cond. waa. Atm. wa. Pass,
Pres. क्रीये; Aor. 3rd sing. warfa. Caus., Pres. areata; Aor. सचि क्रपम् .
Des. चिक्रीषाभि, -षे. Freq. Sata, चेक्रेमि or चेक्रयीमि. Part., Pres.
क्रणीत् 5 Atm. क्रीणान; Past Pass. क्रीत ; Past Indecl. क्रीत्वा, -क्रीय ;
Fut. Pass, क्रेतव्य, क्रयणीय, करेय.
690. Like # is प्री ‘to ]016386. Pres. प्रीणामि ; Atm. wig. Caus.,
Pres, प्रीणयामि or प्राययामि ; Aor. खपिप्रणम् or खपिप्रीणम् * Des. पिप्रीषामि.
Freq. पेप्रीये.
691. चर् (special stems Bal, Bat, BA, 358), ‘to cut,’ follows चू,
‘to purify,’ at 583; thus, Pres, तुनामि ; Atm. ea. Pot. Baty;
Atm, ata. Perf. लुलाव; Atm. eye. 19 Fut. ल्वित्तास्मि. and
Fut. लविष्यामि. Aor. सल्ाविषम्.
692. Root बन्ध् (special stems wr, बधी, TH). Inf. बन्डुम् ‘to bind.’
* Forster gives wfamaa ; Westergaard, सपिप्रीणम्,.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS IX. 307
Par. Pres. बद्नामि, anfa, वध्नाति ; antag, वध्रीयस्, बध्रीतस्; बधीमस्, बभधीय,
बभन्ति. Imps. wary, सवध्नास्, Wau; स बध्रीव, wantay, ताम् ; ware,
अबध्नीत, wary. Pot. anita. Impv. वभ्रानि, बधान (357. 2), वधात ; वधाव,
वक्रीतम्, -ताम्; AWA, वधीत, बधन्तु. Perf. बवन्ध, वबन्धिय or Wa" or बवन्ध
(298. a), बबन्ध ; बवन्धिव, ववन्धयुस्, way; बबन्धिम, बवन्ध, बवन्धुस्.
Ist Fut. बन्द्वास्मि. and Fut. भन्स्यामि (299. a). Aor. सभान्त्सम् (299. 2),
अभान्त्सीस्, SAE; सभानंख, अवान्डम्, TIPS ; सभानेस्म, FIPS, TIT.
Pree. बध्यासम्. Cond. अभन्त्यम्. Pass., Pres. (469) वध्ये. Caus., Pres.
बन्धयामि; dor. अचवन्धम्. Des. विभन्त्सामि (299.0). Freq. बावध्ये, arafaa
बावन्धीमि. Part., Pres awa; Past Pass. बद्ध ; Past Indecl. बद्धा, -वध्य;
Fut. Pass. wea, बन्धनीय, Ta
693. Root aq (special stems ग्रधा TY, TY, 360). Inf. ग्रन्यितुम्
‘to string,’ ‘to tie” Par. Pres. garfa ग्रयासि, गरथाति; ग्रघीवस्, ग्रयीयस्,
ayy; ग्रयीमस्, ग्रयीय, qatar. 1001८ अग्रम्, BTM, सग्रयात्; सग्रथीव,
Saya, -ताम्; saya, ग्र थीत, चग्रयुन्. 7०८. ग्रघीयाम्. Impv.qafa,qaa
(257.¢), Ta; ग्रघाव, WHAM, -ताम्; Ta, ग्रथीत, ग्रुनु. Perf. (375.4)
जग्रन्य *, जग्रन्थिथ or ग्रेथिय, जग्रन्य * ; जग्रन्यिव or ग्रोथिव, जग्रम्यथुस् or TTY,
जग्न्यतुस् or ग्रेयतुस् ; जग्रन्थिम or ग्रेथिम, जग्रन्य or ZU, AYR or WIR
1st Fut. ग्न्वितास्मि- and 72. ग्रन्विष्यामि. Aor. अग्रन्यिषम्, -न्यीस्, -न्यीत्,
&९. Pree. ग्रथ्यासम्. Cond. saferan. Pass., 7/8. (469) ग्रथ्ये. Caus.,
Pres. ग्रन्ययामि ; Aor. अजग्रन्यम्. Des. जिग्रन्यिषाभि. Freq. arg,
warafa, जंग्रन्यीभि. Part., Pres. ग्रथुत् ; Past Pass. faa; Past Indecl.
fart or afar, -ग्रस्य ; Fut. Pass. qfeara, ्रन्यनीय, ग्रन्थ्य.
a, Like ग्रन्थ् is conjugated च्रन्य् ‘to loosen,’ मन्थ् ‘to churn,’
694. Root घुम्] (special stems छन्ना, qut, wy). Inf छोनभितुम् ‘to
agitate.” Par. Pres. qpifa, सुभ्नासि, सुश्नाति ; सुभ्नीवस्, सुभ्रीयस्, ending;
छुभ्नीमस्, anita, सुभ्रन्ति. Inpf aay, ससुभ्नास्, FET; Wats, अशुभ्रीतम्,
-ताम्; aA, wala, waa. Pot. ata. Impv. सुभ्नानि, चुभाण
(357. ०» 58), Bag; Wars, qeiny, -ताम्; qua, ain, away. Perf.
Wart, qfira, wa; Tata, चुक्भयुस्, -भतुस्; चुषुभिम, aap, wT
ist Fut. atfamfe. and 7. सोनिष्पाभि, Aor. असषोभिषम्, -षीस्, -षीत्, &c.
Or WANA, -भस्, -भत्; -भाव, AAA, -भताम्; -भाम, -भत, -भन् Prec waar,
Cond, अद्लोभिष्यम्. Pass., Pres. ya; Aor. 3rd sing. watfa. Caus.,
Pres. qvrafa; Aor, wy. Des. qatfrafa or चुखुभिषाभि. Freq.
* Some authorities give the option of जग्राय in the rst and 3rd of the Perf.
Compare 839.
+ Also cl. 4, Intransitive, “to be agitated ;' Pres. भ्यामि > 612.
Rr2
308 CONJUGATION OF VERBS.—GROUP III. CLASS IX.
शोष्य, deff (3rd sing. sretfar). Part., Pres. quqs Past Pass.
wat or सुभित ; Past Indecl. gam or wfarat, -epa; Fut. Pass. attra,
wrrata (58), wa.
695. Root स्तम्भ् * (special stems WUT, WUT, WH, 360). Inf. स्तम्मितुम्
‘to stop, ‘to support.’ Par. Pres. स्तक्नामि ; like सुन्, 694. Impf.
अस्तम्नाम्. Pot. erirarg. . 19८. स्तश्रानि, स्तभान (357. @), Bag; SATA,
स्तश्रीतम्, -ताम्; स्तभ्नाम, स्तप्नीत, wang. Perf. तस्तम्भ, wafera, तस्तम्भ ;
तस्तम्मिव, तस्तम्भ युस्, -म्भतुस् ; तस्तम्भिम, तस्तम्भ, TATA. 14८ Fut. स्तम्मितास्मि.
and Fut. स्तम्मिष्यामि. Aor. अस्तम्भिषम्, -म्भीस्, -म्भीत्, & ०. Or wena,
AA, -भत् ; -भाव, -भतम्, -भताम् ; -भाम, -भत, भन्. Prec. eraray. Cond.
अस्तम्निष्यम्. Pass., Pres. a. Caus., Pres. स्तम्भयानि ; Aor. अतस्तम्नम्.
Des. तिस्तम्भिषामि. Freq. arena, तास्तम्भूमि or तास्तम्भीमि. Part., Pres.
स्तभ्नत् ; Past Pass. wa; Past Indecl. wen or स्तम्भित्वा ; Fut. Pass.
स्तम्भित्तव्य, स्तम्भनी य, wea.
696. Root अज् † (special stems wat, wat, wa). Inf. अशितुम् ‘to
eat.” Par. Pres, warfa, warfa, wafa; wate, wataaq, सश्रीतस्;
sata, sata, wate. 79८ साश्राम्, way, Bray; areata, आश्रीतम्,
“a; Bata, sTata, ara. Pot. water. Impv. saifa, खञ्चान (357-2),
WAY; Wala, WAAR, -ताम्; FATA, अश्नीत, wag. Perf. साशञ, साशिय,
आश; WI, AMIR, साशतुस्; सआशिम, BY, TYR. 1st Fut. सशितास्मि.
and Fut. अशिष्यामि. Aor. आशिषम्, साशीस्, साशीत्; आशिष्व, साशिष्टम्;
aifgem; साशिष्म, साशिष्ट, आाशिषुस्. Prec. अश्यासम्. Cond. सशिष्यम्.
Pass., Pres. श्ये. Caus., Pres. srgaifa; Aor. सशिशम्. Des. सशि-
fyrafa: Freq. अज्ञाश्ये (511. a). Part., Pres. way; Past Pass. अशित;
Past Indecl, अशित्वा, -खङय ; Fut. Pass. अशितव्य, सशनीय, By.
; 697. Root fais (special stems farat, farat, fara). Inf. केशिहुम् or
केटम् ‘toharass” Par. Pres. faratfa; like wy, 696. Impf. wfgrara,
सक्जिश्नास्, sfgram; sfaeita, सक्किश्नीतम्, ताम्; अक्किश्रीम, सक्किश्नीतः सक्कि्चन्.
Pot. क्िष्रीयाम्, Impv. farmfa, किज्ञान, &c. Perf. foaq, चिक्रेशिय or
faae, faag; चिक्िशिव or चिक्किश्च (371), fafagrqa, -शतुस्; fafafya
or fafagn, चिक्र, चिक्िशुस्. rst Ful. केशितास्मि or Heri. 2nd Fut.
क्ेशिष्यामि or केस्याभि. Aor. wafyan, -शीस्, -शीत्; wafyes, -शिष्टम्,
-शिष्टाम् ; satya, -शिष्टः -शिषुस्. Or अक्किक्षम्, -छस्, -छत्; - साव, -सतम्,
-छताम्; “ATH, -सत, -WA (439). Prec. fayataa. Cond. WaT AR or
ame. Pass., Pres. fay; Aor. 3rd sing. wafy. Caus., Pres. केशयाभि;
Aor. afafagn. Des. चिक्किशिषामि or विक्ेशिषामि or fafgeria. Freq.
* This root also follows cl. 5; thus, 7165. स्तश्नोमि. See 675.
+ This is a different root from WM cl. 5. See 682.
CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 309
Sfayy, Vaya. Part., Pres.faraq; Past 7455. कष्ट orfafgra; Past Indecl.
faigt or fafgrat, -faga; Fut. 72055. कशितव्य or FEU, केशनी य, केश्य.
698. Root पुष् (special stems yam, पुष्णी, gum). Inf. पोषितुम् ‘to
nourish” Par. Pres. पुष्णामि, पुष्णासि, पुष्णाति; पुष्णीवस्, पुष्णीयस्,
पुष्णीतस् ; पुष्णीमस्, पुष्णीय, पुष्णन्ति. Impf. खपुष्णाम्, सपुष्णास्, सपुप्णात्;
सपुष्णीव, अपुष्णीतम्, -ताम् ; खपुष्णीम, swith, खपुष्न्. Pot. पुष्णी याम्.
Impv. पुष्णानि, पुषाण (357. ५); पुष्णातु ; पुष्णाव, पुष्णीतम्, -ताम् ; पुष्णाम, Gute,
पुष्णन्तु. For the rest, see पुष् cl. 4 at 621.
699. Root ag (special stems गृ हा, गृही, Tea, 3593 see 399. 2).
Inf. ग्रहीतुम् ‘to take” Par. and Atm. Pres. Tefa, Teqtfa, गृहतातिः
TENA, गृ हरी थस्" गृ ह्तीतस् ; TEA, गृ हीथ, गृ हन्ति. Atm. गृहत, गृ तोषे,
गृहीते; TRAN, गुहाये, गु हाने; TEAR, Tete, गृ हते. -1/2^ गृ हताम्,
अगु हतस्, WT Rats RTS, अगृह्ीतम्, अगु Rta; सगृदतीम, Welz,
wet. Atm. wife, Teta, अगृहीत; अगृहतीवहि, सगुहतायाम्,
अगु हताताम्; अगृ हीह, खगृ ह्रीश्वम्, अगु. Pot. qeqtary. Atm. zara.
Impv. गृहानि, TAU, Teas गुद्ताव, गुही तम्, गृहीताम् ; गृह्ताम, गृहीत,
Teg. Atm. Te, Tats, Tet; Tele, TRAN, गृद्ताताम् ;
Teas, गृ हीश्वम्, गृह्रताम्. Perf: (384) जग्राह, wafea, जग्राह ; whey,
WISIN, WTA; Wyler, जगृह, जगृंहुस्. Atm. जगृहे, wifes, wpe; जगृहि-
वहे, Wea, जगृहाते ; जगु हिमे, wyfesd or -2, जगृहिरे. 1! 72. ग्रही तास्मि
| (399. a). Atm. ग्रही तादे. ond Fut. ग्रहीष्यामि. Atm. qete. Aor.
अग्रदीषम्, WI, सग्रहीत्; सग्रहीष्व, सग्रहीष्म्, सग्रहीष्टाम् ; अग्रहीष्म, खग्रहीष्ट,
अग्ररीषुस्. Atm. अग्रटीषि, सग्रहीष्टास्, सग्रहीषट; अग्रहीष्वहि, सग्रहीषायाम्,
अग्ररीषाताम्; सग्रहीप्महि, ग्रहीध्वम्, सग्रहीषत- 7०८. गुद्यासम्. Atm. zetia,
Cond. खग्रहीष्यम्, 4४7. अग्रहीष्ये. Pass., Pres. qa; Perf. जगृहे ; 1st Fut.
ग्रहीताहे or ग्राहिताहे ; 2nd Fut. zeta or gifea; Aor. 3rd sing. सग्राहि,
ard pl. खग्रीषत or श्रग्राहिषत. Caus., Pres, ग्राहयामि ; Aor. सजिग्रहम्
Des. जिधुक्षामि, -2 (503). Freq. जरीगृदये, ज ग्रचि (3rd sing. जाग्रादि) or
ज्ाग्ररीमि (771). Part., 2८5. गृह्तत् ; Atm. year; Past Pass. गृहीत ;
Past Indecl. गृहीत्वा, -Ta; Fut. 2055. ग्रही तव्य, ग्रहणीय, ग्रा.
EXAMPLES OF PASSIVE VERBS, EXPLAINED AT 467.
700. Root दा dé (465). Infin. दातुम् datum, ‘to be given.’
Present Tense, ‘I am given.’
दीये diye दी यावे diydvahe STATA 2८१००१९
दयसे diyase दीयेथे dtyethe alas dfyadhve
दीयते diyate दीयते diyete दीयन्ते déyante
310 CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS.
Imperfect, ‘I was given.’
। Weta adiye wctarate adtydvahi अदी यामि adtydmahi
सदीययास् adiyathds =, अदी येाम् adtyethdm = सदी यथ्चम् adiyadhvam
अदीयत adfyata अदीयेताम् 1.111.111 अदी यन्त udiyanta
Potential, ‘I may be given.’
दीयेय diyeya दीयेवहि diyevahi ataate diyemahi
दीयेथास् diyethds दीयेयाथाम् diyeydthim दौयेश्वम् diyedhvam
दीयेत diyeta दीयेयाताम् dtyeydtdém दीयेरन् diyeran
Imperative, ‘ Let me be given.’
दये déyai दीयावरे déydvahai दीीयामरै déydmahai
दी यस्व diyasva दीयेथाम् diyethim दीयश्वम् diyadhvam
दीयताम् diyatém दयिताम् déyetdm दीयन्ताम् ०४०५८
Perfect, ‘I have been given.’
ददे dade ददिवहे dadivahe ददिमहे dadimahe
ददिषे dadishe ददाये daddthe ददिश्वे dadidhve
द्द् dade ददाति daddte afer dadire
: First Future, ‘1 shall be given.’
दाताहे ddtche or दातासहे ditdsvahe ATH ddtdsmahe, &८.
[त ddyitdhe दायितताख्हे ddyitdsvahe दायितास्महे ddyitdsmake, &०.
Second Future, ‘I shall be given,
दास्ये ddsye or दास्यावहे ०८०४००7८ दास्यामहे ddsydmahe, &c.
{ar ddyishye दायिष्यावहे ddyishydvahe दायिष्यामरे ddyishydmahe, &c.
Aorist, ‘I was given,’
safefa adishi or अदिष्वहि adishvahi ऋरिष्महि adishmahi
| addyishi सदायिष्वटि addyishvahi सदा पिष्महि addyishmahi
अदिास् adithds or अदिष्रायाम् adishdthém अदिदृम् adidhvam
ioe addyishthds SEW ARTA addyishdthdm खदापिध्वम् addyidhvam (-दुम्)
अदिषातताम् adishdtdm सदिषत adishata
अदायिषाताम् addyishdtdm सखद्ायिषत addyishata
Prec. दासीय or दायिषीय, & ८. Cond. सद्ास्ये or खदायिष्ये.
अद्] यि 00/12, itwas given, |
701. Root कृ kri (467). Infin. करम् kartum, ‘to be made’ or * done.’
Present Tense,‘I am made.” | Imperfect, ‘I was made.’
क्रियि क्रियावहे frame | सक्रिये सक्रियावहि खक्रियामहि
क्रियते frat faut | सक्रियथास् सक्रियेयाम् सअक्रियभ्वम्
क्रियते क्रते क्रियन्ते | सक्रियत सक्रियेताम् सक्रियन
CONJUGATION OF CAUSAL VERBS, 311
Potential, ‘1 may be made? Perfect.
क्रियेय क्रियेवहि क्रियेमहि | चक्रे चकृवहे चकृमहे
क्रियेथास् क्रियेयाथाम् तक्रियेध्वम् | चकृषे चक्राये चकु
क्रियेत क्रियेयाताम् क्रियेरन् | चक्रे चक्राते चक्रिरे
Imperative, ‘Let me be made.’ First Future.
क्रिये क्रियावरे क्रियाम | [करीरे कगिसखरे कस्म, &c.
fave क्रियेयाम् क्रियध्नम् i कारिताहे काणिताखहे कारितास्महे, &c.
क्रियताम् क्रियताम् क्रियन्ताम् | Second Fut, करिष्ये or कारिष्यि, &e.
Aorist.
BING. DUAL PLURAL.
अकृषि or सकारिषि | सकुृष्वहि or खकारिष्वहि | अकृष्महि or सकारिष्महि
BHI or खकारिष्ठास् | कुषााम् or सकारिषायाम् | सकृदुम् or सकारिभ्वम् (-दृम्)
अकारि ‘it was done’ | खकृषाताम् or ख कारिषाताम् | अकृषत or सकारिषत
Pree. कृषीय or कारिषीय. Cond. खकप्प्यि or अकारि.
702. Example of a Passive from a root ending in a consonant :
Root युज् ४. Infin. योक्तुम् yoktum, ‘to be fitting,’
Pres. युज्ये, युज्यसे, युज्यते, ९०९. Inpf. अयुज्ये, चयुज्यथास्, अयुज्यत, ९८.
Pot. युज्येय. Imp. युज्ये, युज्य, युज्यताम्, &c. 7९ युयुजे, युयुनिषे, युयुजे,
&९. ist Fut, drat’, योक्रासे, योक्ता, ९०. and Fut. योषे, Wea, & ९. Aor,
अयुषि, अखयुक्यास्, अयोजि ; खयुष्वहि, &८. Prec. gata. Cond. ware.
EXAMPLE OF CAUSAL VERBS, EXPLAINED AT 479.
703. Root 3 bhi. Infin. भावयितुम् bhdvayitum, ‘to cause to be.’
PARASMAI-PADA. ATMANE-PADA.
Present Tense, ‘I cause to be.’
भावयामि भावयावस् भावयामस् | भावये भावयावहे भावयामरे
भावयसि भावयथस् भावयय | भावयतसे भावयेये TTT
भावयति भावयतस् भावयन्ति | भावयते भावयते भावयन्त
Imperfect, ‘I was causing to be,’ or ‘I caused,’ &c.
STI सभावयाव स्रभावयाम | सभावये खभावयावहि शस्भावयामहि
अभावयत् WITT भावयत सभावययाम् अभावयेयाम् WATT AA
सभावयत् सअभावयतान् भवियन् सअभावयतं अभावयेताम् भावयन्त
Potential, ‘I may cause to be.’
x ~ = ध) येवहि ~ हि
भावयेयम् भावयेव भावयेम | भावयेय भाव , भावयेन
भावयेस् भावयेतम् भावयेत | भावयेथास् भावयेयायाम् भावयेध्नम्
भावयेत् भावयेताम् भावयेगयुस् | भावयेत भावयेयाताम भावयेरन्
312 CONJUGATION
OF CAUSAL VERBS,
Imperative, ‘Let me cause to be.’
भावयामरे
भावयध्वम्
भावयन्ताम्
भावयाच्चकृमहे
भावयाखखकृद
भावयाच्चक्रिे
भावयितास्महे
भांवयिताध्वे
भावयितापस्
भावयिष्यामरे
भावयिष्यध्वे
भावयिष्यन्ते
अबीभवांमहि
अबीभवध्वम्
अजीभवन्त
भावयिषीमहि
भावयानि भावयाव भावयाम भावये भावयावहे
भावय भावयतम् भावयत भावयसख भावयेयाम्
भावयतु भावयताम् भावयन्तु भावयताम् भावयेताम्
Perfect, ‘I caused to be.’
भावयाचकार भावयाच्कृव भावयाच्चकृम | भावयाखक्रे भावया्कृवहे
भावयाश्चकथै भावयाच्वक्रयुस् भावयच्वक्र | भावयाच्कृषे भावयाच्वक्राये
भावयाच्चकार भावयाच्चक्रतुस् ATAU | भावयाच्क्रे भावयाच्वक्राते
First Future, ‘1 will cause to be.’
भावयितास्मि भावयितास्रस् भावयितास्मस् | भावयिताहे भावयिताखहे
भावयितासि भावयितास्यत् भावयितास्य | भावयितासे भावयितासाये
भावयिता भावयित्तारौ भावयितारस् | भावयिता भावयितारौ
Second Future, ‘I shall or will cause to be.’
भावयिष्यामि भावयिष्यावस् भावयिष्यामस् | भावयिष्पे भावयिष्यावहे
भावयिष्यसि भावयिष्ययस् afore | भावयिष्यसे भावयिष्येये
भावयिष्यति भावयिष्यतस् भावयिष्यन्ति | भावयिष्यते भावयिष्येते
Aorist, ‘I caused to be.’
witha सवीभवाव खवीभवाम | अवीभवे अबीभवावहि
अवीभवस् सवीभवततम् अवीभवत | अवीभवथास् अवीभवेयाम्
सबीभवत् sata सखवीभवन् | ्जनीभवत अबीभवेताम्
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May I cause to be.’
भाव्यासम् ATT भाव्यास्म भावयिषीय भावयिषीवहि
भाव्यास् भराव्यास्तम् गाव्यास्त भावयिषीष्टास् भावयिषीयास्याम् भावयिवीध्नम्
भाव्यात् भाव्यास्ताम् नाव्यामुस् | भावयिषीष्ट
Conditional, ‘1
अभावयिष्यम् अभावयिष्याव सभावयिष्याम
भाव यिष्यस् सभावयिष्यतम् सभाव यिष्यत
सभावयिष्यत् सभावयिष्यताम् सभवयिष्यन्
should cause to be.’
भावयिषीयास्ताम् भावयिषीरन्
अभावयिष्ये अभावयिष्यावहि सभावयिष्यामहि
सभावयिष्ययास् सभावयिष्येयाम् सअनावयिष्यध्वम्
अभावयिष्यत अभावयिष्येताम् सभावयिष्यन्त
704. After this model, and after the model of Primitive verbs of
cl, 10 at 638, may be conjugated all Causal verbs.
EXAMPLES OF DESIDERATIVE VERBS, EXPLAINED AT 498.
705. Root चू bhi. Infin. बुभूषितुम् bubhishitum, ‘to wish to be’
PARASMAI-PADA.
ATMANE-PADA.
Present Tense, ‘1 wish to be.’
बुभूषामि TAR वुभरूषामस् | TTR PUTTS
बुभूषसि PITT PIG वुभ्रषसे बुभूषे
वुभूषति बुभरषतस् बुभूषन्ति | बुभूषते at
बुभूषामहे
reat
वुभूषन्ते
CONJUGATION OF DESIDERATIVE: VERBS,
313
Imperfect, ‘I was wishing to be,’ or ‘I wished,’ &c.
अवुभूषिष्यस्
STE wp सअवुभूषाम | ape अवुभूषावहि wpe
SPR NPA WRT | सवुभूषथास् ste सवुभ्रूषध्वम्
CCL अनुधरूषताम् अवुभरूषन् । अनुधरूषत अवुभूमेताम् चवुभूषना
Potential, ‘I may wish to be.’
Peay pe चुभूषेम वुभरूषेय बुभूषेवहि बुभूषेमहि
PU बुभरूषेतम् PT Sy UTE वुभरवेध्वम्
TRE | दुभूषेत am BET
Imperative, ‘Let me wish to be.’
ya वुभूषाव वुभरूषाम aye pas वुभूषामरे
बुभरूष PAA वुभ्रूषत Twa चुभूषेयाम् वुभूषध्नम्
PIG बुभूषताम् =| PAT | TNT वुभरषन्ताम्
Perfect, ‘I wished to be.’
वुश्रपाच्चकार+ grag PGA | वुभरूषाचक्रे वुश्रषाच्कृवरे वुभरषाच्कृमहे
TT pag pra | preg’ वु्रषाच्क्राये वुभूषाचकृदे
वुभ्रषाचकार वुशरषाच्चक्रतुस् वुधरषाचक्रुस् | POT वुभूषाचक्राते «| prarafat
First Future, ‘I will wish to be.’
बुभ्रूषितास्मि वुभ्रूषितास्वस् वुभ्रषितास्मस् | quiere वुश्रूषितास्वहे वुभ्रूषितास्महे
बुभ्रूषितासि वुध्रूषितास्यस् बुभूषितास्य | बुभूषितासे वुभ्रूषितासाये वुभरूषिताध्वे
वुभ्रषिता वुभूषितारो बुभ्रूषितारस् | afar prfama वुभूषितारस्
Second Future, ‘I will or shall wish to be.’
बुभ्षिष्यामि वुभरूषिष्यावस् वबुभ्रूषिष्यामस् | वुभूषिष्य wifes वुभूषिष्यामहे
बुभूषिष्यसि वुभूषिष्ययस् बुभूषिष्यय | बुभूषिष्यसे वुष्रषिष्येये वुभूषिष्यध्वे
बुभ्रषिष्यति वुभूषिष्यतस् वुभ्रषिष्यन्ति । वुभ्रूषिष्यते वुभूषिष्येते वुभूषिष्यनते
Aorist, ‘I wished to be.’
sayfaaq सवुभरूषिष्व अचुभूषिप्म | अनुभरूषिषि सवुभूषिष्वहि अनवुभूषिष्महि
wp अवुभूषिष्टम् अवुभरूषिष्ट agi अवुभूषिषायाम् सवुभूषिध्वम्
सवुभ्ूषीत् अवुभूषिष्टाम् अवुधरूषिपषरस् | अवुश्रूषिष्ट अवुधरूपिषाताम् सवुभूषिषत
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May I wish to be.’
बुभ्रष्यासम् वुभ्रष्पाख ware | वुभूषिषीय वुभरूषिषीवहि वुभूषिषीमहि
' बुभूष्यास् बुभूष्यास्तम् वुभष्यास्त बुभरषिषीष्ठास् वुभ्रषिषीयास्थाम् वुभरूषिषीथ्वम्
बुभरष्यात् वुद्रष्यास्ताम् वुभ्रष्यामुस् । वुश्रषिषीष्ट वु्रषिषीयास्ताम् वु्रूषिवीरन्
Conditional, ‘I should wish to be.’
ख वुभूषिष्यम् अवुधरषिष्याव सखबुभरूषिष्याम | अदुभूषिष्य
अवुभूषिष्यतम् अवुभरूषिष्यत | अवुभूषिष्ययास्
अवुभ्रूषिष्यावहि अवुभूषिष्यामहि
अ हुभरषिष्येाम् अवुभूषिष्यश्वम्
अवुभरूषिष्यत् सवुभूषिष्यताम् अवुभरूषिष्यन् | सबुभूषिष्यत चवुभूषिष्येताम् अवुभूषिष्यन्त
* Or वुभूषाचकर.
ss
314 CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
EXAMPLES OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS,
EXPLAINED AT 504.
706. Root चरू bavi. Infin. बोभूयितुम् bobhiyitum, ‘to be repeatedly.’
ATMANE-PADA FORM (509).
Present Tense, ‘I am repeatedly.’
बोभूये बोभरयावहे बोभरूयामहे
बोभूयसे बोभूयेये बोभू यध्वे
बोभूयते बोभूयते बोभ्रूयने
Imperfect, ‘1 was frequently.’
सनोभूये अबोभरूयावहि सबोभरूयामहि
सवोभरूयथास् अबोभूयेयाम् अबोभूयश्वम्
अवोभ्रयत ITAA अवोभरूयन्त
Potential, ‘I may be frequently.’
बोभूयेय बोभूयेवहि बोभरयेमहि
बोधरूयेयास् बोभ्रूयेयायाम् बोभूयेध्वम्
बोभूयेत बोभ्रूयेयाताम् बोध्रूयेन्
। Imperative, ^ Let me be frequently.’
ap बोभूयावहे बोभूयामरे
ahr बोभूयेयाम् बोभूयध्वम्
बोभूयताम् बोभूयेताम् UAT
Perfect, ‘1 was frequently.’
नोभ याश्चक्र नोभ्रूयाखकुवहे बोभ्र याश्चकृमरे
वोभरूयाच्चकृषे बोभूयाद्वक्राये बोभूयाच्कृद
बोभूयाच्क्र बोभू याचक्राते बोभू या्चक्रिरे
First Future, ‘I will be frequently.’
बोभूयिताहे बोभूयितासखहे बोभूयितास्महे
वोभरूयितासे बोभूयितासाये बोभूयिताध्वे
बोभूयिता बोभूयितारे बोभश्रूयितारस्
Second Future, ‘1 will or shall be frequently.’
बोभूयिष्ये बोभूयिष्यावहे बोभूयिष्यामहे
बोभू यिष्यसे बोभूयिष्येये बोभूयिष्यश्वे
योभूयिष्यते बोभूयिष्यते बोभूयिष्यन्ते
Aorist, ‘I was frequently.’
wangfafa waprfacaiz सबोभ्रूयिष्महि
सबोभूयिष्टास् सबोभूयिषायाम् सबोभूपिभ्वम् or -दृम्
पबोभूयिष्ट सबोभूयिषाताम् सबोभूयिषत
CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS. 315
Precative or Benedictive, ‘ May I be frequently.’
बोभूयिषीय बोभ्रूयिषीवहि बोभूयिषीमहि
बोघ्रूयिषीष्टास् बोभूयिषीयास्थाम् बोभूयिषीश्नम् or -दृम्
चोभूयिषीष्ट बोभरूयिषीयास्ताम् बोभूयिषीरन्
Conditional, ‘I should be frequently.’
अवोभूयिष्ये अबोभूविष्यावहि अवोभूविष्यामहि
अबोभ्रूयिष्ययास् अबोभरूयिष्येयाम् अवोभ्रूयिष्यध्वम्
अबोभूयिष्यत सबोभूयिष्येताम् अबोभूयिष्यन्त
707. PARASMAI-PADA FORM (514).
Present Tense, ‘I am frequently,
बोभवीमि or बोभोमि बोभूवस् बोभूमस्
बोभवीषि or बोनोषि वोभरूयस् बोभूय
बोभवीति or बोभोति बोभूतस् बोभुवति
Imperfect, ‘I was frequently.’
अवोभवम् wana अवोभरूम
सअवोभवीस् or wah अवोभूतम् अवोभरूत
अबोभवीत् or Hab सबोभूताम् अवोभवुस्
Potential, ‘I may be frequently.’
वोभरूयाम् बोभरूयाव बोभरूयाम
बोभ्रयास् वोभूयातम् बोभूयात
बोभूयात् बोभूयाताम् बोभूयुस्
Imperative, ‘May I be frequently.’
वोभवानि बोभवाव बोभवाम
arate THEA बोधत
बोभवीतु or बोभोतु ARIAT] बोधरुवतु
Perfect, “I was frequently,’
aryarga, &९. बोभुवास्नभ्रविव, &c. बोभुवाख्भूविम, &c.
or or or
बोभाव or बोभरूव बोभरुषिव or बभूविव बौभरुविम or बोभूविम
बोभूविय वबोभरुवथुस् or बोभूवथुस् वबोशरुव or Wy
बोभाव or बोभूव SPEAR or SATE ATR or SHIT
First Future, ‘I will be frequently.’
बोभवितास्ि बोभविताखस् बोभवितास्मस्
बोभवितासि बोभवित्तास्यस् बोभवितास्य
वोभविता बोभविताये बोभवितारस्
88 2
316 CONJUGATION OF FREQUENTATIVE OR INTENSIVE VERBS.
Second Future, ‘I will or shall be frequently.’
बोभविष्पामि 'बोभविष्पावस् -बोभविष्यानस्
बोभविष्यसि बोभविष्ययस् बोभविष्यय
बोभविष्यति बोभविष्यतस् बोभविष्यन्ति
Aorist, ‘T was frequently.’
अवोभूषम् wah Se
SIP अवोभूतम् अवोभूत
TIT अवोभूताम् अनोभूवत्
01 or or
अबोभाविषम् अवोभाविष्व अवोभाविष्म
खवोभावीस् अवोभाविष्टम् अवोभाविष्ट
अबोभावीत् रवोभाविष्टाम् अवबोभाविषुष्
Precative or Benedictive, ‘May I be frequently.’
बोभरूयासम् बोभूयाख वोभरूयास
बोभ्रयास् APIA बोभरूयास्त
बोभूयात् बोध्रूयास्ताम् बोभ्रूयासुस्
Conditional, ‘1 should be frequently.’
अवोभविष्यम् अवोभविष्याव अवोभविष्याम
अवोभविष्यस् अवोभविष्यतम् सअनोभविष्यत
अवोभविष्यत् अवोभविष्यताम् अवबोभविष्यन्
708. Root इन् ‘to kill’ (323, 654). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive, ‘to kill repeatedly.” Pres. जङ्कन्मि or जङ्घनीमि, wEfa or THAT,
waft or wy; जङ्गन्वस्, AFIT, जक्घतस् ; जङ्खन्मस्, WU, जद्नति or
wate. Impf. सजङ्धनम्, WAFA or जक्घनीस्, HARA or HARA; WAP,
WARM, -ताम् ; TAH, HAT, अजद्गनुस् or अजंघ्रुस्. -707. जङ्गन्याम्. Impv.
जक्घनानि, जंघहि, WY or AFA; जङ्घनाव, जक्घतम्, -ताम् ; ARAM, AAT,
जद्कनतु or wag. -72 जङ्कनाप्भ्रव or जज्घनाखकार, & ८. &c.
709. Root गम् ‘to go’ (602, 270). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive, ‘to go frequently.” Pres, जङ्कन्मि or जङ्गमीभि, जङ्गंसि or HATTA,
जङ्गन्ति or WHA; जद्धन्वस्, जङ्गयस्, WHAT; जङ्गन्मस्, जङ्ग, जङ्गमति or
जग्मि, Impyf. सजद्गमम्, TARA or अज ्गमीस्, TAWA or SARA TAA,
अनङ्गतम्, -ताम् ; सनङ्गन्म, NAT, WAAR or सजेग्मुस्. Pot. जङ्गम्याम् .
17700. जङ्गमानि, जङ्गहि, APY or जद्गमीतु ; जङ्कमाव, FHA, APA; AAT,
WHA, WAG or जग्मतु. Perf. जद्धमाग्चभूव or जङ्गमाच्चकार, & ८. &c.
710. Root सिप् ‘to throw’ (635). Parasmai form of Frequentative.
Pres. Sef or Sfquifa, Tafa or चेशिपोषि, Safa or Afadtir;
चेशिष्वस्, चेधिप्यस्, चेशिपरस् ; चेशिष्मस्, Viera, चेिपति. 1, सचे्ेपम्,
INDECLINABLE WORDS.—ADVERBS. 317
Way or सच शषिपीस्, अचंछेप् or अचेधिपीत् ; wafera, सचेशिप्रम्, -प्राम्;
अचेशिष्म, सचेधिप्न, अचेशिपुस्. Pot. afer, &c. Impv. चेक्षेपाणि,
चेश्षियि, चेतु or चेष्िपीतु; Satara, चेष्िपम्, -प्राम् ; चेक्तेपाम, चेशिप्र, Sferag
Perf. चेकिपास्भूव or चेण्लिपाचकार, &८. &c
711. Root ग्रह् ‘to take’ (699, 359). Parasmai form of Frequenta-
tive. Pres. जाग्रह or नाग्ररोभि, srafa (306. a) or जाग्रीषि, नाग्रादि
(305. @) or जाग्रहीति ; ATTRA, AMSA, नागृढस् ; जागृ्स्, जागृढ, जागृहति.
Impf. अजाग्रहम्, अनाघ्रट् (306. ९) or अज्ञाग्रहीस्, SHAS or WAIT;
अजागृद्ध, HAYSA, -ढाम् ; HAY, HATS, अनागस् (331. Obs.) Pot.
जागृद्याम्. Imp. seta, जागृदि, जाग्रादु or नाग्रहीतु ; AANA, जागृढम्,
“CT; Way, WS, जागुहतु, &c. &c.
CHAPTER VIL.
INDECLINABLE WORDS
712. THERE are in Sanskrit a number of words used as nouns
having only one inflexion, which may be classed among indeclinables ;
€. £. सस्तम् ‘ setting,’ ‘decline ;’ अस्ति ‘ what exists,’ ‘ existence ;’ म्
‘the sacred syllable Om ;’ चनस् ‘satisfaction,’ ‘food ;* नमस् ‘reverence ;’
नास्ति ‘ non-existence ;’ चदि or वदि ‘ the fortnight of the moon’s wane ;?
भुवर् ‘sky ;’ ug ‘earth ;* शम् ‘ease ;’ संवत् a year ;” मुदि or शुदि ‘the
fortnight of the moon’s increase ;’ wut an exclamation used on
making oblations to the spirits of the dead; सवर् ‘heaven;’ स्वस्ति
‘salutation’ (see Gana Svarddi to Pan. 1.1, 37). Others will be
mentioned at 713-717.
ADVERBS.
a, Adverbs (nipdta), like nouns and verbs, may be divided into
simple and compound. The latter are treated of in the next Chapter
on Compound Words. Simple adverbs may be classified under
four heads: 1st, those formed from the cases of nouns and obsolete
words; 2ndly, other adverbs of less obvious derivation; 3rdly,
adverbial suffixes; 4thly, adverbial prefixes.
Formed from the Cases of Nouns and Obsolete Words.
713. The Accusative neuter of many adjectives ;
As, स्यम् ‘truly ;’ FZ ‘much ;’ शीघ्रम्, FWA, ‘quickly ;' युक्तम् ‘fitly;’ समीपम्
318 INDECLINABLE WORDS.—ADVERBS.
‘near;’ HAR ‘certainly ;’ BY ‘lightly; THAT, यन्तम्, गाढम्, भृ शम्, ‘exceed-
ingly? अवर्यम् ‘ certainly 52 नियम् “constantly 5" चिरम् ण a long while;’
बलवत् ‘strongly ;’? WAR ‘again,’ ‘repeatedly’ (194) ; HATA ‘only,’ ^ merely ;’
वाटम् “very well.’
a. The Acc. neuter of certain pronouns; as, तत् ` therefore,’ ‘then ;’ aH where-
fore,’ ‘when,’ ‘since ;’ तावत् so long,’ ‘so soon ;* यावत् ‘as long as,’ “as soon 28 ;2
किम् ‘why?’
b. The Acc. neuter of certain substantives and obsolete words; as, req‘ secretly ;”
कामम् ‘willingly ;’ स्वयम् ‘of one’s own accord,’ ‘of one’s self,’ “spontaneously ;’
नाम “by name,’ ‘that is to say;’ वारं वारम् “repeatedly ; चिरम् “long ago;”
मुखम् ‘pleasantly; साम्प्रतम् ‘now;’ नक्तम् ‘by night’ (१०००); सायम् ‘in the
evening’ (this last may be an ind. part. of so, ‘to finish’).
714. The Instrumental of nouns, pronouns, and obsolete words ;
As, धर्मेण ‘ virtuously ;’ efqua ‘to the right,’ ‘ southwards ;’ TAU * north-
wards ; व्यिरेकेण * without ;’ Taq ‘above,’ ‘aloud नीचेस् ‘below; शनेस् or
शनकेस् slowly ;? तेनं therefore ;7 यन “wherefore ;? सन्तरां or अनरेण without,
except qa instantly ; चिरेण ‘for a long time; अचिरेण ‘in a short time :
WAT ‘entirely ;’ feat ‘by day ; दिया fortunately ;' सहसा, FAAT, quickly ;
WYAT now;’ विहायसा ‘in the air;’ पुणा ‘formerly ;’ WAT on the ground ’(yapal).
a. The Dative case more rarely ;
As, चिराय ‘for a long time ;’ चिररात्राय ‘for a period of many nights ;’ अयाय
“for the sake of.’
4715. The Ablative case of nouns, pronouns, and obsolete words ;
As, Foard “forcibly ;° ware “joyfully ;’ ट्यत् “at a distance ;’ तस्मात् ` there-
1016; कस्मात् ‘wherefore + अकस्मात् without cause,’ ‘unexpectedly ;’ उत्तरात् ‘from
the north ;’ चिरात् ‘for a long time;’ पश्चात् ° afterwards ;? TTT ‘at that
instant ;* समन्तात् “from all quarters.’
716. The Locative case of nouns and obsolete words ;
As, रातो ‘at night ;’ at ‘far 0; प्रभाते ‘in the morning ; Wea ‘in the
forenoon ;’ स्थाने ‘ suitably ;” "AY ‘in front;’ रकपदे ‘at once ;’ सपदि ‘instantly ;’
ऋते ८ 11 अन्तरे ‘within ;’ दश्षिणे ‘towards the south ;’ समीपे or maa ‘near;
रकान्ते ‘in private ;’ सायाहे “in the evening ;’ हेतो “by reason of.’
Other Adverbs and Particles of less obvious Derivation.
717. Of affirmation. — नूनम्, खलु, fas, रव, NF, ‘indeed ;' सथकिम् ‘certainly.’
a. Of negation.—, नो, नहि, ‘not.’ AT, मास्म are prohibitive; as, मा क्रु,
मा कार्षीत्, ‘do not.’ See 889.
b. OF interrogation.—Tar , कितु, कच्चित् नुः ननु, किमु, किमुत, “whether ?”
‘
INDECLINABLE WORDS.—ADVERBS. 319.
९. Of comparison.— इव ‘like ;? एव, TAA, ˆ 80; किम्युनर् “how much वणल?
तयेव (Wat + Ta) ‘in like manner.’
2. Of quantity. सतीव ( exceedingly; ईषत् a little’ (cf. 726. b).
€. Of manner.— इति, श्वम्, ‘so,’ ‘thus ; पुनर् “again ;’ प्रायस् “for the most
part ;’ नाना ‘variously ;’ पृथक् “ separately 3 मृषाः freq, ‘falsely ;’ वृया, मुधा,
“in णण; अलम् ‘enough;’ कटिति, अशु (cf. ९८४५), ‘quickly ;’ ret “silently ;?
frag ‘reciprocally,’ ‘together.’
^ Of time—B8A ‘to-day,’ ‘now;’ WR ‘to-morrow ;’ दस् ‘yesterday ;’
परश्चस् ‘the day after to-morrow ;’ सम्प्रति ‘now;’ पुरा ‘formerly ;? पुरस्, पुरस्तात्,
प्राक्, (006; युगपद् “at ००६; सद्यस् (108; We ‘after death’ (lit.
“having departed’); परम् ‘afterwards;’ जातु ‘ever;’ न जातु ‘never;’ Waa,
WA, ‘another day,’ ‘next day;’ सकृत् " 01०९; असकृत्, पुनर्, महस्, ‘again
and again,’ ‘repeatedly.’ ।
Obs.—@ is used with a Present tense to denote past time. See 251. 8, 878.
9. OF place. —@ ‘here ;’ GH‘ where ?” वहिस् ^ without.’
h. Of doubt—faaz, किंसखिट्, अपिनाम, उत, उताहो, उताहो खिद्, साहो faz,
‘perhaps,’ &c. ‘
i, अपि ‘even,’ Ta ‘indeed,’ ह ‘just,’ are placed after words to modify their
sense, or for emphatic affirmation. 3, a, ध are similarly used in the Veda.
Observe—Some of the above are properly conjunctions; see 727.
Adverbial Suffixes.
778. चिद् did, अपि api, and चन ¢ana may form indefinite adverbs
of time and place, when affixed to interrogative adverbs ;
As, from कटा ‘ when 2? कदाचिद्, कदापि, and कदाचन, “sometimes ;’ from Fa
and क्रौं ‘where?’ कुतचिद् , कुल्लापि, aise, aifa, ‘somewhere ;’ from कुतस्
‘ whence 2? कुतश्चिद् and कुतश्चन “from somewhere;’ from कति ‘how many?’
afatae ‘a few; from कहि ‘when? किचिद् “at some time;’ from कथम् “how ??
कथमपि, कयच्चनं, ‘somehow or other,’ “with some difficulty.” Compare 228, 230.
a. अपि following a word, generally signifies ‘even,’ but after numerals, ‘all,’ as
योऽपि ‘all three;? सर्वेऽपि ‘all together.’
719. तस् tas may be added to the stem of any noun, and to some
pronouns, to form adverbs ;
As, from यत्न, WAAA ‘with effort ;’ from दि, आदितस् “from the beginning ;’
from त (the proper stem of the pronoun WZ), ततस् ‘thence,’ ‘then,’ ‘thereupon,’
‘therefore :’ similarly, यतस् ‘whence,’ ‘since,’ ‘because ;’ अतस्, इतस्, AYA,
‘hence,’ “hereupon.’
Obs.—In affixing tas to pronouns, the stem त् is used for तट्? ऋ for एतद्, इ for
इदम्, अमु for HEA, य for यद्, कु for किम्.
a. This suffix usually gives the sense of the preposition ‘from,’ and is often
320 INDECLINABLE WORDS.—ADVERBS.
equivalent to the ablative case; as in TAG “from me;’ त्वत्तस् ‘from thee * ;’
पितृतस् “from a father ;’ Wawa ‘from an enemy.’
b. But it is sometimes vaguely employed to express other relations; as, Jaqq
“behind the back ;’ अन्यतस् ‘to another place,’ “elsewhere ;’ WUAAA, ‘in the first
place ;? उतस्ततस् “here and there,’ “hither and thither;’ समनतस् ˆ ०५ all sides ;’
समीपतस् “in the neighbourhood > पुरतस्, खग्रतस्, ‘in front ;? अभितस् " near to ;”
विभवतस् ‘in pomp or state.’
९. तात् 18 a suffix which generally denotes ‘place’ or ‘direction ;’ as, from थस्
अधस्तात् ˆ downwards ;’ from उपरि (which becomes उपरिस्), उपरिष्टात् ' above’ (cf.
84. V).
720. @ tra, forming adverbs of place with a locative sense from
stems of pronouns, adjectives, &c. ;
As, खत ‘here;’ तत ‘there;’ Fa ‘where? Wa ‘where;? स्वैव “everywhere ;’
‘aq ‘in another place;’ WHA ‘in one place;’ बहुत ‘in many places;’ अमुत
‘there,’ ‘in the next world.’
a. ती ird; as, देवा “among the gods;’ मनुष्यत्रा ‘among men’ (Pan. v. 4, 56)3
बहुता “amongst many.’
721. या thé and चम् tham, forming adverbs of manner ;
As, तथा ‘so,’ ‘in like manner ;’ यथा ‘as ;” ATAT ‘in every way,’ ‘by all means ;’
न्यया ` otherwise ;? AAA ‘how?’ इत्यम् ‘thus.’
722. edd, हि rhi, नीम् nim, forming adverbs of time from pro-
nouns, &c. ;
As, तदा ‘then ;’ यदा ‘when ;? कदा ‘when ?? एकदा ‘once ;’ नित्यदा “constantly 3
स्वैदा, सदा, ‘always;’ तरि, तदानीम्, ‘then ;’ इदानीम् ` now.’
723. धा dhd, forming adverbs of distribution from numerals ;
As, एकधा ‘in one way ;’ द्विधा ‘in two ways ;’ घोधा ‘in six ways;’ शतधा ‘in a
hundred ways ;’ सहस्रधा “in a thousand ways;’ TENT or सने कधा ‘in many ways.”
a. कृत्वस्, signifying ‘times,’ is added to पच्च, ‘five,’ and other numerals, as
explained at 215. Ai, ‘once,’ may be ४ corruption of सकृत्वस् (‘this time’);
and only @ is added to fz, ति, and dropped after चुर् “four times.’
724. वत् vat (technically called vati) may be added to any nominal
stem to form adverbs of comparison or similitude (see 922);
As, from सूये, aaaq ‘like the sun;’ from पूवे, पूवैवत् “as before.’ It may be
used in connexion with a word in the Accusative case.
a. This suffix often expresses “according to;’ as, विधिवत् “according to rule ;”
प्रयोजनवत् ` according to need.’ It may also be added to adverbs; as, यथावत्
‘truly’ (exactly as it took place).
* These are the forms generally used for the Ablative case of the personal pro-
nouns, the proper Ablative cases Ai, त्वत् being rarely used.
INDECLINABLE WORDS.—-CONJUNCTIONS. 321
725. शस् Sas, forming adverbs of quantity, &c. ;
As, बहुशस् ‘abundantly ;? WANA ‘in small quantities ;’ सवैशस् “wholly ;’
TaN ‘singly ;’ शतसहस्रशस् ‘by hundreds and thousands ;’ क्रमशस् “by degrees ;”
FIAT ‘principally ;' WeWA ‘foot by foot;’ दिशस् ‘two by two;’ विशस् ‘by
threes ;” अनेक्शस् ‘in great numbers ;? WATTA ‘syllable by syllable 2 तावच्छम् ‘in
80 many ways ;’ कतिशस् “how many at a time?’
५ सात् is added to nouns in connexion with the roots कृ, NA, and Y, to denote
a complete change to the condition of the thing signified by the noun; as, अग्नि-
सात् ‘to the state of fire.” See 789, and cf. 40. i.
Adverbial Prefixes.
726. स a, prefixed to nouns and even to participles with a priva-
tive or negative force, corresponding to the Greek a, the Latin in,
and the English in, im, un; as, from शक्य ‘possible, अशक्य
“impossible ;’ from स्पृशत् ‘touching’ (pres. part.), अस्पृशत् ‘not
touching ;? from कृचा ‘ having done’ (indecl. part.), अकृत्वा ‘ not having
done.” When a word begins with a vowel, अन् is euphonically
substituted ; as, from Wet ‘end,’ waa ‘ endless.’
a, ति ati, ‘ excessively,’ ‘very ;’ as, स तिमहत् ‘very great.’
6. sat d, implying ` diminution ;’ as, Tara ‘ somewhat pale.’
ईषत् is prefixed with the same sense ; as, Sagat ‘slightly warm.’
c. “I kd or कु ku, prefixed to words to imply ‘disparagement ;”
as, कापुरुष ‘a coward ;’ कुरूप ‘ deformed.’
d. दुस् dus (or दुर् dur), prefixed to imply ‘badly’ or ‘ with difficulty ;”
as, दुष्कृत ‘badly done’ (see 72); g¥a ‘not easily broken.’ It is
opposed to सु, and corresponds to the Greek duc-.
e. निस् nis (or निर् nir) and वि vi are prefixed to nouns like स a
with a privative or negative sense; as, fase ‘powerless ;’ निष्फल
‘without fruit’ (see 72); विशस्ते ‘unarmed :’ but not to participles.
J. सु su, prefixed to imply ‘well, ‘easily ;’ 28, सुकृत * well done ;
aig ‘easily broken.’ In this sense it is opposed to gq, and cor-
responds to the Greek क, It is also used for सति, to imply ‘very,’
‘excessively ;’ as, सुमहत् ‘very great.’
CONJUNCTIONS.
Copulative.
727, च éa, ‘and,’ ‘also,’ corresponding to the Latin que and -not
to et, It can never, therefore, stand as the first ge in a sentence,
but follows the word of which it is the copulative. चेव (च एव), ‘also,’
is a common combination.
3
rt
322 INDECLINABLE WORDS.,—PREPOSITIONS.
a, उत ‘and,’ ‘also,’ is sometimes copulative. Sometimes it
implies doubt or interrogation.
2. wat ‘so, ‘thus,’ ‘in like manner’ (see 721), is not unfrequently
used for च, in the sense of ‘also;’ and like च is then generally
placed after the word which it connects with another.
c. अथ ‘now,’ ‘and,? wet ‘then,’ are inceptive, being frequently
used at the commencement of sentences or narratives. Wa is often
opposed to इति, which marks the close of a story or chapter.
d. fz, ‘for,’ is a causal conjunction; like च it is always placed
after its word, and never admitted to the first place in a sentence.
€. यदि, चेट्, both meaning ‘if, are conditional conjunctions.
J. ततस् ‘upon that,’ ‘then’ (719), तत् ‘then, waz, faa, अ परब्च,
aca, अपिच, ‘again,’ ‘moreover,’ are all copulatives, used very com-
monly in narration.
Disjunctive.
728, वा ४८, ‘or’ (like -ve in Latin), is always placed after its word,
being never admitted to the first place in a sentence.
a. तु, किन्तु, ‘but ;’ the former is placed after its word.
2. यद्यपि ‘although;’ तयापि ‘nevertheless,’ ‘yet,’ sometimes used as a cor-
relative to the last; सयवा, fH वा, ‘orelse;? न वा ‘or not;’ यदि वा ‘whether,’
“whether or no.’
९. अथवा may also be used to correct or qualify a previous thought, when it is
equivalent to ‘but no,’ ‘yet,’ ‘ however.’
d. स्म, ह; तु; वै are expletives, often used in poetry to fill up the verse.
PREPOSITIONS.
729. There are about twenty prepositions (see 783), but in later
Sanskrit they are generally prefixes, qualifying the sense of verbs
(and then called upasarga) or of verbal derivatives (and then called
gati). About ten may be used separately or detached in govern-
ment with the cases of nouns (and then called karma-pravacantya) ;
e.g. खा, प्रति, सनु, अति, सधि, अभि, परि, सप, सपि, and उप ; but of these
the first three only are commonly found as separable particles in
classical Sanskrit.
730. "td, generally signifying ‘as far as,’ ‘up to,’ ^ until,’ with
Abl.; as, स्रा समुद्रात् ‘as far as the ocean ;’ सा मनोस् ‘up to Manu ;”
सा मणिबन्धनात् ‘as far as the wrist ;? सा मृत्योस् ‘till death ;? सा व्रतस्य
समापनात् ‘till the completion of his vow:’ and rarely with Acc.; as,
शतम् सा जातीस् ‘for a hundred births.’
BS ales A hy
INDECLINABLE WORDS.—PREPOSITIONS. 323
a. सा dé may sometimes express ‘from ;’ as, ख मूलात् ‘from the
beginning ;? स्रा प्रथमदशेनात् ‘from the first sight ;’ st जन्मनस् ‘from
birth’
6. It may also be compounded with a word in the Accusative neuter
forming with it an Avyayi-bhava (see 760); thus, आमेखलम् ‘as far
as the girdle’ (where मेखलम् is for मेखलाम्).
¢. प्रति prati, generally a postposition, signifying ‘at,’ ‘ with regard
to,’ ‘to,’ ‘ towards,’ ‘ against,’ with Acc.; as, गङ्गां प्रति ‘at the Ganges ;
थमे प्रति ° with regard to justice ;’ Wa प्रति ‘against an enemy ;> मां प्रति
‘as far as regards me.’ When denoting ‘in the place of, it governs
the Ablative.
d, अलु ‘after, with Acc., and rarely with Abl. or Gen.; as, HTT
अनु ‘along the Ganges ;* तदनु or ततोऽनु ‘after that.’
८. प्रति, and more rarely खनु and अभि, may be used distributively to signify
“each,’ ‘every ; thus, J8Aq ‘tree by tree.’ They may also be prefixed to form
Avyayi-bhavas; प्रतिवत्सरम् or अनुवत्सरम् ‘every year,’ ‘year by year.’ See 760.
Sf. afi, भि; परि are said to require the Accusative ; धि the Locative or
Accusative; पं and परि, in the sense “except,” the Ablative; JW the Locative and
Accusative: but examples of such syntax are not common in classical Sanskrit.
9. Instances are common of prepositions united with the neuter form or
Accusative of nouns, so as to form compounds (760. 8); as, प्रतिस्कन्धम् “upon the
shoulders;’ प्रतिमुखम् “face to face ;’ अधिवृक्म् “upon the tree;’ सतुगङ्गम् ‘along
the Ganges.’
ADVERBS IN GOVERNMENT WITH NOUNS.
737. There are many adverbs used like the preceding prepositions
in government with nouns, and often placed after the nouns which
they govern (for examples see 917).
These are, अग्रे ‘before,’ ‘in front of,’ with Gen.; अधरेण ‘under,’ with Gen. or
Acc.; अधस् or अधस्तात् ‘below,’ with Gen. (अधस् is sometimes doubled; thus,
अधो SUA); अनन्तरम् ‘after,’ ‘afterwards,’ with Gen. ; WaT ‘within,’ with Gen. or
Loc.; अन्तरेण ‘ without,’ ‘except,’ ‘with regard to,’ with Acc. ; अन्तिकम् ‘near,’ with
Gen. or Abl.; अभितस् “on both sides of,’ with Acc. ; अभिमुखम् ‘in front of,’ with
Gen. or Acc.; अभ्याते ‘near,’ with Gen.; way or HUTA or अर्थे “on account of,’
‘for,’ with Gen. ; RAT * after,’ beyond,’ with Abl. ; Tarr to the north,’ with
Gen. ; उच्चरेण “to the north,’ with Gen. or Acc.; उपरि ‘above,’ ‘ over,’ ‘upon,’
with Gen. or Acc. (sometimes doubled; thus, उपयुपरि) 3 ऊध्वेम् ‘above,’ ‘ over,’
‘upon,’ with Gen. or Acc. ; ‘after,’ ‘beyond,’ with Abl.; ऋते “ besides,’ ‘without,’
‘except,’ with Acc., sometimes with Abl.; कारणात् or कृति “on account of,’ ‘for,’
with Gen. ; दक्षिणात् ‘to the south, with Gen.; दक्षिणेन ‘to the right,’ ‘to the
Tt2
324 INTERJECTIONS.—COMPOUND WORDS.
south,’ with Gen. or Acc.; निमित्ते ‘for the sake of,’ ‘for,’ with Gen.; परस्
‘behind,’ with Gen.; परम् or WU ‘after,’ ‘ beyond,’ with Abl. ; पश्चात् ‘after,’ with
Gen. or Abl.; चरि ‘on the further side,’ with Gen. ; पुरतस् or पुरस् ‘before,’ “in the
presence of,’ with Gen. ; Way ‘before,’ with Abl., rarely with Gen. or Acc. ; प्रभृति
‘inde a,’ ‘from a particular time,’ “beginning with,’ with AblL. ; प्राक् ‘before,’ with
Abl., rarely with Gen. or Acc. ; मध्ये ‘in the middle, with Gen.; विस् ‘out,’
“outside of,’ with Abl. or Gen. ; यावत् ‘up to,’ “as fay as,’ sometimes with Acc. ;
विना ‘without,’ with Inst. or Acc. or sometimes with 4101. ; CATT ‘near,’ with
Gen. ; सकाशात् ` from,’ with Gen.; समसृम् “before the eyes,’ ‘in the presence of,’
with Gen.; समम् ‘together with,’ with Inst. ; समीपतस् or समीपम् ‘near,’ with Gen. ;
We ‘with,’ ‘along with,’ with Inst. ; साकम् ‘with,’ with Inst. ; साक्षात् “ before the
eyes,” ‘in the presence of,’ with Gen. ; साम् ‘along with,’ with Inst.; हेतोस् or
Zit ‘on account of, ‘for the sake of,’ ‘for,’ with Gen.
Obs.—Many of the above, especially way*, wy, काप्णात्, कृति, निमित्ते, देतोस्,
हेतो, &c., are more usually found at the end of a compound, after a nominal stem.
a. The adverb WA, ‘enough,’ is used with the Inst. (see 918).
९. Some of the adverbs enumerated at 714, 715, may be used in government
with the cases of nouns; e.g. दधिणेन, sary above. व्यहिरेकेण, ‘without,’ is
generally placed after the stem of a noun.
INTERJECTIONS.
732. भोस्, भो, हे are vocative; %, खरे less respectfully vocative,
or sometimes expressive of ‘contempt.’ = धिक् expresses ‘contempt,’
‘abhorrence,’ ‘ fie !’ ‘ shame !’ (with Accusative case); "TQ, Wel, अहह,
‘surprise,’ ‘alarm ;’ हा, हाहा, Wet, खटोवत, am, ‘grief;’? साधु, सुष्टु,
^ approbation ;’ efer, ^ salutation.’
CHAPTER VIII.
COMPOUND WORDS.
733. Compounps abound in Sanskrit to a degree wholly unequalled
in any other language, and it becomes necessary to study the prin-
ciples on which they are constructed, before the learner can hope to
7 अथेम् is generally found in composition with a nominal stem, and may be com-
pounded adjectively to agree with another noun; as, f# HT: सूपस् ‘broth for the
cs
Brahman ;' हिजाधे पयस् “milk for the Bréhman.’ See 760. ९.
COMPOUND NOUNS. 345
understand the simplest sentence in the most elementary book. In
the foregoing chapters we have treated of simple nouns, simple verbs,
and simple adverbs. We have now to.treat of compound nouns,
compound verbs, and compound adverbs.
a. Observe, that in this chapter the nom. case, and not the stem, of a substantive
terminating a compound will be given ; and in the instance of an adjective forming
the last member of a compound, the nom. case masc., fem., and neut. The
examples are chiefly taken from the Hitopadesa, and sometimes the oblique cases
in which they are there found have been retained.
SECTION I.
COMPOUND NOUNS.
734. The student has now arrived at that portion of the grammar
in which the use of the stem of the noun becomes most strikingly
apparent. This use has been already noticed at 77; and its forma-
tion explained at 80-87.
a. In almost all compound nouns the last word alone admits of
inflexion, and the preceding word or words require to be placed in
the stem, to which a plural as well as singular signification may be
attributed. Instances, however, will be given in which the charac-
teristic signs of case and number are retained in the first member of.
the compound, but these are exceptional.
९. It may here be noted, that while Sanskrit generally exhibits the first member
or members of a compound in the stem with the final letter unchanged, except by
the usual euphonic laws, Latin frequently and Greek less frequently change the
final vowel of the stem into the light vowelz,; and both Greek and Latin often
make use of a vowel of conjunction, which in Greek is generally 0 but occasion-
ally ¢; thus, celi-cola for celu-cola or celo-cola ; lani-ger for lana-ger ; 2८०१५
०04; ixbu-o-paryos, feder-i-fragus. Both Greek and Latin, however, possess
many compounds which are completely analogous to Sanskrit formations. In
English we have occasional examples of the use of a conjunctive vowel, as in
‘handicraft’ for “hand-craft.’
Obs.—A dot placed underneath words in Nagari type marks the division of the
different members of a compound.
735. Native grammarians class compound nouns under six heads:
I. DvanpDvVa, or those formed by the aggregation into one com-
pound of two or more nouns (the last word being, according to
circumstances, either in the dual, plural, or neuter singular, and the
preceding word or words being in the stem), when, if uncompounded,
326 COMPOUND NOUNS.
they would all be in the same case, connected by a copulative
conjunction ; as, गुरुशिष्यो ‘master and pupil’ (for गुरूः शिष्यश्च);
मरणःव्याधि-शोका; ‘death, sickness, and sorrow’ (for मरणं व्याधिः sitar);
पाणि-पादम् ‘hand and foot” (for पाणिः पादश्च).
II. Tat-puRUSHA, or those composed of two nouns, the first of
which (being in the stem) would be, if uncompounded, in a case
different from, or dependent on, the last; as, wecwat ° moon-light’
(for चन्द्रस्य प्रभा ‘ the light of the moon’); शस्त्र-कुशत्ः, -ला, -लम्, ‘skilled
in arms’ (for WEY कुशलः); मणिभूषितः, -ता, -तम्, ‘adorned with gems’
(for मणिभिर् भ्रूषितः).
III. KarMA-DHARAYA, or those composed of an adjective or
participle and substantive, the adjective or participle being placed `
first in its stem, when, if uncompounded, it would be in grammatical
concord with the substantive ; as, साधुजनः ‘a good person’ (for साधुर्
जनः); wargatfa ‘all things’ (for warfa दूव्याणि).
IV. एल, or those in which the stem of a numeral is compounded
with a noun, either so as to form a singular collective noun, or an
adjective; as, ति.गुणम् ‘three qualities’ (for बयो गुणाः); विगुणः, -णा,
-णम्, ‘ possessing the three qualities.’
V. Banu-vriHl, or attributive compounds, generally epithets of
other nouns, ‘These, according to Panini (11. 2, 24), are formed by
compounding two or more words to qualify the sense of another
word; thus, प्राप्तोदको ग्रामः णिः प्रापम् उदकं यं ग्रामम् ‘a village to which
the water has come.’
VI. Avyayf-BHAVA, or those resulting from the combination of a
preposition or adverbial prefix with a noun. The latter, whatever
may be its gender, always takes the form of an accusative neuter
and becomes indeclinable.
०. Observe—These names either furnish examples of the several kinds of com-
pounds, or give some sort of definition. of them; thus, इन्द; (scil. समासः) is a
definition of the 1st kind, meaning “conjunction ;’ तत्पुरूषः, “his servant,’ is an
example of the 2nd kind (for तस्म पुरूषः); HAUITT: is a somewhat obscure defi-
nition of the 3rd kind, i.e. ‘that which contains or comprehends (धास्यति) the
object’ (कमे); द्विगुः is an example of the 4th kind, meaning ‘anything to the
value of two cows ;” बहुत्रीहिः is an example of the sth kind, meaning ‘possessed
of much rice.’ The 6th class, अव्ययीभावः avyayt-bhdvah, means ‘the indeclinable
state’ (‘that which does not change,’ na vyeti).
736. It should be stated, however, that the above six kinds of
compounds really form, according to the native theory, only four
SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS, 327
classes, as the 3rd and 4th (i.e. the Karma-dhéraya and Dvigu) are
regarded as subdivisions of the Tat-purusha class,
Obs.—Panini (1. 2, 42) calls a Karma-dhdrayah a Tatpurushah samdnddhikaranah.
As such a classification appears to lead to some confusion from
the absence of sufficient distinctness and opposition between the
several parts or members of the division, the subject will be dis-
cussed according to a different method, although it has been thought
desirable to preserve the Indian names and to keep the native
arrangement in view.
737- Compound nouns may be regarded either as simply or
complexly compounded. The latter have reference to a class of
compounds within compounds, very prevalent in poetry, involving
two or three species of simple compounds under one head.
SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS.
738. These we will divide into, 1st, Dependent compounds or
compounds dependent in case (corresponding to Tat-purusha); 2nd,
Copulative (or Aggregative, Dvandva); 3rd, Descriptive* (or Deter-
minative, Karma-dhdéraya); 4th, Numeral (or Collective, Dvigu);
5th, Adverbial (or Indeclinable, Avyayé-bhdva); 6th, Relative (Bahu-
vrihi). This last consists of, a. Relative form of absolute Dependent
compounds, terminated by substantives; 5. Relative form of Copu-
lative or Ageregative compounds; ८. Relative form of Descriptive or
Determinative compounds; d. Relative form of Numeral or Collective
compounds ; €, Relative form of Adverbial compounds.
a, Observe—A list of the substitutions which take place in the
final syllables of certain words in compounds is given at 778.
DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA),.
Accusatively Dependent.
739. These comprehend all those compounds in which the relation
of the first word (being in the stem) to the last is equivalent to that
of an accusative case. They are generally composed of a noun in
the first member, and a participle (but not a present or indeclinable
* As being composed of an adjective or participle preceding a substantive, and
always descriptive of the substantive. Bopp calls them ‘ Determinativa,’ a word
of similar import.
328 DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA).
participle), root, or noun of agency in the last; as, STU: -AT, -पम्,
‘one who has obtained heaven’ (equivalent to सग प्राप्नः); त्रिय(वादी
‘one who speaks kind words;’ बहुदः ‘one who gives much ;’
देवस्तुत् ‘ god-praising ;? Wea ‘one who bears arms;’ पत्च;गतः, -ता,
-तम्, ‘committed to a leaf,’ ‘committed to paper? (as ‘ writing’);
चित-गतः, -ता, -तम्, ‘committed to painting ;’ दशेनीयःमानी, -निनी, -नि,
‘thinking one’s self handsome.’
a. गत ‘ gone? (past pass. part. of गम् ‘to go’) is used loosely at the end of com-
pounds of this description to express relationship and connexion, without any
necessary implication of motion. In WTA, विलगति above, and in others
(such as शिल्ाभेद-गतो मणिः ‘a jewel lying in the cleft of a rock ;’ इस्त तत्ःगतः,
aT, -तम्, ‘lying in the palm of the hand’), it has the sense of स्य ‘staying २ but
-it may often have other senses ; as, गोष्टी-गतः > ता, -तम्ः “ engaged in conversation ;?
सखी.गतं किञ्चित् “something relating to a friend.’
b. In theatrical language खात्स.गतम् and स्वगतम् (lit. १ gone to one’s self’) mean
* spoken to one’s self,’ “aside.”
८. Before nouns of agency and similar forms the accusative case is often retained,
especially in poetry ; as, अरिन्दमः, -मा, -मम्, ‘enemy-subduing ;’ हद्यद्कमः, -AT,
-मम् ‘heart-touching ; भयङ्करः; -t, -रम्, ‘fear-inspiring’ (see 580. a); सागरङ्कमः,
-मा, -मम्, “going to the ocean ;’ परिडतम्मन्यः, न्या, -न्यम्; “one who thinks himself
learned ;? राविम्मन्यः * one who thinks it night.’
Instrumentally Dependent,
740. Or those in which the relation of the first word (being in
the stem) to the last is equivalent to that of an instrumental case.
These are very common, and are, for the most part, composed of a
substantive in the first member, and a past passive participle in the
last ; as, त्टोभ-मोहितः, -ता, -तम्, ‘ beguiled by avarice’ (for shrq मोहितः) ;
वस्त्र वेष्टितः, ता, -तम्, ‘covered with clothes ; सजपूजितः, -ता, -तम्,;
‘honoured by kings ;’ विद्याःरीनः, -ना, -नम्, ‘deserted by (i.e. desti-
tute of) learning ;’ वुद्धिःरहितः, -ता, -तम्; ‘destitute of intelligence ;’
grera:, -ति, -तेम्, ‘pained with grief;? चात्म-कृतः, -ता, -तम्, ‘done by
one’s self ;? wifemragy:, -शी , -शम्, ‘like the sun’ (for wrfewa wey,
see 826); अस्मदु पाजितः, -ता, -तम्, ‘acquired by us.’
a, Sometimes this kind of compound contains a substantive or noun of agency
in the last member ; as, विद्या.भनम् : money acquired by science ;” शस्त्रो पजीवी ‘one
who lives by arms.’
Datively Dependent,
741. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a dative ; as, परिधान-वस्कलम् ‘bark for clothing ;”
DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS (TAT-PURUSHA). 329:
पादोदकम् ‘water for the feet ;? yaere ‘wood for a sacrificial post ;’
शरणागतः, -ता, -तम्, ‘come for protection’ (for श्स्णाय सखागतः). This
kind of compound is not very common, and is generally supplied by
the use of wy (731); as, शरणाम् आगतः.
a. Parasmai-pada, and Atmane-pada (see 243) are instances of
compounds in which the sign of the dative case is retained.
Ablatively Dependent,
742. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of an ablative ; as, faycare:, “HT, -प्रम्, ‘received
from a father ;’ , रज्य्रष्टः, -Bt, -्म्) ‘fallen from the kingdom? (for
णज्याद् भ्रष्टः); तरङ्ग चच्वत्ठतरः, -रा, -रम्, * more changeable than a wave ;’
wage: ‘other than you’ (for भवतो ऽन्यः); wagay ‘fear of you’ (814. ९);
कुक्कुरभयम् ‘fear of a dog ;’ WRAY S:, -खी, -खम्, ‘turning the face
from books,’ * averse from study.’
Genitively Dependent,
743. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a genitive. These are the most common of
all dependent compounds, and may generally be expressed by a
similar compound in English. They are for the most part com-
posed of two substantives ; as, समु दू तीरम् ‘ sea-shore’ (for समुद्रस्य तीयम्
* shore of the sea’).
a. Other examples are, 79,484 ‘horse-back;’ waite: ‘bow-string;’ इषिका-गृहम्
" brick-house ;’ गिरिनदी ‘ mountain-torrent ;’ जल-तीरम् water’s edge ;” अथागमः
or अर्थो पाजैना “acquisition of wealth ; faqggt “state of misfortune ;’ qeae:
# separation of 16008; aft “on whose brow’ (locative) ; aaa: “his words ;?
WAT AIA or जन्मभूमिः ‘birth-place;’ मूखैःशतेः “with hundreds of fools’ (inst. pl.);
खछोक्यम् ‘a couple of Slokas ;’ भूतलम् ‘the surface of the earth;’ पृथिवी-पतिः
“lord of the earth ;’ तज््ीवनाय “for his support’ (dative); ATAU Jar: “the sons
of a Bréhman ;? WYANT: ` our sons ;’ wea “thy deed ;’ पितुवचनम् “a father’s
speech ;’ Arp sity “the gate of death ;’ FATA ‘fulfilment of wishes ;? माता-
नन्दः ‘a mother’s joy ;? WSTWaA: (४ water-receptacle,” “lake ;’ विद्यार्थो “knowledge-
seeker,’ ‘a scholar ;’ क्रुक्रुटार्डम् (for FRaTRA) “a hen’s egg.’
2. Sometimes an adjective in the superlative degree, used substantively, occupies
the last place in the compound; as, AC WY: or yvayaa: the best of men
c. In occasional instances the genitive case is retained; as, विशाम्पतिः lord of
men;’ दिविस्पतिः “lord of the sky :
d. Especially in terms of reproach; as, दास्याः.पुतः (or दासीपुत ) ‘son of a slave
girl.
uu
330 COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA).
Locatively Dependent,
744. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the last
is equivalent to that of a locative case; as, WRATA:, -TAT, -ग्नम्, “sunk
in the mud? (for UR मग्नः); गगणःविहासे ‘sporting in the sky ;’ जलक्रीडा
‘sport in the water ;’ य्रामवासी ‘a dweller in a village;? नल्छचरः
‘going in the water ;’ जलजः ‘born in the water;’ किपे.पत्रम् ‘gem
on the head,’
a. The sign of the locative case is retained in some cases, especially
before nouns of agency ; as, ग्रमि-वासी ‘a villager ;? जले.चरः ‘ going in
the water ;? stfanzfan:, -ता, -तम्, ‘ornamented on the breast ;’ wT:
or WRT: ‘going in front;’ दिविषत् (rt. सट्) ‘abiding in the sky ;’
दिविस्मृक् (rt. ym) ‘touching the sky ;* युधिषिरः ‘firm in war.’
Dependent in more than one Case.
445. Dependent compounds do not always consist of two words. They may be
composed of almost any number of nouns, all depending upon each other, in the
manner that one case depends upon another in a sentence; thus, चषुविषयाति-
क्रान्तः; -ना, -न्तम्, “passed beyond the range of the eye’ (for चश्ुषो विषयम्
सतिक्रान्तः); TAWA: ` standing in the middle of the chariot ;’ भीतःपस्ताणःव-
स्त्पालम्भ.परिडतः * skilful in censuring the means of rescuing those in danger.’
५. There is an anomalous form of Tat-purusha, which is really the result of the
elision of the second or middle member (uttara-pada-lopa, madhyama-pada-lopa)
of a complex compound; e.g. शाकपार्थिवः for wrarfamafa: (see 775).
४. Dependent compounds abound in all the cognate languages. The following
are examples from Greek and Latin; olvo-Bj«y, oixo-pvaaé, 2460-0 7070५;
(UVALKO-KPUKTOS, avbpwro-didaktos, beo-Doros, bee-rpextos, 2८64007 ०१7०५)
auri-fodina, manu-pretium, parri-cida for patri-cida, parri-cidium, matri-cidium,
marti-cultor, mus-cerda. English furnishes innumerable examples of dependent
compounds; e.g. ‘ink-stand,’ ‘ snow-drift,’ ‘moth-eaten,” ‘ priest-ridden,’ ‘ door-
mat,’ ‘writing-master,’ &c.
COPULATIVE (OR AGGREGATIVE) COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA).
746. This class has no exact parallel in other languages.
When two or more persons or things are enumerated together, it
is usual in Sanskrit, instead of connecting them by a copulative, to
aggregate them into one compound word. No syntactical depend-
ence of one case upon another subsists between the members of
Dvandva compounds, since they must always consist of words which,
if uncompounded, would be in the same case. The only grammatical
connexion between the members is that which would be expressed
COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA). 381
by the copulative conjunction and in English, or च in Sanskrit.
In fact, the difference between this class and the last turns upon
this dependence in case of the words compounded on each other;
insomuch that the existence or absence of such dependence, as
deducible from the context, is, in some cases, the only guide by
which the student is enabled to refer the compound to the one head
or to the other; thus, Te, fre aaa: may either be a Dependent
compound, and mean ‘the servants of the pupils of the Guru,’ or
a Copulative, ‘the Guru, and the pupil, and the servant” And
मांसशोणितम् may either be Dependent, ‘the blood of the flesh,’ or
Copulative, ‘flesh and blood.” This ambiguity, however, can never
occur in Dvandvas inflected in the dual, and rarely occasions any
practical difficulty.
747. There are three kinds of Copulative compounds: 1st, in-
flected in the plural ; 2nd, inflected in the dual ; 3rd, inflected in the
singular, In the first two cases the final letter of the stem of the
word terminating. the compound determines the declension, and its
gender the particular form of declension ; in the third case it seems
to be a law that this kind of compound cannot be formed unless
the last word ends in ख a, or in a vowel changeable to ¥ a, or in a
consonant to which च ¢ may be subjoined ; and the gender is inva-
riably neuter, whatever may be the gender of the final word.
Inflected in the Plural.
748. When more than two animate objects are enumerated, the
last is inflected in the plural, the declension following the gender of
the last member of the compound ; as, इन्द्रानिकःयमाकः ‘Indra, Anila,
Yama, and Arka’ (for इन्दरोऽनिलो यमो ऽके); रामःलससणःभर्ताः ‘Rama,
Lakshmana, and Bharata ;’ मृगव्याधःसपैःशूकरः ‘the deer, the hunter,
the serpent, and the hog.’ The learner will observe, that although
the last member of the compound is inflected in the plural, each
of the members has here a singular acceptation. But a plural
signification may often be inherent in some or all of the words
constituting the compound ; thus, ATAU aT AST टाः ‘Brahmans,
Kshatriyas, Vaisyas, and Stidras ;’ मितोदासीनःशतवः ‘friends, neutrals,
and foes’ (for fratfu उदासीनाः शलवश्च) ; . छषिःदेवःपित्रतिधिःभूतानि ‘sages,
gods, ancestors, guests, and spirits’ (for ऋषयो देवाः पितरोऽ निचयो भूतानि च);
सिंहःव्याघ्र.महोएगाः ‘lions, tigers, and immense serpents ;? श्च.गुध-क क्कुःकाको-
uu2
332 COPULATIVE COMPOUNDS (DVANDVA).
BATE MATZ ATTA: ‘dogs, vultures, herons, ravens, kites, jackals, and
crows.”
749. So also when more than two inanimate objects are enume-
rated, the last may be inflected in the plural; as, चनैयेकाम-मो्ास्
‘virtue, wealth, enjoyment, and beatitude’ (for watsa: कामो मोदश्च);
इज्याध्ययनदानानि ‘sacrifice, study, and liberality’ (for इज्या waa
दानं च). In some of the following a plural signification is inherent ;
as, पुष्य.मूलल-फत्छानि ‘flowers, roots, and fruits ;? सजातमृतमूखाणाम् ‘ of the
unborn, the dead, and the foolish’ (for अजातानां भूतानां मूखोणां च);
नेव-मनः-सखभावाः ‘eyes, mind, and disposition ;* terytaafcar qa
सनानि ‘sickness, sorrow, anguish, bonds, and afflictions ;* काषट-नल-फ-
ल्.मूलःमधूनि ‘wood, water, fruit, roots, and honey.’
750. So also when only two animate or inanimate objects are
enumerated, in which a plural signification is inherent, the last is
inflected in the plural; as, देवमनुष्याः ‘gods and men ;> पुत.पोताः
‘sons and grandsons ;‡ पात्तोत्याताः ‘falls and rises ;’ प्राकारपरिखाः
‘ramparts and trenches ;? मुखदुःखेषु ‘in pleasures and pains’ (for
मुखेषु say च); पापपुण्यानि ‘sins and virtues.’
Inflected in the Dual.
751. When only two animate objects are enumerated, in each of.
which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected in the
dual, the declension following the gender of the last member; as
user ‘Raima and Lakshmana’ (for मो Be); चन्द्-सु्ीं ‘moon
and sun; भृगकाको a deer and a crow;’ भायोःपती ‘ wife and husband ;’
ratty Rt pea-hen and cock ;> कुक्कटमयुयौं ‘cock and pea-hen
752. So also when only two inanimate objects are enumerated, in
each of which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected
in the dual; as, ्रम्भावसाने ‘beginning and end? (for ्रम्भोऽवसानं च) ;
अनुणगाषरागो ‘affection and enmity’ (for अनुरगोऽपणगश्च); हषेषिषादो
‘joy and sorrow.;’ afar ‘hunger and thirst’ (for wa पिपासा च);
wart ‘hunger and sickness ;* स्यानासनाभ्याम् ‘by standing and sitting
(for स्थानेन सासनेन च); मधुसपिषी ‘honey and ghee Yaga ˆ pleasure
and pain ;* Sgwe,gyes ‘mortar and pestle ;? प्रदयुत्यानाभिवादाभ्याम् ‘ by
rising and saluting ;’ qetfoaa ‘by earth and water
Inflected in the Singular Neuter.
753. When two or more inanimate objects are enumerated, whether
DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS (KARMA-DHARAYA). 333
singular or plural in their signification, the last may either be inflected
as above (748, 749, 750, 751), or in the singular number, neut. gender ;
as, JOA, HSA ‘flowers, roots, and fruits’ (णिः पुष्पाणि मूत्ानि फलानि च);
यवसान्नोदकेन्धनम् ‘grass, food, water, and fuel? (for यवसोऽत्रम् उदकम् इन्धनं
च); खहोःणतम् ‘a day and night’ (for wet रावि. ^+ form अहोरावः
masc, sing. also occurs) ; दि्देशम् ‘quarters and countries’ (for दिज्ञो
देशाश्च); दयुनिशम् or दिवा-निशम् ‘day and night ;’ शिरोग्रीवम् ‘head and
neck ;” चने.मांसःरुधिम् * skin, flesh, and blood.’
a. Sometimes two or more animate objects are thus compounded ; as, पुतर-पौवम्
“sons and grandsons ;’ दस्त A ‘elephants and horses :’ especially inferior objects ;
as, श्-चारडालम् “a dog and an outcast.’
१54. In enumerating two qualities the opposite of each other, it is common to
form a Dvandva compound of this kind, by doubling an adjective or participle,
and interposing the negative Wa; as, चराचरम् " moveable and immoveable’ (for
चरम् Wat च); शुभाशुभम् § good and evil ;’ प्रियाप्मिये ‘in agreeable and disagree-
able? (for प्रिये अप्रिये च); दुष्टादृष्टम् ` seen and not seen ;’ कृताकृतम् ‘done and not
done ;’ मु दुक्रूरम् ` gentle and cruel.’
a. In the Dvandvas which occur in the Vedas the first member of the com-
pound, as well as the last, may sometimes take a dual termination ; thus, fa@qTa-
eat (see 97. a), इन्दरा.विष्ण्, पित्तरामात्तयेः and some of the anomalous Dvandvasg
used in more modern Sanskrit are probably Vedic in their character; thus,
द्यावापृथिवी “heaven and earth ;’ ararfaadt ‘mother and father,’ &c,
b. It is a general rule, however, that if a compound consists of two stems in ri,
the final of the first becomes सा, as in मातापितसे above. This 8180 happens if the
last member of the compound be Ja, as पिताःपुवो “father and son.’
ce. Greek and Latin furnish examples of complex compounds involving Dvan-
dvas; thus, Barparyo-pvo- pay iat, “ frog-mouse war ;” su-ovi-taurilia, ‘ pig-sheep-
bull sacrifice ;’ Swd-purov, ‘animal-plant.? Zoophyte is thus a kind of Dvandva.
In English, compounds like “plano-convex,’ ‘convexo-concave’ are examples of
the relative form of Dvandva explained at 765.
DESCRIPTIVE (OR DETERMINATIVE) COMPOUNDS (KARMA-DHARAYA).
755. In describing, qualifying, or defining a substantive by means
of an adjective or participle, it is common in Sanskrit to compound
the two words together, placing the adjective or participle in the
first member of the compound in its stem; 28, साधुजनः ‘a good man’
(for साधुर् जनः); farfaay ‘an old friend’ (for चिरं fray); Wards: ‘a
troubled ocean ;? पुण्यः कमे ‘a holy act ;? अनन्तात्मा ‘the infinite soul ;”
संस्कृतोक्तिः ‘polished speech ;’ ywraarfa ‘holy acts’ (for पुण्यानि कमोणि);
उत्तमःनएणाम् ‘of the best men’ (for उत्तमानां नणाम्); महा-पातकम् ‘a great
334 NUMERAL COMPOUNDS (DVIGU).
crime’ (see 778); महाराजः ‘a great king’ (see 778); प्रियसखः ‘a dear
friend’ (778); दौषैरावम् ‘a long night’ (778).
a, The feminine stems of adjectives do not generally appear in
compounds; thus, प्रिपुभायैौ ‘a dear wife’ (for प्रिया मायी); महाभयो
‘a great wife’ (for महती भाय, see 778); waagrat ‘a beautiful wife’
(for रूपवती भायै); पाचक-स््री ‘a female cook’ (for पाचिका स्त्री).
6, There are, however, a few examples of feminine adjective stems
in compounds; e.g. वामोरूभाये ‘a wife with beautiful thighs ;” कामि-
नी-जनः ‘an impassioned woman,’ where कामिनी may be used sub-
stantively (cf. 766. 6).
756. An indeclinable word or prefix may take the place of an adjective in this
kind of compound ; thus, {AW ˆ ४ good road ;” सुदिनम् “a fine वथ; सुःभाषितम्
“good speech ; दुश्चस्तिम् ‘bad conduct ;? भयम् ‘not fear,’ “absence of danger ;?
वहिःशोचम् “external cleanliness’ (from vahis, ‘ externally,’ and sauda, ‘ purity’);
SATMAA ‘internal purity;’ ईषहूशेनम् “a slight inspection ;? @ J: ‘a bad man.’
757. Adjectives used as substantives sometimes occupy the last place in
Descriptive compounds; as, परम.धा्िंकः “a very just man ;’ प्माद्मुतम् “a very
wonderful thing.’
a. In the same manner, substantives, used adjectively, may occupy the first
place; as, मल-दूव्याणि ‘impure substances ;’ पजषिः ‘a royal sage.”
758. Descriptive compounds expressing ‘excellence’ or ‘eminence’ fall under
this class, and are composed of two substantives, one of which is used as an adjec-
tive to describe or define the other, and is placed last, being generally the name of
an animal denoting “superiority ;’ as, YRAAITH: ` man-tiger,’ YRAYHFA: ^ man-
bull,’ पुरुषसिंहः ^ प्रध्या णा, Feat ‡ “man-bull,’ i.e. ‘an illustrious man.’
Similarly, Matar “an excellent woman’ (gem of a woman); वदनाम् ‘ face-
lotus,’ 1. €. ‘ lotus-like face.’
a. So other compounds expressive of ‘comparison’ or ‘resemblance’ are usually
included in native grammars under the Karma-dhéraya class. In these the adjec-
tive is placed last; as, छाया-चच्लः, -ला, -तम्ः “fickle as a shadow :’ खश्नुद्.श्यामः,
-मा, -WH, ‘dark asa cloud; भूधर्विस्तीगौः, -री, wa, “spread out like a mountain.’
8. The following are examples of Greek and. Latin compounds falling under this
class; eyao-uyTyp, 10८० [LEYAAT-—VOLM, YfAI-KUOY, sacri-portus, meri-dies
(for medi-dies), decem-viri, semi-deus. Parallel compounds in English are, ‘ good-
will,’ ‘ good-sense,’ ‘ill-nature,’ ‘holiday,’ ‘ blackguard,’ &c.
NUMERAL (OR COLLECTIVE) COMPOUNDS (DVIGU).
759. A numeral is often compounded with a substantive to form
a collective noun, but the last member of the compound is generally
in the neuter singular ; thus, चतुयंगम् ‘the four ages’ (for चत्वारि युगानि);
ADVERBIAL COMPOUNDS (AVYAYI-BHAVA). 335
चतुष्िशम् ‘ the four quarters ;’ लि;दिनम् ‘ three days’ (triduum); farcray
‘three nights’ (रात्र being substituted for तलि, see 778); च्य॒ब्टम् ^ three
years’ (triennium); watfra ‘the five fires.”
a. Rarely the stems of numerals are compounded with plural substantives ; as
APTA: ‘the four castes ;’ पच्च. वाणाः “five arrows ;* AAW: ‘the seven stars of
Ursa Major.’
¢. Sometimes the last member of the compound is in the feminine singular, with
the termination $5 as, विल्लोकी ‘the three worlds
c. Compare Greek and Latin compounds like TETPQO 040४, 70८४८7८0; 76004८7 7०५,
triduum, triennium, trinoctium, quadrivium, quinquertium
ADVERBIAL OR INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS (AVYAYI-BHAVA).
760, In this class of indeclinable (avyaya, 1. €. na vyeti, ‘ what does
not change’) compounds the first member must be either a preposition
(such as सति, अधि, अनु, प्रति, &c., at 783) or an adverbial prefix (such
as यथा ‘as,’ यावत् ‘as far as,’ अ or सन् ‘not, सह ‘with,’ &c.) The
last member is a substantive which takes the form of an accusative
case neuter, whatever may be the termination of its stem; thus,
यया-ख्रद्म् ‘according to faith’ (from यथा and wat); प्रति निज्ञम् ‘every
night’ (from प्रति and निज्ञा); प्रतिःदिशम् ‘in every quarter’ (from प्रति
and fem); अतिनु ‘beyond the ship’ (from अति and नौ)
a. Many of these compounds are formed with the adverbial prepo-
sition सह, generally contracted into स ; thus, सकोपम् ‘with anger’
(from स and कोप); सादणम् ‘with respect’ (स wet); साष्टङ्गपातम् ‘ with
prostration of eight parts of the body;’ सोपधि (i.e. sa-upadhi)
‘fraudulently ;? साग्नि ‘with fire’ P4nini (11. 1, 9, &c.) gives some
unusual forms with postpositions; as, सूपप्रति ‘a little sauce.’
6. The following are examples of indeclinable compounds with other prefixes ;
अनु-ज्येष्म् “according to seniority ;? प्रदयुङ्कम् " over every limb ;’ प्रति.मासम् “every
month’ (730. e); यथा-विधि ‘according to rule;’ TICMfA or यावच्छक्वम् (49)
‘according to one’s ability ;? यथा.सुखम् ‘happily ;’ Tae “ suitably,’ “worthily ;’
यथोक्तम् “as described ;? सनु-छणम् “every moment ; समम् ‘before the eyes’ (778) ;
प्रतिस्कन्धम् ‘upon the shoulders ;’ अधिवृक्षम् ‘upon the tree ° उपमाल्िनीतीरम् ‘near
the banks of the Mélini;’ सनं शयम् ‘without doubt; निविंशेषम् ‘without distine-
tion ;? मध्येगङ्गम् “in the middle of the Ganges.’
c. Analogous indeclinable compounds are found in Latin and Greek, such as
admodum, obviam, affatim, avt1Binv, avr (64१) vareppopor, mapcypna, In these,
however, the original gender is retained, whereas, according to the Sanskrit rule,
obvium would be written for obviam, and affate for affatim. In Greek compounds
336 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHI).
like ०! ५९००४, the feminine 1111 appends a neuter form, as in Sanskrit. In
English ‘ uphill.’
d. The neuter word way ‘for the sake of,’ ‘on account of’ (see 731. Obs.), is often
used at the end of compounds; thus, Say aR “for the sake of sleep ;? कमीनुष्टाना्ेम्
“for the sake of the performance of business.’ See, however, 731, note.
e. There is a peculiar adverbial compound formed by doubling a nominal stem,
the final of the first member of the compound being lengthened, and the final of
the last changed to $i. It generally denotes mutual contact, reciprocity, or oppo-
sition; पड, मुष्टीमुष्टि ‘fist to fist;’ दशडादरिड ‘stick to stick’ (fighting); Waifs
“share by share; केशाकेशि ` pulling each other’s 180; सङ्भाङ्कि ‘ body to body :'
बाहूबाहवि ‘arm to arm;’ नखानखि ‘scratching each other.’
f. Something in the same manner, अन्य and UC, ‘another,’ are doubled ; thus,
सन्योन्यम्, परस्परम्, ‘one another,’ ‘mutually,’ “together.”
RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (MOSTLY EQUIVALENT TO BAHU-VRIHI).
761. The compounds in the preceding four divisions are generally
terminated by substantives, the sense of each being in that case
absolute and complete in itself. Most of such compounds may be
used relatively, that is, as epithets of other words, the final substan-
tive becoming susceptible of three genders, like an adjective (see 108,
119, 130, 134. a). We have given the name relative to compounds
when thus used, not only for the obvious reason of their being
relatively and not absolutely employed, but also because they
usually involve a relative pronoun, and are sometimes translated
into English by the aid of this pronoun, and are, moreover, resolved
by native commentators into their equivalent uncompounded words
by the aid of the genitive case of the relative (यस्य). Thus, Fenway
is a Descriptive compound, meaning ‘great wealth,’ and may be
used adjectively in relation ४० पुरूषः, thus महाधनः पुरूषः ‘a man who
has great wealth ;’ or to wt, thus महाधना स्त्री ‘a woman who has
great wealth ;? and would be resolved by native commentators into
यस्य or यस्या महद् धनम्. In English we have similar compounds, as
‘high-minded,’ ‘left-handed,’ and the like, where the substantive
terminating the compound is converted into an adjective.
Relative form of Tat-purusha or Dependent Compounds.
762. Many Dependent compounds (especially those that are instru-
mentally dependent at 740) are already in their own nature relative,
and cannot be used except in connexion with some other word in
the sentence. But, on the other hand, many others, and especially
RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHI). 337
those which are genitively dependent, constituting by far the largest
number of this class of compounds, are in their nature absolute, and
yield a sense complete in itself. These may be made relative by
declining the final word after the manner of an adjective; thus,
चन्दराकृतिः;, -fa:, -fit, ` moon-shaped’ (see 119), from the absolute com-
pound चन्दराकृतिः ‘the shape of the moon’
a. Other examples are, देव-रूपः, -पा, -पम्, ‘whose form is godlike’ (see 108);
सूयै प्रभावः, -वा, -वम्, ‘splendid as the sun’ (108); हस्ति-पाद्ः, -दा, -दम् #,
“ elephant-footed’ (see 57); सागरन्तः; -न्ता, -AA, ‘ending at the sea;’ ATTA,
-न्ताः -*AA, ‘terminated by death ;? कशौःपुतेगमः, -मा, -मम्, or कशै.मुखः, -खा, -खम्,
“headed by Karna;’ विष्णुशमेःनामा, -मा, -म, ‘named Vishnusarman’ (see 154);
पुर्डणीका दः, -सी, - A, ‘lotus-eyed’ (see 778); नारायणाख्यः, -स्या, -ख्यम्, ‘called
Naréyana;’ धनमूलः, -ला, -लम्, ‘founded on wealth;’ लक्ष्संख्यानि (agreeing
with धनानि), “money to the amount of a lac;’ TET SA: , -स्ता, -स्तम्; “having a
club in the hand,’ or ‘ club-in-hand ;’ शस्त्रपाणिः; -fa:, -शि, “arms-in-hand ;’
WTC SA, -स्ता, -स्तम्, ‘net-in-hand ;’ yor faay:, -या, -यम्, ‘on the subject of
flowers,’ ‘relating to flowers ;’ च्यान-परः; -ण, -रम्, ‘having meditation for one’s
chief occupation ;’ तह्धि्यः; द्या, -द्यम्, “having his knowledge.’ These examples
are not distinguishable from absolute dependent compounds, except by declension
in three genders.
2, Similar compounds are found in Greek ; e.g. inne-yAwooos, “horse-tongued.’
4763. Many of them, however, are not found, except as relatives ;
and if used absolutely would yield a different sense; thus, करमुखम्
means ‘the face of Karna,’ but when used relatively, as कणेमुखा राजानः,
‘the kings headed by Karna.’ So also चारचक्षु; signifies ‘the eye of
the spy,’ but when used relatively, as चारचसू राजा, ‘a king who sees
by means of his spies.” See 166. ८.
464. The substantive aufz, “a beginning,’ when it occurs in the last member
of a compound of this nature, is used relatively to some word expressed or under-
stood, and yields a sense equivalent to et cetera. It is generally found either in
the plural or neuter singular; as, इन्द्रादयः “Indra and the others’ (agreeing with
the nom. case ACI: expressed or understood, “the gods commencing with Indra’);
सगन्यादीीनाम् “of Agni and the others’ (agreeing with पूर्वोक्तानाम् understood, ‘of
those above-named things of which Agni was the first’); wacretta “the eyes,
&९. (agreeing with इन्द्रियाणि ‘the senses commencing with the eyes’). When
used in the neut. sing. it either agrees with Waray, ‘the aforesaid,’ understood, or
* पाद् may be substituted for पाद् in compounds of this kind, but not after
हस्तिन्. See 778.
xX XxX
338 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRiHI).
with a number of things taken collectively, and the adverb iti * may be prefixed ;
as, देवानि्यादि “the word devdn, &c.’ (agreeing with पूर्वोक्तम् understood, ‘the afore-
said sentence of which devdn is the first word’); दानादिना “by liberality, &c.’
(agreeing with some class. of things understood, ‘by that class of things of which
liberality is the first’). See also 772. arian
a. It may occasionally be used in the masc. sing.; as, द् ‘brooms, &c.’
(agreeing with उपस्करः ‘ furniture’).
2. Sometimes स्रादिक is used for सादि ; 98, दानादि कम् ‘gifts, &e.:’ and some-
times FTE; as, इन्द्राद्याः सुराः “the gods of whom Indra is the first.’
©. The feminine substantive प्रभृतिः “beginning,’ may be used in the same way ;
thus, SE WIAA: सुराः ‘the gods, beginning with Indra,’ Wat ग्रामनिवासिःप्रभृतीनाम्
‘of those villagers, &c.’
d. Observe—The neuter of सादि may optionally take the terminations of the
masculine in all but the nom. and acc. cases; thus, दस्यश्वादेस् “of elephants,
horses, &c.’ (agreeing with बलस्य gen. neut. of बल ` an army’).
Relative form of Dvandva or Copulative Compounds.
765. Copulative (or Aggregative) compounds are sometimes used
relatively ; especially in the case of adjectives or participles; as,
कृष्णःशुकः, -का, -कम्, ‘black and white’ (cf. Aeveo-uéAas); खाता नुतिः,
RT, घम्, ‘bathed and anointed ;’ पौर जानपदः, -दा, -दम्, ‘belonging to
town and country ;? कृतुपकृतः, -ता, -तम्, ‘done and done badly ;”
शुनाशुभः, -भा, -भम्, ˆ ९००१ and evil’ (754); सान्दरः्िग्धः, -ग्धा, -ग्धम्, ‘ thick
and unctuous ;” निःज्ञन्द्ःस्तिमितः, -ता, -तम्, ‘noiseless and motionless’
(night); गृहीतःप्रतिमुक्तस्य ‘of him taken and let loose.? See other
examples under Complex Compounds.
Obs.—Many compounds of this kind are classed by native gram-
marians under the head of Tat-purusha (P4n, 11. 1, 69), though the
accent in many conforms to the rule for Bahu-vrihi (v1. 2, 3).
Relative form of Karma-dhdraya or Descriptive Compounds.
766. A greater number of compound words may be referred to
this head than to any other. Every style of writing abounds with
them ; thus, wargfa:, -fa:, -fa, ‘whose strength is small’ (119).
a. Other examples are, ART FS:, -त्का, "त्वम्? “whose strength is great’ (108,
see also 778); महा-तेजाः, -जाः, -जः; “whose glory is great’ (164. a); सअत्पधनः,
-ना, -नम्ः “whose wealth is 5081 ;' महात्मा, -त्मा, -त्म; (711०1०१९ ' (151);
उदारचरितः, -ता, -तम्, ‘of noble demeanour ;? TET, -स्या, -त्यम्, ‘having
* Sometimes evam is prefixed; as, एवमादीनि प्रलापानि ‘lamentations begin-
ning thus.’
RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRIHI). 389
many fish;’ स्वल्प-सलित्ठः, -ला, -wA, “having very little थलः; UfwMyfE:,
दधिः, -द्धि, ‘of wise intellect’ (ग 19); प्रियभावः, ~या, -येम्, “having a dear फा
अशक्य.सन्धानः, -ना, -AA, ‘not to be reconciled ;’ संवृत.संवायेः, agreeing with
राज्ञा, ‘a king who conceals what ought to be concealed.’
5. Occasionally the feminine of the adjective appears in the compound; as,
घष्ठीभायै having a sixth wife.” Compare 755. 5
767. Although a passive participle is not often prefixed to a
noun in an absolute sense, this kind of combination prevails most
extensively in the formation of relative compounds; as, प्राप्तकालः,
“31, -लम्, ‘whose time has arrived.’
a. Other examples are, नितेन्दियः, - यम्; whose passions are subdued
शान्त-चताः;, -ताः, -तः, “whose mind is composed ;’ सहु षएट-मनाः, -नाः, -नः, whose
mind is rejoiced’ (see 164); MATS, -शा, -शम्, “whose hopes are broken;
हतःसनज्यः, -ज्याः, -ज्यम्, “whose kingdom is taken away ;’ अमिततेजाः, -जाः,
~जः;, ‘whose glory is boundless ;’ असत्रमृदयुः; -द्युः, --्युः “whose death is nears’
कृतःकामः, -माः -मम्ः “whose desire is accomplished,’ i. e. ‘successful ;’ कृत.भो-
जनः; -ना, AA, “one who has finished eating ;’ अनधिगतःशास्त्रः > -स्त्रा, -स्त्रम्ः ‘one
by whom the S4stras have not been read;’ भिनर-हृदयः, -या, -यम्, or Tega,
“whose heart is pierced ;? जित-शतुः › -तुः, -तुः “who has conquered his enemies ;’
दिन केशः, नसा, -शम्? “having the hair cut;’ मिताशनः; -ना, -नम्, “ eating
sparingly ;' पूत-पापः, -पा, -पम्, ‘purified from sin.’
b. The suffix क ka is often added; as, ₹इतश्रीकः, -का, -कम्, ^€ of fortune ;”
हेतत्विद् कः; ट् का, -ट्कम्; “shorn of (his) beams.’ Cf. 769. a
c. Examples of Greek and Latin compounds of this kind are, weyarc-Keparos,
Peyaro-pntis, AevKo-TTEpOS, WoAUV-YpUTOs, YpuTEo-TTEPAVES, 0४.22.०० ००५,
९०१५८702; magn-animus, longi-manus, multi-comus, albi-comus, multi-vius, atri-
color. In English compounds of this kind abound; e.g. ‘blue-eyed,’ ‘narrow-
minded,’ * good-tempered,’ ^ pale-faced,’ &c.
Relative form of Dvigu or Numeral Compounds.
768. Numeral or Dvigu compounds may be used relatively ; as,
द्विःपशेः, -णी, -णेम्, ‘two-leaved ; वि-लोचनः, -ना or -नी, -नम्, *tri-ocular.’
a. Other examples are, ति.मूषेः, -धोा, -पेम्, * three-headed’ qa being substituted
for FA, see 778); चतुमखः, -खी, -खम्, ‘ four-faced चतुष्कोणः, -णा,
quadrangular ;' साता, -ण, -एम्, hundred-gated ष्वतुविद्यः, द्या, -द्यम्; pos-
sessed of the four sciences’ (108); AZAR, -at, “4A, ` thousand eyed’ (see 778)3
Wa TIAL, -ना, -नम्? “having the wealth of five bullocks.’
Relative form of Compounds with Adverbial Prefixes.
769. The adverbial compounds most frequently employed rela-
tively as adjectives are those formed with the adverbial preposition
xs 2
340 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (BAHU-VRiHI).
‘ag ‘with,’ contracted into स; thus, सक्रोधः, -धा, -धम्, ‘angry’ (lit.
‘with-anger,’ ‘having anger’); wwe, -ला, -लम्, ‘fruitful’ (108);
wary, -न्धुः, -न्धु, ‘possessed of kindred’ (119); #4, -AT, -AA,
‘energetic ;? सजीवः, -वा, -वम्, ‘ possessed of life,’ ‘living ;” सानन्दः,
-न्दा, -न्दम्, ‘joyful ; wafaa:, -वा, -वम्, ‘accompanied by ministers 52
aa: ‘accompanied by a wife,’ ‘having a wife ;? सज्यः, -ज्या, -ज्यम्,
° strung’ (as a bow, lit. ‘ with-bowstring’).
Obs.—When adverbial compounds like यथोक्तम् (760. 8) are used at the begin-
ning of relative compounds, the final म् is dropped; e.g. यचाक्त व्यापारः, -T, -एम्?
“employed in the manner described.’
a. The suffix कृ ka (80. LVI) is often added to this kind of compound ; as, स-प्रीकः,
~का, -कम्, ‘possessed of fortune;’ सस्त्रीकः > 7H, “HA, “accompanied by women.’
2. In some compounds सह् remains; as, सह-वाहनंः ‘with his army;’? Wea:
‘along with his son.’
©. स 18 also used for समानं ‘same ;’ as, स.गोवः, -al, -वम्, ‘of the same family.”
d. There are of course many examples of nouns combined with adverbial prefixes,
so as to form relative compounds, which cannot be regarded as relative forms of
Avyayi-bhava; thus, उद् युधः; -धा, -धम्, ‘with uplifted weapon ;’ नानाप्रकारः,
-ण, -रम्, ‘of various shapes ;” क्व.निवासः, -सा, -सम्, “where dwelling?’ क्तनन्मा,
"न्मा, -न्म, ‘where born?’ निर्पपधः,; -धाः, -धम्, “without fault ;’ निराहारः, -रा,
-रम्ः ‘having no food;’ अपनी; भीः, -भि, ‘fearless’ (123.2); तथयाःविधः °» -धा, -धम्,
‘of that kind,’ ‘in such a state ;’ दवैः दधिः, -द्धि, ‘ weak-minded ;’ दुष्प्रकृतिः,
-तिः, -ति, ‘ill-natured ;? सुमुखः, -खा or -खी, -WA, ‘handsome-faced ;’ सुबुद्धिः,
-द्धिः, द्धि, ‘of good understanding.’ Some of the above may be regarded as
relative forms of Descriptive compounds, formed with indeclinable prefixes; see
756. Similar compounds in Greek and Latin are, av-7jn€p0¢, €U-Oy Acs, in-imicus,
in-feliz, dis-similis, semi-plenus.
९. Observe—The adverbial prefixes दुस् and सु (726. d. f) impart a passive sense
to participial nouns of agency, just as duo and ed in Greek; thus, दुष्कर ' difficult
to be done,’ मुकर ‘easy to be done; you “difficult to be obtained,’ Yr ‘easy
to be attained ;* दुस्तर ‘difficult to be crossed.’ Cf. eUpopos, “easy to be borne;’
vomopos, ° difficult to be passed,’ &c.
^ स.नायः, -या, -घम्,; “possessed of a master,’ is used at the end of compounds
to denote simply “possessed of,’ ‘furnished with ;’ thus, वितानःसनापं शित्कातत्म्
*a stone-seat furnished with a canopy ;’ शिलापटःसनायो AW: ‘an arbour having
a marble-slab as its master,’ i. €. ‘furnished with,’ ‘ provided with,’ &c. Similarly,
बहुःवकःसनाथो वटःपाद्पः ‘a fig-tree occupied by a number of cranes.’
9. Observe—The relative form of a compound would be marked in Vedic San-
skrit by the accent. In the Karma-dhéraya compound mahd-béhu, “great arm,’
the accent would be on the last syllable, thus महानाह्; but in the Relative mahd-
béhu, ‘ great-armed,’ on the ante-penultimate, thus, महाबाहू. So, native com-
mentators often quote as an example of the importance of right accentuation, the
COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS. 341
word Indra-Satru, which, accented on the first syllable, would be Bahu-vrihi (see
Pan. शा. 2, 1, by which the first member retains its original accent); but accented
on the penultimate would be Tat-purusha. The sense in the first case is ‘having
Indra for a conqueror or destroyer ;’ in the second, “the destroyer of Indra.’
¢ Note, that STA and BY (80. LXXIX) are used at the end of relative com-
pounds to denote “composed of,’ ‘consisting of ;? but are more frequently found
at the end of complex relatives; see 774.
COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.
770. We have now to speak of complex compound words,
or compounds within compounds, which form a most remarkable
feature in Sanskrit composition. Instances might be given of
twenty or thirty words thus compounded together; but these are
the productions of the vitiated taste of more modern times, and
are only curious as shewing that the power of compounding words
may often be extravagantly abused. But even in the best specimens
of Sanskrit composition, and in the simplest prose writings, four, five,
or even six words are commonly compounded together, involving
two or three forms under one head. It will be easy, however, to
determine the character of the forms involved, by the rules pro-
pounded in the preceding pages.
Instances of absolute complex compounds, whose sense is complete
and unconnected, are not rare.
The following are examples: कालान्तरावृच्निःशुभाणुभानि “good and evil
(occurring) in the revolutions of the interval of time,’ the whole being a dependent.
involving a dependent anda copulative ; सेना-पति-वलाध्यक्षौ the general of the
army and the overseer of the forces, the whole being a copulative, involving two
dependents ; शोकाराति-भयःताणम् “the protection from sorrow, enemies, and perils,’
the whole being a dependent, involving an aggregative ; अवधीरितःसुट्द्धाक्यम् “the
disregarded words of a friend,’ the whole being a descriptive, involving a dependent
शुक्ान्नर.मास्य.दाम a white robe and a string of garlands,’ the whole being a copu-
lative, involving २, descriptive and dependent; सवे शास््र.पारागः “ one who has gone
to the opposite bank ( pdra) of all the S4stras,’ i.e. one who has read them through;’
मृत-सिंदास्यीनि ‘the bones of a dead lion.’
771. Complex compounds are generally used as adjectives, or
relatively, as epithets of some other word in the sentence; thus
गल्ित-नख-नयनः, -नी whose nails and eyes were decayed,’ the
whole being the relative form of descriptive, involving a copulative ;
छः सामः करदः ‘having a throat emaciated with hunger,’ the whole being
the relative form of descriptive, involving a dependent.
844 COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS.
a. Other examples are, शुक्त मास्यातुलेपनः, Wl, -नम्, “having a white garland
and unguents,’ the whole being the relative form of copulative, involving a
descriptive ; पीनःखन्धोरू.वाहुः “broad-shouldered and strong-armed,’ the whole
being a copulative, involving two descriptives ; पूवै-जन्म.कृतः, ता, -तम्, “done in a
former birth,’ the whole being a dependent, involving a descriptive ; विद्या;व-
args, -डा, -डम्, ‘advanced in learning and age,’ the whole being a dependent,
involving a copulative ; हपितःत्रग्र॒नो-दीनः; -ना, -नम्, “having fresh garlands,
and being free from dust,’ the whole being the relative form of copulative,
involving a descriptive and dependent ; अभिषेकाद्रशिणः › -सः, -रः, “whose head
was moist with unction ;’ यथेग्ित.मुखः > -खा or -खी, “aA, “having the face turned
in any direction one likes ;? Yoagulen:, -स्ता, -स्तम्? spear and club in hand;’
श्करत-निवैदोचितः, ता, -तम्ः “sufficient for support during one night’ (see 778) 5
ऋग्यजुः-सामास्य-तयःग्रन्याथाभिज्ञाः (086 who are acquainted with the meaning of
the three Vedas, called Rig, Yajur, and Sama,’ WEVA AT AAT: “biting
their lips and having red eyes’ (agreeing with UTA); यरद्रोहःकमे-धीः ‘injuring
another by action or by intention.’
472. The substantive आदि, ‘a beginning,’ often occurs in complex relative
compounds, with the force of et cetera, as in simple relatives at 764; thus, जक सा-
रिकादयः ‘parrots, starlings, &c.’ (agreeing with ufam: ‘birds beginning with
parrots and starlings’), the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving
an aggregative ; सन्धिविग्रदादि peace, war, &c.’ (agreeing फ परूवाक्रम् under-
stood) ; गृहःदेवागागदिःयुक्तः » “Hl, -क्तम्› possessed of houses, temples, &c
afcquraere afte gare, “क्ती, -HA, possessed of property such as elephants,
horses, treasure, &c.’
a. Similarly, ST in the example TAA TTP: (agreeing with Wi: ‘ garlands
possessing the best odour and other qualities’).
473. Long complex compounds may be generally translated by beginning at the
last word and proceeding regularly backwards, as in the following: मत्त-मधुकरनि-
करमुक्तकद्धारमिलितःकोकिल्तालापःसङ्गीतक सुखावहः, -हा, -हम्› ‘causing pleasure
by the music of the voice of the cuckoo, blended with the hum emitted by the
swarms of joyous bees.’
444. सात्मक or कूप, at the end of a complex relative, denotes ‘composed of;’
thus, रस्य श्च.एयःपदाति.कमेक रात्मकं बलम् ‘a force consisting of elephants, horses,
chariots, infantry, and servants ;’ प्रागजञन्म.सुकृतदुष्कृत.रूपे कर्मणी ‘the two actions
consisting of the good and evil done in a former birth.’
775. Complex compounds may sometimes have their second or middle member
omitted ; thus, अभिज्ञानःशकुनलम् is really a complex compound, the whole being
a descriptive, involving a dependent: but the middle member ससततं is elided
Similarly, शाकपार्थिवः ‘the era-king’ is for Wrarfraafia: ‘the king (beloved)
by the era;? विक्रमोवैशी for चिक्रमप्राप्ोवैशी ' Urvasi gained by valour.
a, Complex compounds expressive of comparison are not uncommon; as,
जलःविन्दुःलोल;चपलः, -cT, -त्ठम्, ‘unsteady and trembling as a drop of कमल
ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS. 343
नत्ठिनी.ःदलःतोयःतरग्लः, त्का, -त्तम्, ‘tremulous as water on the leaf of a lotus;’
the last two examples are complex. Compare 758. a.
8. A peculiar compound of this kind is formed from Dvandvas by adding the
suffix fya; thus, HRATSTA:, -या, ~यम्, “like the story of the crow and the palm-
tree ;” इयेन-कपोतीयः, -याः -यम्, “like the story of the hawk and the pigeon.’
ce. The substantive verb must often be supplied in connexion with a relative com-
pound; as, प्रारम्भसदृशोदयः “his success was proportionate to his undertakings ;?
UtaTarfa ‘on his drinking water,’ for तेन सम्भसि पीते सति.
776. Complex compound adverbs, or indeclinable compounds,
involving other compounds, are sometimes found ; 28, खःगृहःनिर्विंशेषेण
“not differently from one’s own house ;? शब्दोच्चारणानन्तरम् ‘after utter-
ing a sound ;? स्तन.भरःविनमन्मध्य.भङ्गानपेषम् ‘ regardlessly of the curving
of her waist bending under the weight of her bosom ;’ Wa Se yay
‘as seen and heard.’
ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS.
777. There are certain compounds which. are too anomalous in their formation
to admit of ready classification under any one of the preceding heads.
a. कल्प, देशीय, दश्च, हयस, मात, affixed to stems, form anomalous compounds ;
see 80. LVIT, LXX—LXXII, LXXVI.
6. There is a common compound formed by placing WAT after a nominal stem,
to express ‘another,’ ‘other;” as, RATATAT or देशान्तरम् “another place ;’ राजान्तरेण
सह् ‘along with another king ;? जन्मान्तराणि ` other births.’
c. Similarly, मातरं is added to express ‘mere ;’ see 919.
d. पूर्वै or Waa or पुरःसर (meaning literally ‘preceded by’) may be added to
nominal stems to denote the manner in which anything is done; as, AUT TTT ‘with
anger ;” पूजाःपूवैकम् अत्नं ददो “he gave food with reverence.’
e. A peculiar compound is formed by the use of an ordinal number as the last
member ; thus, सारसःद्धित्तीयः “accompanied by the 81952; सीतातृतीयः (agreeing
with समः) “having Sita for his third (companion),’ i.e. including Lakshmana ;
wrarfarta: (नत्टः) ‘Nala made double by his shadow;’ मातूःषष्टा; (पारडवाः)
‘the Péndavas with their mother as the sixth;’ वेदा साख्या न-पच्चमाः ‘the Vedas
with the Akhydnas as a fifth ;’ वृषभेकादशा गावः “ten cows and one bull’ (Manu
XI. 129).
jf. The following are peculiar : व्यक्त जीवितःयोधी “a fighter who abandons life ;’
अक्रुतोभयः, -या, -यम्, “having no fear from any quarter ;? अदृष्टपूवैः, -वै, -वेम्,
‘never before seen ;’ सप्नःरात्रोषितः ‘one who has lodged seven nights.’
g. With regard to compounds like गन्तु-काम “desirous of going,’ see 871.
h. The Veda has some peculiar compounds; e. g. vidad-vasu, ‘ granting wealth ;’
ydvayad-dveshas, ‘defending from enemies;’ kshayad-véra, ‘ruling over men.’
These are a kind of inverted Tat-purusha.
344 CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
778. The following is an alphabetical list of the substitutions and
changes which take place in the final syllables of certain words
when used in certain compounds. They are called by native gram-
marians Samasdénta suffixes. They are properly only added to
Tat-purusha compounds (which include Karma-dharaya).
"ey at end of various compounds for We n. ‘the eye;’ e.g. गवाक्षः ‘a bull’s
eye (window) ;’ ल्टोहितास्षः, -at, “aA, = red-eyed -"-- अङ्गुल for अङ्गुलि £ ‘the finger ;”
०.४ द्रङ्युतः, -ला, -लम् ‘measuring two fingers.’ —WHo for Ales m. ‘joining
the hands in reverence.” for सथ्चन् m. “a 1084 $" €. g. प्राध्वः, -ध्वाः -ध्वम्,
‘distant (as a road).’ gz in Dvandvas for अनडुह् m. “a bull;’ eg. धेन्वनडुहम्
or हौ “cow and एणा.-- अनस in Karma-dharayas for अनस् 11. “a cart,’ ‘a carriage ;°
e.g. महानसम् ' a large cart’ (Pan. v. 4, 94)---सयस in Karma-dhérayas for अयस् ०,
(आ०.*--खङ्म in Karma-dhérayas for खङमन् m. ‘a stone. -अच्र for BFA ^. ‘an
angle ;’ e.g. AlAs, -च्रा, -WA, ‘quadrangular. अष्टा in Dvigus and relative
compounds for अष्टन् ; e.g. सष्टागवम् ‘a car drawn by eight oxen;’ अष्टाकपालः,
-त्ा, -लम्, ‘having eight receptacles. —W8T4 in Dvandvas for अष्ठीवत् m. n. ‘the
knee;’ e.g. ऊर्वैष्टीवम् thigh and knee.’——-®W@q for सस्वि ‘a bone’”—Z or अहर्
for अहन् १. ‘a day;’ e.g. एकाहः ‘the period of one day ;’ पुण्याहम् “a holy-day ;’
अह पैमिः ‘the lord of day.’ "AF for सहन् १. ‘a day;’ e.g. Waren: “the forenoon.’
— 84 for अप् ^. ‘water;’ e.g. stay ` 9 island ;’ अना रीपम् ˆ 2 island.’—S8q for
डमे “a wound’ (Pan. ४. 4, 126).—3@ in Karma-dharayas for JY m. “an ox;?
e.g. ARTE: ‘a large ox..—3E for उदक n. ‘water;’ e. g. SEH ‘a water-jar ;’
wBtae: ‘the sea of milk.’—3T@ in Karma-dharayas for उरस् ५. ‘the breast ;’
e.g. सश्चोरसः A -सी, -सम्ः “broad-chested as a 1086.--उषासा an old dual form
in Dvandvas for उषस् f. n. ‘the dawn;’ e.g. TATA ATA * dawn and sun’ (Pan. vi.
3, 3).--ऊधन् (f. HH) for HUA n. ‘an udder,’ at end of Bahu-vrihis (Pn. rv.
1, 25); e.g. Uteanft ‘having a full udder;’ anit “having two udders ;’ Wat
“having an exceedingly large udder.’ —U for AUS. “water;’ e.g. नूपः; -पा, -पम्,
‘near water,’ ‘watery. —J™ for ऋच्; see 779.—_ HFT for RFT m. “the top,’
‘head ;? e.g. तिःककुत् ‘three-peaked (mountain).’—%q or AT or Aq for क्रु express-
ing inferiority or diminution; e.g. FGM or कोष्ण or कवोष्ण “slightly warm ;’
ATA “a bad letter ;? कापुरषः ‘a coward.’ —— ale at end of Bahu-vrihis for
काक्रुद् m. “the palate;’ e.g. विकाकुत् ‘having no palate.’—@e for कुशि m. ‘the
belly” —@IK for BIT; ०.8. HATTA ‘half a khéri? (a measure).—21fAl for गन्ध
प. ‘smell; e.g. पूतिगन्धिः, -न्धिः, -न्धि, ‘fetid’—a19 in Dvigus for गो m. f. ‘an
ox;’ e.g. पच्चगवम् “a collection of five cows.’ - चतुर for चतुर् ‘four ;” see 779.—
जम् for जाया ‘a wife;’ e.g, जम्पती du. ‘husband and पा. जम्भन् for WA ‘a
tooth ;’ e.g. TU/AMT, -स्मा, -स्म, “grass-toothed,’ ‘ graminivorous..—*1fa for
जाया f. ‘a wife;’ e.g. Jaratft: ‘having a young wife.’—w and ¥ in Bahu-vrihis
CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS. 345
for जानु n. ‘the knee;’ e.g, WY:, -स्ः, -ज्ञ, or WN, -ज्ञा, -ज्ञम्, ‘bandy-kneed.’-—
WE for TAT m. ‘a carpenter ;’ e. g. AAR: “a carpenter who works on his own
account ;’ QTAaTw: ‘the village carpenter.’—a@a@ in Karma-dharayas (preceded
by सम्, Ba, or अन्ध) for तमस् n. ‘darkness ;› e.g. अवतमसम् ‘slight darkness.’—
त्वच for TIA, see 779.— 8H (f. Tat) for Tt ण. ‘a tooth; e.g. सुदन्, -दती, -दत्,
“having beautiful teeth. —2¥ for जाया ‘a wife;’ ९. g. दम्पती ‘husband and wife’
(according to some, ‘the two lords of the dama or house ’).—f€@ at end and feat at
beginning for दिविन् प. “the day ;’ e.g. war fear ‘night and day ;’ दिवा-निशम् “day
and night.’—fegt at end for दिश्, see Gana Sarad-ddi to Pan. ए. 4, 107.— §4 at
end for दुह् “yielding milk;’ e.g. कामदा “the cow of plenty.’—TaT an old dual
form for दिव् f. “heaven ;’ द्यावापृथिव्यौ du. ‘heaven and earth.’ धन्वन् at end of
Bahu-vrihis for धनुस् 7. “a bow;’ e.g. ES Wea, -न्वा, -न्व, “a strong archer.’—
WaT at end for धमे ण. ‘ virtue,’ " duty ;’ e.g. कल्याणःधमो, -AT + -मे, ° एणपम8.--
शुर for धुर् “a load; e.g. TITY ‘a royal load.’—# at the beginning of a few
compounds for च ‘not;’ e.g. नपुंसकः ‘a eunuch.’—¥e for नद्पी ‘a river;’ e.g.
WAAGA ‘the एष]. नस or नस् for नासिका * nose;’ e.g. खरणाः, -णाः, -W:,
or खरणसः, -सा, -सम्, ‘sharp-nosed.’— नामि for नानि f. ‘the navel;’ e.g. पद्च-नाभः
“lotus-naveled,’ a name of Vishnu.— नाव for नो f. ‘a ship;’ but only in Dvigu
compounds and after ardha (PAn.v. 4, 99, 100); e.g. द्विनावम् ‘two boats ;’ अ्धेनावम्
“half of a boat.’ for पथिन् m. ‘a road;’ e.g. सुपथयः “a good road.’-—W@ and
पाट् (fem. Wet) for पाद् m. ‘the foot,’ €. g. पद्धिमम् “coldness of the feet ४? fsa,
~पदे, -पत्; “a biped ;? चतुष्पात् Sa quadruped.’—U for पाद् m. ‘the foot;’ e.g.
पद्.गः, AT, -गम्ः, “going on foot.’ —ga in Dvandvas for J& m. “amale;’ e.g.
स््रीपुंसो nom. तप्र, ‘man and woman,’—¥q for पृतना. “an army. प्रनस् at end of
Bahu-vrihis (preceded by ख, ¥, or दुस्) for प्रजा f. ‘ people,’ “progeny ;’ e.g. वहुःप्र-
जाः, -जाः, -जः, “having a numerous progeny.’ त्रय for ब्रह्मन् ०१. ‘a Brdhman {2
e.g. Fara: “a, contemptible Bréhman.’—4A for भूमि £, ‘the earth;? €, £. TINA:
“land towards the पणी. "सुव in Dvandvas for 4 f. ‘the eye-brow;’ e.g. अस्िःभरुवम्
“eye and brow.’ Aaa in Dvandvas for मनस् प. ‘the mind;? e.g. वाङ्मनसे nom.
du. 1. ‘speech and heart.’—¥ and मही (preceded by पिता, माता, &c., 724. a) for
महत् ‘great ;” e.g. पितामहः * grandfather.’ —AzT at beginning of Karma-dhérayas
and Bahu-vrihis for महत् पा, ^ n. “great ;’ but in Tat-purusha or dependent com-
pounds महत् is retained, as in महदाश्रयः ‘recourse to the great ;’ also before UW
“ become,’ and words of a similar import, as महल्बूः “one who has become great ;’
but FEPIAA ‘an element.’—q4 at end of Bahu-vrihis (preceded by fz, fa, &c.)
for मेन् 71, ‘the 162 ; e.g. द्विःमूषैः, -धा, -धेम् (see Pan. v. 4, 1153; VI. 2, 197).—
मेधस् at end of Bahu-vrihis (preceded by अ, सु? दुस्, WAT, मन्द्) for मेधा f. ‘intellect 2
e.g. SALAM, -धाः, -धः .-- रहस for TEA, after अनु, खव, and AN; e.g. खनुरहसः
* solitary.’ —21Ht at end of Karma-dharayas and Tat-purushas for राजन् m. ‘a king’
‘(see 191.@); e.g. पर्म-यजः “a supreme monarch ;’ देव-णजः “the king of the gods,’
But occasional instances occur of राजन् at the end of Tat-purushas ; e.g. विद्भराज्ञः
Ey:
846 CHANGES OF CERTAIN WORDS IN CERTAIN COMPOUNDS.
gen. ‘of the king of Vidarbha’ (Nala x1. 21).—tT@ at end of Dvigué, Karma-
dharayas, and Dvandvas, for राति £ ‘night ;’ é.g अहोरवम् “day and night ;’
हिणतम् a period of two nights ;? मध्यतः ‘midnight »— 331A (after aq, खव, and
प्रति) for लोमन् १, ‘hair;’ eg अनुलोम मा -मम्, with the hair..—@4@ in
Tat-purushas for Tay n. splendour;’ e.g. त्र्म-वष्वेसम् the power of a Brahman
—FAa in Karma-dh4rayas and Bahu-vrihis for WAR n ‘ virtue,’ ‘felicity ;° e.g
fa: sae, -सी सम्, ‘destitute of excellence or happiness.’ or "AT for अन् ण
a dog;’ e.g. अतिश्चः, छी म्, “worse than a dog ;’ ATW: "a beast of prey;
VTeat: ‘a dog’s tooth.—~@ at beginning of Avyayi-bhavas and Bahu-vrihis for
Wz ‘with;’ e.g. WaT ‘with anger;’ AYa: “accompanied by a son (सहपुतं
would be equally correct). —® for समान् ` 597९ ;* e.g. WHATS: ^ one who eats thé
same cake.’—@@q in Karma-dhérayas and Bahu-vrihis for सक्थि ०. ‘the thigh ;’
e.g. ससक्यः, -क्या, -क्यम्, “having no 15. -- संख in Tat-purushas and
Dvigus for सखि m. ‘a friend ‡ eg. ART: ‘ the friend of the winds’ (Indra).—
सरस in Karma-dhérayas for सरस् 2. “a lake’ e.g. महासरसम् ‘a great lake’—@1a
(after सनु, खव, प्रति) for सामन् n. ‘conciliation ;’ ९.९. HYATA:, -मा, -AA, ‘ friendly.”
-- रतं 7 इलि m. ‘a furrow; e.g. खहत्ठः, -ला, -लम्, ˆ unploughed.’—eq fot
इद् य 7. ‘the heart ;’ e.g. €=TU: ‘sleeping in the heart ;’ सुहुत् m. ‘a friend.’
779. It is evident from the above list that the most common substitution is that
of Sa for the final vowel or final vowel and consonant of a word. Other stems
ending in च्, क्, ज्, न, (५ ष्,स्, may add a; as, त्वच for त्वच् in वाकृत्वचम्
“voice atid skin ;? यज्ञुष for यजुस् in ऋूगयजुषम् "the Rig and Yajur-veda.’ Also रजस
for रजस्, आयुष for आयुस्, शरद् for WE, ट. Also YS for PA in सधेचैः, चम्;
“half a verse of the Veda;’ and aga: “oné conversant with the Rig-veda.’
a. Some words as the first member of a compound lengthen their finals (see
Pan. vi. 3, 117; VII. 4, 4); ९.६. कोटर before वनं (कोटरा-वणम् “a wood full of
hollow trees’); Waa before गिरि (सञ्चरनागिरिः ‘name of a mountain’); fary
before सज् and faa (विश्वा.शट् “a universal sovereign ;’ विश्चामिलः ‘ Visvamitra’),
This is more common in the Veda.
9. Some few shorten their finals, when they stand as the first member, especially
nouns terminating in Siz or = t; eg. शु for Yin wate: f. ‘a frown ^ ग्रामणि for
ग्रामणी in ग्रामरिपुतः ‘the son of a harlot’ (Pan. शा. 3, 61): 80 लस्िसम्पन्नः for
BMT: ‘endowed with good fortune’ (Raméy. 1. 19, 21).
c. A few feminine words in सा dé (such as TAT, सभा, FANT, शाला, कन्या) may
be made neuter at the end of certain compounds; e.g. इश्षु.च्ायम् ‘the shade of
sugar-canes’ (Pan. 11. 4, 22); प्रच्छायम् “a shady place ;’ ईश्वरसभम् “an assembly of
“princes ;’ स्त्रीसभम् “an assembly of women;’ wef (or -शा) ‘a night when
dogs howl.’
2. A sibilant is sometimes inserted between two members of a compound; as,
प्रायश्चित्तम् (for प्रायः चित्तम्) explation of gin; परस्परम् mutually: cf, सास्पदम्
place
780. Numerals, when preceded by particles, prepositions, or other numerals,
COMPOUND VERBS. 347
may change their finals to 8 a; or if their final letter be a consonant, may either
drop that consonant or add a to it; thus, दित (nom. -तास्, -aTa, -ताणि)
“two or three;’? THU (nom. -षास्, -षास्, -षाणि), ‘five or six ;? उपचतुर (nom.
-पस्) ‘nearly four.’
781. अहम् 18 found in the beginning of certain anomalous compounds (such as
अहङ्कार, सहम्मूर्विंका, &c.) for ATI.’
SECTION II.
COMPOUND VERBS.
782. It might be supposed that 2000 simple roots (74. 8) would
convey every possible variety of idea, and that the aid of prepositions
and adverbial prefixes to expand and modify the sense of each root
would be unnecessary. But in real fact there are comparatively
few Sanskrit roots in common use; and whilst those that are so
appear in a multitude of different forms by the prefixing of one or
two or even three prepositions, the remainder are almost useless
for any practical purposes, except the formation of nouns. Hence
it is that compound verbs are of more frequent occurrence than
simple ones.
They are formed in two ways: 1st, by combining roots with pre-
positions or prefixes; 2ndly, by combining the auxiliaries ‘to do’
and y ‘to be’ with adverbs, or nouns converted into adverbs.
Compound Verbs formed by combining Prepositions and Prefixes
with roots.
783. The following list exhibits the prepositions chiefly used in
combination with roots:
a. अति ati, ‘across,’ ‘beyond,’ ‘over ;’ as, अतिया, अती (pres. aa, &c.),
अतिक्रम्, “to pass by,’ ‘to pass along,’ ‘to transgress.’
b. अधि adhi, ‘above,’ ‘upon,’ “over ;’ as, अधिष्ठा ‘to stand over,’ ‘to preside’
(pres. अधितिष्ठामि) अधिरुह् ‘to climb upon ;’ अधिशी ‘to lie upon ;”? अधिगम् "+
go over towards ; अधी ‘to go over,’ in the sense of ‘reading.’ The initial Wa
is rarely rejected in Epic poetry; as, fufea for sfufen.
c. We anu, after ;’ 28, अनुचर् to follow ;? अनुष to stand by,’ to perform ;
IF ‘to imitate ;’ अनुमन् to assent ;? अनुभू “to experience,’ “to enjoy
ठ. WaT antar, ‘between,’ ‘within’ (Gr. ev-T0¢5 Lat. in-tus, inter); as, Waray
to place within,’ ‘to conceal,’ in pass. ‘to vanish ware, to be within ° Watt
to walk in the midst.’
e. HT apa, ‘off,’ away,’ from (amo); as, WANA, NIG, सपं (from ST and
ड्), ‘to go away;’ सपनी ‘to lead away ;’ NAGA “to abstract;’ अपवह् to bear
away.’ It also implies “detraction ;’ as, WW4q to defame.
yy2
348 COMPOUND VERBS.
f. अपि api, ‘on,’ ‘over’ (दक), only used with WT and नह्; as, अपिधा ‘to cover
over ;’ अपिनह् ‘to bind on.’ The initial अ a is often rejected, leaving पिधा, पिन्.
` g. अभि abhi, ‘to,’ ‘unto,’ ‘towards ;’ as, निया, Wat, ‘to go towards ;’ अभि-
धाव् “to run towards ;” अभिदूण् “to behold ;’ अभिवद् or BAYT (see धा at 664) “to
address,’ ‘to accost,’ ‘to speak to,’ “to salute.’
h. AT ava, ‘down,’ ‘off;’ as, WIRE, अवतु; “to descend ;’ वेष् “to look
down ;’ AT ‘to throw down,’ ‘to scatter ;’ WIG ‘to cut off.’ It also implies
‘disparagement ;’ as, अवज्ञा ‘to despise ;’ Wafeq ‘to insult.’? With धा, ‘to
attend.’ The initial स a may be optionally rejected from अवगाह् * bathing.’
i. SMT d, ‘to,’ ‘towards,’ ‘near to’ (Latin ad); as, आविश् ‘to enter ;’ ATT “to
go towards ;’ रूह “to mount up.’ When prefixed to गम्? UT, and &, ‘to go,’
and दा ‘to give,’ it reverses the action; thus, सरागम्, साया, रः ‘to come;’ मादा
“to take.’ With चर्, ‘to practise.’
j. उट् ud, ‘up,’ ‘upwards,’ ‘out’ (opposed to नि); as, TAT (48), उदि, ‘to go
up,’ ‘to rise ;” उडु ‘to fly up;’ उद्कन् “to strike up’ (उद् and हन्, 50); FF (उट् and
ट्, 50) ‘to extract ;’ उन्मिष् and उन्मीत्द् (47) ‘to open the eyes ;’ उत्कृत्; उच्छिद्,
“to cut up;’ TAT “to root up ;’ Sieg ‘to lift up’ (उद् and FH, 49).
When prefixed immediately to स्था and WAT it causes the elision of s; as, उन्या
‘to stand प; उत्तम्भ् ‘to prop up.’ In some cases it reverses the action; as,
from नम् ‘to bend down,’ उन्नम् (47) ‘to raise up ;’ from यम् ‘to keep down,” उद्यम्
“to lift up.’ ९
४. उप upa (opposed to apa), ‘to,’ ‘towards’ (४76), ‘near, ‘down,’ ‘under,’ joined
like BT and Wf to roots of motion; as, उपया ‘to approach ;’ उपचर् “to wait
upon;’ उपस्था ‘to stay near,’ “to be present,’ ‘to arrive.’ With fast (cl. 6,
उपविशति), ‘to sit down;’ with ATA, "10 sit near.’
Obs.— 34 with सोपति (from उष्) = उपोषति ‘he burns;’ see 484. a.
1. नि ni (thought to be for primitive ani; cf. Lat. in, Gr. évi, ९५, ely), “in,’ ‘on,’
‘down,’ ‘downwards,’ ‘under’ (opposed to उट्) 3 as, निपत् ' to fall down ;’ नियम्
“to suppress ; निमिष् and निमील् “to close the eyes ;’ निक्षिप्, निधा, न्यस्, “to
lay down,’ ‘to deposit ;? निविभ् “to go within,’ ‘to encamp.’ With चृत्, ‘to return,”
“to desist ;’? with YA, ‘to hear.’ In some cases it does not alter, or simply
intensifies the sense; as, निहन् ‘to kill outright.’
m. निस् nis, ‘out;’ as, निष्क्रम् (69. a), निगम्, निःसृ, “to go out,’ “to come out ;’
निष्कृत् ' to cut ए; निवत् “to come to an end,’ ‘to cease;’ Taf ‘to determine.’
n. परां pard, ‘back,’ * backwards’ (rapa), combined with नि and Zin the sense
of ‘defeat ;’ as, पराजि ‘to overcome’ (cf. TapavKaw); पराभू ‘to be defeated.’
With &, cl. 2, it signifies ‘to retreat’ (pres. परैमि); with ¥ or WY, 0]. 1, Atm., “to
run away,’ pard being changed to pald (pres. पलाये).
०. परि pari, ‘around,’ ‘about? (epi, per); as, परिपेष्, uf, ‘to surround ;°
परिचर्, परिगम्, “to go round ;’ परस् ' to look round,’ ‘to examine ;? परिवृत् ‘to
turn round ;’ परात् to run round.’ When prefixed to कु it signifies ` to adorn,’
and स् is inserted, परिष्कृ. With भू; ‘to despise,’ and with @, ‘to avoid” It
COMPOUND VERBS, 349
sometimes merely gives intensity or completeness to the action; as, Line bg to
abandon altogether ;’ परिज्ञा ‘to ascertain completely
p. प्र pra, ‘before,’ forward’ (*p0, pro, pre); as, WTA, WAT, ‘to proceed ;’
प्रयम् to set before,’ “to present ;’ Way to begin; प्रवृत् to proceed,’ to begin;
प्रधाव् to run forward ;’ प्रस्या ‘to set out,’ “to advance ;’ प्रभू to be superior,’ ‘to
prevail ;’ Wg ˆ ४० foresee.’ With लन्, “to deceive.
Obs.—¥ with ऋच्छति ‘he goes,’ makes Wresfa (or प्रादेति) he goes on quickly
(38.f); Wwith VIF, causal stem of इष् to go,’ makes प्रेषयामि ‘I send Similarly,
प्र ¬+ रजते = प्रेजते “he trembles ; and W-+ सोषति (from उष्) = ग्रोषतिं ‘he burns
See 784. a.
The r of pra influences a following n by 58; as, HUA ‘to bend before,’ “to salute.’
Sometimes W does not alter the sense of a root, as 771 प्राप् (0 obtain’ (see 681).
q. प्रति prati, ‘against,’ ‘to,’ ‘towards,’ ‘near,’ ‘at,’ “back again’ (pos); as,
प्रतियुध् ‘to fight against;’ प्रती ‘to go towards’ (08. प्रत्येमि) ; प्रतिगम् “to go
towards,’ ‘ to return; प्रतिवस् ‘to dwell near or at ;’ प्रतिकृ “to counteract ; प्रतिहन्
to beat back,’ “to repel;’ प्रतिवच् “to answer ;’ UAT “to recover;’ प्रतिनी ‘to
lead. back ;’ प्रतिनन्ट् ‘to re-salute.” With शु» to promise ;’ with पट्? “to arrive at,’
to obtain ;’ with ईष् to wait for,’ ‘to expect.’
r. fa vi, ‘ apart,’ ^ asunder,’ implying ‘separation,’ ‘ distinction,’ ‘ distribution,’
‘dispersion’ (Latin dis-); as, विचर् ‘to wander about';’ विचल् ` to vacillate; fare
“to roam for pleasure ;’ विकृ ‘to dissipate ;” fag “to tear asunder ;’ विभन् “to
divide ;’ विविच् “to distinguish.” Sometimes it gives a privative signification ; as,
वियुज् ‘to disunite;’ विस्मृ ‘to forget; विक्री ‘to sell.’ With कृ, ‘to change for
‘the worse.’ Sometimes it has little apparent influence on the root; as, विनम् ‘to
perish,’ or ‘to perish entirely ; विचिन्त् ‘to think.’
$. सम् sam, ‘with,’ ‘together with’ (०४) con); as, afa, WHF, to collect ;’
WAH to join together ;* Aj to meet together ;? WATE to happen : सद्भिप् to
contract.’ With कृ it signifies “to perfect,’ and & is inserted, FH. It is often
prefixed without altering the sense; as, WH ‘to be produced.’
" ४. दुस् dus, ‘badly,’ and FZ su, “well,” are also prefixed to verbs or verbal deriva-
tives; see 726. d.f.
u. Also other indeclinable prefixes; thus, अस्तम् ‘decline’ is compounded with
“Zin the sense of ‘to go down,’ ‘to set;’ तिरस् ‘across,’ with धा in the sense of
“to conceal,’ with गम् “to disappear,’ with a “to revile ;” प्रत् with भा ‘to believe.”
484. Two prepositions are often combined with a root; as, व्यादा
(वि + खा) ‘to open;’ agg (cl. 10) ‘to kill;? उपागम् (उप + आ) ‘to go
under, ‘to undergo,’ ‘to arrive at ;? समे (सम् + चा + rt. द्) ‘to assemble ;’
प्रणिपत् (प्र + नि, 58) ‘to prostrate one’s self ;’ we प्र + उट् + 1. हु) ‘to
raise up:’ and occasionally three; as, wate (प्र + वि + सा) ‘to predict ;”
अद्युदाह (प्रति + 3¢+ 1) ‘to answer.’ Other combinations of three
prepositions, occasionally prefixed to roots, are सं +उप +31; अभि +
वि+खा; सं+अभि+प्र; उप+सं+प्र; चनु +सं+वि.
850 COMPOUND VERBS.
a. Observe— Final a and स्ना ¢ of a preposition combine with the initial
SH ri of a root into dr, and are rejected before initia] र e and शमो (except in forms
from the roots इ 4, “to go,’ and एध् “to increase), see 38. f.g; and see W and
उप above: but in other cases prepositions ending in vowels combine with roots
beginning with vowels according to the rules of Sandhi; thus, स्रा with ¥ ‘to go’
becomes ट (32), and in pres, रमि (at + रमि 33), &९.; in impf, STW, wy (645,
33), &c.; in pot. र्याम् (सा + इयाम्) &८.; in impv. BTatfa (खा + यानि), &e
Similarly, सप with एमि becomes HAMA by 33
2. Observe also, a sibilant is generally ingerted between the prepositions अप,
उप, परि, प्रि, सम्, and the roots कृ “to do’ and कृ “to scatter ;? see above under
परिणत सम्. Similarly, from WA and & is formed WATCH ‘ excrement.’
e. The final £ of सति, प्रति, परि, नि, is optionally lengthened in forming certain
nouns from compound verbs; as, अतीसारः, प्रतीकार, परीटास 5 नीकार.
785. In conjugating compound verbs formed with prepositions,
neither the augment nor the reduplication change their position,
but remain attached to the root*; as, पयेणयम्, impf. of at, with परि;
उपाविशम्, impf. of fam, with उप; खन्वतिषठम्, impf. of स्या, with अनु;
प्रतिजघान, perf. of हन्, with प्रति; प्रोज्जहार perf. of हु, with wand उट्.
a. In the Veda, as in Homer, prepositions may be separated from
the root by other words ; as, आ त्वा विशन्तु ‘let them enter thee.’
786. Grammarians restrict certain roots to either Parasmai-pada
or Atmane-pada when in combination with particular prepositions
or when peculiar meanings are involved. Most of the examples
specified by P4nini (1. 3, 1-93) are here added. The 3rd sing.
present will be given, the termination either in ¢i or ¢e marking the
Pada to which in each case the root is supposed to be limited.
स् “to throw’ is generally Parasmai, and BX “to reason’ is generally
Atmane, but combined with any preposition may take either Pada.—®@ ‘to do;
anu-karoti, “he imitates ;’? adhi-kurute, “he overcomes ;’ ut-kuwrute, he informs
against,’ ‘reviles;’ ud-d-kurate, “he reviles;’ upa-kurute, “he worships ;’ upa-s-
kurute (784.6), ‘he prepares ;’ upa-s-karoti, “he polishes ; pard-karoti, ‘he rejects He
pra-kurute, ‘he offers violence,’ ‘he recites (stories).’—# “to scatter ;? apa-s-kirate
(784.8), ‘he (the cock) throws up earth ;’ but apa-kirati, “he scatters (as flowers).’
- क्रम् ‘to go;? d-kramate, ‘he (the sun) ascends ;? but d-krdmati when not in the
* There are a few exceptions to this rule in the Maha-bhérata ; as in अन्वसरत्
(Johnson’s Selections, p. 33, 1. 14).
+ In Epic poetry, however, there is much laxity; e.g. यत् and wre, which
are properly Atmane-pada verbs, are found in Parasmai. Instances of passive verbs
taking Parasmai terminations have been given at 461.c. On the other hand, 4
“to rejoice,’ which is properly Parasmai, is found in Atmane.
COMPOUND VERBS. 351
sense of ‘the rising of a luminary, &c.;’ vi-kramate, “he (the horse) steps out ;’
but vi-krdmati, “it (the joint) splits in two ;’ upa-kramate or pra-kramate, ‘he is
valiant ;’ but upa-kriémati, ‘he approaches ;’ and pra-krdmati, ‘he पकृ क्री
“to buy ;’ ava-krintte, pari-krinite, ‘he buys;’ vi-krintte, ‘he sells ; but kré alone
takes either Pada.— क्रीड् “to play; d-krédate or anu-kridate, ‘he sports ;’ pari-
kridate, ‘he plays about ;’ san-krédate, “he plays,’ but sam-krédati, ‘it (the wheel)
creaks.’—feq ‘to throw ;’ ati-kshipati, ‘he throws beyond ;’ abhi-kshipati, “he
throws on ;’ prati-kshipati, ‘he throws back or towards.’ —®3J ‘to sharpen ;’ san-
kshnute, “he sharpens.’—71{ ‘to go;’ d-gamayate, ‘he delays or waits patiently ;’
vy-ati=gacchanti, “they go against each other ;’ san-gadchati when motion towards
anything is implied, as ‘he goes towards (the village);’ but Atm. in the sense of
he goes with’ or ‘agrees with.’—] ‘to swallow ;’ san-girate, “he promises,’ ‘he
proclaims ;’ but san-girati, “he swallows ;’ ava-girate, “he swallows.’ चर् ‘to go ;”
wé(for ud )-darate, “he goes astray ;’ ué-Carati, ‘it (the tear) overflows ;’ san-carate
or sam-ud-d-éarate, ‘he goes in 8 chariot. —fat ‘to conquer ;’ vi-jayate, pard-jayate,
“he conquers ;’ with other prepositions ji is generally Parasmai.—t ‘to know;’
apa-jénite, “he denies (the debt); prati-jdnite or san-jdntte, ‘he acknowledges.’
Without a prep. this root is restricted to either Pada if certain meanings are
involved ; as, sarpisho (for sarpishd) jdnéte, “he engages (in sacrifice) by means of
ghee ;’ gdm jdnéte, ‘he knows (his own) cow ;’ svdm gdm jdndti or jdntte, ‘he knows
his own cow.’ नी ‘to lead;’ wn (for ud)-nayate, ‘he lifts up;’ upa-niyate, ‘he invests
(with the sacred thread);’ vi-nayate, “he pays,’ or ‘he grants,’ or ‘he restrains;’ vi-
nayati, “he takes away’ (the anger of his master); vi-nayati, ‘he turns away (hi
cheek).’ Without a prep. this root is Atm. if it means ‘to excel,’ or ‘to ascertain.’—
नु “to praise; d-nute, ‘he praises..— ‘to burn;’ ut-tapati or vi-tapati, ‘hewarms;’
ut-tapate or vi-tapate, ‘it shines,’ “he warms (his own hand).’ Without a prep. this root
is Atm., cl. 4, if it means ‘to perform penance.’—@T “to give;’ d-datte, ‘he receives ;’
vy-d-daddti, ‘he opens (his mouth);’ vy-d-datte, “he opens (the mouth of another);
sam-yatchate, ‘he gives’ (as ddsyd, ‘to the female slave,’ the instr. being used for
the dative). दश् ‘to see ;’ sam-pasyate, ‘he considers thoroughly.’——ATY ‘to ask
for ;’ always Atm. if used with gen., as madhuno ndthate, ‘he asks for honey.’—
Wwe "10 ask ;’ d-pridéhate, “he bids adieu to ;’ sam-pridchate, ‘he interrogates.’—
मुन् ‘to eat’ is Atm. if it means “to eat,’ “to possess,’ or ‘to suffer ;’ but Par. if it
means ‘to protect.’——4¥ ‘to bear ;’ pari-mrishyati, ‘he endures or forgives.’—
यम् ‘to restrain ;’ ¢-yadchate, ‘(the tree) spreads ;’ d-yadchate, ‘he stretches out (his
hand);’ but d-yac¢hati, “he draws up’ (as a rope from a well); upa-yadchate, ‘he
takes (2 woman) to wife;’ but upa-yad¢thati, “he takes the wife (of another);’
d-yaéchate, ‘he puts on (clothes);’ ud-yad¢hate, “he takes up (a load);’ but ud-
yacchati, “he studies vigorously (the Veda, &c.);’ sam-yadchate, ‘he collects’ (or
stacks as rice, &c.) युज् ‘to join ;’ ud-yunkte, ‘he makes effort ;’ anu-yunkte, “he
examines ;’ ni-yunkie, ‘he appoints;’ pra-yunkte, ‘he applies ;’ but pra-ywndkti,
“he sets in order (sacrificial vessels).’—TA ‘to sport ;’ upa-ramati, “he causes to
refrain * ;’ d-ramati, “he rests;’ vi-ramati, “he ceases.’—eQ ‘to cut;’ vy-ati-
* This is an instance of a simple verb involving the sense of a causal.
352 COMPOUND VERBS.
lunite, “he performs cutting (of wood) which was the office of another.’—4q ‘to
speak ;’ anu-vadate, “he speaks after or like’ (with gen.); but anu-vadati, “he
imitates’ (as giram, ‘a voice,’ acc.); upa-vadate, ‘he coaxes,’ “he advises ;’ vi-pra-
vadante or vi-pra-vadanti, ‘they dispute ;’ sam-pra-vadante, “they speak together ;’
but sam-pra-vadanti, ‘they (the birds) sing together ;’ apa-vadate, “he reviles im-
properly 5 but apa-vadati, “he speaks against.’ Without prep. vad is Atm., “to be
learned in interpreting’ (the 8480798), or ‘to be earnest in the study of anything’
(as agriculture, &०.) वह् “to carry ;’ pra-vahati, “it (the river) flows along.’—
fag ‘to know ;’ sam-vitte, ‘he is conscious ;’ say-vidate or sam-vidrate, ‘they are
conscious’ (308).— fast ‘to enter;’ ni-visate, ‘he enters.’— 31 ‘to swear ;” Sapate,
“he swears at’ (with dat.)—¥ ‘to hear ;’ sam-Srinoti, “he hears (the speech);’ but
sam-Srinute, ‘he hears well’ (intransitively).—@aT “to stand;’ ava-tishthate, “he
waits patiently ;’ pra-tishthate, “he sets out ;’ vi-tishthate, “he stands apart ;’ san-
tishthate, ‘he stays with ;’ upa-tishthate, “he worships,’ ‘he attends on.’ Without
prep. sthd takes the Atmane when it denotes ‘adhering to,’ "giving one’s self up
to shewing amatory feelings’ (Pan. 1. 3, 23), as tishthate gopt Krishndya, ‘the
shepherdess gives herself up to Krishna;’ but upa-tishthati, “he waits on’ (not in
a religious sense, and governing an acc.); ut-tishthate, ‘he aspires’ (to salvation) ;
but ué-tishthati, “he rises’ (from a seat).—@e{ ‘to strike ;’ d-hate (see 654), “he or
it strikes’ (‘himself or itself,’ the object being omitted); but d-hanti vrishabham,
“he strikes the bull.’ —® ‘to sound ;’ sam-svarate, ‘it sounds clearly.’ ‘to
seize ;’ anu-harate, ‘he takes after’ (the disposition of his father or mother), other-
wise anu-harati. दे “to call;’ upa-hvayate or ni-hvayate or vi-hvayate or sam-
hvayate, “he calls,’ “he invokes;’ d-hvayate, “he challenges’ (an enemy); but
é-hvayati, ‘he calls’ (his son).
a. Some causals are also restricted to either Parasmai or Atmane, according to
the preposition prefixed or the meaning involved; thus the causal of 4 with परि,
meaning ‘to bewitch,’ is limited to Atm. So also, गृध् (६0 be greedy,’ when its
causal means ‘to deceive,’ is restricted to Atm.: and the causal of a, meaning
"10 deceive,’ takes Atm.; meaning ‘to avoid,’ Par. Again, कृं in the causal, when
joined with mithyd, and signifying “to pronounce badly,’ takes Par.; but ouly in
the sense of doing so once. In the sense of ‘causing a false alarm’ it requires Atm. ;
but the above specimens will suffice to shew the little profit likely to be derived
from pursuing this part of the subject farther.
Compound Verbs formed by combining Adverbs with कृं and भू.
787. These are of two kinds: 1st, those formed by combining
adverbs with कृ ‘to make’ and नू ‘to become ;’ a2ndly, those formed
by combining nouns used adverbially with these roots.
a. Examples of the first kind are, WOR ‘to adorn ;”
साविष्कृ ‘to
make manifest’ (see 72); वहिष्कृ ‘to eject ;? पुरस्कृ ‘to place in front,’
‘to follow ;’ faarg ‘to deprive ;? सत्कृ ‘to entertain as a guest;?
नमस्कृ ‘to revere ;” साघाहू mgd, ‘to become manifest,’ &c.
COMPOUND ADVERBS. 353
2788. In forming the second kind, the final of a stem, being a or ८,
is changed to £; as, fron wat, Waite ‘to make ready, azaty ‘to
become ready;? from कुष्ण, guts ‘to blacken ;? from परिखा *a ditch,’
परिखीकृ ‘to convert into a ditch:’ and sometimes a becomes ¢; as,
Frarg ‘to please,’ from faa. A final é or ४ is lengthened; aa, from
शुचि, शुचीभं ‘to become pure ;’ from केषु, Bg * to lighten” A final
१४ 18 changed to Wri; as, from मतु, मोतीभू ‘to become a mother.
A final as and an become ¢ ; as, from सुमनस्, सुमनीभू ‘to be of good
mind ;’ from राजन्, राजीभ्रू ‘to be a king?
a. But the greater number of compounds of this kind are formed from nominal
stems in 9. The following aré other examples: quay ‘to esteem as a straw; ,
wWaTH ‘to stiffen? एकचि्तीभरू ‘to fix the mind on one object’ स्वीकृ ‘to make or
élaim as one’s own;? मेवीभर ‘to become friendly,’ Substantives are sometimes
formed from these: as, Ratata ‘the state of being friendly,’ * friendship,’
Obs.—This change of a final to ¢ before kri and bhd is technically said to be
taused by the suffix dvi, and the change to द by ddé.
b. These compounds often occur as passive participles; thus, a ‘adorned ;*
WEAN ‘become manifest ;? सज्जौभूतं ‘made ready ;’ BUPA ‘lightened ;’ सवीकर-
WTA ‘to be agreed to.’ ।
789. Sometimes सात्, placed after a nominal stem, is used to form a compound
verb of this kind; a8, from We ` water,’ WAH “to reduce to liquid;’ from
WR ‘ashes,’ भस्मसाक्कु (57) ‘to reduce to ashes.’ Cf. 725. ०,
SECTION III.
COMPOUND ADVERBS,
790. Compound adverbs are formed, 1st, by combining adverbs,
prepositions, and adverbial prefixes, with nouns in the acc. singular
neuter; 2ndly, by placing adverbs, or adjectives used as adverbs,
after nominal stems.
a. The first kind are identical with indeclinable compounds (760).
791. Most of the adverbs at 737 may be placed after the stems
of nouns; thus, बालक्समीपम् ‘near the child ;’ रस्ायेम् ‘for the sake
of protection ; प्रजार्थे ‘for the sake of offspring ;” किमेम् ‘on what
account 2? शब्दोच्वारणानन्तरम् ‘after uttering a sound,’ See also 777. d.
. 492. The indeclinablé participle सार्य, “having begun,’ is joined with सह्य, * to-
day’ (WAT), in the sense of ‘from this time forward ;’ and with the stems of
fords to express ‘ begitinitig from ;’ see 925. प्रभृति is used adverbially in the same
sense; as, AAWAfA ‘from bitth upwards ;” तदाप्रभृति ‘from that time forward’
(see 917).
ZZ
354 SYNTAX.
CHAPTER IX.
SYNTAX.
793. SANsKRIT syntax, unlike that of Greek and Latin, offers
fewer difficulties than the other portions of the Grammar. In fact,
the writer who has fully explained the formation of compounds has
already more than half completed his exposition of the laws which
regulate the order, arrangement, and collocation of the words in a
sentence (vdkya-vinydsa, vdkya-viveka, paddnvaya).
» 194. Observe—In the present chapter on Syntax, that the subject may be made
as clear as possible, each word will be separated from the next, and vowels will
not be allowed to coalesce, although such coalition be required by the laws of
combination. When compounds are introduced, a dot will generally be placed
underneath, to mark the division of the different members. Much vagueness
and uncertainty, however, may be expected to attach to the rules propounded,
when it is remembered that Sanskrit literature consists almost entirely of poetry,
and that the laws of syntax are ever prone to yield to the necessities of metrical
composition.
P THE ARTICLE.
795. There is no indefinite article in classical Sanskrit; but
कश्चिद् (228) and in modern Sanskrit रक (200) are sometimes used to
supply the place of such an article; thus, wafer प्रदे शो ‘in a certain
country ;? कश्चित् शगालः ‘a certain jackal.? The definite article may
not unfrequently be expressed by the pronoun तट् (220); thus, स पुरूषः
may mean simply ‘the man, not necessarily ‘that man” It is,
however, more commonly omitted, and wz when joined to a noun
must generally be translated by ‘that?
५
CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH THE NOMINATIVE CASE.
796. The verb must agree with the nominative case in number
and person; as, अहं करवाणि ‘I must perform.’
_ a. Other examples are, त्वम् अवधेहि “do thou attend;? स द्दा्ि ‘he gives ;
Sra ब्रूवः “we two say; कपोता ऊचुः 1116 pigeons 581 ;' युवा चिन्तयतम् do you
two reflect ;? यूयम् खयात “do ye come ;' सन्ञनाः पूज्यन्ते ` ६००१ men are honoured ;”
चाति पवनः ‘the wind blows ;’ उदेति WIE: ‘the moon rises; स्फुटति पुष्पम् ‘the
‘flower blossoms.’
Obs.—Of course, therefore, two nouns in the singular connected by require
the verb in the dual; as, राजा मन्ती च wag: the king and minister went;
यावच् Weal तिष्ठतः ‘as long as the moon and sun remain.
SYNTAX: । 855
8. The position of the verb is not always the same as in English. It may some-
times come last in the sentence.
797. When a participle takes the place of a finite verb, it must
agree with the nominative in number and gender; as, स गतः ‘he
went ;’ सा गता ‘she’went ;? नार्य उक्तवत्यो ‘the two women spoke ;” सजा
हतः ‘the king was killed ;’ बन्धनानि दिन्नानि ‘the bonds were cut.’
a. Sometimes, when it is placed between two or more nominative eases, it agrees
with one only ; as, स्व-वधूः प्रबोधिता yaa “his wife and son were awakened.’
-b. The following is noticeable: राज्यम् WaT वयं वधूर् नीतानि पणताम् ‘king-
dom, self, we, and wife were brought (neut. pl.) to the state of a stake (to be played
for),’ Kirét. x1. 47. See also 906. 2 1x5
९. Very often the copula, or verb which connects the subject with the predicate,
is omitted; when, if an adjective stand in the place of the verb, it will follow the
rules of concord in gender and number; as, धनं दुलभम् “wealth is difficult of
attainment ;” सावां कृताहायो “we two have finished eating.’ But if a substantive
stand in the place of the verb, no concord of gender or number need take place ;
as, WR: पद्म् सापदाम् “successes are the road to misfortune.’
CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE.
798. An adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun, qualifying a
substantive, when not compounded with it,’ must agree with the
substantive in gender, number, and case; as, साधुः पुरूषः ‘a good.
man ;? मह् दुःखम् ‘great pain;’ wag पूर्वोक्तेषु wey ‘in these before-
mentioned countries ;> atfa भिताणि ‘ three friends.’
“CONCORD OF THE RELATIVE WITH THE ANTECEDENT.
499. The relative must ‘agree with the antecedent noun in gender,
number, and person ; but in Sanskrit the relative pronoun generally
precedes the noun to which it refers, this noun being put in the
same case with the relative, and the pronoun तद् follows in the latter"
clause; as, यस्य नरस्य बुद्धिः स बलवान् ‘the man who has intellect is
strong’ (lit. ‘of whatever man there is intellect, he is strong’).
+ a. The noun referred to by the relative may also be joined with तट्, as यस्य
बुद्धिः स नणे बलवान्; or may be omitted altogether, as यत् प्रतिज्ञातं तत् पालय
‘what you have promised, that abide by;’ येषाम् अपत्यानि खादितानि तैः (पक्षिभिः.
understood) जिज्ञासा समारा “by those (birds) whose young ones were devoured
an inquiry was set on foot;’ यः Ware विषयान् प्राप्रुयाद् यश्च रतान् उपेक्षते तयोर्
विषयापेक्ष॒कः श्रेयान् “he who would obtain all objects of sense, and he who despises
them, of the two the despiser is the best.’
800. ‘The relative sometimes stands alone, an antecedent noun or pronoun being’
ट 2 2
356 SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES,
understood, from which it takeg itg gender and numben; as, शरुतेन fa aa wa
STITH “Of what use is scriptural knowledge (ta one) who does nok practice
virtue?’ धनेन कि यो न ददाति ‘ What is the use of wealth (to him) who dogs not
give २५
¢ Sometimes, though rarely, the antecedent noyn precedes the relative in the
natural order; as, ने सा भाया यस्यांभतान दुष्यति she is not a wife in whom
the husband does not take pleasure
80. ताव्त् and यावत् stand to each other in the relation of demonstrative and
relative; as, यावन्ति तस्य इ प्रस्य वस्तूनि तावन्ति अस्माकम् उपनेतब्यानि ‘as many
products as helong to that island, so many are to be brought to us.’ See also 876
a, Similarly, wet and WET; as, WET Fa aT ge तस्मै कथितवन्तः “as the
event occurred, so they related it to him.’ Cf. 920. a
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
802. Under this head it is proposed to explain the construction.
of substantives, without special reference to the verbs which govern,
them ; and for this purpose it will be desirable to exhibit examples.
beginning with the nominative case.
Nominative Case,
80g. A. substantive simply and absolutely expressed must be
placed m the nominative case; as, दहितोषदे ज्ञः ‘the Hitopadesa ;2
wfgcarary ‘the poem of Bhatti.’
a, Two nominative cases in different numbers may be placed in apposition to
each other; as, तृणानि शय्या “ grass as a bed.’
Accusative Case.
804. Substantives are not found in the accusative, unconnected
with verbs or participles, except as expressing ‘duration of time’ or:
“space.” See. 821,
Instrumental Case.
805. This case yields a variety of senses. The most usual is
that of ‘the agent’ and ‘the instrument” ox ‘means’ by which any-
thing is done; as, मया (उक्तम्) ‘by me it was said ;” व्याधेन (पाशो योजितः)
“by the fowler a snare was 19} ; वेदाध्ययनेन ‘by the study of the
Vedas ;? wa aaa ‘with one’s own eye:
806, It alsq has the force of ^ with’ in expressing other collateral
ideas ; 28, बलीयसा ert ‘ vying with the strong ;’ मित्रेण सम्भाषः ‘ conr
versation with a friend ; ayy: सामान्यम् ‘equality with heasts;’ fag
SYNTAX OF SUBSPANTIVES: 307
7A ‘with the knowledge of (his) father :’ especially when ^ aceom-
paniment? is intended ; as, fywra गुरूः ‘the master with his pupil ;*
आखात्मनापच्मः ‘the fifth with myself, i.e. ‘myself and four others.’
807. The other senses yielded by this case are, ‘through,” “by reason of, ‘on
account of ;’ as, WAT ‘through compassion ;’ तेन सपराधेन ‘on account. of
that. transgression :’ especially in the ease of abstract nouns formed with ताः
(80 LX); 9७, मूढतया through infatuation.
a. “According to,’ ‘by;’ as, विधिना ‘according to rule ;’ मम सम्मतेन “according
to my opinion ;’ जाया “by birth,’
8, “The manner’ in which anything is done, as denoted in English by the
adverbial affix “ly,” or by the prepositions ‘in,’ ‘at;* as, बाहस्येन in abundance
WaT “virtuously ; यथेच्छया ० सखेच्छयाः ‘at pleasure;’ सुखंन at ease; सनेन
विधिना ‘in this way ; महतां स्नेहेन (निवसतः) ‘they both dwell together in great
intimacy ;” (नृपः सवै भूतानि अभिभवति) तेजसा ‘a king surpasses all beings: in
glory ; मनसा (न कतेव्यम्) ‘such a deed must not even he imagined in the mind ;’
मानुषरूपेण ‘in human form,’ प्रतिबन्धेन ‘for a hindrance.’
808. Substantives expressive of ‘want,’ ‘need,’ may be joined with the instru-
mental of the thing wanted ; as, Waal a प्रयोननम् there is no occasion for inquiry
मया सेवकेन न प्रयोननम् ‘there is no need of me as a servant; GUA क्रायम् “there,
is use for a straw.’
809. The price’ for which anything is done may be in the instrumental; as,
waht: GUAT (याति दासत्वम्) * for five Purdnas he becomes a slave ; बहुभिर् Tat
(युध्यन्त) they fight for great rewards.’ Similarly, WU eee aA (श्रीर् न्
लभ्यते) fortune is not obtained at the price of the sacrifice of life
a. So also difference between’ two things ; ४७) त्वया समुद्रण च महद् सन्तरम् ‘there
is great difference between you and the ocean
b. “Separation from,’ either with or without सह्; as, wat वियोगः ‘ separation
from a husband’ (or Wat सह वियोगः). Similarly, विच्छेदो हरिणा सह ‘separation
from Hari.”
c. The English expression “under the idea that’ is: expressed by the instrumental
case of the. substantive वुद्धि; ag, STH TST “under the idea that he was a tiger,’
Double Instrumental.
870. Sometimes when two substantives come together, expressing ‘parts’ of a
common idea, they are both: placed in the instrumental, instead of one in the
genitive; as, वकुकेः पुष्यर वास्यतं “an odour is emitted by. the Vakula-plants by:
their flowers’ (for TRBTAT YER). Similarly, ताम् साश्चासयामास Warfirsy चन्द्-
दके he caused her to revive by her attendants. फ sandal-water.
Dative Cage.
_. 811, This, case. is of very limited applicability, and its functions,
irrespectively of the influence of verbs, are restricted to the expression:
358 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
of ‘the object? ‘motive, or ‘cause’ for which anything is done, or
‘the result? to which any act tends; as, srerfaqga ‘for self-aggran-
dizement ;? sitqmdtarcra ‘for the counteraction of calamity ; wet च
शास्रं च प्रतिपच्चये ‘arms and books (lead) to renown.’
a, When, as in the last example, ‘the result’ or ‘ end’ to which
anything leads is denoted by this case, the verb is seldom expressed,
but appears to be involved in the case itself. The following are
other examples: यत area fardari syd तदपि मृत्यवे ‘where there is
admixture of poison, then even nectar (leads) to death ;’ उपदेशो
मूखीणां प्रकोपाय न शान्तये ‘advice to fools (leads) to irritation, not to
conciliation ;? स वृद्ध.पतिस् तस्याः सन्तोषाय न अभवत् ‘that old husband
was not to her liking ;2 स राजा तस्या रुचये न बभूव ^ that king was not
to her liking ; feat गच्छ “go for the accomplishment’ (of this matter).
6. It will be seen hereafter that certain verbs of giving and relating govern the
dative. Substantives derived from such verbs exercise « similar influence; as,
अन्यसमे दानम् the giving to another ;’ अन्यस्मै RIAA ‘the telling to another.’
९. Words expressive of ‘salutation’ or “reverence ’-are joined with the dative;
as, गणेशाय नमः ‘reverence to Ganesa;’ FMS ति ‘health to thee.’
Ablative Case.
812. The proper force of the ablative case is expressed by ‘from ;”
as, लोभात् (क्रोधः प्रभवति) ‘from avarice anger arises ;” गिरेः पतनम् ‘falling
from a mountain ;” चाराणां मुखात् ‘from the mouth of the spies.’
813. Hence this case passes to the expression of various correlative ideas; as,
TST किच्चित् a portion of (from) their 0००; and like the instrumental it
very commonly signifies “because,’ by reason of,’ im consequence of ;’ as,
गो;मनुषाणां धात् ‘on account of the slaughter of cows and men; सअनवसरप्रवे-
शात् (पुत्रं निन्दति) ‘he blames his son for entering inopportunely ;’ दर्डभयात्
“through fear of punishment ;’ सस्मद्पुण्योदयात् ‘by reason of my good fortune ;”.
फलतो ऽविशेषात् ‘ because (there is) no difference as to the result.’
a. “ According to ;’ as, मन्तिःवचनात् ‘ according to the advice of the minister.’
Abstract nouns in त्वं are often found in this case to express some of these ideas;
as, waafeaa-fararan ‘by reason of the unsteadiness of his. mind :’ especially in
the writings of commentators; as, TATU according to what will be said
hereafter ; स्पष्ेषलसयृषटेषद्िवृतःविवृत सवृतःनेदाह् according to the division of touched
slightly touched, slightly open, open and contracted.
814. It also-expresses *¢hrough the means’ or ‘instrumentality of ;’ as, WTS
UIY,7S: ‘caught in the toils through the instrumentality of the jackal;’ न सोष-
धपरिज्ञानाद् (व्याधे शालिर् भवेत्) the alleviation of disease is not: effected by the
mere knowledge of the medicine.
=-=
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. ` 359
a. ^ The manner’ in which anything is done is often expressed by the ablative ;
it is then used adverbially (compare 715); as, यत्नात्“ with diligence,’ or ‘ diligently ;
बलात् ‘forcibly ;” कुतूहलात् ‘with wonder ;? उपचारात् ‘figuratively; मूलाद् उड़रणम्
“tearing up by the roots :’ or by the ablative suffix तस्; as, खेच्छातः ‘at one’s own
pleasure’ (see 719. ८.8). दु
2. This case also denotes ‘after ;’ as, शरीरविगमात् ' after separation from the
body ;” मुख्य.प्रतिबन्धनात् “after the imprisonment of the chief;? तस्यं आगमनात्
“since his arrival.’
c. So also, in native grammars the ablative case is used to express ‘after ;?
thus, राभ्याम् ' after the letters ra and ha;’ शात् ‘after the letter Sa ;’ ऋवणेद् नस्य
शत्वं वाच्यम् ‘it should be stated that after the letters i and {८ the cerebral श॒ % is
‘substituted in place of the dental न् ५.2
d. In reference to time, ‘ within.’ as, तिपश्षात् ` within three fortnights.’
e. Nouns expressive of ‘fear’ are joined with the ablative of the thing feared ;
as, मृत्योर् भयम् ‘fear of वलम" चरतो भयम् ‘fear of robbers.’
Genitive Case.
815. This and the locative case are of the most extensive applica-
tion, and are often employed, in a vague and indeterminate manner,
to express relations properly belonging to the other cases.
a, The true force of the genitive is equivalent to ‘of,’ and this
case appears most frequently when two substantives are to be con-
nected, so as to present one idea; as, मिस्य वचनम् ‘the speech of a
friend ;2 wat नायीः परमं भूषणम् ‘the best ornament of a woman is her
husband;? न नरस्य नये दासो दासम् तु HAE ‘man is not the slave of
man, but the slave of wealth.’
816. ‘ Possession’ is frequently expressed by the genitive case alone, without a
verb; as, सवैः सम्पत्तयस् तस्य WHY यस्य मानसम् “all riches belong to him who
has a contented mind;’ धन्योऽहं यस्य rut भाया “happy am I in possessing
such a wife.’
a. It often, however, has the force of ‘to,’ and is very generally used to supply
the place of the dative; as, प्रांणा सात्मनो ऽभी ष्टाः ‘one’s own life is dear to one’s
self;’ न योजन-शतं दुरं वाद्यमानस्य तृष्णया “a hundred Yojanas is not far to one
borne away by thirst (of gain) ;” किं प्रज्ञावताम् अविदितम् “What is unknown to the
wise ?? किम् न्धस्य (प्रकाशयति) प्रदीपः! What does a lamp (shew) to a blind man ??
किमया अपकृतं राज्ञः ‘What offence have I committed towards the king ;’ किम्
सपम् अस्माकं (कि समयैः) “What can this man do to us?’
b. And not unfrequently of ‘in’ or ‘on,’ as, स्त्रीणां fasara: ‘confidence. in
women ;’ मम सा यत्त्वम् * dependence on me.’
c. It is even equivalent occasionally to ‘from’ or ‘by,’ as usually expressed by
the ablative or instrumental; as, न् कस्यापि (उपायनं गृहत यात्) ‘ one ought not to
360 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,
accept & present from any one ;” अस्माकं (बनं त्याज्यम्) ‘the wood is to be abandoned
by us;’ स धन्यो यस्य अथिनो न प्रयान्ति विमुखाः ‘he is blessed from whom sups
‘pliants do not depart in disappointments’ नस्य उथसं स्क मांसम् “ meat cooked by
Nala.’
d. ‘ Difference between two things’ is expressed by the genitive; as, सेव्य॑सेवकयोर्
महद् WHT ‘there is great difference between the master and the servant’ (ef. 809.2).
© In fative grammars it expresses ‘in place of ;’ as, उरण् श्परः “an in place of
ri is followed by ra.’
‘ Locative Case.
817. The lécative, like the genitive, expresses the most divefsified
felations, and frequently usurps the functions of the other cases.
Properly it has the force of ‘in,’ ‘ on,’ or ‘ at,’ as expressive of many
collateral and analogous ideas; thus, राघ्लौ ‘in the night ;? ग्रामे ‘in
the village ;? g¥ ‘on the back ;’ त्वयि विश्वासः ‘confidence in you;’
मरू-स्यल्यां वृष्टिः ‘rain on desert ground ;? प्रयम-वुभुद्यायाम् ‘at the first
desire of eating ;’ पृथिव्यां रोपितो ga: ‘a tree planted in the earth.’
` 18, Hence it passes into the sense ‘towards,’ as, छमा Wal च faa च “leniency
towards an enemy as well as a friend ;’ BINT eat ‘compassion towards all
creatures ;” सुहृत्सु अजिद्यः ‘upright towards friends,’ सुकृतःशतम् ससत्सु नष्टम् ‘a
hundred good offices are thrown aw4y upon the wicked ;’ नकेऽसुणगः “love for
Nala;’ तस्याम् सनुरागः ' affection for her.’
819. Words signifying ‘ cause,’ ‘motive,’ or ‘need’ are joined with the locative ;
as, WAWA हेतुः ‘the cause of his modesty ;’ भरूपालयोर् fag? wags निदानम्
“your speech was the cause of the war between the two princes ;’ प्रायेकाभावः
सतीत्वे कारणं स्त्रियाः ‘the absence of a suitor is the cause of a woman’s chastity ;’
नोकायां कि प्रयोजनम् “What need of a boat?’ Also words signifying : employment’
br ‘ éccupation ;’ a8, अथाजेने प्रवृत्तिः “engaging in the acquisition of wealth.’
a. So words derived from the root #uj usually require the locative; as, ममं
राज्यःरक्षायाम् उपयोगः “I am of service in preserving the kingdom.’
b. This case may yield other senses equivalent to ‘by reason of,’ ‘for,’ &6.: as,
मे FATT ‘through my faults,” चारः WOUETUTA सवटोकने ‘a spy is for the suke
of examining the territory of one’s enemies ;’ JF ABSA ‘this is the time for
battle ;” उपदेशेऽ नादरः ‘disregard for advice ;’ का चिर््ना मरणे रणे ° What anxiety
about dying in battle ? és मन्ये पलायने ‘I think the time has come for escaping ;”
पुतस्य अनुमते ‘with the consent of a son.’
९. It is also used in giving the meaning of a root; as, YE उपादान ‘the root
grah is in taking,’ i.e. conveys the idea of ‘taking.’
1 d, In native grammars it expresses ‘followed by ;’ thus डिति means ‘ when any-
thing having an indicatory » follows.’ 80 again, मान्तस्य पटस्य अनुखारो इति ‘in
the room of ऋ final in a word followed by any consonant (कव) there is Anusvdra.’
1 @ The locative case is often used absolutely ; see 840.
NOUNS OF PLACE AND DISTANCE. 361
SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME.
820, When reference is made to any particular division of time,
the instrumental case is usually required; as, विभिर् qa: ‘in three
years ;? हादशभिर् ata: ‘in twelve months;’? waa ‘in an instant;?
कियता कालेन ‘In how long time ?? Tega: ‘in hundreds of years ;’
काल्छ-पयैयेण (or simply कालेन) ‘in process of time;? मासेन ‘in a
month ;? मासमात्रेण ‘in the space of a month;’ waraat काठेन ‘in so
much time.’ ।
821. When duration of time is implied, the accusative case is
generally used; as, चणम् ‘for a moment ;’ अनेककालम् ‘for a long
time ;? कियन्तं कालम् ‘for some time ;? रकं मासम् ‘for one month ;’
विंशतिं मासान् ‘for twenty months ;’ द्वौ मासो ‘for two months ;2 वरपैःशतम्
‘for a hundred years ;’ शाखी; समाः ‘to all eternity ;? जतं वषोणि ‘for
a hundred years ;’ बहूनि अहानि ‘for many days.’ The instrumental,
however, is sometimes used in this sense, and to express other
relations of time; 28, द्वादशभिर् वेषेर् बाणिज्यं कृत्वा ‘having traded for
twelve years ;’ afauurfeaa: ‘for a few days:’ and even the genitive ;
as, चिरस्य कालस्य (or simply चिरस्य) ‘for a long time ; कतिपयाहस्य ‘after
a few days.’
822. When any particular day or epoch is referred to, as the date
on which any action has taken place or will take place, the locative
may be employed ; as, कस्मिंश्चिद् दिवसे ‘on a certain day ;? gata दिवतेः
‘on the third day ;’ इादजञेऽह्हि ‘on the twelfth day ;? इतः सप्रदशेऽहनि
‘seventeen days from this time.’ Or sometimes the accusative ; as,
यां रातिं ते हूतः प्रविशन्ति सर पुणी तां तिं भरतेन खप्नो ge: ‘on the night
when the ambassadors entered the city, on that night a dream was
seen by Bharata.’ ।
a. The adverbs at 731 may often be found expressing relations of
time ; as, षरमासा् ऊध्वेम् or परम् * after six months ;? षरमास्ेन -0" षरमा-
साभ्यन्तरेण Jaq ‘six months ago ;’ or (employing the locative absolute)
पूर्णे qaage ‘after a thousand years.’
NOUNS OF PLACE AND DISTANCE.
_ 823. Nouns expressive of ‘distance or space between two places?
(according to Carey) may be in the nominative; as, शतं क्रोशाः सोमनायात्.
“a hundred Kos from Somandth:’ but they are more properly in’
the accusative ; as, योजनम् ‘for a Yojana;’ क्रोशम् ‘for a Kos;’ or.
3A
862 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
in the instrumental ; 28, क्रोशेन गत्वा ^ having gone for a Kos.’ ‘ The
place’ in which anything is done is expressed by the locative; as,
विदर्भेषु ‘in Vidarbha.’
SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.
Accusative after the Adjective.
824. Adjectives formed from desiderative stems will often be found
governing an accusative in the same way as the verbs from which
they are derived; as, eye जिगमिषुः ‘desirous of going home ;* पुत्रम्
अभीष्सुः ‘desirous of obtaining a son ;* ward fega: ‘desirous of seeing
the king.’
; Instrumental after the Adjective.
825. Adjectives, or participles used adjectively, expressive of
‘want? or ‘possession,’ require the instrumental case; as, 84a eta
^ destitute of wealth ;? Wa: समायुक्तः ‘possessed of riches ;” वारिणा पूर्णो
wz: ‘a jar full of water.’
826. So also of ‘likeness,’ ‘comparison, or ‘equality;’ as, अनेन
सदृशो तोके न भूतो न भविष्यति ‘there never has been, nor will there ever
be, any one like him in this world;’ wrawa gery अधीते ‘he reads
like a Bréhman;’? oro: wey उदयः ‘his success was equal to his
undertakings ;’ mrad: समा Wat ‘a wife as dear as life ;2 दाता सभ्यधिको
Ze: ‘more liberal than (other) kings ;’ wifewa तुल्यः ‘equal to the
sun.’ These are sometimes joined with a genitive; see 827. 9.
Genitive after the Adjective.
827. Adjectives signifying ‘dear to,’ or the reverse, are joined
with the genitive; as, राज्ञां प्रियः ‘dear to kings ;> were: स्त्रीणां प्रियाः
“husbands are dear to women ;? न कश्चित् स्त्रीणाम् प्रियः ‘women dislike
nobody ;” Sut भवति मन्विणाम् ‘he is detestable to his ministers,’
a, Adjectives expressive of ‘fear’ may govern the genitive or
ablative ; as, At tw: ‘afraid of the sage.’
b. Adjectives expressive of ‘equality,’ ‘resemblance,’ ‘similitude,’ sometimes
require the genitive as well as the instrumental (826); thus, सवेस्य समः “equal to
all;’ तस्य अनुरूपः ‘like him ;’ Wet कल्पः ‘rather like the moon;’ न तस्य तुल्यः
कश्चन ‘nobody is equal to him.’
९. So also other adjectives; as, परोपदेशः सर्वेषां सुकरः नृणाम् “giving advice to
others is easy to all men;’ सुखानाम् उचितः “worthy of happiness; उचितः केशानाम्
“capable of toil ;? WATA धृतराष्टस्य ‘unknown to Dhrita-réshtra;’ WAY कल्पः “com-
petent for duty.’
SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 363
Locative after the Adjective.
828. Adjectives, or participles used adjectively, expressive of.
‘power’ or ^ ability, are joined with a locative; as, अध्वनि समा अश्चाः
‘horses able for the journey ;? महति wat wat राजा ‘a king who is a
match for a great enemy ;” अशक्ता TAM शक्ता गृह भन्ने ‘unable to
build a house, but able to demolish one.’
a. So also other adjectives; as, Way FU: ‘ skilled in arms ६ wag प्राज्ञः
wise in trifles;? त्वयि अनुरक्तो विरक्तो at स्वामी ‘Is your master attached or adverse
to you?’ अनुजीविषु मन्दादरः ‘neglectful of his dependants.’
SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE.
829. Adjectives in the comparative degree require the ablative
case; as, Vat प्राणेभ्योऽपि गरीयसी ‘a wife dearer even than one’s life ;”
पुत.स्मशोत् सुखतरः स्पर्शो ल्लोके न विद्यते ‘there is no pleasanter touch in
this world than the touch of a son;’ वधेनात् Wartat wa: ‘the pro-
tection of one’s subjects is better than aggrandizement ;? न Fat (719. 0)
दुःखिततरः पुमान् अस्ति ‘there is not a more wretched man than I;’
afat ore बत्छीयसी ‘mind is more powerful than strength.’
830. Sometimes they govern the instrumental; as, ara: प्रियतरः
‘dearer than life ;’ न सस्ति मया afae अल्यभाग्पतये yfa ‘there is nobody
upon earth more unfortunate than I.’
a. When it is intended to express “the better of two things’ the genitive may
‘be used; as, अनयोर् देशयोः को देशो भट्रतरः ‘Of these two countries which is the
better ?
831. The comparative in Sanskrit is often expressed by ‘ better
and not? or ‘but not ;? as, वरं प्राण-परियागो न पुनर् Fee कमेणि wars:
‘better abandon life than (but not) engage in such an action ;’ वर
मोनं ara aa वचनम् TH Ae WNT (1८ 18 better that silence should be
kept than a speech uttered which is untrue ; विद्यया सह वेदाध्यापकेन
वरं मव्य न तु अध्यापन-योग्य.शिष्याभावे सपाताय रतां प्रतिपादयेत् “a teacher
of the Veda should rather die with his learning than commit
it to an unworthy object, in the absence of a pupil worthy to be
instructed in it,’
832. The superlative degree is usually joined with the genitive ;
as, ब्राह्मणो द्विपदां wet गौर वरि चतुष्पदाम् | WRT गरीयसां we: पुतः स्पज्ञैवतां
वरः ‘a Bréhman is the best of all bipeds, a cow of quadrupeds
Guru of venerable things, a son of things possessed of touch :* but
342
364 NUMERALS.
ometimes with the locative ; as, नरेषु बलवच्मः ‘the most powerful of
men ;” and even with an ablative; as, धान्यानां aye उत्तमः सवै-सङ्गृटात्
* 8 store of grain is the best of all stores.’
a, Rarely with an instrumental; as, नृवीरः करुन्याः प्राणेर् इष्टतमः “a hero dearer
than the life of Kunti.? Hence it appears that comparison may sometimes be
expressed by a superlative suffix. Another example is wan ग्रन्थिनः चेष्टाः ‘ people
well-read in books are better than ignorant people.’
8. A superlative degree may even take a comparative suffix, and govern the
genitive; as, तेषां ज्ये तरः; ‘the eldest of them.’ See 197. a.
c. A comparative word may have a superlative sense; as, ¢eaqc “very firm.’
833. “Comparison? is often expressed by an adjective in the positive degree,
joined with a noun in the ablative or instrumental case; as, नास्ति तस्मात् पृख्यवान्
there is not a happier than 16; सं wat (719. a) महान् “he is greater than I.’
Similarly, TAT विशेषतः ‘more excellently than all.’
a. In more modern Sanskrit ‘comparison’ is sometimes expressed by the use of
पस्य regarding,’ “with reference to’ (indecl. part. of root aq with सप), which
may take the place of ‘than’ in English; thus, दशोपाध्यायान् अपेच्य साचा
STAT TA अपश्य पिता गौरवेण अतिरिक्तो भवति ‘an Aéérya ought to be higher
in estimation than ten Upadhyéyas, a father than a hundred Aééryas.’
834. Many words have a kind of comparative influence, and require an ablative
case, especially वरम्, अवरम्, अन्यः, AAT, अन्यत, इतर, UT, Wa, अधिक, ऊन,
सव शिष्ट, गण; as, प्रछालनात् पङ्कस्य सस्परीनं वयम् “it is better not to touch mud
than to wash it दि; दार्द्िम् अवरं मरणात् ' poverty is less desirable than death 5
कोमां मित्राद् अन्यस् वातु समयैः ‘Who is able to rescue me, other than a friend >?
Porgy दुःखम् अतः परम् ‘What grief is greater than this?” न श्रुताद् अन्यद् विनरूयात्
“one ought not to speak differently from what one has heard ;? तक्कात्काह् सन्यदा ‘at
another time than the present ;’? ATH A HA मरणाट् भयम् ‘there is no cause of
fear to man from any other quarter than from death च्राद्धाहात् (731, 778) wafers
on the day before that of the Sraddha; योजनःशताद् अधिकम् more than a hundred
Yojanas ;? कान्तोदन्तः सङ्गमात् किचिद् ऊनः ‘intelligence of a lover is something
less than a meeting ;? Wate watery the remainder of the food मूल्यात् WIA
five times more than the value
NUMERALS.
835. The syntax of numerals is explained at 206, 207. The following examples
may be added: नवतेर् नयणाम् ‘of ninety men;’ Wey नणणाम् “of sixty men ;?
AZAR नणाम् ‘of a thousand men;’ सहस्रं पितरः ‘a thousand ancestors ;
विभिर गरितं शतम् ‘one hundred multiplied by three ; WALA F ‘two thousand
fruits;’ at तयाणां मध्याद् WIAA: ‘one of these three;’ WHF गा ददौ ‘he gave
ten thousand cows ;’ पच्च श॒तं भृगान् नधान ` 16 killed five hundred deer.
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 365
a. Sometimes the plural of the numerals from ऊनविंशति upwards may be used ;
as, पच्चाशद्धिर वाणेः ‘ with fifty arrows.’
४. The aggregative numerals may be employed at the end of compounds for the
cardinals; thus, सेन्य-इ यम् ‘two armies ;’ frareaqeay “four marriages.’ See 214.
ce. Numerals from nineteen (cna-vingati) upwards may take the genitive after
them of the things numbered; as, WaTaT शातसरस्राणि ‘a hundred thousand of
horses ;’ पत्तीनां सप्नशतानि ‘seven hundred foot-soldiers ;* शतम् सआचायोणाम् ‘a
hundred preceptors ;? गवां Wayratfat पष्िच्च ‘five hundred and sixty cows ;? समगोणां
षट् शतानि विंशतिश्च ‘six hundred and twenty chapters;’ नराणां विंशदधिकशतं =
सहस्रे च ‘two thousand one hundred and thirty men; Wa Taazarfa ‘five
thousand chariots ;? रकतं गवाम् ‘a hundred and one cows’ (Manu x1. 129).
They may be used at the end of genitively dependent compounds; as, qargifa
“eighty Tritas,’ i.e. eighty of Triéas.
Obs.—But the genitive is not admissible after numerals below nineteen 3 eg.
दश AT: ‘ten men’ (not TW नराणाम्).
d. When numerals are used comparatively they may take an ablative; as,
विवादाद् द्विगुणो दमः ‘a fine the double of that in dispute.’
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
836. The-chief peculiarities in the syntax of pronouns have
already been noticed at 216-240, and at 799~8or.
With regard to the alternative of रनम्, &c. (see 223), it is properly
only allowed in case of the re-employment (anvddeSa) of this pronoun
in the subsequent part of a sentence in which इदम् or waz has already
been used; thus, अनेन व्याकरणम् अधीतम् रनं छन्दोऽध्यापय ‘the grammar
has been studied by him, now set him to study the Veda’ (cf. Nala
XII. 31, 32). It is an enclitic, and ought not to begin a sentence.
a. In the use of the relative and interrogative pronouns a very peculiar attrac-
tion is often to be observed; that is, when either a relative or interrogative
pronoun has been used, and an indefinite pronoun would naturally be expected to
follow, the relative or interrogative is repeated, as in the following examples:
यो यस्य (for कस्यचिट्) भावः स्यात् ‘whatever may be the disposition of whom (i.e.
any one);’ यद् सोचते यस्मे ‘whatever is pleasing to ony one ;’ यो यस्य मांसम्
warta ‘whoever eats the flesh of any animal ; Tag गुणाः सन्ति ‘whatever
excellences belong to any one;’ यह् येन युज्यते “whatever corresponds with any-
thing ;’ केषां किं शास्त्रम् अध्ययनीयम् “What book is to be read by whom?”
837. The relative and interrogative are sometimes used together, in an indefinite
distributive sense; as, यानि कानि मिवाणि ‘any friends whatever :’ or more usually
with faz affixed to the interrogative; as, यस्ते कस्मेचित् ‘to any one whatever.’
a, The neuter of the interrogative (किम्) is often joined with the instrumental
3866 SYNTAX OF VERBS.
to signify ‘What is the use of?’ “there is no need of;’ as, श्रुतेन fe na धर्मम्
आचरेत् | किम् त्मना यो न जिनेन्दरियो भवेत् ‘Of what use is scriptural knowledgs
(to one) who does not practice virtue? Of what use is a soul (to one) whose
passions are not kept in subjection ?? किं ते अनेन WAA ‘ What business have you
to make this inquiry?’ किं बहूना ‘ What need of more!’ ‘in short.’
४. As already shewn at 761, a relative pronoun is sometimes rendered unne-
cessary by the use of the relative compound; thus, नगण चन्दिका-धोत-हम्या 18
equivalent to नगरी यस्याम् चन्द्रिका-धोतानि erate ‘a city whose palaces were
silvered by the moon-beams.’
c. The relative, when followed by a pluperfect tense in English, may be expressed
‘in Sanskrit by the indeclinable participle; thus, सिंहो व्याधं हत्वा “a lion having
killed a hunter,’ or ‘a lion who had killed a hunter.’
838. The following examples will illustrate the use of pronouns of quantity and
pronominals: यावत्त: (or यत्संख्यकान्) ग्रासान् भुक्ते तावतः (or तत्संख्यकान्) ददाति
“as many mouthfuls as he eats, so many he gives away ;’ यदि रतावन् मद्यं दीयते
तदा रतावह् Magara ‘if so much is given to me, then I will give so much
instruction ;’ तेषां सर्वेषां MAE THAR: * one out of all those.’ See also 801.
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
839. Nothing is more common in Sanskrit syntax than for the
verb to be omitted altogether, or supplied from the context.
a. This is more especially the case with the copula, or substantive verb; thus;
यावन् Ae fern देवा यावद् AR महीतले । चन्द्रक गगने यावत् तावद् fags
वयम् “as long as the gods have existed in Meru, as long as the Ganges upon earth,
as long as the sun and moon in the sky, so long have we (existed) in the family of
Brahmans ;’ ufc: पारिडित्यम् ° discrimination (is) wisdom.’
Locative and Genitive absolute.
.840, The locative case is very commonly used absolutely with
participles ; as, तस्मिन् जीवति जीवामि मृते तस्मिन् faa पुनः ‘he living I
live, he dying I die ;’ अवसत्रायां weft ‘the night being ended;’ 392
भ्रातरि अनूढे ‘the elder brother being unmarried;? असति उपायान्तरे
‘there being no other expedient ;’ war afm ‘it being so.’ Sometimes
the participle is omitted ; as, द्रे भये ‘the danger (being) distant”, When
the past passive participle is thus used absolutely with a noun in the
locative, the present participle of Wa, ‘to be,’ is often redundantly
added ; as, तरया कृते सति or तथा अनुष्ठिते ‘it being so १००९१.
* Possibly the object of adding the word sati may be to shew that the passive
participle is here used as a participle, and not as a past tense. So also in com-
mentaries सति is placed after a word like सगच्छति, to indicate the loc. sing. of
the pres. part., as distinguished from the उप् sing. of the pres. tense.
SYNTAX OF VERBS, 367
--a. The genitive is less commonly used absolutely; as, WIQETA आआपतन्तीनाम्
‘calamities impending ;' @yaat नराणाम् ‘the men looking on.’ '
९, When the nominative appears to be thus used there are really two sentences $
as, Jet मे समायातः पुण्यवान् अस्मि "my friend having arrived, I am happy.’
c. It is evident that the locative and genitive absolute may often take the place
of the English particles ‘when,’ ‘while,’ ‘since,’ ‘although ;’ and may supply the
place of a pluperfect.tense; thus, तस्मिन् अपक्रान्ते ` when he had departed.’
Nominative Case after the Verb.
841. Verbs signifying ‘to be,’ ‘to become,’ ‘to appear,’ ‘to be
called,’ or ‘to be esteemed,’ and other passive verbs similarly used,
may take a nominative after them; as, राजा प्रजाःपालकः स्यात् ‘let a
king be the protector of his subjects;’ सा निरानन्दा ufmrfa ‘she
appears sorrowful ;’ qratsta प्रतिभाति ‘the village appears like a
desert ;? राजा धमे अभिधीयते ‘a king is called Justice.’
Accusative Case after the Vero.
842. Transitive verbs generally govern an accusative ; as, विश्वं ससज
वेधाः ‘Brahma created the universe ;? पुष्पाणि चिनोति नारी ‘the woman
gathers flowers ;? प्राणान् जरो मुम् षुः ‘the dying man gave up the ghost ;”
ay वजैयेत् ‘one should avoid wine ;? wat ब्रूहि ‘ speak the truth.’
a. Verbs of speaking to or addressing take an accusative; as,
तम् Waaty ‘he said to him ;? इति उवाच wretay ‘he thus addressed
Ayjuna.’ ;
843. So also verbs of motion; as, सरति ata मुनिः “the holy man goes to the
place of pilgrimage ;’ नद्यः समुद्र द्रवन्ति ‘rivers run into the ocean;’ प्रमति महीम्
“he wanders over the earth.’
844. Verbs of motion are not unfrequently used with substantives, to supply the
place of other verbs; as, ख्यातिं याति ‘he goes to fame,’ for ‘he becomes famous ;’
समताम् एति ‘he goes to equality,’ for “he becomes equal ;’ तयोर् मितताम् WANA
“he came to the friendship of those two,’ for “he became a friend of those two;’
Ward गत; ‘he went to death,’ for ‘he died नृपतिं gfe नयति “he leads the
king to satisfaction,’ for “he satisfies,’ &c.
a. The following are other examples : want पीडां परिहरति ‘he avoids paining
others ;? सप्राप्पम् इच्छति “he desires what is unattainable ;’ विद्यां चिन्तयेत् ‘he
should think on wisdom ;’ S34 रोहति ‘he mounts his horse ;’ कमणि अभिर
“they began the business ;’ गतान् मा शुचः ‘grieve not for the departed ध सवेःलो- .
काधिपतवम् रेति “he deserves the sovereignty of the universe 5’ a alas
अधिशोते “he lies down in a cave of the mountain ;’ गां छ्यीर न निवास्पेत्
‘one ought not. to prevent a cow from drinking milk.’ ; .
368 SYNTAX OF VERBS.
845. There are certain verbs which take a redundant accusative case after them
of a substantive derived from the same root; as, wee शेपे ‘he swore an oath ;”
वसति वासम् ‘he dwells ;” वतिते वृत्तिम् ‘he conducts himself ;’ वाक्यं वदति ‘he speaks
a speech ;’ जीविकां जीवति “he lives a life ;’ नदति नादम् ‘he raises a cry’ (cf. the
Greek expressions Aéyw Acyov, १८००० yapav, &c.)
Double Accusative after the Verb.
846. Verbs of asking govern a double accusative; as, देवं वरं याचते ‘he seeks
a boon of the &०१;' धनं राजानं प्रार्थयते ‘he begs money from the king ;’ तं qart
पृच्छति ‘he asks whether he has had a good ablution.’ Of speaking; as, राजानं
वचनम् सत्रवीत् ‘he addressed a speech to the king.’ Of leading; as, t गृहं wate
“he leads him home;’ राज-सुतां राजान्रं निनाय ‘he led the princess to another
king.’
a, Other examples of the use of verbs of this kind are, गां दोग्धि पयः “he milks
milk from the cow;’ ददुर् ufcat रत्लानि ` they milked jewels out of the earth’ (cf.
895. ); जित्वा AS राज्यम् ‘having won his kingdom from Nala,’ i.e. ‘having by
play deprived Nala of his kingdom’ (cf. 895. 2); अवचिनोति कुसुमानि FETA ‘she
gathers blossoms from the trees ;’ तान् प्राहिणोद् यम-सादनम् “he sent them to the
abode of Yama;’ स्त-चेशटितानि नरं गुरुत्वं विपरीततां वा नयन्ति ‘his own acts lead
a man to eminence or the reverse $” शिक्षयामास तान् अस्त्राणि ‘he taught them the
use of arms;’ @ सेनापतिम् अभिषिषिचुः “they inaugurated him general,’ more
usually joined with an acc. and loc.; देवं पतिं वरयति ‘she chooses a god for her
husband.’
Obs.—When verbs which govern a double accusative are used in the passive,
one accusative will remain (cf. 895. 5); as, wa fafax अमृतं ममन्ये ‘the ocean was
churned for nectar’ (Kirat. v. 30).
847. Causal verbs; as, अतिथिं भोजयति अन्नम् ‘he causes the guest to eat food’
(see Pan. 1, 4, 52); त्वां बोधयामि यत् ते हितम् “I cause you to know what is for
your interest;’ fret वेदान् अध्यापयति गुरूः ‘the Guru teaches bis pupil the
Vedas;’ at गृहं प्रवेशयति ‘he causes her to enter the 1०७९; फलः-पुष्योदकं ग्राहया-
मास नुपात्मनम् “he presented the king’s son with fruits, flowers, and water ;’ yay
अङ्कम् सागोपयति ‘she causes her son to sit on her lap’ (literally, ‘her hip’); विद्या
नरं नृपं सङ्कमयति ‘learning causes a man to have access to a king.’
Instrumental Case after the Verb.
848, Any verb may be joined with the instrumental, to express
‘the agent,’ ‘instrument,’ or ‘cause, or ‘manner’ of the action ; as,
पुष्यं वातेन atafa ‘the flower fades by reason of the wind;’ we: क्रीडति.
‘he plays with dice ;’ मेधोऽग्निं वेषैर् निवैपयति ‘the cloud puts out the
fire with its rain ;? सुखेन जीवति ‘he lives happily” See 865.
a. In this sense many causals take an instrumental; as, तां मिष्ट भोजयामास
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 369
“he caused her to eat sweetmeats :' Ufafa: पिर्डान् खादयति ‘he causes the pieces
to be eaten by the birds.’ Cf. 847.
849. After verbs of motion this case is used in reference either to the vehicle by
which, or the place on which, the motion takes place; as, रथेन प्रयाति ‘he goes in
a chariot ;? अश्वेन Warha ‘he goes on horseback;’ मार्गेण गच्छति ‘he goes on the
road ;” Varyaw गच्छति ‘he goes through a field of corn,’ पुषे सागरं नोकया
“he navigated the ocean in a boat.’ Similarly, सुस्राव नयनैः सलिलम् “tears flowed
through the eyes”
a. After verbs of carrying, placing, &c., it is used in reference to ‘the place’ on
which anything is carried ; as, वहति {HT इन्धनम् “he bears fuel on his head ;’ कुक्कुरः
स्कन्धेन उद्यते ‘the dog is borne on the shoulders.’ @ is found with this case in the
sense of placing; as, शिरसा yay अकशोत् ‘he placed his son on his head.’
The following are other examples: शिष्येण गच्छि गुरूः ‘the master goes in
company with the pupil;? मन्वयामास मन्तिभिः ‘he consulted with his ministers ;’ but
in this sense WZ is usually placed after it. WAT भायैया सङ्गच्छति ‘the husband
meets the wife ;’ संयोजयति स्यं za “he harnesses the horses to the chariot 3; युध्यते
wai: “he fights his enemies,’ or शतुभिः सह, &e.; वैरं न केनचित् सह कुयात् ' one
ought not to be at enmity with any one;’ मां दोषेण परिशङ्कते “he suspects me of a
crime.’
85°. Verbs of boasting, &c.; as, विद्यया विकत्यते “you boast of your learning ;’
परेषां यशसा ATT ` you glory in the fame of others.’
a. Of swearing ; as, धनुषा शेपे ‘he swore by his bow.’
2. Of thinking, reflecting ; as, मनसा fat aaa ‘thinking in his mind.’
c. Of comparing ; as, waa उपमीयते प्रमदा ‘a beautiful woman is compared
to a leech.’
851. Verbs denoting liberation, freedom from, sometimes take an instrumental
after them; as, सवै-पापेः प्रमुच्यते “he is released from all sins ;’ देहेन वियुज्यते ‘he is
separated from the body’ (more usually with ablative).
852. Verbs of buying and selling take the instrumental of the price; as, सेर्
अपि मूखाणाम् रकं क्रीणीष्व परिडितम् “buy one wise man even for thousands of fools ;*
गवां सहस्रेण गृहं विक्रीणीते ‘he sells his house for a thousand cows yp क्रीणीष्व तद्
दशभिः सुवः “buy that for ten Suvarnas.’
Dative after the Verb.
853. All verbs in which a sense of imparting or communicating
anything is inherent, may take an accusative of the thing imparted,
and a dative of the person to whom it is imparted. (Frequently,
however, they take a genitive or even a locative of the recipient ;
see 85%.) पुत्राय मोदकान् ददाति ‘he gives sweetmeats to his son ;’ विप्राय
गां प्रतिशुणोति ‘he promises a cow to the Brahman ;? देवदत्ताय धनं धारयति
“he owes money to Devadatta ;? कन्यां wat प्रतिपादय ‘ consign the maiden
to him,’ more usually with the locative; see 861.
3B
870 SYNTAX OF VERBS.
a. Other examples of the dative are, तेषां विनाञ्ञाय प्रकुरूते मनः ‘he sets his
mind on their destruction ;’ गमनाय मतिं दधो ‘he set his mind on departure,’ or
with the locative. नन् मद्यं Waa ‘that és pleasing to me ;’ शिष्येभ्यः ग्रवश्यामि तत्
I will declare this to my pupils ;’ सवं राज्ञ विज्ञापयति ‘he makes known all to the
king,’ these are also joined with the genitive of the person. समृ तत्वाय कल्यतं “he
18 rendered fit for immortality; प्रभवति मम वधाय ‘he has the power to kill me;
तान् मातुर् बधाय अचोदयत् he incited them to the murder of their पनल; पुत्राय
करुध्यति he is angry with his son ;’ इयं मांस पङ्ी जाता Ja WATT ˆ this lump of flesh
is produced for a hundred sons ; नाञ्च से विजयाय ‘I had no hopes of success
Ablative after the Verb,
854. All verbs may take an ablative of the object from which.
anything proceeds, or arises, or is produced; as, wyufa Far TAA
‘the leaf falls from the tree ;’ efat aafa गातात् ‘ blood flows from the
body ;? आसनाद् sfaufa ‘he rises from his seat ;* मृत्पिर्डतः (719) कनै
कुरूते यद्यद् इच्छति ‘from the lump of clay the artist makes whatever
he wishes ;’ विनयाद् याति पाताम् ‘from education a person attains
capacity ;’ निरजेगाम नगरात् ‘he went out from the city.’
855. Verbs of fearing are joined with the ablative, and sometimes with the
genitive; as, ATYC न तया मृत्योर् बिभेति यथा अनृतात् ‘a good man does not fear
death so much as falsehood;’ AT Weare विभीत ‘be not afraid of a noise;
qWis उद्विजते जगत् the whole world stands in awe of punishment fawn a
कृत-पश्चात्तापस्य बिभेमि ‘1 fear thee, a cunning penitent ;’ see 859
856. Verbs which express superiority or comparison govern an
ablative; as, प्रापणात् कामानां परित्यागो विशिष्यते ‘the abandonment of
pleasure is superior to (better than) the possession.’
a, Other examples of verbs followed by ablative cases are, ATATETE सवरोहति “he
descends from the palace ;’ विष्णुः wing सवततार ‘ Vishnu descended from heaven ;’
कनक.सूत्रम् अङ्गाद् अवतारयति ‘he takes off (causes to descend) the golden bracelet
from his body; निवर्तते पापात् “he ceases from wickedness ;? वचनाद् विरणम
he left off speaking ; नरकात् पितर तायते पुतो धामिकः ‘a virtuous son saves
his father from hell; सश्चमध.सहस्रात् सत्यम् सगिरिच्यते ‘truth is superior to a
thousand sacrifices ;” सख.हितात् प्रमाद्यति ‘he neglects his own interest ;’ मितम्
सकुशुलाद् निवास्यति ‘a friend guards one from evil.’
Genitive after the Verb.
857. The genitive in Sanskrit is constantly interchangeable with
the dative, locative, or even instrumental and accusative*. It is
* This vague use of the genitive to express ‘various relations’ prevails also in
early Greek. . ।
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 371
more especially, however, used to supply the place of the first of
these cases, so that almost all verbs may take a genitive as well as
dative of ‘the recipient ;’ e. g. aftgea धनं ददाति ‘he gives money to
the poor;’ उपकुरुते परेषाम् “he 6९दुिड others.
858. It may be used for the locative after verbs of consigning, as TARY मम
समपेयणि ‘he deposits a pledge with me;’ or of trusting, as न कश्चित् स्रीणां
प्रहधाति ` nobody puts ¢rust in women: and for the accusative in examples such
as सचिन्तितानि दुःखानि आयान्ति देहिनाम् : unexpected ills come upon corporeal
beings.’
859. It is sometimes used after verbs of fearing; as, wea TH A भेष्यसि “Why
wilt thou not be afraid of him?’ see 855. Also after verbs of longing for, desiring,
envying ; as, अवमानस्य आकांसेत् ‘he should desire contempt ;’ स्युहयामि पुरुषाणां
सचक्षुषाम् S I envy men who possess eyes.’ After verbs of remembering ; as, feat
न स्मरन्ति ‘they do not remember heaven ’ (Kirat. ए, 28).
a. Other examples of verbs followed by genitive cases are, अजानताम् अस्माकं
ख्यापय कस्य असि भायो ‘tell us, who are ignorant of it, whose wife you are;’
कस्य (for कस्मात्) विभ्यति धामिकाः ‘Of whom are the righteous afraid ?’ ag
अन्यस्य प्रतिजानीते न तद् सन्यस्य दद्यात् “one should not give to one what one
promises to another ;' मम न शृणोति “he does not hear me’ (cf. the Greek usage) ;
मम स्मरेः “remember me,’ or with an accusative. WTA qq: प्रभवति ` death over-
comes us;’ अग्निर् न तृष्यति काष्टानाम् ‘fire is not satigfied with fuel; Wat AAU
‘forgive them;’ किं मया तस्य Way “What offence have I given him?’
Locative after the Verb.
860, This case is very widely applicable, but, as elsewhere re-
marked, is frequently interchangeable with the dative and genitive.
The first sense of the locative requires that it should be united with
verbs in reference only to ‘the place’ or ‘time’ in which anything
is done; as, पङ्के मन्नति ‘he sinks in the mud;’ पुरे वसति ‘he dwells
in the city? tarqft तिष्टति “he stands in the front of the fight ;’
सूर्योदये प्रवुध्यते ‘at sunrise he awakes.
861. The transition from ‘the place’ to “the object’ or ‘recipient’ of any action
is natural; and hence it is that verbs are found with the locative of ‘the object’
to which anything is imparted or communicated, as in the following examples:
मा प्रयच्छ श्वरे धनम् (8९51० not money on the पणतु ;' तस्मिन् कायारि fafey-
पामि entrust my affairs to him ;’ ya अद्भुरौयकं समपेयति ‘he consigns a ring to
his 8011 ;’ योग्ये सचिवे न्यस्यति UT ATT “he entrusts the burden of the kingdom
to a capable minister,’ राज्ञि or राजकुले निवेदयति ‘he informs the king;’ नके वद्
“say to Nala.’
a. Wit wat Fagzarq ‘one should place (bury) a dead man in the ground ;’ धर्मे
मनो दधाति ‘he applies his mind to virtue.’ In this sense कृं may be used; as,
3 82
372 INSTRUMENTAL CASE AFTER PASSIVE VERBS.
qe इन्धनम् अ करोत् ‘he placed the wood on his back;” मतिं पापे करोति “he applies
his mind to sin.’
862. When दा, ‘to give,’ is used for ‘to put,’ it follows the same analogy; as,
तस्यं yar इस्तं देहि “put your hand on the end of its tail;’ भस्म-चये पटं ददौ
“he placed his foot on a heap of ashes.’ Similarly, RATS yats fet “he was
held by the skirt of his garment.’ So also verbs of seizing, striking; a8, केशेषु
गृहात or स्कुषति ‘he seizes or drags him by the hair;’ a प्रहरति ‘he strikes
a sleeping man;’ गृहीत्वा तं दधिणे पाणौ “having taken hold of him by the right
hand.’
863. The locative is often put for the dative in sentences where the latter case
stands for the infinitive; thus, wat WII त्वरस्व “hasten to seek thy spouse ;”
नलस्य आनयने WE ‘strive to bring Nala hither; न HEA तस्य धनुषो ग्रहणे
‘they could not hold that bow;’ न शक्तोऽभवन् निवारणे ‘he was not able to
prevent it.’
a, Other examples are, उग्रे तपसि वतैते ‘he is engaged in a very severe penance ८
परकायेषु मा व्यापृतो भरू ‘do not busy yourself about other people’s affairs ;”
विषयेषु सज्यते ‘he is addicted to objects of sense ;’ aa arafet रमति ‘he delights
in the good of all the world ;’ दुग धिकारे नियुज्यते “he is appointed to the com-
mand of the fort ;’ डौ वृषभो धुरि नियोजयति “he yokes two bulls to the pole;’
सेनापयये सभिषिच् माम् “anoint me to the generalship ;’ यतते चापनिय्रे ‘he strives
to suppress evil-doers ;’ कोपस् तेषाम् सासीन् नृपे “they had anger against the
king? What कुरू IWR ‘ make trial of Vahuka;’ WTA त्वयि दोषम् “1 will lay
the blame on कण्ण; वरयस्व तं पतित्वे ‘choose him for thy husband ;’ देवा अमृते
यत्नवन्तो बभूवुः ‘the gods exerted themselves for the nectar.’
४. न मद्धिभि युज्यते वाक्यम् ईदृशम् “such language is not suited to a person like
me; Wr त्वयि प्रयुज्यते “sovereignty is suited to you;’ सने उपाविशत् “he
reclined on a seat ;* FUT आससव # ‘ sit thou on a cushion 4 शतुष विश्चसिति ‘he
confides in his enemies ;’ चरणयोः पतति ‘it falls at his feet ;” लुठति पादेषु “it rolls
at the feet.’
Change of Case after the same Verb.
864. This sometimes occurs; as, विधये भृतराष्राय कुन्ती च गान्धायीः सरवै न्यवेद्-
येताम् “Vidhura and Kunti announced everything, the one to Dhrita-rdshtra, the
other to Gandhari’ (Astrasiksh4 34), where the same verb governs a dative and
genitive. Similarly, in the Hitopadesa, शुङ्िणां विश्वासो न कौव्यः स्त्रीषु च ‘con-
fidence is not to be placed in horned animals or women.’
INSTRUMENTAL CASE AFTER PASSIVE VERBS.
865. The prevalence of a passive construction is the most remark-
able feature in the syntax of this language. Passive verbs are joined
* स्रासस्व Epic form for Wa or BS.
SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE. 373
with ‘the agent, instrument, or cause,’ in the instrumental case me
and agree with ‘the object’ in number and person; as, वातेन रज
उद्यते ‘the dust is raised by the wind;’ तेन aa-ganfa सन्जीःक्रियन्ताम्
“let all things be prepared by him 2 इषुभिर् आदिय ऽन्तरधी यतत ‘the sun
was concealed by arrows.’
‘
866. But the past passive participle usually takes the place of the past tenses of the
passive verb, and agrees with ‘the object’ in gender and case as well as number 3
as, नेताणि समाञुतानि चारिणा ^ (their) eyes were suffused with tears ;’ तेन उक्तम्
(इदम् being understood) ‘it was said by him.’ Cf. 895.
a. This instrumental construction after passive verbs is a favourite idiom in
Sanskrit prose composition, and the love for it is remarkably displayed in such
phrases as the following : दुःखेन गम्यते, ‘he is gone to by misery,’ for FW गच्छति;
and WUTATAT देवेन, ‘let it be come by your majesty,” for आगच्छतु देवः; and
again, अस्माभिर् waa स्यीयताम्, “let it be remained by us in one spot,’ for ‘let us
remain in one spot,;’ येन मार्गेण इष्ट तेन गम्यताम् ` by whatever road it is desired, by
that let it be gone.’
¢, Active or causal verbs, which take a double accusative, will retain one accusa-
tive when constructed passively ; but the other accusative passes into a nominative
case; thus, instead of समां परूषाशि उवाच, ‘he addressed me in harsh words,’
may be written तेन अहं पर्पाशि उक्तः; ` by him I was addressed in harsh words.’
SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE.
867. The infinitive (formed with तुम् tum) in Sanskrit cannot be
employed with the same latitude as in other languages. Its use is
very limited, corresponding to that of the Latin Supines, as its
termination tum indicates.
a. Let the student, therefore, distinguish between the infinitive of Sanskrit
and that of Latin and Greek. In these latter languages we have the infinitive
made the subject of a proposition; or, in other words, standing in the place of a
nominative, and an accusative case often admissible before it. We have it also
assuming different forms, to express present, past, or future time, and complete-
ness or incompleteness in the progress of the action. The Sanskrit infinitive, on
the other hand, can never be made the subject of a verb, admits of no accusative
before it, and can only express indeterminate time and incomplete action. Wherever
it occurs it must be considered as the object, and never the subject, of some verb
expressed or understood. As the object of the verb, it may be regarded as equiva-
Jent to a verbal substantive, in which the force of two cases, an accusative and
dative, is inherent, and which differs from other substantives in its power of
* There are a few instances of the agent in the genitive case; as, मम कृतं पापम्,
“a crime committed by me,’ for मया.
374 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE.
governing ४ case. Its use as a substantive, with the force of the accusative case,
corresponds to one use of the Latin infinitive ; thus, तत् aq श्रोतुम् इच्छामि “I desire
to hear all that,’ ‘id audire cupio,’ where श्रोतुम् and audire are both equivalent to
accusative cases, themselves also governing an accusative. Similarly, दिवु प्रवृत्ता
‘she began to weep;’ and महीं जेतुम् अरिभे ‘he began to conquer the earth,’ where
महीजयम् BTW, “he began the conquest of the earth,’ would be equally correct.
b. Bopp considers the termination of the infinitive to be the accusative of the
suffix tu (458. Obs.), and it is certain that in the Veda other cases of nouns formed
with this suffix in the sense of infinitives occur; e.g. a dative in tave or tavat, as from
han comes hantave, ‘to kill;’ fr. anu-i, anvetave, ‘to follow ;’ fr. man, mantavai, ‘to
think :* there is also a form in tos, generally in the sense of an ablative; e.g. 7. 2
comes etos, ‘from going ;’ fr. han, hantos, as in purd hantos, ‘before killing :’ and
a form in द corresponding to the indeclinable participle in tod of the classical
language; e.g. fr. han, hatvt, ‘killing ;’ fr. bid, bhitet, ‘being.’ Infinitives may also
be formed in the Veda by simply adding the usual case-terminations to the root ;
e.g. in the sense of an accusative, fr. d-ruh may come druham, ‘to ascend;’ fr.
é-sad, dsadam, ‘to sit down :’ of a dative, fr. d-dhrish, ddhrishe, ‘to get at,’ ‘subdue ;’
fr. san-caksh; sahéakshe, ‘to survey :’ of an ablative, fr. ava-pad, avapadas, ‘from
falling down.’ Infinitives are also formed by changing the final ¢ of roots ending
in this letter to ai; e.g. fr. pra-yd, prayai, ‘to approach :’ or by adding se (liable
to be changed to she) to a root, as fr. jz comes jishe, “to conquer:’ or by
adding ase; e.g. fr. jiv, jfvase, ‘to live:’ or adhyai; e.g. fr. bhri, bharadhyai, ‘to
bear ;’ fr. yaj, yajadhyai, ` 10 sacrifice,’ &c.
868. But the Sanskrit infinitive most commonly involves a sense
which belongs especially to the Sanskrit dative, viz. that of ‘the end?
or ‘purpose’ for which anything is done; thus, शावकान् भधितुम्
आगच्छति ‘he comes to devour the young ones ;’ Wat wy wat प्राहिणोत्
‘he sent an army to fight the enemy.’
a. In these cases it would be equally correct in Sanskrit to substitute for the
infinitive the dative of the verbal noun, formed with the suffix ana; thus, नकाय,
“for the eating,’ for भदितुम् ; योधनाय, ‘for the fighting,’ for wey 5 and in Latin
the infinitive could not be used at all, but either the supine, devoratum, pugnatum,
or, still more properly, the conjunction ut with the subjunctive mood, ‘ut devoret,’
“ut pugnarent. The following are other examples in which the infinitive has a
dative force in expressing “the purpose’ of the action: पानीयं पातु नदीम् सगनत्
he went to the river to drink water; मम वन्धनं BAA उपसपेति ‘he comes to cut
asunder my bonds;’ मां लात WAT: “he is able to rescue me: पाश् संवरितु सयल्नो
‘RTT ‘he busied himself about collecting together the snares.’
6. The best Pandits think that the infinitive ought not to be used when the
verb which is connected with it refers to a different person, or is not समानाधिकरणे :
thus तं गन्तुम् साज्ञापय, ‘command him to go,” would be better expressed by a
गमनाय साज्ञापय.
USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES. 375.
¢..The infinitive cannot be used after an accusative to express ‘that,’ as in
Latin > thus, “having heard that Duryodhana was killed’ would be expressed by
हतं दुयोधनं श्रुत्वा. |
869. The Sanskrit. infinitive, therefore, has the character of a
Supine, and in this character is susceptible of either an active or
passive signification. In its passive character, however, like the
Latin Supine in ४, it is joined with certain words only, the most
usual being the passive verbs शक् ‘to be able’ and युज् ‘ to be fitting,’
and their derivatives; thus, त्यक्तु न शाक्यते ‘it cannot be abandoned ;’
पाशो न Hy शक्यते ‘the snare cannot be प; न Wat: समाधातुं ते दोषाः
‘those evils cannot be remedied ;’ श्रोतुं नं युज्यते ‘it is not fitting to be
heard ;? चतुम् अयोग्यः ° unfit to be cut ;? त्वया न युक्तम् सवमानम् HAT FHT
“contempt is not proper to be shewn by thee for him ;? atafagy योग्यः
‘worthy to be celebrated.’
a. The following are other instances: AQT: कारयितुम् सरः ‘the shed was
begun to be built; राज्य अभिषेक्तु भवान् निरूपितः ‘your Honour has been
selected to be inaugurated to the kingdom;’ अहेति करम् “it deserves to be done ;’
करम् अनुचितम् “improper to be done’ (cf. factu indignum and ०५९४ 01०2८040);
सा मोचयितुं न्याय्या ‘she ought to be released;’ किम् इदं प्रायितं कम् ‘what is
sought to be done.’ The infinitive of neuter verbs, which have a passive sense,
will of course be passive ; as, क्रोडं न सरसि deign not to be angry.’
870. The root अहे ‘to deserve,’ when used in combination with an infinitive, is
usually equivalent to ‘an entreaty’ or ‘respectful imperative ग as, धनान् नो वक्तुम्
wefa ‘ deign (or simply ‘be pleased’) to tell us our duties.’ It sometimes has the
force of the Latin debet; as, न् मादृशी त्वाम् अभिभाष्टम् Weta “such a person as I
ought not to address you;’ न तं शोचितुम् eta ‘you ought not to bewail him.’
871. The infinitive is sometimes joined with the noun काम, ‘desire,’ to form a
kind of compound adjective, expressive of wishing to do anything, but the
final m is then rejected; thus, {Za4lA:, -मा, -AA, ‘desirous of seeing ;’ जेतुकामः,
-मा, -मम्ः “wishing to conquer.’
a. Sometimes the infinitive is joined in the same way with मनस् ; thus, स्
द्रष्टुमनाः “he has a mind to 866." ` ;
872. When kim follows the infinitive a peculiar transposition sometimes takes
place, of which the 1st Act of Sakuntal4 furnishes an example; thus, ual ते
ज्ञातुम् इच्छामि किम् अनया वैखानसं wd निषेवितव्यम्, ‘I wish to know thy friend,
whether this monastic vow is to be observed by her,’ for NIGH इच्छामि fe ae a
&c. ‘I wish to know whether-this vow is to be observed by thy friend.’
USE AND. CONNEXION. OF THE TENSES.
873. Present TENsE.—This tense, besides its proper use, is often
used for the future; as, क्रे गच्छानि ‘Whither shall I go > कदा rat
876 USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES.
uyatfa ‘When shall I see thee?’ किं करेमि ‘What shall I १०१२ and
sometimes for the imperative ; as, तत् कुमेः ‘let us do that.’
874. In narration it is commonly used for the past tense; as, स भूमिं स्पृष्ट कं
स्पृशति ब्रूते च ‘he, having touched the ground, touches his ears, and says.’
875. It may denote ‘habitual’ or ‘repeated’ action; as, मृगः WAS तत गत्वा शस्यं
खादति ‘the deer going there every day was in the habit of eating the ९००; यदा
स मूषिकशब्ट शृणोति तदा faerés संवधेयति ‘whenever he heard the noise of the
mouse, then he would feed the cat.’
876. It is usually found after यावत् and तावत् ; as, यावन् मे दन्ता न तुदन्ति
तावत् तव पाशं fafa ‘as long as my teeth do not break, so Jong will I gnaw
asunder your fetters.’ (Compare the use of the Latin dum.)
877. The present tense of the root AT, “to sit,’ ‘to remain,” is used with the
present participle of another verb, to denote ‘continuous’ or ‘ simultaneous’ action ;
as, पशूनां बधं कुवन् सास्ते ‘he keeps making > slaughter of the beasts ;’ मम WATE
BTS आस्ते ‘he is in the act of coming after me.”
878. The particle ®, when used with the present, gives it the force of a perfect ;
98, प्रविशन्ति स पुरीम् ‘they entered the city;’ निवसन्ति सम ‘they dwelt.” See
251. Obs.
879. PoTENTIAL.—The name of this tense is no guide to its
numerous uses. Perhaps its most common force is that of ‘ fitness’
in phrases, where in Latin we should expect to find oportet with the
infinitive ; as, आगतं भयं ata नरः Fare यथोचितम् ‘having beheld danger
actually present, a man should act in a becoming manner.’
880. It is also employed, as might be expected, in indefinite general expressions ;
४8, यस्य यो भावः स्पात् ‘whatever may be the disposition of any 0165 यदा तजा
waa a gam कायेःदङनम् ‘when the king may not himself make investigation of
the case;’ WAT AM AMA AAT WYN अपमानम् “by uttering unseasonable
words one may meet with dishonour.’
a. Especially in conditional sentences and suppositions; as, यदि राजा TW न
प्रणयेत् स्वाम्यं कस्मिंश्छिन् न स्पात् सवै.सेतवश्च HAT ‘if the king were not to inflict
punishment, ownership would remain with nobody, and all barriers would be
broken down.’ Sometimes the conjunction is omitted; as, नं भवेत् ‘should it not
be so;’ न स्यात् पराधीनः “were he not subject to another.’
887. The potential often occurs as 9 softened imperative, the Sanskrit language,
in common with others in the East, being averse to the more abrupt form; thus,
गच्छेः, ‘do thou go,’ for गच्छ ; and सद्यात् wots, ‘let him eat fruits,’ for Wy 5
स्यात्; “let there be,’ for ‘there must be’ (in comment. to एष.)
882. IMPERATIVE.—This tense yields the usual force of ‘ com-
mand? or ‘entreaty;’ as, wrafafe ‘take courage ;’ माम् WRT
‘remember me.’
मा, and not 4, must be used in prohibition; as, wat मा त्रूहि ‘do
USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES, 377
not tell a falsehood ;? at लज्नस ‘be not ashamed 37 see 889. The
first person is used to express ‘ necessity,’ see example at 796.
a. The 3rd pers. singular is sometimes used interjectionally ; thus,
wag ‘Be it so!’ ‘Well!’ arg ^ Let it go! ‘Come along!’ ‘Come!’
883. The imperative is sometimes used in conditional phrases to express ‘ contin-
gency ;° as, खनुजानौहि मां गच्छामि ‘ permit me, (and) I will &0 1.6. if you will permit
me, I will go;’ च्ाज्ञापय हन्मि दष.जनम् if you command me, I will kill the villain ;
सभनयःवाच मे यच्छ गच्छामि ‘it you give me a promise of security, I will go
884. IMPERFECT.—Although this tense (see 242) properly has
reference to ‘past incomplete action,’ and has been so rendered in
the paradigms of verbs, yet it is commonly used to denote ‘ indefinite
past time,’ without any necessary connexion with another action ;
as, अथं ग्रहीतुं way अकरवम् ‘I made an effort.to collect wealth,’ not
necessarily ‘I was making
Obs.—The augment may be cut off after at, as in the aorist ; thus,
मा स्म भेवत् ‘May he not become?’ See 242. Obs.; Pan. vi. 4, 74.
885. PERFECT.—As explained at 242, this tense is properly used
to express ‘an action done at some definite period of past time ;’ as,
कोशल्यादयो नृपतिं दशर्यं चक्रन्दुः ‘ Kausalyé and the others bewailed king
Daégaratha.’ It is frequently, however, employed indeterminately.
886. First Fururnt.—tThis tense (see 242) expresses ‘ definite
but not immediate futurity ;’ as, तासु दिद्यु कामस्य फलं लमासि ‘in those
regions thou shalt (one day) obtain the fruit of thy desire.’
887. Seconp Furure.—This tense, although properly indefinite,
is employed to express ‘all degrees and kinds of futurity,’ immediate
or remote, definite or indefinite; as, सादु पयः पास्यसि ‘thou shalt
drink sweet water ;> wa Wasa पल्लीं दह्यति ‘there certainly he will
see his wife ; सद्य गमिष्यसि ‘this very day thou shalt go.’
a, It is sometimes used for the imperative ; as, यद् देयं तद् दास्यसि
‘whatever is to be given, that you will give,’ (do thou give.)
888. AoRIST.—This tense (see 242) properly expresses ‘time in-
definitely past ;’ as, सभून् JU: ‘there lived (in former times) a king.’
889. It is also employed to supply the place of the imperative, after the prohi-
bitive particle AT or मा स, the augment being omitted (see 242. Obs.) ; as, मा कुचाः
‘do not make ;' मा त्याक्षीः समयम् ‘ do not lose the opportunity ;' मा स BY वादीः
do not tell an untruth ; मा क्रुधः “do not be angry;’ मा शुचः do not grieve ;’ AT
हिसीः ‘do not injure ;? AT Ata: ‘do not destroy ;? 47 वोचः ‘do not speak so
मा मेषीः be not afraid ’ (contracted into मा 4? in Nala ए. 3).
3९
378 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
: 890. PrecaTive.—Only one example of this tense occurs in the Hitopadesa :
नियं भूयात् सकल-मुख.वसतिः ‘May he constantly be the abode of all happiness !’
It is chiefly used in pronouncing benedictions. Also in imprecations.
` a.In the latter case a noun formed with a suffix ani is frequently used; thus,
watafag ति भूयात् ' May there be loss of Jife to thee!’ ‘Mayst thou perish !”
891. Conp1ITIONAL.—This tense (see 242) is even less frequent than the last.
The following are examples: यदि राजा र्डं न प्रणयेत् तदा Yes मत्यान् इव ATT
द् बेलान् बल्वचराः ‘if the king were not to inflict punishment, then the stronger
would roast the weak like fish on a spit;’ or, according to the Scholiast, हिंसाम्
सअकरिष्यन् would cause injury; सुवृषटिश् चेद् अभविष्यत् तदा सुभिघ्षम् सभविष्यत् ‘if -
there should be abundant rain, then there would be abundance of food.’ According
to Panini (111. 3, 139) it is used क्रियातिपत्नो ‘when the action is supposed to pass by
unaccomplished › (क्रियाया अनिष्त्नौ Schol.)
a, LeT.—The Vedic mood, called Let by native grammarians, corresponds to
the subjunctive of the Greek language. In forming it a short ais inserted between
the conjugational stem and the termination, or if the conjugational stem ends in a,
this letter is lengthened; at the same time the augment of the imperfect and aorist
is dropped, e.g. from han comes pres. ind. han-ti ; but subj. han-a-ti: from pat,
pres. ind. pata-ti; subj. patd-ti: from ag, impf. ind. d§no-t ; subj. asnava-t, i.e.
agno+a+t. So also, from pat, impf. ind. apata-t ; subj. patd-t: from tré, aor. ind.
atdrét (for atdrish-t, cf. du. atdrish-va, &c.); subj. tdrish-a-t. It may also be
mentioned that in the Atmane the final e may optionally be changed to ai, e.g.
mddayédhvai ; and that the subjunctive of the aorist sometimes takes the termina-
tions of the present tense without lengthening a, e.g. from ४०८ comes aor. ind.
०००८४, subj. vodati.
" Observe—The characteristic of Let is the insertion of a.
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
892. Participles in Sanskrit often discharge the functions of the
tenses of verbs. They are constantly found occupying the place of
past and future tenses, and more especially of passive verbs.
893. Participles govern the cases of the verbs whence they are
derived; as, व्याधं पश्यन् ‘seeing the fowler? अरण्ये चरन् ‘walking in
the forest ;? तत् कुतवान् ‘he did that;’ शब्दम् साकर्ये ‘having heard a
noise ;” पानीयम् सपीत्वा गतः “he went away without drinking water.’
a, In the case of passive participles, as will presently appear, the
agent is put in the instrumental case; and the participle agrees with
the object, like an adjective.
Present Participles.
, 894. These are not so commonly used in Sanskrit composition as
past and future participles, but they are often idiomatically employed,
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES, 379
especially where in English the word ‘while’ or ‘whilst? is intro:
duced; thus, wz दक्षिणारण्ये चरत् सपश्यम् ‘whilst walking in the
southern forest, I beheld,’ &c,
Past Passive Participle.
895. This most useful participle is constantly used to supply the
place of a perfect tense passive, sometimes in conjunction with the
auxiliary verbs as and bhi, ‘to 106; thus, चादिष्टोऽस्मि ‘I have been com-
manded ;’ aq विस्मिताः स्मः “we were astonished ;? उषितोऽस्मि ‘I have
dwelt’ (cf. 866). Of course the participle is made to agree adjec-
tively with the object in gender, number, and case, as in Latin ;
and the agent, which in English would probably be in the nomina-
tive, and in Latin in the ablative, becomes in Sanskrit instrumental.
Thus, in Sanskrit, the phrase ‘I wrote a letter’ would not be so
idiomatically expressed by अहं पन्च लिलेख, as by मया ug लिखितम् ‘by
me a letter was written,’ ‘a me epistola scripta” So again, तेन बन्धनानि
च्छित्रानि ‘by him the bonds were cut’ is more idiomatic than स बन्धनानि
चिच्छेद् ‘he cut the bonds ;’ and तेन उक्तम् ‘by him it was said’ is more
usual than स उवाच ‘he said *.’
a. This participle may often be used impersonally, when, if the
verb belong to the first group of classes, it may optionally be
gunated; as, gfamy or द्योतितं सूर्येण ‘it is shone by the sun.’ The
same holds good if the beginning of an action is denoted; as, aa:
प्रद्युतितः or प्रद्योतितः ‘the sun has begun to shine.’
2. When a verb governs a double accusative case (see 846), one accusative will
be preserved after the past passive participle; as, विश्ाभित्वेण दशरथो रामं याचितः
‘Dagaratha was asked for Rama by Visvamitra ;’ मनीषित द्योर् दुग्धा “the sky has
been milked of your wish,’ i.e. “your wish has been milked out of the sky ;’ जितो
सज्यं वसूनि च ‘deprived by defeat in play of his kingdom and property ` (cf. 846.
Obs.)
896. But frequently the past passive participle is used for the active past
participle; in which case it may sometimes govern the accusative case, like a
perfect tense active; thus, स FWA Tac: “he ascended the tree;? स गृह AWM: or
TTA: “he went home;’ am ata: “having crossed the road;’ अहं पदवीम्
* This instrumental or passive construction, which is so prevalent in Sanskrit,
has been transferred from it to Hindi, Marathi, Gujardthi, and other dialects of
India. The particle ne in Hindi and Hindustani corresponds to the Sanskrit न na,
the final letter of the commonest termination for the instrumental case, and can
never occasion any difficulty if so regarded. :
302
380 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
wraatarsfe ‘I have descended to the road;’ We नगरीम् wrqura: “I reached
the city ;’ साचाम् आश्रमं प्रविष्टौ स्व; ‘we two have entered the hermitage.’ But
observe, that its use for the active participle is generally, though not invariably,
restricted to intransitive verbs which involve the idea of ‘motion,’ and to a few
other neuter verbs. The following are other examples: Ufa उत्पतिताः ‘the
birds flew away ;’ समृतः ‘he died ; व्याधो निवृत्तः “the fowler returned ;? स wafag
प्रवृत्तः ‘he proceeded to eat;’ स आचितः “he had recourse to;’ स WYN: ‘he fell
asleep ;’ ते स्थिताः ` they stood ;’ उषितः ‘he lodged.’
a, This participle has sometimes a present signification; thus, feqa ‘stood’
may occasionally be translated ‘standing,’ भीत् ‘fearing,’ स्मित ‘ smiling, fae
“embracing 5 and all verbs characterized by the Anubandha नि may optionally
use this participle in the sense of the present. See 75. ९.
9. The neuter of the passive participle is sometimes used as a substantive; thus,
TAA ` ४ gift;’ खातम् “an excavation ;? छन्नम् “food ;? दुग्धम् ` milk.’
Active Past Participle.
897. This participle is much used (especially in modern Sanskrit
and the writings of commentators) to supply the place of a perfect
tense active. 1t may govern the case of the verb; as, सवै शचुतवान् ‘he
heard everything ;? wat पत्तिम् sifsfgTant ‘the wife embraced her
husband ;’ wat wer wes दच्तवान् ‘he gave the fruit into the hand of
the king ;? तत् कृतवती ‘she did that.’ This participle may also be
used with the auxiliaries as and bhi, ‘to be,’ to form a compound
perfect tense ; thus, तत् कृतवान् अस्ति “he has done that;’ तत् कृतवान्
भविष्यति ‘he will have done that.’
Indeclinable Past Participles.
898. The sparing use made in Sanskrit composition of relative
pronouns, conjunctions, and connective particles, is mainly to be
attributed to these participles or gerunds, by means of which the
action of the verb is carried on, and sentence after sentence strung
together without the aid of a single copulative. They occur in
narration more commonly than any other kind of participle; and
ome of the chief peculiarities of Sanskrit syntax are to be traced
to the frequency of their occurrence.
899. They are generally used for the past tense, as united with a
copulative conjunction, and are usually translatable by the English
‘having,’ * when,’ ‘after,’ ‘by,’ see 555; thus, तद् wrawi निश्चितम् eq
अयं कुक्कुर इति मत्वा द्धागं wT AT स्वगृहं ययो ‘having heard this, having
thought to himself “this is certainly a dog,” having left the goat,
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES, 88i
having bathed, he went to his own house.’ In all these cases we
should use in English the past tense with a conjunction; thus,
“When he had heard this, he thought to himself that it must cer-
tainly be a dog: He then left the goat, and, when he had bathed,
went to his own house.’
a. It is evident from the above example that the indeclinable participles often stand
in the place of a pluperfect tense, a tense which does not really exist in Sanskrit.
8. But although they always refer to something past, it should be observed that
they are frequently rendered in English by the present participle, as in the fifth
sentence of the story at 930.
goo. Another, though less frequent use of them is as gerunds in do; thus, नसः
शस्त्राणय् अधीत्य भवन्ति परिडताः ‘men become wise by reading the Sastras ;’
भायो सपि अकाये-शतं कृचा भतेव्या ‘a wife is to be supported even by [or in] doing a
hundred wrong things;’ किं wet इत्वा सुत्रम् ‘ What bravery is there in killing
a sleeping man?’
Observe—This participle is occasionally capable of a passive sense.
967. Note—The termination TT ¢vd is probably an instrumental case, and bears
much of the character of an instrumental, as it is constantly found in grammatical
connexion with the agent in this case; thus, aa: पशुभिर् मिलित्वा faz विज्ञप्नः ‘ by
all the beasts having met together the lion was informed ;’ सवेर् जातम् सादाप
उडुयताम् “by all having taken up the net let it be flown away.’
a. Another and stronger proof of its instrumental character is, that the particle
"SA, which governs an instrumental, is not unfrequently joined with the inde-
clinable participle; thus, ae भोजनेन, “enough of eating,’ is with equal correct-
ness of idiom expressed by Wed Wail; see 918. a.
Future Passive Participles.
902. The usual sense yielded by this gerundive participle is that
of ‘fitness,’ " obligation,’ ‘ necessity’ (see 568) ; and the usual con-
struction required is, that the agent on whom the duty or necessity
rests be in the instrumental, and the participle agree with the object ;
as, त्वया प्रवृत्तिर् न विधेया ‘by you the attempt is not to be made.’
a. Sometimes, however, the agent is in the genitive case; thus, द्विजातीनां
भस्यम् TAT “boiled rice is to be eaten by Brahmans.’ Compare 865, nate
903. Occasionally the future passive participle may yield a sense equivalent to
‘worthy of, ‘deserving ; as, कश्य ‘deserving a whipping ;’ ताडनीय ‘worthy of
being beaten ;’ FTA ‘deserving death by pounding; वध्य “worthy of death.’
9०4. If the verb govern two accusatives, one may be retained after the future
, * As the Latin gerund is connected with the future part. in dus, so the Sanskrit
indeclinable part. in ya is probably connected with the future passive part, in ya.
382 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES.
passive participle; as, नयन-सलित्ठं त्वया शान्तिं नेयम् ‘the tear of the eye is to be
brought to assuagement by thee.’
9०5. Occasionally the neuter of this participle is used impersonally; in which
case it does not agree with the object, but may govern it in the manner of the
verb; thus, मया ग्रामं गन्तव्यम्, “it is to be gone by me to the village,’ for मया ग्रामो
गन्तव्यः. So also, जया सभां प्रवेष्टव्यम् “ by you it is to be entered into the assembly.’
a, The neuter भवितव्यम् (from भू) is thus used, and, in accordance with 841,
requires the instrumental after it, as well as before; thus, केनापि कारणेन भवितव्यम्
“by something it must become the cause,’ i.e. “there must be some cause;’
स्वामिना सविशेषेण भवितव्यम् ‘a ruler ought to be possessed of discrimination ;’
मया तवं अनुचरेण भवितव्यम् I must become your companion ;’ आआयैया प्रवरणारू-
टया भवितव्यम् “the lady must be seated in the carriage.’
9०6. Similarly, the neuter of श्क्यं may be adverbially used, and impart at the
same time a passive sense to the infinitive; thus, पवनः शक्यम् सलिङ्धितुम् ay:
for पवनः YH: &c. “the breeze is able to be embraced by the limbs’ (Sakuntal4,
verse 60). Again, शक्यम् Wafesta: पातुं वाता; ‘the breezes are able to be drunk
by the hollowed palms;’ विभ्रूतयः Way सवाप्तुम् “great successes are able to be
obtained.’ Observe a similar use of JRA in न युक्तं भवान् AHA ‘his Highness is
not proper to be addressed’ (Maha-bh. Adi-p. 27).
907. It is not uncommon to find this participle standing merely in the place of
a future tense, no propriety or obligation being implied, just as the past passive
participle stands in the place of a past tense; thus, नूनम् अनेन त्टुधकेन मृग.मां-
साधिना गन्तव्यम् ‘in all probability this hunter will go in quest of the deer’s flesh,”
where गन्तव्यम् is used impersonally ; त्वां दृषा ल्लोकेः किच्चद् वक्तव्यम् ‘when the
people see you, they will utter some exclamation ;’ यदि vat पतति तदा मया खादितव्यः
“if the bird falls, then it shall be eaten by me.’ See 93०, xi.
9०8. The neuter of this participle is sometimes used infinitively or substantively,
as expressive merely of ‘the indeterminate action’ of the verb, without implying
‘necessity’ or ‘fitness.’ In such cases $f may be added; thus, वच्छयितव्यम् इति
“the being about to deceive,’ ‘deception’ (Hitop. line 416) ; मतैव्यम् इति “the being
about to die,’ ‘ dying :’ but not always; as, जी वितव्यम् (116.
Participial Nouns of Agency.
909. The first of these nouns of agency (580) is constantly used in poetry as a
substitute for the present participle; implying, however, ‘habitual action,’ and
therefore something more than present time. It is sometimes found governing
the same case as the present participle, but united with the word which it governs
in one compound; thus, YT ‘city-conquering;’ faa ‘speaking kind
words (५ WAT ‘ going in the water;’ सरसिजं ‘lake-born.’ But the word
governed is often in the stem; thus, WHER, “light-making ’ (see 69), from tejas
and kri; AAT, “mind-captivating,’ from manas and hri (64); aR, “giving
much,’ from bahu and dé; सात्मज्ञ, ‘self-knowing,’ from dtman and jd (57.6).
SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c, 383
gto. The second (581) is sometimes, but rarely, found as a participle governing
the case of the verb; thus, वाक्यं वक्ता ‘speaking a speech ;’ बहु.मागै.गां बोढा
“bearing the Ganges.’
077. The first and second species of the third (82. a. 8), like the first, have
often the sense of present participles, and are then always united with the stem
of the word which they govern in one compound; thus, मनोःहारिन्, ‘ mind-
captivating,’ from manas and प्ट कायैसाधक, “effective of the business,’ from
kérya and sidh. They may sometimes govern the case of the verb whence they
are derived, and may then be compounded, or not, with the word which they
govern; thus, ग्रामेवासिन् or ग्रामे वासिन् : dwelling in a village ;’ मुकुलानि Tas:
“kisser of the buds’ (Ratnavali, p. 7).
SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c.
Conjunctions.
9712. च ‘and’ (727) is always placed after the word which it connects with
another, like que in Latin, and can never stand first in a sentence, or in the same
place as ‘and’ in English; thus, परि क्रम्य Waa च ^ walking round and looking.’
Unlike que, however, which must always follow the word of which it is the copu-
lative, it may be admitted to any other part of the sentence, being only excluded
from the first place; thus, तनयम् सचिरात् प्राची इव Wa WTI च पावनम् ‘and
having after a short time given birth to a pure son, as the eastern quarter (gives
birth to) the sun.’
a. Sometimes two ¢a’s are used, when one may be redundant or equivalent to
the English ‘“both;’ or the two éa’s may be employed antithetically or disjunc-
tively, or to express the contemporaneousness of two events; thus, सह च्च ufag
* both day and night;’ ची हरिणकानां जीवितं च frase क्र च Wag ते “Where
on the one hand is the frail existence of fawns? Where on the other are thy
arrows? क्रन्दितुं च प्रवृता aed च ज्योतिर् Braga Tat जगाम ‘no sooner
had she began to weep, than a shining apparition in female shape, having snatched
her up, departed’ (Sakuntal4, verse 131); तेच प्रापुर् उदन्वन्तं बुबुधे च ख्ादिपुरूषः ‘they
reached the ocean and the Supreme Being awoke’ (from his sleep), Raghu-v. x. 6.
b. Observe—When क्ते, ‘where?’ is used as in the above example, it implies
excessive incompatibility,’ or ‘incongruity.’
c. Sometimes च is used as an emphatic particle, and not as a copulative; thus,
fa a Aa परिणीतःपूषै “Was she indeed married by me formerly ?
913. तया “so, ‘likewise’ (727. 6), frequently supplies the place of च ; thus,
अनागतविधाता च प्रद्युत्पत्नःमतिस् तथा ‘both Andgata-vidhdtri and Pratyutpanna-
mati’ (names of the two fish in Hitop. Book IV).
914. fz ‘for,’ ठु "एषणः चा ‘or’ (727. क्, 728.4), like च, are excluded from the
first place in a sentence; thus, पूवैावधीरितं श्रेयो दुःखं fz परिवतेते ‘for happiness
formerly scorned turns to misery ;’ विपरथैये तु ‘but on the contrary;’ Tat त्यज वा
Jeg at “either abandon her or take her.’
915. यदि ‘if’ and az ‘if’ (727.e) may govern the potential or conditional (see
384 SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c.
894), but are also used with the indicative; thus, यदि जीवति भद्राणि प्यति
^ he live, he will behold prosperity ; यदि मया प्रयोजनम् अस्ति ‘if there is need
of me;? वृष्णा चेत् परिपयक्ता को afcg: ‘If avarice were abandoned, who would be
poor?’
Prepositions and Adverbs.
916. Prepositions often govern cases of nouns. See 729, 730.
917. The following examples illustrate the use of adverbs in con-
struction with cases of nouns, as explained at 731
मास शुनोऽग्र fafa flesh thrown before the dog;’ तरूणाम् WW: ` under the
trees ;? नार् SRT below the navel ;? वृक्षस्य थस्तात् beneath the tree ; भोज-
ATTA ‘after eating ° WT WaT “without fruit ;’ भैर अनुमतिम् अन्तरेण
without the consent of her husband ;? धनस्य way, or more usually धनाम्, for
the sake of wealth ;’ विवाहा् अवक् ‘after marriage ;’ Bay सचयनाद् सस्थुम्
“after collecting the bones :’ उपरि, with genitive, occurs rather frequently, and
with some latitude of meaning; thus, नाभेर् उपरि (०8०४८ the navel;’ सिंहस् तस्य
उपरि पपात ‘the lion fell upon him ;’ मम् उपरि विकारितः ‘changed in his feelings
towards me;’ तव उपरि असदृशःव्यवहारी “not behaving properly towards thee ;’
yaa उपरि we: “angry with his son;’ नाभेर् Tea “above the navel ;’ तदवधेर्
ऊर्वम् " after that period ;’ संवत्सणद् ऊर्वम् " after a year,’ i.e. “above a year having
expired ;’ नं Gig च्छते शाक्यः कत पापविनिग्रहः ‘the restraint of crime cannot be
made without punishment ;’ तव कारणात् " on thy account ;? तस्याः Fd or तत्कृते “for
her sake,’ वाटिकाया दद्िणेन ‘to the right of the garden; तनिमितचे ‘on that
account +? अभिवादनात् पणम् after saluting ;' WATH पश्चात् after us ; स्रानात् पूवम्
before bathing ; विवाहात् पूवम् before marriage ; WATT AUT प्रभृति from
the moment of seeing (him) ; जन्मप्रभृति from एण; ततः प्रभृति from that time
forward; उपनयनात् प्रभृति ‘from the time of investiture ;’ UTE निवेद नात् “before
telling ;’ प्राग् उपनयनात् ' before investiture ;’ भोजनात् प्राक् “before eating :’ प्राक्
may take an accusative; as, APT द्वादश-समाः “before twelve years are over;? शतं
जन्मानि यावत् “for a hundred births ;’ पे-विवरं यावत् ‘up to the serpent’s hole;
विवह् afer नि सृत्य “creeping out of the hole; हेतुं विना ‘without cause 3
अपराधेन विना ‘without fault;’ प्राणि.हिंसा-व्यतिरेकेण ‘without injury to living
beings ; fag सकाशाद् धनम् सादत he receives money from his father ;’ मम Bock ts |
in my presence ;? राज्ञः समीपम् near the king ;* YAW Az ' 1017 with his son
ara may take an instrumental; as, wa: साक्षात् before others ; Jaren: ‘for
the sake of a son
918. खलम्, enough,’ is used with the instrumental, with the force of a pro-
hibitive particle; as, Wed WHat‘ away with fear,’ “do not fear
a. It is also used with the indeclinable participle; as, Wes सदित्वा enough of
weeping!’ Ns विायै ‘enough of consideration!’ see also 9०1. ८
Obs.—&@q is used in the same way ; e.g Wey FAT = WS कृत्वा (Pan. 111. 4, 18).
SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS, PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, &c. 385
4 ९, It is sometimes followed by an infinitive; as, न Woy अस्मि हदयं निवतैयितुम्
I am not able to turn back my heart.’ ,
919. मालम् ° even,’ ‘merely,’ at the end of a compound is declinable; as, उच
रमात्रंन ददाति “he does not even give an answer;’ न शब्ट.मात्ाट् भेतव्यम् ‘one ought
not to be afraid of mere noise ;’ शब्ट्-मातेण “by mere sound ;? वचन.मातेण “by mere
words ;’ उक्तमाते वचने “immediately on the mere utterance of the speech.’
920. WaT and WaT, when used as correlatives, are equivalent to the English ‘so
that,’ and the Latin ita ut; thus, यया सवामी Avia तया मया कतेव्यम् ‘I must so
act that my master awake,’ i. €, ‘I must do something to make my master awake.’
So also, त्वं न जानासि यथा Terai करोमि ‘Do not you know that I keep watch
in the house?’
a. ईदृशम्, तादृशम्, and यादूशम् may be used in the same way; thus, ATS TT
wage न किचिद् विद्यते यादृशं परःदारःगमनम् ‘nothing is so opposed to length
of life as intercourse with the wife of another.’
९. यत्; as well as WAT, is used for ‘that; thus, सयं नूतनो न्यायो यद् अरार्ति
रत्वा सन्तापः क्रियते ‘this is a new doctrine, that having killed an enemy remorse
should be felt.’
921, किम्, ‘why ? may often be regarded as a mark of interrogation which is
not to be translated, but affects only the tone of voice in which a sentence is
uttered ; as, जानि.मातेण fa कश्छित् पूज्यते “Is any one honoured for mere birth ?’
(Cf. 837. a.) ।
a. It sometimes has the force of ‘whether; 95, ज्ञायतां किम् उपयुक्त एतावद् विनं
Teall aya वां ‘let it be ascertained whether he is worthy to receive so
large ४ salary, or whether he is unworthy ; सन्ती वेति किं गुणयुक्तो राजानवा
“the minister knows whether the king is meritorious or not.’
922. चत् (technically vati) as a suffix of comparison or similitude (724) may be
compounded with a nominal stem, which if uncompounded would be in the accusa-
tive case; thus, सात्मानं मृतवत् सन्द् श्यै ‘ shewing himself as if dead ;’ आश्येवट् x
परयति ‘he regards it as a wonder.’ Also in the locative or genitive case; thus,
मयुरावत् an प्राकारः ‘a wall in Srughna like that in Mathurd.’ According to
Panini v. 1, 115, it is used for the instrumental after adjectives of comparison,
when some action is expressed ; 1४, व्राद्मणेन तुल्यम् अधीते (see 826) may be
rendered ज्राद्यणवद् अधीते, but it would not be correct to say पुतवत् स्थूलः for
पुतेण gat: Ya.
923. The negative नं is sometimes repeated to give intensity to an affirmation ;
thus, न न वच्यति ‘he will not not ऽश "वच्यति रव ‘he will certainly say.’
924. The indeclinable participle उहिश्य, ‘ having pointed out,’ is sometimes used
adverbially to express ‘on account of,’ ‘with reference to,’ ‘towards,’ and governs
an accusative; thus, किम् उदिश्य “On account of what?’ तम् उहिश्य ‘with refer-
ence to him.’ र
925. The indeclinable participle आस्य, ‘having begun,’ is used adverbially to
express ‘from,’ “beginning with,’ and may either govern an ablative or be placed
3D
886 ON THE USE OF THE PARTICLE इति.
after a nominal stem; thus, निमन्तणाद् RIOT श्राद्धं यावत् ‘from the time of
invitation to the time of the Sraddha.’ निनन्वणारभ्य would be equally correct.
926. The interjections धिक् and हा require the accusative; as, fra पापिष्ठम्
‘Woe to the wretch!’ and the vocative interjections the vocative case; as, भोः
पान्य (0 traveller !’
a, Adverbs are sometimes used for adjectives in connexion with substantives ;
as, तत्र शालायाम् for तस्यां शालायाम् ‘in that 091; समाव्ेषु मुख्यशः for अमात्यपु
मुख्येषु “among the principal ministers.’
ON THE USE OF THE PARTICLE इति.
927. In Sanskrit the obliqua oratio is rarely admitted; and when
any one relates the words or describes the sentiments or thoughts of
another, the relator generally represents him as speaking the actual
words, or thinking the thoughts, in his own person.
a. In such cases the particle इति (properly meaning ‘so,’ thus’) is often placed
after the words quoted, and may be regarded as serving the purpose of inverted
commas; thus, शिष्या ऊचुः Frat वयम् इति ‘the pupils said, “We have
accomplished our object ;”’ not, according to the English or Latin idiom, ‘the
pupils said that they had accomplished their object.’ So also, कलहकारी इति ब्रूते
भती ‘your husband calls you “ quarrelsome,”’’ where कलहकारी is in the nomina-
tive case, as being the actual word supposed to be spoken by the husband himself
in his own person. So again, युष्मान् विश्वास-भूमय इति सर्वे पथिणो मम aq
प्रस्तुवन्ति ‘all the birds praise you in my presence, saying, “He is an object of
confidence,” where the particle ff is equivalent to ‘saying,’ and the word
विश्चासःभूमयः is not in the accusative, to agree with JWT, as might be expected,
but in the nominative, as being the actual word supposed to be uttered by the
birds in their own persons. In some cases, however, the accusative is retained
before इति, as in the following example (Manu 11. 153): खज्ञं बालम् इति खहुः
“they call an ignorant man ^ काव. But in the latter part of the same line it
passes into a nominative; as, पिता इति रव तु मन्दम् ‘but (they call) a teacher of
scripture “‘ father.” ’
928. In narratives and dialogues इत्ति is often placed redundantly at the end of
a speech. Again, it may have reference merely to what is passing in the mind
either of another person or of one’s self. When so employed, it is usually joined
with the indeclinable participle, or of some other part of a verb signifying ‘to
think,’ ‘to suppose,’ &c., and may be translated by the English conjunction ‘that,’
to which, in fact, it may be regarded as equivalent; thus, Rael Wet वादयति
इति परिज्ञाय ‘having ascertained that it is a monkey who rings the एला; पुनर्
सथे वृद्धिः करणीया इति मतिर् बभूव ‘his idea was that an increase of wealth ought
again to be made;’ धन्योऽहं यस्य रुतादुशी भाय इति मनसि निधाय ‘reflecting in
his mind ¢hat I am happy in possessing such a wife.’ The accusative is also
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 887
retained before इति in this sense; as, मृतम् इति मत्वा ‘thinking that he was dead.’
Tn all these examples the use of इति indicates that a quotation is made of the
thoughts of the person at the time when the event took place.
_ 929. Not unfrequently the participle ‘saying,’ ‘thinking,’ ‘supposing,’ &c., is
omitted altogether, and इति itself involves the sense of such a participle; as,
araista न अवमन्तव्यो Wa इति भूमिपः ‘a king, even though a child, is not to
be despised, saying to one’s self, ‘He is a mortal;’’ सोहाराद् वा विधुर इतिवा
मयि अनुक्रोशात् either through affection or through compassion towards me,
saying to yourself, “ What a wretched man he is!”’ Wa AU: | अयं Wes इति
वनराजिषु आहिण्ड्यते “There’s a boar! ‘Yonder’s a tiger! so crying out, it is
wandered about (by us) in the paths of the woods
CHAPTER X.
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.
930. STORY OF THE SAGE AND THE MOUSE, FROM THE HITOPADESA,
TRANSLATED AND PARSED.
Z गोत oo *~ ie ‘i
i. अस्ति गोतमस्य मुनेस् तपो.वने महातपा नाम मुनिः
‘There is in the sacred grove of the sage Gautama a sage named
Mahatapas (Great-devotion),’
५५ > ४
i. तेनाशरम सन्निधाने मूषिकशावकः काकमुलाद् wet
दृष्टः | ‘By him, in the neighbourhood of his hermitage, a young
mouse, fallen from the beak of a crow, was seen.’
pa ene eee gee (द
ii, ततौ ट्याःयुक्तेन तेन मुनिना नीवारःकणेः सं वधित्तः।
‘Then by that sage, touched with compassion, with grains of wild
rice it was reared.’
iv. तट्नन्तरं मूषिकं खादितुम् अनुधावन् विडालो
मुनिना दृष्टः | ‘Soon after this, a cat was observed by the sage
running after the mouse to devour it.’
v. तं मूषिकं भीतम् आलोक्य तपःप्रभावात् तेन Alta
मूषिको afar विडात्छः कृतः | ‘Perceiving the mouse terrified,
-by that sage, through the efficacy of his devotion, the mouse was
changed into a very strong cat.’
3०2
388 EXERCISES. IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.
vi स विडालः कुक्कुराट् विभेति । ततः FRU कृतः |
FSW व्याघ्रान् महद् भयम् | तटूनन्तर स व्याघ्रः कृतः |
‘The cat fears the dog: upon that it was changed into a dog. Great
is the dread of the dog for a tiger: then it was changed into a tiger.”
fax 9 4
पा. अथ व्याघ्रम् अपि मूषिक.निविंशेषं पश्यति सुनिः।
* Now the sage regards even the tiger as not differing at all from
the mouse.’
vi, अतः सरवे AAT जनास् तं व्याघ्रं दृषा वदन्ति |
“Then all the persons residing in the neighbourhood, seeing the
tiger, say.’
ix. अनेन सुनिना मूषिकोऽयं व्याघ्रतां नीतः । «By this
sage this mouse has been brought to the condition of a tiger.’
२. एतच् BAT स व्याघ्रः सव्यथो ऽचिन्तयत् “The tiger
‘overhearing this, being uneasy, reflected.’
xi यावद् अनेन सुनिना जीवितव्यं तावद् इदं मम
स्व रूपाख्यानम् अकी्तिकरं न पट्ठायिष्यति । «As long as it
shall be lived by this sage, so long this disgraceful story of my
original condition will not die away.
xii, इति समालोच्य ata हन्तु समुद्यतः। ‘Thus reflecting,
he prepared (was about) to kill the sage.’
अ ts मूषि
xii मुनिस् तस्य चिकीषितं ज्ञात्वा पुनर् मूषिको भव
इत्य् उका मूषिक एव कृतः | ‘The sage discovering his intention,
saying, “Again become a mouse,” he was reduced to (his former
state of) a mouse.’ ।
937. Observe in this story: rst, the simplicity of the style; andly,
the prevalence of compound: words; 3rdly, the scarcity of verbs;
4thly, the prevalence of the past passive participle with the agent
“in the instrumental case for expressing indefinite past time, in lieu
‘of the past tense active with the nominative: see 895, with note. ,
932. i—ASti, ‘there is,’ grd sing. pres. of rt. as, cl. 2 (584). Gautamasya, ‘ of
Gautama,’ gen. पा, (103). Munes, ‘of the sage,” gen. फ, (tro): final s remains by
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 389
62. Tapo-vane, ‘in the sacred grove’ (lit. “in the penance-grove’), genitively
dependent comp. (743); the first member formed by the stem tapas, ‘ penance,’
as becoming ० by 64; the last member, by the loc. case of wana, ‘grove,’ neut.
(104). Mahd-tapd, “having great devotion’ (164. a), relative form of descriptive
comp. (766); the first member formed by makd (substituted for mahat, 778), ‘great ;”
the last member, by the nom. case masc. of the neuter noun tapas, ‘ devotion’
(164. a): final ऽ dropped by 66. ९. Ndma, ‘by name,’ an adverb (713.5). Munih,
“a sage,’ nom. 798९. (110): final s passes into Visarga by 63. a.
ii.—Tena, “by him,’ instr. of pron. tad (220). A%rama-sannidhdne, ‘in the
neighbourhood of his hermitage,’ genitively dependent comp. (743); the first
member formed by the nominal stem dgrama, ‘hermitage ;’ the last member, by
the loc. case of sannidhdna, ‘neighbourhood,’ neut. (104). The final a of tena
blends with the initial d of drama by 31. Mbishika-sdvakah, ‘a young mouse,’ or
‘the young of a mouse,’ genitively dependent comp. (743); formed from the
nominal stem miishika, ‘a mouse,’ and the nom. of sdvaka, ‘the young of any
animal’ (103): final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kdka-mukhdd, ‘from the beak (or
mouth) of a crow,’ genitively dependent comp.; formed from the nominal stem
kdka, ‘a crow,’ and the abl. of mukha, ‘mouth,’ neut. (104); ¢ being changed to क
by 45. Bhrashto, ‘fallen,’ nom. sing. masc. of the past pass. part. of rt. bhrang
(644. ¢) : as changed too by 64. Drishtah, ‘seen,’ nom. sing. masc. of the past
pass. part. of rt. dris: final s becomes Visarga by 63. a.
ili.—Tato, ‘then,’ adv. (719): as changed to ० by 64. Dayd-yuktena, ‘touched
with compassion,’ instrumentally dependent comp. (740); formed from the nominal
stem dayd, ‘compassion,’ and the instr. of yukta, ‘endowed with,’ past pass. part.
of rt. yuj (670). Tena, see ii. above. Munind, ‘by the sage,” instr. m. (110).
Néwdra-kanaih, ‘with grains of wild rice,’ genitively dependent comp. (743); formed
from the nominal stem névdra, ‘wild rice,’ and the instr. pl. of kana: final s
becomes Visarga by 63. Samvardhitah, ‘reared,’ nom. sing. of past pass. part. of
causal of vridh with sam (549): final $ becomes Visarga by 63. a.
iv.—Tad-anantaram, ‘soon after this,’ compound adverb; formed with the pro-
nominal stem tad, ‘this’ (220), and the adverb anantaram, ‘after’ (731, 917).
_Mishikam, acc. m. (103). Khdditum, “to eat,’ infinitive of rt. khdd (458, 868).
Anudhdvan, ‘ pursuing after,’ ‘running after,’ nom. sing. masc. of the pres. part.
Par. of rt. dhdv, ‘to run,’ with anu, ‘after’ (g24). Viddlo, ‘a cat,’ nom. case masc.
(103): as changed to ० by 64. Munind, see iii. above. Drishtaj, see ii.
v.—Tam, acc. case masc. of pron. tad (220), used as a definite article, see 795.
_Mishikam, see iv. Bhétam, ‘terrified,’ acc. sing. masc. of the past pass. part. of rt.
bh (532). Alokya, “ perceiving,’ indec. part. of rt. Jok, with prep. द (559). Tapah-
_prabhdvdt, ‘ through the efficacy of his devotion’ (814), genitively dependent comp.
(743); formed by the nominal stem tapas, ‘devotion,’ s being changed to Visarga
by 63, and the abl. case of prabhdva, noun of the first class, masc. (103). Tena,
see ii. Munind, see iii. Mishiko, nom.m. (103): as changed to ० by 64. Balishtho,
‘very strong,’ nom. masc. of the superlative of balin, ‘strong’ (see 193): as
changed to ० by 64. Viddlak, see iv: final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah,
390 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.
^ changed,’ ‘made,’ nom. sing. masc. of past pass. part. of rt. kri (682): final +
becomes Visarga by 63. a.
vi.—Sa, nom. case of tod (220), used as a definite article (795): final s dropped
by 67. Viddlah, see iv. Kukkurdd, ‘the dog’ (103), abl. after a verb of ‘fearing’
(855): ¢ changed to d by 45. Bibheti, ‘fears,’ 3rd sing. pres. of rt. bhé, cl. 3 (666).
Tatah, ‘upon that,’ adv. (719): as changed to ah by 63. Kukkurab, “the dog,’
nom. m. (103): final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah, seev. Kukkurasya, “of
the dog,’ gen. mase. (103). Vydghrdn, ‘for the tiger’ (103), abl. after a noun of
“fear? (814.e): ¢ changed to by 47. Mahad, “great” (142), nom. case, sing.
neut.: ¢ changed to d by 45. Bhayam, ‘fear,’ nom. neut. (104). Tad-anantaram,
see iv. Vydghrak, nom. case: final s becomes Visarga by 63. Kritah, see ए.
vii—Atha, ‘ now,’ inceptive particle (727.¢). Vydghram, acc. case. Api, ‘even,’
adv. Muishika-nirvigesham, ‘as not differing at all from the mouse,’ relative form
of dependent comp. (762); formed from the nominal stem mdshika, and the acc.
of vigesha, ‘ difference,’ with nir prefixed: or it may be here taken adverbially, see
176. 20594, 3rd sing. pres. of rt. कढई, cl. 1 (604). Munih, see i.
viii —Ataf, ‘then,’ adv. (719). Sarve, ‘all,’ pronominal adj., nom. plur. masc.
(237). Tatra-sthd, ‘residing in the neighbourhood,’ comp. resembling a locatively
dependent; formed from the adverb tatra (720), ‘there,’ ‘in that place,’ and the
nom. plur. mase. of the participial noun of agency of rt. sthd, “to remain’ (587):
final $ dropped by 66.a. Jands, ‘persons,’ nom. pl. mase. (103): final s remaing
by 62. Tam, acc. of pron. tad (220), used as a definite article (795). Vydghram,
‘tiger,’ acc. masc. (103). Drishtvd, “having seen,’ indec. past part. of rt. drié (556).
Vadanti, ‘they say,’ 3rd pl. pres. of rt. vad, cl. 1 (599).
ix.—Anena, ‘by this,’ instr. of pron. idam (224). Munind, see iii. Muishiko,
nom. masc.: as changed to ० by 64. ५, Ayar, ‘this,’ nom. masc. (224): the initial
a cut off by 64.a. Vydghratdm, ‘the condition of a tiger,’ fem. abstract noun (105),
ace. case, formed from vydghra; ‘a tiger,’ by the suffix td (80. LXII). Niétak,
‘brought,’ nom. sing. mase. of past pass. part. of rt. 9४ (532).
x.— Eitaé, * this,’ acc. neut. of etad (223): ¢ changed to ¢ by 49. Chruted, ‘ over-
shearing,’ indec. part. of rt. ४ (676, 556); see 49. Vydghrah, nom. case: final s
becomes Visarga by 63. Sa-vyatho, ‘uneasy,’ relative form of indeclinable comp.,
formed by prefixing sa to the fem. substantive vyathd (769): as changed to o by
64. ०, Adintayat, ‘reflected,’ 3rd sing. impf. of éint, cl. 10 (641): the initial a cut
off by 64. a.
xi.— Ydvad, ‘as long as,’ adv. (713. a): £ changed to d by 45. Anena, see ix.
JStvitavyam, ‘to be lived,’ nom, neut. of the fut. pass. part. of rt. ji» (569, gos. a,
-907). Tévad, “so long,’ adv. correlative to ydvat (713.4). Idam, ‘this,’ nom. neut.
.of the demonstrative pron. at 224. Mama, ‘of me,’ gen. of pron. aham, ‘I? (218).
Svaripdkhydnam, ‘ story of my original condition,’ genitively dependent comp. (743)
formed from the nominal stem svardpa, ‘natural form’ (see 232. 5), and the nom.
of dkhydna, neut. (104): m retained by 60. Akértti-karam, ‘ disgraceful,’ accusa-
tively dependent comp. (739); formed from the nominal stem akiréti, ‘ disgrace,’
and the nom. neut. of the participial noun of agency kara, ‘causing,’ from &ri, ‘to
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 391
do’ (580). Na, ‘not,’ adv. (717.a). Paldyishyate, ‘will die away,’ 3rd sing. 2nd
fut. Atm. of the compound verb paldy, formed by combining rt. £ or ay with prep.
pard (483. 9).
xii—Iti, ‘thus,’ adv. (717.e; see also 928). Samdlocya, ‘reflecting,’ indec.
part. of the verb sam-d-loé (559), formed by combining rt. 70८ with the preps. sam
and द (784). Munim, acc. case. Hantum, ‘to kill,’ infinitive of rt. han (458, 868,
654). Samudyatah, ‘ prepared,’ nom. sing. masc. of past pass. part. of sam-ud-yam,
formed by combining rt. yam with the preps. sam and ud (545)
xili.—Munis, nom. case: final s remains by 62. Tasya, ‘of him,’ gen. of tad
(220) Ciktrshitam, intention,’ acc. neut. of past pass. part. of desid. of rt. kri,
to do’ (550, 502), used as a substantive (896. 5). Jndtvd, discovering,’ indec.
part. of rt. jad (556, 688). Punar, ‘again,’ adv. (717.e): r remains by 71. द.
Mishiko, nom. case: as changed to ० by 64. Bkava, ‘become,’ 2nd sing. impv.
of rt. bid (585). Ity answers to inverted commas, see 927. a: the final i changed to
y by 34. Uktvd, ‘saying,’ indec. part. of rt. vaé (556, 650). Mishika, nom. case:
final ऽ dropped by 66. Eva, ‘indeed,’ adv. (717).
SENTENCES TO BE TRANSLATED AND PARSED.
933- Note—The numbers over the words in the following sentences
refer to the rules of the foregoing grammar,
783,
सं आगच्छतु, ताव् खागच्छताम्। आवाम् आगच्छाव ।
ते उपविशन्तु । तो WHAT ते Waray । अहं तिष्ठानि।
gai तिर्हतम् । aaa उति्ठौम । सं करोतु । त्वं कुर् । वयं
करवामहे । स चिनयतु । वम् Safe । ते ददतु । यूथं
दतं | wala एतु | कुच भवान् वसति | यूयं कुचर वर्तय ।
भवान् VATA ते शेरताम् । नरः स्वपितु । ते सवे सुषुपुः
नरो गृहं यौति । qari: किज्िट् भोक्तव्थम्। वयं शस्तम्
ऋअध्ययौमहे | अस्माभिः शस्त्रायध्येतव्यानि । वम् अननं
Wed | Hata नुज्यताम् । चया दुग्धं पीयताम् । यूयं जल
faaa | ae अहं जानौमि तट् युष्मान् अध्यापयिधामि |
at दिवी स्वाप्सीः नदीं मौ Tis मा शब्दाट् fatter
मी मां निर्धपेराधं बधान ॥
392 SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
राचि-रेषे विशचौर्थी शयनाद् उत्ति्ेत् ॥
मा्ती.पिचोस् FAT AAS तपसः Tes DTA ॥
ईरिणे वोजम् VAT कषकः फलं न भरभोति ॥
रार् भूतानां aaa भवंति दिनं च कमोनुष्टानाथेम्॥
वर्हि-शोचं मृद्वी रिभ्याम् अन्तः. शो चं राग-डेषादित्यागेन
क्रियते ॥
न जातु कामः कामानाम् उपभोगेन शम्यति ॥
व्यसनस्य च मृत्योश्च व्यसनं कष्टम् उच्यते ॥
a मृत्योः श्री सिद्यथंम् उद्यमं FATA
afat गाचाणि शुध्यन्ति ada तुं निषि चिन्तादिना
दूषितं सत्याभिधानेन ॥
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
934. Metres are divided into two grand classes: 1. Varna-vritta,
2. Mdtrd-vritia. The first has two subdivisions, A and ए.
Cuass I.—Varna-vritta.
A. Metres, consisting of two half-verses, determined by the number
of SYLLABLES in the Pdda or quarter-verse.
Note—It may be useful to prefix to the following schemes of metres a list of
technical prosodial terms: पाद् = the fourth part of a verse; माता -- an instant or
prosodial unit = a short syllable ; गण = four Méatrés; यति --२ pause; गुरू णग
=a long syllable (—); लशु or S=a short syllable (\); गग = » spondee (— —);
ल्ल =a pyrthic (UU); Wes = ४ trochee (- ९); कग == 8 iambus (U—-); म - ४
molossus (———); भं == » dactyl(— Uv); न = atribrach (५, «+ <); य~ 8 bacchic
(u~—); T=a cretic (- र~ -); सभा anapest (16 U—); त= भ्र, anti-
bacchic (- ~ ~); जं == an amphibrach (\, — <).
Sloka or Anushtubh (8 syllables to the Péda or quarter-verse).
935. The commonest of all the infinite variety of Sanskrit metres
is the Sloka or Anushtubh. This is the metre which chiefly prevails
in the great epic poems,
It consists of four quarter-verses of 8 syllables each or two lines of 16 syllables,
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES, 393
but the rules which regulate one line apply equally to the other ; so that it is only
necessary to give the scheme of one line, as follows :—
oe eee ee |
॥ 1 e ww °°
= > + ` ॐ , छः छ -घखं SS wc । २८ Gee
Note—The mark + denotes either long or short.
The ist, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, oth, roth, 11th, and rath syllables may be either long or
short. The 8th, as ending the Pada, and the 16th, as ending the half-verse, are
also common. Since the half-verse is considered as divided into two parts at the
8th syllable, it is an almost universal rule that this syllable must end a word,
whether simple or compound *.
The sth syllable ought always to be short. The 6th and 7th should be long;
but instances are not unusual in the Mah4-bhérata of the 6th being short, in which
case the 7th should be short also. But occasional variations from these last rules
occur,
The last 4 syllables form two iambics; the 13th being always short, the 14th
always long, and the 1sth always short.
Every Sloka, or couplet of two lines, ought to form a complete sentence in
itself, and contain both subject and predicate. Not unfrequently, however, in the
Ramayana and Maha-bhérata, three lines are united to form a triplet.
936. In the remaining metres determined by the number of sylla-
bles in the Pada, each P&da is exactly alike (sama); so that it is
only necessary to give the scheme of one Pada or quarter-verse.
In printed books each P&da, if it consist of more than 8 syllables, is often made
to occupy a line.
937. Trishtubh (11 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 22 varieties. The commonest are—
I2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7० 4 |
938. Indra-vajrd, -- - = - - = = - = -
I 2 3 4 5 6 त 8 9 10 1
५ ~ - «~ «~ - ५ ~ = |
9३9. Upendra-vajrd, UW —
There is generally a cesura at the 5th syllable.
Note—The above 2 varieties are sometimes mixed in the same stanza; in which
case the metre is called Upajadti or Akhydnakt.
a eR me eed |
u
~ wormwuns
I 2
940. Rathoddhaté, - YU - viv
941. Jagati (12 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 30 varieties. The commonest are—
* There are, however, rare examples of compound words running through a
whole line.
3 E
394 SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 © 1 12 |
942. Vansa-sthavila, VW - ~ - - = = - = - = न
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 70 It 72 |
943. Druta-vilambita, ~ ~ - = = - = = - = न
944. Atijagatt (13 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 16 varieties. The commonest are—
123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 72 13 |
945. Manju-bhdshint, + „~+ - ~ - <= ~ ~ - = - = न
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I0 II 12 13 |
946. Praharshiné, ~ ~ ~ ५ «4 ५ ८ - «~ - भ - न
् 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Io ग 72 ३ |
947. Rudird or Prabhdvaté, 9 - ~ ~ ~ = ~ ~ - = - = Ti
948. Sakvart or Sakkart or Sarkart (14 syllables to the Pada).
Of this there are 20 varieties. The commonest is—
व 1... ||
949. Vasanta-tilakd, ~- - ~ - ~ ~ ~ - = = - ~= - न
950. Atisakvart or Atigakkart (15 syllables to the Pada).
Of this there are 18 varieties. The commonest is—
12345 6 7 8 ~ eecca|
951. Mdlint or Mdnin§ ८ VU ~ ८ ~ ~ - - । - = - - = - =
There is a cesura at the 8th syllable.
952. Ashti (16 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 12 varieties ; none of which are common.
953. Atyashti (17 syllables to the Péda or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 17 varieties. The commonest are—
7 2 3 4 5 6 क|
954. Sikharint, ~ - - - - - ८ «~ ~ «~ ~ - - = <= «~
Czsura at the 6th syllable.
1 2 3 4 | 5 67 8 9 10 |
958. Manddkrdntd, - - - - । ~ = ~ ~ ~+ - । - ~= - -~- न
Cesura at the 4th and roth syllables.
7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Io ^
956. तचरा ~ ~ ~ = ~ - । - - - - । = - = ~= - ~न
Cesura at the 6th and roth syllables.
957. Dhriti (18 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse).
Of this there are 17 varieties, one of which is found in the Raghu-vansa—
1234 5 6 7 8 9 गा 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
958. Mahd-milikd, vO ~ ~ ८ ~ - ~ - - ~ - - UK HU
* The mark ~ is meant to shew that the last syllable is long at the end of the
Pada or quarter-verse, but long or short at the end of the half-verse.
SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES, 395
959. Alidhriti (19 syllables to the Pada or quarter-verse),
Of this there are 13 varieties. The commonest is—
ihe 1234567 8 9 पा 72 |
960. अवण, - ~ ~ ७ ~ ~ ~ - =+ “~+ ~ | -----“ ~
Cesura at the 12th syllable.
961. Kiti (20 syllables to the P4da or quarter-verse).
Of these there are 4 varieties; none of which are common.
962. Prakriti (21 syllables to the Péda or quarter-verse).
12 3456 7 | 8 9 lo111213 14 |
963. Sragdhard, ~ ~ - - ~ -- 1 «~ ~ ~ «~ ~ ~+ - | - ~ - - = -न
Ceesura at the 7th and 14th syllables.
964. Of the remaining metres determined by the number of syllables in the
Pada, Akriti has 22 syllables, and includes 3 varieties; Vikriti 23 syllables,
6 varieties; Sankriti 24 syllables, 5 varieties; Atikriti 25 syllables, 2 varieties ;
Utkriti 26 syllables, 3 varieties; and Dandaka is the name given to all metres
which exceed Utkriti in the number of syllables.
965. There are two metres, called Gdyatré and Ushnih, of which the first has
only 6 syllables to the quarter-verse, and includes 11 varieties; the second has
7 syllables to the quarter-verse, and includes 8 varieties.
a. When the Pada is so short, the whole verse is sometimes written in one line.
®. Observe, that great license is allowed in metres peculiar to the Vedas; thus
in the
966. Gdyatri,
which may be regarded as consisting of a triplet of 3 divisions of 8 syllables each,
or of 6 feet of 4 syllables each, generally printed in one line, the quantity of each
syllable is very irregular. The following verse exhibits the most usual quantities :
I 2 3
a b @ b a ट
== न + | ~ += || = = = | ऊ ~ ५५|| = = | ~न
but even in the ¢ verse of each division the quantity may vary.
B. Metres, consisting of two half-verses, determined by the number
of SYLLABLES* in the HALF-VERSE (each half-verse being alike,
ardha-sama).
967. This class contains 7 genera, but no varieties under each
genus. Of these the commonest are—
* This class of metres is said to be regulated by the number of feet or Matras in
the half-verse, in the same way as class II. But as each half-verse is generally dis-
tributed into fixed long or short syllables, and no option is allowed for each foot
between a spondee, anapest, dactyl, proceleusmaticus, and amphibrach, it will
obviate confusion to regard this class as determined by syllables, like class I. A.
3 2
396 SCHEME OF THE MORE COMMON SANSKRIT METRES.
968. Vaitdltya (21 syllables to the half-verse).
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 © | If 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ^|
Www === we = C= we OPS SS Se eae
There is a cesura at the roth syllable.
969. Aupaéchandasika (23 syllables to the half-verse).
The scheme of this metre is the same as the last, with a long syllable added after
the roth and last syllable in the line; the cesura being at the 11th eyllable.
970. Pushpitdgrd (26 syllables to the half-verse).
1234 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 | 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
५“ eS - 4-- ध / "4 + = wwe Ve Ves ~
There is a cesura at the 12th syllable.
Crass II —Métrd-vritta, consisting of two half-verses, determined by
the number of FEET in the whole verse (each foot containing
generally four Médtrds).
971. Note—Each foot is supposed to consist of four M4trds or instants, and a
short syllable is equivalent to one instant, a long syllable to two. Hence only such
feet can be used as are equivalent to four Matrés; and of this kind are the dactyl
(— vu ५), the spondee (— —), the anapzest (U UV —), the amphibrach (UV — v), and
the proceleusmaticus (५, U ५ <+); any one of which may be employed.
Of this class of metres the commonest is the
972. Aryé or Géathd.
Each half-verse consists of seven and a half feet; and each foot contains four
Matras, excepting the 6th of the second half-verse, which contains only one, and
is therefore a single short syllable. Hence there are 30 MAtras in the first half-
verse, and 27 in the second. The half-foot at the end of each half-verse is
generally, but not always, a long syllable; the 6th foot of the first half-verse
must be either an amphibrach or proceleusmaticus; and the 1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th
feet must not be amphibrachs. The cesura commonly takes place at the end of
the 3rd foot in each half-verse, and the measure is then sometimes called Pathyd.
The following are a few examples:
I 2 3 4 5 6 7
=r ५.८ - ५“ \“ \“- (न + ~ ५“ ५“ A aS a =
५ \“८ -- vow ae शकरः onee: A Tee ee! Vv वः Vw
2 3 4 5 6 ध
द्धं vu SS Sas ~~ “+ ५ ५“ - ~“ ~~ ++ || ~
\८ \“ - भ 8 ४“ ५ - ४ ~ ४ ~ ~= Vv NS Ne —
9 2 3 4 5 6 7
५“ ६८ “~ वी (~ ४+ ५4 "~~ ~ ५4 ६५ ५“ -- ५“ == VW
Wiss ad ~ \~ ५८ "र्ध ५“ ५“ = Vw = =
ACCENTUATION. 397
I a 3 4 5 6 7
== \~/ -- ~“ पा \ \ \ «~ vu Vv न्मी =
I 2 5 6
-- ८“ \~ - - -- \ ९
\ ५ \“ ५८ \ ५ \ ५“ स
973. The Udgéti metre only differs from the Aryd in inverting the half-verses,
and placing the short half-verse, with 27 Matrds, first in order.
974. There are three other varieties :—In the Upag#ti, both half-verses consist of
27 Matr4s; in the Gti, both consist of 30 Matrés; and in the Arydgtti, of 32.
~ - ee
ACCENTUATION.
975. Accentuation (svara, ‘tone’) in Sanskrit is only marked in the Vedas.
Probably the original object of the marks used was to denote that peculiar change
in the ordinary intonation practised in reciting the hymns, which consisted in the
occasional raising of the voice to a higher pitch than the usual monotone. Only
three names for different kinds of accent or tone are generally recognized by
grammarians ; viz. 1. Uddtéa, ‘raised,’ i.e. the elevated tone or high pitch, marked
in Roman writing by the acute accent; 2. An-uddtta, ‘not raised,’ i. e. the accent-
less tone; 3. Svarita, ‘sounded,’ i.e. the moderate tone, neither high nor low, but
a combination of the two (samdhdra, Pan. 1. 2, 32), which is produced in the
following manner: In pronouncing the syllable immediately following the high-
toned syllable, the voice unable to lower itself abruptly to the level of the low
intonation, is sustained in a tone not as high as the uddtta, and yet not so low as
the an-uddtta. A syllable uttered with this mixed intonation is said to be svarita,
‘sounded.’ These three accents, according to native grammarians, are severally
produced, through intensifying (dydma), relaxing (visrambha), and throwing out the
voice (dkshepa); and these operations are said to be connected with an upward,
downward, and horizontal motion (¢iryag-gamana) of the organs of utterance,
which may be illustrated by the movements of the hand in conducting a musical
performance *.
976. But although there are only three general names for the accents, it is clear
that there are only two positive tones, viz. the uddtta or high tone, and svarita or
mixed tone, the an-uddtta representing the neutral, monotonous, accentless sound,
which lies like a flat horizontal line below the two positive sounds. There remains
* In native grammars the wddtta sound of 9 vowel is said to result from
employing the upper half of the organs of utterance, and the an-uddtta from
employing the lower half. In my recent travels in India I frequently heard the
Vedas recited and intoned by Pandits at Benares, Calcutta, Bombay, Poona, &c.,
and found to my surprise that the voice is not now raised in pronouncing the uddtta
syllable. Great stress is laid on the an-uddtta and svarita, but none upon the uddtta
and I was told that the absence of all mark on this latter syllable is an indication
of the absence of accent in intoning.
398 ACCENTUATION.
no designation for the low tone, properly so called, i.e. the tone which immediately
precedes the high and is lower than the flat horizontal line taken to represent the
general accentless sound. The fact is that the exertion required to produce the
high tone (udétta) is so great that in order to obtain the proper pitch, the voice is
obliged to lower the tone of the preceding syllable as much below this flat line as
the syllable that bears the uddtta is raised above it; and Panini himeelf explains
this lower tone by the term sannatara (compar. of sanna, ‘sunk,’ for which the
commentators have substituted the expression anuddttatara), while he explains the
neutral, accentless tone by the term eka-sruti, i.e. the one accentless sound in which
the ear can perceive no variation
977. The expression anuddttatara, then, is now adopted to designate the lowest
sound of all, or that immediately preceding the wddtta or high tone. But no
special mark distinguishes this sound from the an-uddtta. It must be borne in
mind that no simple uncompounded word, whatever the number of its syllables,
has properly more than one syllable accented. This syllable is called either uddtta
or svarita, according as it is pronounced with a high or mixed tone. But if a word
have only a svarita accent, then this svarita must be of the kind called independent,
although it may have arisen from the blending of two syllables, one of which was
originally uddtta, as in तन्वां (for tanu-d, where the middle syllable was uddtta).
A word having either the uddtta or the svarita accent on the first syllable is called
in the one case ddy-uddtta, in the other ddi-svarita ; having either the one or other
accent on the middle is in the one case madhyoddtta, in the other madhya-svarita ;
having either the one or other accent at the end is in the one case antoddtta, in the
other anta-svarita. All the syllables of a word except the one which is either an
uddtta or independent svarita are an-uddtta. Although, however, no one word
can have both an uddtta and an independent svarita, yet, if a word having an
uddtta is followed by an an-uddtta, this an-uddtta becomes a dependent svarita,
which is really the commonest form of svarita accent.
978. As to the method of marking the tones, the uddtta or high tone is never
marked at all, so that if a word of one syllable is uddtta it remains simply un-
marked, as पू; ; if a monosyllable is an-uddtta it has a horizontal stroke underneath,
as at; if svarita, it has an upright mark above, as Hi. A word of two syllables,
both of which are an-uddtta, has two horizontal marks below, thus समः ; and if the
first syllable is uddtta it is marked thus, इन्द्रः; if the last is uddtta, thus समग्नि.
A word of more than two syllables being entirely an-uddtta (sarvdnuddtta) has
horizontal marks under all the syllables, thus W@Wat ; but if one of the syllables
is uddtta, the horizontal stroke immediately preceding it marks the anuddttatara,
as in WTYaTd:, where the first and second syllables are an-uddtta and the third
anuddttatara, the fourth being uddtta; and if the uddtta syllable is followed by
another an-uddtta, this becomes a dependent svarita, and is marked by an upright
stroke, as in वैश्वानरय (Rig-veda 111. 3, 1). Similarly, in a word of three syllables
like चकार, the syllable च is anuddttatara, का is uddtta, and र is svarita.
ACCENTUATION. 399
It should be noted that in Romanized Sanskrit printing and writing it is usual
instead of leaving the uddtta unmarked to treat that as the only accent to be
marked, and to treat both anuddttatara and dependent svarita as an-uddtta or
without any accent at all.
979. The foregoing explanations will make clear how it is that in the Samhita of
the Rig-veda an anuddttatara mark is generally the beginning of a series of three
accents, of which the dependent svarita is the end; the appearance of this anuddtta-
tara mark preparing the reader for an uddtta immediately following, as well as for
a dependent svarita. This last, however, may sometimes be retarded by a new
uddtta syllable, as in feat पतय॑न्तम्, where the syllable प, which would otherwise
be a dependent svarita, becomes changed to an anuddttatara because of the uddtta
syllable त following.
980. But if an independent svarita is immediately followed by an uddita or by
another independent svarita, a curious contrivance is adopted. Should the syllable
bearing the independent svarita end in a short vowel, the numeral 4 is used to
carry the svarita with an anuddttatara under it, e. g. सपस्यवैन (Rig-veda x. 89, 2),
Pa: पवेतासं (Iv. 17, 2); and should the syllable end in a long vowel, the
numeral 3 is employed in the same way, but the anuddttatara mark is placed
both under the long vowel and the numeral, e. g. विभ्वो श्विश्च॑तयो (1. 166, गय),
नचो सपं (tv. 55, 6), argfa: (v1. 21, 8).
9871. It should also be pointed out that the absence of mark is employed in a
sentence to denote an-uddtta as well as uddtta ; thus, in the Samhita of the Veda,
at the commencement of a sentence a horizontal stroke underneath marks the first
anuddttatara syllable of the sentence as well as all such an-uddtta syllables as
precede; the next syllable, if without mark, 18 uddtta ; and the next, if it has an
upright mark, is svarita; but the next, if it has no mark, is an-uddtta ; and the
absence of all mark after the upright mark, continues to denote an-uddtta until the
appearance of the next horizontal mark, which is anuddttatara. In fact, all
the syllables, both in words and sentences, which follow the svarita are supposed
to be pronounced in the accentless tone until the voice has to be depressed for the
utterance of another uddtta syllable.
With regard to the absence of accentuation, we may note that in direct sentences
a verb (unless it is the first word) is regarded 88 an enclitic and loses its accent.
The same rule applies to Vocative cases, which are accented only when they begin
a sentence, and then on the first syllable. Verbs preserve their accent in con-
ditional sentences and in a few exceptional cases.
982. The system of accentuation in the Pratisdkhyas often differs from that of
Panini. The rules given by these treatises for determining the accent when two
vowels (each bearing an accent) blend into one are very precise, but are liable to
exceptions. The following are some of those most usually given: uddita+uddtta
—uddtta; uddtta+ anuddtta=uddtta ; anuddtta+anuddtta=anuddtta ; anuddtta+
udétta=uddtta ; svarita+uddtta=uddtta ; svarita+anuddtta=svarita.
When anuddtta vowels are pronounced with the uddtta tone, this is called in the
400 ACCENTUATION.
Prdtis4khyas pradaya. When the accent of two vowels is blended into one, this
is called praélishta, samdvésa, ektbhdva. The expressions tairovyanjana and
vaivritta are used to denote forms of the dependent svarita; while kshaipra
and jdtya apply to the independent svaritas caused by the blending of the accents
of two. vowels, the first of which has passed into the semivowel y or v.
983. A few compound words (generally names of Vedic deities) have two accents,
and are therefore called dvir-uddtta, e.g. वृहस्पतिः, तनूनपात्, where the first
syllable being uddtta remains unmarked, and the second being an-uddtta ought to
become a dependent svarita, but the third being uddtta again the second becomes
anuddttatara and isso marked. In भितावकूणो both the second and third syllables
are uddtta. A compound (called trir-uddtta) may even have three uddtfa syllables,
as in इन्दरावृहस्यती,
984. In the Pada text where compounds are divided, if the first half of the
compound ends in a svarita coming after an uddtta, and the second begins with
an uddtta, the svarita accent at the end of the first member of the compound is
called tdthdbhdvya.
985. Observe—The accent in Sanskrit is not confined to the last three syllables
of a word, as in Greek and Latin.
Observe. also—Although the Sanskrit. independent svarita is in some respects
similar to the Greek circumflex, it should be berne in mind, that the latter is con-
fined to long, whereas the svarita may also be applied to short syllables *.
* See on the subject of Vedic accentuation, Roth’s preface to the Nirukta: two
treatises by Whitney in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. IV.
p- 195 &c., and vol. ए, p. 387 &c.: Aufrecht, de accentu compositorum Sanscriti-
corum, Bonnae, 1847; reviewed by Benfey, Gottinger Gelehrte Anzeigen, 1848,
Pp. 1995-2010.
INDEX IL
ENGLISH.
(The numbers refer to the paragraphs, except where the page is specified.)
ABSTRACT nouns, 80. xxviii,
xxxv, Ixii, Ixviii, xix,
Ixxvii, 81. ii, ili, xi, 85.
iv, vil, &e.
Accentuation, 975-984.
Adjectives, 186; syntax of,
824-828.
Adverbs, 713-725; syntax
of, 917-923.
Agency, participial nouns of,
579-582.
Alphabet, 1-24.
Aorist, 416-441; syntax of,
888.
Augment a, 251, 251. 2. 2.
Benedictive, see Precative.
Cardinals, 198; declension
of, 200.
Cases of nouns, go.
Causal verbs, 479 ; termina-
tions of, 480; formation
of stem of, 481; passive
of, 496; syntax of, 847.
Classes, of nouns, 78; of
verbs, see Conjugations.
Classification of letters, 18.
Collective nouns, 80. xxxv.
Combination (euphonic) of
vowels, 27-38; of conso-
nants, 39-71; of the finals
of verbal stems with ter-
minations, 296-306.
Comparison, degrees of, 191-
197; syntax of, 829-832.
Compound verbs, 782-787.
Compound words, 733-737;
Tat -purusha or Depen-
dent, 739-748; Dvandva
or Copulative (Aggrega-
tive), 746-754; Karma-
dharaya or Descriptive
(Determinative), 755-758;
Dvigu or Numeral (Col-
lective), 7593 Avyayi-
bhava or Adverbial (In-
declinable), 760; Bahu-
vrihi or Relative, 761-769;
Complex, 770-776; Ano-
malous, 777; changes un-
dergone by certain words
at the end of, 778.
Conditional, 242, 4553 for-_
mation of stem, 456;
syntax of, 891.
Conjugations of verbs, 248,
249; three groups of, 257-
259; first group of, 261-
289; second and third
groups of, 290-362. Ist
cl., 261; examples, 585:
2nd cl., 3073; examples,
644: 3rd cl., 3313 ex-
amples, 662: 4th cl., 2723
examples, 612: 5th cl., .
349; examples, 675: 6th
न्. 278; examples, 625:
uth cl., 342; examples,
667: 8th cl., 353; ex-
amples, 682: gth cl., 356;
examples, 686: roth cl.,
283; examples, 638.
Conjunct consonants, 1, 5.
Conjunctions, 727; syntax
of, 912.
3 F
Consonants, 1; method of
writing, 4; conjunct, 5;
pronunciation of,12; com-
bination of, 39-73-
Declension; general obser-
vations, 88-101; of 1st
class of nouns in a, ¢, £
103-109; of 2nd and 3rd
classes 11 2 and ४, 110-122;
of nouns in ¢ and ४, 123-
126; of 4th class in ४,
127-1303; of nouns in ai,
0, au, 131-1343 of 5th
class in ¢ and d, 136-1453
of 6th class in an and in,
146-162; of 7th class in
as, is, and us, 163-1715
of 8th class in any other
consonant, 172-183.
Defective nouns, 184, 185.
Demonstrative
221-225.
Derivative verbs, 460-522.
Derivatives, primary and
secondary, 79.
Desiderative verbs, 4098 ;
terminations of, 499 ; for-
pronouns,
mation of stem, 500; cau-
sal form of, 506; nouns,
80. 1; adjectives, 82. vii,
824.
Euphonic combination of
vowels, 27-38; of conso-
nants, 39-71.
Frequentative verbs, 507;
Atmane-pada frequenta-
tives, 509 ; Parasmai-pada
402
frequentatives,514; nouns,
80. i.
Future, first and second,
386; formation of stem,
388 ; syntax of, 886, 887.
Genders of nouns, 89.
General tenses, 248, 363-456.
Hard consonants, 18. a. 8,
20. 6, 39.
Imperative, 241; termina-
tions of, 245, 246; forma-
tion of stem, 261, 272, 278,
283, 307, 330 342, 349,
358, 350; syntax of, 882.
Imperfect tense, 242; for-
mation of stem, 261, 264,
272, 278, 283, 307, 33०,
342, 349, 353, 356; syntax
of, 884.
Indeclinable words,
syntax of, 912.
7123
Indefinite pronouns, 228,229.
Indicative mood, 241.
Infinitive, 458, 4593 syntax
of, 867; Vedic, 459. a,
867. 8.
Intensive verb, see Frequen-
tative.
Interjections, 732; syntax
of, 926.
Interrogative pronouns, 227.
Letters, 1; classification of,
18; interchange of letters
in cognate languages, 25 ;
euphonic combination of,
24.
Metre, schemes of, 935-974.
Moods, 241, 242.4.
Nominal verbs, 518-523.
Nouns, formation of stem,
44, 80-87; declension of,
103-183; defective, 184 3
syntax of, 802-823.
Numbers, 91, 243.
INDEX IL—Encuisu.
Numerals, 198-215; syntax
of, 206,835; compounded,
759.
Numerical figures, page 3.
Ordinals, 208.
Participial nouns of agency,
579-582.
Participles,, present, 524-
529; past passive, 530-
5523 past active, 553; of
the perfect, 354; past in-
declinable, 555-566; ad-
verbial indeclinable, 567;
future passive, 568-5773
of the 2nd future, 578;
syntax of, 892.
Particles, 717.
Passive verbs, 243. a, 461;
terminations of, 462; for-
mation of stem, 463; ex-
amples, 700-702.
Patronymics, 80. xxxv, 81.
vili-x, &c.
Perfect (reduplicated), 364-
3843 (periphrastic), 385;
syntax of, 885.
Persons of the tenses, 244.
Possessive adjectives, 84.vi,
vii, 85. vi, viii; pronouns,
231.
Potential, 241; terminations
of, 245, 246; formation of
stem, 261, 272, 278, 283,
397+ 339 342, 349 353.
3563 syntax of, 879.
Precative, 242, 442; for-
mation of stem, 443-4543
syntax of, 890.
Prefixes, adverbial, 726.
Prepositions, 729, 783 ; syn-
tax of, 916.
Present, 241; terminations
of, 246, 2473 formation
of stem, 261, 272, 278,
283, 307, 330, 342, 349,
353> 356 ; syntax of, 873.
Pronominals, 235-240.
Pronouns, 216-234; syntax
of, 836.
Pronunciation, of vowels,
I1; of consonants, 12.
Prosody, 935-974.
Reduplication, 252, 367.
Relative pronouns, 226.
Root, 74, 75.
Sandhi, rules of, 27-71,
296-306.
Soft or sonant letters, 18. a.
6, 20. b, 39.
Special tenses, 241, 248, 249,
Stem, nominal, 74, 77; for-
mation of nominal, 79, 80-
87; inflexion of, 88-183 ;
verbal, 244; formation of
verbal, 249-517.
Strong cases, 135. a.
Strong forms in verbal ter-
minations, 246. c..
Suffixes, forming substan-
tives, adjectives, &c., 80-
87; adverbial, 718-725.
Superlative degree, 191, 192.
Surd consonants, 18. a. ट,
20. ¢, 39.
Symbols, 6-10.
Syntax, 793-929.
Tables of verbs, 583.
Tenses, 241, 248.
Terminations, of nouns, व,
96; of verbs, 244-248.
Verb, 241; syntax of, 839.
Voices, 243 ; roots restricted
to, 786.
Vowels, 1; method of writ+
ing, 2,33 pronunciation of,
11; combination of, 27.
Weak cases, 135. a.
Writing, method of, 26.
Si or सन् prefix, 726.
च्म augment, 251.
afa i eye,’ 122.
ग्नि ‘fire,’ 110.
अगर ‘ before,’ 731, 917.
we “to anoint,’ 347, 668.
सति prefix, 726.4; prep.,
483. a.
अतिचमू 126. i.
अतिलष्सी 126. i.
थ ‘then,’ 727. ८.
WAT ‘yet,’ 728. b.c.
पथो ‘then,’ 727. ९.
"AE ‘to eat,’ 317, 652.
अदत् eating,’ 141. c.
दस् ‘this,’ ‘that,’ 225.
अधरेण “under,” 731.
अधस् “under,” 731.
धि prep., 783. 8.
सधी ‘to read,’ 317, 367. ५.
श्वन् “a road,’ 147.
We ‘to breathe,’ 322. a.
अनडुह् “an ox,’ 182. f.
अनन्तम् ‘after,’ 731, 917.
We prep., 730. d. e, 783. ¢.
अनेहस् "©, 170.
अन्तर्" within,’ 731, 783. d.
अनर ‘another,’ 777. .
अन्तरेण ‘without,’ 731, 917.
अन्तिकम् ‘near,’ 731.
INDEX II.
SANSKRIT.
AT‘ other,’ 236; HA 238;
OAT 236.
अन्योन्यम् ‘mutually,’ 760. f.
AG‘ water,’ 178. 8.
सप prep., 783. ९.
iT prep.,783.f: adv.,717.4.
MART 833. ५.
अप्सरस् ‘a nymph,’ 163. a.
सभि prep., 730. f, 183. ¢.
अभितस् on both sides,’ 731.
अभिमुखम् ‘in front of, 731.
अभ्यासे ‘near,’ 731.
AT ‘a mother,’ 108. d.
अय् “to go,’ 385. ९.
अच “to worship,’ 367. 8.
WA ‘to ask,’ 642.
अयेम् “on account of,’ 731,
760. d, 917.
र्ये or way “on account
of,’ 731.
अरथेमन् “the sun,’ 157.
अवन् “a horse,’ 158.
HANA * after,’ 731, 917.
अहै “to deserve,’ 608.
WesA enough,’ gor.a, 918.
ल्प ‘a few,’ 240.
अल्पमति 719.
अल्पविद्य 108.
व prep., 783. h.
wat “to despise,’ 75. a.
3८2
अवयान् ‘a priest,’ 176. f.
अवाच् ` southern,’ 176. 8.
अण् “to eat,’ 357. a, 696.
अश् to.obtain,’ “to pervade,’
367. ¢, 681. a.
WIAA ‘a stone,’ 147.
WMA ‘to be,” 327, 364.4,
584.
स् "10, throw,’ 622.
असुन् ‘blood,’ 176. d.
WTA ‘setting,’ 712.
safer ‘existence,’ 712.
aft ‘a pone,’ 122.
WBE ‘we,’ 218.
अह् ‘to say,” 384. ¢.
संहन् ˆ 2 day,’ 156.
‘AT prefix, 726.6; prep., 730,
730. a. b, 783.4.
खार “to stretch,’ 385.
WTAwRT 126. i.
AAR ‘consisting of,’ 769.
h, 774.
त्मन् ‘soul,’ “self,” 147,
232.
आदि ‘beginning with,’ ‘et
cetera,’ 764, 772.
आदिक or साद्य (= सादि)
764. 8.
अप् (10 obtain,’ 351, 364. a,
681.
404
समारभ्य ‘beginning from,’
792, 925.
‘ATS ‘tawny,’ 126. f.
सशिस् ‘a blessing,’ 166.
ATA ‘to sit,’ 317; with pres.
part., 877.
ड् ‘to go,’ 310, 367. a, 645.
इ inserted, 391-415.
इतर ‘ other,’ 236.
इति ‘so,’ 927-929.
इद्म् this,’ 224.
FY ‘to kindle,” 347.
इयत् “so much,” 234. 8.
इष् ‘to wish,’ 282, 367, 637.
sy “to see,’ 60.
डैड “to praise,’ 325.
seu “so like,’ 234.
डण् to rule,’ 325. a, 385. a.
ईषत् ‘a little,’ 717. d, 726.0.
Tq “to move,’ 367.
उतं ‘also,’ 717. h, 727. 4.
उत्तम, TAT 295.
TAU or उत्तरेण 4731.
उत्यत्टचश्ुस् 166. c.
उट् prep., 783. j.
wea ‘northern,’ 176. 5.
उहिश्य ‘with reference to,’
924.
उन्द् ‘to moisten,’ 347.
उप prep., 783. k.
उपरि ‘above,’ 731, 917.
उपानह् “a shoe,’ 183.
उभ, उभय ‘both,’ 238.
TWAT Venus,’ 170.
उष् to burn,’ 385. ९.
afane a metre, 182. 8.
उष्मन् ‘ the hot season,’ 147.
a ‘strength,’ 146. h.
INDEX II.—Sansxrit.
aq “to cover,’ 316, 374+ J
ऊध्वेम् ‘above,’ 731, 917-
ऋ ‘to go,’ 334, 374.2
WTS “to go,’ 381. a.
"IT ‘to go,’ 684.
च्छते ‘except,’ 731.
ऋत्विज् a priest,” 176. ९.
ऋध् ‘to flourish,’ 367.5, 680.
apy fere ‘Indra,’ 162.
AU‘ to go,’ 358.
शक ‘one,’ 200; CHA 236;
OAT 238.
एतद् “this,” 223.
zs to increase,’ 600.
स्रोम् “the syllable Om,’ 712.
कतिचिद् “a few,’ 230.
कथ् ‘to say,’ 286. a, 643.
कनीयस्, कनिष्ठ 194.
कम् to love,’ 440. a.
कमेन् ‘an action,” 152.
कश्चिद् “any one,’ 228.
का prefix, 726. 6.
काम ‘desirous,’ with inf.,
847.
कारणात् on account of,’ 731.
कारिन् ‘ doer,’ 159. Obs.
कास् ‘to shine,’ 385. ९.
किन्तु ‘but,’ 728. a.
किम् ‘who?’ ‘what?’ 227.
किम् ‘why?’ एय.
कियत् ‘how many,’ 234. 8.
@ prefix, 726. ५.
Fr ‘to pain,’ 360.
कुमार् ‘to play,’ 75. a.
कुमाणी ‘a girl,” 107.
@IT १. ‘a lotus,’ 137.
ae “to play,’ 271.4.
कू ‘to sound,’ 358. a.
कृ ‘to do,’ 355, 366, 369,
682, 683, 701.
कृत् to cut,’ 281.
कृतवत् ‘who made,’ 140. a. 2.
कृते * on account of,’ 731.
Frag ‘times,’ 723. a.
कृष् ‘to draw,’ 606.
कृ “to scatter,’ 280, 627.
क् ‘to hurt,’ 358.
कृत् ' ० celebrate,’ 287-
FA‘ to make,’ 263.
ais fa‘ any one,” 229.
क्री ‘ to buy,’ 374. < 689.
Wa ‘a curlew,’ 176. 0.
VE ‘a jackal,’ 128. ¢, 185.
fast‘ to harass,’ 697.
WT ‘to kill,” 684, 685.
Wa‘a charioteer,’ 128. d.
क्षिण् to kill,’ 684.
सिप् ‘to throw,’ 274, 279,
635; freq., 710.
छु ‘to sneeze,’ 392. a.
BPA ‘to agitate,” 694.
wy ‘to sharpen,’ 392. a.
खन् ‘to dig,’ 376.
खत्पु asweeper,’126.5, 190.
fag “to vex,’ 281.
ख्या ‘to tell,” 437. 6.
गत ‘ gone,’ at end of comps.,
739. a. b.
गतभी ‘ fearless,’ 126. A.
गम् “to go,’ 270, 376, 602;
freq., 709.
गरीयस् ‘heavier,’ 194.
गिर् ‘ speech,’ 180.
गुप् to protect,’ 271.
गुहू ‘to conceal,’ 270. 6, 609.
TL‘ to evacuate,’ 430.
71‘ to sound,’ 358,
to sing,’268, 373.d,595.a.
गो ०४ cow,’ 133.
गोर् “cow-keeper,’ 181. 6,
गोरी “the goddess,” 124.
WY ‘to tie,’ 360, 375. h, 693.
ग्रस् ‘to swallow,’ 286.
ग्रह् ‘to take, 359, 699;
freq., 711.
ग्रामणी 126. d.
गे “to be weary,’ 268, 593. 5.
घस् ‘to eat,’ 377.
qa “to proclaim,’ 643. a.
YM (10 shine,’ 684. = `
भ्रा ‘to smell,’ 269, 588.
च ‘and,’ 727, 9712.
चकास् ‘to shine,’ 75.0, 329.
TATA ‘brilliant,’ 164. 5.
“TR “to speak,’ 326.
Fay “eye,” 165. a.
चुर् (णप, 203.
चनस् ‘food,’ 712.
AEA “the moon,’ 163.
चमू ‘a host,’ 726.
चर् ‘one who goes,’ 180.
चमेन् ‘leather,’ 153.
ae “to move,’ 602. b.
चि ‘to gather,’ 350, 374, 583.
चिकीषे “desirous of doing,’
166. a.
faafae “a painter,’ 175.4.
चिन्त् ‘to think,’ 641.
चुर् “to steal,’ 284, 638, 639.
चेद् ‘if,’ 727.6 95.
स्यन् “a pretext,’ 153.
Fag ‘to cut,’ 667.
छर् “to cut,’ 390. a.
WA ‘to eat,’ 310.Obs., 322.4.
INDEX II.—Sansxair.
STH‘ the world,’ 142. a.
जन् “to be born,’ 246, 376,
424. a, 617.4.
‘to produce,’ 339, 666.5.
जन्मन् ‘birth,’ 153.
जरस् ‘decay,’ 171, 185.
WUT 126. d.
जागृ “to be awake,’ 75. a,
310. a, 374. p, 392. d.
जाग्रत् watching,’ 141. a.
जिं ‘to conquer,’ 263, 374. 8,
590.
जिगदिस् 166. a.
जी व् ‘to live,’ 267, 603.
WRT sacrificing,’ 141. ¢.
जु “to grow old,’ 277, 358,
375: £ 4378.
ज्ञा ‘to know,’ 361, 688.
ज्या ‘to grow old,’ 359. a.
BT ‘to fly,’ 274, 392.
TAT ‘a carpenter,’ 148.
ततस् ‘then,’ 719, 724. f.
Wat ‘thus,’ 727. 8.
तट् ‘he,’ ‘that,’ 220, 221.
तन् tostretch,’354, 583,684.
तनु ‘thin,’ 118, 119. a.
Wat ‘a lute-string,’ 124.
तप् ‘to burn,’ 600. a.
तरी ‘a boat,’ 124.
ATEM “such like,’ 234.
तादूशम् “so,” 807. a, 920. a.
तावत् “so many,’ 234, 801,
838, 876.
Fay 176. b.
तु ‘but,’ 728. a, 914.
तुट् ‘to strike,’ 279, 634.
quae “Indra,’ 182. e.
YU ‘to eat grass,’ 684.
405
TY ‘to be satisfied,’ 618.
FE ‘to kill,” 348, 674.
तु ‘to cross,’ 364, 374. r.
त्यज् “to abandon,’ 596.
त्यद् “he,” ‘that,’ 222,
Ta ‘three,’ 202.
तुट् ‘to break,’ 390. a.
a “to preserve,’ 268.
त्वद् ‘thou,’ 219.
त्वदीय thine,’ 231.
त्वष्ट ‘a carpenter,’ 128. d.
qm “to bite,’ 240. d.
दक्षिणात् or दक्षिणेन ‘to the
south,’ 731, 914.
TWIT 760. ९.
ददत् ‘giving,’ 141. a.
दधि ‘ghee,’ 122.
दधृष् ‘impudent,’ 181.
दम् “to be tamed,’ 275.
दय् “to pity,’ 385. ९.
दरिद्रा ‘to be poor,’ 4s. a,
318, 385.
दह् ‘to burn,’ 610.
दा ‘to give,’ 335, 663, 700.
दातु ‘a giver,’ 127, 129. 8,
दामन् ‘a string,’ 153.
दिव् “to play,’ 245.
दिव् “sky,’ 180. 6.
दिवन् “a day,’ 156. a.
दिश् “to point out,’ 279,
439. ० 583.
दिश् ‘a quarter of the sky,’
181.
दिह् ‘to anoint,’ 659.
दीधी “to shine,’ 319.
दुमैनस् “evil-minded,’ 164. a.
दुस् prefix, 726. d, 783. ४.
दह् to milk,’ 330, 660.
406
ge “a 1 182.
न्ध ‘a thunderbolt,’ 126. ८.
ET ‘to see,’ 181, 240, 604.
FAT a looker,’ 147, 149.
= “to split,’ 358, 374. m.
दे ‘to pity,’ 313.
देवेन् 176. ९.
दोस् “an arm,’ 166. d.
द्युत् ‘to shine,’ 597. 8.
द “to run,’ 369, 592.
दह् “to injure,’ 623.
‘GR | one who injures,’ 182.
Fire “a door,’ 180.
fz ‘two,’ 201.
हिमातृ “having two mothers,’
130.
FE ‘to hate,’ 309, 657.
fay‘ one who hates,’ 181.
धनवत् rich,’ 140.
धनिन् ‘rich,’ 159, 160, 161.
wafad ‘knowing one’s duty,’
ग्ड.
धा ‘to place,’ 336, 664.
धामन् ‘a house,’ 153.
‘UTa'torun,’ “to wash,’603.a.
भी“ understanding,’ 123. a.
धीमत् wise,’ 140.
x toagitate,’280, 358,374.9,
677.
धु ‘to hold,’ 285.
भे ‘to drink,’ 438. ९, 440. a.
भेनु “a, cow,’ 112.
भ्मा ‘to blow,’ 269.
W ‘to meditate,’ 268, 595. 5.
¥ ‘to be firm,’ gar. f.
नदी ‘a river,’ 105.
A “a grandson,’ 128. a.
नम् ‘to bend,’ 433, 602. a.
INDEX JI.—Sansgrir.
नमस् ‘reverence,’ 712.
नञ् ‘to perish,’ 181, 620.
नह् “to bind,’ 624.
नह् ‘one who binds,’ 183.
नामन् ‘a name,’ 152.
नास्ति ‘non-existence,’ 712.
नि prep., 783. 2.
निन् ‘to purify,’ 341.
निमिनचे ‘for the sake of,’ 731.
निस् prefix, 726. ९, 783. m.
नी ‘to lead,’ 374. a, 590. a.
नु ‘to praise,’ 280, 313, 392.4.
नु “a man,’ 128.5.
नृत् to dance,’ 274, 364, 583.
नू ‘to lead,’ 358.
नेदीयस्, नेदिष्ठ 194.
नौ ^ ship,’ 94.
पच् ‘to cook,’ 267, 595. ९.
पचत् ‘cooking,’ 141.
War ‘five,’ 204.
पत् ` to fall,’ 441, 597. °.
पिं ‘a lord,’ 227.
पथिन् “a road,’ 162.
पट् “to go,” 424. 9.
पपी ‘the sun,’ 126. f.
परतस् ‘behind,’ 731.
परम् ‘after,’ 731.
परमक्री 126. 0.
परस्परम् ` mutually,’ 760. f.
UT prep., 783. n.
परि prep., 783. 9.
पण्मृन् “a cleanser,’ 176. ९.
परिव्राज् 176. e.
परेण ‘after,’ 731.
पश्चात् ‘after,’ 731.
पा ‘to drink,’ 269, 589.
पा ‘to protect,’ 317.
UIT * pale,’ 187.
पाट् “a foot,’ 145.
पाप्मन् ‘sin,’ 147.
चारे ‘onthe further side,’ 731.
पिण्ग्रस् 164.0.
fag ‘a father,’ 127, 128.
पिपस् “desirous of cooking,’
181. क.
पिपासु ‘thirsty,’ 118.
fast ‘to form,’ 281.
पीवन् ‘fat,’ 147, 149.
पुंस् “a male,’ 169.
पुद् “to embrace,’ 390. a.
पुण्य ‘holy,’ 191.
GARI ‘born again,’ 126. ¢.
JUUAT* preceded by,’ 777. d.
पुरतस् or पुरस् ˆ before,’ 731.
पुरूष ‘a man,’ 107.
पुणेडाश् “a priest,’ 181. a.
पुष् ‘to nourish,’ 357. a, 698;
“to be nourished,’ 621.
पू ‘to purify,’ 358, 364, 583.
Wa or YAR "preceded by,’
‘with,’ 777.4.
पू्वैम् “before,” 731.
पूषन् “the sun,’ 157.
पृषत् ` a deer,” 142. a.
Y or YE ‘to fill,’ 358, 374. m,
640.
पे ‘to grow fat,’ 373.7, 395.0.
W prep., 783. p.
WS ‘to ask,’ 282, 381, 631.
प्रति prep., 730. ०, 783. ¶.
Wey ‘western,’ 176. 5.
प्रधी ‘superior understand-
ing,’ 126. g.
प्रभृति 731, 764. ०, 792.
WTA ‘quiet,’ 179. a.
प्र्वाह् ‘a steer,” 182. c.
प्राक् “before,717.f,731,917-
UTS ‘an asker,’ 176.
प्राच् eastern,’ 176. 5.
प्राच् ‘worshipping,’ 176. ०.
fara ‘ dear,’ 187.
प्री ‘to please,’ 282, 358.2, 690.
WaT ‘love,’ 183.
बन्ध् “to bind,’ 360, 692.
afesy ‘strongest,’ 193.
बत्ती यस् ‘stronger,’ 167, 193.
aga 134. a, 190.
wet ‘rich,’ 134. a, 190.
ATAART 126. i.
बुध् ‘to know,’ 262, 364;
cl. 1. 583; cl. 4. 614.
बुध् ‘one who knows,’ 177.
वुद्या ‘under the idea,’ 809. b.
WAS 157.
‘A ‘to speak,’ 314, 649.
aa “to eat,’ 643. 8.
Wz ‘to break,’ 347, 669.
way ‘your Honour,’ 143, 233.
भवदीव “yours,” 231.
भस् “to shine,’ 340.
भानु ‘the sun,’ 110.
HITATE 182. ०.
भाया ‘a wife,’ 107.
भाष् “to speak,’ 606. a.
fiver ‘to beg,’ 267.
fire ‘to break,’298.c,343,583-
भी ‘to fear,’ 333, 666.
भी ‘ fear,’ 123. 4.
भीरू ‘timid, 118. a, 187.
भुज् ‘to eat,’ 346, 668. a.
शरुवर् “sky,” 712.
भ्रू ‘to be,’ 263, 374. ‰ 585,
586 ; caus., 7033 desid.,
705; freq., 706, 707-
INDEX II.—Sansxreit.
WZ‘ the earth,’ 125. a.
भूषति ‘a king,’ 121.
भर् ‘earth,’ 712.
भु ‘to bear,’ 332, 369, 583.
भू" ४0 bear,’ to blame,” 358.
भ्रंश् ‘to fall,’ 276.
WRI ‘to fry,’ 282, 381, 632.
भरन्न् ' one who fries,’ 176. 9.
श्रम् “to wander,’ 278, 3785-9.
भरान् “to shine,’ 375. i.
YTS ‘to shine,’ 375. ४.
WT ‘to fear,’ 358.
मघवन् ‘Indra,’ 155. ¢.
FHT ` {0 be immersed,’ 633.
मति ‘the mind,’ 112.
मथिन् ‘a churning-stick,’162.
मट् ‘to be mad,’ 275.
मद् ^, 218.
मदीय ‘mine,’ 231.
मधु ‘honey,’ 114.
मध्ये ‘in the middle,’ 731.
मन् ‘to imagine,’ 617, 684.
मनस् ‘the mind,’ 164.
मन्य् “to churn,’ 360, 693. ५.
महत् ‘great,’ 142.
महामनस् ° magnanimous,’
164. a.
महाराज ‘agreat king,’ 151.4.
मा ‘to measure,’ 274, 338,
664. a.
AT ‘not,’ in prohibition, 882,
889.
Al स्म 242. a.
मांसश्ुन् “flesh-eater,’ 176.
मात" merely,’ ‘even,’ 919.
मामक ‘my,’ 231.4.
मामकीन mine,” 231. a.
fae “to be viscid,’ 277.
407
मुच् ‘to let go,’ 281, 628.
मुह् “to be troubled,’ 612.
मुह् ‘foolish,’ 182.
मूधेन् “the head,’ 147.
मू ‘to die,’ 280, 626.
मृग ‘a deer,’ 107.
भृन् ‘to cleanse,’ 321, 651.
मृदु ‘tender,’ 118. a, 187.
मृज् one who touches,’ 181.
मृष् ‘one who endures,’ 181.
मेधाविन् “intellectual,’ 159.
स्रा ‘to repeat over,’ 269.
B ‘to fade,’ 268, 374, 595-0.
यकृत् ‘the liver,’ 144.
यज् ‘to sacrifice,’ 375. ¢, 597.
यज्वन् ‘a sacrificer,’ 149.
यथा ‘as,’ 721; at beginning
of comps., 760, 760. b.
यद् ‘who,’ 226.
यदि ‘if? 727. ९ 880. a, ors.
यम् ‘to restrain,’ 270, 433.
यवक्री 126. 8.
या to go,’ 317, 644.
याच् ‘toask,’ 364, 392, 595.d.
यावत् “as many,’ 234, 8or,
838, 876; ‘up to,’ 731,
977.
यु ‘to mix,’ 313, 357, 391.4,
583, 686, 687.
युज् ‘to join,’ 346, 6705 pass.,
402.
युवन् ‘a youth,’ 155. 8.
युष्मट् कण्ण 219.
TA “to preserve,’ 606. b.
TA (with खा) ‘to begin,’601.a.
म्म् “to sport,’ 433.
राज् ‘to shine,’ 375. ४.
राज् ‘a ruler,’ 176. ९.
408
राजन् ‘a king,’ 148, 151.
यज्ञी ‘a queen,’ 150.
fz‘ to go,’ 280.
री ‘to go,’ 358.
इ ‘to sound,’ 313, 392. a.
रूट् “to weep,” 322, 653.
रूध् to hinder,’ 344, 671.
रुन्धत् ‘hindering,’ 147. ८.
रूप ‘consisting of,'769.h,774.
z ‘wealth,’ 132.
रोमन् (भा 153.
weit ‘fortune,’ 124.
wtaA ‘lightness,’ 147.
Tae ‘lightest,’ 193.
त्कघीयस् (द्वाः 193.
A" to take,’ 607.
लन् one who obtains,’ 178.
लिख् * onewho paints,’175.a.
क्किप् ‘to anoint,’ 281, 436.
किह “to lick,’ 330, 661.
लिह् “one who licks,’ 182.
त्की ‘to adhere,” 358, 373. ०.
Bq to break,’ 281.
oe “to cut,’ 358, 691.
वच् 'tospeak,’ 320,375.¢,050.
वद् “to speak,’ 375. ०, 599.
वदि ‘the fortnight of the
month’s wane,’ 712.
वधू ‘a wife,’ 125.
वन् ‘to ask,’ 684.
वप् "10 sow,’ 375. ©.
वम् “to vomit,’ 375. d. Obs.
वत्मैन् ‘a road,’ 153.
वमेन् ‘armour,’ 153.
वपोभू ‘a frog,” 126. 0.
AM ‘to wish,’ 324, 375.c,656.
वस् ‘to dwell,’ 375. ५, 6073
“to wear,’ 657. a.
INDEX I1.—Sansxair.
वह् ‘to carry,” 375. ¢, 611.
वहिस् ‘out,’ 731.
वा" or,’ 728, 914.
वाच् ‘speech,’ 176.
वातप्रमी ‘an antelope,’ 126. f.
वार् ‘water,’ 180.
चारि ‘ water,’ 114.
वाहू ‘bearing,’ 182. ¢.
वि prep., 783. r.
विच् “to distinguish,’ 341,
346.
विज् “to shake,’ 341, 390. a.
faz “to know,’ 308, 583;
“to find,’ 281.
विस् ‘wise,’ 168. ९.
विना ‘ without,’ 731.
विध्रान् ˆ splendid,’ 176. ९.
विवस् “desirous of saying,’
181. द.
fast ‘to enter,” 635. a.
विज् ‘one who enters,” 181.
विश्ववाह् 182. ९.
विश्चसुज् 6.९.
विष् “to pervade,’ 341.
वी ‘to go,’ 312.
वृ “to cover,’ “to choose,’
369, 675.
वृत् ‘to be,’ 598.
वृध् ‘to increase,’ 599. d.
वृहत् ‘grea 3 142. 0.
वृ ‘to choose,’ 358. See ¥
वे ‘to weave,’ 373. #.
वेमन् “a loom,’ 147.
Fat ‘to G0, 75. ५, 319.
AAT “a house,’ 153.
व्यच् “to deceive, 282, 383,
629.
व्यतिरेकेण ‘without, 731.5.
aq “to be pained,’ 383.
व्यध् “to pierce,’ 277,383,615.
व्ये ‘to cover,’ 373-9-
व्योमन् "शु, 153.
AA “to cut,’ 282, 630.
WA ‘one who cuts,’ 176. 9.
Gt ‘to choose,’ 358.
at ‘to go,’ 358.
Wa “to be able,” 400, 679.
शकृत् ˆ ordure,’ 144.
शाद् “to fall,’ 270.
शम् ‘tobe appeased, ’275,619.
WA ‘ease,’ 712.
शालििवाह् “bearing rice,”
182. ९.
शास् “to rule,’ 310. Obs.,
328, 658.
शासत् ˆ ruling,’ 141. a.
शिव ‘Siva, ‘ prosperous,’
103, 104, च्छु.
शिष् ‘to distinguish,’ 672.
Wit ‘to lie down,’ 315, 646.
शुच् ‘to grieve,’ 595. ९.
शुचि “pure,” 117, 119.4, 187.
शुचिरोचिस् 166. ९.
शुद्धधी 126. ४.
शुभ ‘fortunate,’ 187.
शुष्मन् ‘fire,’ 147.
जू ‘to hurt,’ 358, 374. m.
जो to sharpen,’ 373. d.
FY ‘to loose,’ 360, 375. h,
693. ५.
fat ‘to resort to,’ 374-6 392,
440. a,
wit ‘ prosperity,’ 123.
शयु “to hear,” 352, 369, 374. h,
676.
We ‘a dog,’ 155.
WZ ‘a mother-in-law,’ 12 5.
शस् “to breathe,’ 322.4.
fra ‘to swell,’ 374. f, 392,
437-6.
श्ेतवाह् ‘Indra,’ 182. d.
स (= सह) ‘with,’ ¶60. a,
769; (= समान) 769. ९.
संवत् ` a year,’ 712,
सकाशम् ' near,’ 731.
सकाशात् ` from,’ 731.
सकृत् once,’ 717. f.
सकय ‘a thigh,’ 122,
सखि ‘a friend,’ 120.
सङ्गाम् “to fight,’ 75. a.
सशुस् “an associate,’ 166.
सञ्न् ‘to adhere,” 270, क, 422,
597. a.
सह् (10 sink,’ 270, 599. a.
सन् ‘to give,’ 354, 424.€, 684.
सनाघ ‘possessed of,’ 769. f.
सम् prep., 783. 5.
AAA ‘before the eyes,’ 731.
समम् ‘with,’ 731.
समीपतस् or समीपम् ‘near,’
431.
सम्यच् ‘fit,’ 176.5.
सरित् “ a river,’ 136.
सपिष्टर 195.
सवै “all,? 237.
स्वैशक् ‘omnipotent,’ 175.
way “a charioteer,’ 128. d.
सह् ‘to bear,’ 611. a.
सह् ‘with,’ 731, 769. ४.
साकम् / with,’ 731.
arTATH ‘before,’ 431,
Bly * good,’ 187.
सामन् ‘conciliation,’ 153.
साधम् along with,’ 731.
INDEX I1.—Sansxarv.
सिच् ‘to sprinkle,’ 281,
सिध् ‘to succeed,’ 273, 364,
616.
सीमन् ‘a border,’ 146.
सु prefix, 726. f, 783. t.
सु ‘to bring forth,’ 647.
मु ‘to press out juice,’ 674. a.
मुखी 126. 9.
मुती 126. 9.
सुठुस् ‘well-sounding,’ 166...
मुदि “the fortnight of the
moon’s increase,’ 712.
मुधी ‘intelligent,’ 126. h.
सुन्दर ‘beautiful,’ 187.
सुपथिन् 162. a,
मुपाट् 145.
सुधू 126. 8.
सुमनस् ^ well - intentioned,’
164. a.
qr jumping well,’ 145. ९.
Afeq ‘very injurious,’ 181.0.
‘to bring forth,’ 312, 647.
मु ‘to go,’ 369, 437. 6.
सून् “to create,’ 625.
सुप् ‘to creep,’ 263.
सेनानी ‘a general,’ 126. d.
सेव् ‘to serve,’ 364.
to destroy, 276. a, 613.
सो ‘ to destroy,” 276. a, 613
सोमपा ‘a 30102 - drinker,’
108. a.
स्तम्भ् "to stop,’ 695.
स्तु ‘to praise,’ 313, 369, 648.
स्तु ork 10 spread,’ 358,678.
स्त्री ‘a woman,’ 123. 6.
स्था ‘to stand,’ 269, 587.
@ ‘to drip,’ 392. a.
स्मुञ् "to touch,’ 636.
aR “to desire,’ 288.
36
409
स्फुद् ‘to expand,’ 390. a.
स्फर" to vibrate,’ 390. a.
W particle, 251. 2. Obs.,
717. f. Obs., 878.
स्मि ‘to smile,’ 591.
स्मृ remember,’ 374.k, 594.
सु "10 flow,’ 369, 592. a
स्व ‘own,’ 232. 2.
स्वक, ख कीय * own,’ 232. ८.
स्वधा ˆ Svadh4,’ 312.
स्वन् ‘to sound,’ 375.
WU tosleep,’ 322. 382,655.
स्तयम् ‘self,’ 232. a.
WAR or सभु ‘self-existent,”’
126. ९.
स्वर् ‘heaven,’ 712.
स्वसु ‘a sister,’ 129. a.
स्वस्ति salutation, 712.
स्वीय ‘ own,’ 232. ८.
ZA‘ to kill,’ 323, 654; freq.,
708.
हरित् ‘green,’ 95, 136, 137-
हविस् ‘ ghee,’ 165.
Zt ‘to abandon,’ 337, 665.
हाहा ‘a Gandharva,’ 108. c.
टि ‘to send,’ 374. ¢.
हि ‘for,’ 727. d, 914.
fq ‘to injure,’ 673.
¥ ‘to sacrifice,’ 333, 662.
इह “a Gandharva,’ 126. f.
‘to seize,’ 593.
हद् ‘the heart,’ 139, 184.
हेतोस् or zal “for the sake
of,’ 731.
Fit ‘to be ashamed,’ 333. 4,
666. a.
FT ‘shame,’ 123. a.
द “to call,’ 373. € 598.
INDEX III.
GRAMMATICAL TERMS, AND NAMES OF METRES.
Ak, the simple vowels,
18, note *, ¢.
A-ghosha, 8, 20. 6.
Anga, 74, 135. ९.
4८, the vowels, 18, note *, £.
An, a Pratyéhara,18, note*,b.
Atikriti, a metre, 964.
Atijagatt, a metre, 944.
Atidhriti, a metre, 959.
Atigakvart, a metre, 950.
Atyashti, a metre, 953.
Adddi, 249. Obs.
Anuddtta, 75.¢; accent, 975.
Anudattet, 75. ९.
Anundsika, 7, 7. a.
Anubandha, 75. ©.
Anushtubh, a metre, 935.
Anusvéra, 6, 7.
Antah-stha, semivowel, 22.
Abhinidhdna, suppression,to.
Abhydsa, reduplication, 252.
Ardha-visarga, 8. a, 23. 8,
Ardhikéra, 10.
Al,the alphabet, 18, 1016, 8,
Alpa-préna, 11, 14.4.
Avagraha, 10.
Avyaya, 760.
Avyayt-bhdva
460.
Ashti, a metre, 952.
Akriti, a metre, 964.
Akhydta, a verb, 241.
Akhyénakt, a metre, 939.
Agama, augment, 251.
¥
Atmane-pada, 243, 786.
compounds,
Ardhadhdtuka, 247. ०.
Aryd, a metre, 972.
Arydgtti, a metre, 974.
Agir lin, Precative, 241.
J, rejected from itha in 2nd
sing. Perf., 370; rules for
insertion or rejection of 7,
391-415.
an Agama,
391. a.
It, 75. ९.
Indra-vajrd, a metre, 938.
It, 250. 3b,
{shat-sprishta, 20.
U, a Vikarana, 250. 6.
Unddi, 79, note *.
Utkriti, a metre, 964.
Uttara-pada-lopa, 745. a.
Uddtta, 75.¢; accent, 975.
Uddttet, 75. ९.
Udgtti, a metre, 973.
Upagitti, a metre, 974.
Upajati, a metre, 939.
Upadhmdntya, 8. a, 14. a,
23. 9.
Upasarga, 729.
Upendra-vajrd, a metre, 939.
Ushnih, a metre, 965.
Ushman, a sibilant, 23,
23. a, ©.
Eka-vadana, singular, 91.
Eka-Sruti, 976.
Ektbhdva, 982.
Eé, the diphthongs, 18,
note *, b.
Oshthya, labial, 18,
Aupacchandasika, > metre,
969.
Kanthya, guttural, 18.
Karma-kartri, 461. d.
Karma-dhéraya compounds,
755-758.
Karman, go, 461. d.
Karma-pravacaniya, 729.
Ka-varga, the gutturals, 18,
note *, a.
Kala, tense, 241.
Krit suffixes, 79.
Kyiti, a metre, 961.
Kritya, 79.
Krid-anta, 79.
Kriyd, verb, 241.
Kryddi, 249. Obs.
Kliva, neuter, 91.
Kvip, 87.
Ga, a long syllable, 934.
Gaga, a spondee, 934.
Gana, four short syllables,
934-
Gati, 729.
Gala, a trochee, 934.
Gdthd, a metre, 972.
Gdyatrt, a metre, 965, 966.
Giti, a metre, 974.
Guna change of vowels,
27-29; roots forbidding
Guna, 390.
Guru, a long syllable, 934.
Ghoshavat, 20. b.
Nit, a Pratydhdra,
note *.
919
INDEX III.—Grammaticau Tres, &c.
Caturthi, Dative, go.
Candra-vindu, भ.
Ca-varga, the palatals, 18,
note *, a.
Curddl, 249. Obs.
Ch, 250. 8.
Cvi, 788. a. Obs.
Ja, an amphibrach, 934.
Jagati, a metre, 941.
Jay 2 Pratyahara,
note *, 3.
Jatya, 982.
Jihvdmiltya, 8.a, 14. 0, 23..
Juhotyddi, 249. Obs.
18,
Jhar, a Pratyahdra, 18,
note *, ९.
Jhal, a Pratydhaya, 18,
note *, 8,
Jhag, a Pratydhara, 18,
note *, ®.
Jhash, 2 Pratydhara, 18,
note *, ९.
Ta-varga, the cerebrals, 18,
note *, a.
Nal, 247. Obs.
Nié, 250. b.
Ta, an antibacchic, 934.
Tat-purusha
739-745-
Taddhita suffixes, 79.
Tanddi, 249. Obs.
Ta-varga, the dentals, 18,
, compounds,
note *, a.
Tdthabhdvya, 984.
Tdlavya, palatal, 18.
152, 250. b.
Tudddi, 249. Obs.
Tritéyd, Instrumental, go.
Tairovyanjana, 982.
Trishtubh, a metre, 937.
Dandaka, a metre, 964.
Dantya, dental, 18.
Divddi, 249. Obs.
Dirgha, 11. f.
Deva-ndgart, 1.
Druta-vilambita, a metre,
943.
Dvandva compounds, (46. _
Dvigu compounds, 759.
Dvittyd, Accusative, go.
Dvi-vaéana, dual, 91.
Dhétu, 74.
Dhriti, a metre, 987.
Na, a tribrach, 934.
Nati, 57. Obs. 3.
Napunsaka, neuter, gt.
Nipdta, adverb, 712. a.
Panéamé, Ablative, go.
Pada, 135. ९; a complete
word, 74; voice, 243;
restriction of, 786.
Parasmai-pada, 243, 786.
Pa-varga, the labials, 18,
note *, च.
Pédda, a quarter-verse, 934.
Pit, 247.
Pum-linga, masculine, 91.
Pushpitdgrd, a metre, 970.
Prakriti, a metre, 962.
Pragrihya exceptions, 38.
Pratyaya, a suffix, 74.
Pratydhdra, 071.
Prathamd, Nominative, go.
Prabhdvatt, a metre, 947.
Praslishta, 982.
Praharshint, a metre, 946.
Prdtipadika, a stem, 74, 79,
7135. ९.
Pluta, 11. f.
Bahu-vaéana, plural, 91.
Bahu-vrthi compounds, 761-
769.
Bha stem, 135. ९.
Bha, a dactyl, 934.
Bhdwa, Passive, 461. d.
Bhvddi, 249. Obs.
Ma, a molossus, 934.
Mazju-bhdshint,a metre,945.
३५2
411
Madhyama-pada-lopa,745.a.
Manddkrdntd, a metre, 955.
Mahd-prdna, 14. a.
Mahd-milikd, a metre, 958.
Mdtrd, 11. f, 934.
Métrd-vritta, 934.
Ménint or Mdliné, a metre,
951.
Mirdhanya, cerebral, 18.
Ya, a bacchic, 934.
Yak, 250. ®.
Yar,
note *, ®,
Yati, a pause, 934.
Yama, 73. 8.
Yar, a Pratyahara,
2 Pratydhara, 18,
18,
note *, ®.
Ya-varga, the semivowels,
18, note *, a.
Ydsut, 250. 8.
Ra, a cretic, 934.
Rathoddhatd, a metre, 940.
Rutird, a metre, 947.
Rudhddi, 249. Obs.
Repha, the letter T, 1.
La or laghu, a short syllable,
934-
Laga, an iambus, 934.
Lan, Imperfect, 241.
Lat, Present tense, 241.
Lala, a pyrrhic, 934.
Lin, Potential, 241.
Lit, Perfect, 241.
Luk, 135. 9.
Lun, Aorist, 241.
Lut, First Future, 241.
Lrin, Conditional, 241.
Lrit, Second Future, 241.
Let, the Vedic mood, 241. a,
891. a.
Lot, Imperative, 241.
Lopa, elision, 10, 135. 6.
VansSa-sthavila, a metre,
942.
412
Varga, class of letters, 18,
note *, a.
Varna-vritta, 934.
Vasanta-tilakd,
949-
Vihya-prayatna, 8.
Vikarana, 250. b.
a metre,
Vikriti, a metre, 964.
Vibhakti, a case-ending, 74,
9०३ a verbal termination,
244.
Virdma, 9.
Vivdra, expansion, 18. a.
Visarga, 8, 61.
Vriddhi change of vowels,
27, 28, 29. a.
Vaitdltya, a metre, 968.
Vaivritta, 982.
Vyaijana, consonant, 20,
Sa, a Vikarana, 250. 2.
Sakvart, a metre, 948.
Sap, a Vikarana, 250. 5.
Sapo luk, a Vikarana,
250. 6,
Sa-varga, the sibilants and h,
18, note *, a.
Sérdila-vikrédita, a metre,
96०.
1101 a metre, 954.
Siva-sitra, 18, note *, 6.
Snam, a Vikarana, 250. 6.
Snd, a Vikarana, 250. b.
Snu, a Vikarana, 250. 5.
Syan, a Vikarana, 250. 2.
Slu, a Vikarana, 250. b.
Sloka, a metre, 935.
Shashtht, Genitive, go.
Sa, an anapest, 934.
Samvdra, contraction, 18. a.
Sankriti, a metre, 964.
Sandhi, pages 23-49.
Sandhy-akshara, 18. c.
Sannatara, 976.
Saptami, Locative, go.
Samdvesa, 982.
Samdsdnta, 778.
Samprasdrana, 30, 471.Obs.,
543- Obs.
INDEX III—GrammaticaL Terms, &c.
Sambuddhi or sambodhana,
Vocative case, go.
Sarvanéman,a pronoun, 216.
Sarvandma - sthéna
135. ¢.
Sarvadhdtuka, 244. ९.
Sip, 250. &.
Styut, 250. 8.
Sut, a Pratyahara, 91, note*,
Sup, 91, note *,
Strt-linga, feminine, 01.
Sparga, 20.
cases,
Sprishta, 20.
Sya, 250. 8.
Sragdhard, a metre, 963.
Svara, vowel, 20; accentu-
ation, 975.
Svarita, 75. ०; accent, 975.
Svaritet, 75. ©.
Svddi, 249. Obs.
Harint, a metre, 956.
Hal, the consonants, 18,
note >», b.
Hrasva, 11. f.
INDEX IV.
SUFFIXES,
Obs.—K. = Krit or Primary (including Kritya and Unddi); T.=Taddhita or Secondary ;
adv.=adverbial suffix. For distinction between Krit, Kritya, Unadi, and Taddhita
suffixes, see 79.
a, K. 80. 1; T. 80. xxxv.
aka, K. 80. ii, 582.6; T. 80.
XXXVI.
aki, T. 81. viii.
anga, K. 80. xxxiv.
anda, K. 80. xxxiv.
at, K. 84.1, 524, 525, 578.
ata, 1९, 80. xxxiv.
atra, K. 8o. iii.
athu, K. 82. i.
an, K. 85. i.
ana, K. 89. iv, 582. ९.
aniya, K. 80. ए, 570.
anta, K. 80. xxxiv.
anya, K. 80. xxxiv.
apa, K. 80. xxxiv.
api, adv., 228-230, 718.
abha, K. 80. xxxiv.
am, adv. ind. part., 567.
ama, K. 8o. xxxiv.
amba, K. 80. xxxiv.
ara, K. 80. xxix.
ala, K. 80. xxx.
as, K. 86. i.
asa, K. 80. xxxiv.
asdna, K. 80. xxxiv.
d, K. 89. i.
dka, K. 80. णा.
dta, T. 80. xxxvil.
dnaka, K. 80. xxxiv.
dtu, K. 82. ii.
dna, K. 80, viii, 526. a. Obs.,
527, 528.
dnaka, K. 80. xxxiv.
dnt, T. 80. xxxviii.
dyana, क, 80. xxxix.
dyani, T. 81. ix.
dyya, K. 80. xxxiv,
dra, K. 80. xxxiv.
dru, K. 82. iii.
dla, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80. xl.
dlu, K. 82. iv.
i, K. 81.1; T. 81. x.
ika, K. 80. xxxiv ; T. 80. xli.
it, K. 84. 11.
ita, K. 80. ix; T. 80. xi.
ttnu, K. 82. ए.
ina, T. 80. xliii.
ineya, T. 80. xliv.
iman, K. 85. iv; T. 85. vii.
iya, T. 80. xlv.
ira, K. 80. x; T. 80. xlyi.
ila, K. 80. x; T. 80. xlvii.
ivas, K. 86. iv.
isha, K. 80. xxxiv.
ishtha, 80. xlviii, 192.
ishnu, K. 82. vi.
25, K. 86. ii.
¢, K. 80. i, 82. xv.
in, K. 85. ii, 582.0; T.85.vi.
tha, K, 80. xxxiv.
tta, K. 80. xxxiv.
2104, T. 80. xlix.
tya, T. 80. 1, 118. ९.
fyas, 86. v, 192.
tra, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80. li.
tla, T. 80. li.
¢tsha, K. 80. xxxiv.
u, K. 82. vii.
uka, K. 80. xii.
utra, K. 80. xxxiv.
una, K. 80. xxxiv.
ura, K. 80. xxix; T. 80. lii.
ula, K. 80. xxx; T. 80. liii.
usha, K. 80. xxxiv.
us, K. 86. iii.
a, K. 82. xvi.
tka, K. 80. xiii.
ukha, K. 80. xxxiv.
utha, K. 80. xxxiv.
tra, K. 80. xxxiv.
ula, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80.
liv.
enya, K. 80. xiv.
eya, T. 80. lv.
era, K. 80. xv.
elima, K. 80. xxxiv, 576.5.
ora, K. 80. xxxiv.
ka, K. 80. xvi; T. 80. lvi;
761. a.
414
kara, K. 80. xxxiv.
kalpa, T. 80. Wii, 774. a.
kritvas, adv., 723. a.
éana, adv., 228-230, 718.
did, adv., 228-230, 718.
t, K. 84. iii.
ta, K. 80. xvii, 530.
tana, T. 80. lviii.
tama, T.80.lix, 191, 211-213.
tamdm, adv., 80. lix.
taya, T. 80. lx.
tara, T. 80. xi, 191.
tardm, adv., 80. 1, 197.
tavya, K. 80. xviii, 569.
tas, adv., 719.
td, T. 80. lxii.
tdt, K. 84.v; adv., 719.¢.
tdti, T. 81. xi.
ti, K. 81. 1;
adv., 227. a.
titha, T. 80. lxiii, 234. ९.
tiya, T. 80. lxiv, 208.
tu, K. 82. viii.
tri, K. 83.
tna, T. 80. lxv.
tya, K. 80. xix; T. 80. Ixvi.
tra, K. 80. xx; adv., 721.
ird, K. 80. xx; T. 80. Ixvii;
ady., 720. a.
T. 81. xii;
trima, K. 80. xxxiv.
tva, K. 80. xxi; T. 80. lxviii.
INDEX IV.—Suvurr1xes.
tvan, K. 85. iii.
tvana, T. 80. lxix.
tod, ind. part., 80. xxi, 555-
tof, ind. part., 80. xxi, 565.
Obs.
tvya, K. 80. xxii.
tha, K. 80. xxiii, 234. ९.
thaka, K. 80, xxxiv.
tham, adv., 721.
thd, adv., 721.
daghna, T. 80. lxx, 777. a.
dd, adv., 722.
ddnim, adv., 722.
destya, T. 80. 1xxi.
dvayasa, T. 80. lxxii.
dhd, adv., 723.
na, K. 80, xxiv; T. 80. lxxiii.
nd, ए. 80. xxiv.
ni, K. 81. iii
nim, adv., 722.
nu, K. 82. ix.
ma, K. 80. xxv ; T. 80. lxxiv.
mat, T. 84. vi.
man, K. 85. iv.
maya, T. 80. lxxv.
mara, K. 80. xxvi.
matra, T. 80. Ixxvi-
mdna, K. 80. xxvii, 526, 527,
578.
mi, K. 81. iv.
min, T. 85. viii.
ya, K. 80. xxviii, 571-576;
T. 80. Ixxvii; ind. part.,
555-
yas, 86. vi.
yd, K. 80. xxviii.
yu, K. 82. x; T. 82. xiii.
ra, K.80.xxix; T. 80. lxxviii.
ri, K. 81. ण.
ru, K, 82. xi.
répa, T. 80. Ixxix.
rhi, adv., 722.
la, K. 80. xxx; T. 80. lxxx.
lu, T. 82. xiv.
va, K. 80. xxxi; T. 80. Ixxxi.
vat, T. 84. vii, 234, 5533
adv., 724, 922.
van, K. 85. ए.
vara, K. 80. xxxii.
vala, T. 80. lxxxii.
vas, K. 86. iv.
vi, K. 81. vi.
vin, T. 85. ix.
vya, T. 80. Ixxxiii,
Sa, T. 80. Ixxxiv.
Sas, adv., 725.
sa, K. 80. xxxiv; T. 80.
Ixxxv,
sdt, 725. a, 789.
si, K. 81. vii.
sna (shna), ए. 80. xxxiii.
snu (shnu), K. 82. xii
LIST OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS.
CONJUNCTIONS OF TWO CONSONANTS.
RR kka, कख kkha, FU kna, क्र kta, FA ktha, RH kna, क्य kma,
क्य kya, कर ० Ai ¢, Fikla, क्रं kva, Aiksha. TH khya, खु khva.
ग्घ ggha, TA gdha, A gna, TA gbha, TA gma, ग्य् 4४० ग gra,
7 gla, TF gua. FA ghna, A ghya, FW ghra, a ghva. = aka,
द्भ १११५, F nga, F ngha, ङु nbha, ST nma.
च ८८2 च्छ cha, FT bra, AT ८० च fy. RT thya,
Bi tra. ज्ज ¢ PR jjha, ज्ञु jira, FA jma, ज्य jya, जं jra,
ज्व jva. WF 1८0, FR ntha, A aya.
ट ta, | ttha. टच् tya, SH thya. F dya, इ dda, F dna,
3 ddha, $ dbha, SI dya, इ dra. CT dhya, G dhra. TE uta,
शद ntha, WS nda, WE ९02, U nna, TA ama, WE nya, TF nwa.
TH tha, A 114; PH ttha, TA tna, TA 1५ त्य tya, च tra, त्व् tva,
tsa. A thna, A thya, | ८८. त्वे ५, ¥ dgha, हू dda, & ddha,
इ dna, ख dba, द्धं dbha, DW dma, D dya, | dra, च dva. HF dhna,
TA dhma, च्य dhya, घ्र dhra, A dhva. “TT nta, न्य ntha, न्द् nda,
न्ध् ndha, A nna, A numa, न्यं nya, A nra, न्व् nva, TEA nsa.
HW pta, TA ptha, A pna, VF ppa, TH ppha, प्प pma, प्य pya,
प्र pra, ख pla, प्व pva, प्स psa. न्ज dja, “B bda, A bdha,
FX ba, AT bbha, A bya, A dra. भ्य bhya, A bhra, ग्व bhva.
FU mana, A mna, FA mpa, TH mpha, FY mba, PA 777, FA mma,
म्य mya, A mra, सु mia.
य्य yya, A yra, 4 yva.
क rka, से rkha, गै rga, a rgha, a rea, S rtha, a 110, शँ 210
a rta, यं rtha, ट् rda, gq rdha, पं rpa, वे rba, a rbha, a rma,
a Tyas वै 4) wt rsa, षे rsha, हे rha.
416 LIST OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS,
GH 1, VT Iga, KS 1९५, स्यं ० SA Iba, रेभ 1५, LA Ima,
स्य ya, A Ua, स्वं wa, A isha, Ce 14.
F vna, AD vya, A vra, F via, a ४८०.
FW 4८८ A sna, VW sya, A sra, A fla, VY fa. FR shka,
© shta, घु shtha, ष्णा 57१०, ष्प shpa, TH shma, ष्य shya, एव् shva.
स्क ska, CA skha, TA sta, A stha, @ sna, TA spa, PH spha,
स्म sma, स्य sya, SF sra, स्व sve, सष ssa. Bq ina, हू ina,
A dma, द्य hya, F hra, & ha, द्भ १५.
CONJUNCTIONS OF THREE CONSONANTS.
EM or ककण kina*, FR kkyo, FT ११५० WA ktya,
Ri kira, BH ktva, FA kthnat, FQ kthya, GU kshna, CA kshma,
छ्य kshya, SA kshva. TA gghya, TA gdhya, ग्ध्व gdhva, ग्न्य gnya,
ग्भ्य ghhya, TA grya. “FHF wkta, FT णम. | vksha, BQ म
दघ ४५० दूय ८7४०.
SA ८५०, WY ८८१५० च्छु. ८८५, च्छ ८८८. FS sna,
S34 "८. FA १५4०, ज्चु १८००५, ज्यं nchya, ज्ज njva.
SA ४० FA ककु ड् १०१५५. ण्टद्य ०४० UY १८५०
एड १०४० WS nara. :
त्की thra, Sl ttya, “A tira, ख ttva, PA tthya, PA tnya, तप्र छम,
त्स्य tmya, च्य trya, च्च trva, TA tsna, त्सय tsya, त्स्व tsva. द ddya,
ZI ddhya, दू ddhra, FF dbhya, Xl drya, BW dvya. भ 1/1
स्य dhvyat. न्त्म nima, क्य ntya, TA ० FA ntva, न्त्स nisa,
QT nthya, FS nddha, FA ndma, FA ndya, न्दू ndra, न्दु ndva,
FEA ndhma, A ndhra, a ndhva, चय् nnya, = nyva.
ष्णा 0४4, & ptya, च ptra, q ptva, q plua, CA psna, RQ psya,
TET psva§. “FIT djya, SA bdhya, SA bdhva, SF] ddhya,
* As in JEU from FRA- † सक्थ from AFT at 122.
{ साध्व्यो; from साध्वी at 187. $ Wat: from WH.
LIST OF CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. 417
A ८०. WA bhrya. TH mpya, TA mpra, FY mbya, FF moa,
Bz mbhya, RA mbhra.
a rksha, ग्य rgya, wa rghya, a réya, खे 11010, ण्यं TRY Qs,
a rita, त्यै rtya, = rddha, a rpya, a rbba, य्ये ryya, ष्ट rshta,
ष्णो rshna, a rhma.
SR kya, FZ ४५ SA Ipta, SA lpya.
च्छ्य stya, BA srya. CBA shtya, छ shtra, षटू shiva, AUG shnya.
स्त्य siya, A stra, FF stva, RW sthna, PA sthya, FA snva,
BF smya, GA srya, q ०४५. हूं Anya, SA hmya, BI hvya.
CONJUNCTIONS OF FOUR CONSONANTS.
PA kirya, RT kshmya. FA म ङ wktra, Ss nkshna,
ङ्म nkshma*, yu wkshya, a nkshva. US ndrya. FX ttrya,
N
त्स्य tsnya, TRY tsmya. “ST ddhrya. A ntrya, न्त्य ntsya,
<
TET nisva, TQ ndhrya. CH ptrya. छ्य rkshya, ma rttya,
<= wer
ay rtryd, त्से rtsya, खं rddhra. SA Iptya, TEA lpsma,
र्प्स्य 5४०. BA shtrya.
CONJUNCTIONS OF FIVE CONSONANTS.
= [4
ङ्य nktryat, a nkshnva f. @ rnkshma §, &F rnkshva §,
त्य rtsnya ||, a rddhrya.
* चाकाह्भुमि Intens. of काद नै ART from ag.
tf दद्भरबोः from Ta § As in SATA, अताङ्खैव, from root az:
x. .
॥ As in TRA.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Page 29, line 27, for ‘260. a’ read ‘251. a’
2
40,
43>
81,
118,
1
158,
177;
268,
last line, dele note +
line 19, for “304. a’ read ‘304. 6’
५ 15, for ‘257. a’ read ‘25477
५, 4, for उत् read उदू
+, 33, for ‘bases’ read ‘stems’
»» 27, for “by 51” read “by 50. a’
» 5, for ‘bases’ read ‘stems’
» 2 from below, for ‘667’ read ‘666.
6?
८८
^ ta
प
+;
wae. ~
£ नः
a
pes
0
५५
one
ur
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11